Q 01 Cpu

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
(Always read these instructions before using this equipment.)
Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual
carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly.
In this manual, the safety instructions are ranked as "DANGER" and "CAUTION".
DANGER Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,

resulting in death or severe injury.
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,

CAUTION resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage.
Note that the CAUTION level may lead to a serious consequence according to the circumstances.
Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety.
Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user.
A-1
[Design Precautions]
DANGER
Install a safety circuit external to the programmable controller that keeps the entire system safe even
when there are problems with the external power supply or the programmable controller. Otherwise,
trouble could result from erroneous output or erroneous operation.
(1) Outside the programmable controller, construct mechanical damage preventing interlock circuits
such as emergency stop, protective circuits, positioning upper and lower limits switches and
interlocking forward/reverse operations.
(2) When the programmable controller detects the following problems,
it will stop calculation and turn off all output in the case of (a).
In the case of (b), it will hold or turn off all output according to the parameter setting.
Note that the AnS/A series module will turn off the output in either of cases (a) and (b).
Q series module AnS/A series module

(a) The power supply module has
over current protection
Output OFF Output OFF
equipment and over voltage
protection equipment.
(b) The CPU module self-diagnosis Hold or turn off all
functions, such as the watchdog output according to Output OFF
timer error, detect problems. the parameter setting.
In addition, all output will be turned on when there are problems that the programmable
controller CPU cannot detect, such as in the I/O controller. Build a fail safe circuit exterior to the
programmable controller that will make sure the equipment operates safely at such times.
Refer to " LOADING AND INSTALLATION" in this manual for example fail safe circuits.
(3) Output could be left on or off when there is trouble in the outputs module relay or transistor. So
build an external monitoring circuit that will monitor any single outputs that could cause serious
trouble.
A-2
[Design Precautions]
DANGER
When overcurrent which exceeds the rating or caused by short-circuited load flows in the output
module for a long time, it may cause smoke or fire. To prevent this, configure an external safety
circuit, such as fuse.
Build a circuit that turns on the external power supply when the programmable controller power is
turned on.
If the external power supply is turned on first, it could result in erroneous output or erroneous
operation.
When there are communication problems with the data link, refer to the corresponding data link
manual for the operating status of each station.
Not doing so could result in erroneous output or erroneous operation.
When connecting a peripheral device to the CPU module or connecting a personal computer or the
like to the intelligent function module / special function module to exercise control (data change) on
the running programmable controller, configure up an interlock circuit in the sequence program to
ensure that the whole system will always operate safely.
Also before exercising other control (program change, operating status change (status control)) on
the running programmable controller, read the manual carefully and fully confirm safety.
Especially for the above control on the remote programmable controller from an external device, an
immediate action may not be taken for programmable controller trouble due to a data communication
fault.
In addition to configuring up the interlock circuit in the sequence program, corrective and other
actions to be taken as a system for the occurrence of a data communication fault should be
predetermined between the external device and programmable controller CPU.
CAUTION
Do not bunch the control wires or communication cables with the main circuit or power wires, or
install them close to each other.
They should be installed 100 mm (3.94 inch) or more from each other.
Not doing so could result in noise that would cause erroneous operation.
When controlling items like lamp load, heater or solenoid valve using an output module, large current
(approximately ten times greater than that present in normal circumstances) may flow when the
output is turned OFF to ON.
Take measures such as replacing the module with one having sufficient rated current.
A-3
[Installation Precautions]
CAUTION
Use the programmable controller in an environment that meets the general specifications contained
in this manual.
Using this programmable controller in an environment outside the range of the general specifications
could result in electric shock, fire, erroneous operation, and damage to or deterioration of the
product.
While pressing the installation lever located at the bottom of module, insert the module fixing tab into
the fixing hole in the base unit until it stops. Then, securely mount the module with the fixing hole as
a supporting point.
Incorrect loading of the module can cause a malfunction, failure or drop.
When using the programmable controller in the environment of much vibration, tighten the module
with a screw.
Tighten the screw in the specified torque range.
Undertightening can cause a drop, short circuit or malfunction.
Overtightening can cause a drop, short circuit or malfunction due to damage to the screw or module.
When installing extension cables, be sure that the base unit and the extension module connectors
are installed correctly.
After installation, check them for looseness.
Poor connections could cause an input or output failure.
Securely load the memory card into the memory card loading connector.
After installation, check for lifting.
Poor connections could cause an operation fault.
Completely turn off the externally supplied power used in the system before mounting or removing
the module. Not doing so could result in damage to the product.Note that the module can be
changed online (while power is on) in the system that uses the CPU module compatible with online
module change or on the MELSECNET/H remote I/O station.
Note that there are restrictions on the modules that can be changed online(while power is on), and
each module has its predetermined changing procedure.
For details, refer to this manual and the online module change section in the manual of the module
compatible with online module change.
Do not directly touch the module's conductive parts or electronic components.

Touching the conductive parts could cause an operation failure or give damage to the module.
When using the Motion CPU module or motion module, be sure to check that the combination of
modules is correct before power-on.
The product may be damaged if the combination is incorrect.
For details, refer to the user's manual for the Motion CPU module.
A-4
[Wiring Precautions]
DANGER
Completely turn off the externally supplied power used in the system when placing wiring.
Not completely turning off all power could result in electric shock or damage to the product.
When turning on the power supply or operating the module after installation or wiring work, be sure
that the module's terminal covers are correctly attached.
Not attaching the terminal cover could result in electric shock.
A-5
[Wiring Precautions]
CAUTION
Be sure to ground the FG terminals and LG terminals to the protective ground conductor.
Not doing so could result in electric shock or erroneous operation.
Use applicable solderless terminals and tighten them with the specified torque.If any solderless
spade terminal is used, it may be disconnected when the terminal screw comes loose, resulting in
failure.
When wiring in the programmable controller, be sure that it is done correctly by checking the
product's rated voltage and the terminal layout.
Connecting a power supply that is different from the rating or incorrectly wiring the product could
result in fire or damage.
External connections shall be crimped or pressure welded with the specified tools, or correctly
soldered.
Imperfect connections could result in short circuit, fires, or erroneous operation.
Tighten the terminal screws with the specified torque.

If the terminal screws are loose, it could result in short circuits, fire, or erroneous operation.
Tightening the terminal screws too far may cause damages to the screws and/or the module,
resulting in fallout, short circuits, or malfunction.
Be sure there are no foreign substances such as sawdust or wiring debris inside the module.
Such debris could cause fires, damage, or erroneous operation.
The module has an ingress prevention label on its top to prevent foreign matter, such as wire offcuts,
from entering the module during wiring.
Do not peel this label during wiring.
Before starting system operation, be sure to peel this label because of heat dissipation.
Install our programmable controller in a control panel for use.

Wire the main power supply to the power supply module installed in a control panel through a
distribution terminal block.
Furthermore, the wiring and replacement of a power supply module have to be performed by a
maintenance worker who acquainted with shock protection.
(For the wiring methods, refer to Section 10.6.2.)
A-6
[Startup and Maintenance precautions]
DANGER
Do not touch the terminals while power is on.
Doing so could cause shock or erroneous operation.
Correctly connect the battery.

Also, do not charge, disassemble, heat, place in fire, short circuit, or solder the battery.
Mishandling of battery can cause overheating or cracks which could result in injury and fires.
Switch off all phases of the externally supplied power used in the system when cleaning the module
or retightening the terminal or module mounting screws.
Not doing so could result in electric shock.
Undertightening of terminal screws can cause a short circuit or malfunction.
Overtightening of screws can cause damages to the screws and/or the module, resulting in fallout,
short circuits, or malfunction.
A-7
[Startup and Maintenance precautions]
CAUTION
The online operations conducted for the CPU module being operated, connecting the peripheral
device (especially, when changing data or operation status), shall be conducted after the manual has
been carefully read and a sufficient check of safety has been conducted.
Operation mistakes could cause damage or problems with of the module.
Do not disassemble or modify the modules.

Doing so could cause trouble, erroneous operation, injury, or fire.
Use any radio communication device such as a cellular phone or a PHS phone more than 25cm
(9.85 inch) away in all directions of the programmable controller.
Not doing so can cause a malfunction.
Completely turn off the externally supplied power used in the system before mounting or removing
the module. Not doing so could result in damage to the product.
Note that the module can be changed online (while power is on) in the system that uses the CPU
module compatible with online module change or on the MELSECNET/H remote I/O station.
Note that there are restrictions on the modules that can be changed online (while power is on) , and
each module has its predetermined changing procedure.
For details, refer to this manual and the online module change section in the manual of the module
compatible with online module change.
Do not mount/remove the module to/from the base unit or terminal block more than 50 times
(IEC 61131-2 compliant), after the first use of the product.
Failure to do so may cause module malfunctions.
Do not drop or give an impact to the battery mounted to the module.

Doing so may damage the battery, causing the battery fluid to leak inside the battery.
If the battery is dropped or given an impact, dispose of it without using.
Before touching the module, always touch grounded metal, etc. to discharge static electricity from
human body, etc.
Not doing so can cause the module to fail or malfunction.
A-8
[Disposal Precautions]
CAUTION
When disposing of this product, treat it as industrial waste
When disposing of batteries, separate them from other wastes according to the local regulations.
(For details of the battery directive in EU member states, refer to Appendix 4.)
[Transportation Precautions]
CAUTION
When transporting lithium batteries, make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations.
(Refer to Appendix 3 for details of the controlled models.)
A-9
REVISIONS
The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
Print Date Manual Number Revision
Jun., 2004 SH(NA)-080483ENG-A First edition
Dec., 2004 SH(NA)-080483ENG-B Addition
Section 12.2.21
Partial correction
CONTENTS, Section 2.1.5, 5.2.1, 5.3, 9.1.2, 9.2.4, 10.3.1, 10.4, 10.5, 10.6.1,
11.1, 11.3.1, 11.3.2, 11.4, 11.5, 12.2.1, 12.3.1, 12.3, 12.6, 12.7, Appendix 2.1,
Appendix 2.2, Appendix 3.1
May, 2005 SH(NA)-080483ENG-C Addition
Section 12.2.22, 12.2.23, 12.2.24, Appendix 2.4, Appendix 2.5
Partial correction
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS, Chapter 1, Section 2.1.1, 2.1.2,
2.1.5, 2.2, 4.1, 5.2.1, 5.2.2, 5.3, 6.1.4, 7.2.1, 7.2.2, 9.1.3, 10.2, 10.3.2, 10.6.2,
11.3.1, 11.3.2, 11.3.3, 11.3.4, 11.4, 11.5, 12.2.1, 12.2.2, 12.2.3, 12.2.5, 12.2.7,
12.3.2, 12.4.1, 12.4.2, 12.6, 12.7, Appendix 1.5, Appendix 2.2, Appendix 2.3,
Appendix 3
Aug., 2005 SH(NA)-080483ENG-D Partial correction
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS, Section
2.1.1, 4.1, 5.1, 5.2.1, 5.2.2, 5.3, 7.1.2, 10.6.2, 11.3.3, 12.2.2, 12.3.1, 12.4.2, 12.6,
12.7, Appendix 1.2
Apr., 2006 SH(NA)-080483ENG-E Model addition
QA65B,QA68B
Partial correction
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS, Section 1.1, 2.1.1, 2.1.2, 5.1, 5.2.1,
5.2.3, 6.1.1, 6.1.2, 9.1.3, 9.1.5, 9.1.6, 10.3.1, 10.3.3, 12.3.2, Appendix 1.4,
Appendix 2.2, 2.4, Index
Aug., 2006 SH(NA)-080483ENG-F Partial correction
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, Section 2.1.5, 6.1.1, 6.1.2, 9.1.5, 10.2, 10.3.1, 12.5.1,
12.5.2, Appendix 1.3, 1.4
Sep., 2006 SH(NA)-080483ENG-G Partial correction
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS, Section 7.1.2, 9.1.6, 10.3.1, 11.3.3,
12.3.4, 12.3.6, 12.7
Oct., 2006 SH(NA)-080483ENG-H Addition
Section 12.3.11
Partial correction
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, Section 1.1, 2.1.1, Chapter3, Section 4.1, 4.2.1, 5.1,
5.2.1, 5.2.2, 5.3, 6.1.1, 9.1.1, 9.1.2, 9.1.3, 9.1.5, 9.2.3, 9.2.5, 10.2, 10.3.1, 10.6.1,
10.6.2, 11.3.1, 11.4, 11.5, 12.2.19, 12.3.2, 12.3.3, 12.3.5, 12.3.10, 12.6, 12.7,
Appendix 1.2, Appendix 2.2
A - 10
Apr., 2007 SH(NA)-080483ENG-I Universal model QCPU model addition,
Revision involving High Performance model QCPU and Redundant CPU serial
No.09012
Model addition
Q02UCPU, Q03UDCPU, Q04UDHCPU, Q06UDHCPU, Q65WRB
Addition
Section 4.4, 12.2.25
Partial correction
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, ABOUT MANUALS,
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS, Chapter 1, Section 1.1, 2.1, 2.1.1,
2.1.2, 2.1.3, 2.1.4, 2.1.5, 2.2, 4.1, 4.2.2, 4.3.2, 5.1, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 6.1.1, 6.1.2,
6.1.3, 6.1.4, 7.1.1, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.1.5, 7.1.6, 7.1.7, 7.2.2, 9.1.3, 9.1.5, 10.3.1,
10.3.3, 10.4, 10.6.1, 10.6.2, 11.1, 11.2, 11.3.1, 11.3.2, 11.3.3, 11.3.4, 11.4, 11.5,
12.1, 12.2.1, 12.2.2, 12.2.3, 12.2.10, 12.2.15, 12.2.21, 12.2.22, 12.2.23, 12.3.1,
12.3.2, 12.3.3, 12.3.4, 12.3.5, 12.3.6, 12.3.7, 12.3.8, 12.3.9, 12.3.11, 12.4.1,
12.5.1, 12.5.2, 12.6, 12.7, Appendix 1.1, Appendix 1.3, Appendix 1.4,
Appendix 2.2, Appendix 3
Jan., 2008 SH(NA)-080483ENG-J Revision due to the support for Redundant CPU serial number 09102
Model addition
QA6ADP, Q64PN
Addition
Appendix 2.6
Partial correction
SAFETY PRECAUTION, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS,
Section 1.1, 2.1.1, 2.1.2, 2.1.3, 2.1.5, 4.1, 4.2.1, 4.3.1, 4.4.1, Chapter 3,
Section 5.1, 5.2.1, 5.2.2, 5.3, 6.1.2, 6.1.3, 9.1.1, 9.1.2, 9.1.5, 9.1.6, 9.2.3, 10.1,
10.3.1, 10.3.3, 10.6.1, 10.6.2, 11.2, 11.3.1, 11.3.4, 12.2.13, 12.2.22, 12.3.3,
12.3.4, 12.3.5, 12.3.9, 12.4.1, 12.4.2, 12.5.1, 12.5.2, 12.6, 12.7, Appendix 1.2,
Appendix 2.5, Index
Mar., 2008 SH(NA)-080483ENG-K Model addition
Q13UDHCPU, Q26UDHCPU
Addition
Section 11.3.1
Partial correction
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS, PRECAUTIONS FOR USE,
Chapter 1, Section 1.1, 2.1.2, 2.1.4, 2.1.5, 4.1, 4.4.1, 5.2.1, 5.3, 6.1.1, 6.1.3,
7.1.1, 7.1.6, 7.2.1, 10.3.1, 11.1, 11.2, 11.3.1, 11.3.2, 11.3.4, 12.3.1, 12.3.3,
12.3.4, 12.3.5, 12.3.6, 12.6, 12.7, Appendix 1.1, Appendix 2.2, Appendix 2.3,
Appendix 2.4, Appendix 2.5, Appendix 2.6
Section11.3.1 11.3.2, Section11.3.2 11.3.3, Section11.3.3 11.3.4,

Section11.3.4 11.3.5
A - 11
May., 2008 SH(NA)-080483ENG-L Revision due to the addition of Process CPU and Universal model QCPU.
Addition
Section 12.2.26, 12.2.27, 12.2.28, 12.2.29, 12.2.30, 12.2.31, 12.5.2
Model addition
Chapter 1, Section 1.1, 2.1.2, 2.1.3, 2.1.4, 2.1.5, 2.2, 4.1, 4.3.1, 4.4.1, 6.1.3,
7.1.2, 11.3.2, 12.2.1, 12.3.3, 12.3.4, 12.3.5, 12.3.6, 12.3.9, 12.6, 12.7,
Appendix1.1, Appendix 2, Appendix 2.4, Appendix 2.5, Appendix 2.6
Sep., 2008 SH(NA)-080483ENG-M Partial correction
SAFETY PRECAUTION, Section 1.1, 2.2, 7.1.6, 7.2.1, 9.1.3, 9.1.5, Appendix 2.6
Addition
Appendix 4
Japanese Manual Version SH-080472-N

This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses.
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may
occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.
C 2004 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
A - 12
INTRODUCTION
Thank you for choosing the Mitsubishi MELSEC-Q Series of General Purpose Programmable Controllers.
Before using the equipment, please read this manual carefully to develop full familiarity with the functions
and performance of the Q series programmable controller you have purchased, so as to ensure correct use.
CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• A - 1
REVISIONS•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• A - 10
INTRODUCTION ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• A - 13
CONTENTS•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• A - 13
ABOUT MANUALS ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• A - 32
HOW THIS MANUAL IS ORGANIZED ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• A - 35
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• A - 37
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• A - 38
PRECAUTIONS FOR USE ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• A - 41
CHAPTER1 OVERVIEW 1 - 1 to 1 - 18
1.1 Features •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 1 - 12
CHAPTER2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 - 1 to 2 - 47

2.1 System Configuration •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2 - 1
2.1.1 System Configuration for Single CPU System••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2 - 2
2.1.2 System Configuration for Bus connection of GOT •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2 - 27
2.1.3 Configuration of peripheral devices•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2 - 31
2.1.4 Applicable Devices and Software •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2 - 36
2.1.5 Precaution on system configuration ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2 - 39
2.2 Checking Serial Number and Function Version••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2 - 45
CHAPTER3 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS 3 - 1 to 3 - 2
CHAPTER4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS OF THE CPU MODULE 4 - 1 to 4 - 44

4.1 Performance Specifications••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 4 - 1
4.1.1 Basic model QCPU ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 4 - 1
4.1.2 High Peformance model QCPU •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 4 - 4
4.1.3 Process CPU••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 4 - 8
4.1.4 Redundant CPU ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 4 - 12
4.1.5 Universal model QCPU •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 4 - 16
4.2 Basic Model QCPU ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 4 - 21
4.2.1 Part Names••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 4 - 21
4.2.2 Switch Operation at the Time of Writing Program •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 4 - 26
4.2.3 Reset Operation ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 4 - 27
4.2.4 Latch Clear Operation •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 4 - 28
A - 13
4.3 High Performance Model QCPU, Process CPU and Redundant CPU ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 4 - 29
4.3.1 Part Names ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 4 - 29
4.3.3 Reset Operation ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 4 - 36
4.3.5 Automatic Writing to Standard ROM •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 4 - 37
4.4 Universal Model QCPU •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 4 - 38
4.4.1 Part Names ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 4 - 38
4.4.3 Reset Operation ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 4 - 43
CHAPTER5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE 5 - 1 to 5 - 30

5.1 Base Unit that Can Be Used in Combination with Power Supply Module••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••5 - 1
5.2 Specifications ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••5 - 2
5.2.1 Power supply module specifications•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••5 - 2
5.2.2 Selecting the power supply module•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5 - 20
5.2.3 Precaution when connecting the uninterruptive power supply•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5 - 24
5.2.4 Cautions on power supply capacity•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5 - 24
5.3 Names of Parts and Settings ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5 - 25
CHAPTER6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE 6 - 1 to 6 - 21

6.1 Base Unit •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••6 - 1
6.1.1 Specification Table••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••6 - 1
6.1.2 Part Names •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••6 - 6
6.1.3 Setting the Extension Stages ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6 - 14
6.1.4 Guideline for Use of Extension Base Units••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6 - 16
6.2 Extension Cable••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6 - 21
6.2.1 Specification Table•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6 - 21
CHAPTER7 MEMORY CARD AND BATTERY 7 - 1 to 7 - 18

7.1 Memory Card ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••7 - 1
7.1.1 List of Usable Memory Cards •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••7 - 1
7.1.2 Memory Card Specifications ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••7 - 2
7.1.3 The Part Names of the Memory Card •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••7 - 4
7.1.4 Handling the Memory Card••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••7 - 5
7.1.5 Memory Card Loading/Unloading Procedures•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••7 - 6
7.1.6 Specifications of the Battery for Memory Card •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7 - 11
7.1.7 Battery Installation into the Memory Card •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7 - 12
7.2 Battery (Q6BAT, Q7BAT, Q8BAT)••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7 - 14
7.2.1 Battery Specifications •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7 - 14
7.2.2 Installation of Battery ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7 - 15
CHAPTER8 CPU MODULE START-UP PROCEDURES 8 - 1 to 8 - 3
A - 14
CHAPTER9 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES 9 - 1 to 9 - 18
9.1 Requirements for Conformance to EMC Directive ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9 - 1
9.1.1 Standards relevant to the EMC Directive ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9 - 2
9.1.2 Installation instructions for EMC Directive •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9 - 3
9.1.3 Cables ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9 - 4
9.1.4 Power Supply Module and Q00JCPU's Power Supply Part •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9 - 8
9.1.5 When Using MELSEC-A Series Modules •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9 - 8
9.1.6 Others ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9 - 13
9.2 Requirement to Conform to the Low Voltage Directive •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9 - 15
9.2.1 Standard applied for MELSEC-Q series programmable controller •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9 - 15
9.2.2 MELSEC-Q series programmable controller selection••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9 - 15
9.2.3 Power supply••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9 - 16
9.2.4 Control panel ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9 - 16
9.2.5 Grounding••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9 - 18
9.2.6 External wiring ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9 - 18
CHAPTER10 LOADING AND INSTALLATION 10 - 1 to 10 - 44

10.1 General Safety Requirements •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 10 - 1
10.2 Calculating Heat Generation of Programmable Controller•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 10 - 7
10.3 Module Installation•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••10 - 10
10.3.1 Precaution on installation •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••10 - 10
10.3.2 Instructions for mounting the base unit ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••10 - 20
10.3.3 Installation and removal of module •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••10 - 23
10.4 How to Set Stage Numbers for the Extension Base Unit ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••10 - 31
10.5 Connection and Disconnection of Extension Cable •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••10 - 33
10.6 Wiring ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••10 - 36
10.6.1 The precautions on the wiring •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••10 - 36
10.6.2 Connecting to the power supply module•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••10 - 41
CHAPTER11 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 11 - 1 to 11 - 36

11.1 Daily Inspection ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 11 - 3
11.2 Periodic Inspection ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 11 - 4
11.3 Battery Life and Replacement Procedure •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 11 - 5
11.3.1 Display of the amount of battery consumption and reduction measures of battery consumption
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 11 - 6
11.3.2 Battery lives of CPU modules••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 11 - 7
11.3.3 Replacement procedure of the CPU module battery ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••11 - 22
11.3.4 SRAM card battery life ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••11 - 28
11.3.5 SRAM card CPU module battery replacement procedure••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••11 - 30
11.4 When Programmable Controller Has Been Stored Without Battery •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••11 - 33
11.5 When Battery Has Gone Flat During Storage of Programmable Controller ••••••••••••••••••••••••••11 - 35
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING 12 - 1 to 12 - 362

12.1 Troubleshooting Basics •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 12 - 1
A - 15
12.2 Troubleshooting ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 12 - 3
12.2.1 Troubleshooting flowchart ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 12 - 3
12.2.2 Flowchart for when the ERR terminal (negative logic) is turned off (opened) ••••••••••••••••••• 12 - 5
12.2.3 Flowchart for when the "MODE" LED does not turn on •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 12 - 9
12.2.4 Flowchart for when the "MODE" LED is flickering •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••12 - 10
12.2.5 Flowchart for when the "POWER" LED turns off •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••12 - 11
12.2.6 Flowchart for when the "POWER" LED turns on (red) ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••12 - 13
12.2.7 Flowchart for when the "RUN" LED turned off••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••12 - 14
12.2.8 When the "RUN" LED is flickering ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••12 - 15
12.2.9 Flowchart for when the "ERR." LED is on/flickering •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••12 - 15
12.2.10 When the "USER" LED is turned on ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••12 - 16
12.2.11 When the "BAT." LED is turned on / flashing •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••12 - 16
12.2.12 Flowchart for when the "BOOT" LED is flickering ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••12 - 17
12.2.13 Flowchart for when output module LED does not turn on ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••12 - 18
12.2.14 Flowchart for when output load of output module does not turn on ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••12 - 19
12.2.15 Flowchart for when a program cannot be read •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••12 - 20
12.2.16 Flowchart for when write a program cannot be written••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••12 - 21
12.2.17 Flowchart for when program is rewritten unintentionally••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••12 - 22
12.2.18 Flowchart for when boot operation cannot be performed from memory card•••••••••••••••••••12 - 23
12.2.19 Flowchart for when UNIT VERIFY ERR. occurs •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••12 - 24
12.2.20 Flowchart for when CONTROL BUS ERR. occurs•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••12 - 25
12.2.21 Flowchart for when CPU module does not start••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••12 - 26
12.2.22 Flowchart for when OPERATION ERROR occurs at the execution of S(P).SFCSCOMR and
S(P).SFCTCOMR instructions. ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••12 - 27
12.2.23 Flowchart for when comments cannot be read at the execution of S(P).SFCSCOMR and
S(P).SFCTCOMR instructions •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••12 - 28
12.2.24 Flowchart for when PARAMETER ERROR occurs at power ON/reset. •••••••••••••••••••••••••12 - 30
12.2.25 Flowchart for when the CPU cannot communicate with the GX Developer•••••••••••••••••••••12 - 34
12.2.26 When Ethernet communication is not available by a method other than direct connection to GX
Developer ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••12 - 36
12.2.27 When Ethernet communication with the target device is not available ••••••••••••••••••••••••••12 - 38
12.2.28 When Ethernet communication is not available by direct connection to GX Developer ••••••12 - 43
12.2.29 When Ethernet communication with CPU module is slow or unstable•••••••••••••••••••••••••••12 - 46
12.2.30 When an error has occurred during MC protocol communication ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••12 - 49
12.2.31 When time cannot be set by SNTP •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••12 - 52
12.3 Error Code List •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••12 - 54
12.3.1 Error codes ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••12 - 54
12.3.2 CPU module errors ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••12 - 55
12.3.3 Error code list (1000 to 1999) ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••12 - 56
12.3.4 Error code list (2000 to 2999) ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••12 - 88
12.3.5 Error code list (3000 to 3999) •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 12 - 130
12.3.9 Error code list (7000 to 10000) •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 12 - 214
12.3.10 Canceling of Errors •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 12 - 222
12.3.11 Error codes returned to request source during communication with CPU module •••••••••• 12 - 223
12.4 Module Change during System Operation •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 12 - 243
12.4.1 Online module change •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 12 - 243
12.4.2 Change of redundant power supply module •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 12 - 254
A - 16
12.5 I/O Module Troubleshooting ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 12 - 256
12.5.1 Input circuit troubleshooting •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 12 - 256
12.5.2 Output Circuit Troubleshooting •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 12 - 259
12.6 Buit-in Ethernet Port Diagnosis ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 12 - 262
12.7 Special Relay List •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 12 - 270
12.8 Special Register List •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 12 - 301
APPENDICES App- 1 to App - 38

Appendix 1 External Dimensions •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• App- 1
Appendix 1.1 CPU module •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• App- 1
Appendix 1.2 Power supply module••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• App- 6
Appendix 1.3 Main base unit ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••App- 10
Appendix 1.4 Extension base unit ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••App- 15
Appendix 1.5 Extension cable •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••App- 21
Appendix 1.6 Tracking cable ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••App- 21
Appendix 1.7 Q8BAT-SET •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••App- 22
Appendix 2 Functions Added or Changed Due to Version Upgrade ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••App- 23
Appendix 2.1 Basic Model QCPU Upgrade•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••App- 23
Appendix 2.2 High Performance Model QCPU Upgrade•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••App- 26
Appendix 2.3 Precautions for Using the High Performance Model QCPU of Older Versions•••••••••••App- 29
Appendix 2.4 Process CPU Upgrade ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••App- 32
Appendix 2.5 Redundant CPU Upgrade ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••App- 33
Appendix 2.6 Universal model QCPU Upgrade••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••App- 34
Appendix 3 Precautions for Battery Transportation•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••App- 36
Appendix 4 Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built-in Batteries in EU Member States•••••••••••••App- 37
Appendix 4.1 Disposal precautions ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••App- 37
Appendix 4.2 Exportation precautions •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••App- 38
INDEX Index- 1 to Index- 4
A - 17
(Related manual).................QCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
CONTENTS
CHAPTER1 OVERVIEW
1.1 Features
1.1.1 Features of Basic model QCPU
1.1.2 Features of High Performance model QCPU
1.1.3 Features of Process CPU
1.1.4 Features of Redundant CPU
1.1.5 Features of Universal model QCPU
1.2 Program Storage and Operation
1.3 Devices and Instructions Convenient for Programming
1.4 Checking Serial Number and Function Version
CHAPTER2 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION

2.1 Basic model QCPU
2.2 High performance model QCPU
2.3 Process CPU
2.4 Redundant CPU
2.5 Universal model QCPU
CHAPTER3 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS

3.1 Sequence Program
3.1.1 Main routine programs
3.1.2 Subroutine programs
3.1.3 Interrupt programs
3.2 Settings for Execution of Only One Sequence Program
3.3 Settings for Creation and Execution of Multiple Sequence Programs
3.3.1 Initial execution type program
3.3.2 Scan execution type program
3.3.3 Low speed execution type program
3.3.4 Stand-by type program
3.3.5 Fixed scan execution type program
3.3.6 Execution type setting and example of type changing
3.4 Operation Processing
3.4.1 Initial processing
3.4.2 I/O refresh (I/O module refresh processing)
3.4.3 Automatic refresh of the intelligent function module
3.4.4 END processing
3.5 RUN, STOP, PAUSE Operation Processing
3.6 Operation Processing during Momentary Power Failure
3.7 Data Clear Processing
A - 18
3.8 I/O Processing and Response Lag
3.8.1 Refresh mode
3.8.2 Direct mode
3.9 Numeric Values which can be Used in Sequence Programs
3.9.1 BIN (Binary Code)
3.9.2 HEX (Hexadecimal)
3.9.3 BCD (Binary Coded Decimal)
3.9.4 Real numbers (Floating-point data)
3.10 Character String Data
CHAPTER4 I/O NUMBER ASSIGNMENT

4.1 Relationship between the Number of Slots and Main Base Unit
4.2 Relationship between No. of Extension Stages and No. of Slots
4.3 Installing Extension Base Units and Setting the Number of Stages
4.4 Base Unit Assignment (Base Mode)
4.5 Definition of I/O Number
4.6 Concept of I/O Number Assignment
4.6.1 I/O numbers of base unit
4.6.2 I/O numbers of remote station
4.7 I/O Assignment by GX Developer
4.7.1 Purpose of I/O assignment by GX Developer
4.7.2 Concept of I/O assignment using GX Developer
4.8 Examples of I/O Number Assignment
4.9 Checking the I/O Numbers
CHAPTER5 MEMORIES AND FILES HANDLED BY CPU MODULE

5.1 Basic Model QCPU
5.1.1 Memory configuration and storable data
5.1.2 Program memory
5.1.3 Standard ROM
5.1.4 Standard RAM
5.1.5 Standard ROM program execution (boot run) and writing
5.2 High Performance Model QCPU, Process CPU, Redundant CPU and Universal Model QCPU
5.2.1 Memory configuration and storable data
5.2.2 Program memory
5.2.3 Program cache memory (Universal model QCPU only)
5.2.4 Standard ROM
5.2.5 Standard RAM
5.2.6 Memory card
5.2.7 Write to standard ROM and Flash card by GX Developer
5.2.8 Automatic all data write from memory card to standard ROM
5.2.9 Execution of standard ROM/memory card programs (boot run)
5.2.10 Details of written files
5.2.11 Specifying the parameters to be valid (parameter-valid drive setting)
5.3 Program File Structure
A - 19
5.4 File Operation by GX Developer and Handling Precautions
5.4.1 File operation
5.4.2 Precautions for handling files
5.4.3 Memory capacities of files
5.4.4 File size units
CHAPTER6 FUNCTIONS
6.1 Function List
6.2 Constant scan
6.3 Latch Function
6.4 Setting of Output (Y) Status when Changing between STOP and RUN
6.5 Clock Function
6.6 Remote Operation
6.6.1 Remote RUN/STOP
6.6.2 Remote PAUSE
6.6.3 Remote RESET
6.6.4 Remote latch clear
6.6.5 Relationship of the remote operation and CPU’s RUN/STOP status
6.7 Q Series Compatible Module Input Response Time Selection (I/O Response Time)
6.8 Error Time Output Mode Setting
6.9 Hardware Error Time PLC Operation Settings
6.10 Intelligent Function Module Switch Setting
6.11 Monitor Function
6.11.1 Monitor condition setting
6.11.2 Local device monitor/test
6.11.3 Forced ON/OFF for external I/O
6.11.4 Executional conditioned device test
6.12 Writing in Program during CPU Module RUN
6.12.1 Online change in ladder mode
6.12.2 File-write in RUN
6.12.3 Precautions for online change
6.13 Execution Time Measurement
6.13.1 Program list monitor
6.13.2 Interrupt program monitor list
6.13.3 Scan time measurement
6.14 Sampling Trace Function
6.15 Multiple-user debugging function
6.15.1 Simultaneous monitoring execution by multiple users
6.15.2 Simultaneous online change by multiple users
6.16 WatchDog Timer (WDT)
6.17 Self-diagnostics Function
6.17.1 Interrupt due to error occurrence
6.17.2 LED display at the time of error occurrence
6.17.3 Error Clear
A - 20
6.18 Error History
6.18.1 Basic model QCPU
6.18.2 High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, Redundant CPU, Universal model QCPU
6.19 System Protect
6.19.1 Password registration
6.19.2 Remote password
6.20 CPU Module System Display by GX Developer
6.21 LED Display
6.21.1 Method to turn off the LED
6.21.2 Priority setting
6.22 High speed Interrupt Function
6.22.1 High speed interrupt program execution
6.22.2 High speed I/O refresh, high speed buffer transfer
6.22.3 Processing times
6.22.4 Restrictions
6.23 Interrupt from the intelligent function module
6.24 Serial Communication Function
6.25 Service Processing
6.25.1 Module service interval time read
6.25.2 Service processing
6.26 Device Initial Value
6.27 Battery life-prolonging function
6.28 Memory Check Function
6.29 Latch Data Backup Function (to Standard ROM)
6.30 Write/Read Device Data to/from Standard ROM
CHAPTER7 COMMUNICATION USING BUILT-IN ETHERNET PORTS OF CPU MODULE

7.1 Communication specifications
7.2 GX Developer/GOT Connection
7.3 GX Developer Direct Connection (Simple Connection)
7.4 MC Protocol Communication
7.5 Time Setting Function (SNTP Client)
7.6 File Transfer Function (FTP)
7.7 Remote Password
CHAPTER8 COMMUNICATION WITH INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULE

8.1 Communication Between CPU Module and Intelligent Function Modules
8.1.1 Initial setting and auto refresh setting by GX Configurator
8.1.2 Initial setting by device initial value
8.1.3 Communication by FROM/TO instruction
8.1.4 Communication by intelligent function module device
8.1.5 Communication by instructions for Intelli. function modules
8.2 Access to AnS/A Series Corresponding Special Function Module
A - 21
CHAPTER9 PARAMETERS
9.1 PLC Parameters
9.1.2 High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, Redundant CPU, Universal model QCPU
9.2 Redundant Parameter
9.3 Network Parameters
9.4 Remote Password
CHAPTER10 DEVICE EXPLANATION

10.1 Device List
10.2 Internal User Devices
10.2.1 Input (X)
10.2.2 Output (Y)
10.2.3 Internal relay (M)
10.2.4 Latch relay (L)
10.2.5 Annunciator (F)
10.2.6 Edge relay (V)
10.2.7 Link relay (B)
10.2.8 Link special relay (SB)
10.2.9 Step relay (S)
10.2.10 Timer (T)
10.2.11 Counter (C)
10.2.12 Data register (D)
10.2.13 Link register (W)
10.2.14 Link special register (SW)
10.3 Internal System Devices
10.3.1 Function devices (FX, FY, FD)
10.3.2 Special relay (SM)
10.3.3 Special register (SD)
10.4 Link direct device
10.5 Module Access Devices
10.5.1 Intelligent function module device (U\G)
10.5.2 Common device for multiple CPU (U3En\G)
10.6 Index Register (Z)/Standard Device Resister(Z)
10.6.1 Index register (Z)
10.6.2 Standard device register (Z)
10.6.3 Switching between scan execution and low speed execution types
10.6.4 Switching scan/low speed exec. to interrupt/fixed scan exec.
10.7 File Register (R)
10.7.1 File register data storage location
10.7.2 File register capacity
10.7.3 Differences in access methods by storage destination memory
10.7.4 File register registration procedure
10.7.5 File register designation method
10.7.6 Precautions for using file registers
10.8 Extended Data Register (D) and Extended Link Register (W)
A - 22
10.9 Nesting (N)
10.10 Pointer (P)
10.10.1 Local pointer
10.10.2 Common pointer
10.11 Interrupt pointer (I)
10.11.1 List of interrupt pointer Nos and interrupt factors
10.12 Other Devices
10.12.1 SFC block device (BL)
10.12.2 SFC transition device (TR)
10.12.3 Network No. designation device (J)
10.12.4 I/O No. designation device (U)
10.12.5 Macro instruction argument device (VD)
10.13 Constants
10.13.1 Decimal constant (K)
10.13.2 Hexadecimal constant (H)
10.13.3 Real number (E)
10.13.4 Character string (" ")
10.14 Convenient Usage of Devices
10.14.1 Global devices
10.14.2 Local devices
CHAPTER11 CPU MODULE PROCESSING TIME

11.1 Scan Time
11.1.1 Scan time structure
11.1.2 Time required for each processing included in scan time
11.1.3 Factors that increase the scan time
11.1.4 Factors that can shorten scan time by changing the settings
11.2 Other Processing Times
CHAPTER12 PROCEDURE FOR WRITING PROGRAM TO CPU MODULE

12.1.1 Items to be examined for program creation
12.1.2 Hardware check
12.1.3 Procedure for writing program
12.1.4 Boot run procedure
12.2 High Performance Model QCPU, Process CPU, Redundant CPU, Universal Model QCPU
12.2.1 Items to be examined for program creation
12.2.2 Hardware check
12.2.3 Procedure for writing one program
12.2.4 Procedure for writing multiple programs
12.2.5 Boot run procedure
APPENDICES
Appendix 1 Special Relay List
Appendix 2 Special Register List
A - 23
Appendix 3 List of Parameter No.
Appendix 4 Functions Added or Changed Due to Version Upgrade
Appendix 4.1 Basic model QCPU Upgrade
Appendix 4.2 High Performance model QCPU Upgrade
Appendix 4.3 Process CPU Upgrade
Appendix 4.4 Redundant CPU Upgrade
Appendix 4.5 Universal model QCPU Upgrade
Appendix 5 Method of replacing High Performance model QCPU with Universal model QCPU
Appendix 5.1 PRECAUTIONS FOR REPLACEMENT
Appendix 5.2 APPLICABLE DEVICES AND SOFTWARE
Appendix 5.3 INSTRUCTIONS
Appendix 5.3.1 Instructions not Supported in Universal Model QCPU and Alternative Methods
Appendix 5.3.2 Replacing Programs Using Multiple CPU Transmission Dedicated Instructions
Appendix 5.3.3 Program Replacement Examples
Appendix 5.4 FUNCTIONS
Appendix 5.4.1 Floating-point Operation Instructions
Appendix 5.4.2 Error Check Processing for Floating-point Data Comparison Instructions
Appendix 5.4.3 Device Latch Function
Appendix 5.4.4 File Usability Setting
Appendix 5.4.5 Parameter-valid Drive and Boot File Setting
Appendix 5.4.6 Forced ON/OFF Function of External I/O
Appendix 5.4 SPECIAL RELAYS AND SPECIAL REGISTERS
Appendix 5.5.1 Special Relay List
Appendix 5.5.2 Special Register List
Appendix 6 Specifications Comparison Between Ethernet Port of Built-in Ethernet Port QCPU and Ethernet
Module
Appendix 7 Precautions for Battery Transport
Appendix 8 Device Point Assignment Sheet
INDEX
A - 24
(Related manual).................QCPU User's Manual (Multiple CPU System)
CONTENTS
CHAPTER1 OUTLINE
1.1 What is multiple CPU system?
1.2 Features of multiple CPU system
1.3 Difference from single CPU system
CHAPTER2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

2.1 System configuration
2.1.1 System configuration using Basic model QCPU(Q00CPU, Q01CPU)
2.1.2 System configuration using High Performance model QCPU or Process CPU as CPU No.1
2.1.3 System configuration using Universal model QCPU as CPU No.1
2.2 Configuration of peripheral devices
2.3 Configurable device and available software
2.4 Precautions for system configuration
CHAPTER3 CONCEPT FOR MULTIPLE CPU SYSTEM

3.1 Mounting position of CPU module
3.1.1 When CPU No.1 is Basic model QCPU
3.1.2 When CPU No.1 is High Performance model QCPU or Process CPU
3.1.3 When CPU No.1 is Universal model QCPU
3.2 CPU No. of CPU module
3.3 Concept of I/O number assignment
3.3.1 I/O number assignment of each module
3.3.2 I/O number of each CPU module
3.4 Access Range of CPU module and other modules
3.4.1 Access range with controlled module
3.4.2 Access range with non-controlled module
3.5 Access target under GOT connection
3.6 Access with instruction using link direct device
3.7 Access range of GX Developer
3.8 Clock data used by intelligent function module
3.8.1 Clock data using by CPU module
3.8.2 Clock data used by intelligent function module
3.9 Resetting the multiple CPU system
3.10 Operation for CPU module stop error
3.11 Host CPU number of multiple CPU system
CHAPTER4 COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN CPU MODULES

4.1 Communications between CPU modules using CPU shared memory
A - 25
4.1.1 CPU shared memory
4.1.2 Communication by auto refresh using CPU shared memory
4.1.3 Communication by auto refresh using multiple CPU high speed transmission area
4.1.4 Communication using CPU shared memory by program
4.1.5 Communications between CPU modules when the error occurs
4.2 Communications with instructions dedicated to Motion CPU
4.2.1 Control instruction from QCPU to Motion CPU
4.3 Communication with Dedicated Instructions
4.3.1 Writing/reading of device data from QCPU to Motion CPU
4.3.2 Starting interrupt program from QCPU to C Controller module/PC CPU module
4.3.3 Writing/reading of device data from QCPU to QCPU
4.4 Multiple CPU Synchronous Interrupt
4.5 Multiple CPU Synchronized Boot-up
CHAPTER5 PROCESSING TIME OF QCPU IN MULTIPLE CPU SYSTEM

5.1 Concept of Scan Time
5.2 Factors for prolonged Scan Time
5.3 Reducing processing time
CHAPTER6 PARAMETER ADDED FOR MULTIPLE CPU SYSTEM

6.1 Parameter list
6.1.1 Number of CPUs setting
6.1.2 Operating mode setting
6.1.3 Online module change setting
6.1.4 I/O settings outside of the group
6.1.5 Communication area setting (Refresh setting)
6.1.6 Control CPU settings
6.1.7 Multiple CPU synchronized boot-up
6.1.8 Multiple CPU high speed transmission area setting
CHAPTER7 PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF AnS/A SERIES MODULE

7.1 Precautions for use of AnS/A series compatible module
CHAPTER8 STARTING UP THE MULTIPLE CPU SYSTEM

8.1 Flow-chart for Starting Up the Multiple CPU System
8.2 Setting Up the Multiple CPU System Parameters
8.2.1 Parameter setting for the Basic model QCPU, High Parformance model QCPU and Process CPU
8.2.2 Parameter setting for the Universal model QCPU
8.2.3 Reusing preset multiple CPU parameters
8.3 Communication program example using auto refresh
8.3.1 Program example for the Basic model QCPU, High Performance model QCPU and Process CPU
8.3.2 Program example for the Universal model QCPU
A - 26
APPENDICES
Appendix 1 Transportation Precautions
Appendix 1.1 Controlled models
Appendix 1.2 Transport guidelines
INDEX
A - 27
(Related manual).................QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Redundant System)
CONTENTS
CHAPTER1 OVERVIEW
1.1 Redundant System Overview
1.2 Features

2.1 System Configuration
2.2 Peripheral Device Configuration
2.3 Applicable Devices and Software
2.4 System Configuration Cautions
CHAPTER3 TRACKING CABLE

3.1 Specifications
3.2 Part Names
3.3 Connecting and Disconnecting a Tracking Cable
CHAPTER4 PROCEDURE FOR STARTING UP A REDUNDANT SYSTEM

4.1 Mounting Modules
4.2 Wiring
4.3 Module Initial Settings
4.4 Confirming that the Power Supply is ON
4.5 Confirming System A/System B
4.6 Starting up/Connecting GX Developer
4.7 Writing Parameters and Programs to CPU
4.8 Restarting System A and System B
4.9 Error Check
4.10 Confirming the Control System/Standby System
4.11 Running CPU Modules
CHAPTER5 REDUNDANT SYSTEM FUNCTIONS

5.1 Basic Concept of Redundant System
5.1.1 Determination of System A/System B
5.1.2 Determination of Control System and Standby System
5.1.3 Operation Mode
5.1.4 System Consistency Check
5.1.5 Self Diagnostics Function
5.1.6 Start Mode
A - 28
5.2 FUNCTION LIST
5.3 The System Switching Function
5.3.1 System Switching Method
5.3.2 System Switching Execution Timing
5.3.3 System Switching Execution Possibility
5.3.4 Both Systems Operations After System Switching
5.3.5 Special Relays/Registers For System Switching
5.3.6 System Switching Precautions
5.4 Operation Mode Change Function
5.5 Tracking Function
5.5.1 Tracking Function Overview
5.5.2 Tracking Execution Procedure
5.5.3 Tracking Data
5.5.4 Tracking Data Settings
5.5.5 Tracking Block And Tracking Trigger
5.5.6 Tracking Execution
5.5.7 Tracking Mode
5.5.8 Device Data Used By The New Control System
5.6 Online Program Change for Redundancy
5.6.1 Writing to the CPU Module in STOP Status
5.6.2 Program Change While CPU is Running
5.7 Memory Copy From Control System To Standby System
5.8 Online Module Change (Hot Swapping)
5.9 Network Module Redundant Group Settings
5.10 Redundant CPU Functions Restricted in Redundant System
5.10.1 Enforced ON/OFF of external I/O
5.10.2 Remote Operation for Redundant System
5.11 Access to Module Mounted on Extension Base Unit
CHAPTER6 REDUNDANT SYSTEM NETWORKS

6.1 Communication with GX Developer and PX Developer
6.1.1 Communication Methods with GX Developer
6.1.2 Confirming the Connection Target on GX Developer
6.1.3 Cautions on Access from GX Developer and PX Developer
6.2 Redundant System Network Overview
6.2.1 CC-Link IE controller network or MELSECNET/H PLC to PLC network
6.2.2 MELSECNET/H Remote I/O network
6.2.3 Ethernet
6.2.4 CC-Link
6.2.5 Serial Communication Modules
6.2.6 PROFIBUS-DP
6.3 Communication between the Both Systems CPU Module and GOTs
6.3.1 When Connecting GOTs to a MELSECNET/H Remote I/O station
6.3.2 When Connecting GOTs to CC-Link
6.3.3 Communication when the GOT is Connected to CC-Link IE controller network, MELSECNET/H, or
MELSECNET/10 PLC to PLC network
A - 29
6.3.4 When Connecting GOTs to a Ethernet
6.4 Precautions for Accessing Redundant CPU from Other Networks
6.5 Precautions for Writing Device Data from Other Station
CHAPTER7 PROGRAMMING CAUTIONS

7.1 Instructions Restricted in Use for Redundant System
7.2 Cautions on Fixed-Scan Clocks and Fixed Scan Execution Type Programs
7.3 Precautions for Using Annunciator (F) in Redundant System
7.4 Precautions at System Switching Occurrence
7.5 Precautions of Programming when Connecting Extension Base Unit
CHAPTER8 TROUBLESHOOTING
8.1 Troubleshooting Flow
8.1.1 Flow for the Case where the "MODE" LED is not ON
8.1.2 When the CPU Module "BACKUP" LED is ON (Red)
8.1.3 When the "SYSTEM A/B" LED is flashing
8.1.4 When the System A/System B CPU module "RUN" LED is not ON
8.1.5 When System Switching has Occurred
8.1.6 When System Switching has failed
8.1.7 When "TRK. INIT. ERROR (error code: 6140)" Occurred at Redundant System Startup
8.1.8 When "CONTROL SYS. DOWN (error code: 6310 to 6312)" Occurred at Redundant System Star-
tup
8.1.9 When "EXT.CABLE ERR." Occurs
8.1.10 When "BASE LAY ERROR" Occurs
8.1.11 When "UNIT LAY DIFF." Occurs
8.1.12 When "SP. UNIT DOWN" Occurs
8.1.13 When "SP. UNIT LAY ERROR" Occurs
8.1.14 When "LINK PARA. ERROR" Occurs
8.1.15 When "SP. UNIT VER. ERR." Occurs
8.1.16 When "CAN'T SWITCH" Occurs to Control System CPU Module due to Communication Error
when Turning ON/OFF Power Supply of CPU Module or Booting and Shutting Down Personal
Computer in CC-Link IE controller network or MELSECNET/H Network
8.2 Error Clear
8.3 Replacing Module in Redundant System
8.3.1 CPU Module Replacement
8.3.2 Power Supply Module Replacement Procedure
8.3.3 Redundant Power Supply Replacement Procedure
8.3.4 I/O Module Replacement Procedure
8.3.5 Network Module Replacement Procedure
8.3.6 Main Base Unit Replacement Procedure
8.3.7 Procedure for Replacing Module mounted on the I/O Station of Redundant System
8.3.8 Replacement of Modules Mounted to Extension Base Unit
8.3.9 Tracking Cable Replacement
8.3.10 Replacement Procedures of Extension Cable
A - 30
CHAPTER9 PROCESSING TIME FOR REDUNDANT SYSTEMS
9.1 Extension of Scan Time due to Tracking
9.2 System Switching Time
APPENDICES
Appendix 1 Comparison of Q4ARCPU and QnPRHCPU
Appendix 2 Comparison of Qn(H)CPU and QnPRHCPU
Appendix 3 Comparison of QnPHCPU and QnPRHCPU
Appendix 4 Sample Programs when Using CC-Link
Appendix 4.1 Sample Program System Configuration
Appendix 4.2 Sample Program Names
Appendix 4.3 Devices Used in Programs
Appendix 4.4 Parameter Settings
Appendix 4.5 Sample Program
Appendix 5 Method for Starting up the Previous Control System
Appendix 6 Precautions for Using Serial Communication Module
Appendix 6.1 CSET Instruction
Appendix 6.2 UINI Instruction
Appendix 6.3 INPUT Instruction
Appendix 6.4 PUTE Instruction
Appendix 6.5 GETE Instruction
Appendix 6.6 ONDEMAND Instruction
Appendix 6.7 OUTPUT Instruction
Appendix 6.8 PRR Instruction
Appendix 6.8 BIDOUT Instruction
Appendix 6.10 BIDIN Instruction
Appendix 7 Cautions on Communications Made via Module on Extension Base Unit
INDEX
A - 31
ABOUT MANUALS
The following manuals are also related to this product.

In necessary, order them by quoting the details in the tables below.
Related Manuals
(1) Common to CPU modules

The following table indicates the related manuals common to the Basic model QCPU,
High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, Redundant CPU and Universal
model QCPU.
Manual Number
Manual Name
(Model Code)
QCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
This manual explains the functions, programming methods, devices necessary to create programs with the SH-080484ENG
QCPU. (13JR74)
(Sold separately)
QCPU (Q Mode)/QnACPU Programming Manual (Common Instructions)
SH-080039
This manual describes how to use the sequence instructions and application instructions.
(13JF58)
(Sold separately)
QCPU (Q Mode)/QnACPU Programming Manual (SFC)
This manual explains the system configuration, performance specifications, functions, programming, debugging, SH-080041
error codes and others of MELSAP3. (13JF60)
(Sold separately)
QCPU (Q Mode)/QnACPU Programming Manual (MELSAP-L)
This manual describes the programming methods, specifications functions, and so on that are necessary to SH-080076
create the MELSAP-L type SFC program. (13JF61)
(Sold separately)
QCPU (Q Mode) Programming Manual (Structured Text)
SH-080366E
This manual describes the structured text language programming methods.
(13JF68)
(Sold separately)
(2) Basic model QCPU

The following table indicates the related manuals of the Basic model QCPU other than
the manuals indicated in "(1) Common to CPU modules".
Manual Number
Manual Name
(Model Code)
QCPU (Q Mode)/QnACPU Programming Manual (PID Control Instructions)
SH-080040
This manual describes the dedicated instructions used to exercise PID control.
(13JF59)
(Sold separately)
QCPU User’s Manual (Multiple CPU System)
This manual explains the multiple CPU system overview, system configuration, I/O numbers, communication SH-080485ENG
between CPU modules, and communication with the I/O modules or intelligent function modules. (13JR75)
(Sold separately)
Q Corresponding MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual
This manual explains the communication methods and control procedures through the MC protocol for the
SH-080008
external devices to read and write data from/to the CPU module using the serial communication module/
(13JF89)
Ethernet module.
(Sold separately)
A - 32
(3) High Performance model QCPU
The following table indicates the related manuals of the High Performance model
QCPU other than the manuals indicated in "(1) Common to CPU modules".
Manual Number
Manual Name
(Model Code)
SH-080040
(13JF59)
(Sold separately)
(Sold separately)
(4) Process CPU

The following table indicates the related manuals of the Process CPU other than the
manuals indicated in "(1) Common to CPU modules".
Manual Number
Manual Name
(Model Code)
QnPHCPU/QnPRHCPU Programming Manual (Process Control Instructions)
This manual describes the programming procedures, device names, and other items necessary to implement SH-080316E
PID control using process control instructions. (13JF67)
(Sold separately)
(Sold separately)
(5) Redundant CPU

The following table indicates the related manuals of the Redundant CPU other than
the manuals indicated in "(1) Common to CPU modules".
Manual Number
Manual Name
(Model Code)
QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Redundant System)
This manual explains the redundant system configuration, functions, communication with external devices, and SH-080486ENG
troubleshooting for redundant system construction using the Redundant CPU. (13JR76)
(Sold separately)
SH-080040
(13JF59)
(Sold separately)
QnPHCPU/QnPRHCPU Programming Manual (Process Control Instructions)
This manual describes the programming procedures, device names, and other items necessary to implement SH-080316E
PID control using process control instructions. (13JF67)
(Sold separately)
A - 33
(6) Universal model QCPU
The following table indicates the related manuals of the Universal model QCPU other
than the manuals indicated in "(1) Common to CPU modules".
Manual Number
Manual Name
(Model Code)
SH-080040
(13JF59)
(Sold separately)
(Sold separately)
A - 34
HOW THIS MANUAL IS ORGANIZED
CPU modules requiring precautions Reference destination Chapter heading

The CPU modules requiring precautions are A reference destination or The index on the right side of the page
shown as icons. reference manual is marked shows the chapter of the open page at a
"Note . " under the icon corresponds to
. glance.
"Note . " in the sentences and at the
page bottom.
However, "Note . " is not described in
the section title.
Precautions Section title

Precautions corresponding to the icons are The section of the open page is shown at a
provided. glance.
Icon
High
Basic model Universal model Description
Performance Process CPU Redundant CPU
QCPU QCPU
model QCPU
The ! marked icon
High
Basic Performance Process Redundant Universal indicates the CPU module
UD does not support a part of
the described functions.
A - 35
In addition, this manual provides the following explanations.
POINT
Explains the matters to be especially noted, the functions and others related to the
description on that page.
Remark
Provides the reference destination related to the description on that page and the
convenient information.
A - 36
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
This manual is prepared for users to understand the hardware specifica-

tions of those modules such as the CPU modules, power supply modules,
and base units, maintenance and inspections of the system, and trouble-
shooting required when you use Q series programmable controllers.
The manual is classified roughly into three sections as shown below.
1) Chapters 1 and 2 Describe the outline of the CPU module and the system
configuration.
The basics of the system configuration of CPU module are
described.
2) Chapters 3 to 7 Describe the general specifications indicating the operating

environments of the CPU module, power supply module, and base
units, and the performance specifications of these modules.
3) Chapters 8 to 12 Describe the overall maintenance such as the installation of the

CPU module, daily inspections, and troubleshooting.
Remark
This manual does not explain the functions of the CPU module.
For these functions, refer to the manual shown below.
• High Performance model QCPU (Q Mode) User's Manual (Function
Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
Refer to the following manual for the multiple CPU system.

QCPU User's Manual (Multiple CPU System)
Refer to the following manual for the redundant system.

A - 37
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS
Unless otherwise specified, this manual uses the following generic terms
and abbreviations to explain the Q series CPU modules.
Generic Term/Abbreviation Description

Basic model QCPU Generic term for Q00JCPU, Q00CPU and Q01CPU modules.
High Performance model QCPU Generic term for Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU Q12HCPU and Q25HCPU modules.
Process CPU Generic term for Q02PHCPU, Q06PHCPU, Q12PHCPU and Q25PHCPU
Redundant CPU Generic term for Q12PRHCPU and Q25PRHCPU.
Generic term for Q02UCPU, Q03UDCPU, Q04UDHCPU, Q06UDHCPU, Q13UDHCPU,
Universal model QCPU Q26UDHCPU, Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU and
Q26UDEHCPU.
Generic term for Mitsubishi motion controllers, Q172CPUN, Q173CPUN, Q172HCPU,
Motion CPU
Q173HCPU, Q172DCPU, Q173DCPU.
Generic term for MELSEC-Q series compatible PC CPU modules,
PC CPU module PPC-CPU686(MS)-64, PPC-CPU686(MS)-128 and PPC-CPU852(MS)-512,
manufactured by Contec Co., Ltd.
Generic term for Basic model QCPU, High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU,
CPU module
Redundant CPU and Universal model QCPU.
Q Series Abbreviation for Mitsubishi MELSEC-Q Series Programmable Controller.
Other name for compact types of Mitsubishi MELSEC-A Series Programmable
AnS series
Controller.
A series Other name for Large types of Mitsubishi MELSEC-A Series Programmable Controller.
Generic term for Q02UCPU, Q03UDCPU, Q04UDHCPU, Q06UDHCPU, Q13UDHCPU
QnU(D)(H)CPU
and Q26UDHCPU
Generic term for Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU and
QnUDE(H)CPU
Q26UDEHCPU
Generic term for Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU and
Buit-in Ethernet QCPU
Q26UDEHCPU
Product name for Q series compatible SW D5C-GPPW-E type GPP function software
package.
GX Developer ( indicates the version.eseees)
For the GX Developer versions applicable for each CPU module, refer to "System
configuration" in this manual.
Generic term for Q33B, Q35B, Q38B and Q312B main base units on which CPU module
Q3 B (except Q00JCPU), Q series power supply module, Q series I/O module, and intelligent
function module can be mounted.
Generic term for Q32SB, Q33SB and Q35SB slim type main base units on which Basic
Q3 SB model QCPU (except Q00JCPU), High Performance model QCPU, slim type power
supply module, Q series I/O module, and intelligent function module can be mounted.
Other name for Q38RB redundant power supply main base unit on which CPU module
Q3 RB (except Q00JCPU), redundant power supply module, Q series I/O module, and
intelligent function module can be mounted.
Generic term for the Q38DB and Q312DB type Multiple CPU high speed main base unit
Q3 DB on which CPU module (except the Q00JCPU), Q series power supply module, Q series
I/O module, and intelligent function module can be mounted.
Generic term for Q52B and Q55B extension base unit on which the Q Series I/O and
Q5 B
intelligent function module can be mounted.
A - 38
Generic term for Q63B, Q65B, Q68B and Q612B extension base unit on which Q Series
Q6 B
power supply module, I/O module, intelligent function module can be mounted.
Other name for Q68RB redundant power supply extension base unit on whichredundant
Q6 RB power supply module, Q series I/O module, and intelligent function module can be
mounted.
Other name for Q65WRB extension base unit for redundant system on which redundant
Q6 WRB power supply module, Q series I/O module, and intelligent function module can be
mounted.
Generic term for QA1S65B and QA1S68B extension base units on which AnS Series
QA1S6 B
power supply module, I/O module, special function module can be mounted.
Generic term for QA65B and QA68B extension base units on which the A series power
QA6 B
supply module, A series I/O modules and special function modules can be mounted.
Generic term for A52B, A55B, and A58B extension base units on which A series I/O
A5 B
module and special function module can be mounted without power supply.
Generic term for A62B, A65B, and A68B extension base units on which A series I/O
A6 B
module and special function module can be mounted.
QA6ADP Abbreviation for QA6ADP QA conversion adapter module.
QA6ADP+A5 B/A6 B Abbreviation for A large type extension base unit on which QA6ADP is mounted.
Main base unit Generic term for Q3 B, Q3 SB, Q 3RB and Q3 DB.
Generic term for Q5 B, Q6 B, Q6 RB, Q6 WRB, QA1S6 B, QA6 B and
Extension base unit
QA6ADP+A5 B/A6 B.
Slim type main base unit Other name for Q3 SB.
Redundant power main base unit Other name for Q3 RB.
Redundant power extension base
Other name for Q6 RB.
unit
Redundant extension base unit Other name for Q6 WRB.
Multiple CPU high speed main
Other name for Q3 DB.
base unit
Generic term for main base unit, extension base unit, slim type main base unit,
Base unit redundant power main base unit, redundant power extension base unit, redundant
extension base unit and Multiple CPU high speed main base unit.
Redundant power supply base Generic term for redundant power main base unit and redundant power extension base
unit unit.
Generic term for redundant power main base unit, redundant power extension base unit,
Redundant base unit
and redundant type extension base unit.
Extension cable Generic term for QC05B, QC06B, QC12B, QC30B, QC50B, QC100B extension cables.
Tracking cable Generic term for QC10TR and QC30TR tracking cables for Redundant CPU.
Generic term for Q61P-A1, Q61P-A2, Q61P, Q62P, Q63P, Q64P and Q64PN power
Q series power supply module
supply modules.
Slim type power supply module Abbreviation for Q61SP slim type power supply module.
Redundant power supply module Generic term for Q63RP and Q64RP redundant power supply module.
AnS series power supply module Generic term for A1S61PN, A1S62PN and A1S63P power supply modules.
Generic term for A61P, A61PN, A62P, A63P, A68P, A61PEU and A62PEU power supply
A series power supply module
modules.
Generic term for Q series power supply modules, AnS series power supply modules,
Power supply module A series power supply modules, slim type power supply module and redundant power
supply module.
Generic term for Q6BAT, Q7BAT and Q8BAT CPU module batteries, Q2MEM-BAT
Battery
SRAM card battery, and Q3MEM-BAT SRAM card battery.
A - 39
Abbreviation for Q2MEM-1MBS, Q2MEM-2MBS, Q3MEM-4MBS and Q3MEM-8MBS
SRAM card
type SRAM card.
Flash card Generic term for Q2MEM-2MBF and Q2MEM-4MBF type Flash card.
ATA card Generic term for Q2MEM-8MBA, Q2MEM-16MBA and Q2MEM-32MBA type ATA card.
Memory card Generic term for SRAM card, Flash card and ATA card.
Generic term for Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal GOT-A*** series, GOT-F***
GOT
series and GOT1000 series.
A - 40
PRECAUTIONS FOR USE
Precautions for first use of Q series CPU module
When using a CPU module for the first time, the memory needs to be formatted using
GX Developer.
For details of memory formatting, refer to the following manual.
GX Developer Operating Manual
Precautions on battery
(1) Operation when the CPU module is restarted after stored with a battery
removed
When running the CPU module that has been stored with the battery removed, the
memory needs to be formatted using GX Developer. ( Section 11.4)
(2) Operation when the CPU module is restarted after stored with a battery
whose life is exceeded
When running the CPU module that has been stored with the battery set longer than
the battery life, the memory needs to be formatted using GX Developer. ( Section
11.5)
A - 41
1 OVERVIEW
CHAPTER1 OVERVIEW
This Manual describes the hardware specifications and handling methods of the Q Series
CPU Module ( Section (1) in this chapter). The Manual also includes descriptions
related to the specifications of the power supply module, base unit, extension cable,
memory card and battery.
For the functions, programs, and devices of the Q Series CPU Module, refer to the manual
below.
(1) CPU modules described in this manual

The CPU modules described in this manual are as shown in Table1.1.
Table1.1 List of relevant CPU modules
CPU module Model name

Basic model QCPU Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, Q01CPU
Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU,
High Performance model QCPU
Q25HCPU
Process CPU Q12PHCPU, Q25PHCPU
Redundant CPU Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU
Q02UCPU, Q03UDCPU, Q04UDHCPU, Q06UDHCPU,
Q13UDHCPU, Q26UDHCPU, Q03UDECPU,
Universal model QCPU
Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU,
Q26UDEHCPU
1-1
1 OVERVIEW
1
(2) List of Q Series CPU Module manuals
The Q series CPU module manuals are as shown below.
OVERVIEW
For details such as manual numbers, refer to "About Manuals" in this manual.
(a) Basic model QCPU

2
Table1.2 List of user's manuals of Basic model QCPU
CONFIGURATION
Maintenance Program Multi CPU Redundant
and Inspection Fundamentals System System
SYSTEM
QCPU User's Manual
Purpose
(Hardware Design,
Maintenance and
QCPU User's Manual
(Function Explanation,
QCPU User's
Manual (Multiple CPU
QnPRHCPU User's
Manual (Redundant 3
Program Fundamentals) System) System)
inspection)
SPECIFICATIONS
Confirmation of part names and
GENERAL
specifications of the CPU module Details
Outline
Confirmation of connection methods

for the power supply module, base Details
4
unit and I/O module
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
Construction of the single CPU
HARDWARE
system (confirmation of start-up
procedure and I/O number Details
assignment)
Construction of the multiple CPU
system (confirmation of start-up 5
assignment)
POWER SUPPLY
Confirmation of the sequence program
MODULE
configuration and memory Details
Confirmation of the functions, 6

parameters, and devices of the CPU Details
EXTENSION CABLE
module
BASE UNIT AND
Confirmation of the troubleshooting

and error codes Details
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES
1-2
1 OVERVIEW
Table1.3 List of programming manuals of Basic model QCPU
Common PID Control Process Control Structured

Instructions Instruction SFC MELSAP-L
Instructions Text
QCPU (Q mode)/ QCPU (Q mode)/ QnPHCPU/

QnACPU QnACPU QnPRHCPU QCPU (Q mode)/ QCPU (Q mode) QCPU (Q mode)
Programming Programming Programming QnACPU Programming Programming
Purpose
Manual Manual (PID Manual (Process Programming Manual Manual
(Common Control Control Manual (SFC) (MELSAP-L) (Structured Text)
Instruction) Instruction) Instruction)
Confirmation of usage of
sequence instructions, basic
instructions, application Details
instructions, etc.
Confirmation of dedicated
instructions for PID control Details
Confirmation of MELSAP3's
system configuration,
performance specifications, Details
functions, programming,
debugging, and error codes
Confirmation of the
programming method,
specifications, functions, etc. Details
required for SFC programming
of the MELSAP-L type
Confirmation of the
programming method of the Details
structured text language
1-3
1 OVERVIEW
1
(b) High Performance Model QCPU
Table1.4 List of user's manuals of High Performance model QCPU
OVERVIEW
2
QCPU User's Manual
CONFIGURATION
QCPU User's Manual QnPRHCPU User's
(Hardware Design, QCPU User's Manual
Purpose (Function Explanation, Manual (Redundant
Maintenance and (Multiple CPU System)
Program Fundamentals) System)
SYSTEM
inspection)

Outline 3
SPECIFICATIONS
for power supply module, base unit Details
and I/O module
GENERAL
4
assignment)
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE

HARDWARE
assignment)

configuration and memory Details 5
POWER SUPPLY
Confirmation of the functions,
parameters, and devices of CPU Details
MODULE
module

and error codes Details 6
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES
1-4
1 OVERVIEW
Table1.5 List of programming manuals of High Performance model QCPU

Instructions Text

Purpose
instructions, etc.
Confirmation of the
programming method,
Confirmation of the
1-5
1 OVERVIEW
1
(c) Process CPU
Table1.6 List of user's manuals of Process CPU
OVERVIEW
2
QCPU User's Manual
CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
inspection)

Outline 3
SPECIFICATIONS
and I/O module
GENERAL
4
assignment)
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE

HARDWARE
assignment)
Confirmation of sequence program

POWER SUPPLY
parameters, and devices of the CPU Details
MODULE
module

EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES
1-6
1 OVERVIEW
Table1.7 List of programming manuals of Process CPU

Instructions Text

Purpose
instructions, etc.
instructions for process control Details
debugging and error codes
Confirmation of the
programming method,
specifications, functions etc. Details
Confirmation of the
1-7
1 OVERVIEW
1
(d) Redundant CPU
Table1.8 List of user's manual of Redundant CPU
OVERVIEW
2
QCPU User's Manual
CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
inspection)

Outline 3
SPECIFICATIONS
and I/O module
GENERAL
Construction of redundant system
(confirmation of start-up procedure
and I/O number assignment)
Details
4
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
Confirmation of the configuration and
HARDWARE
memory of sequence programs Details

parameters, devices, etc. of the CPU
module
Details 5
POWER SUPPLY
Confirmation of the troubleshooting Details
MODULE
Confirmation of the error codes Details 6
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES
1-8
1 OVERVIEW
Table1.9 List of programming manuals of Redundant CPU

Instructions Text

QCPU (Q mode)
QnACPU QnACPU QnPRHCPU QCPU (Q mode)/ QCPU (Q mode)
Programming
Programming Programming Programming QnACPU Programming
Purpose Manual
Manual Manual (PID Manual (Process Programming Manual
(Structured Text
(Common Control Control Manual (SFC) (MELSAP-L)
Edition)
instructions, etc.
instructions for process control Details
performance specifications,
functions, programming, Details
debugging and error codes
Confirmation of the
programming method,
specifications, functions, etc.
required for SFC programming Details
Confirmation of the
1-9
1 OVERVIEW
1
(e) Universal Model QCPU
Table1.10 List of user's manuals of Universal model QCPU
OVERVIEW
2
QCPU User's Manual
CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
inspection)

Outline 3
SPECIFICATIONS
and I/O module
GENERAL
4
assignment)
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE

HARDWARE
assignment)

POWER SUPPLY
parameters, and devices of CPU Details
MODULE
module

EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES
1 - 10
1 OVERVIEW
Table1.11 List of programming manuals of Universal model QCPU

Instructions Text

Purpose
instructions, etc.
Confirmation of the
programming method,
Confirmation of the
1 - 11
1 OVERVIEW
1
1.1 Features
OVERVIEW
The Q Series CPU module has the following new features:
(1) Large number of I/O points that can be controlled

The Q Series CPU module supports the following number of actual I/O points 2
accessible to the I/O modules mounted on the base unit.
CONFIGURATION
• Q00JCPU : 256 points (X/Y0 to FF)
SYSTEM
• Q00CPU, Q01CPU : 1024 points (X/Y0 to 3FF)
Up to 2048 points (X/Y0 to 7FF) are supported as the number of I/O device points
usable for refreshing the remote I/O of the CC-Link and link I/O (LX, LY) of the 3
MELSECNET/H.
SPECIFICATIONS
(b) High Performance model QCPU
One module can support 4096 points (X/Y0 to FFF).
GENERAL
Up to 8192 points (X/Y0 to 1FFF) are supported as the number of I/O device
points usable for the remote I/O stations in the MELSECNET/H remote I/O
network, the CC-Link data link, and the MELSECNET/MINI-S3 data link. 4
SPECIFICATIONS OF
(c) Process CPU and Redundant CPU
THE CPU MODULE

One module can support 4096 points (X/Y0 to FFF).
HARDWARE
network and CC-Link data link.
(d) Universal model QCPU

5
• Q02UCPU: 2048points (X/Y0 to 7FF)
POWER SUPPLY
• Q03UDCPU, Q04UDHCPU, Q06UDHCPU, Q13UDHCPU, Q26UDHCPU:
4096points (X/Y0 to FFF)
MODULE
network and CC-Link data link. 6
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES
1.1 Features 1 - 12
1 OVERVIEW
(2) Lineup for various program capacities

The optimum CPU module for the program capacity can be selected.

• Q00JCPU, Q00CPU : 8k steps
• Q01CPU : 14k steps
(b) High Performance model QCPU

• Q02CPU, Q02HCPU : 28k steps
• Q06HCPU : 60k steps
(c) Process CPU

• Q02PHCPU : 28k steps
(d) Redundant CPU

• Q12PRHCPU : 124k steps
• Q25PRHCPU : 252k steps
(e) Universal model QCPU

• Q02UCPU : 20k steps
• Q03UDCPU, Q03UDECPU : 30k steps
• Q04UDHCPU, Q04UDEHCPU : 40k steps
• Q06UDHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU : 60k steps
• Q13UDHCPU, Q13UDHCPU : 130k steps
• Q26UDHCPU, Q26UDHCPU : 260k steps
1 - 13 1.1 Features
1 OVERVIEW
1
(3) Realised high speed processing
High speed processing has been achieved.
OVERVIEW
Table1.12 Processing speed (LD instruction)
LD instruction processing
CPU module type
speed
2
Q00JCPU 200ns
CONFIGURATION
Basic model QCPU Q00CPU 160ns
Q01CPU 100ns
SYSTEM
Q02CPU 79ns
High Performance model QCPU Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU,
Process CPU
Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU
Q12PHCPU, Q25PHCPU
34ns 3
Redundant CPU Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU
SPECIFICATIONS
Q02UCPU 40ns
Q03UDCPU 20ns
GENERAL
Q04UDHCPU, Q06UDHCPU,
9.5ns
Q13UDHCPU, Q26UDHCPU
4
The MELSEC Q series base unit high-speed system bus has achieved faster access
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
to an intelligent function module and link refresh with a network module.
HARDWARE
MELSECNET/H link refreshing: 2.2ms/2k words*1
*1: This is the case that the Q01CPU is used without using SB/SW and the
MELSECNET/H network module is installed to the main base unit. 5
(b) High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, Redundant CPU or
POWER SUPPLY
Access to the intelligent function module: 20 s/word (approximately 7 times*2)
MODULE
MELSECNET/H link refreshing: 4.6ms/8k words (approximately 4.3 times*2)
*2: These are the values resulted from the following comparison:
6
•Comparing Q02HCPU with Q2ASHCPU-S1
•Comparing Q25PHCPU with Q4ARCPU
EXTENSION CABLE
•Comparing Q25PRHCPU with Q4ARCPU BASE UNIT AND
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES
1.1 Features 1 - 14
1 OVERVIEW
(4) Increase in debugging efficiency through high speed communication

with GX Developer
In the Q Series CPU module, a time required for program writing/reading or
monitoring has been reduced through the high speed communication at a speed of
115.2kbps max. by the RS-232, and a communication time efficiency at the time of
debugging has been increased.
In addition, High Performance model QCPUs (except for the Q02CPU), Process
CPUs, Redundant CPUs and Universal model QCPUs support USB, so that
highspeed communications of 12Mbps are available.
Q25HCPU(USB) 12
Q25HCPU(RS-232) 30
Q2ASHCPU 86
A2USHCPU-S1 94
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 (Unit:s)
Diagram 1.1 26k step program transfer time
(5) AnS/A series I/O modules and special function modules are available
The AnS/A series compatible extension base units (QA1S6 B, QA6 B and
QA6ADP+A5 B/A6 B) allow the High Performance model QCPU to use the AnS/A
series I/O modules and special function modules.
(6) Saved space by downsizing

The installation space for the Q series has been reduced by approx. 60% compared
with the AnS series.
AnS series
98mm (3.86inch)
Q series
(depth:98mm(3.86inch))
5 Slot Main Base Unit 245mm(9.65inch)
Diagram 1.2 Installation area comparison between Q series and AnS series
1 - 15 1.1 Features
1 OVERVIEW
(7) Connection of up to 7 extension base units.
OVERVIEW
The Q Series CPU module can connect extension base units for the number of stages
shown in Table1.13.
Table1.13 Maximum number of extension stages, i.e., extension base units

2
Max. number of extension Max. number of modules
Item
stages installed
CONFIGURATION
Basic model Q00JCPU 2 stages 16 modules
QCPU Q00CPU, Q01CPU 4 stages 24 modules
SYSTEM
Q02UCPU 4 stages 36 modules
Q03UDCPU, Q03UDECPU,
Universal model Q04UDHCPU,Q04UDEHCPU, 3
QCPU Q06UDHCPU,Q06UDEHCPU,
Q13UDHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU, 7 stages 64 modules
SPECIFICATIONS
Q26UDHCPU, Q26UDEHCPU
GENERAL
Process CPU
Redundant CPU *1 7 stages 63 modules
4
* 1 : Redundant CPU whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "09012" or later.
SPECIFICATIONS OF
Also, the extension base unit cannot be connected to the Redundant CPU whose first 5 digits
THE CPU MODULE

ofserial No. is "09011" or earlier. Therefore, the number of mountable modules is up to 11.
HARDWARE
The overall distance of the extension cables is up to 13.2m allowing highly flexible
extension base unit layout.
5
Basic
(8) Memory extension Note1.1 by memory cardNote1
The Q Series CPU module has a memory card installation connector to which a
POWER SUPPLY
Note1.1
memory card of 32 Mbytes max. can be connected (32 Mbytes are available when an
ATA card is used).
MODULE
When a memory card of large capacity is installed, large files can be managed,
enabling setting comments to all data devices and storing the past programs in the
memory as they are in the form of the corrected histories. 6
Even if a memory card is not installed, a program can be stored onto the standard
EXTENSION CABLE
ROM built in the CPU module, and file registers can be handled by the standard RAM. BASE UNIT AND
POINT
For the High Performance model QCPU, the number of usable file register points
is different depending on the functional version and serial number. 7
For details, refer to Appendix 2.2.
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
Note1 8
CPU MODULE START-
Basic
UP PROCEDURES
Memory cards are not available for the Basic model QCPU.
Note1.1
1.1 Features 1 - 16
1 OVERVIEW
Basic (9) Automatic writing to standard ROM Note1.2 Note1.3Note2

The Q Series CPU module enables writing the parameters or programs saved on a
Note1.2
memory card into the standard ROM of the CPU modules without using GX
Universal
Developer.
When the standard ROM is used to perform ROM operation, you can load a memory
UD
Note1.3 card into the CPU module and write parameters/programs on the memory card to the
standard ROM. Hence, you need not carry GX Developer (personal computer) to
rewrite the parameters/programs.
Basic
(10)Forced ON/OFF of external I/O Note1.2
The Q Series CPU module enables forcedly turning on/off the external I/O by
Note1.2
operating GX Developer regardless of the program execution status (even if the CPU
module is running).
Using the Q Series CPU module allows the wiring test and/or operation test execution
by turning on/off the I/O forcedly without halting the CPU module.
(11)Remote password can be set

When access to an Ethernet module, serial communication module or modem
interface module is made from the outside, whether access to the CPU module is
enabled or not can be selected with a remote password.
Basic
(12)Remote I/O network of MELSECNET/H can be configured Note1.2
The Q Series CPU module allows construction of the MELSECNET/H remote I/O
Note1.2
system by attaching the remote master station of the MELSECNET/H.
POINT
1. The remote password can be set up when the Ethernet module, serial
communication module or modem interface module of function version B or
later is used.
2. The MELSECNET remote I/O network can be implemented when the
MELSECNET/H network module of function version B or later is used.
Note2
Basic The Basic model QCPU does not support the following functions:
• Automatic writing into the standard ROM
Note1.2 • Forced on/off of the external I/O
• MELSECNET/H remote I/O network
Universal
The Universal model QCPU does not support the following functions:
UD • Parameter setting of automatic write to standard ROM
Note1.3
1 - 17 1.1 Features
1 OVERVIEW
1
Redundant
(13)Supporting multiple CPU system Note1.4Note3
The Q series CPU module supports the multiple CPU system.
OVERVIEW
Note1.4
The multiple CPU system can be constructed in combination with CPU modules,
motion CPU(s), and PC CPU module(s).
For the details of the multiple CPU system, refer to the following: 2
CONFIGURATION
(14)Supporting the redundant power supply system
The redundant power supply system can be created using a redundant base unit and
SYSTEM
redundant power supply modules.
The system can continue operation even if one of the power supply modules fails,
since the other will supply the power. 3
SPECIFICATIONS
Universal
(15)CPU module with built-in Ethernet port is selectable
UD
A Q series CPU module that has a built-in Ethernet port can be selected.
GENERAL
Note1.5
For function details, refer to the following manual.
4
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
HARDWARE
5
POWER SUPPLY
MODULE
6
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
7
MEMORY CARD AND
Note3
BATTERY
Redundant
The Redundant CPU does not support the multiple CPU system.
Note1.4
8
CPU MODULE START-
Universal
Applicable to some Universal model CPUs, which are the Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU,
UP PROCEDURES
UD Q06UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU and Q26UDEHCPU only.

Note1.5
1.1 Features 1 - 18
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
This chapter describes the system configuration of the Q Series CPU module cautions on
use of the system, and configured equipment.
This section describes the system configurations for a single CPU system including a
Basic model QCPU, High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU or Universal model
QCPU and the case of connecting GOT with a bus.
For the multiple CPU system and redundant system (when using the Redundant CPU),
refer to the following:
2-1 2.1 System Configuration

1
2.1.1 System Configuration for Single CPU System
OVERVIEW
(1) System configuration using Basic model QCPU (Q00CPU/Q01CPU)
(a) When the main base unit (Q3 B) is used
CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
Battery for QCPU
(Q6BAT)
Basic model QCPU

3
SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL
Q3 B main base unit 1
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
HARDWARE
Extension cable
Power supply module/I/O module/Intelligent function module
5
Q6 B extension base unit 1
POWER SUPPLY
MODULE
* 1: As a power supply module, use the Q series power supply module. 6
The slim type power supply module and the redundant power supply module are not available for
the power supply module.
EXTENSION CABLE
* 2: The Q series power supply module is not required for the Q5 B extension base unit. BASE UNIT AND
Diagram 2.1 System configuration when Q3 B is used
POINT
Because the Q00JCPU is the CPU module with a power supply module and main 7
base unit incorporated, no power supply module and main base unit are required.
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES

2-2
(b) When the redundant power main base unit (Q3 RB) is used
Battery for QCPU

(Q6BAT)
Basic model QCPU
Q3 RB redundant power main base unit 1
Redundant power supply module/I/O module/Intelligent function module

Extension cable
Q6 RB redundant power extension base unit 1

* 1: Use the redundant power supply module for the power supply module.
The redundant power supply module can use the both Q63RP and Q64RP together with one
redundant base unit.
The Q series power supply module and the slim type power supply module are not available for
* 2: The Q series power supply module is not required for the Q5 B extension base unit.
Diagram 2.2 System configuration when Q3 RB is used
POINT
Because the Q00JCPU is the CPU module with a power supply module and main

1
(c) When the slim type main base unit (Q3 SB) is used
OVERVIEW
2
Battery for QCPU
(Q6BAT)
CONFIGURATION
Basic model QCPU
SYSTEM
3
Q3 SB slim type main base unit 1, 2
SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL
4
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
HARDWARE
Slim type power supply module/I/O module/Intelligent function module
* 1: Because the slim type main base unit does not have an extension cable connector, the extension
base unit cannot be connected and bus connection of GOT is not available.
* 2: As a power supply module, use the slim type power supply module.
The Q series power supply module and the redundant power supply module are not available for
5
Diagram 2.3 System configuration when Q3 SB is used
POWER SUPPLY
POINT
MODULE
base unit incorporated, the slim type main base unit is not available.
6
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES

2-4
(d) When the Multiple CPU high speed main base unit (Q3 DB) is used
Battery for QCPU

(Q6BAT)
Basic model QCPU
2
Q3 DB multiple CPU high speed main base unit
Extension cable
* 1: As a power supply module, use the Q series power supply module.

Diagram 2.4 System configuration when Q3 DB is used
POINT

1
(2) System configuration using the High Performance model QCPU
OVERVIEW
(a) If the main base unit (Q3 B) is used
Battery for QCPU (Q6BAT)

2
Memory card 1
Q7BAT-SET
CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
Battery holder Battery for QCPU (Q7BAT)
Q8BAT-SET
3
Extension cable
SPECIFICATIONS
Q8BAT connection cable Battery for QCPU
(Q8BAT)
GENERAL
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
HARDWARE
5
POWER SUPPLY
Power supply module, I/O module, Intelligent function module of the AnS Series
MODULE
QA1S6 B extension base unit
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
QA6 B extension base unit 4

Power supply module, I/O module, Special function module of the A Series
7
MEMORY CARD AND
* 1: One memory card can be installed.

Select a memory card from SRAM card, Flash card, and ATA card according to the application
and capacity.
BATTERY
With commercial memory cards, the operation is not assured.

the power supply module. 8
CPU MODULE START-
* 4: The QA6ADP+A5 B/A6 B is available. However, when using the QA1S6 B, the
UP PROCEDURES
QA6ADP+A5 B/A6 B cannot be connected.


2-6
Memory card 1

Q7BAT-SET
2
Q3 RB redundant power main base unit
Q8BAT-SET

(Q8BAT)
Extension cable

and capacity.

1
OVERVIEW
2
Memory card 1
CONFIGURATION
Battery for QCPU (Q6BAT) High Performance model QCPU
SYSTEM
Q7BAT-SET
Q3 SB slim type main base unit 2, 3 3
SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL
Q8BAT-SET
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
(Q8BAT) Slim type power supply module/I/O module/
Intelligent function module
HARDWARE
and capacity.
With commercial memory cards, the operation is not assured. 5
* 2: The slim type main base unit does not have an extension cable connector.
The extension base unit cannot be connected and bus connection of GOT is not available.
POWER SUPPLY
MODULE
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES

2-8

Memory card 1
Q7BAT-SET

Q8BAT-SET
Extension cable
(Q8BAT)
Q3 DB multiple CPU high speed

main base unit 2


and capacity.

1
(3) System configuration using the Process CPU
OVERVIEW
2
Memory card 1
CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
Battery for QCPU (Q6BAT) Process CPU
Q7BAT-SET
3
SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL
Q8BAT-SET
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
HARDWARE
Q8BAT connection cable Battery for QCPU Extension cable Power supply module/I/O module/
(Q8BAT) Intelligent function module

5
POWER SUPPLY
MODULE
and capacity.
* 2: As a power supply module, use the Q series power supply module. 6
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
POINT
The Process CPU cannot be mounted on the slim type main base unit. 7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES

2 - 10
Memory card 1

Q7BAT-SET
2
Q8BAT-SET

(Q8BAT)
Extension cable

and capacity.
POINT
The Process CPU cannot be mounted on the slim type main base unit.
2 - 11 2.1 System Configuration

1
(c) When the Multiple CPU high speed main base unit (Q3 DB) is used
OVERVIEW
Memory card 1
2
CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
Q7BAT-SET
2
3
SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL
Q8BAT-SET
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
HARDWARE
5
POWER SUPPLY
and capacity.
MODULE
* 3: The Q series power supply module is not required for the Q5 B extension base unit. 6
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
POINT
The Process CPU cannot be mounted on the slim type main base unit.
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES

2 - 12
(4) System configuration using the Universal model QCPU
Memory card 1
Battery for QCPU (Q6BAT) Universal model QCPU

Q7BAT-SET
2
Q3 B main base unit
Q8BAT-SET 4

and capacity.
* 4: When using the Q8BAT-SET for the Universal model QCPU, use the connection cable whose
connector part displays “A”
For details of connector part of a connection cable, refer to Section 7.2.2.

1
OVERVIEW
Memory card 1 2
CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
Q7BAT-SET
3
2
SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL
Q8BAT-SET 4
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
(Q8BAT)
HARDWARE
Extension cable
POWER SUPPLY
MODULE
and capacity.
With commercial memory cards, the operation is not assured. 6
EXTENSION CABLE
redundant base unit. BASE UNIT AND
connector part displays "A". 7
MEMORY CARD AND

BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES

2 - 14
Memory card 1

Q7BAT-SET
Q3 SB slim type main base unit 2, 3
Q8BAT-SET 4

(Q8BAT) Slim type power supply module/I/O module/
Intelligent function module

and capacity.
* 2: The slim type main base unit does not have an extension cable connector.
The extension base unit cannot be connected and bus connection of GOT is not available.
connector part displays “A”.

1
OVERVIEW
Memory card 1 2
CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
Q7BAT-SET
3
2
SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL
Q8BAT-SET 4
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
Extension cable Power supply module/I/O module/
Q8BAT connection cable Battery for QCPU Intelligent function module
(Q8BAT)
HARDWARE
5
POWER SUPPLY
and capacity.
MODULE
the power supply module. 6
EXTENSION CABLE
connector part displays “A”. BASE UNIT AND
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES

2 - 16
(5) Outline of system configuration

(a) When Q00JCPU is used
Q00JCPU ... The figure shows the configuration when 16-point modules are loaded to each slot.
0 1 2 3 4 .... Slot number
00 to 0F
10 to 1F
20 to 2F
30 to 3F
40 to 4F
.... I/O number
Extension base unit ... The figure shows the configuration when 16-point modules are loaded to each slot.
Q68B (8 slots occupied) 1st

extension
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 base
C0 to CF
B0 to BF
A0 to AF
50 to 5F
60 to 6F
70 to 7F
80 to 8F
90 to 9F
Q65B (5 slots occupied) 2nd

extension
13 14 15 16 17 base
Prohibited
Prohibited
D0 to DF
E0 to EF
F0 to FF
When module is mounted an error occurs.
Diagram 2.16 System configuration when Q00JCPU is used

1
Table2.1 Restrictions on the system configuration and applicable base units, extension
cables and power supply modules
OVERVIEW
Maximum number of
extension stages of 2 extension stages
extension base units
Maximum number of
mounted I/O modules
16 modules 2
Module requiring no power supply module Q52B, Q55B
Applicable extension
CONFIGURATION
Module requiring a Q series power supply
base unit model Q63B, Q65B, Q68B, Q612B
module
SYSTEM
Extension cable QC05B, QC06B, QC12B, QC30B, QC50B, QC100B
Q series power supply
Q61P-A1, Q61P-A2, Q61P, Q62P, Q63P, Q64P, Q64PN
module
3
Cautions
SPECIFICATIONS
• Do not use extension cables exceeding an overall extension length of 13.2m
(43.31ft.).
GENERAL
• When using an extension cable, keep it away from the main circuit (high
voltage and heavy current) line.
• Set up the number of extension stages so that the number is not duplicated 4
with another.
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
• The QA1S6 B, QA6 B, QA6ADP+A5 B/A6 B or Q6 RB cannot be
connected as an extension base unit.
HARDWARE
• If both the Q5 B and Q6 B are used together, the order of connection is not
restricted. Refer to Section 6.1.4 and check whether the module is applicable
or not.
• Connect the extension cable from OUT of the extension cable connector of
5
the base unit to IN of the extension base unit on the next stage.
POWER SUPPLY
• If the number of installed modules has exceeded the maximum number of
mountable I/O modules, an error "SP.UNIT LAY ERR." (error code: 2124)
MODULE
occurs.
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES

2 - 18
(b) When the main base unit (Q3 B) is used

Main base unit The figure shows the configuration when 32-point modules are loaded to each slot.
Q312B (12 slots occupied)
CPU 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 .... Slot number
120 to 13F
140 to 15F
160 to 17F
100 to 11F
A0 to BF
C0 to DF
E0 to FF
00 to 1F
20 to 3F
40 to 5F
60 to 7F
80 to 9F
.... I/O number
Q series
power supply CPU module
module
Extension base unit The figure shows the configuration when 32-point modules are loaded to each slot.

extension
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 base
1C0 to 1DF
2C0 to 2DF
1A0 to 1BF
2A0 to 2BF
1E0 to 1FF
2E0 to 2FF
180 to 19F
200 to 21F
220 to 23F
240 to 25F
260 to 27F
280 to 29F
QA1S68B (8 slots occupied)

45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52
extension 5th
24 25 26 27 28 base extension
base
5C0 to 5DF
5A0 to 5BF
5E0 to 5FF
300 to 31F
320 to 33F
340 to 35F
360 to 37F
380 to 39F
600 to 61F
620 to 63F
640 to 65F
660 to 67F
680 to 69F
AnS series power supply
QA1S65B (5 slots occupied)
Q68B (8 slots occupied) 3rd
53 54 55 56 57
extension
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 6th
base
extension
base
6C0 to 6DF
6A0 to 6BF
6E0 to 6FF
3C0 to 3DF
700 to 71F
720 to 73F
3A0 to 3BF
3E0 to 3FF
400 to 41F
420 to 43F
440 to 45F
460 to 47F
480 to 49F
QA68B (8 slots occupied)

58 59 60 61 62 63
Q68B (8 slots occupied) 4th 7th

extension extension
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 base base
7C0 to 7DF
7A0 to 7BF
7E0 to 7FF
740 to 75F
760 to 77F
780 to 79F
4C0 to 4DF
4A0 to 4BF
4E0 to 4FF
500 to 51F
520 to 53F
540 to 55F
560 to 57F
580 to 59F
Prohibite
Prohibite
A series power supply

When module
is mounted an
error occurs.

Note1Note2Note3
1
OVERVIEW
Maximum number of
Basic extension stages of 7 extension stages Note2.1 Note2.2
Note2.1 Maximum number of 2
64 modules Note2.1 Note2.2
mounted I/O modules
Universal
Applicable main base
CONFIGURATION
UD unit model
Q33B, Q35B, Q38B, Q312B
Note2.2
Module types requiring no power supply module Q52B, Q55B, QA6ADP+A5 B Note2.3
SYSTEM
High
Performance Module types requiring a Q series power supply module Q63B, Q65B, Q68B, Q612B
Applicable extension Module types requiring an AnS series power supply
Note2.3 base unit model moduleNote2.3
QA1S65B, QA1S68B
3
Module types requiring an A series power supply
QA65B, QA68B, QA6ADP+A6 B
moduleNote2.3
SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL
module
moduleNote2.3
A1S61PN, A1S62PN, A1S63P
4
SPECIFICATIONS OF
A61P, A61PN, A62P, A63P, A61PEU, A62PEU
THE CPU MODULE

moduleNote2.3
HARDWARE
5
POWER SUPPLY
MODULE
6
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
7
Note1
Basic When the Q00CPU or Q01CPU is used:

MEMORY CARD AND
Maximum number of extension stages of the extension base unit : 4 stages

Note2.1 Maximum number of mountable I/O modules : 24 modules
Note2
BATTERY
Universal When the Q02UCPU is used:

UD Maximum number of extension stages of the extension base unit : 4 stages
Note3
Note2.2 Maximum number o Note2.3 f mountable I/O modules : 36 modules 8
CPU MODULE START-
High
UP PROCEDURES
Performance
Usable only when the High Performance model QCPU is used.

Note2.3

2 - 20
Cautions
• Do not use extension cable longer than an overall extension length of 13.2m
(43.31ft.).
• When using an extension cable, do not bind it together with the main circuit
(high voltage and heavy current) line or do not lay down them closely to each
other.
• Set up the number of extension stages so that the number is not duplicated
with another.
• When the Q5 B, Q6 B, QA1S6 B, QA6 B, and QA6ADP+A5 B/
A6 B*1 are used together as the extension base unit, mount the Q5 B/
Q6 B, QA1S6 B, QA6 B, and QA6ADP+A5 B/A6 B in order from the
nearest position of the main base unit. Set the extension stage No. in order,
starting from the Q5 B/Q6 B,
Although there are no particular restrictions on the order of the installation of
the Q5 B and Q6 B, refer to Section 6.1.4 for the availability.
• The Q6 RB cannot be connected as an extension base unit.
occurs.
* 1: When using the QA1S6 B as the extension base unit, the QA6ADP+A5 B/A6 B cannot be
connected.

1
(c) When the redundant power main base unit (Q3 RB) is used
Redundant power main base unit ...The figure shows the configuration when 32-I/O modules are loaded
OVERVIEW
Q38RB (8 slots occupied) to each slot.
CPU 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 .... Slot number
CD to DF
A0 to BF
E0 to FF
00 to 1F
20 to 3F
40 to 5F
60 to 7F
80 to 9F
.... I/O number
CONFIGURATION
Redundant
CPU module
SYSTEM
Power supply
module
Extension base unit ...The figure shows the configuration when 32-I/O modules are loaded to each slot.
3
Q55B 1st
extension
(5 slots occupied) base
SPECIFICATIONS
8 9 10 11 12
120 to 13F
140 to 15F
160 to 17F
180 to 19F
100 to 11F
GENERAL
4
2nd 5th
extension extension
Q68RB (8 slots occupied) base Q68RB (8 slots occupied) base
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
SPECIFICATIONS OF
4C0 to 4DF
1C0 to 1DF
4A0 to 4BF
1A0 to 1BF
4E0 to 4FF
1E0 to 1FF
500 to 51F
520 to 53F
240 to 25F
260 to 27F
200 to 21F
220 to 23F
280 to 29F
440 to 45F
460 to 47F
480 to 49F
THE CPU MODULE

HARDWARE
3rd 6th
extension extension
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 5
2C0 to 2DF
5C0 to 5DF
2A0 to 2BF
5A0 to 5BF
2E0 to 2FF
5E0 to 5FF
300 to 31F
320 to 33F
600 to 61F
620 to 63F
540 to 55F
340 to 35F
560 to 57F
360 to 37F
580 to 59F
380 to 39F
POWER SUPPLY
MODULE
4th 7th
extension extension
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
6
3C0 to 3DF
6C0 to 6DF
3A0 to 3BF
6A0 to 6BF
3E0 to 3FF
6E0 to 6FF
400 to 41F
420 to 43F
700 to 71F
720 to 73F
640 to 65F
740 to 75F
660 to 67F
760 to 77F
680 to 69F
780 to 79F
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES

2 - 22
Note4Note5
Table2.3 Restrictions on system configuration and applicable base units, extension
Basic cables and power supply modules
Maximum number of
Note2.4 extension stages of 7 extension stages Note2.4 Note2.5
Universal
Maximum number of
64 modules Note2.4 Note2.5
UD mounted I/O modules
Note2.5 Applicable redundant
Q38RB
base unit model
Models requiring no power supply module Q52B, Q55B
Models requiring a redundant power supply
base unit model Q68RB
module
Redundant power
Q63RP, Q64RP
supply module
Cautions
• Do not use extension cables exceeding an overall extension length of 13.2m
(43.31ft.).
• When using an extension cable, keep it away from the main circuit (high
voltage and heavy current) line.
with another.
• If both the Q5 B and Q6 RB extension base units are used together, the
order of connection is not restricted. Refer to Section 6.1.4 and check
whether the module is applicable or not.
• The QA1S6 B, QA6 B, QA6ADP+A5 B/A6 B or Q6 B cannot be
connected as an extension base unit.
occurs.
• When the redundant base unit is used, bus connection of GOT is not
available.
Note4
Basic When Q00CPU or Q01CPU is used:

Note5
Universal When the Q02UCPU is used:

Note2.5 Maximum number of mountable I/O modules : 36 modules : 36odules

1
(d) When the slim type main base unit (Q3 SB) is used
Slim type main base unit ... The figure shows the configuration
OVERVIEW
when 32-point modules are loaded to each slot.
Q35SB (5 slots occupied)
CPU 0 1 2 3 4 .... Slot number
00 to 1F
20 to 3F
40 to 5F
60 to 7F
80 to 9F
.... I/O number
CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
Slim type
module
3
Table2.4 Restrictions on the system configuration and applicable base units and power
SPECIFICATIONS
supply modules
GENERAL
Maximum number of
5 modules
mounted I/O modules
Applicable slim type
main base model
Q32SB, Q33SB, Q35SB
4
Slim type power supply
SPECIFICATIONS OF
Q61SP
THE CPU MODULE

module
HARDWARE
Cautions
• The Process CPU and Redundant CPU are not allowed to use with the slim
type main base unit.
5
• The slim type main base unit does not have an extension cable connector.
The extension base unit cannot be connected and bus connection of GOT is
POWER SUPPLY
not available.
MODULE
6
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES

2 - 24
(e) When the Multiple CPU high speed main base unit (Q3 DB) is used
Multiple CPU high speed main base unit The figure shows the configuration when 32-point modules are loaded to each slot.
Q312DB (12 slots occupied)
CPU 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 .... Slot number
120 to 13F
140 to 15F
160 to 17F
100 to 11F
CD to DF
A0 to BF
E0 to FF
00 to 1F
20 to 3F
40 to 5F
60 to 7F
80 to 9F
.... I/O number
Q series
module
Extension base unit The figure shows the configuration when 32-point modules are loaded to each slot.

extension
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 base
1C0 to 1DF
2C0 to 2DF
1A0 to 1BF
2A0 to 2BF
1E0 to 1FF
2E0 to 2FF
180 to 19F
200 to 21F
220 to 23F
240 to 25F
260 to 27F
280 to 29F

Q68B (8 slots occupied) 5th
extension extension
24 25 26 27 28 base 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 base
5C0 to 5DF
5A0 to 5BF
5E0 to 5FF
600 to 61F
620 to 63F
640 to 65F
660 to 67F
680 to 69F
300 to 31F
320 to 33F
340 to 35F
360 to 37F
380 to 39F
Q68B (8 slots occupied) 3rd Q68B (8 slots occupied) 6th

extension extension
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 base 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 base
6C0 to 6DF
6A0 to 6BF
6E0 to 6FF
700 to 71F
720 to 73F
740 to 75F
760 to 77F
780 to 79F
3C0 to 3DF
3A0 to 3BF
3E0 to 3FF
400 to 41F
420 to 43F
440 to 45F
460 to 47F
480 to 49F

extension extension
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 base 61 62 63 base
7C0 to 7DF
4C0 to 4DF
7A0 to 7BF
4A0 to 4BF
7E0 to 7FF
4E0 to 4FF
500 to 51F
520 to 53F
540 to 55F
560 to 57F
580 to 59F
Prohibite
Prohibite
When module
is mounted an
error occurs.

1
Table2.5 Restrictions on the system configuration and applicable base units, extensioncables and
Basic power supply modules
OVERVIEW
Maximum number of
Note2.6 extension stages of 7 extension stages Note2.6 Note2.7
Universal
Maximum number of 2
UD 64 modules Note2.6 Note2.7
mounted I/O modules
Note2.7 Applicable main base
CONFIGURATION
Q38DB, Q312DB
unit model
Module types requiring no power supply module Q52B, Q55B
SYSTEM
Module types requiring a Q series power supply
base unit model Q63B, Q65B, Q68B, Q612B
module
Extension cable QC05B, QC06B, QC12B, QC30B, QC50B, QC100B 3
module
SPECIFICATIONS
Note6Note7
GENERAL
Cautions
• Do not use extension cable longer than an overall extension length of 13.2m
(43.31ft.).
• When using an extension cable, do not bind it together with the main circuit 4
(high voltage and heavy current) line or do not lay down them closely to each
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
other.
HARDWARE
with another.
• The Q6 RB cannot be connected as an extension base unit.
• Connect the extension cable from OUT of the extension cable connector of 5
POWER SUPPLY
occurs.
MODULE
6
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
7
MEMORY CARD AND
Note6
BATTERY
Basic When the Q00CPU or Q01CPU is used:

Note7
Note2.6 Maximum number of mountable I/O modules : 24 modules 8
CPU MODULE START-
When the Q02UCPU is used:

UP PROCEDURES
Universal


2 - 26
2.1.2 System Configuration for Bus connection of GOT
In the system including the Q series CPU module, the GOT can be connected to the bus
using the extension cable connector of the main base unit or extension base unit.
This section describes the system configuration for connecting GOT using bus topology.
For details of the connection method, refer to the following:
GOT-A900 Series User's Manual (Connection)
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual
(1) GOT recognized by CPU module

When GOT is connected to the bus, the CPU module recognizes the GOT as an
intelligent function module with 16 I/O points.
Therefore, its I/O must be assigned to the CPU module in the GOT setup. (In this
case, one extension stage (16 points x 10 slots) must be added.)
For details of the GOT setup, refer to the following manual:
GOT-A900 Series Operating Manual (Extension Function/Option Function)
GT15 User’s Manual
(2) Max. number of connectable GOTs

Up to 5 GOTs can be connected to the bus.
(3) Caution
• When connecting a GOT to the bus, be sure to connect the stages of the base
units before the GOT.
• It is not allowed to connect a GOT between two different base units via a bus.
Diagram 2.21 Caution for when connecting a GOT to the bus

1
• Select an appropriate extension cable to connect GOT to the bus so that its over-
all cable length is 13.2m max.
• To install the first GOT to the bus at a place 13.2m or more away, a bus extension
OVERVIEW
connector box (A9GT-QCNB) is necessary. (However, this is not usable when
using the Q00JCPU.)
For details of the A9GT-QCNB, refer to the following: 2
A9ST-QCNB Type Bus Extension Connector Box User's Manual
CONFIGURATION
• When the redundant base unit (Q3 RB/Q6 RB/Q6 WRB) is used as the base
unit, GOT cannot be connected to the bus.
SYSTEM
• When using the QA1S6 B as the extension base unit, although GOT is
physically conncected to the stage after the stages of the extension base unit,
assign its I/O number after the Q6 B/Q5 B. 3
<Ex.> Installing 16-point modules into all the slots as shown below
SPECIFICATIONS
Extension
GENERAL
stage number I/O number
Q38B main base unit 00 to 7F
Q68B extension base unit 1 80 to FF

4
SPECIFICATIONS OF
QA1S68B extension base unit 3 1A0 to 21F
THE CPU MODULE

GOT 2 100 to 19F
HARDWARE
Diagram 2.22 I/O number when 16-point modules are
mounted on all slots.
• When using the QA6 B and QA6ADP+A5 B/A6 B as the extension base unit, 5
the bus connection is not available for GOT.
• Before starting up the CPU module, be sure to initialize the GOT the bus
POWER SUPPLY
connection.
MODULE
(Set up the extension stage and slot numbers in the GOT setup.)
• Apply the power to the CPU module and GOT by either of the following methods.
1)Turn on the CPU module and GOT simultaneously. 6
2)Turn on the CPU module, and then the GOT.
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES

2 - 28
(4) Outline of system configuration

Main base unit ... The figure shows the configuration when 16-point modules are loaded to each slot.
CPU 0 1 2 3 4 .... Slot number
00 to 0F
10 to 1F
20 to 2F
30 to 3F
40 to 4F
.... I/O number
Q series
module
Extension base unit ... The figure shows the configuration when 16-point modules are loaded to each slot.

5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
C0 to CF
B0 to BF
A0 to AF
50 to 5F
60 to 6F
70 to 7F
80 to 8F
90 to 9F

13 14 15 16 17
100 to 10F
110 to 11F
E0 to EF
D0 to 0F
F0 to FF
1) 2) 3) 4) 5)
No. of extension stages: 3 No. of extension stages: 3 No. of extension stages: 3 No. of extension stages: 3 No. of extension stages: 3 Set on
slots No.: 0 slots No.: 1 slots No.: 2 slots No.: 3 slots No.: 4 the GOT
side.
Stage extension image for GOT connection viewed from CPU module
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
120 to 12F
130 to 13F
140 to 14F
150 to 15F
160 to 16F
GOT (No. of extension stages:F3)

16 points ×10 slots occupied
1) 2) 3) 4) 5)
Set to empty in "I/O assignment setting"
of PLC parameter
Diagram 2.23 System configuration example when using GOT

Note8Note9
1
When using Q00JCPU :2
OVERVIEW
When using Q00CPU, Q01CPU or Q02UCPU :4
Maximum number of
When using High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, The final stage is occupied
extension stages for bus
Q03UDCPU, Q04UDHCPU, Q06UDHCPU, Q13UDHCPU, by GOT.
Basic
connection of GOT
Q26UDHCPU, Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, 2
Q13UDEHCPU or Q26UDEHCPU, :7
When using Q00JCPU : 16 No. of connected GOTs
CONFIGURATION
Note2.8
When using Q00CPU or Q01CPU : 24 No. of connected GOTs
High
Performance When using Q02UCPU : 36 No. of connected GOTs
SYSTEM
Maximum number of When using High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU,
Note2.9 mountable I/O modules Q03UDCPU, Q04UDHCPU, Q06UDHCPU,
Q13UDHCPU, Q26UDHCPU, Q03UDECPU,
Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU,
3
Basic
Q13UDEHCPU or Q26UDEHCPU : 64 No. of connected GOTs
SPECIFICATIONS
Applicable main base
Note2.8 Q33B, Q35B, Q38B, Q312B, Q38DB, Q312DB
unitNote2.8
GENERAL
High
Performance
Models requiring no power supply
Q52B, Q55B
module
Note2.9 Applicable extension Models requiring the Q series
base unit power supply module
Q63B, Q65B, Q68B, Q612B 4
Models requiring the AnS series
SPECIFICATIONS OF
QA1S65B, QA1S68B
THE CPU MODULE

power supply moduleNote2.9
HARDWARE
QC05B, QC06B, QC12B, QC30B, QC50B, QC100B
cable
moduleNote2.8
AnS series power supply 5
A1S61PN, A1S62PN, A1S63P
moduleNote2.9
POWER SUPPLY
MODULE
6
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
7
MEMORY CARD AND
Note8
BATTERY
Basic
Because the Q00JCPU is the CPU module with a power supply module and main base unit
incorporated, the main base unit (Q3 B) and Q series power supply module are not required.
Note9
Note2.8 8
CPU MODULE START-
High
UP PROCEDURES
Performance
Usable only when the High Performance model QCPU is used.

Note2.9

2 - 30
2.1.3 Configuration of peripheral devices
This section describes the configurations of the peripheral devices usable in the system
where the Basic model QCPU, the High Performance model QCPU or the Process CPU is
used.
(1) When the Basic model QCPU is used

Basic model QCPU
Personal Computer (GX Developer, GX Configurator) RS-232 cable
* : For the GX Developer and GX Configurator versions compatible with the Basic model QCPU, refer
to Section 2.1.4.
Diagram 2.24 Configuration of peripheral devices

1
(2) When the High Performance model QCPU is used
OVERVIEW
CONFIGURATION
Memory card 1
SYSTEM
RS-232 cable
3
Personal Computer
SPECIFICATIONS
4
(GX Developer, GX Configurator)
GENERAL
USB cable 2, 3
(Connector type B)
4
Memory card 1 PC card
adapter
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
HARDWARE
* 1: Format the ATA card by GX Developer only. ( Section 7.1.4.)
* 2: Not usable for the Q02CPU.
* 3: For the writing to the memory card and the USB cable details, refer to the following:
* 4: For the GX Developer and GX Configurator versions compatible with the High Performance 5
model QCPU, refer to Section 2.1.4.
POWER SUPPLY
MODULE
6
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES

2 - 32
(3) When the Process CPU is used

Process CPU
Memory card 1
RS-232 cable
Personal Computer
(GX Developer, GX Configurator,
PX Developer) 3
USB cable 2
(Connector type B)

adapter

* 3: For the GX Developer, GX Configurator and PX Developer versions compatible with the Process
CPU, refer to Section 2.1.4.

1
(4) When the Universal model QCPU is used
OVERVIEW
(a) QnU(D)(H)CPU
CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
Memory card 1
3
4
Ethenet cable
SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL
Personal Computer
3
USB cable
4
2
(Connector type miniB)
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
adapter
HARDWARE
5
* 3: For the GX Developer and GX Configurator versions compatible with the Universal model QCPU,
refer to Section 2.1.4.
POWER SUPPLY
MODULE
6
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES

2 - 34
(b) QnUDE(H)CPU
Memory card 1
4
Ethenet cable
Personal Computer
3
USB cable 2
(Connector type miniB)

adapter

* 3: For the GX Developer and GX Configurator versions compatible with the Universal model QCPU,
refer to Section 2.1.4.
* 4: Use the following Ethernet cables.
• For 10BASE-T connection: Cables compliant with Ethernet standards, category 3 or higher
(STP/UTP cables)
• For 100BASE-TX connection: Cables compliant with Ethernet standards, category 5 or higher
(STP/UTP cables)
(In an environment subject to electric noise, use shielded twisted pair (STP) cables.)

1
2.1.4 Applicable Devices and Software
OVERVIEW
This section describes the applicable devices and software packages for configuring a
system.
(1) Modules replaceable online 2

The modules controlled by the Process CPU or Redundant CPU can be replaced
online ( Section 12.4). The modules controlled by the Basic model QCPU, High
CONFIGURATION
Performance model QCPU, Universal model QCPU, Motion CPU, or PC CPU module
SYSTEM
cannot be replaced online.
The following modules in Table2.7 can be replaced online:
Table2.7 Modules replaceable online 3

Module type Restriction
Input module
SPECIFICATIONS
Output module No restriction
GENERAL
I/O composite module
Analog-digital converter module
Digital-analog converter module
Supporting with function version
Intelligent function module Temperature input module
C.*1
4
Temperature control module
SPECIFICATIONS OF
Pulse input module
THE CPU MODULE

* 1: The intelligent function module mounted on the main base unit when the Redundant CPU is used
HARDWARE
cannot be replaced online.
(2) Applicable software

5
(a) GX Developer and PX Developer versions applicable in the single CPU
system
POWER SUPPLY
Table2.8 Applicable GX Developer and PX Developer
MODULE
Applicable software version
CPU module
GX Developer PX Developer
Basic model QCPU Version 7.00A or later
High Performance model QCPU Version 4.00A or later
N/A 6
Q02PHCPU
EXTENSION CABLE
Version 8.68W or later Version 1.18U or later
Q06PHCPU
Process CPU BASE UNIT AND
Q12PHCPU
Version 7.10L or later*1 Version 1.00A or later
Q25PHCPU
Q02UCPU
Q03UDCPU
Version 8.48A or later
Q04UDHCPU 7
Q06UDHCPU
MEMORY CARD AND
Q13UDHCPU
Universal model Version 8.62Q or later
Q26UDHCPU N/A
QCPU
Q03UDECPU
BATTERY
Q04UDEHCPU
Q06UDEHCPU Version 8.68W or later
Q13UDEHCPU
Q26UDEHCPU 8
CPU MODULE START-
* 1: When using PX Developer, use GX Developer version 7.20W or higher.

UP PROCEDURES

2 - 36
(b) GX Configurator versions applicable in the single CPU system

GX Configurator versions shown in Table2.9 can be used for the single CPU
system.
Available GX Configurator versions differ depending on the intelligent function
modules used.
For available GX Configurator versions, refer to the manual for the relevant
intelligent function module
Table2.9 Applicable GX Configurator

CPU module
Product name Version
GX Configurator-AD Version 1.10L or later
GX Configurator-DA Version 1.10L or later
GX Configurator-SC Version 1.10L or later
GX Configurator-CT Version 1.10L or later
GX Configurator-TI Version 1.10L or later
Basic model QCPU GX Configurator-TC Version 1.10L or later
GX Configurator-FL Version 1.10L or later
GX Configurator-QP Version 2.10L or later
GX Configurator-PT Version 1.10L or later
GX Configurator-AS Version 1.13P or later
GX Configurator-MB Version 1.00A or later
GX Configurator-DN Version 1.10L or later
GX Configurator-AD SW0D5C-QADU 00A or later
GX Configurator-DA SW0D5C-QADU 00A or later
GX Configurator-SC SW0D5C-QSCU 00A or later
GX Configurator-CT SW0D5C-QCTU 00A or later
GX Configurator-TI Version 1.00A or later
High Performance model QCPU GX Configurator-TC SW0D5C-QCTU 00A or later
GX Configurator-FL SW0D5C-QFLU 00A or later
GX Configurator-QP Version 2.00A or later
GX Configurator-PT Version 1.00A or later
GX Configurator-DN Version 1.00A or later
GX Configurator-AD Version 1.13P or later
GX Configurator-DA Version 1.13P or later
GX Configurator-SC Version 1.13P or later
GX Configurator-CT Version 1.13P or later
GX Configurator-TI Version 1.13P or later
Process CPU GX Configurator-TC Version 1.13P or later
GX Configurator-FL Version 1.13P or later
GX Configurator-QP Version 2.13P or later
GX Configurator-PT Version 1.13P or later
GX Configurator-DN Version 1.13P or later

1
Table2.9 Applicable GX Configurator
CPU module
OVERVIEW
Product name Version
GX Configurator-AD Version 2.05F or later
GX Configurator-DA Version 2.06G or later
GX Configurator-SC Version 2.12N or later 2
GX Configurator-CT Version 1.25B or later
GX Configurator-TI Version 1.24A or later
CONFIGURATION
GX Configurator-TC Version 1.23Z or later
GX Configurator-FL Version 1.23Z or later
SYSTEM
GX Configurator-QP Version 2.25B or later *1 *2
GX Configurator-PT Version 1.23Z or later
GX Configurator-AS
GX Configurator-MB
Version 1.22Y or later
Version 1.08J or later
3
GX Configurator-DN Version 1.23Z or later
SPECIFICATIONS
* 1: The QnUDE(H)CPU can be used only through USB connections.
* 2: Version 2.29F or later is available for the Q13UDHCPU, Q26UDHCPU, and QnUDE(H)CPU.
GENERAL
4
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
HARDWARE
5
POWER SUPPLY
MODULE
6
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES

2 - 38
2.1.5 Precaution on system configuration
This section describes the restrictions on configuring a system with a Q Series CPU
module.
(1) Number of modules loaded

The number of modules to be installed and functions are limited depending on the
type of the modules.
(a) When the Basic model QCPU is used
Table2.10 Number of modules loaded
Limitation of installable modules per

Applicable module Type
system
• QJ71LP21
• QJ71BR11
Q series MELSECNET/H network • QJ71LP21-25
One module only
module • QJ71LP21S-25
• QJ71LP21G
• QJ71LP21GE
• QJ71E71
• QJ71E71-B2
Q series Ethernet interface module One module only
• QJ71E71-B5
• QJ71E71-100
Q series CC-Link system master • QJ61BT11
Up to 2 modules *1
local module • QJ61BT11N
Interrupt module • QI60 One module only *2
GOT-A900 Series
(for bus connection only)*6
GOT Up to 5 modules
GOT1000 Series
* 1: Products of function version B or later are applicable.

* 2: This is the number of the interrupt modules to which the interrupt pointer settings have not been
done.
There is no restriction on the number of loaded modules when the interrupt pointer settings have
been done.

1
(b) When the High Performance model QCPU or Process CPU is used
OVERVIEW
Limitation of installable modules
Applicable module Type
per system
Q series CC-Link IE controller • QJ71GP21-SX
network module*3 • QJ71GP21S-SX
Up to 2 modules 2
• QJ71LP21
Up to 4 in total of
• QJ71BR11 Total: Up to 4
CONFIGURATION
PLC to PLC
Q series MELSECNET/H network • QJ71LP21-25 modules
network and
module • QJ71LP21S-25
SYSTEM
remote I/O
• QJ71LP21G
network modules
• QJ71LP21GE
• QJ71E71
• QJ71E71-B2
3
Q series Ethernet interface module Up to 4 modules
• QJ71E71-B5
SPECIFICATIONS
• QJ71E71-100
No limit *4
GENERAL
No limit
MELSECNET/MINI-S3 data link • A1SJ71PT32-S3
(setting of automatic refresh function
module*5 • A1SJ71T32-S3
not allowed) 4
• A1SD51S
SPECIFICATIONS OF
• A1SD21-S1
THE CPU MODULE

• A1SJ71J92-S3
HARDWARE
Special function module for the AnS (When GET/PUT service is
Up to 6 modules in total
series *5 used)
• A1SJ71AP23Q
• A1SJ71AR23Q
• A1SJ71AT23BQ 5
• A1SI61 *5 One unit only
Interrupt module
• QI60 One module only
POWER SUPPLY
GOT-A900 Series
MODULE
GOT Up to 5 modules
GOT1000 Series
* 3: Only High Performance model QCPU whose serial No. (first five digits) is "09012" or later and 6
Process QCPU whose serial No. (first five digits) is "10042" or later can be used.
EXTENSION CABLE
* 4: The following number of modules per CPU can be controlled with the CC-Link network parameter
BASE UNIT AND
setting by GX Developer.
• The CPU module whose first 5 digits of serial number is "08031" or earlier: Up to four modules
• The CPU module whose first 5 digits of serial number is "08032" or later: Up to eight modules
If the parameters are set up by CC-Link dedicated instructions, the number of modules installed is
not limited.
For the CC-Link system master/local modules whose parameters can be set up by dedicated 7
instructions, refer to the manual below.
MEMORY CARD AND
CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual

* 5: This is applicable only when the High Performance model QCPU is used.
BATTERY
* 6: For applicable GOT modules, refer to the following manuals.

• GOT-A900 Series User’s Manual (GT Work2 Version2/GT Designer2
Version2 Compatible Connection System Manual)
• GOT1000 Series Connection Manual
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES

2 - 40
Remark
For restrictions on mounting the A series module on the QA6 B and
QA6ADP+A5 B/A6 B, refer to the following manual.
QA65B/QA68B Extension Base Unit User's Manual
QA6ADP QA Conversion Adapter Module User's Manual
(c) When the Redundant CPU is used

For the module having a limit to the number of mountable modules, refer to the
following manual.
QnPRHCPU User's Manual(Redundant System)
(d) When the Univarsal model QCPU is used
Limitation of installable modules per

Applicable Module Type
system
Q Series CC-Link IE controller • QJ71GP21-SX
network module*7 • QJ71GP21S-SX
• QJ71LP21
• QJ71BR11 Up to 4 in total of PLC to PLC network
• QJ71LP21-25
Q Series MELSECNET/H network and remote I/O network modules*8
• QJ71LP21S-25
module
• QJ71LP21G
• QJ71LP21GE
• QJ72LP25GE
• QJ71E71
• QJ71E71-B2
Q series Ethernet interface module Up to 4 modules *8
• QJ71E71-B5
• QJ71E71-100
No limit *9
Interrupt module • QI60 One module only*10
GOT1000 Series
GOT Up to 5 modules
* 7: The CC-Link IE controller network module whose first 5 digits of serial number is "09042" or later
can only be used.
* 8: The number of mountable modules per system in the Q02UCPU is up to two in total.
* 9: The following number of modules can be controlled when the network parameter for the CC-Link
is set by GX Developer.
• Q02UCPU: Up to four modules
• Q03UDCPU, Q04UDHCPU, Q06UDHCPU, Q13UDHCPU, Q26UDHCPU, Q03UDECPU,
Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU or Q26UDEHCPU: Up to eight modules
If the parameters are set up by CC-Link dedicated instructions, the number of modules installed
is not limited.
For the CC-Link system master/local modules whose parameters can be set up by dedicated
instructions, refer to the manual below.
CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual
* 10: The number of interrupt modules where the interrupt pointer setting is not made is shown.
* 11: For applicable GOT modules, refer to the following manuals.

1
(2) Modules that have restrictions on use of a Built-in Ethernet port QCPU
Table2.13 lists the modules that have restrictions on use of a Built-in Ethernet port
OVERVIEW
QCPU.
Table2.13 Modules that have restrictions on use of a Built-in Ethernet port QCPU
Product name Model First five digits of available serial No.

2
• QJ71C24N
CONFIGURATION
Serial communication module • QJ71C24N-R2
10042 or later
• QJ71C24N-R4
SYSTEM
Modem interface module • QJ71CMON
Web server module • QJ71WS96
10012 or later
MES interface module • QJ71MES96
3
(3) Combination of power supply module, base unit and CPU module
SPECIFICATIONS
The combination of the power supply module, base unit, and CPU module is
restricted.
GENERAL
(Ex.) The redundant power supply module (Q64RP) can be mounted to the
redundant power main base unit (Q38RB), redundant power extension base 4
unit (Q68RB), or redundant type extension base unit (Q65WRB) only.
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
For details, refer to Section 5.1 "Base Unit that Can Be Used in Combination with
HARDWARE
Power Supply Module."
POWER SUPPLY
MODULE
6
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES

2 - 42
(4) Caution for use of the High Performance model QCPU

1) When the AnS series special-function modules shown below are used, a
limitation is given to an accessible device range.
• A1SJ71J92-S3 type JEMANET interface module
• A1SD51S type intelligent communication module
Table2.14 Accessible device range
Device Accessible device range

Input (X), Output (Y) X/Y0 to 7FF
Internal relay (M), Latch relay (L) M0 to 8191
Link relay (B) B0 to FFF
Timer (T) T0 to 2047
Counter (C) C0 to 1023
Data register (D) D0 to 6143
Link register (W) W0 to FFF
Annunciator (F) F0 to 2047
2) The modules shown below cannot be used.
Table2.15 Incompatible modules
Module Name Type

MELSECNET/10 network A1SJ71LP21, A1SJ71BR11, A1SJ71QLP21,
module A1SJ71QLP21S, A1SJ71QLP21GE, A1SJ71QBR11
MELSECNET (II), /B data link module A1SJ71AP21, A1SJ71AR21, A1SJ71AT21B
A1SJ71QE71N-B2(-B5),
Ethernet interface module
A1SJ71E71N-B2(-B5)
Serial communication module, computer link module A1SJ71QC24(N), A1SJ71UC24-R2(-PRF)
CC-Link master-local module A1SJ61QBT11, A1SJ61BT11
Modem interface module A1SJ71CMO-S3
3) The QnA/A series dedicated instructions for the following modules are not
available.
Re-writing using the FROM/TO instruction is required.
Table2.16 Modules requiring instruction modification
Module Name Type

High speed counter module A1SD61, A1SD62, A1SD62D(-S1), A1SD62E
MELSECNET/MINI-S3 A1SJ71PT32-S3, A1SJ71T32-S3
Positioning module A1SD75P1-S3(P2-S3/P3-S3)
ID module A1SJ71ID1-R4, A1SJ71ID2-R4

1
4) Some system configurations and functions are restricted when writing the
parameters set under the "High speed interrupt fixed scan interval" setting.
Refer to the following manual for the restrictions.
OVERVIEW
QCPU User's Manual
(Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
5) The computer link/multidrop link module A1SJ71UC24-R4 can use the 2
multidrop link function only. Computer link function and printer function are not
CONFIGURATION
available.
6) For restrictions on mounting the A series module on the QA6 B and
SYSTEM
QA6ADP+A5 B/A6 B, refer to the following manual.
QA65B/QA68B Extension Base Unit User's Manual
QA6ADP QA Conversion Adapter Module User's Manual 3
(5) Caution for GOT connection
SPECIFICATIONS
Only the GOT1000, GOT-A900 and GOT-F900 series are usable. (It is necessary to
GENERAL
install the basic OS and communication driver compatible with the Q mode.)
The GOT800 series, A77GOT, and A64GOT are not usable.
4
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
HARDWARE
5
POWER SUPPLY
MODULE
6
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES

2 - 44
2.2 Checking Serial Number and Function Version
The serial number and function version of the CPU module can be checked on the rating
plate, on the front of the module, and on the System monitor screen in GX Developer.
(1) Checking on the rating plate

The rated plate is located on the side face of the CPU module.
Serial number (first 5 digits)

function version
Standard symbol for

conformance is described.
Diagram 2.29 Plate rated
(2) Checking on the front of the module

The serial number is shown on the rating plate located on the front (at the bottom) of
the module.
This does not apply to the following CPU modules.
• Modules manufactured in mid-September, 2007 or earlier.
• Redundant CPUs manufactured in March 2008 or earlier.
• Redundant CPUs and Q00JCPU.
090911090910001-B
Serial number
Diagram 2.30 Display on the front of the module
2 - 45 2.2 Checking Serial Number and Function Version

Remark
OVERVIEW
Attaching a serial number label to the front of each Redundant CPU was started
from March 2008.
However, some of the modules manufactured at the beginning of it may not have
the label. 2
CONFIGURATION
(3) Checking on the System monitor screen (Product information list
SYSTEM
screen)
To display the screen for checking the serial number and function version, select
[Diagnostics] [System monitor] and click the Product Inf. List button in GX 3
Developer.
On the screen, the serial number and function version of intelligent function modules
SPECIFICATIONS
can also be checked.
GENERAL
Serial Function Production
number version number
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
HARDWARE
5
POWER SUPPLY
MODULE
6
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
Diagram 2.31 System monitor
[Serial No., Ver., and Product No.]

• The serial number of the module is displayed in the "Serial No." column.
• The function version of the module is displayed in the "Ver." column. 7
• The serial number (product number) printed on the rating plate of the module is
MEMORY CARD AND
displayed in the "Product No." column.*1

Note that "-" is displayed for a modules that does not support the product number
BATTERY
display.
* 1: The product number is displayed only for the Universal model QCPU.
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES
2.2 Checking Serial Number and Function Version 2 - 46

POINT
The serial number displayed on the Product information list screen of
GX Developer may differ from that on the rating plate and on the front of the
module.
• The serial number on the rating plate and on the front of the module
indicates the management information of the product.
• The serial number displayed on the Product information list screen
indicates the functional information of the product.
The functional information of the product is upgraded when a new
function is added.
2 - 47 2.2 Checking Serial Number and Function Version

3 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
1
CHAPTER3 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
OVERVIEW
The performance specifications of programmable controller are shown in Table3.1.
Table3.1 General specifications
Item Specifications 2
Operating ambient
0 to 55
CONFIGURATION
temperature
Storage ambient
-25 to 75 *3
SYSTEM
temperature
Operating ambient
5 to 95%RH *4, non-condensing
humidity
Storage ambient
3
5 to 95%RH *4,
non-condensing
humidity
SPECIFICATIONS
Frequency Acceleration Amplitude Sweep count
Under 3.5mm
GENERAL
Conforming 5 to 9Hz ----
intermittent (0.14inch) 10 times each in
Vibration to
vibration 9 to 150Hz 9.8m/s2 ---- X, Y, Z
resistance JIS B 3502,
IEC 61131-2
Under
5 to 9Hz ----
1.75mm directions 4
continuous (0.069inch) (for 80 min.)
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
vibration 9 to 150Hz 4.9m/s2 ----
Shock resistance Conforming to JIS B 3502, IEC 61131-2 (147 m/s2, 3 times in each of 3 directions X, Y, Z)
HARDWARE
Operating
No corrosive gases
ambience
Operating
2000m (6562ft.) max. 5
altitude*5
Installation location Inside control panel
POWER SUPPLY
Overvoltage
II max.
category *1
MODULE
Pollution level *2 2 max.
Equipment
category
Class I 6
EXTENSION CABLE
*1 : This indicates the section of the power supply to which the equipment is assumed to be connected between the public
BASE UNIT AND
electrical power distribution network and the machinery within premises. Category II applies to equipment for which
electrical power is supplied from fixed facilities.
The surge voltage withstand level for up to the rated voltage of 300 V is 2500 V.
*2 : This index indicates the degree to which conductive material is generated in terms of the environment in which the
equipment is used. 7
Pollution level 2 is when only non-conductive pollution occurs. A temporary conductivity caused by condensing must be
MEMORY CARD AND
expected occasionally.
*3 : The storage ambient temperature is -20 to 75 if the system includes the AnS/A series modules.
BATTERY
*4 : The operating ambient humidity and storage ambient humidity are 10 to 90%RH if the system includes the AnS/A
series modules.
*5 : Do not use or store the programmable controller under pressure higher than the atmospheric pressure of altitude 0m. 8
Doing so can cause a malfunction.
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES
When using the programmable controller under pressure, please contact your sales representative.
3-1
3 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Memo
3-2
4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS OF THE CPU MODULE
1
CHAPTER4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS OF THE CPU
MODULE
OVERVIEW
4.1 Performance Specifications 2
CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
Table4.1 to 4.5 show the performance specifications of the CPU module.
Table4.1 Performance Specifications
Basic model QCPU 3

Item
Q00JCPU Q00CPU Q01CPU
Control method Sequence program control method
SPECIFICATIONS
Refresh mode
I/O control mode
GENERAL
(Direct access I/O is available by specifying direct access I/O (DX , DY ).)
Sequence control Relay symbol language, logic symbolic language, MELSAP3 (SFC), MELSAP-L, function block,
Program language and structured text (ST)
language Process control
language
---- 4
Processing LD X0 200ns 160ns 100ns
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
speed
(sequence MOV D0 D1 700ns 560ns 350ns
HARDWARE
instruction)
Processing
Tracking execution
speed
time ----
(redundant
(extended scan time) 5
function)
Constant scan 1 to 2000ms
POWER SUPPLY
(Function for keeping regular scan time) (Setting available in1ms unit.) (Setting by parameters.)
8k steps 14k steps
Program capacity *1, *2
MODULE
(32k bytes) (56k bytes)
Program memory
58k bytes 94k bytes
(drive 0)
Memory card (RAM) 6
----
(drive 1)
EXTENSION CABLE
Memory card (ROM)
---- BASE UNIT AND
(drive 2)
Memory
Standard RAM
capacity*1 0 128k bytes *3
(drive 3)
Standard ROM
58k bytes 94k bytes
(drive 4)
7
CPU shared memory
MEMORY CARD AND
---- 1k bytes
*3 , *4
BATTERY
*1 : The unit of the file size stored in the memory area varies depending on the CPU module. For the details, refer to the manual below.
*2 : The maximum number of executable sequence steps is as shown below.(Program capacity) - (File header size (default: 34 steps))
For the details, refer to the manual below.
QCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals) 8
*3 : The capacity has been increased due to the function upgrade of the CPU module. ( Appendix 2)
CPU MODULE START-
*4 : The CPU shared memory is not latched.

UP PROCEDURES
( QCPU User's Manual (Multiple CPU System)

The CPU shared memory is cleared by turning on the programmable controller or resetting the CPU module.
4.1 Performance Specifications

4-1

Basic model QCPU
Item
Program memory 6 *5
Memory card (RAM) ----
Memory Flash
Max. number ----
card card
of files stored
(ROM) ATA card ----
Standard RAM ---- 1
Standard ROM 6 *5
No. of times of writing data into the
Max. 100000 times
standard ROM
No. of I/O device points
2048 points (X/Y0 to 7FF)
(No. of points usable on program.)
No. of I/O points
256 points
(No. of points accessible to the actual 1024 points (X/Y0 to 3FF)
(X/Y0 to FF)
I/O module.)
Internal relay [M] 8192 points by default (M0-8191) (changeable)
Latch relay [L] 2048 points by default (L0 to 2047) (changeable)
Link relay [B] 2048 points by default (B0 to 7FF) (changeable)
512 points by default (T0 to 511) (changeable)
(Sharing of low- and high-speed timers)
The low- and high-speed timers are specified by the instructions.
Timer [T]
The measurement unit of the low- and high-speed timers is set up by parameters.
(Low-speed timer: 1 to 1000ms, 1ms unit, 100ms by default)
(High-speed timer: 0.1 to 100.0ms, 0.1ms unit, 10.0ms by default)
0 point by default (sharing of the low- and high-speed retentive timers) (changeable)
The low- and high-speed retentive timers are specified by the instructions.
Retentive timer [ST] The measurement unit of the low- and high-speed retentive timers is set up by parameters.
No. of device points
(Low-speed retentive timer: 1 to 1000ms, 1ms unit, 100ms by default)

(High-speed retentive timer: 0.1 to 100.0ms, 0.1ms unit, 10.0ms by default)
• Normal counter: 512 points
by default (C0 to 511) (changeable)
Counter [C]
• Interrupt counter: 128 points max.
(0 point by default, setting by parameters)
Data register [D] 11136 points by default (D0 to 11135) (changeable)
Link register [W] 2048 points by default (W0 to 7FF) (changeable)
Annunciator [F] 1024 points by default (F0 to 1023) (changeable)
Edge relay [V] 1024 points by default (V0 to 1023) (changeable)
32768 points (R0 to 32767)/block
[R] ----
File (The number of device points is fixed.)
register 65536 points
[ZR] ----
(ZR0 to 65535) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Link special relay [SB] 1024 points (SB0 to 3FF) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Link special register [SW] 1024 points (SW0 to 3FF) (The number of device points is fixed.)
*5 : Each of parameter, intelligent function module parameter, sequence program, SFC program, device comment, and device initial value
files can be stored.
*6 :The number of points can be changed within the setting range.
( QCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
4-2 4.1 Performance Specifications

1
Basic model QCPU
OVERVIEW
Item
Step relay [S] *7 2048 points (S0 to 127/block) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Index register [Z] 10 points (Z0 to 9) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Pointer [P] 300 points (P0 to 299) (The number of device points is fixed.) 2
128 points (I0 to 127) (The number of device points is fixed.)
The cyclic interval of system interrupt pointers I28 to 31 can be set up by parameters.
CONFIGURATION
Interrupt pointer [I]
(2 to 1000ms, 1ms unit)
Default values I28: 100ms, I29: 40ms, I30: 20ms, I31: 10ms
SYSTEM
Special relay [SM] 1024 points (SM0 to 1023) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Special register [SD] 1024 points (SD0 to 1023) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Function input [FX] 16 points (FX0 to F) (The number of device points is fixed.)
3
Function output [FY] 16 points (FY0 to F) (The number of device points is fixed.)
SPECIFICATIONS
Function register [FD] 5 points (FD0 to 4) (The number of device points is fixed.)
GENERAL
No. of device tracking words ----
Device for accessing the link device directly.
Exclusively used for CC-Link IE controller network*8 and MELSECNET/H.
Link direct device
Specified form: J \X ,J \Y ,J \W ,J \B , 4
J \SW ,J \SB
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
Device for accessing the buffer memory of the intelligent function module directly.
Intelligent function module device
Specified form: U \G
HARDWARE
L0 to 2047 (default)
Latch range
(Latch range can be set up for B, F, V, T, ST, C, D, and W.) (Setting by parameters.)
RUN/PAUSE contact One contact can be set up in X0 to 7FF for each of RUN and PAUSE. (Setting by parameters.)
Year, month, date, hour, minute, second and day-of-week
(leap year automatically identified)
5
Timer function Accuracy: -3.2 to +5.27s(TYP.+1.98s)/d at 0
POWER SUPPLY
Accuracy: -2.57 to +5.27s(TYP.+2.22s)/d at 25
Accuracy: -11.68 to +3.65s(TYP.-2.64s)/d at 55
MODULE
Allowable momentary power failure
20ms or less (100VAC or more) Varies depending on the power supply module.
time
5VDC internal current consumption 0.26A *9 0.25A 0.27A
H 98mm(3.86inch) 98mm(3.86inch)
6
External dimensions W 245mm(9.65inch) *10 27.4mm(1.08inch)
EXTENSION CABLE
D 98mm(3.86inch) 89.3mm(3.52inch) BASE UNIT AND
Weight 0.66kg *10 0.13kg
*7 : The step relay is the device for the SFC function.

*8 : For use of CC-Link IE controller network, check the versions of the CPU module and GX Developer.( Appendix 2.1)
*9 : The value includes those of the CPU module and base unit. 7
*10 : The value includes those of the CPU module, base unit, and power supply module.
MEMORY CARD AND
Remark
BATTERY
For the general specifications, refer to CHAPTER 3.
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES

4-3
4.1.2 High Peformance model QCPU

Item
Q02CPU Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU
Refresh mode
I/O control mode
Sequence control Relay symbol language, logic symbolic language, MELSAP3 (SFC), MELSAP-L, function block,
Program language and structured text (ST)
----
language
Processing speed LD X0 79ns 34ns
(sequence
MOV D0 D1 237ns 102ns
instruction)
Tracking
Processing speed
execution time
(redundant ----
(extended scan
function)
time)
Constant scan
0.5 to 2000ms
(Function for keeping regular scan
(Setting available in 0.5ms unit.) (Setting by parameters.)
time)
28k steps 60k steps 124k steps 252k steps
(112k bytes) (240k bytes) (496 bytes) (1008 bytes)
Program memory
112k bytes 240k bytes 496k bytes 1008k bytes
(drive 0)
Memory card
Capacity of the installed memory card
(RAM)
(2M bytes max.)
(drive 1)
Memory card Capacity of the installed memory card
(ROM) (Flash card: 4M bytes max.,
Memory
(drive 2) ATA card: 32M bytes max.)
capacity*1 Standard RAM
64k bytes 128k bytes *3 256k bytes *3
(drive 3)
Standard ROM
(drive 4)
CPU shared
8k bytes
memory *3 , *4
*3 : The capacity has been increased due to the function upgrade of the CPU module. ( Appendix 2)

1
Item
OVERVIEW
Program memory 28 60 124 252 *5
Memory card (RAM) 287(When the Q2MEM-2MBS is used)
Max. number
Memory Flash
288
2
card card
of files stored
(ROM) ATA card 512
CONFIGURATION
Standard RAM 3 *6
Standard ROM 28 60 124 252
SYSTEM
Max. 100000 times
standard ROM
8192 points (X/Y0 to 1FFF) 3
No. of I/O points
SPECIFICATIONS
(No. of points accessible to the actual 4096 points (X/Y0 to FFF)
I/O module.)
GENERAL
Internal relay [M] 8192 points by default (M0-8191) (changeable)
Link relay [B] 8192 points by default (B0 to 1FFF) (changeable)
2048 points by default (T0 to 2047) (sharing of low- and high-speed timers) (changeable)
4
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
Timer [T] The measurement unit of the low- and high-speed timers is set up by parameters.
HARDWARE
No. of device points*7
Retentive timer [ST] The measurement unit of the low- and high-speed retentive timers is set up by parameters. 5
POWER SUPPLY
• Normal counter, 1024 points by default
(C0 to 1023) (changeable)
Counter [C]
MODULE
Link register [W] 8192 points by default (W0 to 1FFF) (changeable) 6
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
*5 : The CPU module can execute up to 124 programs. The CPU module cannot execute 125 or more programs.
*6 : Extended by the upgraded functions of CPU module ( QCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals))
*7 : The number of points can be changed within the setting range. ( QCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program
Fundamentals)
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES

4-5

Item
32768 points(R0 to 32767) 32768 points(R0 to 32767)
Standard 32768 points Up to 65536 points can be used by Up to 131072 points can be used by
RAM (R0 to 32767) block switching in units of 32768 block switching in units of 32768
points points
SRAM card
Up to 517120 points can be used by block switching in units of 32768 points (R0 to 32767).
(1M bytes)
[R]
SRAM card
(2M bytes)
Flash card
(2M bytes)
Flash card
File Up to 1042432 points can be used by block switching in units of 32768 points (R0 to 32767).
(4M bytes)
*8
register
65536 point 131072 points
Standard 32768 points
(ZR0 to 65535) (ZR0 to 131071)
RAM (ZR0 to 32767)
Block switching not required. Block switching not required.

SRAM card
517120 points (ZR0 to 517119), Block switching not required.
(1M bytes)
[ZR] SRAM card
(2M bytes)
Flash card
(2M bytes)
Flash card
(4M bytes)
Step relay [S] *9 8192 points (S0 to 8191) (The number of device points is fixed.)
4096 points (P0 to 4095) (The number of device points is fixed.), The use ranges of the local
Pointer [P]
pointers and common pointers can be set up by parameters.
The constant cyclic interval of system interrupt pointers I28 to 31 can be set up by parameters.
(0.5 to 1000ms, 0.5ms unit)
*8 : Read only when Flash card is used. ATA card is unusable.


1
Item
OVERVIEW
Special register [SD] 2048 points (SM0 to 2047) (The number of device points is fixed.)
2
CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
Dedicated to CC-Link IE controller network *10 and MELSECNET/H.
Link direct device
Specified form: J \X ,J \Y ,J \W ,J \B ,
3
J \SW ,J \SB
SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL
L0 to 8191 (default)
Latch range
RUN/PAUSE contact One contact can be set up in X0 to 1FFF for each of RUN and PAUSE. (Setting by parameters.)
Year, month, date, hour, minute, second, and day-of-week 4
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE

HARDWARE
Varies depending on the power supply module.
time
5VDC internal current consumption 0.60A 0.64A
5
H 98mm (3.86inch)
External dimensions W 27.4mm (1.08inch)
POWER SUPPLY
D 89.3mm (3.52inch)
Weight 0.20kg
MODULE
*10 : For use of CC-Link IE controller network, check the versions of the CPU module and GX Developer.
( Appendix 2.2)
6
Remark
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES

4-7
4.1.3 Process CPU
Process CPU
Item
Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU
Refresh mode
I/O control mode
Sequence control Relay symbol language, logic symbolic language, MELSAP3 (SFC),
Program language MELSAP-L, function block and structured text (ST)
FBD for process control (Programming by PX Developer.)
language
Processing speed LD X0 34ns
(sequence
MOV D0 D1 102ns
instruction)
Tracking
Processing speed
execution time
(redundant ----
(extended scan
function)
time)
Constant scan
(Function for keeping regular scan 0.5 to 2000ms (Setting available in 0.5ms unit.) (Setting by parameters.)
time)
28k steps 60k steps 124k steps 252k steps
(112 bytes) (240 bytes) (496 bytes) (1008 bytes)
Program memory
(drive 0)
Memory card
(RAM) Capacity of the installed memory card (2M bytes max.)
(drive 1)
Memory card
(ROM)
Memory (Flash card: 4M bytes max., ATA card: 32M bytes max.)
(drive 2)
128k bytes 256k bytes *3
(drive 3)
Standard ROM
(drive 4)
CPU shared
8k bytes
memory *3

4.1.3 Process CPU
1
Process CPU
OVERVIEW
Item
Program memory 28 60 124 252 *4
Memory Flash
288
2
Max. number
card card
of files stored
(ROM) ATA card 512
CONFIGURATION
Standard RAM 3 *5
SYSTEM
Standard ROM 28 60 124 252
Max. 100000 times
standard ROM
8192 points (X/Y0 to 1FFF)
3
No. of I/O points
SPECIFICATIONS
I/O module.)
GENERAL
Internal relay [M] 8192 points by default (M0 to 8191) (changeable)
4
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
HARDWARE
0 point by default (sharing of low- and high-speed retentive timers) (changeable)

POWER SUPPLY
MODULE
Counter [C]
Link register [W] 8192 points by default (W0 to 1FFF) (changeable)
6
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
Fundamentals))
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES

4.1.3 Process CPU
4-9
Process CPU
Item
Standard Up to 65536 points can be used by block Up to 131072 points can be used by block
RAM switching in units of 32768 points (R0 to 32767). switching in units of 32768 points (R0 to 32767).
SRAM card
(1M bytes)
SRAM card
[R] Up to 1041408 points can be used by block switching in units of 32768 points (R0 to 32767).
(2M bytes)
Flash card
(2M bytes)
Flash card
File (4M bytes)
register*7 Standard 65536 points (ZR0 to 65535), block switching 131072 points (ZR0 to 131071), block switching
RAM not required. not required.
SRAM card
517120 points (ZR0 to 517119), block switching not required.

(1M bytes)
SRAM card
[ZR] 1041408 points (ZR0 to 1041407), block switching not required.
(2M bytes)
Flash card
(2M bytes)
Flash card
(4M bytes)
Pointer [P]
(0.5 to 1000ms, 0.5ms unit)
4 - 10 4.1 Performance Specifications

4.1.3 Process CPU
1
Process CPU
OVERVIEW
Item
2
CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
3
Link direct device Exclusively used for CC-Link IE controller network*9 and MELSECNET/H.
SPECIFICATIONS
Specified form: J \X ,J \Y ,J \W ,J \B ,J \SW ,J \SB
GENERAL
L0 to 8191(default)
Latch range
(Latch range can be set up for B, F, V, T, ST, C, D, and W.) (Setting by parameters.) 4
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
Year, month, date, hour, minute, second, and day-of-week
HARDWARE
Varies depending on the power supply module. 5
period
5VDC internal current consumption 0.64A
POWER SUPPLY
H 98mm (3.86inch)
MODULE
D 89.3mm (3.52inch)
Weight 0.20kg
*9 : For use of CC-Link IE controller network, check the versions of the CPU module and GX Developer. ( Appendix 2.2) 6
EXTENSION CABLE
Remark BASE UNIT AND
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES

4.1.3 Process CPU
4 - 11
4.1.4 Redundant CPU
Redundant CPU
Item
Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU
Refresh mode
I/O control mode
FBD for process control (Programming by PX Developer.)
language
Processing speed LD X0 34ns
(sequence
MOV D0 D1 102ns
instruction)
Tracking
Processing speed Device memory 48k words: 10ms
execution time
(redundant Device memory 100k words: 15ms
(extended scan
function) ( QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Redundant System))
time)
Constant scan
(Function for keeping regular scan 0.5 to 2000ms (Setting available in 0.5ms unit.) (Setting by parameters.)
time)
124k steps 252k steps
(496 bytes) (1008 bytes)
Program memory
496k bytes 1008k bytes
(drive 0)
Memory card
(RAM) Capacity of the installed memory card (2M bytes max.)
(drive 1)
Memory card
(ROM)
Memory (Flash card: 4M bytes max., ATA card: 32M bytes max.)
(drive 2)
Capacity of the installed memory card (2M bytes max.)
(drive 3)
Standard ROM
496k bytes 1008k bytes
(drive 4)
CPU shared
----
memory

4.1.4 Redundant CPU
1
Redundant CPU
OVERVIEW
Item
Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU
Program memory 124 252 *3
Memory Flash
288
2
Max. number
card card
of files stored
(ROM) ATA card 512
CONFIGURATION
Standard RAM 3 *4
SYSTEM
Standard ROM 124 252
Max. 100000 times
standard ROM
3
No. of I/O points
SPECIFICATIONS
I/O module.)
GENERAL
Internal relay [M] 8192 points by default (M0 to 8191) (changeable)
4
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
HARDWARE
0 point by default (sharing of low- and high-speed retentive timers) (changeable)

POWER SUPPLY
MODULE
Counter [C]
6
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
Fundamentals))
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES

4.1.4 Redundant CPU
4 - 13
Redundant CPU
Item
Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU
Standard
RAM
SRAM card
(1M bytes)
SRAM card
[R] Up to 1041408 points can be used by block switching in units of 32768 points (R0 to 32767).
(2M bytes)
Flash card
(2M bytes)
Flash card
File (4M bytes)
register*6 Standard
RAM
SRAM card

(1M bytes)
SRAM card
[ZR] 1041408 points (ZR0 to 1041407), block switching not required.
(2M bytes)
Flash card
(2M bytes)
Flash card
(4M bytes)
Pointer [P]
(0.5 to 1000ms, 0.5ms unit)

4.1.4 Redundant CPU
1
Redundant CPU
OVERVIEW
Item
Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU
2
CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
Max. 100k words
No. of device tracking words
( QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Redundant System))
3
Link direct device Exclusively used for CC-Link IE controller network*8 and MELSECNET/H.
SPECIFICATIONS
Specified form: J \X ,J \Y ,J \W ,J \B ,J \SW ,J \SB
GENERAL
L0 to 8191 (default) (Setting by parameters.)
Latch range
(Latch range can be set up for B, F, V, T, ST, C, D, and W.) 4
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
HARDWARE
Accuracy: -3.2 to +5.27s
(TYP.+2.07s)/d at 0
Timer function
(TYP.+2.22s)/d at 25
5
(TYP.-2.89s)/d at 55
POWER SUPPLY
time
MODULE
5VDC internal current consumption 0.89A
H 98mm (3.86inch)
External dimensions W
D
55.2mm (2.17inch)
89.3mm (3.52inch)
6
Weight 0.30kg
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
*8 : For use of CC-Link IE controller network, check the versions of the CPU module and GX Developer. ( Appendix 2.2)
Remark
For the general specifications, refer to CHAPTER 3. 7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES

4.1.4 Redundant CPU
4 - 15
4.1.5 Universal model QCPU

Item Q03UDCPU Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU
Q02UCPU
Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU
Refresh mode
I/O control mode
----
language
Processing LD X0 40ns 20ns 9.5ns
speed
(sequence MOV D0 D1 80ns 40ns 19ns
instruction)
Processing
Tracking execution
speed
time ----
(redundant
(extended scan time)
function)
Constant scan
0.5 to 2000ms
(Function for keeping regular scan
(Setting available in 0.5ms unit.) (Setting by parameters.)
time)
20k steps 30k steps 40k steps 60k steps 130k steps 260k steps
(80k bytes) (120k bytes) (160k bytes) (240k bytes) (520k bytes) (1040k bytes)
Program memory
80k bytes 120k bytes 120k bytes 240k bytes 520k steps 1040k steps
(drive 0)
Memory card (RAM) Capacity of the installed memory card
(drive 1) (8M bytes max.)
Memory card (ROM)
(Flash card: 4M bytes max.,
(drive 2)
ATA card: 32M bytes max.)
Standard RAM
128k bytes 192k bytes 256k bytes 768k bytes 1024k steps 1280k steps
(drive 3)
Memory
Standard ROM
512k bytes 1024k bytes 2048k steps 4096k steps
capacity*1 (drive 4)
QCPU
standard 8k bytes 8k bytes
CPU memory
shared Multiple
memory CPU high
*3 speed ---- 32k bytes
transmis-
sion area

1
OVERVIEW
Q02UCPU
Program memory 64 124 252*4
Memory card (RAM) 319(When the Q3MEM-8MBS is used) 2
Memory Flash
Max. number 288
card card
CONFIGURATION
of files stored
(ROM) ATA card 511
Standard RAM 3
SYSTEM
Standard ROM 128 256
Max. 100000 times*4
program memory 3
Max. 100000 times*5
standard ROM
SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL
No. of I/O points
2048 points
(No. of points accessible to the 4096 points (X/Y0 to FFF)
(X/Y0 to 7FF)
actual I/O module.)
Internal relay [M] 8192 points by default (M0-8191) (changeable) 4
Latch relay [L] 8192 points by default (L0-8191) (changeable)
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
2048 points by default (T0 to 2047) (changeable)
HARDWARE
(Sharing of low- and high-speed timers)
(Low-speed timer: 1 to 1000ms, 1ms unit, 100ms by default) 5
POWER SUPPLY
MODULE
The measurement unit of the low- and high-speed retentive timers is set up by parameters.
Retentive timer [ST]
6
Counter [C]
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
Extended data register [D] 0 points by default (changeable)
Extended link register [W] 0 points by default (changeable)
Annunciator [F] 2048 points by default (F0 to 2047) (changeable) 7
MEMORY CARD AND
Link special relay [SB] 2048 points by default (SB0 to 7FF) (changeable)
Link special register [SW] 2048 points by default (SW0 to 7FF) (changeable)
BATTERY
*5 : The one write operation may not be counted as one writing to a program memory.
The number of writing to the program memory can be checked by the special register (SD682 and SD683).
*6 : The one write operation may not be counted as one writing to the standard ROM.
*7
The number of writing to the standard ROM can be checked by the special register (SD687 and SD688).
: The number of points can be changed within the setting range. ( QCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program
8
Fundamentals))
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES

4 - 17

Q02UCPU
32768 points 32768 points 32768 points 32768 points 32768 points 32768 points
(R0 to 32767) (R0 to 32767) (R0 to 32767) (R0 to 32767) (R0 to 32767) (R0 to 32767)
Up to 65536 Up to 98304 Up to 131072 Up to 393216 Up to 524288 Up to 655360
Standard points can be points can be points can be points can be points can be points can be
RAM used by block used by block used by block used by block used by block used by block
switching in switching in switching in switching in switching in switching in
units of 32768 units of 32768 units of 32768 units of 32768 units of 32768 units of 32768
points points points points points points
SRAM card 32768 points (R0 to 32767) Up to 517120 points can be used by block switching in units of 32768
(1M bytes) points
[R]
(2M bytes) points
(4M bytes) points
(8M bytes) points
Flash card 32768 points (R0 to 32767) Up to 1041408 points can be used by block switching in units of 32768
(2M bytes) points
File
Flash card 32768 points (R0 to 32767) Up to 2087936 points can be used by block switching in units of 32768
register*8
(4M bytes) points
65536 points 98304 points 131072 points 393216 points 524288 points 655360 points
(ZR0 to (ZR0 to (ZR0 to (ZR0 to (ZR0 to (ZR0 to
Standard
65535) Block 98303) Block 131071) Block 393215) Block 524287) Block 655359) Block
RAM
switching not switching not switching not switching not switching not switching not
required. required. required. required. required. required.
SRAM card
(1M bytes)
SRAM card
[ZR] (2M bytes)
SRAM card
(4M bytes)
SRAM card
(8M bytes)
Flash card
(2M bytes)
Flash card
(4M bytes)
Step relay [S] *9 8192 points (S0 to 8191) (The number of device points is fixed.)*10
Index register /
max. 20 points (Z0 to 19)
Standard devise register [Z]
Index register [Z]
max. 10 points (Z0 to 18)
(32-bit modification specification
(Index register (Z) is used in double words.)
of ZR device)
4096 points (P0 to 4095), The use ranges of the local pointers and common pointers can be set up
Pointer [P]
by parameters.
*10 : In the Universal model QCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "10042" or later, 0 points can be set.

1
OVERVIEW
Q02UCPU
256 points (I0 to 255) 2

(0.5 to 1000ms, 0.5ms unit)
CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
Special register [SD] 2048 points (SM0 to 2047) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Function input [FX] 16 points (FX0 to F) (The number of device points is fixed.) 3
SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL

Dedicated to CC-Link IE controller network and MELSECNET/H.
4
Link direct device
SPECIFICATIONS OF
Specified form: J \X ,J \Y ,J \W ,J \B ,
THE CPU MODULE

J \SW ,J \SB
HARDWARE
Data transmission
---- 100/10Mbps
speed
Specifica Communication mode ---- Full-duplex/Half-duplex 5
tions of Transmission method ---- Base band
built-in Max. distance between
POWER SUPPLY
---- 100m (328.08feet.)
Ethernet hub and node
port
MODULE
Max. 10BASE-T ---- Cascade connection: Four stages at maximum
CPU number of
100BASE
module connectab ---- Cascade connection: Two stages at maximum
-TX
*11 le nodes 6
Number of connections
---- 16 for MELSOFT connection and MC protocol, 1 for FTP
*12
EXTENSION CABLE
*11 : The Built-in Ethernet port QCPU is targeted. BASE UNIT AND
*12 : The number indicates the total number of TCP/IP and UDP/IP protocols.
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES

4 - 19

Q02UCPU
L0 to 8191 (8192 points by default)
Latch range
(TYP.+1.42s)/d at 0
Timer function
(TYP.+1.50s)/d at 25
(TYP.-3.54s)/d at 55
Allowable instantaneous power
failure period
5VDC internal current 0.23A 0.33A*13 0.39A*14
H 98mm (3.86inch)
D 89.3mm (3.52inch)*15
Weight 0.20kg*15
Remark
*13 : The current consumption in the Q03UDECPU is 0.46A

*14 : The current consumption Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU and Q26UDEHCPU is 0.46A
*15 : The values for the Built-in Ethernet port QCPU are as follows.
External dimensions (D): 115mm (4.53inch)
Weight: 0.22kg

1
OVERVIEW
4.2.1 Part Names
(1) Q00JCPU
2
1) 4) 5) 6)
CONFIGURATION
OUT
SYSTEM
2)
SPECIFICATIONS
7)
GENERAL
When opening the cover, put your 8)
4
finger here.
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
Diagram 4.1 Front face
HARDWARE
12) 13)
OUT
5
POWER SUPPLY
3) INPUT
100-240VAC 10) 9)
MODULE
50/60Hz 105VA
OUTPUT
5VDC3A
(FG)
6
(LG)
14)
INPUT N
100-240VAC
100-240VAC
L
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
11) 15) 16)
Diagram 4.2 With front cover open
Table4.6 Part Names
No. Name Application 7

Pear-shaped hole for mounting the unit to a panel such as a control box. (For M4
MEMORY CARD AND
1) Base mounting hole

screw)
Protective cover for extension cable connector. Remove this cover when connecting
BATTERY
2) Cover
an extension base unit.
Connector for transfer of signals to/from the extension base unit. Connect an
3) Extension cable connector
extension cable.
8
4) POWER LED Power indicator LED for 5VDC. Lights up in green when 5VDC is output normally.
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES

4.2.1 Part Names
4 - 21
Table4.6 Part Names

No. Name Application
Indicates the operating status of the CPU module.
ON : During operation with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch set to "RUN".
OFF : During stop with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch set to "STOP"
Flicker : When parameters/program is written during STOP and the RUN/STOP/
RESET switch is moved from "STOP" to "RUN".
To turn ON the RUN LED after writing the program, carry out the following
steps.
•Move the RUN/STOP/RESET switch from "RUN" to "STOP" to "RUN".
•Perform reset with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.( Section 4.2.3)
5) RUN LED
•Power ON the programmable controller again.
To turn ON the RUN LED after writing the parameters, carry out the
following steps.
•Perform reset with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.
(If the RUN/STOP/RESET switch is moved from "STOP" to "RUN" to
"STOP" to "RUN" after changing the parameter values, the new values are
not reflected on the parameters related to the intelligent function module,
such as the network parameters.)
ON : When the self-diagnostic error that will not stop operation is detected.
•When continuation of operation at error detection is set in the parameter.
•When the annunciator (F) is turned ON by the SET/OUT instruction.
6) ERR. LED •When battery low occurs.
OFF : Normal
Flicker : When the error whose occurrence stops operation is detected.
When reset operation is performed with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.
Connector used for loading an input/output or intelligent function module.
7) Module connector (To the connector of the spare space where no module is loaded, fit the accessory
connector cover or the blank cover module (QG60) to prevent dust from entering.)
DIN rail adaptor mounting
8) Holes for mounting a DIN rail adaptor.
holes
9) FG terminal Ground terminal connected with the shield pattern of the printed circuit board.
10) LG terminal Power filter ground having a half potential of the input voltage.
11) Power input terminals Power input terminals for connection of a 100VAC to 200VAC power supply.
Backup battery for use of the program memory, standard RAM, timer function and
12) Battery
power failure compensation function.
Battery fixing
13) Hook for holding the battery.
hook
For connection of the battery lead wires.
14) Battery connector pin (When shipped from the factory, the lead wires are disconnected from the connector
to prevent the battery from consuming.)
Connector for connecting a peripheral device by RS-232.
15) RS-232 connector *1
Can be connected by the RS-232 connection cable (QC30R2).
RUN : Executes sequence program operation.
STOP : Stops sequence program operation.
16) RUN/STOP/RESET switch *2 RESET : Performs hardware reset, operation error reset, operation initialization or
like. ( Section 4.2.3)
4 - 22 4.2 Basic Model QCPU

4.2.1 Part Names
1
(2) Q00CPU, Q01CPU
OVERVIEW
1)
2)
2
3)
5)
6)
CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
7)
8) 3
SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL
9)
4)
4
SPECIFICATIONS OF
When opening the cover, put
THE CPU MODULE

your finger here.
HARDWARE
Diagram 4.3 Front face Diagram 4.4 With front cover open
10)
POWER SUPPLY
MODULE
6
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
7
11)
MEMORY CARD AND
12)
Diagram 4.5 Side Face
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES

4.2.1 Part Names
4 - 23
Table4.7 Part Names

Hook used to fix the module to the base unit.
1) Module fixing hook
(Single-motion installation)
ON : During operation with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch set to "RUN".
OFF : During stop with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch set to "STOP".
Flicker : When parameters/program is written during STOP and the RUN/STOP/
RESET switch is moved from "STOP" to "RUN".
steps.
•Move the RUN/STOP/RESET switch from "RUN" to "STOP" to "RUN".
•Perform reset with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.( Section 4.2.3)
2) RUN LED
•Power ON the programmable controller again
•To turn ON the RUN LED after writing the parameters, carry out the
following steps.
•Perform reset with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.
(If the RUN/STOP/RESET switch is moved from "STOP" to "RUN" to
"STOP" to "RUN" after changing the parameter values, the new values are
not reflected on the parameters related to the intelligent function module,
such as the network parameters.)
ON : When the self-diagnostic error that will not stop operation is detected.
•When continuation of operation at error detection is set in the parameter.
•When the annunciator (F) is turned ON by the SET/OUT instruction.
3) ERR. LED •When battery low occurs.
OFF : Normal
Flicker : When the error whose occurrence stops operation is detected.
When reset operation is performed with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.
4) Serial number display Displays the serial number described on the rating plate.
Backup battery for use of the program memory, standard RAM, timer function and
5) Battery
power failure compensation function.
6) Battery fixing hook Hook for holding the battery.
For connection of the battery lead wires.
8) RUN/STOP/RESET switch*2
RESET : Performs hardware reset, operation error reset, operation initialization or
Connector for RS-232 connection
9) RS-232 connector*1
Can be connected by the RS-232 connection cable (QC30R2).
10) Module fixing screw hole Hole for the screw used to fix to the base unit. (M3 12 screw)
11) Module fixing projection Projection used to fix the module to the base unit.
12) Module mounting lever Lever used to mount the module to the base unit.

4.2.1 Part Names
1
*1 : When a cable is to be connected to the RS-232 connector at all times, clamp the cable to prevent a loose connection,
shifting, or disconnection by pulling due to carelessness.
The Q6HLD-R2 type RS-232 Connector Disconnection Prevention Holder is available as a clamp for RS-232
OVERVIEW
connector.
CPU module 2
CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
RS-232 cable Q6HLD-R2
Fixing screw
3
Diagram 4.6 RS-232 cable fixing processing
SPECIFICATIONS
*2 : Operate the RUN/STOP/RESET switch with your fingertips.
GENERAL
Do not use any tool such as a screwdriver because the switch part might be damaged.
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
HARDWARE
5
POWER SUPPLY
MODULE
6
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES

4.2.1 Part Names
4 - 25
4.2.2 Switch Operation at the Time of Writing Program
Programs can be written to the Basic model QCPU in either the STOP or RUN status.
(1) When writing program with RUN/STOP/RESET switch set to "STOP"

When writing a program with the Basic model QCPU placed in the STOP status using
the RUN/STOP/RESET switch, operate the switch in the following procedure.
1) RUN/STOP/RESET switch: STOP
RUN LED: OFF, from CPU module STOP status to Program write
2) RUN/STOP/RESET switch: Perform reset.( Section 4.2.3)
3) RUN/STOP/RESET switch: STOP to RUN
RUN LED: ON, CPU module RUN status
(2) When it is desired to place the Basic model QCPU in RUN status without
resetting it after program write
Operate the RUN/STOP/RESET switch from STOP to RUN, STOP and then RUN.
After the second STOP to RUN operation, the CPU module is put in the RUN status.
At this time, the device memory data are those saved before program write.
(3) When writing program after remote STOP using GX Developer

When writing a program with the Basic model QCPU stopped by remote STOP using
GX Developer, no operation is needed for the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.
When remote RUN is performed using GX Developer, the Basic model QCPU is
placed in the RUN status.
(4) When performing online change of program

When the online change of a program is performed, the RUN/STOP/RESET switch
need not be operated.
POINT
The program modified online during boot operation is written to the program
memory.
After making online program change, also write the program to the standard ROM
of the boot source memory. If the program is not written in the standard ROM, the
old program will be executed at the next boot operation.
For details of the boot operation, refer to the manual below.

1
4.2.3 Reset Operation
OVERVIEW
For the Basic model QCPU, the RUN/STOP/RESET switch of the CPU module is used to
switch between the "RUN status" and "STOP status" and to perform "RESET operation".
When using the RUN/STOP/RESET switch to reset the CPU module, moving the RUN/
STOP/RESET switch to the reset position will not reset it immediately. 2
POINT
CONFIGURATION
Hold the RUN/STOP/RESET switch in the RESET position until reset processing
SYSTEM
is complete (the flickering ERR. LED goes off).
If you release your hand from the RUN/STOP/RESET switch during reset
processing (during rapid flickering of ERR. LED), the switch will return to the
STOP position and reset processing cannot be completed.
3
SPECIFICATIONS
Perform reset operation with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch as shown in Diagram 4.7.
GENERAL
Start
Hold the RUN/STOP/RESET switch

.......................Reset operation is started using
the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.
4
in the "RESET" position.
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
RESET RUN
HARDWARE
RUN/STOP/RESET
STOP switch
.......................Reset is accepted and reset 5

The ERR. LED flickers several times
processing is performed.
(3 to 4 times) rapidly.
POWER SUPPLY
MODULE
Flickers.
6
.......................Reset is completed.
EXTENSION CABLE
The "ERR. LED" goes off .
BASE UNIT AND
Goes off.
7
MEMORY CARD AND
.......................Reset is canceled.
Return the RUN/STOP/RESET
switch to the "STOP" position.
BATTERY
RESET RUN
RUN/STOP/RESET : Releasing your hand from the
STOP switch RUN/STOP/RESET switch returns it
to the STOP position. 8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES
Termination , completed , end
Diagram 4.7 Reset Operation

4 - 27
POINT
Operate the RUN/STOP/RESET switch with your fingertips.
Do not use any tool such as a screwdriver because the switch part might be
damaged.
4.2.4 Latch Clear Operation
For the Basic model QCPU, latch clear is performed by the remote latch clear operation of
GX Developer.
Latch clear cannot be executed by operating the switches of the CPU module.
POINT
1. The valid/invalid for latch clear in the clear range of latch clear operation can
be set for each device. The setting can be mode in the device setting of the
PLC parameter.
2. For the remote latch clear operation by GX Developer, refer to the manual
below.
QCPU User's Manual (Functional Description, Program Fundamentals)

1
4.3 High Performance Model QCPU, Process CPU and Redundant
CPU
OVERVIEW
4.3.1 Part Names
2
(1) Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU, Q02PHCPU,
Q06PHCPU, Q12PHCPU, Q25PHCPU
CONFIGURATION
1)
SYSTEM
2)
9)
3)
4) 3
5)
1
2
6) 13)
SPECIFICATIONS
3
4
7) 10) 5
GENERAL
14)
15)
11) *1 4
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
12)
HARDWARE
8)

your finger here.
5
POWER SUPPLY
16)
MODULE
6
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
*1: Not provided for Q02CPU.

7
MEMORY CARD AND
17)
BATTERY
20)
19)
18)
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES
Diagram 4.10 Side face
4.3 High Performance Model QCPU, Process CPU and Redundant CPU
4.3.1 Part Names
4 - 29
(2) Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU
1)
2) 21)
9)
3) 22)
4) 23)
5)
24)
6) 13)
7) 10)
14)
15)
25)
11)
12)
8)

your finger here.
16)
17)
20)
19)
18)
4 - 30 4.3 High Performance Model QCPU, Process CPU and Redundant CPU
4.3.1 Part Names
1
Table4.8 Part Names
OVERVIEW
1) Module fixing hook Hook used to fix the module to the base unit. (Single-motion installation)
Indicates the mode of the CPU module.
2) MODE LED ON (green): Q mode
Flicker (green): Enforced ON/OFF for external I/O registered 2
ON : The RUN/STOP switch is set to "RUN" and the module is running.
CONFIGURATION
OFF : The RUN/STOP switch is set to "STOP."
(The standby system Redundant CPU module in the backup mode does not
SYSTEM
light up even when the RUN/STOP switch is set to "RUN" but the module is
stopped.)
When an error is detected and operation must be halted due to the error 3
Flicker : Parameters or programs are written with the RUN/STOP switch set to
"STOP" and then the RUN/STOP switch is turned from "STOP" to "RUN."
SPECIFICATIONS
When the operation mode is changed from the backup mode to the
GENERAL
separate mode in the Redundant CPU system, the RUN LED of the standby
system side CPU module flickers.
3) RUN LED
steps.
4
SPECIFICATIONS OF
•Set the RUN/STOP switch from "RUN" "STOP" "RUN".
THE CPU MODULE

•Reset with the RESET/L.CLR switch.
HARDWARE
•Restart the programmable controller power.
To turn ON the RUN LED after writing the parameters, carry out the
following steps.
•Reset with the RESET/L.CLR switch. 5
•Restart the programmable controller power.
(If the RUN/STOP switch is set from "RUN" "STOP" "RUN" after
POWER SUPPLY
changing the parameters, network parameters and intelligent function
MODULE
module parameters will not be updated.)
ON : Detection of self-diagnosis error which will not stop operation, except
battery error.
(When operation continued at error detection is set in the parameter
6
setting.)
EXTENSION CABLE
4) ERR.LED
OFF : Normal BASE UNIT AND
Flicker : Detection of error whose occurrence stops operation.

When automatic write to standard ROM is completed normally. ("BOOT"
LED also flickers.)
ON : Error detected by CHK instruction or annunciator F turned ON 7
5) USER LED OFF : Normal
MEMORY CARD AND
Flicker : Execution of latch clear

ON : Occurrence of battery error due to reduction in battery voltages of CPU
BATTERY
6) BAT.LED module or memory card.

OFF : Normal
ON : Start of boot operation
OFF : Non-execution of boot operation 8
7) BOOT LED
Flicker : When automatic write to standard ROM is completed normally. ("ERR." LED
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES
also flickers.)
4.3.1 Part Names
4 - 31
Table4.8 Part Names

9) Memory card EJECT button Used to eject the memory card from the CPU module.
Memory card loading
10) Connector used to load the memory card to the CPU module.
connector
Connector for connection with USB-compatible peripheral device. (Connector type
B)
11) USB connector
Can be connected by USB-dedicated cable.
(Not available for Q02CPU.)
Can be connected by RS-232 connection cable (QC30R2).
Used to set the items for operation of the CPU module.
For the system protection and the valid parameter drives of the DIP switches, refer to
the manual below.
DIP switches *2 SW1 : Used to set system protection. Inhibits all the writing and control instructions
to the CPU module. (Factory-default to OFF)
ON SW
OFF : No protection
1 ON : Protection
13) 2 SW2, SW3: Used to specify parameter-valid drive.
(Both SW2 and SW3 are preset to OFF as factory default)
3
SW2 SW3 Parameter Drive
4 OFF OFF Program memory (Drive 0)
5 ON OFF SRAM card (Drive 1)
OFF ON Flash card/ATA card (Drive 2)
ON ON Standard ROM (Drive 4)
(Parameters cannot be stored in standard RAM (Drive 3).)
SW4: Must not be used. Normally OFF. (Factory default: OFF)
SW5: Must not be used. Normally OFF. (Factory default: OFF)
14) RUN/STOP switch *3
RESET : Used to perform hardware reset, operation fault rest, operation
initialization, etc.
(If this switch is left in the RESET position, the whole system will be reset
and the system will not operate properly.
15) RESET/L.CLR switch*3
After performing reset, always return this switch to the neutral position.)
L.CLR : Used to turn "OFF" or clear to "zero" all latch area data set in the
parameter.
Used to clear the sampling trace settings.
For connection of battery lead wires.
Backup battery for use of program memory, standard RAM, timer function and power
19) Battery
failure compensation function.
4.3.1 Part Names
1
Table4.8 Part Names
Indicates the backup or separate mode while the system is running normally.
OVERVIEW
ON (green) : Backup mode
OFF (red) : The status in which control (RUN) cannot be continued by system
switching
ON (orange) : Separate mode 2
OFF : Debug mode
The LED indication is as shown below when the memory copy from control system to
CONFIGURATION
standby system is executed.
21) BACKUP LED *4 In backup mode In separate mode
SYSTEM
Control system Standby system Control system Standby system
3
Memory copy executing ON (red) ON (red) ON (orange) ON (orange)
Memory copy normally ON (red) ON (red) ON (orange) ON (orange)
completed
For the memory copy from control system to standby system, refer to the manual
SPECIFICATIONS
below.
GENERAL
Indicates the CPU module operates as control system or standby system.
ON : Control system (The standby system is normal and system switching is
22) CONTROL LED *4 available.)
4
OFF : Standby system
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
Note that this LED lights up in the debug mode.
HARDWARE
The LED of the CPU module on the system A side lights up.
ON : System A
Flicker : The tracking cable is disconnected while the system runs normally as
23) SYSTEM A LED *4 system A. 5
(It lasts until the system A side tracking cable is connected.)
OFF : System B (The SYSTEM B LED lights up.)
POWER SUPPLY
Note that this LED lights up in the debug mode.
The LED of the CPU module on the system B side lights up.
MODULE
ON : System B
Flicker : The tracking cable is disconnected while the system runs normally as
24) SYSTEM B LED *4 system B 6
(It lasts until the system B side tracking cable is connected.)
EXTENSION CABLE
OFF : System A (The SYSTEM A LED lights up) BASE UNIT AND
Note that this LED goes off in the debug mode.
25) TRACKING connector *4 Connector for connecting system A or B with the tracking cable (QC TR).
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES
4.3.1 Part Names
4 - 33
connector.
CPU module
RS-232 cable
Q6HLD-R2
Fixing screw
*2 : Because the DIP switches are located out of reach of fingertips, operate it with a tool such as screwdriver. Careful
attention must be paid to prevent the switch part from being damaged.
*3 : Operate the RUN/STOP switch and RESET/L.CLR switch with your fingertips.
*4 : The Q12PRHCPU and Q25PRHCPU are equipped with this connector.
4.3.1 Part Names
1
OVERVIEW
This section explains the switch operation to be performed after a program is written using
GX Developer.
(1) When writing program with CPU module set to "STOP" *1 2

(a) To set to RUN status with device memory data cleared
CONFIGURATION
1) Move the RESET/L.CLR switch to the RESET position once and return it to the
original neutral position.
SYSTEM
2) Set the RUN/STOP switch to RUN.
3) The CPU module is placed in the RUN status (RUN LED: ON). 3
(b) To set to RUN status with device memory data not cleared (held)
SPECIFICATIONS
1) Set the RUN/STOP switch to RUN.
GENERAL
2) The RUN LED flickers.
3) Set the RUN/STOP switch to STOP.
4) Set the RUN/STOP switch to RUN again. 4
5) The CPU module is placed in the RUN status (RUN LED: ON).
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
(2) When a program is written while CPU module is running
HARDWARE
(online change)*2
No operation is needed for the RUN/STOP switch and RESET/L.CLR switch of the
CPU module. 5
At this time, the device memory data are not cleared.
* 1: When a program was written to the program memory during boot operation, also write the
POWER SUPPLY
program to the boot source memory.
If the program is not written to the boot source memory, the old program will be executed at the
MODULE
next boot operation.
* 2: When online change is performed in the ladder mode, the program changed online is written to
the program memory.
When performing boot operation, also write the program to the boot source memory after online 6
change. If the program is not written to the boot source memory, the old program will be executed
EXTENSION CABLE
at the next boot operation
BASE UNIT AND
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES
4 - 35
POINT
1. Before writing a program to the CPU module, perform the following operation.
• Set the system protect setting switch (DIP switch:SW1) of the CPU
module to OFF (not protected).
• Cancel the registered password on GX Developer.
2. When the CPU module is placed in the STOP status by the remote STOP
operation of GX Developer, it can be put in the RUN status by the remote
RUN operation of GX Developer after program write. In that case, No
operation is needed for the RUN/STOP switch and RESET/L.CLR switch of
the CPU module.
For details of GX Developer, refer to the manual below.
Reset operation is performed by turning the RESET/L.CLR switch of the CPU module to
the RESET side for the High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU and Redundant
CPU.
POINT
Be sure to return the RESET/L.CLR switch to the neutral position after resetting.
When the system is left with the RESET/L.CLR switch set to the RESET, the
entire system is reset, not operating normally.
To perform latch clear, operate the RESET/L.CLR switch in the following procedure.
1) RUN/STOP switch : STOP
2) RESET/L.CLR switch : Move the switch to L.CLR several times until the
"USER" LED flickers.
"USER" LED: Flicker : Ready for latch clear
3) RESET/L.CLR switch : Move the switch to L.CLR once more.
"USER" LED: OFF : Latch clear complete
POINT
PLC parameter.
2. In addition to the way of using the RESET/L.CLR switch for latch clear,
remote latch clear may be performed from GX Developer.
For details of remote latch clear operation by GX Developer, refer to the
manual below.
1
4.3.5 Automatic Writing to Standard ROM
OVERVIEW
The High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU and Redundant CPU allows data in
the memory card to be written into the standard ROM automatically.
For details, refer to the manual below.
QCPU User's Manual (Functional Description, Program Fundamentals) 2
(1) Procedures for automatic write to standard ROM
CONFIGURATION
Automatic writing to the standard ROM is carried out with the following procedures.
SYSTEM
(a) Operation with GX Developer (setting automatic writing to standard ROM)
1) Check the "Auto Download all Data from Memory card to Standard ROM" in
the PLC parameter boot file setting. 3
Set the parameter and program to be booted at the "Boot file" setting section.
(Set the "Transfer from" to "Standard ROM".)
SPECIFICATIONS
Check "Auto Download
GENERAL
all Data from Memory
card to Standard ROM ".
Set the "Transfer from"

to "Standard ROM".
4
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
HARDWARE
5
Diagram 4.15 Boot file setting
POWER SUPPLY
2) Store the set parameters and programs to be booted in the memory card.
MODULE
(b) Operations on CPU module (automatic writing to standard ROM)
1) Turn OFF the power supply to the programmable controller.
2) Mount the memory card that contains the parameters and programs to be 6
booted onto the CPU module.
EXTENSION CABLE
3) Set the DIP switches on the CPU module so that the valid parameter drive is BASE UNIT AND
matched with the memory card to be installed.
• When a SRAM card is mounted: SW2 : ON, SW3 : OFF
• When a Flash card/ATA card is mounted: SW2 : OFF, SW3 : ON
4) Turn ON the power supply to the programmable controller.
• Boot the file specified in the memory card into the program memory, and 7
write the contents of the program memory to the standard ROM after
MEMORY CARD AND
completion of the boot.

5) The "BOOT" LED will flicker when automatic write to standard ROM has been
BATTERY
completed, and the CPU module will be in a suspension error status.

6) Turn OFF the power supply to the programmable controller.
7) Remove the memory card, and then set the valid parameter drive to the 8
standard ROM with the CPU module's DIP switches.
CPU MODULE START-
• Standard ROM: SW2 : ON, SW3 : ON

UP PROCEDURES
The parameters and programs will be booted from the standard ROM to the program
memory when the programmable controller is turned ON to enable actual operations.
4.3.5 Automatic Writing to Standard ROM
4 - 37
4.4 Universal Model QCPU
4.4.1 Part Names
(1) Q02UCPU, Q03UDCPU, Q04UDHCPU, Q06UDHCPU, Q13UDHCPU,

Q26UDHCPU
1)
2)
9)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7) 10)
13)
11)
12)
8)

your finger here.
14)
15)
18)
17)
16)
4 - 38 4.4 Universal Model QCPU

4.4.1 Part Names
1
(2) Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU,
Q26UDEHCPU
OVERVIEW
1)
2)
9) 2
3)
4)
CONFIGURATION
5)
6)
SYSTEM
7)
10)
13)
3
SPECIFICATIONS
11)
GENERAL
20)
19)
21)
8) 4
SPECIFICATIONS OF
your finger here.
THE CPU MODULE

HARDWARE
14)
5
POWER SUPPLY
MODULE
6
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
15)
18) 7
MEMORY CARD AND
17)
16)
BATTERY

8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES

4.4.1 Part Names
4 - 39
Table4.9 Part Names

1) Module fixing hook Hook used to fix the module to the base unit. (Single-motion installation)
Indicates the mode of the CPU module.
2) MODE LED
ON (green): Q mode
ON : During operation with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch set to "RUN"
OFF : During stop with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch set to "STOP".
When an error that stops operation is detected.
Flicker : Parameters or programs are written with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch set
to "STOP", and then the RUN/STOP/RESET switch is turned from "STOP"
to "RUN."
To turn ON the "RUN" LED after writing the program, carry out the following
steps.
• Set the RUN/STOP/RESET switch in the order of "RUN" "STOP"
3) RUN LED
"RUN".
• Perform reset with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.
• Power ON the programmable controller again.
To turn ON the "RUN" LED after writing the parameters, carry out the
following steps.
• Perform reset with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.
• Power ON the programmable controller again.
(If the RUN/STOP/RESET switch is set in the order of "RUN" "STOP"
"RUN" after changing the parameters, network parameters and
intelligent function module parameters will not be updated.)
ON : Detection of self-diagnosis error which will not stop operation, except
battery error.
(When operation continued at error detection is set in the parameter
4) ERR.LED setting.)
OFF : Normal
Flicker : Detection of error whose occurrence stops operation.
When reset operation becomes valid with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.
ON : Annunciator F turned ON
5) USER LED
OFF : Normal
ON (Yellow) : Occurrence of battery error due to reduction in battery voltage of
the memory card.
Flash (Yellow) : Occurrence of battery error due to reduction in battery voltage of
the CPU main module.
6) BAT.LED ON (Green) : Turned ON for 5 seconds after restoring of data backuped to the
standard ROM by the latch data backup is completed.
Flash (Green) : Flashes when backup of data to the standard ROM by latch data
backup is completed.
OFF : Normal
ON : Start of boot operation
7) BOOT LED
OFF : Non-execution of boot operation

4.4.1 Part Names
1
Table4.9 Part Names
OVERVIEW
9) Memory card EJECT button Used to eject the memory card from the CPU module.
Memory card loading
10) Connector used to load the memory card to the CPU module.
connector 2
Connector for connection with USB-compatible peripheral device. (Connector type
11) USB connector miniB)
CONFIGURATION
Can be connected by USB-dedicated cable.
SYSTEM
Can be connected by RS-232 connection cable (QC30R2).
STOP : Stops sequence program operation. 3
13) RUN/STOP/RESET switch*2
RESET : Performs hardware reset, operation error reset, operation initialization or
SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL
For connection of battery lead wires.
4
SPECIFICATIONS OF
Backup battery for use of standard RAM, timer function and power failure
THE CPU MODULE

17) Battery
compensation function.
HARDWARE
19) Ethernet connector Connector for connecting an Ethernet device (RJ-45 connector)
On: Connected at 100Mbps.
20) 100M LED
Off: Not connnected, or connected at 10Mbps 5
On: Data being sent/received
21) SD/RD LED
Off: No data being sent/received
POWER SUPPLY
MODULE
connector.
6
EXTENSION CABLE
CPU module
BASE UNIT AND
RS-232 cable 7
MEMORY CARD AND
Q6HLD-R2
Fixing screw
BATTERY
*2 : Operate the RUN/STOP/RESET switch with your fingertips.

8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES

4.4.1 Part Names
4 - 41
This section explains the switch operation to be performed after a program is written using
GX Developer.
(1) When writing program with CPU module set to "STOP" *1

(a) To set to RUN status with device memory data cleared
1) Move the RUN/STOP/RESET switch to the RESET position once
(Approximately 1 second) and return it to the STOP position.
2) Set the RUN/STOP/RESET switch to the RUN position.
(b) To set to RUN status with device memory data not cleared (held)
1) Set the RUN/STOP/RESET switch to the RUN position.
2) The "RUN" LED flashes.
3) Set the RUN/STOP/RESET switch to the STOP position.
4) Setthe RUN/STOP/RESET switch to the RUN position again.
(2) When a program is written while CPU module is running (online

change)*2
No operation is needed for the RUN/STOP/RESET switch of the CPU module. At this
time, the device memory data are not cleared.
* 1: When a program was written to the program memory during boot operation, also write the
program to the boot source memory.
If the program is not written to the boot source memory, the old program will be executed at the
next boot operation.
* 2: When online change is performed in the ladder mode, the program changed online is written to
the program memory.
When performing boot operation, also write the program to the boot source memory after online
change. If the program is not written to the boot source memory, the old program will be executed
at the next boot operation
POINT
When the CPU module is placed in the STOP status by the remote STOP
operation of GX Developer, it can be put in the RUN status by the remote RUN
operation of GX Developer after program write.
In that case, No operation is needed for the RUN/STOP/RESET switch of the
CPU module.
For details of GX Developer, refer to the manual below.

1
OVERVIEW
For the Universal model QCPU, the RUN/STOP/RESET switch of the CPU module is used
to switch between the "RUN status" and "STOP status" and to perform "RESET
operation".
When using the RUN/STOP/RESET switch to reset the CPU module, moving the RUN/ 2
STOP/RESET switch to the reset position will not reset it immediately.
CONFIGURATION
POINT
SYSTEM
Hold the RUN/STOP/RESET switch in the RESET position until reset processing
is complete (the flickering ERR. LED goes off).
If you release your hand from the RUN/STOP/RESET switch during reset
processing (during rapid flickering of ERR. LED), the switch will return to the
3
STOP position and reset processing cannot be completed.
SPECIFICATIONS
Perform reset operation with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch as shown in Diagram 4.23.
GENERAL
Start
.......................Reset operation is started using

4
Hold the RUN/STOP/RESET switch
the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.
SPECIFICATIONS OF
in the "RESET" position.
THE CPU MODULE

HARDWARE
RESET RUN
RUN/STOP/RESET
STOP switch
5
.......................Reset is accepted and reset
The ERR. LED flickers several times
processing is performed.
(3 to 4 times) rapidly.
POWER SUPPLY
MODULE
MODE
RUN Flickers.
ERR.
USER
BAT.
BOOT
6
.......................Reset is completed.
EXTENSION CABLE
The "ERR. LED" goes off .
BASE UNIT AND
MODE
RUN Goes off.
ERR.
USER
BAT.
BOOT
7
.......................Reset is canceled.
MEMORY CARD AND
Return the RUN/STOP/RESET

switch to the "STOP" position.
BATTERY
RESET RUN
RUN/STOP/RESET : Releasing your hand from the
STOP switch RUN/STOP/RESET switch returns it
to the STOP position.
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES
Termination , completed , end
Diagram 4.23 Reset Operation

4 - 43
POINT
Operate the RUN/STOP/RESET switch with your fingertips.
Do not use any tool such as a screwdriver because the switch part might be
damaged.
For the Universal model QCPU, latch clear is performed by the remote latch clear
operation of GX Developer.
Latch clear cannot be executed by operating the switches of the CPU module.
POINT
PLC parameter.
2. For the remote latch clear operation by GX Developer, refer to the manual
below.

5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE
1
CHAPTER5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE
OVERVIEW
This chapter describes the specifications of the power supply modules applicable for the
programmable controller system (The Q Series power supply module, slim type power
supply module, redundant power supply module and AnS/A Series power supply module)
2
and how to select the most suitable module.
CONFIGURATION
5.1 Base Unit that Can Be Used in Combination with Power Supply
Module
SYSTEM
This section describes the base unit that can be used in combination with the power 3
supply module respectively.
For details of the CPU modules and base units, refer to the following chapters:
SPECIFICATIONS
CPU modules : CHAPTER 4
GENERAL
Base units : CHAPTER 6
For details of the system configuration, refer to CHAPTER 2.

4
Table5.1 Base unit that can be used in combination with power supply module
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
Base unit *1
HARDWARE
Main base unit Extension base unit
Power supply Q33B Q63B
module Q32SB QA65B
Q35B Q38DB Q52B Q65B QA1S65B
Q33SB Q38RB Q68RB Q65WRB QA68B
Q38B Q312DB Q55B Q68B QA1S68B
Q35SB *3
Q61P-A1
Q312B Q612B
5
Q61P-A2
Q61P
POWER SUPPLY
Q62P
Q63P
MODULE
Q64P
Q64PN
Q61SP
Q63RP
Q64RP
*2 6
A1S61PN
EXTENSION CABLE
A1S62PN
BASE UNIT AND
A1S63P
A61P
A61PN
A62P
A63P
A61PEU
A62PEU
7
MEMORY CARD AND
: Combination available : Combination not available

*1 : The main base unit (Q3 B) and the redundant power extension base unit (Q6 RB) cannot be used in combination.
Also, the redundant power main base unit (Q3 RB) and the extension base unit (Q6 B, QA1S6 B, QA6 B) cannot be used in combination.
BATTERY
The redundant type extension base unit (Q6 WRB) can be used only when the redundant system is configured.
*2 : When mounting the Q64RP to the Q65WRB, use the Q64RP whose first 6 digits of serial No. is "081103" or later.
When mounting the Q64RP whose first 6 digits of serial No. is "081102" or earlier, the vibration condition described in the general specifications may not be
*3
met.
: The QA6ADP+A6 B also has the equivalent specifications.
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES
5.1 Base Unit that Can Be Used in Combination with Power Supply Module 5-1
5.2 Specifications
5.2.1 Power supply module specifications
Table5.2 shows the specifications of the power supply modules.
Table5.2 Power supply module specifications
Performance Specifications
Item
Q61P-A1 Q61P-A2 Q61P Q62P
Base loading position Power supply module loading slot
Applicable base unit Q3 B, Q3 DB, Q6 B
+10% +10% +10%
100 to 120VAC -15% 200 to 240VAC -15% 100 to 240VAC -15%
Input power supply
(85 to 132VAC) (170 to 264VAC) (85 to 264VAC)
Input frequency 50/60Hz 5%
Input voltage
Within 5% ( Section 5.2.3)
distortion factor
Max. input apparent
105VA 120VA 105VA
power
Max. input power ----
Inrush current 20A within 8ms*5
Rated 5VDC 6A 3A
output
24VDC ---- 0.6A
current
External output
---- 24VDC 10%
voltage
Overcurrent 5VDC 6.6A or more 3.3A or more
protection*1 24VDC ---- 0.66A or more
Overvoltage 5VDC 5.5 to 6.5V
protection *2 24VDC ----
Efficiency 70% or more 65% or more
Allowable momentary
power failure period Within 20ms
*3
Dielectric withstand Across inputs/LG and outputs/FG
voltage 2830VAC rms/3 cycles (2000 m (6562 ft.))
Across inputs and outputs (LG and FG separated), across inputs and LG/FG, across outputs and FG/
Insulation resistance
LG 10M or more by insulation resistance tester
• By noise simulator of 1500Vp-p noise voltage, 1 s noise width and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency
Noise durability
• Noise voltage IEC61000-4-4, 2kV
Operation indication LED indication (Normal: ON (green), Error: OFF)
Fuse Built-in (Unchangeable by user)
5-2 5.2 Specifications

1
Item
Q61P-A1 Q61P-A2 Q61P Q62P
OVERVIEW
Application ERR contact ( Section 5.3)
Rated
switching
voltage,
24VDC, 0.5A 2
Contact output section
current
CONFIGURATION
Minimum
5VDC, 1mA
switching load
SYSTEM
Response time OFF to ON: 10ms max. ON to OFF: 12ms max.
Mechanical : More than 20 million times
Life
Electrical : More than 100 thousand times at rated switching voltage, current 3
Surge
No
suppressor
SPECIFICATIONS
Fuse No
GENERAL
Terminal screw size M3.5 7
Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2
Applicable solderless
terminal
RAV1.25 - 3.5, RAV2 - 3.5 4
Applicable tightening
SPECIFICATIONS OF
0.66 to 0.89N•m
THE CPU MODULE

torque
HARDWARE
H 98mm (3.86inch)
External
W 55.2mm (2.17inch)
dimensions
D 90mm (3.55inch)
Weight 0.31kg 0.40kg 0.39kg
5
POWER SUPPLY
MODULE
6
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES
5.2 Specifications
5-3
Item
Q63P
+30%
24VDC -35%
Input power supply
(15.6 to 31.2VDC)
Input frequency ----
Input voltage
----
distortion factor
Max. input apparent
----
power
Max. input power 45W
Inrush current 100A within 1ms (at 24VDC input)
Rated 5VDC 6A
output
24VDC ----
current
External output
----
voltage
Overcurrent 5VDC 6.6A or more
protection*1 24VDC ----
protection *2 24VDC ----
Efficiency 70% or more
Allowable momentary Within 10ms
power failure time *3 (at 24VDC input)
Dielectric withstand
500VAC across primary and 5VDC
voltage
Insulation resistance 10M or more by insulation resistance tester
Noise durability By noise simulator of 500Vp-p noise voltage, 1 s noise width and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency

1
Item
Q63P
OVERVIEW
Rated
switching
voltage,
24VDC, 0.5A 2
current
CONFIGURATION
Minimum
5VDC, 1mA
switching load
SYSTEM
Life
Electrical : More than 100 thousand times at rated switching voltage, current 3
Surge
No
suppressor
SPECIFICATIONS
Fuse No
GENERAL
Terminal screw size M3.5 7
terminal
RAV1.25 - 3.5, RAV2 - 3.5 4
SPECIFICATIONS OF
0.66 to 0.89N•m
THE CPU MODULE

torque
HARDWARE
H 98mm (3.86inch)
External
W 55.2mm (2.17inch)
dimensions
D 90mm (3.55inch)
Weight 0.33kg
5
POWER SUPPLY
MODULE
6
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES
5.2 Specifications
5-5
Item
Q64P Q64PN
+10% +10%
100 to 120VAC/200 to 240VAC -15% 100 to 240VAC -15%
Input power supply
(85V to 132VAC/170 to 264VAC) (85V to 264VAC)
Input voltage
distortion factor
Max. input apparent
160VA
power
Rated 5VDC 8.5A
output
24VDC ----
current
Allowable momentary
Within 20ms
power failure time*3
Across inputs and outputs (LG and FG separated), across inputs and LG/FG,
across outputs and FG/LG 10M or more by insulation resistance tester
Noise durability

1
Item
Q64P Q64PN
OVERVIEW
Rated
switching
voltage,
24VDC, 0.5A 2
current
CONFIGURATION
Minimum
5VDC, 1mA
switching load
SYSTEM
Response
OFF to ON: 10ms max. ON to OFF: 12ms max.
time
Life
Mechanical : More than 20 million times 3
Electrical : More than 100 thousand times at rated switching voltage, current
Surge
SPECIFICATIONS
No
suppressor
GENERAL
Fuse No
Terminal screw size M3.5 screw
Applicable solderless 4
RAV1.25 - 3.5, RAV2 - 3.5
terminal
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
0.66 to 0.89N•m
HARDWARE
torque
H 98mm (3.86inch)
External
W 55.2mm (2.17inch)
dimensions
D 115mm (4.53inch)
Weight 0.40kg 0.47kg
5
POWER SUPPLY
MODULE
6
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES
5.2 Specifications
5-7
Item
Q61SP
Applicable base unit Q3 SB
+10%
100 to 240VAC -15%
Input power supply
(85 to 264VAC)
Input voltage
distortion factor
Max. input apparent
40VA
power
Rated 5VDC 2A
output
24VDC ----
current
24VDC *2 ----
protection
Allowable momentary
Within 20ms (AC100VAC or more)
Noise durability
Rated
switching
24VDC, 0.5A
voltage,
current
Minimum
5VDC, 1mA
switching load
Life
Surge
No
suppressor
Fuse No

1
Item
Q61SP
OVERVIEW
terminal
RAV1.25 - 3.5, RAV2 - 3.5 2
0.66 to 0.89N•m
CONFIGURATION
torque
H 98mm (3.86inch)
SYSTEM
External
W 27.4mm (1.08inch)
dimensions
D 104mm (4.09inch)
Weight 0.18kg 3
SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL
4
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
HARDWARE
5
POWER SUPPLY
MODULE
6
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES
5.2 Specifications
5-9
Item
Q63RP
Base unit position Power supply module loading slot
Applicable base unit Q3 RB, Q3 RB, Q6 WRB
Input power supply 24V DC(-35%/+30%) (15.6 to 31.2V DC)
Max. input power 65W
Inrush current 150A within 1ms
Rated output 5VDC 8.5A
current 24VDC ----
*1 24VDC ----
protection
Allowable momentary
Within 10ms(at 24V DC input)
power failure period*3
Dielectric withstand
500V AC across primary and 5V DC
voltage
Insulation resistance 10M or more by insulation resistance tester
By noise simulator of 500Vp-p
Noise durability noise voltage, 1 s noise width and 25 to 60Hz
noise frequency
Operation indication LED indication*6 (Normal operation: ON(green) Error:OFF(red)
Rated switching
24VDC, 0.5A
voltage, current
Minimum
5VDC, 1mA
switching load
Life
Surge suppressor No
Fuse No
Terminal screw size M3.5 Screw
RAV1.25-3.5, RAV2-3.5, RAV1.25-3.5, RAV2-3.5
terminal
0.66 to 0.89N•m
torque
H 98mm (3.86inch)
External
W 83mm (3.27inch)
dimensions
D 115mm (4.53inch)
Weight 0.60kg
*6: Although the "POWER" LED momentarily lights up in red immediately after the power supply is turned on or off, the
Q64RP is not faulty.
5 - 10 5.2 Specifications
1
Item
Q64RP
OVERVIEW
Applicable base unit Q3 RB, Q6 RB, Q6 WRB*7
Input power supply

100 to 120VAC/200 to 240VAC -15%
+10%
2
(85 to 132VAC/170 to 264VAC)
CONFIGURATION
Input voltage
SYSTEM
distortion factor
Max. input apparent
160VA
power
3
Rated 5VDC 8.5A
SPECIFICATIONS
output
24VDC ----
GENERAL
current
*1 24VDC ----
protection
Overvoltage 5VDC 5.5 to 6.5V 4
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
HARDWARE
Allowable momentary
Within 20ms
voltage 2830VAC rms/3 cycles (2000 m (6562 ft.)) 5
POWER SUPPLY
Noise durability
MODULE
Operation indication LED indication (Normal: ON (green), Error: ON (red)) *6
6
*6: Although the "POWER" LED momentarily lights up in red immediately after the power supply is turned on or off, the
Q64RP is not faulty.
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
*7: When mounting the Q64RP to the Q65WRB, use the Q64RP whose first 6 digits of serial No. is "081103" or later.
When mounting the Q64RP whose first 6 digits of serial No. is "081102" or earlier, the vibration condition described in the
general specifications may not be met.
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES
5.2 Specifications
5 - 11

Item
Q64RP
Rated
switching
24VDC, 0.5A
voltage,
current
Minimum
5VDC, 1mA
switching load
Life
Surge
No
suppressor
Fuse No
R1.25-3.5, R2-3.5, RAV1.25-3.5, RAV2-3.5
terminal
0.66 to 0.89N•m
torque
H 98mm (3.86inch)
External
W 83mm (3.27inch)
dimensions
D 115mm (4.53inch)
Weight 0.47kg
1
Item
Q00JCPU (Power supply part)
OVERVIEW
+10%
100 to 120VAC -15%
Input power supply
(85 to 264VAC)
Input frequency 50/60Hz 5% 2
Input voltage
CONFIGURATION
distortion factor
Max. input apparent
105VA
SYSTEM
power
Rated
3
output 5VDC 3A
current
SPECIFICATIONS
Overcurrent
5VDC 3.3A or more
protection*1
GENERAL
Overvoltage
5VDC 5.5 to 6.5V
protection*2
Efficiency 65% or more 4
Allowable momentary
SPECIFICATIONS OF
Within 20ms (100VAC or more)
THE CPU MODULE

HARDWARE
across outputs and FG/LG 10M or more by insulation resistance tester 5
Noise durability
POWER SUPPLY
Operation indication LED indication (The POWER LED of the CPU part: Normal: ON (green), Error: OFF)
MODULE
Contact output
No
section
Terminal screw size M3.5 7 6
EXTENSION CABLE
Applicable solderless BASE UNIT AND
RAV1.25 - 3.5, RAV2 - 3.5
terminal
0.66 to 0.89N•m
torque
External dimensions
Section 4.1 7
Weight
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES
5.2 Specifications
5 - 13
Item
A1S61PN A1S62PN A1S63P
Applicable base unit QA1S6 B
+10% +30%
100 to 240VAC -15% 24VDC -35%
Input power supply
(85 to 264VAC) (15.6 to 31.2VDC)
Input frequency 50/60Hz 5% ----
Input voltage
Within 5% ( Section 5.2.3) ---
distortion factor
Max. input apparent
105VA ----
power
Max. input power ---- 41W
Inrush current 20A within 8ms*5 81A within 1ms
Rated 5VDC 5A 3A 5A
output
24VDC ---- 0.6A ----
current
Overcurrent 5VDC 5.5A or more 3.3A or more 5.5A or more
*1 24VDC ---- 0.66A or more ----
protection
Allowable momentary Within 10ms
Within 20ms
power failure time*3 (at 24VDC input)
Dielectric withstand Across inputs/LG and outputs/FG 500VAC across primary and
voltage 2830VAC rms/3 cycles (2000 m (6562 ft.)) 5VDC
Across inputs and outputs (LG and FG separated), across inputs
5M or more by insulation
Insulation resistance and LG/FG, across outputs and FG/LG 10M or more by
resistance tester
insulation resistance tester
• By noise simulator of 1500Vp-p noise voltage, 1 s noise width By noise simulator of 500Vp-p
Noise durability and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency noise voltage, 1 s noise width
• Noise voltage IEC61000-4-4, 2kV and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency
Contact output
No
section
RAV1.25 to 3.5, RAV2 to 3.5
terminal
0.66 to 0.89N•m
torque
H 130mm (5.12inch)
External
W 55mm (2.17inch)
dimensions
D 93.6mm (3.69inch)
1
Specifications
Item
A61P A61PN A62P A63P
OVERVIEW
Slot position Power supply module loading slot
Applicable base unit QA6 B
100VAC to 120VAC-15%
+10%
2
+30%
(85VAC to 132VAC) 24VDC-35%
Input power supply
CONFIGURATION
+10%
200VAC to 240VAC-15% (15.6VDC to 31.2VDC)
(170VAC to 264VAC)
SYSTEM
Input frequency 50/60Hz 5% –
Input voltage
distortion
Within 5% ( Section 5.2.3) – 3
Max. input apparent
160VA 155VA 65W
SPECIFICATIONS
power
Inrush current 20A, 8ms or less*5 100A, 1ms or less
GENERAL
Rated 5VDC 8A 5A 8A
output
24VDC – 0.8A –
current 4
Overcurrent 5VDC 8.8A or more 5.5A or more 8.5A or more
SPECIFICATIONS OF
protection*1 24VDC – 1.2A or more –
THE CPU MODULE

Overvoltage 5VDC 5.5 to 6.5V 5.5 to 6.5V 5.5 to 6.5V
HARDWARE
protection*2 24VDC –
Dielectric withstand Between AC external terminals and ground, 1500V AC, 1 minute
voltage Between DC external terminals and ground, 500V AC, 1 minute
5
By noise simulator of
POWER SUPPLY
500Vp-p noise voltage,
By noise simulator of 1500Vp-p noise voltage, noise width 1 s, and 25 to
Noise durability noise width 1 s, and 25
60Hz noise frequency
MODULE
to 60Hz noise
frequency
Insulation resistance Between AC external terminals and ground, 5M or higher by 500VDC insulation resistance tester 6
Power indicator LED indication of power supply
EXTENSION CABLE
Terminal screw size M4 0.7 6
BASE UNIT AND
Applicable solderless R1.25-4, R2-4
terminal RAV1.25, RAV2-4
torque
78 to 118 Ncm 7
H 250mm(9.84inch)
MEMORY CARD AND
External
W 55mm(2.17inch)
dimensions
D 121mm(4.76inch)
BATTERY
Weight 0.98 kg 0.75 kg 0.94 kg 0.8 kg

Allowable momentary
20ms or less 1ms or less
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES
5.2 Specifications
5 - 15
Performance specifications
Item
A61PEU A62PEU
Slot position Power supply module loading slot
Applicable base unit QA6 B
Input power supply 100 to 120/200 to 240VAC +10%/-15%
Input voltage distortion Within 5% ( Section 5.2.3)
Max. input apparent power 130VA 155VA
Inrush current 20A, 8ms or less*5
Rated output 5VDC 8A 5A
current 24VDC – 0.8A
Overcurrent 5VDC 8.8A or more 5.5A or more
protection*1 24VDC – 1.2A or more
Overvoltage 5VDC 5.5 to 6.5V –
protection*2 24VDC –
Between
Dielectric
primary side 2830V AC rms/3 cycles (altitude 2000m (6562ft.))
withstand voltage
and FG
By noise simulator of noise voltage IEC801-4, 2kV, 1500Vp-p,
Noise durability
noise width 1 s, and noise frequency 25 to 60Hz
Power indicator LED indication of power supply
Terminal screw size M4 0.7 6
Applicable solderless terminal RAV1.25-4, RAV2-4
Applicable tightening torque 98 to 137N cm
H 250mm(9.84inch)
External
W 55mm(2.17inch)
dimensions
D 121mm(4.76inch)
Weight 0.8 kg 0.9 kg
Allowable momentary power
20ms or less
failure time*3
1
POINT
*1: Overcurrent protection
OVERVIEW
The overcurrent protection device shuts off the 5 V, 24 VDC circuit and stops the
system if the current flowing in the circuit exceeds the specified value.
The LED of the power supply module is turned off or lights up in dim green when 2
voltage is lowered. (As for the redundant power supply module, the LED is turned off
or lights up in red.) If this device is activated, switch the input power supply off and
CONFIGURATION
eliminate the cause such as insufficient current capacity or short. Then, a few minutes
later, switch it on to restart the system.
SYSTEM
The initial start for the system takes place when the current value becomes normal.
*2: Overvoltage protection 3

The overvoltage protection device shuts off the 5 VDC circuit and stops the system if a
voltage of 5.5 VDC is applied to the circuit.
SPECIFICATIONS
When this device is activated, the power supply module LED is switched OFF.
GENERAL
If this happens, switch the input power OFF, then a few minutes later ON. This causes
the initial start for the system to take place. The power supply module must be
changed if the system is not booted and the LED remains OFF (As for the redundant
4
power supply module, the LED lights up in red).
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
HARDWARE
5
POWER SUPPLY
MODULE
6
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES
5.2 Specifications
5 - 17
*3: Allowable momentary power failure time

(a) For AC input power supply
• If the momentary power failure time is within 20ms, the system detects an AC
down and suspends the operation processing. However, the system continues
operations after the power comes back.
• If the momentary power failure time exceeds 20ms, the system either continues
or initially starts operations depending on the power supply load. In case that
the operation processing is continued, the system operates the same as when
the momentary power failure time is within 20ms.
Supplying the same amount of AC to both the power supply module and the
input module (such as QX10) can prevent the sensor connected to the input
module from being switched to the OFF status when the power supply turns
OFF.
Note, however, that if only the input module (such as QX10) is connected on
the AC line, which is connected to the power supply, an AC down detection in
the power supply module may be delayed due to the internal capacitor of the
input module. To avoid this, connect a load of approx. 30mA per input module
on the AC line.
In the system operating with two redundant power supply modules, the system
does not initially start operations when the momentary power failure exceeding
20ms occurs in only one of the input power supplies.
The system, however, may initially start operations when the momentary power
failure exceeding 20ms occurs simultaneously in both input power supplies.
(b) For DC input power supply
• If the momentary power failure time is within 10ms(*4), the system detects an
24VDC down and suspends the operation processing. However, the system
continues operations after the power comes back.
• If the momentary power failure time exceeds 10ms(*4), the system either
continues or initially starts operations depending on the power supply load. In
case that the operation processing is continued, the system operates the same
as when the momentary power failure time is within 10ms.
(*4: This is the time when 24VDC is input. If the input is less than 24VDC, the
time will be less than 10ms.)
*5: Inrush current
When power is switched on again immediately (within 5 seconds) after power-off, an
inrush current of more than the specified value (2ms or less) may flow. Reapply power
5 or more seconds after power-off. When selecting a fuse and breaker in the external
circuit, take account of the blowout, detection characteristics and above matters.
1
Item
A68P
OVERVIEW
Location I/O module slot
Number of points occupied 2 slots occupied, 1 slot 16 points
+10%
100 to 120V AC-15% 2
(85 to 132V AC)
Input voltage
CONFIGURATION
+10%
200 to 240V AC-15%
(170 to 264V AC)
SYSTEM
Max. input apparent power 95VA
Inrush current 20A, within 8ms 3
Rated output +15VDC 1.2A
current -15VDC 0.7A
SPECIFICATIONS
Overcurrent +15VDC 1.64A or more
GENERAL
protection*8 -15VDC 0.94A or more
Power indicator Power LED display (Normal: ON (green), error: OFF)
Contact output
4
SPECIFICATIONS OF
Switched on if +15V DC output is +14.25V or higher or -15V DC output is -14.25V or lower.
THE CPU MODULE

Power ON monitor output
Min. contact switching load: 5V DC, 10mA
HARDWARE
Min. contact switching load: 264V AC (R load)
Terminal screw size M3 0.5(0.02) 6(0.24)
Wire size 0.75 to 2mm2 (18 to 14 AWG)
Soldreless terminal V1.25 - 4, V2 - YS4A, V2 - S4, V2 - YS4A 5
H 250mm(9.84inch)
External
W 75.5mm(2.97inch)
POWER SUPPLY
dimensions
D 121mm(4.76inch)
MODULE
Weight 0.9kg(1.98lb)
POINT
*8: The overcurrent protection shuts off the +15VDC circuit if a current higher than the
6
specified value flows in the circuit and:
EXTENSION CABLE
(a) Both +15VDC and -15VDC are switched off if overcurrent has occurred at +15V; BASE UNIT AND
or
(b) -15VDC is switched off but +15V remains output if overcurrent has occueered at -
15V; and
(c) The power supply module LED is switched off or dimly lit due to 15VDC voltage 7
drop.
MEMORY CARD AND
If this device is activated, turn off the input power supply and eliminate the cause
such as insufficient current capacity or short before restarting the system.
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES
5.2 Specifications
5 - 19
5.2.2 Selecting the power supply module
The power supply module is selected according to the total of current consumption of the
base units, I/O modules, intelligent function module, special function module, and
peripheral devices supplied by its power supply module.
For the internal current consumption of 5 VDC of the base unit, refer to CHAPTER 6.
For the internal current consumption of 5 VDC of the I/O modules, intelligent function
module, special function module, and peripheral devices, refer to the Manuals of their
respective modules.
For the devices obtained by a user, see the manual for the respective device.
(1) When the base unit is Q3 B, Q3 DB or Q6 B:
Power supply module Base unit Q35B,

Q61P-A1, Q61P-A2, etc. Q65B, etc.
Peripheral devices, converter,

CPU module 1
cables, etc. (for connection
Q02(H)CPU,
between CPU module and
Q06HCPU, etc.
PC)
I/O module QX10,

QY10, etc.
Intelligent function module Q64AD,

QJ71LP21-25, etc.
Diagram 5.1 Modules and peripheral device that are powered

by power supply module
*1: The CPU module is loaded on the main base unit.
Keep the current consumption of the base unit (Q3 B, Q3 DB, Q6 B) below the
5VDC rated output current of the Q series power supply module.
Table5.13 5VD rated output current
5VDC rated output current Type

6.0A Q61P-A1, Q61P-A2, Q61P, Q63P
3.0A Q62P
8.5A Q64P, Q64PN
(a) Caution on using the extension base unit (Q5 B)

When Q5 B is used, a power of 5VDC is supplied from the power supply module
on the main base unit through an extension cable.
Pay attention to the following to use Q5 B.
• Select a power supply module of a proper 5VDC rated output current as the
one to be installed to the main base unit so that it will cover the current used
by Q5 B.
For example, if current consumption is 3.0A on the main base unit and 1.0A
on Q5 B, any of the power supply modules shown in Table5.14 must be
mounted on the main base unit.
1

6.0A Q61P-A1, Q61P-A2, Q61P, Q63P
OVERVIEW
8.5A Q64P, Q64PN
• Because 5VDC is supplied to Q5 B through an extension cable, voltage is

lowered in the extension cable. 2
The power supply module and extension cable must be selected so that a
voltage of 4.75VDC or more is supplied at the "IN" connector of Q5 B.
CONFIGURATION
For details of the voltage drop, refer to Section 6.1.4.
SYSTEM
(b) Methods for reducing voltage drops
The following methods are effective to reduce voltage drops at the extension
cables. 3
1) Changing the module loading positions
Load large current consumption modules on the main base unit.
SPECIFICATIONS
Load small current consumption modules on the extension base unit (Q5 B).
GENERAL
2) Using short extension cables
The shorter the extension cable is, the smaller the resistance and voltage
drops are. 4
Use the shortest possible extension cables.
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
(2) When the base unit is Q3 SB:
HARDWARE
Slim type
Power supply module Slim type main base unit Q32SB,
Q33SB, Q35SB
Q61SP
5
CPU module Peripheral devices, converter,
Q02(H)CPU, cables, etc. (for connection
POWER SUPPLY
Q06HCPU, etc.
PC)
MODULE
I/O module QX10,
QY10, etc.
Intelligent function module Q64AD, 6

QJ71LP21-25, etc.
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
Keep the current consumption of the slim type main base unit (Q3 SB) not
exceeding the 5VDC rated output current of the slim type power supply module 7
(Q61SP).
MEMORY CARD AND

BATTERY
5VDC Rated output current Type

2.0A Q61SP
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES
5.2 Specifications
5 - 21
(3) When the base unit is Q3 RB or Q6 RB
Redundant power supply Redundant power supply base unit

module × 2 modules Q3 RB, Q6 RB
Peripheral devices, converter,

CPU module 2
cables, etc. (for connection
Q02(H)CPU,
Q06HCPU, etc.
PC)
I/O module QX10,

QY10, etc.
Intelligent function module Q64AD,

QJ71LP21-25, etc.
2: Mounted on the redundant main base unit (Q3 RB)


Q63RP
8.5A
Q64RP
POINT
When a redundant power supply system is configured and one redundant power
supply module has failed, the system is operated using the other redundant power
supply module only during replacement of the failed redundant power supply
module.
Therefore, keep the current consumption of the redundant power supply base unit
(Q3 RB/Q6 RB/Q6 WRB) within the 5VDC rated output current (8.5A) for one
redundant power supply module.
1
(a) Cautions for using the extension base unit (Q5 B)
When Q5 B is used, a power of 5VDC is supplied from the redundant power
OVERVIEW
supply module on the redundant power main base unit (Q3 RB) through an
extension cable.
Pay attentions to the following to use Q5 B.
2
• Keep the sum of the current consumption on Q3 RB and Q5 B not
exceeding the 5VDC rated output current for one redundant power supply
CONFIGURATION
module.
SYSTEM
• Because 5VDC is supplied to Q5 B through an extension cable, voltage
drop occurs in the extension cable.
Select an appropriate extension cable so that a voltage of 4.75VDC or more
3
is supplied at the "IN" connector of Q5 B.
For details of the voltage drop, refer to Section 6.1.4.
SPECIFICATIONS
(b) Methods for reducing voltage drops
GENERAL
The following methods are effective to reduce voltage drops at the extension
cables.
1) Changing the module loading positions 4
Mount a module with large current consumption on the redundant power main
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
base unit (Q3 RB).
Load small current consumption modules on the extension base unit (Q5 B).
HARDWARE
2) Using short extension cables
The shorter the extension cable is, the smaller the resistance and voltage
drops are. 5
Use the shortest possible extension cables.
POWER SUPPLY
(4) When the base unit is QA1S6 B:
MODULE
Base unit QA1S65B,
module A1S61PN, A1S62PN,
QA1S68B
A1S63P
6
I/O module A1SX10,
A1SY10, etc.
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
peripheral
Special function module devices
A1SD61,A1SD75P1-S3, etc. AD75TU
7
Select the power supply module also in consideration of the current consumption of
MEMORY CARD AND
the peripheral devices connected to the special function module.

For example, when the AD75TU is connected to the AD75P1-S3, the current
BATTERY
consumption of the AD75TU must also be taken into account.
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES
5.2 Specifications
5 - 23
(5) When the base unit is QA6 B:

Base unit QA65B,
module A61P, A61PN, A62P,
QA68B
A63P
I/O module AX10,

AY10, etc.
Peripheral
Special function module device
AD61,AD75P1-S3, etc. AD75TU
Select the power supply module also in consideration of the current consumption of
the peripheral devices connected to the special function module.
For example, when the AD75TU is connected to the AD75P1-S3, the current
consumption of the AD75TU must also be taken into account.
5.2.3 Precaution when connecting the uninterruptive power supply
Be sure of the following terms when connecting the Q series CPU module system to the
uninterruptive power supply (hereinafter referred to as UPS):
Use the online UPS or line interactive UPS with a voltage distortion rate of 5% or less.
For the off-line system UPS, use Mitsubishi Electric's F Series UPS (serial number P or
later) (Ex.: FW-F10-0.3K/0.5K).
Do not use any off-line system UPS other than the F series mentioned above.
5.2.4 Cautions on power supply capacity
The Q64RP and Q64P automatically recognize the rated input voltage waveform to switch
the input voltage between 100VAC and 200VAC.
Select the power supply for the Q64RP/Q64P power supply module, considering the
power supply capacity. (Reference: At least twice as much as the current consumption)
If the power supply of insufficient capacity is applied, the power supply module might fail
when 200VAC power is supplied.
5.2.3 Precaution when connecting the uninterruptive power supply
1
5.3 Names of Parts and Settings
OVERVIEW
The names of the parts of each power supply module are described below.
Q61P-A1 (100 to 120VAC input, 5VDC 6A output) 2

Q61P-A2 (200 to 240VAC input, 5VDC 6A output)
Q61P (100 to 240VAC input, 5VDC 6A output)
CONFIGURATION
Q62P (100 to 240VAC input, 5VDC 3A/24VDC 0.6A output)
Q63P (24VDC input, 5VDC 6A output)
Q64P (100 to 120VAC/200 to 240VAC input, 5VDC 8.5A output)
SYSTEM
Q64PN (100 to 240VAC input, 5VDC 8.5A output)
10) 1), 2)
3
9) 9)
SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL
7) 3) 4)
(Q62P
5) 5)
4
only)
6) 6)
SPECIFICATIONS OF
12),13), 15)
THE CPU MODULE

14),16)
HARDWARE
11) 8) 8)
Q61P-A1, Q61P-A2, Q61P, Q62P, Q64P, Q64PN Q63P

5
Q61SP (100 to 240VAC input, 5VDC2A output)
10)
POWER SUPPLY
MODULE
Q61SP
INPUT Q61SP
100-240VAC
6
2)
EXTENSION CABLE
5) BASE UNIT AND
6)
14)
MITSUBISHI 7
MEMORY CARD AND
11)
BATTERY
Diagram 5.6 Power supply module
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES
5.3 Names of Parts and Settings 5 - 25

Table5.17 Part Names

ON (green): Normal (5VDC output, momentary power failure within 20ms)
OFF : • AC power supply is ON, however, the power supply module is out of
order.
1) POWER LED (5VDC error, overload, internal circuit failure, blown fuse)
• AC power supply is not ON
• Power failure (including an momentary power failure of 20ms or
more)
OFF : • DC power supply is ON, however, the power supply module is out of
order.
2) POWER LED (5VDC error, overload, internal circuit failure, blown fuse)
• DC power supply is not ON
more)
• Turned ON when the whole system operates normally.
• This terminal turns OFF (opens) when the AC power is not input, a stop error
(including a reset) occurs in the CPU module, or the fuse is blown.
3) ERR terminals
• In a multiple CPU system configuration, turned OFF when a stop error occurs in
any of the CPU modules.
Normally off when loaded in an extension base unit.
• Turned ON when the whole system operates normally.
• This terminal turns OFF (opens) when the DC power is not input, a stop error
(including a reset) occurs in the CPU module, or the fuse is blown.
4) ERR terminals
• In a multiple CPU system configuration, turned OFF when a stop error occurs in
any of the CPU modules.
Normally off when loaded in an extension base unit.
5) FG terminal Ground terminal connected to the shield pattern of the printed circuit board.
Grounding for the power supply filter. For AC input, it has one-half the potential of the
6) LG terminal
input voltage.
Used to supply 24VDC power to inside the output module
7) +24V, 24G terminals
(using external wiring).
8) Terminal screw M3.5 7 screw
9) Terminal cover Protective cover of the terminal block
Used to fix the module to the base unit.
10) Module fixing screw hole
M3 12 screw (user-prepared) (Tightening torque range : 0.36 to 0.48N•m)
11) Module loading lever Used to load the module into the base unit.
12) Power input terminals Power input terminals for Q61P-A1 and connected to a 100VAC power supply.
13) Power input terminals Power input terminals for Q61P-A2 and connected to a 200VAC power supply.
Power input terminals for Q61P, Q61SP, Q62P, Q64PN and connected to a power
14) Power input terminals
supply of 100VAC to 200VAC.
15) Power input terminals Power input terminals for Q63P and connected to a 24VDC power supply.
5 - 26 5.3 Names of Parts and Settings

1
POINT
1. The Q61P-A1 is dedicated for inputting a voltage of 100 VAC.
OVERVIEW
Do not input a voltage of 200 VAC into it or trouble may occur on the Q61P-
A1.
Table5.18 Precaution 2
Power module Supply power voltage
CONFIGURATION
type 100VAC 200VAC
Power supply module causes
SYSTEM
Q61P-A1 Operates normally.
trouble.
Power supply module does not
Q61P-A2
cause trouble.
Operates normally. 3
CPU module cannot be
operated.
SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL
2. Q64P automatically switches the input range 100/200VAC.
Therefore, it is not compatible with the intermediate voltage (133 to 169VAC).
The CPU module may not work normally if the above intermediate voltage is
applied.
4
SPECIFICATIONS OF
3. Ensure that the ground terminals LG and FG are grounded.
THE CPU MODULE

4. When the Q61P-A1, Q61P-A2, Q61P, Q62P, Q63P or Q64P is loaded on the
HARDWARE
extension base unit, a system error cannot be detected by the ERR terminal.
(The ERR terminal is always OFF.)
POWER SUPPLY
MODULE
6
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES

Q63RP Q64RP
11) 1) 11) 2)
INPUT 10) 10)

24VDC
MAX 65W
OUTPUT 5VDC 8.5A
ERR.
L
3) 4)
24VDC 0.5A
(FG) 5) 5)
(LG) 6) 6)
+24V
INPUT 24VDC 7) 8)
24G
Q63RP
12) 12)
9) 9)

ON (green) : Normal operation (5V DC output, momentary power failure of 20ms or
less)
ON (red)*1 : DC power is input but the Q63RP is faulty. (5V DC error, overload,
1) POWER LED
overload, internal circuit failure)
OFF : DC power not input, blown fuse, power failure (including momentary
power failure of 10ms or more)
ON (green): Normal (5V DC output, momentary power failure within 20ms)
ON (red) : AC power supply is ON, however, Q64RP is out of order.
2) POWER LED* (5V DC error, overload, or internal circuit failure)
OFF : AC power supply is not ON, blown fuse, power failure (including
momentary power failure of 10ms or more)
<When power supply is mounted on redundant power main base unit (Q3 RB)>
• Turned ON when the system on the redundant power main base unit operates
normally.
• Turned OFF (open) when the Q63RP fails, the DC power supply is not input, a
CPU module stop error (including a reset) occurs, or the fuse is blown.
• Turned OFF (open) when a stop error occurs in any of the CPU modules in a
3) ERR terminals
multiple CPU system.
<When power supply is mounted on redundant power extension base unit (Q6 RB)
or redundant type extension base unit (Q6 WRB)>
• Turned ON when the Q63RP operates normally.
• Turned OFF (open) when the Q63RP fails, the DC power supply is not input, or
the fuse is blown.

1
<When power supply is mounted on redundant power main base unit (Q3 RB)>
• Turned ON when the system on the redundant power main base unit operates
OVERVIEW
normally.
• Turned OFF (open) when the Q64RP fails, the AC power supply is not input, a
CPU module stop error (including a reset) occurs, or the fuse is blown.
• Turned OFF (open) when a stop error occurs in any of the CPU modules in a
2
4) ERR terminals
CONFIGURATION
<When power supply is mounted on redundant power extension base unit (Q6 RB)
or redundant type extension base unit (Q6 WRB)>
SYSTEM
• Turned ON when the Q64RP operates normally.
• Turned OFF (open) when the Q64RP fails, the AC power supply is not input, or the
fuse is blown. 3
5) FG terminal Ground terminal connected to the shield pattern of the printed circuit board.
Grounding for the power supply filter. The potential of Q64RP terminal is 1/2 of the
SPECIFICATIONS
6) LG terminal
input voltage.
GENERAL
7) Power input terminals Connect direct current of 24 VDC with the power input terminal.
8) Power input terminals Power input terminals and connected to a 100VAC/200VAC power supply.
10) Terminal cover Protective cover of the terminal block 4
Screw hole for fixing a module to the base unit.
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE

M3 12 screw (user-prepared) (Tightening torque : 0.36 to 0.48N•m)
12) Module loading lever Used to mount a module on the base unit.
HARDWARE
*: Although the "POWER" LED lights up in red for a moment immediately after the power supply is turned on or off, redun-
dant power supply modules is not faulty.
5
POINT
1. Q64RP automatically switches the input range 100/200VAC.
POWER SUPPLY
Therefore, it is not compatible with the intermediate voltage (133 to 169VAC).
The CPU module may not work normally if the above intermediate voltage is
MODULE
applied.
2. Supply power to redundant power supply modules from separate power
sources (a redundant power supply system). 6
3. Ensure that the earth terminals LG and FG are grounded.
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES

A1S61PN A1S62PN A1S63P

9) 9) 9)
1) 1) 1)
8) 8) 8)
3) 4) 5) 7) 2) 3) 4) 5) 7) 3) 4) 6) 7)

OFF : • AC power supply is ON, however, the power supply module is out of
order.
1) POWER LED (5VDC error, overload, internal circuit failure, or fuse blown)
• AC power supply is not ON
more)
2) +24V, 24G terminals Used to supply 24VDC power to inside the output module (using external wiring).
3) FG terminals Ground terminal connected to the shield pattern of the printed circuit board.
Grounding for the power supply filter. The potential of A1S61PN or A1S62PN
4) LG terminals
terminal is 1/2 of the input voltage.
5) Power input terminals Used to connect a 100VAC to 200VAC power supply.
6) Power input terminals Used to connect a 24VDC power supply.
8) Terminal cover Protective cover of the terminal block
Used to fix the module to the base unit.
(M4 screw, tightening torque : 0.66 to 0.89N•m)
POINT
1. Do not wire to those terminals for which NC is stamped on the terminal block.
2. Ensure that the ground terminals LG and FG are grounded.

6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE
1
CHAPTER6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE
OVERVIEW
This chapter describes the specifications of the extension cables for the
base units (the main base unit, slim type main base unit, redundant power main base unit,
extension base unit, redundant power extension base unit and redundant type extension
base unit) used in the programmable controller system and the specification standards of
2
the extension base unit.
CONFIGURATION
6.1 Base Unit
SYSTEM
6.1.1 Specification Table
3
The base unit is a unit to which the CPU module, power supply module, I/O module and/or
SPECIFICATIONS
intelligent function module are installed.
Section 6.1.1 to Section 6.1.4 provide the specifications and other information on the base
GENERAL
unit.
(1) Main base unit 4
SPECIFICATIONS OF
Table6.1 Main base unit specifications
THE CPU MODULE

Type
HARDWARE
Item
Q33B Q35B Q38B Q312B
Number of I/O modules
3 5 8 12
installed
Possibility of extension Extendable
5
Applicable module Q series modules
5 VDC internal current
0.11A 0.12A 0.13A
POWER SUPPLY
consumption
Mounting hole size M4 screw hole or 4.5 hole (for M4 screw)
MODULE
H 98mm (3.86inch)
External dimensions W 189mm (7.44inch) 245mm (9.65inch) 328mm (12.92inch) 439mm (17.28inch)
D 44.1mm (1.74inch)
Weight 0.21kg 0.27kg 0.36kg 0.47kg
6
Attachment Mounting screw M4 14 4 pieces*1 (DIN rail mounting adapter to be sold separately)
EXTENSION CABLE
DIN rail mounting adapter BASE UNIT AND
Q6DIN3 Q6DIN2 Q6DIN1
type
* 1: The 5 base mounting screws are included with the Q38B and Q312B that have 5 base mounting
holes.
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES
6.1 Base Unit

6-1
(2) Slim type main base unit

Table6.2 Slim type main base unit specifications
Type
Item
Q32SB Q33SB Q35SB
2 3 5
installed
Possibility of extension Cannot connect extension modules.
0.09A 0.10A
consumption
H 98mm (3.86inch)
External dimensions W 114mm (4.49inch) 142mm (5.59inch) 197.5mm (7.78inch)
D 18.5mm (0.73inch)
Weight 0.12kg 0.15kg 0.21kg
Attachment Mounting screw M4 12 4 pieces (DIN rail mounting adapter to be sold separately)
DIN rail mounting adapter
Q6DIN3
type
(3) Redundant power main base unit

Table6.3 Redundant power main base unit specifications
Type
Item
Q38RB
8
installed
0.12A
consumption
H 98mm (3.86inch)
External dimensions W 439mm (17.28inch)
D 44.1mm (1.74inch)
Weight 0.47kg
Attachment Mounting screw M4 14 5 pieces (DIN rail mounting adapter to be sold separately)
Q6DIN1
type
6-2 6.1 Base Unit

1
(4) Multiple CPU high speed main base unit
OVERVIEW
Table6.4 Multiple CPU high speed main base unit specifications
Type
Item
Q38DB Q312DB
8 12
2
installed
CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
0.23A 0.24A
consumption
External
H 98mm (3.86inch) 3
W 328mm (12.92inch) 439mm(17.30inch)
dimensions
D 44.1mm (1.74inch)
SPECIFICATIONS
Attachment Mounting screw M4 14, 5 pieces (DIN rail mounting adapter to be sold separately)
GENERAL
Q6DIN1
type
4
(5) Extension base unit (Type not requiring power supply module)
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
Table6.5 Extension base unit (Type not requiring power supply module) specifications
HARDWARE
Type
Item
Q52B Q55B
2 5
installed
5
POWER SUPPLY
0.08A 0.10A
consumption
MODULE
H 98mm (3.86inch)
External
W 106mm (4.17inch) 189mm (7.44inch)
dimensions
D 44.1mm (1.74inch) 6
EXTENSION CABLE
Attachment Mounting screw M4 14, 4 pieces (DIN rail mounting adapter to be sold separately)
BASE UNIT AND
Q6DIN3
type
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES
6.1 Base Unit

6-3
(6) Extension base unit (Type requiring power supply module)

Table6.6 Extension base unit (Type requiring power supply module) specifications
Type
Item
Q63B Q65B Q68B Q612B QA1S65B QA1S68B QA65B QA68B
Number of I/O
3 5 8 12 5 8 5 8
modules installed
Applicable module Q series modules AnS series modules A series module
0.11A 0.12A 0.13A 0.12A
consumption
M4 screw hole or 4.5 hole M5 screw hole or 5.5 hole
Mounting hole size
(for M4 screw) (for M5 screw)
H 98mm (3.86inch) 130mm (5.12inch) 250mm (9.84inch)
External 189mm 245mm 328mm 439mm 315mm 420mm 352mm 466mm
W
dimensions (7.44inch) (9.65inch) (12.92inch) (17.28inch) (12.41inch) (16.55inch) (13.86inch) (18.34inch)
D 44.1mm (1.74inch) 51.2mm (2.02inch) 46.6mm (1.83inch)
Weight 0.23kg 0.28kg 0.38kg 0.48kg 0.75kg 1.00kg 1.60kg 2.00kg
Mounting screw M4 14 , 4 pieces *2 Mounting screw M5 25
Attachment ----
(DIN rail mounting adapter sold separately) 4 pieces
DIN rail mounting
Q6DIN3 Q6DIN2 Q6DIN1 ---- ---- ---- ----
adapter type
* 2: The 5 base mounting screws are included with the Q68B and Q612B that have 5 base mounting
holes.
(7) Redundant power extension base unit

Table6.7 Redundant power extension base unit specifications
Type
Item
Q68RB
8
installed
0.12A
consumption
H 98mm (3.86inch)
D 44.1mm (1.74inch)
Weight 0.49kg
Attachment Mounting screw M4 14 , 5 pieces (DIN rail mounting adapter sold separately)
Q6DIN1
type
6-4 6.1 Base Unit

1
(8) Redundant extension base unit
OVERVIEW
Table6.8 Redundant extension base unit specifications
Type
Item
Q65WRB
5
2
installed
CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
0.16A
consumption
H 98mm (3.86inch) 3
D 44.1mm (1.74inch)
SPECIFICATIONS
Weight 0.52kg
Attachment Mounting screw M4 14 , 5 pieces (DIN rail mounting adapter sold separately)
GENERAL
Q6DIN1
type
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
HARDWARE
5
POWER SUPPLY
MODULE
6
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES
6.1 Base Unit

6-5
6.1.2 Part Names
The names of the parts of the base unit are described below.
(1) Main base unit (Q33B, Q35B, Q38B, Q312B)
5) 4)
1) OUT
5V
SG
2) POWER
FG
CPU I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 IO5 I/O6 I/O7 I/O8 I/O9 I/O10 I/O11
3) 6)
Diagram 6.1 Main base unit (Q33B, Q35B, Q38B, Q312B)
Table6.9 Part Names

Connector for connecting an extension cable (for signal communications with the
extension base unit)
Protective cover of extension cable connector. Before an extension cable is
2) Base cover connected, the area of the base cover surrounded by the groove under the word
"OUT" on the base cover must be removed with a tool such as nippers.
Connector for installing the Q series power supply module, CPU module, I/O
modules, and intelligent function module.
3) Module connector To the connectors located in the spare space where these modules are not installed,
attach the supplied connector cover or the blank cover module (QG60) to prevent
entry of dirt.
4) Module fixing screw hole Screw hole for fixing the module to the base unit. Screw size: M3 12
5) Base mounting hole Hole for mounting this base unit onto the panel of the control panel (for M4 screw)
6) DIN rail adapter mounting hole Hole for mounting DIN rail adapter
6-6 6.1 Base Unit

6.1.2 Part Names
1
(2) Slim type main base unit (Q32SB, Q33SB, Q35SB)
OVERVIEW
3) 2)
2
SG
CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
4) 1) 3
Diagram 6.2 Slim type main base unit (Q32SB, Q33SB, Q35SB)
SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL
1) Module connector To the connectors located in the spare space where these modules are not installed, 4
attach the supplied connector cover or the blank cover module (QG60) to prevent
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
entry of dirt.
HARDWARE
POWER SUPPLY
MODULE
6
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES
6.1 Base Unit

6.1.2 Part Names
6-7
(3) Redundant power main base unit (Q38RB)
5) 4)
1) OUT
5V 5V
SG SG
2) CPU I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7

FG FG
3) 6)
Diagram 6.3 Redundant power main base unit (Q38RB)

2) Base cover connected, the area surrounded by the groove under the word "OUT" must be
removed with a tool such as a flat head screwdriver.
Connector for connecting a redundant power supply module, CPU module, I/O
module and intelligent function module
3) Module connector
To the connectors unused, attach the supplied connector cover or the blank cover
module (QG60) to prevent entry of dirt.
5) Base mounting hole Hole for mounting this base unit onto the control panel (for M4 screw)
6-8 6.1 Base Unit

6.1.2 Part Names
1
(4) Multiple CPU high speed main base unit (Q38DB, Q312DB)
OVERVIEW
5) 4)
1) OUT
2
5V
SG
CONFIGURATION
a1 b1
POWER CPU I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7 I/O8 I/O9 I/O10 I/O11
2) FG
SYSTEM
3) 6) 3
Diagram 6.4 Multiple CPU high speed main base unit (Q38DB, Q312DB)
SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL
4
SPECIFICATIONS OF
2) Base cover connected, the area of the base cover surrounded by the groove under the word
THE CPU MODULE

"OUT" on the base cover must be removed with a tool such as nippers.
HARDWARE
3) Module connector To the connectors located in the spare space where these modules are not installed,
attach the supplied connector cover or the blank cover module (QG60) to prevent 5
entry of dirt.
POWER SUPPLY
MODULE
6
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES
6.1 Base Unit

6.1.2 Part Names
6-9
(5) Extension base unit (Q5 B, Q6 B, QA1S6 B, QA6 B)
Q52B,Q55B
5)
6)
IN OUT
3)
2)
I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4
1)
7) 4)
Q63B,Q65B,Q68B,Q612B
5)
6)
IN OUT
3)
5V
2) SG
POWER I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7 I/O8 I/O9 I/O10 I/O11
1)
4) 7)
QA1S65B,QA1S68B
5)
6)
3) IN OUT
5V
2) SG
FG
I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7
1)
4)
QA65B, QA68B
3) 8) 5) 4)
6)
1)
QA68B
2)
8) 5)
Diagram 6.5 Extension base unit (Q5 B, Q6 B, QA1S6 B, QA6 B)
6 - 10 6.1 Base Unit

6.1.2 Part Names
1
OVERVIEW
main base unit or other extension base unit)
Protective cover of extension cable connector.
2) Base cover Before connecting an extension cable, the part under OUT on the base cover must
2
be removed with a tool such as a flat blade screwdriver.
CONFIGURATION
Connector for setting the number of stages of the extension base unit.
3) Stage No. setting connector
( Section 6.1.3)
SYSTEM
Connectors for installing the power supply module, I/O modules, and intelligent
function module/ special function module.
To those connectors located in the spare space where these modules are not 3
installed, apply the supplied connector cover or the blank cover module to prevent
4) Module connector entry of dirt.
SPECIFICATIONS
Blank cover module applicable to Q52B, Q55B, Q63B,Q65B, Q68B and Q612B:
GENERAL
QG60
Blank cover module applicable to QA1S65B and QA1S68B: A1SG60
Blank cover module applicable to QA6BB and QA68B:AG60
Screw hole for fixing the module to the base unit. 4
5) Module fixing screw hole Q52B, Q55B, Q63B,Q65B,Q68B and Q612B .....................Screw size: M3 12
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
QA1S6B, QA1S68B, QA65B and QA68B ...........................Screw size: M4 12
HARDWARE
Hole for mounting this base unit on the panel of the control panel.
6) Base mounting hole Q52B, Q55B, Q65B,Q68B and Q612B ...............................For M4 screw
QA1S6B, QA1S68B, QA65B and QA68B ...........................For M5 screw
7) DIN rail adapter mounting hole DIN rail adapter mounting hole.
5
8) Module fixing hole Cut out to accept projection and hook at rear of modules.
POWER SUPPLY
MODULE
6
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES
6.1 Base Unit

6.1.2 Part Names
6 - 11
(6) Redundant power extension base unit (Q68RB)
6) 5)
IN OUT
3)
5V 5V
2) SG SG

FG FG
1)
4) 7)
Diagram 6.6 Redundant power extension base unit (Q68RB)

redundant power main base unit or other extension base unit)
Protective cover of extension cable connector.
Connector for setting the number of stages of redundant power extension base units.
3) Stage No. setting connector
( Section 6.1.3)
Connector for installing a redundant power supply module, I/O module and intelligent
function module.
4) Module connector
6) Base mounting hole Hole for mounting this base unit on the control panel. (For M4 screw)

6.1.2 Part Names
1
(7) Redundant extension base unit (Q65WRB)
OVERVIEW
5) 2) 4)
IN1 IN2 OUT
5V 5V
2
SG SG
CONFIGURATION
POWER 1 POWER 2 I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4
1)
SYSTEM
3) 6)
3
Diagram 6.7 Redundant extension base unit (Q65WRB)
SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL
redundant system of the main base unit)
Protective cover of extension cable connector. 4
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE

Connector for installing a redundant power supply module, I/O module and intelligent
HARDWARE
function module.
3) Module connector
4) Module fixing screw hole Screw hole for fixing the module to the base unit. Screw size: M3 12 5
5) Base mounting hole Hole for mounting this base unit on the control panel. (For M4 screw)
POWER SUPPLY
MODULE
6
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES
6.1 Base Unit

6.1.2 Part Names
6 - 13
6.1.3 Setting the Extension Stages
The stage number setting method of each extension base unit to be used is described
below.
1
2
Stage No. setting 3
4
connector 5
6
7
Diagram 6.8 Connector
Table6.16 Setting of Stage Number for Extension Base Units
Number Setting for Extension Stages

1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th
stage stage stage stage stage stage stage
CPU module
Q02(H)CPU, Q06HCPU,
Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU,
Q02PHCPU, Q06PHCPU,
Q03UDCPU, Q04UDHCPU,
Setting available
Q06UDHCPU, Q13UDHCPU,
Q26UDHCPU, Q03UDECPU,
Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU,
Q13UDEHCPU, Q26UDEHCPU
Setting
not
Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU*2 Setting available*4
available
*3
Q00JCPU Setting available Setting prohibited *1
Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q02UCPU Setting available Setting prohibited *1

1
* 1: If these stage numbers are set, a "BASE LAY ERROR" (error code: 2010) occurs.
* 2: The extension base unit can be connected only when the first 5 digits of serial No. of the
Redundant CPU is "09012" or later and the redundant system is configured.
OVERVIEW
The extension base unit cannot be connected when the first 5 digits of serial No. of the
Redundant CPU module is "09011" or earlier.
* 3: Connect the Q6 WRB to the first extension stage. Since the Q6 WRB is fixed to the first
extension stage, stage No. setting is not required.
* 4: The Q6 WRB cannot be connected to the second extension stage or later stages. Use the
2
Q6 RB for the second extension stage or later stages.
CONFIGURATION
POINT
SYSTEM
1. For the stage number setting connector, set the number matched with the
extension stage number.
Do not set the same stage number at two or more positions or do not fail to 3
set a number. A miss-input or miss-output may occur.
2. In case of using the QA6ADP+A5 B/A6 B, be sure to set the same stage
SPECIFICATIONS
number to both the stage number setting connector of the A5 B/A6 B and
GENERAL
that of the QA6ADP.
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
HARDWARE
5
POWER SUPPLY
MODULE
6
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES
6.1 Base Unit

6 - 15
6.1.4 Guideline for Use of Extension Base Units
Since the extension base unit (Q5 B) is supplied with 5VDC from the power supply
module on the main base unit, a voltage drop occurs at extension cables.
Improper I/O may be provided if the specified voltage (4.75VDC or higher) is not supplied
to the "IN" connector of the Q5 B.
When using the Q5 B, make sure that the "IN" connector of the Q5 B is supplied with
4.75VDC or higher.
And it is recommend to connect it with the shortest possible extension cable right after
connecting the main base unit, so as to minimize the effects of voltage drop.
(1) When only the Q5 B is connected to the extension base unit

(a) Selection condition
4.75VDC or higher should be supplied to the "IN" connector of the Q5 B in the
final extension stage.
(b) How to calculate voltage to "IN" connector

The 5VDC output voltage of the power supply module on the main base unit is set
to at least 4.90VDC.
Therefore, the Q5 B can be used if the voltage drop is 0.15VDC or lower
(4.9VDC - 4.75VDC = 0.15VDC).
Table6.17 Extension Cable Conductor Resistance
Extension Cable Conductor

Extension Cable Type
Resistance
Main base unit QC05B 0.044
Power QC06B 0.051
supply
module QC12B 0.082
QC30B 0.172
V1 R1 Extension base unit (Q5 B)
QC50B 0.273
Extension
I1 QC100B 0.530
stage 1
V2 Extension base unit (Q5 B)

R2
Extension
I2 stage 2
V7 R7 Extension base unit (Q5 B)
Extension
I7 stage 7
Diagram 6.9 System Configuration

1
Table6.18 Symbol explanation
Symbol Description
V1 Voltage drop at the extension cable between the main base unit and extension base unit (Q5 B)
OVERVIEW
Voltage drop at the extension cable between the extension base unit (Q5 B) (extension stage n-1) and
Vn
extension base unit (Q5 B) (extension stage n)
R1 Extension cable resistance between the main base unit and extension base unit (Q5 B) 2
Extension cable resistance between the extension base unit (Q5 B) (extension stage n-1) and extension base
Rn
CONFIGURATION
unit (Q5 B) (extension stage n)
l1 to l7 5VDC current consumption among extension stage 1 to 7 *1
SYSTEM
*1 : Sum total of current consumed by Q5 B and currents consumed by the I/O, intelligent function modules loaded on the
Q5 B.
The symbols including "I" (I1 to I7) vary with the modules loaded on the Q5 B. For details of the symbol, refer to the 3
user's manuals of the module used.
SPECIFICATIONS
Table6.19 List for Calculating Voltage Drops Occurring at Extension Cables in System Consisting of Extensions 1 to 7
GENERAL
Voltage Drop at Extension Cable on Corresponding Extension Unit Sum Total of
Q5 B
Voltage Drops to
Loading
V1 V2 V3 V4 V5 V6 V7 "IN" Connector
Position
of Q5 B (V)
4
Extension
SPECIFICATIONS OF
R1•I1 ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- V=V1
THE CPU MODULE

stage 1
HARDWARE
Extension
R1 (I1+I2) R2•I2 ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- V= V1+V2
stage 2
Extension R1
R2 (I2+I3) R3•I3 ---- ---- ---- ---- V=V1+V2+V3
stage 3 (I1+I2+I3)
5
R1
Extension R2
(I1+I2+I3+ R3 (I3+I4) R4•I4 ---- ---- ---- V=V1+V2+V3+V4
stage 4 (I2+I3+I4)
POWER SUPPLY
I4)
R1 R2
MODULE
Extension R3 V=V1+V2+V3+V4
(I1+I2+I3+ (I2+I3+I4+ R4 (I4+I5) R5•I5 ---- ----
stage 5 (I3+I4+I5) +V5
I4+I5) I5)
Extension
R1 R2 R3
R4 V=V1+V2+V3+V4
6
(I1+I2+I3+ (I2+I3+I4+ (I3+I4+I5+ R5 (I5+I6) R6•I6 ----
stage 6 (I4+I5+I6) +V5+V6
EXTENSION CABLE
I4+I5+I6) I5+I6) I6)
BASE UNIT AND
R1
R2 R3 R4
Extension (I1+I2+I3+ R5 V=V1+V2+V3+V4
(I2+I3+I4+ (I3+I4+I5+ (I4+I5+I6+ R6 (I6+I7) R7•I7
stage 7 I4+I5+I6+ (I5+I6+I7) +V5+V6+V7
I5+I6+I7) I6+I7) I7)
I7)
7
The voltage supplied to "IN" connector of the Q5 B in the final extension reaches 4.75
MEMORY CARD AND
VDC or higher on the condition that the sum total of voltage drop to "IN" connector of
Q5 B (V) is 0.15V or lower.
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES
6.1 Base Unit

6 - 17
(2) When the Q6 B is connected between the main base unit and the Q5 B
4.75VDC or higher should be supplied to the "IN" connector of the Q5 B in the
final extension.

(4.9VDC -4.75VDC = 0.15VDC).
Table6.20 Extension Cable Conductor Resistance

[When the Q5 B is connected to Extension stage 2.] Extension Cable Type
Resistance
Power
supply
QC06B 0.051
module
QC12B 0.082
QC30B 0.172
Extension base unit (Q6 B)
R1
Power QC50B 0.273
supply Extension
module stage 1 QC100B 0.530
V

R2
Extension
I1 stage 2
Diagram 6.10 System Configuration
Symbol Description
V Voltage drop at the extension cable between the main base unit and extension base unit (Q5 B)
5VDC current consumption when the extension base unit (Q5 B) is used as Extension n+1, n = 1 to 6, n:
Extension No. of extension base unit (Q6 B) connected
In
(Sum total of current consumed by Q5 B and currents consumed by the I/O, intelligent function modules loaded
on the Q5 B.)
Extension cable resistance between the main base unit and the extension base unit (Q6 B) or the extension
Rn
base unit (Q6 B) and the extension base unit (Q6 B)
Rn+1 Extension cable resistance between the extension base unit (Q6 B) and extension base unit (Q5 B)

1
Table6.22 List for Calculating Voltage Drops Occurring at Extension Cables
when connecting Q6 B between main base unit and Q5 B
Position of extension base unit Voltage drop caused by extension cable from the
OVERVIEW
Q6 B Q5 B main base unit to the Q5 B IN connector (V)
Extension stage 1 Extension stage 2 V=(R1+R2)I1
Extension stage 1,
Extension stage 3 V=(R1+R2+R3)I2 2
Extension stage 2
Extension stage 1 to 3 Extension stage 4 V=(R1+R2+R3+R4)I3
CONFIGURATION
Extension stage 1 to 4 Extension stage 5 V=(R1+R2+R3+R4+R5)I4
Extension stage 1 to 5 Extension stage 6 V=(R1+R2+R3+R4+R5+R6)I5
SYSTEM
Extension stage 1 to 6 Extension stage 7 V=(R1+R2+R3+R4+R5+R6+R7)I6
The voltage supplied to the "IN" connector of the Q5 B reaches 4.75 VDC or later on the
condition that the voltage drop (V) at the extension cable between the main base unit and 3
Q5 B is 0.15 VDC or lower.
SPECIFICATIONS
(3) When the GOT is bus-connected
GENERAL
4.75VDC or later should be supplied to the "IN" connector of the Q5 B.
4
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
HARDWARE
(4.9VDC -4.75VDC = 0.15VDC).
Table6.23 Extension Cable Conductor Resistance 5

Extension Cable Type
Resistance
POWER SUPPLY
[When the Q5 B is connected to Extension stage 2.] QC05B 0.044
MODULE
Power
supply
QC12B 0.082
6
module
QC30B 0.172
Extension base unit (Q6 B) QC50B 0.273
R1
EXTENSION CABLE
Power
supply Extension QC100B 0.530
V module stage 1 BASE UNIT AND

R2
Extension
I1 stage 2
7
GOT GOT
MEMORY CARD AND
Extension
stage 3
Im
BATTERY
Number of GOTs connected : Max. 5units
Diagram 6.11 System Configuration 8

CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES
6.1 Base Unit

6 - 19
Symbol Description
V Voltage drop at the extension cable between the main base unit and extension base unit (Q5 B)
5VDC current consumption when the extension base unit (Q5 B) is used as Extension n+1, n = 1 to 5, n:
Extension No. of the extension base unit (Q6 B) connected
In
(Sum total of current consumed by Q5 B and currents consumed by I/O, intelligent function modules loaded on
the Q5 B)
5VDC current consumption of the GOT (current consumption per GOT is 255mA)
Im
• Im = 255 c (c: Number of GOTs connected (c: 1 to 5))
Extension cable resistance between the main base unit and extension base unit (Q6 B) or the extension base
Rn
unit (Q6 B) and extension base unit (Q6 B)
Rn+1 Extension cable resistance between the extension base unit (Q6 B) and extension base unit (Q5 B)
Table6.25 List of calculated voltage drop caused by the extension in bus connection of GOT
Position of extension base unit No. of stages for

Voltage drop caused by extension cable from the
GOT bus
Q6 B Q5 B main base unit to the Q5 B IN connector (V)
connection
Extension stage 1 Extension stage 2 Extension stage 3 V=(R1+R2)(I1+Im)
Extension stage 1,
Extension stage 3 Extension stage 4 V=(R1+R2+R3)(I2+Im)
Extension stage 2
Extension stage 1 to 3 Extension stage 4 Extension stage 5 V=(R1+R2+R3+R4)(I3+Im)
Extension stage 1 to 4 Extension stage 5 Extension stage 6 V=(R1+R2+R3+R4+R5)(I4+Im)
Extension stage 1 to 5 Extension stage 6 Extension stage 7 V=(R1+R2+R3+R4+R5+R6)(I5+Im)
The voltage supplied to the "IN" connector of the Q5 B reaches 4.75 VDC or later on the condition that the
voltage drop (V) at the extension cable between the main base unit and Q5 B is 0.15 VDC or lower.
POINT
When connecting GOT by extension cable that is 13.2 m (43.31ft) or longer, the
bus extension connector box A9GT-QCNB is required.
Since the A9GT-QCNB is supplied with 5VDC from the power supply module
loaded on the main base unit, 30mA must be added to "Im" as the current
consumption of the A9GT-QCNB.
For details of the method for GOT bus connection, refer to the manual below.
GOT-A900 Series User's Manual (Connection)

1
6.2 Extension Cable
OVERVIEW
The extension cables are connected to transfer signals between a main base unit and an
extension base unit or between extension base units.
For specifications of the extension cables, refer to Section 6.2.1.
2
CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
Table6.26 Extension cable specifications
Type
Item
QC05B QC06B QC12B QC30B QC50B QC100B 3
Cable length 0.45m 0.6m 1.2m 3.0m 5.0m 10.0m
Conductor resistance value 0.044 0.051 0.082 0.172 0.273 0.530
SPECIFICATIONS
Weight 0.15kg 0.16kg 0.22kg 0.40kg 0.60kg 1.11kg
GENERAL
POINT
When the extension cables are used in combination, limit the overall distance of
the combined cable to 13.2 m (43.28 ft.).
4
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
HARDWARE
5
POWER SUPPLY
MODULE
6
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES
6.2 Extension Cable

6 - 21
7 MEMORY CARD AND BATTERY
CHAPTER7 MEMORY CARD AND BATTERY
This chapter describes the specifications of the memory cards and the batteries available
for the Q Series CPU Module and how to handle them.
7.1 Memory Card

Basic
The memory cardNote7.1 is used for storing programs and file registers as well as storing
debugged data by the tracing function.Note1
Note7.1
It is also used when handling a file register that exceeds the number of points storable in
the standard RAM.( Section 4.1)
7.1.1 List of Usable Memory Cards
Three types of memory cards(SRAM card, Flash card, and ATA card) are available. The
memory cards usable for each CPU module are shown in Table7.1.
Table7.1 Memory cards and applicable CPU modules
CPU module
Q02UCPU
Q02CPU
Q02PHCPU Q03UD(E)CPU
Q00JCPU Q02HCPU
Memory card * Q06PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Q04UDH(E)CPU
Q00CPU Q06HCPU
Q12PHCPU Q25PRHCPU Q06UDH(E)CPU
Q01CPU Q12HCPU
Q25PHCPU Q13UDH(E)CPU
Q25HCPU
Q26UDH(E)CPU
Q2MEM-1MBS
Q2MEM-2MBS
SRAM card
Q3MEM-4MBS
Q3MEM-8MBS
Q2MEM-2MBF
Flash card
Q2MEM-4MBF
Q2MEM-8MBA
ATA card Q2MEM-16MBA
Q2MEM-32MBA
: Usable : Not usable

* : Only one memory card can be installed for each CPU module.
POINT
Depending on the type of memory card, storable data vary.
For the data that can be stored on memory cards, refer to the following manual.
Note1
Basic
Memory cards are not available for the Basic model QCPU.
Note7.1
7-1 7.1 Memory Card

7.1.1 List of Usable Memory Cards
1
7.1.2 Memory Card Specifications
OVERVIEW
The specifications of the memory card which can be used on the CPU module conform to
those of the PCMCIA small PC card.
(1) SRAM card 2

Table7.2 SRAM card specifications
CONFIGURATION
Type
Item
Q2MEM-1MBS Q2MEM-2MBS Q3MEM-4MBS Q3MEM-8MBS
SYSTEM
Memory capacity after format 1011.5 kbyte 2034 kbyte 4078 kbyte 8172 kbyte
Storable number of files 255 287 319
Number of insertions and extractions
H 45mm (1.77 inch)
5000 times
74mm (2.91 inch)
3
External dimensions W 42.8mm (1.69 inch)
SPECIFICATIONS
D 3.3mm (0.13 inch) 8.1mm (0.32 inch)
Weight 15g 30g 31g
GENERAL
(2) Flash card
Table7.3 Flash card specifications 4
SPECIFICATIONS OF
Type
THE CPU MODULE

Item
Q2MEM-2MBF Q2MEM-4MBF
HARDWARE
Memory capacity 2035 kbyte 4079 kbyte
Storable number of files 288
Number of insertions and extractions 5000 times
Number of writings 100000 times
H 45mm (1.77 inch) 5
D 3.3mm (0.13 inch)
POWER SUPPLY
Weight 15g
MODULE
(3) ATA card
Table7.4 ATA card specifications 6
Type
Item
EXTENSION CABLE
Q2MEM-8MBA Q2MEM-16MBA Q2MEM-32MBA
BASE UNIT AND
Memory capacity after format 7982 kbyte*1 15982 kbyte *1 31854 kbyte
Storable number of files 512
Number of insertions and extractions 5000 times
Number of writings 1000000 times
H 45mm (1.77 inch) 7
MEMORY CARD AND
D 3.3mm (0.13 inch)

Weight 15g
BATTERY
* 1: As for ATA card whose manufacturer control number is E or earlier, capacity after format is as
follows
Manufacturer contrl number E: Q2MEM-8MBA: 7948k bytes, Q2MEM-16MBA: 15948k bytes
Manufacturer control number D or earlier: Q2MEM-8MBA: 7940k bytes, Q2MEM-16MBA: 15932k
bytes
8
CPU MODULE START-
For the manufacturer control number, refer to "POINT" in this section.

UP PROCEDURES
* 2: The number of storable files is 511 for a Universal model QCPU.
7.1 Memory Card

7-2
POINT
When the ATA card is used, the value stored in the special register SD603 differs
depending on the manufacturer control number and CPU module type.
When the CPU module is a Universal model, an ATA card capacity is stored in
SD603 in units of kbytes.
When it is not a Universal model QCPU, 8000, 16000 or 32000 is stored in
SD603 depending on the manufacturer control number of the ATA card and CPU
module type
Table7.5 When the value stored in SD603 depending on manufacturer control number of the Q2MEM-8MBA
Value stored in special register SD603

CPU other than Universal model
Manufacturer control No. and type of
Serial No. (first 5 Serial No. (first 5 When CPU is
ATA card
digits) is 09011 or digits) is 09012 or Universal model
earlier later
Q2MEM-8MBA 8000 8000
" " and
Q2MEM-16MBA 16000 16000
" D " or earlier
Q2MEM-32MBA 32000 32000
Q2MEM-8MBA 16000 8000
ATA card capacity
" E " Q2MEM-16MBA 16000 16000
(kbytes)
Q2MEM-32MBA 32000 32000
Q2MEM-8MBA 32000 16000
" F " or later Q2MEM-16MBA 32000 32000
Q2MEM-32MBA 32000 32000
The manufacturer control number (the third digit from the left) of the ATA card is
described in the label on the back of the ATA card. (Refer to Diagram 7.1)
When character string including the manufacturer control number is 4digits, the
third digit from the left is the manufacturer control number, and when it is 3 digits,
the manufacturer control number is "B".
Manufacturer
control number
Diagram 7.1 Label on the back of ATA card
7-3 7.1 Memory Card

1
7.1.3 The Part Names of the Memory Card
OVERVIEW
The part names of the memory card are described below.
1)
1)
2
3)
CONFIGURATION
3)
SYSTEM
4) 3
Write protect ON
"LOCK" Write protect ON
SPECIFICATIONS
"RELEASE"
GENERAL
"LOCK"
2) "RELEASE" 4)
2)
Diagram 7.2 Memory card

4
SPECIFICATIONS OF
Table7.6 Part Names
THE CPU MODULE

No. Name Descriptions
HARDWARE
1) Connector area Connector area connected to the CPU module
Used to set the lithium battery for data backup of the SRAM memory
2) Battery holder
(SRAM card only)
Switch for fixing the battery holder to the memory card. Locked at 5
Battery holder fixing LOCK position (write protect switch side)
3)
switch * LOCK: Locked, RELEASE: Unlocked
POWER SUPPLY
(SRAM card only)
MODULE
Used to set write inhibit in the memory. Set to OFF by factory default.
(SRAM card and Flash card only)
4) Write protect switch
ON : Data write inhibited
OFF: Data write enabled
6
* : The battery holder fixing switch is returned automatically from RELEASE to LOCK when the battery
EXTENSION CABLE
holder is disconnected. BASE UNIT AND
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES
7.1 Memory Card

7.1.3 The Part Names of the Memory Card
7-4
7.1.4 Handling the Memory Card
(1) Formatting of memory card

Any SRAM or ATA card must have been formatted to use in the CPU module.
Since the SRAM or ATA card purchased is not yet formatted, format it using GX
Developer before use.
(The Flash card need not be formatted.)
For the formatting, refer to the manual below.
POINT
Do not format an ATA card using other than GX Developer.
(If it is formatted using format function of Microsoft® Windows® Operating System,
the ATA card may not be usable with set in a CPU module.)
(2) Installation of SRAM card battery

A battery used for instantaneous power failure is supplied with the SRAM card.
Before using the SRAM card, install the battery.
POINT
Note that the SRAM card memory is not backed up by the CPU module battery
only.
Also, the program memory, standard RAM and latch devices of the CPU module
are not backed up by the battery installed on the SRAM card only.
(3) Types of files which can be stored on memory card

For the types of the files that can be stored on each memory card, refer to the manual
below.
7-5 7.1 Memory Card

7.1.4 Handling the Memory Card
1
7.1.5 Memory Card Loading/Unloading Procedures
OVERVIEW
(1) For Q2MEM type memory card
(a) To install the memory card
Install the memory card into the CPU module, while paying attention to the
orientation of the memory card.
2
Insert the memory card securely into the connector until the height of the memory
CONFIGURATION
card reaches that of the memory card EJECT button.
Memory card
SYSTEM
EJECT button
CPU module main
unit
Memory card
SPECIFICATIONS
Insertion direction check
GENERAL
( mark)
Diagram 7.3 Install the memory card
(b) To remove the memory card 4

When removing the memory card from the CPU module, press the memory card
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
EJECT button to pull out the memory card.
HARDWARE
Memory card
EJECT button
CPU module
main unit
Push 5
POWER SUPPLY
Memory card
MODULE
Diagram 7.4 Remove the memory card
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES
7.1 Memory Card

7-6
(2) For Q3MEM type memory card

(a) To install the memory card
When installing a memory card to the CPU module main body, install it according
to the procedures shown in Diagram 7.5, paying attention to the direction of the
memory card.
Install the memory card CPU module Slightly bend the cent
main unit to make space betwee
projection and a moun
and remove the lid.
Turn OFF power supply of the
CPU module and remove a lid Projection
of the CPU module main body.
MEMORY card
EJECT button
CPU modul
main unit
Memory card
Install a memory card to a

memory card slot of the CPU
module main body.
*Insertion direction check

( mark)
CPU modul
main unit
Set a memory card protective

cover to the CPU module.
Completed
7-7 7.1 Memory Card

1
(b) To remove the memory card
When removing a memory card from the CPU module main body, remove a
OVERVIEW
memory card protective cover and press the EJECT button to pull out the memory
card.
Remove a cover,
pressing fixing claws
2
Remove the memory card of top/bottom
CPU module
CONFIGURATION
main unit
Turn OFF power supply of the
SYSTEM
CPU module and remove a
memory card protective cover
from the CPU module.
3
Memory card
EJECT button
SPECIFICATIONS
Push
CPU module
GENERAL
Press the EJECT button to eject main unit
a memory card.
Completed 4
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
HARDWARE
5
POWER SUPPLY
MODULE
6
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES
7.1 Memory Card

7-8
(3) To remove the memory card during power ON

When removing the memory card, confirm that special relays "SM604" and "SM605"
are OFF.
• Because the CPU module is using the memory card while "SM604" is ON, the
memory card cannot be removed.
• When "SM605" is ON, turn it OFF.
If both "SM604" and "SM605" are OFF, remove the memory card using the following
procedure:
1) Turn on the special relay "SM609" using the sequence program or by the
device test of GX Developer.
2) By monitoring GX Developer, check that the special relay "SM600" is turned
off.
3) Remove the memory card.
SM600 (Memory card usable flag) : The system is turned ON
when memory card is ready
for use by user.
SM604 (memory card use flag) : The system is turned ON
when the CPU module is
using the memory card.
SM605 (memory card detach inhibit flag) : Turned ON by the user to
disable the memory card from
being detached.
(4) To install the memory card while the power is turned on

1) Install the memory card.
2) By monitoring GX Developer etc., check that the special relay "SM600" is
turned on.
7-9 7.1 Memory Card

1
POINT
Install and remove the memory card while the power is turned on, paying
OVERVIEW
attention to the following.
1. Note that the data on the memory card may be damaged if the above
procedures are not performed correctly. 2
Also, if the CPU module operation for an error occurrence is set to "Stop" in
the Parameters, the CPU module stops its operation upon the occurrence of
CONFIGURATION
ICM.OPE.ERROR.
2. When the memory card is installed, the scanning time is increased by several
SYSTEM
10ms max. 1 scan is only added, when the CPU module executes mount
processing.
3. Using a memory card without fully pushing it into the connector may result in 3
an ICM.OPE.ERROR.
4. Use of the following tweezers is recommended when it is difficult to remove
SPECIFICATIONS
the memory card.
GENERAL
Table7.7 Tweezers for replacing memory card
Product Model name

Plastic tweezers NK-2539
4
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
HARDWARE
5
POWER SUPPLY
Diagram 7.7 Memory card replacement using plastic tweezers
MODULE
6
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES
7.1 Memory Card

7 - 10
7.1.6 Specifications of the Battery for Memory Card
This section describes the specifications of the battery used for the memory card (SRAM
card).
Table7.8 Specifications of the Battery for Memory Card
Type
Item
Q2MEM-BAT Q3MEM-BAT
Graphite fluoride lithium primary Manganese dioxide lithium primary
Classification
battery battery
Initial voltage 3.0V 3.0V
Nominal current 48mAh 550mAh
Storage life Actually 5 years (room temperature)
Total power failure time Section 11.3.4.
Lithium content 0.014g 0.150g
Power failure backup for SRAM Power failure backup for SRAM
Application card card
(for Q2MEM-1MBS/Q2MEM-2MBS) (for Q3MEM-4MBS/Q3MEM-8MBS)
Remark
• For the life of the memory card battery, refer to Section 11.3.4.
• For the battery directive in EU member states, refer to Appendix 4.
7 - 11 7.1 Memory Card

7.1.6 Specifications of the Battery for Memory Card
1
7.1.7 Battery Installation into the Memory Card
OVERVIEW
Installation method of the battery for the memory card (SRAM card)
The battery for the SRAM card is shipped with it removed from the battery holder.
Before installing the SRAM card into the CPU module, set the battery holder as shown in
Diagram 7.8. 2
(1) For Q2MEM-1MBS and Q2MEM-2MBS
CONFIGURATION
Side with “product name” Battery holder's locking switch
Set the battery holder's locking switch to
SYSTEM
the "RELEASE" position. ......
RELEASE position
3
Remove the battery holder from the SRAM card. ......
SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL
' ' sign
Set the battery onto the battery holder
with the "plus" face up. ......
4
Battery holder
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
Insert the battery holder with which the
HARDWARE
battery is installed firmly, into the SRAM ......
card.
5
Confirm that the battery holder's locking
switch is set to the "LOCK" position. ......
POWER SUPPLY
"LOCK"
MODULE
: The battery holder's locking switch is set automatically to the
"LOCK" position when the battery holder is removed. In its position,
Completed insert the battery holder firmly.
Diagram 7.8 Memory card battery setting procedure
6
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
POINT
Insert or remove the battery in the horizontal direction along the battery holder
fixing guide.
Failure to do so may damage the latches of the battery holder.
7
Battery holder latches
MEMORY CARD AND
Battery fixing guide

BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES
Battery holder
Diagram 7.9 Battery setting direction
7.1 Memory Card

7 - 12
(2) For Q3MEM-4MBS and Q3MEM-8MBS
Set a battery holder fixing switch to

the RELEASE position.
Pull out a battery holder of a SRAM

card.
RELEASE
Battery holder position
*1
fixing switch '+' sign
Facing up a positive side of a

battery, set the battery on the
battery holder.
Battery holder
Deeply insert the battery holder

where the battery is set into the
SRAM card.
Set the battery holder fixing switch

to the LOCK position.
LOCK
position
Completed
Diagram 7.10 Memory card battery setting procedure
* 1:The following shows the direction of a battery.
Maker name Manufacture number

Model (varies depending on date of manufacture)
Polarity
Voltage
'+' side '-' side

Diagram 7.11 Direction of a battery
7 - 13 7.1 Memory Card

1
7.2 Battery (Q6BAT, Q7BAT, Q8BAT)
OVERVIEW
Batteries (Q6BAT, Q7BAT and Q8BAT) are installed in the CPU module to retain data of
the program memory, standard RAM, and latch device in case of power failure.
7.2.1 Battery Specifications 2
CONFIGURATION
This section describes the specifications of the battery used for the CPU module.Note2
SYSTEM
Table7.9 Battery Specifications
Basic
Type
Item
Note7.2
Q6BAT Q7BAT(-SET)Note7.2 Q8BAT(-SET)Note7.2 3
Manganese dioxide lithium Manganese dioxide lithium primary
Classification
primary battery battery (assembled battery)
SPECIFICATIONS
Initial voltage 3.0V
GENERAL
Nominal current 1800mAh 5000mAh 1800mAh (1800mAh 10 pieces)
Storage life Actually 5 years (room temperature)
Total power failure
Section 11.3.2.
time 4
Lithium content 0.49g 1.52g 4.9g
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
For data retention of the program memory, standard RAM, and latch device
Application
during the power failure
HARDWARE
Accessory ---- Battery holder*1 Q8BAT connection cable*2
* 1: Included only when the Q7BAT-SET is purchased.
* 2: Included only when the Q8BAT-SET is purchased.
5
Remark
POWER SUPPLY
• Refer to Section 11.3.2 for the battery life.
MODULE
• For the battery directive in EU member states, refer to Appendix 4.
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
Note2 8
CPU MODULE START-
Basic
UP PROCEDURES
The Q7BAT and Q8BAT is not available for the Basic model QCPU.
Note7.2

7.2.1 Battery Specifications
7 - 14
7.2.2 Installation of Battery
(1) Q6BAT battery installation procedure

The battery for the CPU module is shipped with its connector disconnected. Connect
the connector as follows.
Refer to Section 11.3 for the service life of the battery and how to replace the battery.
Open the CPU module front cover. CPU module
Confirm that the battery is loaded

correctly.
Insert the battery connector into the

connector pin on the case. Be sure that
the insertion direction is correct.
Connector
Completed
Diagram 7.12 Q6BAT battery installation procedure
(b) High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, Redundant CPU and
Open the CPU module bottom cover.

Connector
Confirm that the battery is loaded

correctly. Connector Battery
stopper
Insert the battery connector into the

connector pin on the case. Be sure that
the insertion direction is correct.
CPU module
Completed
Diagram 7.13 Q6BAT battery installation procedure
7 - 15 7.2 Battery (Q6BAT, Q7BAT, Q8BAT)

1
(2) Q7BAT-SET battery installation procedure
When changing the battery for the CPU module from the Q6BAT to the Q7BAT, set
OVERVIEW
the battery and connect its connector in the following procedure.
2
Disconnect the connector connecting the
Q6BAT to the CPU module.
CONFIGURATION
Connector
SYSTEM
Remove the Q6BAT and cover from the
CPU module. Connector
stopper
3
Connect the Q7BAT- SET to the battery
connector of the CPU module and set it
SPECIFICATIONS
into the connector holder of the battery
holder. CPU module
GENERAL
Battery holder
Set the Q7BAT- SET in the CPU module.
4
Completed
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
Diagram 7.14 Q7BAT-SET battery installation procedure
HARDWARE
5
POWER SUPPLY
MODULE
6
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES

7 - 16
(3) Q8BAT-SET battery installation procedure

When changing the battery for the CPU module from the Q6BAT to the Q8BAT, set
the battery and connect its connector in the following procedure.
Open the cover of the CPU module's Connector of

bottom. CPU module
Connector of
battery
Q6BAT
Disconnect the connector connecting
the Q6BAT to the CPU module.
Remove the Q6BAT and cover from

the CPU module.
CPU module
Connector
of cable
Insert the connector of Q8BAT Q8BAT connection cable

connection cable (included in the
Q8BAT-SET) into the connector of Connector of
CPU module while confirming the CPU module
orientation of each connector. CPU module
Q8BAT connection cover

Attach the Q8BAT connection cover
to the CPU module.
Q8BAT connection cable
CPU module
(To next page)
7 - 17 7.2 Battery (Q6BAT, Q7BAT, Q8BAT)

(From previous page) Control panel
OVERVIEW
Q8BAT
Mount the CPU module onto the main
base unit, so that the Q8BAT
connection cable connected to the
CPU module will not interfere with the 2
other devices.
CONFIGURATION
Fix the Q8BAT onto the control panel.
SYSTEM
(Screws or DIN rail is applicable.)
R (bending radius)
Attach the connector of Q8BAT

10mm (0.39 inch)
or more
3
connection cable to the Q8BAT while
confirming the orientation of the
SPECIFICATIONS
connector.
GENERAL
Completed Q8BAT Q8BAT
connection cable
4
POINT
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
• Fix the Q8BAT connection cable using a clamp.
Failure to do so may cause damage of the Q8BAT connection cover,
HARDWARE
connector or cable due to unintentional swinging and shifting or
accidental pull of the cable.
• Ensure the bending radius of 10mm (0.39 inch) or more for the Q8BAT
connection cable.
5
If the bend radius is less than 10mm, a malfunction may occur due to
POWER SUPPLY
characteristic deterioration, wire breakage.
• For details of the module mounting position, refer to the following:
MODULE
Section 10.3.2
• When mounthing the Q8BAT for the Universal model QCPU, use the
connection cable whose connector part displays “A”. 6
EXTENSION CABLE
BASE UNIT AND
A
7
Sticker
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES

7 - 18
8 CPU MODULE START-UP PROCEDURES
CHAPTER8 CPU MODULE START-UP PROCEDURES
This chapter describes the procedures for starting up the Q Series CPU Module.
It is assumed that programs and parameters have been created separately.
For the start-up procedures for a redundant system configured with a Redundant CPU,
refer to the manual below.
Start
Module installation ••• CHAPTER 10

Install any of the following modules required for the system configuration to the
base unit.
•Power supply module
•CPU module (Install a memory card if necessary.)
•Intelligent function module and/or special function module
•Network module
•I/O module
Wiring/connection ••• CHAPTER 6,

1) Wire the power supply to the power supply module. CHAPTER 7,
2) Wire external device(s) to intelligent function module(s), special function CHAPTER 10
module(s), and/or I/O module(s).
3) Install wiring between network modules.
4) Connect the battery to the CPU module.
5) Connect the main base unit to an extension base unit and between extension
base units with extension cables, and make setting on the number of stages of
extension base units.
Module initialization ••• CHAPTER 4

1) Halt the CPU module.
2) Set up switches of the intelligent function module(s) and/or special function
module(s).
3) Set up switches of the network module.
System power supply ON ••• CHAPTER 4,

Confirm the following items of the system, and then power up the system. CHAPTER 5,
•Wiring of the power supply CHAPTER 10
•Power supply voltage
•Operating status of the CPU module: Stop status (reset canceled)
Connection of the PC in which GX Developer was installed ••• GX Developer

1) Start up GX Developer on the personal computer. Operating
2) Connect the personal computer with GX Developer installed, to the CPU Manual
module.
(To next page)

Diagram 8.1 CPU module start-up procedures
8-1
1
(From previous page)
OVERVIEW
Memory formatting ••• GX Developer
Operating
Format the memory to be used by the "PC Memory Formatting" of GX Developer.
Manual
2
Writing the parameters and programs ••• GX Developer
CONFIGURATION
Write the parameters and programs created by GX Developer into the CPU Operating
module. Manual
SYSTEM
System reboot ••• CHAPTER 4
Turn off and on the system power supply, or reset the CPU module. 3
Error check ••• CHAPTER 4
SPECIFICATIONS
Confirm that the ERR.LED of the CPU module is not lighting.
GENERAL
If the ERR.LED is lighting or blinking, identify the error cause by the system
monitor of GX Developer or diagnostics* to eliminate the error cause.
If the error is related to the parameters or programs, correct them.
4
Running of the CPU module ••• CHAPTER 4
SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE CPU MODULE
Run the CPU module, and then confirm that the RUN LED of the CPU module
lights up.
HARDWARE
Completed
Diagram 8.2 CPU module start-up procedures (Continue) 5
*: The following types of diagnostics are available.
• PC diagnostics
POWER SUPPLY
• Network diagnostics
MODULE
• Ethernet diagnostics
• CC-Link and CC-Link/LT diagnostics
6
POINT
EXTENSION CABLE
For details of the wiring, connection and initial settings of intelligent function
BASE UNIT AND
modules, special function modules and network modules, refer to relevant
manuals.
7
MEMORY CARD AND
BATTERY
8
CPU MODULE START-
UP PROCEDURES
8-2
Memo
8-3
9 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES
9
CHAPTER9 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
For the products sold in European countries, the conformance to the EMC Directive, which
is one of the European directives, has been a legal obligation since 1996. Also,
conformance to the Low Voltage Directive, another European Directive, has been a legal
10
obligation since 1997.
Manufacturers who recognize their products must conform to the EMC and Low Voltage
Directives are required to declare that their products conform to these Directives and put a
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
"CE mark" on their products.
9.1 Requirements for Conformance to EMC Directive

11
The EMC Directive specifies that products placed on the market must "be so constructed
MAINTENANCE AND
that they do not cause excessive electromagnetic interference (emissions) and are not
INSPECTION
unduly affected by electromagnetic interference (immunity)".
The applicable products are requested to meet these requirements. The Section 9.1.1
through Section 9.1.6 summarize the precautions on conformance to the EMC Directive of
the machinery constructed using the MELSEC-Q series programmable controllers. 12
The details of these precautions has been prepared based on the control requirements
TROUBLESHOOTING
and the applicable standards control. However, we will not assure that the overall
machinery manufactured according to these details conforms to the above-mentioned
directives. The method of conformance to the EMC Directive and the judgment on whether
or not the machinery conforms to the EMC Directive must be determined finally by the
manufacturer of the machinery.
APPENDICES
INDEX
9.1 Requirements for Conformance to EMC Directive 9-1

9.1.1 Standards relevant to the EMC Directive
The standards relevant to the EMC Directive are listed in Table9.1.
Table9.1 Standards relevant to the EMC Directive
Specification Test item Test details Standard value

EN61000-4-2 Immunity test in which
8kV Air discharge
Electrostatic discharge electrostatic is applied
4kV Contact discharge
immunity*2 to the cabinet of the equipment.
EN61000-4-3 Immunity test in which electric
1.4GHz-2.0GHz, 80-1000MHz, 10V/m,
Radiated electromagnetic fields are irradiated to the
80%AM modulation@1kHz
field immunity*2 product.
AC power cable: 2kV
EN61000-4-4 Immunity test in which burst DC power cable: 2kV
Electrical fast transient/ noise is applied to the power I/O power(DC): 1kV
burst immunity *2 cable and signal line. DC I/O, analog, communication
line(shielded): 1kV
AC power line:
EN61131-2:
Common mode 2kV, differential
2003
mode 1kV
DC power line:
Immunity test in which burst Common mode 1kV, differential
EN61000-4-5
noise is applied to the power line mode 0.5kV
Surge immunity *2
and signal line. I/O power(DC):
Common mode 0.5kV, differential
mode 0.5kV
DC I/O, analog, communication (shielded):
Common mode 1kV
EN61000-4-6 Immunity test in which high
0.15-80MHz, 80%AM modulation 1kHz,
Conducted disturbances frequency noise is applied to the
3Vrms
immunity *2 power line and signal line.
*1: QP : Quasi-peak value, Mean : Average value

*2: Programmable controller is an open type device (a device designed to be housed inside other equipment) and must be
installed inside a conductive control panel.
The corresponding test has been conducted with the programmable controller installed inside a control panel.
Besides, our programmable controller has been tested with the maximum rated input value of the power supply module
to be used.
9-2 9.1 Requirements for Conformance to EMC Directive

9.1.1 Standards relevant to the EMC Directive
9
9.1.2 Installation instructions for EMC Directive
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
Programmable controller is an open type device and must be installed inside a control
VOLTAGE
panel for use.*
This not only ensures safety but also ensures effective shielding of programmable
controller-generated electromagnetic noise. 10
* : Also, each network remote station needs to be installed inside the control panel.
However, the waterproof type remote station can be installed outside the control panel.
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
(1) Control panel
• Use a conductive control panel.
• When attaching the control panel's top plate or base plate, mask painting and
weld so that good surface contact can be made between the panel and plate. 11
• To ensure good electrical contact with the control panel, mask the paint on the
MAINTENANCE AND
installation bolts of the inner plate in the control panel so that contact between
surfaces can be ensured over the widest possible area.
INSPECTION
• Ground the control panel with a thick wire so that a low impedance connection to
ground can be ensured even at high frequencies.
• Holes made in the control panel must be 10 cm (3.94 inch) diameter or less. If
the holes are 10 cm (3.94 inch) or larger, radio frequency noise may be emitted.
12
In addition, because radio waves leak through a clearance between the control
TROUBLESHOOTING
panel door and the main unit, reduce the clearance as much as practicable.
The leakage of radio waves can be suppressed by the direct application of an
EMI gasket on the paint surface.
Our tests have been carried out on a panel having the damping characteristics of
37 dB max. and 30 dB mean (measured by 3 m method with 30 to 300 MHz).
APPENDICES
(2) Connection of power line and ground wire
Gound wire and power supply cable for the programmable controller system must be
connected as described below.
• Provide an grounding point near the power supply module. Ground the power
supply's LG and FG terminals (LG : Line Ground, FG : Frame Ground) with the
thickest and shortest wire possible. (The wire length must be 30 cm (11.81 inch)
or shorter.) The LG and FG terminals function is to pass the noise generated in
the programmable controller system to the ground, so an impedance that is as
INDEX
low as possible must be ensured. As the wires are used to relieve the noise, the
wire itself carries a large noise content and thus short wiring means that the wire
is prevented from acting as an antenna.
• The ground wire led from the grounding point must be twisted with the power
supply wires. By twisting with the ground wire, noise flowing from the power
supply wires can be relieved to the ground. However, if a filter is installed on the
power supply wires, the wires and the ground wire may not need to be twisted.

9.1.2 Installation instructions for EMC Directive
9-3
9.1.3 Cables
The cables extracted from the control panel contain a high frequency noise component.
On the outside of the control panel, therefore, they serve as antennas to emit noise. To
prevent noise emission, use shielded cables for the cables which are connected to the I/O
modules and intelligent function modules and may be extracted to the outside of the
control panel.
The use of a shielded cable also increases noise resistance.
The signal lines (including common line) of the programmable controller, which are
connected to I/O modules, intelligent function modules and/or extension cables, have
noise durability in the condition of grounding their shields by using the shielded cables. If a
shielded cable is not used or not grounded correctly, the noise resistance will not meet the
specified requirements.
(1) Grounding of shielded of shield cable

• Ground the shield of the shielded cable as near the module as possible taking
care so that the grounded cables are not induced electromagnetically by the
cable to be earthed.
• Take an appropriate measures so that the shield section of the shielded cable
from which the outer cover was partly removed for exposure is earthed to the
control panel on an increased contact surface.
A clamp may also be used as shown in Diagram 9.2.
In this case, however, apply a cover to the painted inner wall surface of the
control panel which comes in contact with the clamp.
Screw
Shield section Clamp fitting
Paint mask
Shield cable
Diagram 9.1 Part to be exposed Diagram 9.2 Shield grounding (Correct example)
Note) The method of grounding by soldering a wire onto the shield section of the
shielded cable as shown in Diagram 9.3 is not recommended. The high
frequency impedance will increase and the shield will be ineffective.
Shield cable
Wire
Solderless terminal, crimp contact
Diagram 9.3 Shield grounding (Incorrect example)

9.1.3 Cables
9
(2) MELSECNET/H module
EMC AND LOW

Always use a double-shielded coaxial cable (MITSUBISHI CABLE INDUSTRIES,
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
LTD.: 5C-2V-CCY) for the coaxial cables MELSECNET/H module. Radiated noise in
the range of 30HMz or higher can be suppressed by using double-shielded coaxial
cables. Ground the double-shielded coaxial cable by connecting its outer shield to the 10
ground.
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
Shield Ground here
Diagram 9.4 Double-shielded coaxial cable grounding
Refer to (1) for the grounding of the shield.

11
(3) Ethernet module, FL-net module, Web server module, MES interface
MAINTENANCE AND
module
Precautions for using AUI cables, twisted pair cables and coaxial cables are
INSPECTION
described below.
• Always ground the AUI cables*1 connected to the 10BASE5 connectors. Because
the AUI cable is of the shielded type, strip part of the outer cover and ground the 12
exposed shield section to the ground on the widest contact surface as shown in
TROUBLESHOOTING
Diagram 9.5.
AUI cable
Shield
Diagram 9.5 AUI cable grounding
* 1: Make sure to install a ferrite core for the cable.
As a ferrite core, ZCAT2032 manufactured by TDK is recommended.
APPENDICES
• Use shielded twisted pair cables as the twisted pair cables connected to the
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX connectors. For the shielded twisted pair cables, strip
part of the outer cover and ground the exposed shield section to the ground on
the widest contact surface as shown in Diagram 9.6.
Shielded twisted pair cables

INDEX
Shield
Diagram 9.6 Shielded twisted pair cable grounding
• Always use double-shielded coaxial cables as the coaxial cables*2 connected to

the 10BASE2 connectors. Ground the double-shielded coaxial cable by
connecting its outer shield to the ground.
Shield Ground here

Diagram 9.7 Double-shielded coaxial cable grounding
* 2: Make sure to install a ferrite core for the cable.
As a ferrite core, ZCAT3035 manufactured by TDK is recommended.

9.1.3 Cables
9-5
(4) Positioning module, channel-isolated pulse input module

Use shielded cables for the external wiring, and ground the shields of the external
wiring cables to the control box with the AD75CK cable clamp (Mitsubishi Electric
make).
(Ground the shields 20 to 30cm away from the module.)
Inside control box

QD70
20 to 30cm
AD75CK (7.87 to 11.81 inch)
Diagram 9.8 AD75CK cable clamp mounting position
The AD75CK allows up to four cables to be grounded if the outside diameter of the
shielded cable is about 7mm.
(5) Temperature control module

Use shielded cables for the external wiring, and ground the shields of the external
wiring cables to the control box with the AD75CK cable clamp (Mitsubishi Electric
make).
(Ground the shields 20 to 30cm away from the module.)
Inside control box

Q64TC
20 to 30cm
AD75CK (7.87 to 11.81 inch)
The AD75CK allows up to four cables to be grounded if the outside diameter of the
shielded cable is about 7mm.
The required number of AD75CKs is indicated in Table9.2. (When cables of 7mm
outside diameter are used for all wiring.)

9.1.3 Cables
9
Table9.2 Required number of AD75CK
Number of Used Channels

Required Number of AD75CKs
EMC AND LOW

1 2 3 4
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
0 1 1 2 2
1 1 2 2 3
2 1 2 2 3
3 2 2 3 3
10
Number of used CT channel 4 2 2 3 3
5 2 3 3 4
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
6 2 3 3 4
7 3 3 4 4
8 3 3 4 4
11
(6) Redundant CPU
MAINTENANCE AND
Be sure to use the QC TR for the tracking cable, and ground the shielded part of the
cable to the panel with the AD75CK cable clamp (Mitsubishi Electric make).
INSPECTION
(Ground the shield at a position 20 to 30cm (7.87 to 11.81 inch) away from the
module.)
12
TROUBLESHOOTING
Inside control panel
QnPRHCPU
20 to 30cm
AD75CK (7.87 to 11.81 inch)
APPENDICES
(7) I/O signal lines and other communication cables

For the I/O signal lines (including common line) and other communication cables (RS-
232, RS-422, CC-Link, etc.), always ground the shields of the shield cables as in (1) if
they are pulled out of the control panel. INDEX
(8) Extension cable

For an extension cable, always ground the shields of the shield cables as in (1) if they
are pulled out of the control panel.
(9) Power line for external power supply terminal

The power line connecting to the external power supply terminal of the analog module
should be 30m or less.
(10)Power line of CC-Link remote module

Power line connecting to the external power supply terminal (compliant with I/O power
port of CE standard) should be 30m or less. Power line connecting to module power
supply terminal (compliant with I/O power port of CE standard) should be 10m or less.

9.1.3 Cables
9-7
9.1.4 Power Supply Module and Q00JCPU's Power Supply Part
Always ground the LG and FG terminals after short-circuiting them.
9.1.5 When Using MELSEC-A Series Modules
The following describes the case where the MELSEC-A series module is used, using the
QA1S6 B, QA6 B, and QA6ADP+A5 B/A6 B as the extension base unit.
(1) Cable
(a) Grounding of the shield of the shielded cable
• Ground the shield of the shielded cable as near the unit as possible taking
care so that the grounded cables are not induced electromagnetically by the
cable to be earthed.
• Ground the shield of the shielded cable, which was exposed by removing a
part of the outer sheath, to the control panel as a large area as possible.
A clamp may also be used as shown in Diagram 9.12.
However, mask the part inside the control panel, with which the clamp comes
in contact, when coating.
Screw
Shield section Clamp fitting
Paint mask
Shield cable
Diagram 9.11 Part to be exposed Diagram 9.12 Shield grounding (Correct example)
Note) The method of grounding by soldering a wire onto the shield section of the
shielded cable as shown in Diagram 9.13 is not recommended. The high
frequency impedance will increase and the shield will be ineffective.
Shield cable
Wire
Solderless terminal, crimp contact
Diagram 9.13 Shield grounding (Incorrect example)

9.1.4 Power Supply Module and Q00JCPU's Power Supply Part
9
(b) Positioning modules
Precautions for configuring the machinery compliant with the EMC Directives
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
using the A1SD75P -S3 (abbreviated as A1SD75 hereafter), AD75P -S3
VOLTAGE
(abbreviated as AD75 hereafter) are described below.
1) When wiring with a 2 m (6.56 ft.) or less cable
• Ground the shield of the external device connection cable with a cable
10
clamp. (Ground the shield at the closest location to the A1SD75/AD75
external wiring connecter.)
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
• Wire external device connection cables to drive modules and external
devices by the shortest distance.
• Install the drive unit in the same panel.
Connector for external device connection 11
Power supply module
A1
SD
MAINTENANCE AND
75 Cable clamp
INSPECTION
Cable for external device connection (within 2 m)
Drive unit
12
Diagram 9.14 When wiring with a 2 m (6.56 ft.) or less cable
TROUBLESHOOTING
2) When wiring with cable that exceeds 2 m (6.56 ft.), but is 10 m (32.79 ft.)
or less
• Ground the shield of the external device connection cable with a cable
clamp. (Ground the shield at the closest location to the A1SD75/AD75
external wiring connecter.)
• Wire external device connection cables to drive modules and external
APPENDICES
devices by the shortest distance.
• Install a ferrite core.
Connector for external device connection
Power supply module
A1
SD
75 Ferrite core
Cable clamp
Cable for external device connection (over 2 m to less than 10 m)

INDEX
Drive unit
Diagram 9.15 When wiring with cable that exceeds 2 m (6.56 ft.), but is 10 m (32.79 ft.) or less

9-9
3) Ferrite core and cable clamp types

• Cable clamp
Type : AD75CK (Mitsubishi Electric)
• Ferrite core
Type : ZCAT3035-1330 (TDK ferrite core)
Table9.3 Number of required ferrite cores and cable clamps
Required Qty
Cable length Prepared part
1 axis 2 axes 3 axes
Within 2 m (6.56 ft.) AD75CK 1 1 1
2 m (6.56 ft.) to 10m AD75CK 1 1 1
(32.79ft.) ZCAT3035-1330 1 2 3
4) Cable clamp mounting position
Inside control box
AD75
20 to 30cm
AD75CK (7.87 to 11.81 inch)
9 - 10 9.1 Requirements for Conformance to EMC Directive

9
(c) CC-Link module
• Be sure to ground the cable shield that is connected to the CC-Link module
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
close to the exit of control panel or to any of the CC-Link stations within 30 cm
VOLTAGE
(11.81 inch) from the module or stations.
The CC-Link dedicated cable is a shielded cable. As shown in Diagram 9.17,
remove a portion of the outer covering and ground as large a surface area of 10
the exposed shield part as possible.
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
CC-Link dedicated cable
Shield
Diagram 9.17 CC-Link dedicated cable grounding
• Always use the specified CC-Link dedicated cable. 11
• The CC-Link module, the CC-Link stations and the FG line inside the control
MAINTENANCE AND
panel should be connected at the FG terminal as shown in Diagram 9.18.
INSPECTION
Master module Remote module Local module
(Blue)
DA DA DA
Terminal resistor (White) Terminal resistor
DB
DG
(Yellow)
DB
DG
DB
DG
12
TROUBLESHOOTING
SLD CC-Link SLD CC-Link SLD
FG dedicated FG dedicated FG
cable cable
Diagram 9.18 Connection between CC-Link module/CC-Link station and FG line inside the control panel.
(Simplified diagram)
• Power line connecting to the external power supply terminal (compliant with I/
O power port of CE standard) should be 30m (98.43 ft.) or less. Power line
connecting to module power supply terminal (compliant with I/O power port of
APPENDICES
CE standard) should be 10m (32.81 ft.) or less.
• The signal line connecting to the analog input of the following modules should
be 30m or less.
AJ65BT-64RD3
AJ65BT-64RD4
AJ65BT-68TD
(d) I/O signal lines

INDEX
For the I/O signal lines (including common line), if extracted to the outside of the
control panel, also ensure to ground the shield section of these lines and cables in
the same manner as in item (1) above.
(e) Extension cable

For an extension cable, always ground the shield section of the shield cables as in
(1) if they are pulled out of the control panel.

9 - 11
(2) Power supply module

The precautions required for each power supply module are described in Table9.4.
Always observe the items noted as precautions.
Table9.4 Precautions when using a power supply module
Model Precautions
A1S61P
A1S62P
Not usable
A61P
A62P
A1S63P *1
Use the CE marked 24VDC panel power equipment.
A163P
A1S61PEU
A1S62PEU
A1S61PN
A1S62PN Always ground the LG and FG terminals after short-
A61PN circuiting them.
A61PEU
A62PEU
A68P
* 1: If sufficient filter circuitry is built into the 24VDC external power supply module, the noise
generated by A1S63P will be absorbed by that filter circuit, so a line filter may not be required.
Filtering circuitry of version F or later of A1S63P is improved so that a external line filter is not
required.

9
9.1.6 Others
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
(1) Ferrite core
VOLTAGE
A ferrite core has the effect of reducing radiated noise in the 30MHz to 100MHz band.
It is not required to fit ferrite cores to cables, but it is recommended to fit ferrite cores if
shield cables pulled out of the enclosure do not provide sufficient shielding effects. 10
It should be noted that the ferrite cores should be fitted to the cables in the position
immediately before they are pulled out of the enclosure. If the fitting position is
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
improper, the ferrite will not produce any effect.
(2) Noise filter (power supply line filter)

A noise filter is a component which has an effect on conducted noise.
It is not required to attach the noise filter to the power supply line except the A61PEU,
11
A62PEU power supply modules and some models, however, attaching it can
MAINTENANCE AND
suppress more noise.
INSPECTION
(The noise filter has the effect of reducing conducted noise of 10 MHz or less.)
The precautions required when installing a noise filter are described below.
• Do not bundle the wires on the input side and output side of the noise filter. When 12
bundled, the output side noise will be induced into the input side wires from which
TROUBLESHOOTING
the noise was filtered.
Input side Input side

(power supply side) (power supply side)
APPENDICES
Induction
Filter Filter
Output side Output side

(device side) (device side)
The noise will be included when the Separate and lay the input
input and output wires are bundled. and output wires.
Diagram 9.19 Precautions on noise filter
INDEX
• Ground the noise filter grounding terminal to the control cabinet with the shortest
wire possible (approx. 10 cm (3.94 inch)).
Remark
Table9.5 Noise filter specifications
Noise filter model name FN343-3/01 FN660-6/06 ZHC2203-11

Manufacturer SCHAFFNER SCHAFFNER TDK
Rated current 3A 6A 3A
Rated voltage 250V

9.1.6 Others
9 - 13
(3) Isolation transformer

An isolation transformer has an effect on reducing conducted noise (especially,
lightning surge).
Lightning surge may cause a malfunction of the programmable controller.
As a measure against lightning surge, connect an isolation transformer as shown in
Diagram 9.20.
The use of an isolation transformer reduces an impact of lightning.
Programmable Isolation
Main controller power transformer
power supply supply
100VAC Programmable
200VAC controller
Relay
terminal block T1
I/O power supply
I/O equipment
Motor power supply
Motor equipment
Inside a control panel
Diagram 9.20 Power supply wiring diagram
Table9.6 lists the recommended isolation transformers.
Table9.6 Isolation transformer
Model 4H503-092 4H400-104 4H503-093

Rated capacity: 200VA Rated capacity: 200VA Rated capacity: 200VA
Isolation type: A Isolation type: B Isolation type: H
Frequency: 50/60Hz Frequency: 50/60Hz Frequency: 50/60Hz
Specifications
Input: 200V/100VAC Input: 200V/100VAC Input: 200V/100VAC
Output: 200/100VAC Output: 200/100VAC Output: 200/100VAC
With Electrostatic shield E With Electrostatic shield E With Electrostatic shield E
Obtained standard None UL UL and CE

9.1.6 Others
9
9.2 Requirement to Conform to the Low Voltage Directive
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
The Low Voltage Directive requires each device that operates with the power supply
VOLTAGE
ranging from 50 to 1000VAC and 75 to 1500VDC to satisfy the safety requirements.
In Section 9.2.1 to Section 9.2.6, cautions on installation and wiring of the MELSEC-Q
series programmable controller to conform to the Low Voltage Directive are described. 10
These descriptions are based on the requirements and standards of the regulation,
however, it does not guarantee that the entire machinery manufactured based on the
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
descriptions conforms to the above-mentioned directive. The method and judgment for the
conformity to the low voltage directive must be left to the manufacturer's own discretion.
9.2.1 Standard applied for MELSEC-Q series programmable controller

11
The standard applied for MELSEC-Q series programmable controller is EN61131-2 safety
MAINTENANCE AND
of devices used in measurement rooms, control rooms, or laboratories.
INSPECTION
The MELSEC-Q series programmable controller which operate at the rated voltage of
50VAC/75VDC or above are also developed to conform to the above standard.
The modules which operate at the rated voltage of less than 50VAC/75VDC are out of the
Low Voltage Directive application range. 12
For products with the CE mark, refer to the "Standard Compliance" menu of the
TROUBLESHOOTING
MELFANSweb homepage.
9.2.2 MELSEC-Q series programmable controller selection
(1) Power supply module

There are dangerous voltages (voltages higher than 42.4V peak) inside the power
supply modules of the 100/200VAC rated I/O voltages. Therefore, the CE marked
models are enhanced in insulation internally between the primary and secondary.
APPENDICES
(2) I/O module
There are dangerous voltages (voltages higher than 42.4V peak) inside the I/O
modules of the 100/200VAC rated I/O voltages. Therefore, the CE marked models are
enhanced in insulation internally between the primary and secondary.
The I/O modules of 24VDC or less rating are out of the Low Voltage Directive
application range.
INDEX
(3) CPU module, memory card, base unit

Using 5VDC circuits inside, the above modules are out of the Low Voltage Directive
application range.
(4) Intelligent function modules (special function modules)

The intelligent function modules such as analog-digital converter modules, digital-
analog converter modules, network modules, and positioning modules (special
function modules) are out of the scope of the low voltage directive because the rated
voltage is 24VDC or less.
(5) Display device

Use the CE marked display device.

9.2.1 Standard applied for MELSEC-Q series programmable controller
9 - 15
9.2.3 Power supply
The insulation specification of the power supply module was designed assuming
installation category II. Be sure to use the installation category II power supply to the
programmable controller.
The installation category indicates the durability level against surge voltage generated by
a thunderbolt. Category I has the lowest durability; category IV has the highest durability.
Category IV Category III Category II Category I

Diagram 9.21 Installation category for power supply module
Category II indicates a power supply whose voltage has been reduced by two or more
levels of isolating transformers from the public power distribution.
9.2.4 Control panel
Programmable controller is an open type device (a device designed to be housed inside

other equipment) and must be installed inside a control panel for use.*
* : Also, each network remote station needs to be installed inside the control panel.
However, the waterproof type remote station can be installed outside the control panel.
(1) Electrical shock prevention

The control panel must be handled as shown below to protect a person who does not
have adequate knowledge of electricity from an electric shock.
• Lock the control panel so that only those who are trained and have acquired
enough knowledge of electric facilities can open the control panel.
• The control panel must have a structure which automatically stops the power
supply when the box is opened.
• For electric shock protection, use IP20 or greater control panel.
9 - 16 9.2 Requirement to Conform to the Low Voltage Directive

9.2.3 Power supply
9
(2) Dustproof and waterproof features
EMC AND LOW

The control panel also has the dustproof and waterproof functions. Insufficient
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
dustproof and waterproof features lower the insulation withstand voltage, resulting in
insulation destruction.
The insulation in our programmable controller is designed to cope with the pollution 10
level 2, so use in an environment with pollustion level 2 or below.
Pollution level 1 : An environment where the air is dry and conductive dust
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
does not exist.
Pollution level 2 : An environment where conductive dust
does not usually exist, but occasional temporary
conductivity occurs due to the accumulated dust.
Generally, this is the level for inside the control box
11
equivalent to IP54 in a control room or on the floor of a
MAINTENANCE AND
typical factory.
INSPECTION
Pollution level 3 : An environment where conductive dust exits and
conductivity may be generated due to the accumulated
dust.
An environment for a typical factory floor. 12
Pollution level 4 : Continuous conductivity may occur due to rain, snow, etc.
TROUBLESHOOTING
An outdoor environment.
As shown above, the programmable controller can realize the pollution level 2 when
stored in a control panel equivalent to IP54.
APPENDICES
INDEX

9.2.4 Control panel
9 - 17
9.2.5 Grounding
There are the following two different ground terminals.

Use either ground terminal in an grounding status.
Protective grounding : Maintains the safety of the programmable controller and

improves the noise resistance.
Functional grounding : Improves the noise resistance.
9.2.6 External wiring
(1) Module power supply and external power supply

For the remote module which requires 24VDC as module power supply, the 5/12/24/
48VDC I/O module, and the intelligent function module (special function module)
which requires the external power supply, use the 5/12/24/48VDC circuit which is
doubly insulated from the hazardous voltage circuit or use the power supply whose
insulation is reinforced.
(2) External devices

When a device with a hazardous voltage circuit is externally connected to the
programmable controller, use a model whose circuit section of the interface to the
programmable controller is intensively insulated from the hazardous voltage circuit.
(3) Intensive insulation

The intensive insulation covers the withstand voltages shown in Table9.7.
Table9.7 Intensive Insulation Withstand Voltage

(Installation Category II, source : IEC 664)
Rated voltage of hazardous Surge withstand voltage

voltage area (1.2/50 s)
150VAC or below 2500V
300VAC or below 4000V
9 - 18 9.2 Requirement to Conform to the Low Voltage Directive

9.2.5 Grounding
10 LOADING AND INSTALLATION
9
CHAPTER10 LOADING AND INSTALLATION
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
In order to increase the reliability of the system and exploit the maximum performance of
its functions, this chapter describes the methods and precautions for the mounting and
installation of the system.
10
10.1 General Safety Requirements
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
Install a safety circuit external to the programmable controller that keeps
the entire system safe even when there are problems with the external
DANGER
power supply or the programmable controller. Otherwise, trouble could 11
result from erroneous output or erroneous operation.
MAINTENANCE AND
(1) Outside the programmable controller, construct mechanical damage
preventing interlock circuits such as emergency stop, protective cir-
INSPECTION
cuits, positioning upper and lower limits switches and interlocking
forward/reverse operations.
(2) The programmable controller stops its operation when the following
12
erroneous status is detected,
TROUBLESHOOTING
All the outputs are turned OFF in case (a).
All the outputs are held or turned OFF by the parameter setting in
case (b).
Note that the AnS/A series modules turn off all the outputs both in
case (a) and (b).
Table10.1 Output status of module at the time of programmable controller error
occurrence
APPENDICES
Q series module AnS/A series module
(a) The power supply module has over current

protection equipment and over voltage Output OFF Output OFF
protection equipment.
(b) The programmable controller CPUs All outputs are retained or
OFF by parameter Output OFF
self-diagnosis functions, such as the watchdog
settings.
timer error, detect problems.
In addition, all output will be turned on when there are problems that
the programmable controller CPU cannot detect, such as in the I/O
controller.
INDEX
(3) Output could be left on or off when there is trouble in the outputs
module relay or transistor. So build an external monitoring circuit that
will monitor any signal outputs that could cause serious trouble.
When overcurrent which exceeds the rating or caused by short-circuited
load flows in the output module for a long time, it may cause smoke or
fire. To prevent this, configure an external safety circuit, such as fuse.
Build a circuit that turns on the external power supply when the program-
mable controller power is turned on. If the external power supply is
turned on first, it could result in erroneous output or erroneous operation.
When there are communication problems with the data link, refer to the
corresponding data link manual for the operating status of each station.
Not doing so could result in erroneous output or erroneous operation.
10.1 General Safety Requirements 10 - 1

When connecting a peripheral device to a CPU module, or a PC to an

intelligent function module to control a programmable controller in opera-
DANGER
tion (data change), configure an interlock circuit on the sequence pro-
gram so that the entire system operates safely at any time.
Also before exercising other control (program change, operating status
change (status control)) on the running programmable controller, read
the manual carefully and fully confirm safety.
Especially for the above control on the remote programmable controller
from an external device, an immediate action may not be taken for pro-
grammable controller trouble due to a data communication fault.
In addition to configuring up the interlock circuit in the sequence pro-
gram, corrective and other actions to be taken as a system for the occur-
rence of a data communication fault should be predetermined between
the external device and programmable controller CPU.
Do not bunch the control wires or communication cables with the main
circuit or power wires, or install them close to each other. They should be
CAUTION
installed 100 mm (3.94 inch) or more from each other.
Not doing so could result in noise that would cause erroneous operation.
When controlling items like lamp load, heater or solenoid valve using an
output module, large current (approximately ten times greater than that
present in normal circumstances) may flow when the output is turned
OFF to ON. Take measures such as replacing the module with one hav-
ing sufficient rated current.
When the programmable controller is powered on and off, normal control output may not
be done momentarily due to a delay or a start-up time difference between the
programmable controller power supply and the external power supply (DC in particular) for
the control target.
For example, if the external power supply for the controlled object is switched on in a DC
output module and then the programmable controller power supply is switched on, the DC
output module may provide false output instantaneously at power-on of the programmable
controller. Therefore, it is necessary to make up a circuit that can switch on the
programmable controller power supply first.
Also, an abnormal operation may be performed if an external power supply fault or
programmable controller failure takes place.
To prevent any of these abnormal operations from leading to the abnormal operation of the
whole system and in a fail-safe viewpoint, areas which can result in machine breakdown
and accidents due to abnormal operations (e.g. emergency stop, protective and interlock
circuits) should be constructed outside the programmable controller.
The following page gives examples of system designing in the above viewpoint.
10 - 2 10.1 General Safety Requirements

9
(1) System design circuit example (when not using ERR terminal of power
EMC AND LOW

supply module, or using Q00JCPU)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
Power supply
FOR AC FOR AC/DC
Power supply
Transformer Transformer
10
Transformer
Input switched when Fuse Fuse
Fuse power supply
established. CPU module
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
CPU module
RUN/STOP circuit SM52 DC power
SM52 Ym
Ym interlocked with RA1 (-) (+)
(run monitor relay) SM403
SM403 Yn Fuse
Yn XM
11
Set time for DC power
TM supply to be
Program established.
TM
MC1 NO M10
START SW
MAINTENANCE AND
RA1 NO
MC M10
MC STOP SW
Program
INSPECTION
Input module START SW RA1
MC
MC STOP SW
Output module
Low battery alarm
12
RA2
(Lamp or buzzer) RA2 Voltage relay is
Ym
XM recommended
L
ON when run by
TROUBLESHOOTING
Yn SM403
RA1
Low battery alarm

Output module
Output module MC (Lamp or buzzer)
Power to output Ym
equipment switched ON when run by SM403
L
MC OFF when the STOP
signal is given. Yn
In the case of an RA1
emergency stop or a
MC2 stop caused by a limit
MC1
switch. Output module
MC MC
MC1 Power to output
Interlock circuits as
MC2 equipment switched
necessary.
OFF when the STOP
Provide external
APPENDICES
signal is given.
interlock circuits for
conflicting operations, In the case of an
such as forward rotation MC2 emergency stop or a
and reverse rotation, MC1 stop caused by a limit
and for parts that could switch.
damage the machine or MC1
cause accidents if no MC2
interlock were used.
Diagram 10.1 System design circuit example
The power-ON procedure is as follows:

INDEX
For AC For AC/DC
1) Turn power ON. 1) Turn power ON.

2) Set CPU to RUN. 2) Set CPU to RUN.
3) Turn ON the start switch. 3) When DC power is established, RA2 goes ON.
4) When the magnetic contactor (MC) comes 4) Timer (TM) times out after the DC power reaches 100%. (The TM set
ON, the output equipment is powered and value should be the period of time from when RA2 goes ON to the
may be driven by the program. establishment of 100% DC voltage. Set this value to approximately 0.5
seconds.)
5) Turn ON the start switch.
6) When the magnetic contactor (MC) comes ON, the output equipment is
powered and may be driven by the program. (If a voltage relay is used at
RA2, no timer (TM) is required in the program.)

(2) System design circuit example (when using ERR terminal of power
supply module)
Power supply
FOR AC/DC
Transformer Transformer
Fuse Fuse
Input switched
when power supply
established. CPU module
SM52 DC power
Ym
RUN/STOP circuit (-) (+)
SM403
interlocked with RA1 Yn Fuse
(run monitor relay)
XM Set time for DC power
TM supply to be established.
TM
NO MC1 NO M10
M10
Program
START SW
RA1 RA3
MC
MC STOP SW
RA2
RA2 Voltage relay is
XM recommended
Output module
Ym Low battery alarm
L (Lamp or buzzer)
Yn
RA1
OFF at ERR contact OFF

ERR (stop error occurrence)
Power supply module RA3
Output module
MC MC
Interlock circuits as
necessary. Output by ERR contact OFF
Provide external Power OFF of equipment
interlock circuits for
conflicting operations, In the case of an
such as forward rotation MC2 emergency stop or a
and reverse rotation, and MC1 stop caused by a limit
for parts that could switch.
damage the machine or MC1
cause accidents if no MC2
interlock were used.
Diagram 10.2 System design circuit example
The power-ON procedure is as follows:
For AC/DC
1) Turn power ON.

2) Set CPU to RUN.
3) When DC power is established, RA2 goes ON.
4) Timer (TM) times out after the DC power reaches 100%. (The TM set value should be the period of time from when RA2
goes ON to the establishment of 100% DC voltage. Set this value to approximately 0.5s.)
5) Turn ON the start switch.
6) When the magnetic contactor (MC) comes on, the output equipment is powered and may be driven by the program. (If a
voltage relay is used at RA2, no timer (TM) is required in the program.)

9
(3) Fail-safe measures against failure of the programmable controller
EMC AND LOW

Failure of a CPU module or memory can be detected by the self-diagnosis function.
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
However, failure of I/O control area may not be detected by the CPU module.
In such cases, all I/O points turn ON or OFF depending on a condition of problem, and
normal operating conditions and operating safety cannot sometimes be maintained. 10
Though Mitsubishi programmable controllers are manufactured under strict quality
control, they may cause failure or abnormal operations due to unspecific reasons. To
prevent the abnormal operation of the whole system, machine breakdown, and
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
accidents, fail-safe circuitry against failure of the programmable controller must be
constructed outside the programmable controller.
Diagram 10.3 and Diagram 10.4 are a system example and its fail-safe circuit
example. 11
MAINTENANCE AND
INSPECTION
Output
Input
Input
Input
Input
12
Extension cable
TROUBLESHOOTING
No. of slots 16 points 16 points 16 points 16 points 16 points
Output module for fail-safe purpose 1

Y80 to Y8F Output
Output
Output
Output
Empty
APPENDICES
No. of slots 16 points 16 points 16 points 16 points
* 1: The output module for fail-safe purpose should be loaded in the last slot of the system. (Y80 to
Y8F in the above system.)
Diagram 10.3 System example
INDEX

On delay time
Internal program Y80 T1

1s
SM412 Off delay timer
Y80 T2
1s
External load MC
Y81 L
Y80 Y8F L
24V
0.5s 0.5s
0V
DC24V
2
CPU module Output module
T1 T2
MC
* 2: Y80 repeats turning ON and then OFF at 0.5s intervals.

Use a no-contact output module (transistor in the example shown above).
Diagram 10.4 <Fail-safe circuit example>

9
10.2 Calculating Heat Generation of Programmable Controller
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
The ambient temperature inside the panel storing the programmable controller must be
VOLTAGE
suppressed to an ambient temperature of 55 or less, which is specified for the
For the design of a heat releasing panel, it is necessary to know the average power 10
consumption (heating value) of the devices and instruments stored inside.
Here the method of obtaining the average power consumption of the programmable
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
controller system is described.
From the power consumption, calculate a rise in ambient temperature inside the panel.
How to calculate average power consumption 11

The power consuming parts of the programmable controller are roughly classified into six
MAINTENANCE AND
blocks as shown below.
INSPECTION
(1) Power consumption of power supply module
The power conversion efficiency of the power supply module is approx. 70 %, while
30 % of the output power is consumed as heat. As a result, 3/7 of the output power is 12
the power consumption.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Therefore the calculation formula is as follows.
3
W PW = ×{(I5V×5) + (I15V×15) + (I24V×24)} (W)
7
I5V: Current consumption of logic 5 VDC circuit of each module
I15V: Current consumption of 15VDC external power supply part of intelligent function
module
I24V: Average current consumption of 24VDC power supply for internal consumption of the
output module
APPENDICES
POINT
In a redundant power supply system configuration, the same calculation method
is applied.
(When 2 redundant power supply modules are placed in parallel, they run sharing
the load current half-and-half.)
INDEX
(2) Total power consumption for 5VDC logic circuits of all modules
(including CPU module)
The power consumption of the 5 VDC output circuit section of the power supply
module is the power consumption of each module (including the current consumption
of the base unit).
W5V = I5V 5 (W)
* : For the power consumption of the motion CPU and PC CPU module, refer to the instruction
manuals of the corresponding modules.
10.2 Calculating Heat Generation of Programmable Controller 10 - 7

(3) A total of 24 VDC average power consumption of the output module

(power consumption for simultaneous ON points)
The average power of the external 24 VDC power is the total power consumption of
each module.
W24V = I24V 24 Simultaneous ON rate (W)
(4) Average power consumption due to voltage drop in the output section of
the output module
(Power consumption for simultaneous ON points)
WOUT = IOUT Vdrop Number of outputs Simultaneous ON rate (W)
IOUT : Output current (Current in actual use) (A)

Vdrop : Voltage drop in each output module (V)
(5) Average power consumption of the input section of the input module
(Power consumption for simultaneous ON points)
WIN = IIN E Number of input points Simultaneous ON rate (W)
IIN : Input current (Effective value for AC) (A)

E : Input voltage (Voltage in actual use) (V)
(6) Power consumption of the external power supply section of the

intelligent function module
WS = I+15V 15+I-15V 15+I24V 24 (W)
The total of the power consumption values calculated for each block becomes the power
consumption of the overall sequencer system.
W = WPW+W5V+W24V+WOUT+WIN+WS (W)
From this overall power consumption (W), calculate the heating value and a rise in
ambient temperature inside the panel.
The outline of the calculation formula for a rise in ambient temperature inside the panel is
shown below.
W
T= C
UA
W : Power consumption of overall sequencer system (value obtained above)
A : Surface area inside the panel
U : When the ambient temperature inside the panel is uniformed by a fan ........ 6
When air inside the panel is not circulated.................................................... 4
POINT
If the temperature inside the panel has exceeded the specified range, it is
recommended to install a heat exchanger to the panel to lower the temperature.
If a normal ventilating fan is used, dust will be sucked into the programmable
controller together with the external air, and it may affect the performance of the
10 - 8 10.2 Calculating Heat Generation of Programmable Controller

9
(7) Example of calculation of average power consumption
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
(a) System configuration
VOLTAGE
Q61P-A1
Q02HCPU
Q35B
10
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
QX40 Q62DA
QY40P QJ71LP21-25
Diagram 10.5 System configuration

11
(b) 5VDC/24VDC current consumption of each module
MAINTENANCE AND
Table10.2 5VDC/24VDC current consumption
INSPECTION
module name 5VDC 24VDC
Q02HCPU 0.64A ----
QX40 0.05A ----
QY40P 0.065A 1.60A
QJ71LP-25 0.55A ----
12
Q62DA 0.33A 0.12A
TROUBLESHOOTING
Q35B 0.11A ----
(c) Power consumption of power supply module

WPW = 3/7 (0.64 + 0.05 + 0.05 + 0.065 + 0.55 + 0.33 + 0.11) 5 = 3.85(W)
(d) Total power consumption for 5 VDC logic circuits of all module
W5V = (0.64 + 0.05 + 0.05 + 0.065 + 0.55+ 0.33 + 0.11) 5 = 8.98(W)
(e) Total 24 VDC average power consumption of the output module
APPENDICES
W24V = 1.60 24 = 38.40(W)
(f) Average power consumption due to voltage drop in the output section of the
output module
WOUT = 0.1 0.2 16 1 = 0.32(W)
(g) Average power consumption of the input section of the input module
WIN = 0.004 24 32 1 = 3.07(W)
(h) Power consumption of the external power supply section of the intelligent
INDEX
function module
WS = 0.12 24=2.88(W)
(i) Power consumption of overall system

W = 3.85 + 8.98 + 38.40 + 0.32 + 3.07 + 2.88 = 57.50(W)
POINT
The value of the heat generated in a redundant system configuration (when the
Redundant CPU is used) is the sum of the two values for the control and standby
systems, each of which is calculated by the same method as that for the single
system.
10.2 Calculating Heat Generation of Programmable Controller 10 - 9

10.3 Module Installation
10.3.1 Precaution on installation
Use the programmable controller in an environment that meets the gen-

eral specifications contained in this manual. Using this programmable
CAUTION
controller in an environment outside the range of the general specifica-
tions could result in electric shock, fire, erroneous operation, and dam-
age to or deterioration of the product.
While pressing the installation lever located at the bottom of module,
insert the module fixing tab into the fixing hole in the base unit until it
stops. Then, securely mount the module with the fixing hole as a support-
ing point. Incorrect mounting of the module can cause a malfunction, fail-
ure or drop.
When using the programmable controller in the environment of much
vibration, tighten the module with a screw.
Tighten the screw in the specified torque range.
Undertightening can cause a drop, short circuit or malfunction. Overtight-
ening can cause a drop, short circuit or malfunction due to damage to the
screw or module.
When installing more cables, be sure that the base unit and the module
connectors are installed correctly.
After installation, check them for looseness.
Poor connections could cause an input or output failure.
Securely load the memory card by pushing it into the memory card load-
ing slot.
Check for insecure loading after loading the memory card.
Not doing so can cause a malfunction due to a contact fault.
Completely turn off the externally supplied power used in the system
before mounting or removing the module. Not doing so could result in
damage to the product.
Note that the module can be changed online (while power is on) in the
system that uses the CPU module compatible with online module change
or on the MELSECNET/H remote I/O station. Note that there are restric-
tions on the modules that can be changed online (while power is on) and
each module has a predetermined changing procedure.
Note that online (while power is on) replaceable modules are restricted,
and the replacement procedure is determined for each module
( 12.4.1).
Do not mount/remove the module onto/from base unit or terminal block
more than 50 times (IEC 61131-2 compliant), after the first use of the
product.
Failure to do so may cause the module to malfunction due to poor con-
tact of connector.
10 - 10 10.3 Module Installation

9
Do not directly touch the module's conductive parts or electronic compo-
EMC AND LOW

nents. Touching the conductive parts could cause an operation failure or
DIRECTIVES
CAUTION
VOLTAGE
give damage to the module.
When using the Motion CPU module or motion module, be sure to check
that the combination of modules is correct before power-on. 10
The product may be damaged if the combination is incorrect.
For details, refer to the user's manual for the Motion CPU module.
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
POINT
In case of using the QA1S6 B, when installing the base unit to DIN rail in an
environment with large vibration, use a vibration-proofing bracket (A1S-PLT-D). 11
Mounting the vibration-proofing bracket (A1S-PLT-D) enhances the resistance to
MAINTENANCE AND
vibration.
Depending on the environment to set up the base unit, it is also recommended to
INSPECTION
fix the base unit to the control panel directly.
This section gives instructions for handling the CPU, I/O, intelligent function and power
12
supply modules, base units and so on.
TROUBLESHOOTING
• Module enclosure, terminal block connectors and pin connectors are made of
resin; do not drop them or subject them to strong impact.
• Do not remove modules' printed circuit boards from the enclosure in order to
avoid changes in operation.
• Tighten the module fixing screws and terminal block screws within the tightening
torque range specified shown in Table10.3.
Table10.3 Tightening torque range
APPENDICES
Location of Screw Tightening Torque Range
Module fixing screw (M3 12 screw) 0.36 to 0.48N•m
I/O module terminal block screw (M3 screw) 0.42 to 0.58N•m
I/O module terminal block fixing screw (M3.5 screw) 0.66 to 0.89N•m
Power supply module terminal screw (M3.5 screw) 0.66 to 0.89N•m
• Be sure to install a power supply module in the power supply installation slot of
Q3 B, Q3 SB, Q3 RB, Q3 DB, Q6 B, Q6 RB, Q6 WRB, QA1S6 B or
QA6 B.
INDEX
Even if the power supply module is not installed, when the I/O modules and
intelligent function module installed on the base units are of light load type, the
modules may be operated.
In this case, because a voltage becomes unstable, we cannot guarantee the
operation.
• When using an extension cable or a tracking cable, keep it away from the main
circuit cable (high voltage and large current).
Keep a distance of 100mm or more from the main circuit.

10 - 11
• The following are precautions on use in combination with a module whose depth
is 130mm or more (Q66DA-G).
1) A module that is less than 130mm in depth cannot be mounted between
modules that are 130mm or more in depth.
2) A module that is less than 130mm in depth cannot be mounted on the right
side of a module that is 130mm or more in depth.
3) If a module that is 130mm or more in depth is mounted in slot 0 with the
Q64P(N) used as power supply, operations such as installing or removing a
CPU memory card may be difficult.
Although there is no problem with the operation behavior, if it is inconvenient,
mount a module that is less than 130mm in depth in slot 0 or leave the slot
empty.

9
Install a main base unit or a Q00JCPU (by screwing) in the following procedure.
4) Fit the two base unit top mounting screws into the enclosure.
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
10
Panel
Diagram 10.6 Install a main base unit or a Q00JCPU
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
5) Place the right-hand side notch of the base unit onto the right-hand side
screw.
11
MAINTENANCE AND
INSPECTION
Panel 12
TROUBLESHOOTING
6) Place the left-hand side pear-shaped hole onto the left-hand side screw.
Panel
APPENDICES
7) Fit the mounting screws into the holes at the bottom of the base unit,
and then retighten the all mounting screws.
Note1 : Install the main base unit to a panel, with no module loaded in the
right-end slot.
Remove the base unit after unloading the module from the right-end
slot.
Note2 : The mounting screws that included with the slim type main base unit
INDEX
differ from those included with other types of the base unit.
When ordering mounting screws for the slim type main base unit,
specify "cross recessed head bind screw M4 x 12 (black)."

10 - 13
Note the following points when mounting a DIN rail.

Mounting a DIN rail needs special adaptors (optional), which are to be user-prepared.
(a) Applicable adaptor types

For Q38B,Q312B,Q68B,Q612B,Q38RB,Q68RB,
Q65WRB,Q38DB,Q312DB : Q6DIN1
For Q35B,Q65B,Q00JCPU : Q6DIN2
For Q33B,Q52B,Q55B,Q63B,Q32SB,Q33SB,Q35SB : Q6DIN3
Table10.4 Parts included with DIN rail mounting adaptors
Quantity of included parts

DIN rail mounting
Mounting screw
adaptors Adaptor(Large) Adaptor(small) Square washer Stopper
(M5 10)
Q6DIN1 2 4 3 3 2
Q6DIN2 2 3 2 2 2
Q6DIN3 1 2 2 2 2
(b) Adaptor installation method

The way to install the adaptors for mounting a DIN rail to the base unit is given in
Diagram 10.9.
Base unit rear
Place the hook of the adaptor Push the top of the adaptor
(small) in the lower hole. (small) far enough until it
"clicks".
Insert the adaptor (large) into the grooves of Push the bottom of the adaptor (large) far enough
the base unit from below. until it "clicks".
Diagram 10.9 Adaptor installation method

9
(c) Applicable DIN rail types (IEC 60715)
TH35-7.5Fe
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
TH35-7.5Al
VOLTAGE
TH35-15Fe
(d) DIN rail mounting screw intervals

10
When using DIN rail,DIN rail mounting screws should be inserted in 200 mm (7.88
inch) intervals or less in order to ensure that the rail has sufficient strength.
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
DIN rail DIN rail mounting screw
(obtained by user)
35mm
(1.38 inch)
11
MAINTENANCE AND
P P P
P=200mm (7.88 inch) or less
INSPECTION
Diagram 10.10 DIN rail mounting screw intervals
When installing the DIN rail in a large vibration and/or shock prone environment,
insert the mounting screws in 200mm interrals or less by the following method
show below. 12
TROUBLESHOOTING
<For Q38B, Q312B, Q68B, Q612B, Q38RB, Q68RB, Q65WRB, Q38DB or
Q312DB type>
Screw the DIN rail in three places using the mounting screws and square washers
included with the DIN rail mounting adaptors (hereafter referred to as the
adaptors) in ‘Position A’ (bottom of base unit).
B *3 A *2 B *3
Mounting screws (included with adaptors)

Mounting screws (obtained by user)
Square washers necessary *1
DIN rail No square washers
APPENDICES
35mm
Stopper
P P P P
Stopper
Diagram 10.11 DIN rail mounting screw intervals INDEX

10 - 15
<For Q35B, Q65B, Q00JCPU, Q33B, Q52B, Q55B, Q63B, Q32SB, Q33SB or
Q35SB type>
Screw the DIN rail in two places using the mounting screws and square washers
included with the adaptors in ‘Position A’ (bottom of base unit).
B *3 A *2 B *3
Mounting screws Mounting screws (obtained by user)
(included with adaptors)
DIN rail Square washers necessary *1 No square washers
35mm
Stopper
P P P
Stopper
Diagram 10.12 DIN rail mounting screw intervals
*1
Square washer DIN rail Mounting screws DIN rail
square washer Mounting side

(e.g. Control panel)
Mounting screws
(M5 10) Side view A Side view A
Diagram 10.13 Square washer
* 2: Screw the DIN rail to a control panel using the mounting screws and square washers included
with the adaptors in ‘Position A’ (bottom of base unit).
* 3: Screw the DIN rail with mounting screws(obtained by user) in ‘Position B’ (Where the base unit is
not installed). In this method the supplied mounting screws and square washers are not used.
POINT
(1) Use only one washer for each mounting screw. Use only the square washers
supplied with the adaptors.
If two or more washers are used together for one mounting screw, the screw
may interfere with the base unit.
(2) Make sure to align the square washer sides with the DIN rail.
square washer DIN rail square washer DIN rail
Diagram 10.14 Precautions when mounting a square washer
(3) Use the DIN rail that is compatible with M5 size screws.

9
(e) Stopper mounting
When using the DIN rail in the environment with large vibration, use stoppers
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
included with the DIN rail mounting adaptor shown in (a).
VOLTAGE
1) Loosen the screw at the top of the Hook Stopper
stopper. (2 stoppers) 1)
10
Hook
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
2) Hitch the lower hook of the stopper
to the bottom of the DIN rail. Install
the stopper with the arrowhead side 3) Hitch hook to top of
facing up. DIN rail
11
MAINTENANCE AND
3) Hitch the upper hook of the stopper
to the top of the DIN rail. 2) Hitch hook to bottom
INSPECTION
of DIN rail
4) Slide the stopper to the end of the

base unit so that they are fully in
contact.
Stopper 4)
12
TROUBLESHOOTING
5)
5) Tighten the screw of the stopper DIN rail
with a screwdriver.
(Tightening torque 1.00 to 1.35N m) (Left side)
4) Stopper
APPENDICES
5)
DIN rail
(Right side)
Make sure that the left and right
stoppers are fixed securely to the
DIN rail. Stopper Stopper
Complete
INDEX
Diagram 10.15 Fixture mounting procedure

10 - 17
In addition, when three or more modules with 130mm or more in depth (such as
Q66DA-G etc.) are mounted, or when the base unit is used in the environment
with extremely large vibration, use the Q6DIN1A Q-type base DIN rail mounting
adaptor (vibration-proofing bracket kit) where the large mounting bracket is
included. The large mounting bracket enables to enhance the resistance to
vibration. Depending on the environment, it is recommended to mount the base
unit on the control panel directly.
1) Q6DIN1A applicable models
Q00JCPU, Q33B, Q35B, Q38B, Q312B, Q32SB, Q33SB, Q35SB, Q38RB,
Q38DB, Q312DB, Q52B, Q55B, Q63B, Q65B, Q68B, Q612B, Q68RB,
Q65WRB
Table10.5 Q-tyep base DIN rail mounting adaptor (Vibration-proofing bracket kit) included parts
Quantity of included parts

DIN rail mounting Module
Mounting
adaptor (Vibration- Adaptor Adaptor mounting Square Mounting Mounting
Stopper screw
proofing bracket kit) (Large) (small) screw washer bracket L bracket R
(M5 10)
(M4 10)
Q6DIN1A 2 4 4 3 2 1 1 3
POINT
When stoppers are used, the dimension of stoppers need to be considered in the
unit installation dimensions. Refer to a CPU user’s manual for the base unit
dimensions (W).
Base unit
Stopper Stopper
(1.93) (1.93)
49
35(1.38)
98(3.86)
49
DIN rail
Base unit width : W DIN rail center

W+18(0.71)
Unit: mm (inch)
Diagram 10.16 Base unit external dimensions (Front view)

9
(f) Dimensions when DIN rail is attached (Side view).
EMC AND LOW

Board side
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
DIN rail depth (D)
TH35-7.5Fe, TH35-7.5Al:7.5 (0.30) D 7.5 Base unit Power supply module
TH35-15Fe:15 (0.59) (0.30)
5
(0.20)
10
DIN rail adaptor
(49 (1.93))
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
DIN rail: TH35-7.5Fe,
TH35-7.5Al,
TH35-15Fe
98 (3.86)
35 (1.38)
11
MAINTENANCE AND
(49 (1.93))
INSPECTION
12
(0.12)
3
Example) Q64PN Power supply module = 115 (4.53)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Unit: mm (inch)
Diagram 10.17 External dimensions (Side view)
APPENDICES
INDEX

10 - 19
10.3.2 Instructions for mounting the base unit
When mounting the programmable controller to an enclosure or similar, fully consider its
operability, maintainability and environmental resistance.
(1) Module mounting position

Keep the clearances shown in Diagram 10.18 or Diagram 10.19 between the top/
bottom faces of the module and other structures or parts to ensure good ventilation
and facilitate module replacement.
(a) In case of main base unit or extension base unit
Indicates the panel top, wiring duct or any

part position.
30mm(1.18 inch) Programmable

5, 6 or more controller
1, 5
Panel Door
20mm
(0.79 inch)
4 30mm(1.18 inch)
or more
or more
3
4, 5
5mm (0.20 inch) or more 2, 6 5mm (0.20 inch) or more 6
* 1: For wiring duct with 50mm (1.97 inch) or less height.

40mm (1.58 inch) or more for other cases.
* 2: 20mm (0.79 inch) or more when the adjacent module is not removed and the extension cable is
connected.
* 3: 80mm (3.15 inch) or more for the connector type. 140mm (5.51 inch) or more for installing a
tracking cable when using a Redundant CPU. 80mm (3.15 inch) or more for installing the Q8BAT
cable when using the Q8BAT.
* 4: 45mm (1.77 inch) or more when the Q7BAT is mounted.
* 5: 30mm (1.18 inch) or more from the top and bottom of the Q8BAT when the Q8BAT is mounted.
* 6: 5mm (0.20 inch) or more from the right and left of the Q8BAT when the Q8BAT is mounted.
Diagram 10.18 Module mounting position

9
(b) In case of slim type main base unit
EMC AND LOW

Indicates the panel top, wiring duct or any
DIRECTIVES
part position.
VOLTAGE
30mm (1.18 inch) Programmable
5, 6 or more
1, 5
controller
10
Panel
INSTALLATION
Door
LOADING AND
20mm
(0.79 inch)
4 30mm (1.18 inch)
or more
or more
11
3
4, 5
MAINTENANCE AND
17 mm (0.67 inch) or more 2, 6 5mm (0.20 inch) or more 6
INSPECTION
* 1: For wiring duct with 50mm (1.97 inch) or less height.
40mm (1.58 inch) or more for other cases.
* 2: The cable of the power supply module of the slim type main base unit protrudes out of the left end
of the module. Install the module while reserving 17mm (0.67 inch) or more wiring space. 12
If the cable sheath is susceptible to damage caused by a structural object or part on the left side
TROUBLESHOOTING
of the module, take a protective measure with spiral tube or a similar insulator.
* 3: 80mm (3.15 inch) or more for the connector type. 80mm (3.15 inch) or more for installing the
Q8BAT cable when using the Q8BAT.
* 4: 45mm (1.77 inch) or more when the Q7BAT is mounted.
* 5: 30mm (1.18 inch) or more from the top and bottom of the Q8BAT when the Q8BAT is mounted.
* 6: 5mm (0.20 inch) or more from the right and left of the Q8BAT when the Q8BAT is mounted.
Diagram 10.19 Module mounting position
(2) Module mounting orientation

• Install the programmable controller in the orientation in Diagram 10.20 to ensure
APPENDICES
good ventilation for heat release.
INDEX
Diagram 10.20 Orientation in which modules can be mounted
• Do not mount it in either of the orientations shown in Diagram 10.21.
Horizontal installation
Vertical mounting
Diagram 10.21 Orientation in which modules cannot be mounted

10 - 21
(3) Installation surface

Mount the base unit on a flat surface. If the mounting surface is not even, this may
strain the printed circuit boards and cause malfunctions.
(4) Installation of unit in an area where the other devices are installed
Avoid mounting base unit in proximity to vibration sources such as large magnetic
contractors and no-fuse circuit breakers; mount these on a separate panel or at a
distance.
(5) Distances from the other devices

In order to avoid the effects of radiated noise and heat, provide the clearances
indicated below between the programmable controller and devices that generate
noise or heat (contactors and relays).
• Required clearance in front of programmable controller : at least 100 mm
(3.94 inch)*
• Required clearance on the right and left of programmable controller
: at least 50 mm
(1.97 inch)
At least
50mm (1.97 inch)
At least At least
100mm 50mm (1.97 inch)
(3.94 inch)
Contactor, relay, etc.
*: When using a Redundant CPU, keep a distance of 100mm or more between the programmable
controller and the tracking cable.
Diagram 10.22 Distances from the other devices

9
10.3.3 Installation and removal of module
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
This section explains how to install and remove a power supply, CPU, I/O, intelligent
VOLTAGE
function or another module to and from the base unit.
(1) Installation and removal of the module from Q3 B, Q3 SB, Q3 RB, 10

Q3 DB, Q5 B, Q6 B, Q6 RB and Q6 WRB
(a) Installation of module on Q3 B, Q3 SB, Q3 RB, Q3 DB, Q5 B, Q6 B,
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
Q6 RB and Q6 WRB
Base unit
Securely insert the module
fixing projection (*1) into the 11
module fixing hole so that the
latch is not misaligned.
MAINTENANCE AND
Base unit
INSPECTION
module Module
fixing hook mounting lever
( 2)
Using the module fixing hole as Module fixing
a fulcrum, push the module in projection
the direction of arrow to mount
it into the base unit.
Module connector
Module fixing hole
12
Base unit
TROUBLESHOOTING
Module fixing
projection ( 1) Unit/Module
Module
Make sure that the module mounting lever
is inserted in the base unit
securely.
Module protection
Completed
Diagram 10.23 Module mounting procedure
APPENDICES
* 1: If the module has two module fixing projections, insert the two module fixing projections on the
right and left into the module fixing holes so that they are not misaligned.
Module hook
Base unit hook
INDEX
Q6 RP
Center top
Push
Diagram 10.24 Mounting the Q6 RP

* 2: If the module has two module fixing projections on its top, push the center top of the module so
that the two module fixing hooks on the right and left are securely engaged with the base unit
hooks.

10 - 23
POINT
1. When mounting the module, always insert the module fixing projection into
the module fixing hole of the base unit.
At that time, securely insert the module fixing projection so that it does not
come off from the module fixing hole.
If the module is forcibly mounted without the latch being inserted, the module
connector and module will be damaged.
2. When using the programmable controller in a place where there is large
vibration or impact, screw the CPU module to the base unit.
Module fixing screw : M3 X 12 (user-prepared)
3. Do not mount/remove the module onto/from base unit or terminal block more
than 50 times (IEC 61131-2 compliant), after the first use of the product.
Failure to do so may cause the module to malfunction due to poor contact of
connector.
(b) Removal from Q3 B, Q3 SB, Q3 RB, Q3 DB, Q5 B, Q6 B, Q6 RB,

and Q6 WRB
Support the module with both
hands and securely press the
module fixing hook(*1) with your
finger.
Push
Lifting
Pull the module based on the

supporting point of module bottom Module fixing
while pressing the module fixing hook 1
hook (*1).
Module
connector
Unit/Module
While lifting the module, take off
the module fixing projection (*2) Base unit
from the module fixing hole.
Module fixing hole
Completed
Diagram 10.25 Module removal procedure

* 1: If the module has two module fixing hooks on its top, push the two modules fixing projections on
the right and left of the module top simultaneously with your fingers until they stop.

9
Push simultaneously
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
10
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
Module fixing projection
11
Diagram 10.26 Q6 RP removal procedure
MAINTENANCE AND
* 2: If the module has two fixing projections, remove the two module fixing projections on the right and
left of the module bottom from the module fixing holes.
INSPECTION
POINT
When the module fixing screw is used, always remove the module by removing
the module fixing screw and then taking the module fixing projection off the 12
module fixing hole of the base unit.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Attempting to remove the module by force may damage the module fixing
projection.
APPENDICES
INDEX

10 - 25
(2) Installation and removal of the module from QA1S6 B
(a) Installation of module on QA1S6 B
Insert the module fixing Base unit

projections into the module Unit/Module
fixing hole in the base unit.
Module
connector
Using the module fixing hole as Module fixing

a support, install the module cutout
onto the base unit by pushing it
in the direction of arrow.
module fixing
projection
Make sure that the

module is firmly inserted
in the base unit. Then,
secure it with the module
mounting screw.
Completed
Unit installation screw
Base unit Unit/Module
Diagram 10.27 Module mounting procedure
POINT
Make sure to install the module, with the module fixing projection inserted into the
module fixing hole, using the module fixing screws.
If the module is installed forcedly without the module fixing projections inserted,
the module connector and the module may be damaged.

9
(b) Removal from QA1S6 B
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
Remove the module
VOLTAGE
mounting screw, and
using the bottom of the Base unit
module as a support,
pull the top of the
module toward you. 10
Module connector
Unit/Module
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
Lift the module upwards Module fixing cutout
and remove the module
fixing projection from the
module fixing hole.
11
MAINTENANCE AND
Completed
INSPECTION
12
TROUBLESHOOTING
Diagram 10.28 Module removal procedure
APPENDICES
POINT
To remove the module, make sure to remove the module fixing screws, and then
disengage the module fixing projection from the module fixing hole.
Attempting to remove the module by force may damage the module fixing
projection.
INDEX

10 - 27
(3) Installation and Removal of Modules
(a) Installation of module on QA6 B

9
POINT
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
For use in an environment with particularly
large vibrations and/or shocks, fix the module
to the base with screws. The applicable screw
size is M4(0.16) 0.7(0.03) 12mm (0.47
10
in). Refer to the figure on the right.
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
11
MAINTENANCE AND
INSPECTION
12
TROUBLESHOOTING
Insert the module fixing projection into the fixing hole in the base unit to
mount the module.
CAUTION
Incorrect installation could result in malfunction, failure, or a drop of the
module.
For use in an environment of frequent vibrations, secure the module with
screws.
Tighten the screws within the specified torque range.
If the screw is too loose, it may cause a drop of the module, a short cir-
APPENDICES
cuit or malfunctions.
If too tight, it may cause damage to the screws and/or module, resulting
in an accidental drop of the module, short circuit or malfunctions.
INDEX

10 - 29
(b) Removal from QA6 B
POINT
Always disengage the hook from the module fixing hole (A) and then remove the
module fixing projection from the module fixing hole (B). An attempt to remove the
module forcibly may damage the hook or module fixing projection.

9
10.4 How to Set Stage Numbers for the Extension Base Unit
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
When using two or more extension base units, their stage numbers must be set with their
VOLTAGE
stage number setting connectors.*1
(The number of extension stages is set to 1 by factory default.)
* 1: Since the Q6 WRB is fixed to the first extension stage, extension stage No. setting is not
10
required.
Make this setting in the following procedure.
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
1) The stage number setting connector of the extension base unit is located
under the IN side base cover. (Setting of the extension number setting connec-
tor ( Section 6.1.3))
First, loosen the upper and lower screws in the IN side base cover and remove 11
the base cover from the extension base unit.
MAINTENANCE AND
Fixing screw
INSPECTION
Extension base unit
12
TROUBLESHOOTING
Flat blade screwdriver
Base cover
Base cover
Diagram 10.29 Removing a base cover
2) Insert the connector pin in the required stage number location of the connector
(PIN1) existing between the IN and OUT sides of the extension cable
connector.
APPENDICES
Connector pin
INDEX
Diagram 10.30 Setting the number of extension stages
10.4 How to Set Stage Numbers for the Extension Base Unit 10 - 31
3) Install the base cover to the extension base unit and tighten the base cover
screw.
(Tightening torque: 0.36 to 0.48N•m)
Fixing screw
Base cover
Extension base unit

Base cover
Diagram 10.31 Base cover removal procedure
10 - 32 10.4 How to Set Stage Numbers for the Extension Base Unit
9
10.5 Connection and Disconnection of Extension Cable
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
(1) Instructions for handling an extension cable
VOLTAGE
• Do not stamp an extension cable.
• Be sure to connect the extension cable to the base unit with the base cover
installed to the base unit. 10
(After you have set the extension number to the extension base unit, reinstall and
screw the base cover.)
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
• When laying an extension cable, secure 55mm or more as the minimum cable
bend radius.
If it is less than 55mm (2.17 inch), a malfunction may occur due to characteristic
deterioration, cable disconnection or the like. 11
• When connecting or disconnecting an extension cable, do not hold the ferrite
cores mounted at both ends of the cable.
MAINTENANCE AND
Hold the connector part of the cable for connection or disconnection.
INSPECTION
Main base unit
12
TROUBLESHOOTING
Connector
Ferrite core
Extension cable
Diagram 10.32 Connection and Disconnection of Extension Cable
Holding the ferrite core may cause the cable disconnection in the connector.
APPENDICES
Also, if the ferrite core position is shifted, the characteristic will change. When
handling the cable, take care not to shift the ferrite core position.
INDEX
10.5 Connection and Disconnection of Extension Cable 10 - 33

(2) Connection of extension cable
POINT
When connecting an extension base unit to the main base unit with an extension
cable, always plug the OUT side connector of the main base unit and the IN side
connector of the extension base unit with an extension cable. The system will not
operate properly if the extension cable is connected in the form of IN to IN, OUT to
OUT or IN to OUT.
When connecting two or more extension base units, plug the OUT side connector
of the first extension base unit and the IN side connector of the second extension
base unit with an extension cable.
• To connect an extension cable to the main base unit, remove the portion under
the OUT characters on the base cover with a tool such as a flat blade screwdriver
(5.5 75, 6 100).
This also applies to a case where an extension cable is connected to the OUT
side connector of the extension base unit.
When connecting an extension cable to the Q00JCPU, remove the base cover
manually.
To remove the base cover, insert the tip of a screwdriver into a clearance below
the base cover and pry it up.
Because a connector is equipped inside the base cover and it may be damaged if
the screwdriver is inserted deeply, care must be taken.
Main base unit Extension base unit
Cut at 3 places OUT side of Cut at 3 places
Base cover of thin wall base cover of thin wall
Flat blade screwdriver Flat blade screwdriver
Diagram 10.33 Connection of extension cable
10 - 34 10.5 Connection and Disconnection of Extension Cable

9
• To connect the extension cable to the next extension base unit, remove the
sticker put under the IN characters on the base cover.
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
Extension base unit
IN side of
base cover
10
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
Seal
11
MAINTENANCE AND
• When plugging the extension cable to any base unit, hold the connector part of
INSPECTION
the extension cable.
Main base unit 12
TROUBLESHOOTING
Connector
Extension cable
APPENDICES
• After fitting the extension cable, always tighten the extension cable connector
fixing screws.
(Tightening torque: 0.20N•m)
Main base unit
INDEX
Fixing screw
(3) Disconnection of extension cable

When disconnectiong the extension cable, hold and pull the connector part of the
extension cable after making sure that the fixing screws have been removed
completely.
10.5 Connection and Disconnection of Extension Cable 10 - 35

10.6 Wiring
10.6.1 The precautions on the wiring
Completely turn off the externally supplied power used in the system
when installing or placing wiring. Not completely turning off all power
DANGER
could result in electric shock or damage to the product.
When turning on the power supply or operating the module after installa-
tion or wiring work, be sure that the module's terminal covers are cor-
rectly attached. Not attaching the terminal cover could result in electric
shock.
Be sure to ground the FG terminals and LG terminals to the protective

ground conductor. Not doing so could result in electric shock or errone-
CAUTION
ous operation.
When wiring in the programmable controller, be sure that it is done cor-
rectly by checking the product's rated voltage and the terminal layout.
Connecting a power supply that is different from the rating or incorrectly
wiring the product could result in fire or damage.
External connections shall be crimped or pressure welded with the spec-
ified tools, or correctly soldered.
Imperfect connections could result in short circuit, fires, or erroneous
operation.
Tighten the terminal screws with the specified torque.
If the terminal screws are loose, it could result in short circuits, fire, or
erroneous operation.
Tightening the terminal screws too far may cause damages to the screws
and/or the module, resulting in fallout, short circuits, or malfunction.
Be sure there are no foreign substances such as sawdust or wiring debris
inside the module.
Such debris could cause fires, damage, or erroneous operation.
The module has an ingress prevention label on its top to prevent foreign
matter, such as wire offcuts, from entering the module during wiring.
Do not peel this label during wiring.
Before starting system operation, be sure to peel this label because of
heat dissipation.
Install our programmable controller in a control panel for use.
Wire the main power supply to the power supply module installed in a
control panel through a distribution terminal block.
Furthermore, the wiring and replacement of a power supply module have
to be performed by a maintenance worker who acquainted with shock
protection.
(For the wiring methods, refer to Section 10.6.2.)
10 - 36 10.6 Wiring
9
This section describes the precautions for wiring power supply lines.
EMC AND LOW

(1) Wiring power supply lines
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
• Wire the power supply lines for programmable controller, I/O devices, and motor
equipment separately as shown in Diagram 10.37.
• If there is much noise, such as lightning surge, connect an isolation transformer.
For details on the isolation transformer, refer to the following.
10
Section 9.1.6(3) Isolation transformer
• Taking rated current or inrush current into consideration when wiring the power
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
supply, be sure to connect a breaker or an external fuse that have proper blown
and detection.
When using a single programmable controller, a 10A breaker or an external fuse
are recommended for wiring protection.
11
Programmable Isolation
MAINTENANCE AND
Main controller power transformer
power supply supply
100VAC Programmable
INSPECTION
200VAC controller
Relay
terminal block T1
I/O power supply
I/O equipment
12
Motor power supply
TROUBLESHOOTING
Motor equipment
Inside a control panel
Diagram 10.37 Power supply wiring diagram
• Do not connect the 24VDC outputs of two or more power supply modules in
parallel to supply power to one I/O module. Parallel connection will damage the
power supply modules.
Power supply module I/O module Power supply module I/O module
APPENDICES
DC24V
DC24V DC24V External power supply
Diagram 10.38 Cautions when connecting a power supply module INDEX
• 100VAC, 200VAC and 24VDC wires should be twisted as dense as possible.

Connect the modules with the shortest distance.
Also, to reduce the voltage drop to the minimum, use the thickest wires possible
(maximum 2mm2).
• Do not bundle the 100VAC and 24VDC wires with, or run them close to, the main
circuit (high voltage, large current) and I/O signal lines (including common line).
Reserve a distance of at least 100 mm from adjacent wires.
10.6 Wiring
10 - 37
• Momentary power failure may be detected or the CPU module may be reset due
to serge caused by lightening.
As measures against serge caused by lightening, connect a surge absorber for
lightening as shown in Diagram 10.39.
Using the surge absorber for lightening can reduce the influence of lightening.
Programmable
controller
AC
I/O devices
E1 E1 E2
E1 Surge absorber for lightening
Diagram 10.39 Connecting a lightning surge absorber
POINT
1. Separate the ground of the surge absorber for lightening (E1) from that of the
programmable controller (E2).
2. Select a surge absorber for lightening whose power supply voltage does no
exceed the maximum allowable circuit voltage even at the time of maximum
power supply voltage elevation.
10 - 38 10.6 Wiring
9
(2) Wiring of I/O equipment
EMC AND LOW

• Insulation-sleeved crimping terminals cannot be used with the terminal block.
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
It is recommended to cover the wire connections of the crimping terminals with
mark or insulation tubes.
• The wires used for connection to the terminal block should be 0.3 to 0.75mm2 in 10
core and 2.8mm (0.11 inch) max. in outside diameter.
• Run the input and output lines away from each other.
• When the wiring cannot be run away from the main circuit and power lines, use a
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
batch-shielded cable and ground it on the programmable controller side.
In some cases, ground it in the opposite side.
Programmable
controller
11
Shield cable
MAINTENANCE AND
Input
INSPECTION
RA
Output Shield jacket
DC
Diagram 10.40 Wiring of I/O equipment
12
• Where wiring runs through piping, ground the piping without fail.
TROUBLESHOOTING
• Run the 24VDC input line away from the 100VAC and 200VAC lines.
• Wiring of 200m (686.67 ft.) or longer distance will give rise to leakage currents
due to the line capacity, resulting in a fault.
• To prevent an electric shock or operating module malfunction, provide the
external power supply of the module to be changed online with means that can
turn the power supply off individually, e.g. a switch. ( Section 12.4)
Refer to Section 12.5 for details.
• As a countermeasure against the power surge due to lightning, separate the AC
APPENDICES
wiring and DC wiring and connect a surge absorber for lightning as shown in (1)
of item (10.6.1).
Failure to do so increases the risk of I/O device failure due to lightning.
INDEX
10.6 Wiring
10 - 39
(3) Grounding
For grounding, perform the following:
• Use a dedicated grounding wire as far as possible. (Grounding resistance of
100 or less.)
• When a dedicated grounding cannot be performed, use (2) Common Grounding
shown below.
Programmable Another Programmable Another Programmable Another

controller equipment controller equipment controller equipment
Grounding Grounding
(1) Independent grounding Best (2) Common grounding Good (3) Joint grounding Not allowed
Diagram 10.41 Grounding procedures
• For grounding a cable, use the cable of 2 mm2 or more.

Position the ground-contact point as closely to the sequencer as possible, and
reduce the length of the grounding cable as much as possible.
10 - 40 10.6 Wiring
9
10.6.2 Connecting to the power supply module
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
The following diagram shows the wiring example of power lines, grounding lines, etc. to
VOLTAGE
the main and extension base units.
(1) Singular power supply system 10

Main base unit
100/110VAC
(Q38B)
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
AC Q61P-A1 CPU module
Fuse
AC
ERR 1
11
DC FG
24VDC
LG
MAINTENANCE AND
INPUT
100-120VAC
INSPECTION
Connect to 24VDC
terminals of I/O module
that requires 24VDC
internally. Extension base unit
(Q68B)
Q61P-A1 I/O module
12
Extension cable
TROUBLESHOOTING
ERR 1
FG
100VAC LG
INPUT
100-120VAC
Ground wire
Grounding
APPENDICES
* 1: The operation of the ERR terminal is as fllows.
<When the power supply module is mounted on the main base unit>
The terminal turns OFF (opens) when the AC power is not input, a CPU module stop error
(including a reset) occurs, or the fuse of the power supply module is blown.
<When the power supply module is mounted on the extension base unit>
The terminal is always OFF (open).
Diagram 10.42 Single power supply system wiring example
INDEX
10.6 Wiring
10 - 41
POINT
1. Use the thickest possible (max. 2 mm2 (14 AWG)) wires for the 100/200VAC
and 24VDC power cables. Be sure to twist these wires starting at the connec-
tion terminals. For wiring a terminal block, be sure to use a solderless termi-
nal. To prevent short-circuit due to loosening screws, use the solderless
terminals with insulation sleeves of 0.8 mm (0.03 inch) or less.
Also, only two solderless terminals can be connected per terminal block.
Solderless terminals Terminal block
with insulation sleeves
2. When LG terminals and FG terminals are connected, be sure to ground the

wires.
Otherwise, the programmable controller may be susceptible to noise.
Since the LG terminal has a half of the input voltage, touching this terminal
may result in an electric shock.
3. No system error can be detected by the ERR terminal of an extension base
unit. (The ERR terminal is always set off.)
10 - 42 10.6 Wiring
9
(2) Redundant power supply system
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
System A System B 100V/200VAC
AC
Redundant power main base unit
(Q38RB) 10
Q64RP Q64RP CPU module
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
2, 3 2, 3
ERR ERR
100V/200VAC FG FG
LG LG
AC
11
INPUT INPUT
100/ 100/
200VAC 200VAC
MAINTENANCE AND
Redundant power extension base unit
INSPECTION
(Q68RB)
Q64RP Q64RP I/O module
Extension cable
2, 3 2, 3
12
ERR ERR
TROUBLESHOOTING
FG FG
LG LG
INPUT INPUT
100/ 100/
Ground wire 200VAC 200VAC
Grounding
100V/200VAC
AC
APPENDICES
100V/200VAC
AC
* 2: The operation of the ERR terminal is as fllows.

<When the redundant power supply module is mounted on the redundant power main base unit>
The terminal turns OFF (opens) when the AC power is not input, a CPU module stop error
(including a reset) occurs, the redundant power supply module fails, or the fuse of the redundant
power supply module is blown.
<When the redundant power supply module is mounted on the redundant power extension base
INDEX
unit>
The terminal turns OFF (opens) when the redundant power supply module fails.
* 3 When input power is supplied to the redundant power supply module mounted on the redundant
power main base unit and the redundant power supply module mounted on the redundant power
extension base unit simultaneously, the ON (short) timing of the ERR terminal on the redundant
power main base unit is later than that of the ERR terminal on the redundant power extension
base unit by the initial processing time of the CPU module.
Diagram 10.43 Redundant power supply system wiring example
10.6 Wiring
10 - 43
POINT
1. Use the thickest possible (max. 2 mm2 (14 AWG)) wires for the 100/200VAC
and 24VDC power cables. Be sure to twist these wires starting at the
connection terminals. For wiring a terminal block, be sure to use a solderless
terminal. To prevent short-circuit due to loosening screws, use the solderless
terminals with insulation sleeves of 0.8 mm (0.03 inch) or less.
Also, only two solderless terminals can be connected per terminal block.
Solderless terminals Terminal block
with insulation sleeves
2. Supply power to two redundant power supply modules individually (redundant

power supply system).
3. When two redundant power supply modules (Q64RP) are placed together
and operated as a redundant power supply system, it is recommended to use
one of them as an AC power input and connect the other to an uninterruptible
power supply to the other.
4. When the LG terminals and FG terminals are connected, be sure to ground
the wires.
Otherwise, the programmable controller may be susceptible to noise.
Since the LG terminal has a half of the input voltage, touching this termial may
result in an electric shock.
10 - 44 10.6 Wiring
11 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
9
CHAPTER11 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
Do not touch the terminals while power is on.
DANGER
Doing so could cause shock. 10
Correctly connect the battery. Also, do not charge, disassemble,
heat, place in fire, short circuit, or solder the battery.
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
Mishandling of a battery can cause overheating or cracks which
could result in injury and fires.
Switch off all phases of the externally supplied power used in the
system when cleaning the module or retightening the terminal or 11
module mounting screws.
Conducting these operations when the power is on could result in
MAINTENANCE AND
electric shock.
INSPECTION
Loose terminal screws may cause short circuits or malfunctions.
Failure to mount the module properly will result in short circuit,
malfunction or in the module falling.
12
TROUBLESHOOTING
APPENDICES
INDEX
11 - 1
In order to ensure safe operation, read the manual carefully to

acquaint yourself with procedures for program change, forced
CAUTION
outputs, RUN, STOP, and PAUSE operations, etc., while operation
is in progress.
Operation mistakes could cause damage to the equipment and
other problems.
Never try to disassemble of modify module. It may cause product
failure, malfunction, fire or cause injury.
Use any radio communication device such as a cellular phone or a
PHS phone more than 25cm (9.85 inch) away in all directions of
the programmable controller.
Failure to do so may cause a malfunction.
Completely turn off the externally supplied power used in the
system before mounting or removing the module. Not doing so
could result in damage to the product.
Note that the module can be changed online (while power is on) in
the system that uses the CPU module compatible with online
module change or on the MELSECNET/H remote I/O station. Note
that there are restrictions on the modules that can be changed
online (while power is on) and each module has a predetermined
changing procedure.
Note that online (while power is on) replaceable modules are
restricted, and the replacement procedure is determined for each
module
( Section 12.4.1).
Do not mount/remove the module onto/from base unit or terminal
block more than 50 times (IEC 61131-2 compliant), after the first
use of the product.
Failure to do so may cause the module to malfunction due to poor
contact of connector.
Before touching the module, always touch grounded metal, etc. to
discharge static electricity from human body.
Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction.
Do not drop or impact the battery installed to the module.
Doing so may damage the battery, causing battery liquid to leak in
the battery.
Do not use the dropped or impacted battery, but dispose of it.
In order that you can use the programmable controller in normal and optimal condition
at all times, this section describes those items that must be maintained or inspected
daily or at regular intervals.
11 - 2
9
11.1 Daily Inspection
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
The items that must be inspected daily are listed in Table11.1.
VOLTAGE
Daily inspection
Table11.1 Daily inspection
Item Inspection Item

Inspection Judgment Criteria Remedy 10
Check that fixing screws are
The screws and cover must
1 Installation of base unit not loose and the cover is Retighten the screws.
be installed securely
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
not dislocated.
Check that the module is not The module fixing hook must
Securely engaged the module
2 Installation of I/O module dislocated and the unit fixing be engaged and installed
fixing hook.
hook is engaged securely. securely.
Check for loose terminal
Screws should not be loose.
Retighten the terminal 11
screws. screws.
MAINTENANCE AND
The proper clearance should
Check for distance between
3 Connecting conditions be provided between Correct.
solderless terminals.
INSPECTION
Solderless terminals.
Check that the cable con- Connections should no be Retighten the connector fixing
nector is not loose. loose. screws.
Power supply
The LED must be ON 12
(green).
module Check that the LED is ON.
TROUBLESHOOTING
(Abnormal if the LED is OFF
"POWER" LED*1
or ON (red)).
The LED must be ON
CPU module (Green).
Check that the LED is ON.
"MODE" LED*2 (Abnormal if the LED is OFF
or flashing.)
CPU module Check that the LED is ON in The LED must be ON.
"RUN" LED RUN status. (Abnormal if the LED is OFF.)
The LED must be OFF.
CPU module
APPENDICES
Check that the LED is OFF. (Abnormal if the LED is ON or
"ERR." LED
Module indication LED
flickering.)
CPU module The LED must be OFF.
Check that the LED is OFF.
"BAT." LED*3 (Abnormal if the LED is ON.)
4 The LED must be ON when Section 12.2.
the input power is turned ON.
The LED must be OFF when
input module Check that the LED turns the input power is turned
Input LED ON and OFF. OFF.
INDEX
(Abnormal if the LED does

not turn ON or turn OFF as
indicated above.)
The LED turns ON when the
output power is turned ON.
The LED must be OFF when
output module Check that the LED turns the output power is turned
Output LED ON and OFF. OFF.
(Abnormal if the LED does
not turn ON or turn OFF as
indicated above.)
*1: For the Q00JCPU, check the "POWER" LED on the CPU module side.
*2: The Basic model QCPU does not have the "MODE" LED.
*3: The Basic model QCPU does not have the "BAT." LED.
11.1 Daily Inspection 11 - 3

11.2 Periodic Inspection
The items that must be inspected one or two times every 6 months to 1 year are listed
below.
When the equipment is moved or modified, or layout of the wiring is changed, also perform
this inspection.
Periodic Inspection
Table11.2 Periodic Inspection
Item Inspection Item Inspection Judgment Criteria Remedy

Ambient temperature 0 to 55
Ambient environment
Ambient humidity 5 to 95 %RH *1 When the sequencer is used

Measure with a thermometer in the board, the ambient
1 and a hygrometer. temperature in the board
Corrosive gas must not be
Atmosphere Measure corrosive gas. becomes the ambient
present.
temperature.
Measure a voltage across 85 to 132VAC

2 Power voltage the terminals of 100/200VAC 170 to 264VAC Change the power supply.
and 24VDC. 15.6 to 31.2VDC
Retighten the screws.
Move the module to check The module must be If the CPU, I/O, or power
Installation
Looseness, rattling
for looseness and rattling. installed soldly. supply module is loose, fix it
3
with screws.
Adhesion of dirt and Dirt and foreign matter must
Check visually. Remove and clean.
foreign matter not be present.
Looseness of Try to further tighten screws Retighten the terminal
Screws must not be loose.
terminal screws with a screwdriver. screws.
Connection
Proximity of Solderless terminals must

4 solderless terminals Check visually. be positioned at proper Correct.
to each other intervals.
Looseness of Connectors must not be Retighten the connector
Check visually.
connectors loose. fixing screws.
Check the "BAT." LED at the Replace the battery with
front side of the CPU The LED must be OFF. new one when the "BAT."
module. LED is ON.
Replace the battery with a
Check the length of term Must not be used more than
5 Battery new one if it has been used
after purchasing the battery. 5 years.
more than 5 years.
Check that SM51 or SM52 is Replace the battery with a
turned OFF using GX Must be turned OFF. new one when SM51 or
Developer in monitor mode. SM52 is ON.
The Error log must not be
6 PLC diagnostics Check the Error log. Section 12.3.3
updated.
Specify factors that increase
the scan time.
Maximum scan time must be
Check the values of SD526 (Check the operation status
within the allowable range
7 Maximum scan time and SD527 using GX of the trigger signal that
given in the specification of
Developer in monitor mode. passes through a loop if loop
the system.
positions exist in the
sequence program.)
*1: When AnS/A Series Module is included in the system, the judgement criteria will be from 10 to 90 % RH.
11 - 4 11.2 Periodic Inspection

9
11.3 Battery Life and Replacement Procedure
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
The batteries installed in the CPU module and SRAM card are used for data retention of
VOLTAGE
the program memory, standard RAM, and latch device during the power failure. Special
relays SM51 and SM52 turn on due to the decrease of battery voltage. Even if the special
relays turn on, the program and retained data are not erased immediately. 10
After relay SM51 turns on, replace the battery quickly within the data retention time for
power failure (3 minutes).
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
POINT
SM51 turns on when the battery voltage falls below the specified value, and
remains ON even after the voltage is recovered to the normal value. 11
SM52 turns on when the battery voltage falls below the specified value, and turns
MAINTENANCE AND
OFF when the voltage is recovered to the normal value.
After SM51 and/or SM52 turns on, replace the battery quickly.
INSPECTION
SM51 and SM52 turn on when the battery voltage of the CPU module or SRAM card is
lowered.
To identify the specific battery of the memory of which voltage is lowered, check the 12
contents of the special resisters SD51 and SD52.
TROUBLESHOOTING
b15 to b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
SD51, SD52 Fixed at 0
Battery error for CPU module When the battery
Battery alarm for SRAM card voltage is low, the
Battery error for SRAM card value is "1."
Diagram 11.1 Bit pattern

For details of SD51 and SD52, refer to Section 12.8.
POINT
APPENDICES
The cases for memory retention by the CPU module battery and the SRAM card
battery are described below.
The important points are:
1) The CPU module battery cannot retain the SRAM card memory.
2) The SRAM card battery cannot retain the CPU module memory.
Table11.3 Cases for memory retention by the CPU module battery and the SRAM card battery. INDEX
Power supply Battery of CPU SRAM card Memory of CPU Memory of SRAM
Module Module battery Module Card
Installed
Connected
Not installed
ON
Installed
Not connected
Not installed
Installed
Connected
Not installed
OFF
Installed
Not connected
Not installed
: Retained, : Not retained
11.3 Battery Life and Replacement Procedure 11 - 5

11.3.1 Display of the amount of battery consumption and reduction

measures of battery consumption
High
Basic Performance (1) Amount of battery consumptionNote1
The amount of battery consumption represents consumption of the CPU module
Note11.1 Note11.1
battery.*1
Redundant Process The more the amount of battery consumption value increases, the more the battery
consumption per unit time increases.
Note11.1 Note11.1 The amount of battery consumption depends on the causes of the following (a) and
(b).
Table11.4 shows the relationship between the combination of causes (a) and (b) and
the amount of battery consumption.
Table11.4 Amount of battery consumption and causes for determining the consumption
Causes determining the amount of battery consumption

Amount of
(b) File storing status in standard RAM
Number (a) Battery battery
Size of file register file in standard RAM
life-prolonging function consumption
(SR) <Unit: word>
1 Set ---- 1
2 No file registers or 0k < SR 128k 2
3 Not set 128k < SR 384k 3
4 384k < SR 4
High
Basic Performance (2) Reduction measures of battery consumption
The following explains measures for reducing the battery consumption to reduce the
Note11.1 Note11.1 amount of battery consumption.
Redundant Process • When storing a file register in standard RAM, minimize the file register file.
• By using the latch data backup function to standard ROM, the battery life-
Note11.1 Note11.1
prolonging function can be valid.*2
If not powering on the programmable controller for a long time due to such as
long term disuse or shipment, back up the data to the standard ROM.
* 1: For the Q02UCPU, Q03UDCPU, Q04UDHCPU, and Q06UDHCPU, the CPU modules whose first
5 digits of serial number is "10012" or later.
Referring to SD118, storing the amount of battery consumption, permits checking the current
level.
* 2: Except when the battery life-prolonging function has already been set to valid.
Note1
High
Basic Performance
Note11.1 Note11.1 Except the Universal model QCPU, the amount of battery consumption is not supported
Redundant Process (supported only with the Universal model QCPU).
Note11.1 Note11.1
11 - 6 11.3 Battery Life and Replacement Procedure

11.3.1 Display of the amount of battery consumption and reduction measures of battery consumption
9
11.3.2 Battery lives of CPU modules
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
(1) Battery (Q6BAT) lives of Basic model QCPUs
VOLTAGE
Table11.5 Battery life
Battery life
After SM52 turns
10
CPU module Power-on time Actual service
Guaranteed value ON.(Power failure
model value (Reference
ratio*1 *2 compensation time
(70 )
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
value)*3 (40 )
after alarm*4)
26,000hr 43,800hr 710hr
0%
2.96 years 5.00 years 30 days
30%
37,142hr 43,800hr 710hr
11
43,800hr 43,800hr 710hr
MAINTENANCE AND
Q00JCPU 50%
INSPECTION
43,800hr 43,800hr 710hr
70%
43,800hr 43,800hr 710hr
100%
5.00 years
26,000hr
5.00 years
43,800hr
30 days
710hr
12
0%
TROUBLESHOOTING
37,142hr 43,800hr 710hr
30%
43,800hr 43,800hr 710hr
Q00CPU 50%
43,800hr 43,800hr 710hr
70%
43,800hr 43,800hr 710hr
100%
APPENDICES
5,600hr 25,175hr 420hr
0%
8,000hr 35,964hr 420hr
30%
11,200hr 43,800hr 420hr
Q01CPU 50%
18,666hr 43,800hr 420hr
70%
43,800hr 43,800hr 420hr
INDEX
100%
* 1: The power-on time ratio indicates the ratio of programmable controller power-on time to one day
(24 hours).
(When the total power-on time is 12 hours and the total power-off time is 12 hours, the power-on
time ratio is 50%.)
* 2: The guaranteed battery service life; equivalent to the total power failure time that is calculated
based on the characteristics value of the memory (SRAM) supplied by the manufacturer and
under the storage ambient temperature range of -25 to 75 (operating ambient temperature of 0
to 55 ).
* 3: The actual battery service life; equivalent to the total power failure time that is calculated based on
the measured value and under the storage ambient temperature of 40 . This value is intended
for reference only, as it varies with characteristics of the memory.
* 4: In the following status, the backup time after power OFF is 3 minutes.
•The battery connector is disconnected.
•The lead wire of the battery is broken.

11 - 7
POINT
1. Do not use the battery exceeding its guaranteed life.
2. When the battery hours (total power failure time) may exceed its guaranteed
value, take the following measure.
• Perform ROM operation to protect a program even if the battery dies at
the programmable controller power-OFF.
• Back up programs and data after SM52 turns on (within the backup time
after alarm occurrence).
3. When the battery (Q6BAT) is not connected to the CPU module, its service
life is five years.
4. When the battery-low special relay SM52 turns on, immediately change the
battery.
Even if the alarm has not yet occurred, it is recommended to replace the
battery periodically according to the operating condition.
5. The battery (Q7BAT and Q8BAT) is not available for the Basic model QCPU.

9
(2) Battery (Q6BAT, Q7BAT and Q8BAT) lives of High Performance model
QCPU, Process CPU, and Redundant CPU
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
Battery life*5
Q6BAT Q7BAT
After SM52 After SM52
10
Power-on Actual Actual
CPU module turns ON. turns ON.
time Guaranteed service value Guaranteed service value
model (Power failure (Power failure
ratio*1 value*2 (Reference value*2 (Reference
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
compensation compensation
(70 ) value)*3 time after (70 ) value)*3 time after
(40 ) *4 (40 )
alarm ) alarm*4)
30,000 hr 43,800hr 120 hr 43,800 hr 43,800hr 240 hr
0%
3.42 years 5.00 years 5 days 5.00 years 5.00 years 10 days 11
42,857 hr 43,800hr 120 hr 43,800 hr 43,800hr 240 hr
30%
MAINTENANCE AND
4.89 years 5.00 years 5 days 5.00 years 5.00 years 10 days
43,800 hr 43,800hr 120 hr 43,800 hr 43,800hr 240 hr
Q02CPU 50%
INSPECTION
43,800 hr 43,800hr 120 hr 43,800 hr 43,800hr 240 hr
70%
43,800 hr 43,800hr 120 hr 43,800 hr 43,800hr 240 hr
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years 5 days 5.00 years 5.00 years 10 days 12
2,341 hr 18,364hr 120 hr 5,000 hr 43,800hr 240 hr
TROUBLESHOOTING
0%
3,344 hr 26,234hr 120 hr 7,142 hr 43,800hr 240 hr
30%
Q02HCPU 4,682 hr 36,728hr 120 hr 10,000 hr 43,800hr 240 hr
50%
Q06HCPU 0.53 years 4.19 years 5 days 1.14 years 5.00 years 10 days
7,803 hr 43,800hr 120 hr 16,666 hr 43,800hr 240 hr
70%
43,800 hr 43,800hr 120 hr 43,800 hr 43,800hr 240 hr
100%
APPENDICES
1,897hr 14,229hr 96hr 4,051hr 38,727hr 192hr
0%
2,710hr 20,327hr 96hr 5,787hr 43,800hr 192hr
30%
Q02PHCPU 3,794hr 28,458hr 96hr 8,102hr 43,800hr 192hr
50%
Q06PHCPU 0.43 years 3.25 years 4 days 0.92 years 5.00 years 8 days
6,323hr 43,800hr 96hr 13,503hr 43,800hr 192hr
70%
43,800hr 43,800hr 96hr 43,800hr 43,800hr 192hr
100%
INDEX
1,260 hr 7,755hr 48 hr 2,900 hr 21,107hr 96 hr

0%
30%
Q12PHCPU 2,520 hr 15,510hr 48 hr 5,800 hr 42,214hr 96 hr
50%
Q25PHCPU 0.28 years 1.77 years 2 days 0.66 years 4.81 years 4 days
Q12PRHCPU 4,200 hr 25,850hr 48 hr 9,666 hr 43,800hr 96 hr
70%
Q25PRHCPU 0.47 years 2.95 years 2 days 1.10 years 5.00 years 4 days
43,800 hr 43,800hr 48 hr 43,800 hr 43,800hr 96 hr
100%

11 - 9
Battery life*5
Q8BAT
CPU module After SM52 turns ON.
Power-on time ratio*1 Actual service value
model Guaranteed value*2 (Power failure
(Reference value)*3
(70 ) compensation time
(40 )
after alarm*4)
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 240 hr
0%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 240 hr
30%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 240 hr
Q02CPU 50%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 240 hr
70%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 240 hr
100%
20,498 hr 43,800 hr 240 hr
0%
29,959 hr 43,800 hr 240 hr
30%
Q02HCPU 41,785 hr 43,800 hr 240 hr
50%
Q06HCPU 4.77 years 5.00 years 10 days
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 240 hr
70%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 240 hr
100%
16,609hr 43,800hr 192hr
0%
23,727hr 43,800hr 192hr
30%
Q02PHCPU 33,218hr 43,800hr 192hr
50%
Q06PHCPU 3.79 years 5.00 years 8 days
43,800hr 43,800hr 192hr
70%
43,800hr 43,800hr 192hr
100%
11,038 hr 29,609 hr 96 hr
0%
Q12HCPU 16,200 hr 42,311 hr 96 hr
30%
Q25HCPU 1.80 years 4.83 years 4 days
Q12PHCPU 22,075 hr 43,800 hr 96 hr
50%
Q25PHCPU 2.52 years 5.00 years 4 days
Q12PRHCPU 37,055 hr 43,800 hr 96 hr
70%
Q25PRHCPU 4.23 years 5.00 years 4 days
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 96 hr
100%

9
(24 hours).
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
time ratio is 50%.)
VOLTAGE
to 55 ).
10
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
* 5: For the High Performance model QCPU, these values are applicable when the first 5 digits of the
serial number of the CPU module is "05011" or higher.
For the battery life of the CPU module with a serial number of the first 5 digits "05010" or less,
refer to Appendix 2.3. 11
MAINTENANCE AND
POINT
INSPECTION
value, take the following measure. 12
TROUBLESHOOTING
3. When the battery (Q6BAT, Q7BAT and Q8BAT) is not connected to the CPU
module, its service life is five years.
battery.
APPENDICES
INDEX

11 - 11
(3) Battery (Q6BAT, Q7BAT and Q8BAT) lives of the Universal model QCPU
Battery life
Q6BAT
Amount of
CPU module Power-on After SM52 turns ON.
battery Actual service value
model time ratio*2 Guaranteed value *3 (Power failure
consumption*1 (Reference Value)*4
(40 )
after alarm*5)
30,100hr 43,800hr 600 hr
0%
3.44years 5.00years 25 days
43,000hr 43,800hr 600 hr
30%
43,800hr 43,800hr 600 hr
1 50%
43,800hr 43,800hr 600 hr
70%
43,800hr 43,800hr 600 hr
Q02UCPU 100%
Q03UDCPU
25,300hr 43,800hr 600 hr
Q03UDECPU 0%
36,100hr 43,800hr 600 hr
30%
43,800hr 43,800hr 600 hr
2 50%
43,800hr 43,800hr 600 hr
70%
43,800hr 43,800hr 600 hr
100%
30,100hr 43,800hr 600 hr
0%
43,000hr 43,800hr 600 hr
30%
43,800hr 43,800hr 600 hr
1 50%
43,800hr 43,800hr 600 hr
70%
43,800hr 43,800hr 600 hr
100%
Q04UDHCPU 5.00years 5.00years 25 days
Q04UDEHCPU 4,300hr 32,100hr 384hr
0%
0.49years 3.66years 16days
6,100hr 43,800hr 384hr
30%
8,600hr 43,800hr 384hr
2 50%
14,300hr 43,800hr 384hr
70%
43,800hr 43,800hr 384hr
100%

EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
Battery life
VOLTAGE
Q6BAT
Amount of
model
consumption*1
*2
time ratio Guaranteed value *3
(Reference Value)*4
(Power failure 10
(40 )
after alarm*5)
25,300 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
0%
36,100 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
30%
1 50%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr 11
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
MAINTENANCE AND
70%
INSPECTION
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
100%
5.00 years 5.0 0 years 25 days
4,200 hr 32,100 hr 384 hr
0%
0.48 years
6,000 hr
3.66 years
43,800 hr
16 days
384 hr
12
30%
TROUBLESHOOTING
Q06UDHCPU 8,400 hr 43,800 hr 384 hr
2 50%
Q06UDEHCPU 0.96 years 5.00 years 16 days
14,000 hr 43,800 hr 384 hr
70%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 384 hr
100%
2,300 hr 19,200 hr 192 hr
0%
APPENDICES
3,200 hr 27,400 hr 192 hr
30%
4,600 hr 38,400 hr 192 hr
3 50%
7,600 hr 43,800 hr 192 hr
70%
0.87years 5.00 years 8 days
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 192 hr
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years 8 days INDEX

11 - 13

Battery life
Q6BAT
Amount of
model *2 *3 (Power failure
time ratio Guaranteed value
(40 )
after alarm*5)
22,600 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
0%
32,200 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
30%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
1 50%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
70%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
100%
4,100 hr 26,200 hr 384 hr
0%
5,800 hr 37,400 hr 384 hr
30%
8,200 hr 43,800 hr 384 hr
2 50%
13,600 hr 43,800 hr 384 hr
70%
Q13UDHCPU 43,800 hr 43,800 hr 384 hr
100%
Q26UDHCPU 5.00 years 5.00 years 16 days
Q13UDEHCPU 2,300 hr 18,600 hr 192 hr
0%
3,200 hr 26,500 hr 192 hr
30%
4,600 hr 37,200 hr 192 hr
3 50%
7,600 hr 43,800 hr 192 hr
70%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 192 hr
100%
1,500 hr 13,800 hr 144 hr
0%
2,100 hr 19,700 hr 144 hr
30%
3,000 hr 27,600 hr 144 hr
4 50%
5,000 hr 43,800 hr 144 hr
70%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 144 hr
100%

EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
Battery life
VOLTAGE
Q7BAT
Amount of
model
consumption*1
*2
(Reference Value)*4
(Power failure 10
(40 )
after alarm*5)
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
0%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
30%
1 50%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr 11
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
MAINTENANCE AND
70%
INSPECTION
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
Q02UCPU 100%
Q03UDCPU
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
Q03UDECPU 0%
5.00 years
43,800 hr
5.00 years
43,800 hr
25 days
600 hr
12
30%
TROUBLESHOOTING
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
2 50%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
70%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
100%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
0%
APPENDICES
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
30%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
1 50%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
70%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
100%
Q04UDEHCPU 11,700 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
INDEX
0%
16,700 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
30%
23,400 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
2 50%
39,000 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
70%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
100%

11 - 15

Battery life
Q7BAT
Amount of
(40 )
after alarm*5)
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
0%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
30%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
1 50%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
70%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
100%
11,400 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
0%
16,200 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
30%
Q06UDHCPU 22,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
2 50%
38,000 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
70%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
100%
5,000 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
0%
7,100 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
30%
10,000 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
3 50%
16,600 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
70%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
100%

EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
Battery life
VOLTAGE
Q7BAT
Amount of
model
consumption*1
*2
(Reference Value)*4
(Power failure 10
(40 )
after alarm*5)
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
0%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
30%
1 50%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr 11
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
MAINTENANCE AND
70%
INSPECTION
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
100%
11,100 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
0%
1.27 years
15,800 hr
5.00 years
43,800 hr
25 days
600 hr
12
30%
TROUBLESHOOTING
22,200 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
2 50%
37,000 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
70%
Q13UDHCPU 43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
100%
Q13UDEHCPU 5,000 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
0%
APPENDICES
7,100 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
30%
10,000 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
3 50%
16,600 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
70%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
100%
3,700 hr 36,100 hr 432 hr
INDEX
0%
5,200 hr 43,800 hr 432 hr
30%
7,400 hr 43,800 hr 432 hr
4 50%
12,300 hr 43,800 hr 432 hr
70%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 432 hr
100%

11 - 17

Battery life
Q8BAT
Amount of
(40 )
after alarm*5)
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
0%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
30%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
1 50%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
70%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
Q02UCPU 100%
Q03UDCPU
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
Q03UDECPU 0%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
30%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
2 50%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
70%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
100%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
0%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
30%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
1 50%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
70%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
100%
Q04UDEHCPU 38,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
0%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
30%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
2 50%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
70%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
100%

EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
Battery life
VOLTAGE
Q8BAT
Amount of
model
consumption*1
*2
(Reference Value)*4
(Power failure 10
(40 )
after alarm*5)
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
0%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
30%
1 50%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr 11
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
MAINTENANCE AND
70%
INSPECTION
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
100%
37,900 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
0%
4.33 years
43,800 hr
5.00 years
43,800 hr
25 days
600 hr
12
30%
TROUBLESHOOTING
Q06UDHCPU 43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
2 50%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
70%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
100%
20,500 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
0%
APPENDICES
29,200 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
30%
41,000 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
3 50%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
70%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days INDEX

11 - 19

Battery life
Q8BAT
Amount of
(40 )
after alarm*5)
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
0%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
30%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
1 50%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
70%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25days
37,000 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
0%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
30%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
2 50%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
70%
Q13UDHCPU 43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
100%
Q13UDEHCPU 20,200 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
0%
28,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
30%
40,400 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
3 50%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
70%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
100%
14,000 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
0%
20,000 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
30%
28,000 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
4 50%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
70%
43,800 hr 43,800 hr 600 hr
100%

9
* 1: For the amount of battery consumption Section 11.3.1.
EMC AND LOW

(24 hours).
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
time ratio is 50%.)
10
to 55 ).
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
11
POINT
MAINTENANCE AND
INSPECTION
12
TROUBLESHOOTING
3. When the battery (Q6BAT, Q7BAT and Q8BAT) is not connected to the CPU
module, its service life is five years.
battery.
APPENDICES
INDEX

11 - 21
11.3.3 Replacement procedure of the CPU module battery
Replace the battery of the CPU module by the following procedures when it comes to the
end of its life.
The programmable controller power must be on for 10 minutes or longer before
dismounting the battery.
Data in the memory are backed up for a while by a capacitor even after the battery is
removed. However, since data in the memory may be erased if the time for replacement
exceeds the backup time shown in Table11.8 to Table11.11, replace the battery quickly.
(1) Replacement procedure for the Basic model QCPU's Q6BAT battery
Table11.8 Backup time
Backup time
3 minutes
Replacing battery
CPU module
Backup the program and the
data.
Turn OFF the programmable controller

power supply.
Open the CPU module front cover.
Remove the old battery from its

holder.
Insert a new battery into the holder

in the correct direction. Connect
the lead to the connector. Connector CPU
module side
Connector
Close the CPU module front cover. battery side
Turn ON the programmable controller

power supply.
Monitor
OFF
SM51 to check
ON/OFF.
ON
Monitor
Bit 0 is OFF.
SD52 to check if bit 0 is
ON.
Bit 0 is ON.
Failure of CPU module battery Completed
Diagram 11.2 Replacement procedure for the Q6BAT battery

9
(2) Replacement procedure of the Q6BAT battery for the High Performance
EMC AND LOW

model QCPU, Process CPU, Redundant CPU and Universal model QCPU
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
Table11.9 Backup time 10
Backup time
3 minutes
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
Replacing battery
Backup the program and the 11

data.
MAINTENANCE AND
Turn off the programmable controller
INSPECTION
power supply.
Remove the CPU module from the

base unit.
Connector CPU 12
module side
TROUBLESHOOTING
Connector
Remove the old battery from its battery side
holder. Battery Q6BAT
Insert a new battery into the holder

in the correct direction. Connect the
lead to the connector.
APPENDICES
Close the CPU module bottom cover.
Install the CPU module into the CPU module

base unit.
Turn on the programmable controller

power supply. INDEX
Monitor
OFF
SM51 to verify
on/off.
ON
Monitor Bit 0 is OFF.

ON.
Bit 0 is on.
Failure of CPU module battery Completed

11 - 23
Backup time
3 minutes
Replacing battery
Backup the program and the data.

power supply.

base unit.
Remove the battery holder at the

bottom of the CPU module. Battery holder
Battery
Disconnect the battery connector, *1: When disconnecting the battery Q7BAT
and pull out the Q6BAT/Q7BAT connector, hold the connector part being
being used. *1 careful not to damage the battery cable.
Q7BAT to be
replaced by Disengage the catch on one side of
Confirm Q7BAT. the battery holder to disassemble the Latch
the type of the old holder into two, and remove the
battery. Q7BAT.
Battery holder
Q6BAT to be
replaced by Q7BAT. Insert the new Q7BAT into the holder
in the correct direction, and
Connect the Q7BAT to the battery reassemble the battery holder so that
connector of the CPU module, and the battery cable comes out of the
set it into the connector holder of the hole in the holder connection. (Push
battery holder. the holder parts in until they click.)
Connector
Set the battery holder to the
CPU module.
Connector
stopper
Install the CPU module into the
base unit.

power supply.
CPU module
Battery holder
Monitor
OFF
SM51 to verify
on/off.
ON
Monitor Bit 0 is OFF.

ON.
Bit 0 is on.
Failure of CPU module battery

Completed

9
EMC AND LOW

DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
Backup time
3 minutes
10
Replacing battery
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
Backup the program and the data.

power supply.
11
MAINTENANCE AND
2)
INSPECTION
Confirm Remove the Q8BAT from the control
Q8BAT to be replaced by Q8BAT.
the type of the old
panel.
battery.
Q6BAT/Q7BAT to
12
be replaced by Remove the Q8BAT connection
TROUBLESHOOTING
Q8BAT. cable from the Q8BAT.

Connect the Q8BAT connection
base unit.
cable to the new Q8BAT.
Remove the cover/battery holder at Connector Install the new Q8BAT to the control
the bottom of the CPU module. of CPU module
panel.*2 (Fixing with a mounting
Connector screw or fixing with the DIN rail is
of battery
Disconnect the battery connector, and Q6BAT
APPENDICES
pull out the Q6BAT/Q7BAT. *1
1)
Connect the Q8BAT connection cable
to the connector of the CPU module.
CPU module
Connector
of cable
Q8BAT
connection
(To next page) cable
Connector
of CPU module
CPU module
INDEX
Q8BAT
connection
cover
* 1: Remove the battery connector with holding the connector part so that the battery cable may
not be damaged.

11 - 25

Install the Q8BAT connection cover
to the CPU module.
Q8BAT connection cable
Install the CPU module into the

base unit.
CPU module
Connect the Q8BAT connection cable

to the Q8BAT.
Control panel
Install the Q8BAT to the control panel.
*2 (Fixing with a mounting screw or
Q8BAT
fixing with the DIN rail are available.)
1)
Fix the Q8BAT connection cable to the

control panel. *3

power supply.
R (bending radius) *4
10mm (0.39 inch) or more
Monitor OFF
SM51 to verify
on/off.
Q8BAT Q8BAT
connection cable
ON
Monitor
Bit 0 is OFF.
ON.
Bit 0 is on.
Failure of Q8BAT Completed
2)
* 2: Refer to the following for the module mounting position.
Section 10.3.2
* 3: Clamp the Q8BAT connection cable. If not being clamped, the Q8BAT connection cover,
connector, and cable, may be damaged by a loose cable connection, shifting, or pulling due to
carelessness, etc.
* 4: Secure 10mm or more as the minimum cable bend radius.
If it is less than 10mm, a malfunction may occur due to characteristic deterioration, open cable or
the like.

9
POINT
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
When replacing the battery of a CPU module, pay attention to the following:
VOLTAGE
1. Back up the data in the CPU module by GX Developer before starting
replacement.
2. When replacing a battery of a Redundant CPU, back up the memory data 10
such as programs by the memory copy from the control system to the standby
system, and then replace the battery of the CPU module that was changed
into the standby status by the system switching function.
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
For the memory copy from control system to standby system and system
switching function, refer to the manual below.
3. When the MELSEC-Q series is used as a UL-certified product, the Q7BAT 11
and Q8BAT battery must be replaced by service personnel.
MAINTENANCE AND
The service personnel are defined as experienced technicians who have
been sufficiently educated and trained, and are capable of perceiving and
INSPECTION
avoiding operational hazard.
12
TROUBLESHOOTING
APPENDICES
INDEX

11 - 27
11.3.4 SRAM card battery life
Table11.12 SRAM card battery life
Battery life *3
After SM52
Power-on Actual service turns ON.
SRAM card Guaranteed value
time ratio *1 value (Reference (Power failure
(MIN)
value)*4 compensation time
after alarm)
Q2MEM-1MBS 690 hr 6,336 hr
0% 8hr
Manufacturing 0.07years 0.72years
control number 11,784 hr 13,872 hr
100% 8hr
" A" *2 1.34years 1.58years
2,400 hr 23,660 hr
Q2MEM-1MBS 0% 20hr
0.27years 2.7years
Manufacturing
2,880 hr 31,540 hr
control number 30% 20hr
0.32years 3.6years
" B" *2
4,320 hr 39,420 hr
or 50% 20hr
0.49years 4.5years
" B " *2 6,480 hr 43,800 hr
70% 20hr
0.73years 5.0years
On and after B 43,800 hr 43,800 hr
100% 50hr
5.0years 5.0years
2,400 hr 23,660 hr
0% 20hr
0.27years 2.7years
2,880 hr 31,540 hr
30% 20hr
0.32years 3.6years
4,320 hr 39,420 hr
Q2MEM-2MBS 50% 20hr
0.49years 4.5years
6,480 hr 43,800 hr
70% 20hr
0.73years 5.0years
43,800 hr 43,800 hr
100% 50hr
5.0years 5.0years
43,800hr 43,800hr
0% 50 hr
5.0years 5.0years
43,800hr 43,800hr
30% 50 hr
5.0years 5.0years
43,800hr 43,800hr
Q3MEM-4MBS 50% 50 hr
5.0years 5.0years
43,800hr 43,800hr
70% 50 hr
5.0years 5.0years
43,800hr 43,800hr
100% 50 hr
5.0years 5.0years

9
*3
Battery life
After SM52
EMC AND LOW

Power-on Actual service turns ON.
DIRECTIVES
SRAM card Guaranteed value
VOLTAGE
*1 value (Reference (Power failure
time ratio
(MIN)
value)*4 compensation time
after alarm)
36,300hr 43,800hr
10
0% 50 hr
4.1years 5.0years
43,800hr 43,800hr
30% 50 hr
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
5.0years 5.0years
43,800hr 43,800hr
Q3MEM-8MBS 50% 50 hr
5.0years 5.0years
70%
43,800hr 43,800hr
50 hr 11
5.0years 5.0years
43,800hr 43,800hr
MAINTENANCE AND
100% 50 hr
5.0years 5.0years
INSPECTION
(24 hours).
(When the total power-on and power-off times are 12 hours for each, the power-on time ratio is
50%).
* 2: The manufacturing control number (the third digit from the leftmost) is written on the label on the
12
back of the SRAM card (as shown in Diagram 11.6).
TROUBLESHOOTING
Manufacturer
control number
Diagram 11.6 Label on the back of SRAM card
APPENDICES
* 3: Indicates the battery life when the SRAM card is installed in the High Performance model QCPU
whose first 5 digits of the serial number are "04012" or higher.
For the battery life for those of "04011" or lower, refer to Appendix 2.
* 4: The actual value may vary depending on ambient temperature.
POINT
INDEX

3. Note that the SRAM card battery is consumed even while the programmable
controller is powered ON with the CPU module battery connected.
4. When the special relay showing battery low, SM52 turns on, immediately
change the battery.
Even if an alarm has not yet occurred, it is recommended to replace the bat-
tery periodically according to the conditions of use.
5. The SRAM card is not available for the Basic model QCPU.

11 - 29
11.3.5 SRAM card CPU module battery replacement procedure
Replace the SRAM card battery in the following procedure.
(1) Procedures for replacing battery of Q2MEM-1MBS or Q2MEM-2MBS

Replacing battery
Backup the program and the

data.
Open the front cover while the

programmable controller power
supply is on.
CPU module
Release main unit
direction
With a flat-blade screwdriver, etc.,
remove the battery holder locking Battery holder
fixing switch
switch from the LOCK position.
Battery holder CPU module
main unit
Remove the battery holder

from the SRAM card. Flat blade
screwdriver
Used battery

holder.
New battery
Insert a new battery into the

holder in the correct direction. CPU module
Lock main unit
direction
Check that the battery holder Battery holder

fixing switch *
fixing switch is set to the LOCK
position.
* : The battery holder fixing switch is

automatically set to the "LOCK" position
when the battery holder is removed. In its
position, insert the battery holder to the
end.
CPU module
main unit
Deeply insert the SRAM card
into the battery holder.
Monitor OFF Put + toward you.

SM52 to verify on/off.
ON
Monitor
Bit 1 and bit 2 are OFF.
SD52 to check if bit 1 and bit
2 are ON.
Bit 1 and bit 2 are ON.
Failure of SRAM card battery

Completed
Diagram 11.7 SRAM card CPU module battery replacement procedure

9
(2) Procedures for replacing battery of Q3MEM-4MBS or Q3MEM-8MBS
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
Replacing battery Remove a caver,
pressing fixing claws
of top/bottom
Backup the program and the CPU module
data. main unit
10
Remove a memory card
protective cover of the CPU
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
module at power-on status of
the programmable controller.
With a flat-blade screwdriver, etc.,

remove the battery holder locking
switch from the LOCK position.
CPU module 11
main unit
Battery holder
MAINTENANCE AND
Remove the battery holder from
the SRAM card.
INSPECTION
Release
direction
12
Battery holder
fixing switch
holder.
TROUBLESHOOTING
CPU module
main unit Facing "+ (positive)"
Insert a new battery into the up, install the battery
holder in the correct direction.
Deeply insert the SRAM card

into the battery holder.
LOCK
Battery holder
fixing switch
Set a battery holder fixing switch
to the LOCK position
APPENDICES
Set the memory card protective
cover on the CPU module.
Monitor OFF
SM52 to verify on/off. INDEX
ON
Monitor Bit 1 and bit 2 are OFF.
SD52 to check if bit 1 and bit
2 are ON.
Bit 1 and bit 2 are ON.
Failure of SRAM card battery

Completed
Diagram 11.8 SRAM card CPU module battery replacement procedure

11 - 31
POINT
Be careful about the following to replace the SRAM card battery.
1. To back up the data, replace the SRAM card battery with the programmable
controller power supply ON and the SRAM card installed.
2. Start replacement after backing up the CPU module data using GX Developer.
3. Since replacement is made with the programmable controller power supply
ON, take extreme care not to get an electric shock.
4. When dismounting or mounting the battery holder on the SRAM card, take
care so that the battery does not come out of the battery holder.
5. When replacing the battery with the programmable controller power supply
OFF, always back up the data before starting replacement.
[Battery replacement procedure]
1) Back up the SRAM card data using GX Developer.
2) Replace the battery.
3) Write the backed up data from GX Developer to the memory card.
Insert or remove the battery in the horizontal direction along the battery holder
fixing guide.
Failure to do so may damage the latches of the battery holder.
Battery holder latches
Battery fixing guide
Battery holder
Diagram 11.9 Battery setting direction
6. If a battery of the SRAM card is hard to replace, use of the following tweezers
is recommended.
Table11.13 Tweezers for replacing battery
Product Model name

Plastic tweezers NK-2539
Diagram 11.10 Replacement of battery using prastic tweezers

9
11.4 When Programmable Controller Has Been Stored Without
Battery
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
When the programmable controller operation is to be resumed after being stored with the
battery removed, the memories in the CPU module and memory card may be corrupted.
Hence, before resuming operation, always clear the memory of CPU module and format
10
the SRAM card using GX Developer.
After formatting the memories, write the memory contents backed up prior to storage to
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
each memory.
Remark
For the Universal model QCPU, when the latch data backup function (to standard
11
ROM) is used, data will not be disappeared even if storing data without a battery,
MAINTENANCE AND
since latch data such as device data of the CPU module or error history can be
INSPECTION
backed up without using a battery.
The relationships between battery and battery-backed memorie are shown in Table11.14. 12
Table11.14 Relationships between the battery and battery-backed memories
TROUBLESHOOTING
Battery
Memory Battery of QCPU Battery Built in Memory
Module*1 Card
Program memory *2
CPU module Standard RAM

Standard ROM ---- (Battery backup not needed)
SRAM card
APPENDICES
Memory card*3 Flash card ---- (Battery backup not needed)
ATA card ---- (Battery backup not needed)
: Battery backed, : Not battery backed

* 1: As a battery, the Q6BAT, Q7BAT and Q8BAT are available.
* 2: The Universal model QCPU needs no battery backup.
* 3: Not available for the Basic model QCPU.
Format the battery-backed memories in Table11.14 using GX Developer before resuming

INDEX
operation.
For information about the memory formatting, refer to the manual below.
11.4 When Programmable Controller Has Been Stored Without Battery 11 - 33

POINT
1. Before storing the programmable controller, always back up the contents of
each memory.
2. For the CPU module, when the programmable controller power supply is ON or
the CPU module
reset is canceled, format the following data if error is detected while checking.
• Program memory data
• Standard RAM data
• Error history
• Latch data (latch relay (L), devices in latch setting range set in the
parameter, special relay SM900 to SM999, special register SD900 to
SD900)
• Sampling trace data
11 - 34 11.4 When Programmable Controller Has Been Stored Without Battery

9
11.5 When Battery Has Gone Flat During Storage of Programmable
Controller
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
When the programmable controller is to be used after being stored for some period of time
and the battery has gone flat during storage, the memories in the CPU module and
memory card may be corrupted.
10
Hence, before resuming operation, always clear the memory of CPU module and format
the SRAM card using GX Developer.
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
After formatting the memories, write the memory contents backed up prior to storage to
each memory.
Remark 11
For the Universal model QCPU, when the latch data backup function (to standard
MAINTENANCE AND
ROM) is used, data will not be disappeared even if a battery life ends, since latch
INSPECTION
data such as device data of the CPU module or error history can be backed up
without using a battery.
12
The relationships between battery and battery-backed memorie are shown in Table11.15.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table11.15 Relationships between the battery and battery-backed memories
Battery
Memory Battery of QCPU Battery Built in Memory
Module*1 Card
Program memory *2
CPU module Standard RAM

Standard ROM ---- (Battery backup not needed)
APPENDICES
SRAM card
Memory card*3 Flash card ---- (Battery backup not needed)
ATA card ---- (Battery backup not needed)
: Battery backed, : Not battery backed

* 1: As a battery, the Q6BAT, Q7BAT and Q8BAT are available.
* 2: The Universal model QCPU needs no battery backup.
* 3: Not available for the Basic model QCPU. INDEX
Format the battery-backed memories in Table11.15 using GX Developer before resuming

operation.
For information about the memory formatting, refer to the manual below.
11.5 When Battery Has Gone Flat During Storage of Programmable Controller 11 - 35
POINT
1. Before storing the programmable controller, always back up the contents of
each memory.
2. For the CPU module, when the programmable controller power supply is ON or
the CPU module
reset is canceled, format the following data if error is detected while checking.
• Program memory data
• Standard RAM data
• Error history
• Latch data (latch relay (L), devices in latch setting range set in the
parameter, special relay SM900 to SM999, special register SD900 to
SD900)
• Sampling trace data
11 - 36 11.5 When Battery Has Gone Flat During Storage of Programmable Controller
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
This chapter describes the various types of trouble that occur when the system is
operated, and causes and remedies of these troubles.
Refer to the following manual for the configuration of a redundant system
10
(when the Redundant CPU is used).
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
12.1 Troubleshooting Basics
In order to increase the reliability of the system, not only highly reliable devices are used 11
but also the speedy startup of the system after the occurrence of trouble becomes an
MAINTENANCE AND
important factor.
To start up the system speedily, the cause of the trouble must be located and eliminated
INSPECTION
correctly.
The basic three points that must be followed in the troubleshooting are as follows.
(1) Visual inspection 12

Visually check the following.
TROUBLESHOOTING
1) Movement of sequencer (stopped condition, operating condition)
2) Power supply on/off
3) Status of input/output devices
4) Power supply module, CPU module, I/O module, intelligent function module,
installation condition of extension cable
5) Status of wiring (I/O cables, cables)
APPENDICES
6) Display status of various types of indicators ("POWER" LED, "RUN" LED,
"ERR." LED, I/O LED)
7) Status of setting of various types of switches (Setting of No. of stages of
extension base unit, power interrupt hold-on status)
After checking 1) to 7), connect GX Developer and monitor the operating

condition and program contents of the programmable controller. INDEX
(2) Check of trouble

Check to see how the operating condition of the programmable controller varies while
Basic Universal the programmable controller is operated as follows.
UD
1) Set the RUN/STOP switchNote12.1 to STOP. Note1
Note12.1
2) Reset the trouble with the RESET/L.CLR switch.Note12.1 ( CHAPTER 4)
3) Turn ON and OFF the power supply.
Note1
Basic Universal
For the Basic model QCPU or Universal model QCPU use the "RUN/STOP/RESET switch" for
UD the operation.
Note12.1
12.1 Troubleshooting Basics 12 - 1

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(3) Narrowing down the range of trouble occurrence causes.

Estimate the troubled part in accordance with items (1) and (2) above.
1) Programmable controller or external devices
2) I/O module or others
3) Sequence program
12 - 2 12.1 Troubleshooting Basics

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
12.2 Troubleshooting
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
The trouble investigating methods, contents of troubles for the error codes, and remedies
VOLTAGE
of the troubles are described below.
12.2.1 Troubleshooting flowchart 10
The following shows the contents of the troubles classified into a variety of groups
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
according to the types of events.Note2
Error-occurrence description
Section 12.2.2 Flowchart for when the ERR terminal 11

ERR terminal turned off (opened).
(negative logic) turned off (opened)
MAINTENANCE AND
Section 12.2.3 "Flowchart for when the "MODE" LED is not
INSPECTION
Note12.2
Basic "MODE" LED is not turned on
turned on."
Note12.2 Note12.2 Section 12.2.4 "Flowchart for when the "MODE" LED is
"MODE" LED flickering
flickering."
12
Section 12.2.5 "Flowchart for when the "POWER" LED is
TROUBLESHOOTING
"POWER" LED off
turned off."
When redundant power supply Section 12.2.6 Flowchart for when the "POWER" LED is
module is used, "POWER" LED is
turned on red
turned on red.
Section 12.2.7 "Flowchart for when the "RUN" LED is turned

"RUN" LED off
off."
APPENDICES
"RUN" LED flickering Section 12.2.8
Section 12.2.8 "When the "RUN" LED is flickering."
Section 12.2.9 "Flowchart for when the "ERR." LED is

"ERR." LED on/flickering
on/flickering."
Note12.2
"USER" LED on Section
Section 12.2.10
12.2.10 "When the "USER" LED is turned on."
Basic
Note12.2
"BAT. " LED on Section
Section 12.2.11
12.2.11 "When the "BAT. " LED is turned on."
Note12.2
INDEX
Note12.2 Section
Section 12.2.12
12.2.12 "Flowchart for when the "BOOT" LED is
"BOOT" LED flickering
flickering."
Section
Section 12.2.13
12.2.13 "Flowchart for when output module LED is not
Output module LED not turned on
turned on"
(To next page)
Note2
Basic
The Basic model QCPU does not have the following LEDs.
"MODE" LED
Note12.2 "USER" LED
"BAT." LED
"BOOT" LED
12.2.1 Troubleshooting flowchart
12 - 3
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Section 12.2.14 "Flowchart for when output load of output

I/O module not operating properly.
module does not turn on."
Section 12.2.15 "Flowchart for when unable to read a

Unable to read a program.
program."
Section 12.2.16 "Flowchart for when unable to write a

Unable to write a program.
program."
Section 12.2.17 "Flowchart for when program is rewritten

Program is rewritten unintentionally.
unintentionally."
Section 12.2.18 "Flowchart for when unable to perform boot

Unable to perform boot operation
from memory card. Note12.3 operation from memory card."
Section 12.2.19 "Flowchart for when UNIT. VERIFY ERR.

UNIT. VERIFY ERR. occurs.
occurs."
Section 12.2.20 "Flowchart for when CONTROL BUS ERR.

CONTROL BUS ERR. occurs.
occurs."
Section 12.2.21 "Flowchart for when CPU module does not

The CPU module does not start.
start."
The OPERATION ERROR has Section 12.2.22 "Flowchart for when OPERATION ERROR
occurred at the execution of
occurs at the execution of S(P).SFCSCOMR
S(P).SFCSCOMR and
and S(P).SFCTCOMR instructions."
S(P).SFCTCOMR instructions.
Comments cannot be read at the Section 12.2.23 "Flowchart for when comments cannot be
Basic execution of S(P).SFCSCOMR and read at the execution of S(P).SFCSCOMR
S(P).SFCTCOMR instructions. and S(P).SFCTCOMR instructions."
Note12.3
PARAMETER ERROR occurs at Section 12.2.24 "Flowchart for when PARAMETER ERROR
power ON/reset. occurs at power ON/reset."
The CPU cannot communicate with Section 12.2.25 "Flowchart for when the CPU cannot
the GX Developer. communicate with the GX Developer."
Ethernet communication is not available Section 12.2.26 "When Ethernet communication is not
by a method other than direct connection available by a method other than direct
to GX Developer. connection to GX Developer."
Ethernet communication with the Section 12.2.27 "When Ethernet communication with the
target device is not available. target device is not available."
Ethernet communication is not available Section 12.2.28 "When Ethernet communication is not available
by direct connection to GX Developer. by direct connection to GX Developer."
Ethernet communication with a CPU Section 12.2.29 "When Ethernet communication with a CPU
module is slow or unstable. module is slow or unstable."
An error occurred during MC protocol Section 12.2.30 "When an error has occurred during MC
communication. protocol communication."
Unable to set time by SNTP. Section 12.2.31 "When time cannot be set by SNTP."
Diagram 12.1 Troubleshooting flowchart
Note3
Note3
Basic
The Basic model QCPU cannot use the memory card.

Note12.3
12 - 4 12.2 Troubleshooting
12.2.1 Troubleshooting flowchart
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
12.2.2 Flowchart for when the ERR terminal (negative logic) is turned off
(opened)
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
The following shows the flowchart for when the "ERR terminal" turns off (opened) at
power-on or during operation of the programmable controller.Note4
10
The ERR terminal has
turned off (opened).
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
Flickering (CPU
module is in stop
How is the "ERR." error) Check error details and take action
LED of the CPU according to the details.
module?
11
Not flickering
MAINTENANCE AND
Is power supplied? NO
INSPECTION
Is the power supply Supply power of proper voltage.
voltage proper?
YES
Basic
12
How is the "MODE" On (green)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Note12.4 Note12.4
LED of the
CPU module?
Off
Remove the corresponding power
supply module, and mount it to the
normal base unit.
(Do not mount any modules other
than the power supply module.)
APPENDICES
How is the "POWER" LED On (red) The corresponding power supply module is
of the power supply faulty
module? (Replace it with a normal power supply
module).
Turned on green ( Section
Section 12.4.2
12.4.2)
Mount the corresponding power
supply module to the original system
again, and remove all modules other
than the power supply module from
INDEX
the base unit.
(To next page)
Note4
Basic
The Basic model QCPU does not have the "MODE" LED. In the flowchart, proceed to "Off".
Note12.4
12.2.2 Flowchart for when the ERR terminal (negative logic) is turned off (opened)
12 - 5
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
How is the "POWER" Off The base unit that includes the corresponding
LED of the power supply
power supply module is faulty.
module?
(Change it for a normal base unit.)
On (green)
Check the sum of internal current
consumptions of the modules that
comprise the system.
Does the total

current exceed the rated Reexamine the system configuration to make the
Yes
current consumption of one power total current less than the rated current consumption
supply module? of one power supply module.
No
Hardware fault
Execute operation checks in due order,
starting with the minimum system.
For the module that does not operate,
please contact your local nearest
Mitsubishi or representative, explaining
a detailed description of the problem.
Diagram 12.2 Flowchart for when the ERR terminal is turned off
POINT
If a CPU module stop error occurs during use of two redundant power supply
modules, the error is output from the ERR terminals of the two redundant power
supply modules.
Refer to the following for details of the ERR terminal.
Section 5.2.1 Power supply module specification list
Section 10.6.2 Wring of power supply module
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Errors that can be detected by the ERR terminal
EMC AND LOW

The following shows the errors that can be detected by the ERR terminal of the power
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
supply module in a singular power supply system/redundant power supply system.
<Singular power supply system> ................ One Q series power supply module is
used. 10
Table12.1 Errors that can be detected by the ERR terminal of a power supply module
CPU module
INSTALLATION
Basic model QCPU*,
LOADING AND
Base unit
High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, Redundant CPU
Main base unit (Q3 B)
Multiple CPU high speed main
AC power not input, power supply module fuse blown and CPU module stop error 11
(including reset) can be detected.
base unit (Q3 DB)
MAINTENANCE AND
Extension base unit (Q6 B) Errors cannot be detected (always OFF). (Cannot be added)
INSPECTION
* : Except the Q00JCPU (without ERR terminal).
<Singular power supply system> ................ One slim type power supply module is
used. 12
TROUBLESHOOTING
CPU module
Basic model QCPU*,
Base unit Process CPU,
High Performance model QCPU,
Redundant CPU
AC power not input, power supply module fuse blown
Slim type main base unit
and CPU module stop error (including reset) can be (Cannot be combined)
(Q3 SB)
detected.
APPENDICES
<Redundant power supply system> ................. Two redundane power supply modules
are used.
CPU module
Basic model QCPU*,
Base unit
High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, Redundant CPU
Redundant power main base unit AC power not input, redundant power supply module fuse blown, CPU module stop
INDEX
(Q3 RB) error (including reset), and redundant power supply module failure can be detected.
AC power not input, redundant power supply module
Redundant power extension base
fuse blown, and redundant power supply module failure (Cannot be added)
unit (Q6 RB)
can be detected.
12 - 7
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Remark
In the redundant power supply system, the failure of the redundant power supply
Basic
module can also be detected by using GX Developer (Version 8.18U or later).
Note12.5 Note12.6
Note12.5
High
1. Detection by PLC diagnosticsNote5Note6
Performance Process
2. Detection by system monitor
Refer to the following manual for details of PLC diagnostics and system
Note12.6
monitor.
Note5
Basic
Failure of redundant power supply cannot be detected by the Basic model QCPU.
Note12.5
Note6
High
Performance Process
When using the High Performance QCPU or the Process CPU, confirm the versions of CPU
module and GX Developer. ( Appendix 2)
Note12.6
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
12.2.3 Flowchart for when the "MODE" LED does not turn on
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
The following shows the flowchart for when the "MODE" LED of the CPU module does not
VOLTAGE
turn on at programmable controller power-on.
The "MODE" LED has not turned on
10
(When off)
How is the Section 12.2.5
Section 12.2.5 Flowchart for
Off or On (red) when the "POWER" LED
"POWER" LED of the power
turns off.
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
supply module?
(When on (red))
Section
Section 12.2.6
12.2.6 Flowchart for
On (green) when the "POWER" LED turns
Are all on (red).
11
the power
supply modules powered NO Check the wiring and power on all the
on?
Is the wiring of the power power supply modules.
supply module
MAINTENANCE AND
correct?
NO YES
INSPECTION
YES
Can "MODE" LED turn on?
Connect peripheral device and CPU module.
Can the
CPU communicate with the YES Carry out PLC diagnostics, and 12
peripheral device? perform troubleshooting according to
the diagnostics result.
TROUBLESHOOTING
NO
Is the extension
cable connected NO
properly? (Isn't IN connected to Connect the extension cable properly.
IN or OUT connected to
OUT?)
YES NO YES
Is the CPU module After resetting the CPU with the
APPENDICES
RESET position RESET/L.CLR switch, set the
RESET/L. CLR switch in
the neutral position? RESET/L.CLR switch to the neutral position.
Neutral position NO YES

Replace the power supply module and
confirm that the "POER" LED is turned on
green.
YES
Can "MODE" LED turn on? Hardware fault of power supply module.
INDEX
NO
A hardware fault may have occurred in
any of the following modules.
1) CPU module Completed
2) Main base unit, extension base unit
3) Extension cable
4) I/O Module (If one is installed)
5) Intelligent function module
(If one is installed)
6) Network module (If one is installed)
Perform operations in due order, starting
with the minimum system where the power
supply module and CPU module are
If the module will not work, please consalt
your local nearest Mitsubishi or
representative, explaining a detailed
description of the problem.
* : This applies to the redundant power supply module.

Diagram 12.3 Flowchart for when the "MODE" LED is not turned on
12.2.3 Flowchart for when the "MODE" LED does not turn on
12 - 9
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
12.2.4 Flowchart for when the "MODE" LED is flickering
The following shows the flowchart for when the "MODE" LED of the CPU module flickers
at programmable controller power-on, at operation start or during operation.
The "MODE" LED is flickering.
Have the
forced ON/OFF YES
Cancel forced ON/OFF.
settings made?
NO
NO Can "MODE" LED YES
turn on?
Is the CPU RESET position

module RESET/L. CLR Set the
Move theRESET/L.CLR switchto
RESET/L.CLR switch tothe
the
switch in the neutral neturarl position.
neutral position.
position?
Neutral position
NO Can "MODE" LED YES

turn on?
Hardwarefault
Hardware fault
Execute operation checks in due
Check operations in the order
order, starting with the minimum
starting from the minimum system.
system. Completed
If For
the the
module
module willthat
notdoes
work,not
please
consult your
operate, localcontact
please Mitsubishi
your service
local
center or Mitsubishi
nearest representative,
or explaining
a representative,
detailed description of the
explaining a detailed
problem.
Diagram 12.4 Flowchart for when the "MODE" LED is flickering
12.2.4 Flowchart for when the "MODE" LED is flickering
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
12.2.5 Flowchart for when the "POWER" LED turns off
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
The following shows the flowchart for when the "POWER" LED of the power supply
VOLTAGE
module turns off at programmable controller power-on or during operation.
The "POWER" LED has turned off.
10
Is there a NO
Supply power.
INSTALLATION
power supply?
LOADING AND
On
YES Off (green)
How is the "POWER" LED?
11
On (red)
Section 12.2.6
MAINTENANCE AND
when the "POWER" LED turns
on (red)
INSPECTION
Is the power
supply voltage within NO The supply voltage should be within
the voltage range given in the the rated range.
specifications?
YES Off
On
(green)
12
TROUBLESHOOTING
On (red)
Section
Section 12.2.6
on (red)
Is the power NO
supply module fixed? Properly fix the power supply module.
YES On
APPENDICES
Off (green)
Remove all modules other than On (red)

the power supply module from Section
Section 12.2.6
the base unit.
on (red)
The base unit that includes the

INDEX
Off corresponding power supply module

is faulty.
(Replace it with a normal base unit.)
On (green)
(To next page) Completed
: In this applies to the redundant power supply module.
12 - 11
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Does the
Reexamine the system configuration
total current exceed the Yes
rated output current of the power to make the total current less than
supply module? the rated output current of the power
supply module
No
Hardware
Hardwarefaultfault
Execute operationinchecks
check operations in due
the order
order, starting
starting with
with the the minimum
minimum
system.
system.
If the
For themodule
modulewill notdoes
that worknot
,
please consalt
operate, please your localyour local
contact
nearest Mitsubishi
Mitsubishi or
service center or
representative,explaining
representative, explaining aa detailed
detailed
Diagram 12.5 Flowchart for when the "POWER" LED is turned off
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
12.2.6 Flowchart for when the "POWER" LED turns on (red)
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
The following shows the flowchart for when the "POWER" LED of the redundant power
VOLTAGE
supply module turns on red at power-on or during operation of the programmable
controller.
The "POWER" LED has
turned on (red).
10
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
Remove the corresponding
redundant power supply module,
and mount it onto the normal
(At this time, do not mount any
modules other than the redundant
power supply module.)
11
MAINTENANCE AND
How is the The corresponding redundant power
INSPECTION
"POWER" LED of the Off or On (red) supply module is faulty.
redundant power supply (Replace it with a normal one.)
module? ( 12.4.2
Section 12.4.2)
On (green)
Return the corresponding 12
redundant power supply module to
TROUBLESHOOTING
the original system, and remove all
modules other than the redundant
power supply module from the
The redundant base unit that

How is the
Off includes the corresponding
"POWER" LED of the
redundant power supply module is
redundant power supply
faulty. (Replace it with a normal
module?
redundant base unit.)
On (green)
APPENDICES
Does the total Reexamine the system configuration

current exceed the rated Yes to make the total current less than
output current of the power
the rated current consumption of one
supply module?
redundant power supply module.
INDEX
No
Hardware fault
check operations checks in the
order starting with the minimum
system.
If the module will not work, please
consalt your local nearest
Mitsubishi or representative,
explaining a detailed description of
the problem.
Diagram 12.6 Flowchart for when the "POWER" LED is turned on red
12.2.6 Flowchart for when the "POWER" LED turns on (red)
12 - 13
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
12.2.7 Flowchart for when the "RUN" LED turned off
The following shows the flowchart for when the "RUN" LED of
the CPU module turns off during operation of the programmable controller.Note7
The "RUN" LED has turned off.
(When off)
Off or Section 12.2.5
Section 12.2.5 "Flowchart for
How is the when the "POWER" LED has
On (red)
"POWER" LED of the power turned off."
supply module? (When on (red))
Section 12.2.6
Turned on green when the "POWER" LED has
turned on (red)
Is "ERR." LED YES Section 12.2.9

Section 12.2.9 "Flowchart for
on/flickering? when the "ERR." LED is
on/flickering."
NO
(1) Programmable controller part
"RUN" LED is
Reset the CPU module RESET/L. fault/poor connection between
Note12.7
on.
CLR switch. the module and base unit
(2) Excessive noise generation
"RUN" LED is off.
Set the CPU module's RUN/STOP For the case of (1) For the
Basic Note12.7
switch to STOP and write END case of (2)
to address 0 with the GX Developer. Please consult your local Mitsubishi
service center or representative,
Note12.7
the problem.
Set the CPU module's RUN/STOP "RUN" LED does
Note12.7
switch to RUN and enter to not turn on.
the monitor mode with the GX
Developer to be operated.
"RUN" LED is on.
Possible cause is a sequence

program error.
Connect a surge suppression

Check the program and modify the circuit, such as CR, to the noise
program error location. source.
NO
Can "RUN" LED turn on?
YES
Completed
Diagram 12.7 Flowchart for when the "RUN" LED is turned off
* : This applies to the redundant power supply module.
Note7
Basic
In the case of the Basic model QCPU, use the "RUN/STOP/RESET switch" for operation.
Note12.7
12.2.7 Flowchart for when the "RUN" LED turned off
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
12.2.8 When the "RUN" LED is flickering
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
If the "RUN" LED flickers, follow the steps below.
VOLTAGE
Note8
When the programs or parameters are written into the CPU module during STOP status
Basic
and then the RUN/STOP switch Note12.8 is set from STOP to RUN, the RUN LED of the 10
CPU module flickers.
Note12.8
Although this status does not mean the CPU module error, the CPU module stops the
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
operation. To set the CPU module into RUN status, reset the CPU module using the
RESET/L.CLR switch Note12.8 or set the RUN/STOP switch Note12.8 from STOP to RUN
again.
With this setting, the RUN LED turns on.
11
12.2.9 Flowchart for when the "ERR." LED is on/flickering
MAINTENANCE AND
INSPECTION
The following shows the flowchart for when the "ERR." LED of the CPU module turns on or
flickers at programmable controller power-on, at operation start or during operation.
"ERR." LED is on/flickering. 12
TROUBLESHOOTING
Hardware fault Confirm details of error by GX
Developer. ( Section 12.3)
Section 12.3
Note12.8
Basic
Please consult your local Mitsubishi Set the RUN/STOP switch
service center or representative, to STOP.
Note12.8
the problem.
Modify error details.
APPENDICES
( Section 12.3
12.3)
Reset by the RESET/L. CLR

switchNote12.8 .
Note12.8
Set the RUN/STOP switch
to RUN.
INDEX
Can
NO
"ERR." LED
turn off?
YES
Completed
Diagram 12.8 Flowchart for when the "ERR." LED is on/flickering
Note8
Basic
In the case of the Basic model QCPU, use the "RUN/STOP/RESET switch" for operation.
Note12.8
12.2.8 When the "RUN" LED is flickering
12 - 15
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
12.2.10 When the "USER" LED is turned on
If the "USER" LED turns on, follow the steps described below.
The "USER" LED turns on when an error is detected by the CHK instruction or the
annunciator (F) turns on.
If the "USER" LED is on, monitor the special relays SM62 and SM80 in the monitor mode
of GX Developer.
• When M62 has turned ON

The annunciator (F) is ON.
Using SD62 to SD79, check the error cause.
• When SM80 has turned ON
The "USER" LED turned ON by the execution of the CHK instruction.
Using SD80, check the error cause.
Eliminate the error cause after confirming it.
The "USER" LED can be turned off by:

• Making a reset with the RESET/L.CLR switch; or
• Executing the LEDR instruction in the sequence program.
POINT
When the RESET/L.CLR switch is tilted to L.CLR several times for latch clear
operation, the "USER" LED flickers to indicate that the latch clear processing is
under operation.
When the RESET/L.CLR switch is further tilted to L.CLR while the "USER" LED
flickers, the "USER" LED turns off and terminates the latch clear processing.
12.2.11 When the "BAT." LED is turned on / flashing
If the "BAT." LED turns on / flashes, follow the steps described below.
The "BAT." LED turns on / flashes when a low battery capacity is detected.
If the "BAT." LED is on, monitor the special relays and special registers in the monitor
mode of GX Developer to check which of the CPU module and SRAM card batteries was
Universal
lowered in capacity. (SM51 to SM52, SD51 to SD52)Note9
UD After confirmation, replace the battery with a new one, and reset the CPU module with the
Note12.9 RESET/L.CLR switchNote12.9 or run the LEDR instruction, and the "BAT. " LED will turns off.
Note9
Universal
UD In the case of the Universal model QCPU, use the "RUN/STOP/RESET switch" for operation.
Note12.9
12.2.10 When the "USER" LED is turned on
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
12.2.12 Flowchart for when the "BOOT" LED is flickering
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
The following shows the flowchart for when the "BOOT" LED of the CPU module flickers at
VOLTAGE
programmable controller power-on, at operation start or during operation.
The "BOOT" LED is flickering
10
Power off the programmable
controller.
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
Remove the memory card.
Move the DIP switches SW2 and

SW3 of the CPU module to ON.
11
MAINTENANCE AND
Power on the programmable
INSPECTION
controller.
Does the "BOOT" LED YES Completion of automatic write

from memory card to standard 12
turn on? ROM
TROUBLESHOOTING
NO Perform boot operation from
standard ROM.
CPU module hardware fault. Please
consult your local nearest Mitsubishi
or representative, explaining a
detailed description of the problem.
Diagram 12.9 Flowchart for when the "BOOT" LED is flickering
APPENDICES
INDEX
12.2.12 Flowchart for when the "BOOT" LED is flickering
12 - 17
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
12.2.13 Flowchart for when output module LED does not turn on
The following shows the flowchart for when the output module LED does not turn on
during programmable controller operation.Note10
The output module LED

has not turned on
Basic
NO
Note12.10 (Flickering)
Is the "MODE" Section
Section 12.2.4
12.2.4 "Flowchart for
Note12.10
LED on? when the "MODE" LED is
flickering."
YES
Is the LED on when the NO

output module is monitored Reexamine the program.
on GX Developer?
YES
Check the input/output number on

the GX Developer system monitor.
Does the output NO

Change the output number.
number match?
YES
Does the LED turn NO

on when another output
module is forcibly
turned on?
YES
Does the CPU module, base unit, extension

LED turn on when cable hardware fault.
the output module is changed for NO
Please consult your local Mitsubishi
another output module, service center or representative,
which is then forcibly explaining a detailed description of
turned on? the problem.
YES
Output module hardware fault.

Please consult your local nearest
the problem.
Diagram 12.10 Flowchart for when output module LED does not turn on
Note10
Basic
The Basic model QCPU does not have the "MODE" LED. In the flowchart, proceed to "YES".
Note12.10
12.2.13 Flowchart for when output module LED does not turn on
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
12.2.14 Flowchart for when output load of output module does not turn on
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
The following shows the flowchart for when the output load of the output module does not
VOLTAGE
turn on during programmable controller operation.
The output load has not turned on.
10
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
Is the operation Check output conditions with the
NO
indicator of output module monitor mode of the GX
turned on? Developer.
YES 11
MAINTENANCE AND
Is voltage for the Is the operation Voltage measurement among
NO Off
INSPECTION
power supply load indicator of input the modules input and COM
added? module turned on? terminals.
0V
YES On
Supply 12
voltage
TROUBLESHOOTING
What is the voltage value
among the various 0V Set the GX Developer in the
output COM terminals of the monitor mode and check that the
output module? input signal is OFF.
(Monitor signal off)
The rated voltage
is supplied.
Output module failure Check the external wiring and

Replace the output module. Check the power supply load external input devices.
wire and recover the power
supply.
APPENDICES
Check the load wire and load, and
recover the power supply.
Confirm rush current that flows to the

INDEX
load when the maximum number of Please consult your local Mitsubishi
outputs turns on simultaneously. Change the output relay number and
NG service center or representative,
let the load maximum simultaneous
on current to within the specification.
the problem.
OK
Diagram 12.11 Flowchart for when output load of output module does not turn on
POINT
For the troublet in which input signal to the input module does not turn off,
troubleshoot referring to Section 12.5 Examples of I/O Modules Troubleshooting.
12.2.14 Flowchart for when output load of output module does not turn on
12 - 19
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
12.2.15 Flowchart for when a program cannot be read
The following shows the flowchart for when a program cannot be read from the CPU
module.
A program cannot be read.
NO
Is the memory to be read Select the correct memory.
correct?
YES NO YES
Can a program be read?
Is the connection cable NO Connect the connection cable

connected properly? properly.
YES
NO YES
Can a program YES

be read by replacing the
connection cable?
NO
Is the connection USB Is the USB driver NO Install the USB driver into
type RS-232? installed in the personal the personal computer.
computer?
RS-232 YES
NO YES

the problem.
Can a program YES

be read by lowering the baud
rate?
NO

the problem. Completed
Diagram 12.12 Flowchart for when a program cannot be read
12.2.15 Flowchart for when a program cannot be read
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
12.2.16 Flowchart for when write a program cannot be written
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
The following shows the flowchart for when programs cannot be written in the CPU
VOLTAGE
module.Note11
A program cannot be written

into the CPU module. 10
Basic
Note12.11 Turn the DIP switch Note12.11
INSTALLATION
ON
LOADING AND
Note12.11 Is the DIP switch
SW1 set to OFF? SW1 (system protect) to OFF.
OFF
NO YES
11
Can a program
be written?
MAINTENANCE AND
Has the password YES Cancel the password using the GX
INSPECTION
registered? Developer.
NO
NO Can a program YES
be written? 12
TROUBLESHOOTING
Basic
Perform the following.
Memory card
Note12.12 Confirm whether the write-
Is the memory program protect switch is off or not.
Note12.12
memory? Confirm if it is formatted.
Confirm the writing destination
Program memory specification.
Organize file.
Confirm memory space.
Confirm the writing destination Can a program YES
specification. be written?
APPENDICES
NO
Can a program YES
be written?
NO
Format program memory.
Can a program YES

INDEX
be written?
NO

Diagram 12.13 Flowchart for when write a program cannot be written
Note11
Basic
The Basic model QCPU does not have the DIP switches.
In the flowchart, proceed to "OFF".
Note12.11
Basic
The Basic model QCPU does not support the memory card.
Note12.12
12.2.16 Flowchart for when write a program cannot be written
12 - 21
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
12.2.17 Flowchart for when program is rewritten unintentionally
The following shows the flowchart for when the program is unintentionally rewritten at
power-on or reset of the programmable controller.
Program is rewritten unintentionally.
OFF (Program memory execution)

Is SM660 ON?
ON (During boot operation)

After formatting the program memory
that is performing boot operation
from the standard ROM, write data to
the standard ROM.
Invalidate the "Perform boot from

standard ROM" check box in the
boot file setting of the PLC
parameter dialog box.
Write the parameters and

sequence program to the program
memory.
Power on the programmable

controller/perform reset operation.
YES
Is the program rewritten?
NO
Completed Hardware fault
the problem.
Diagram 12.14 Flowchart for when program is rewritten unintentionally
12.2.17 Flowchart for when program is rewritten unintentionally
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
12.2.18 Flowchart for when boot operation cannot be performed from
memory card
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
The following shows the flowchart for when the boot operation of the CPU module cannot
be performed using the memory card.
10
Boot operation cannot be performed
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
Has a CPU error YES
Remove the cause of the error.
occurred?
NO
NO Can boot operation YES 11
be performed?
MAINTENANCE AND
INSPECTION
Set the DIP switch 2 and 3 to the
Is the parameter- NO drive in which the parameter file is
valid drive specified by the stored.
DIP switches?
YES 12
TROUBLESHOOTING
NO Can boot operation YES
be performed?
Is a file set NO
with parameter boot Set a file to boot file setup.
file setup?
YES
NO YES
APPENDICES
Can boot operation
be performed?
Is a file set with NO

parameter program setup? Set a file to program setup.
YES
INDEX
be performed?
Is boot NO
operation file stored in the Write a file to the memory card.
memory card?
YES
be performed?
Diagram 12.15 Flowchart for when boot operation cannot be performed from memory card
12.2.18 Flowchart for when boot operation cannot be performed from memory card
12 - 23
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
12.2.19 Flowchart for when UNIT VERIFY ERR. occurs
The following shows the flowchart for when UNIT VERIFY ERR. occurs at programmable
controller power-on or during operation.
The UNIT VERIFY ERR. has occured.
Check the slot where error occurred

with the GX Developer.
Has
the module on
the corresponding slot been YES
Reset the CPU module.
removed/mounted during
operation?
NO
Has the "ERR." YES
LED turned off?
Is the module NO
of the applicable slot Mounted the module properly.
mounted properly? NO
Replace the corresponding module.

YES
NO YES
Has the "ERR."
LED turned off?
Are all the

extension cables of NO
the base unit connected Connect the extension cable properly.
properly?
YES
NO Has the "ERR." YES
LED turned off?
Replace the Normal operation

corresponding module.
Error detection
Replace the CPU Normal operation

module.
Error detection

applicable base unit.
Error detection
Hardware fault
Mitsubishi
service center
or representative,
explaining a detailed description of Completed
the problem.
Diagram 12.16 Flowchart for when UNIT VERIFY ERR. occurs
12.2.19 Flowchart for when UNIT VERIFY ERR. occurs
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
12.2.20 Flowchart for when CONTROL BUS ERR. occurs
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
The following shows the flowchart for when CONTROL BUS ERR. occurs at programmable
VOLTAGE
controller power-on or during operation.
This flow chart can be confirmed only when a specific slot/base unit can be detected by the
error code. 10
The CONTROL BUS ERR.
has occured.
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
Check the slot base unit where error
occurred with the GX Developer.
11
MAINTENANCE AND
Is the module of
the applicable slot mounted NO Mount the module and extension
INSPECTION
properly? Is the extension cable of the cable properly.
applicable base unit connected
properly?
YES NO Is the "ERR." LED

turned off?
YES
12
TROUBLESHOOTING
Are all the
extension cables of the NO
Connect the extension cable properly.
base unit connected
properly?
YES NO Is the "ERR." LED YES

turned off?
Has
noise in excess of YES
the specified value been Take measures against noise.
generated?
APPENDICES
NO

corresponding module.
Error detection
Replace the CPU Normal operation

module.
INDEX
Error detection

applicable base unit.
Error detection
Hardware fault
Please consult your local Mitsubishi
nearest
service center
or representative,
explaining a detailed description of Complete
the problem.
Diagram 12.17 Flowchart for when CONTROL BUS ERR. occurs
12.2.20 Flowchart for when CONTROL BUS ERR. occurs
12 - 25
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
12.2.21 Flowchart for when CPU module does not start
The troubleshooting flow of a CPU module that does not start upon power-on is described
here.Note12
The CPU module does not start.
(When off)
Section 12.2.5 Flowchart for when
Basic
Is the "POWER" LED the "POWER" LED turns off.
Note12.13 NO (When on (red))
of the power supply module lit
Note12.13 (green)?
the "POWER" LED turns on (red).
YES
Are all power

supply modulesNote12.13 turned on? NO Check the wiring and turn ON all power
Is the power supply module Note12.13 supply modules.
connected correctly?
YES NO YES
Does the CPU module start?
Connect peripheral deivce.
Is communication YES
with peripheral device
succeeded?
NO Perform PLC diagnostics and troubleshoot

according to the results of the diagnosis.
Is the direction of
the exension cable correct? NO
(Check if IN-IN or OUT-OUT Correct the connection of the extension cable.
connection is made.)
YES NO YES
Basic Is the RESET-L. RESET position

CLR switch of the CPU module Cancel the RESET position.
in the RESET position?
Note12.14
Note12.14
In other than RESET position NO YES
Basic Note12.13
Change the power supply module
and check if the LED lights up (green).
Note12.13
YES Hardware error of power
supply module Note12.13 .
NO
The following pleces of hardware may be faulty.
1) CPU module
3) Extension cable
4) I/O Module (If one is installed) End
5) Interlligent function module (If one is installed)
Perform operations in due order, starting with the minimum system
where the power supply module and CPU module are mounted on the
main base unit.
If the module will not work, please consalt your local nearest Mitsubishi
or representative, explaining a detailed discription of the problem.
Diagram 12.18 Flowchart for when CPU module does not start
Note12
Basic
In the case of Basic model QCPU, it corresponds to the CPU module (power supply section).
Note12.13
Basic
In the case of Basic model QCPU, check if the RUN/STOP/RESET switch of CPU module is in
the RESET position.
Note12.14
12.2.21 Flowchart for when CPU module does not start
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
12.2.22 Flowchart for when OPERATION ERROR occurs at the execution of
S(P).SFCSCOMR and S(P).SFCTCOMR instructions.
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
The following shows the flowchart for when OPERATION ERROR (error code: 4100)
occurs at the execution of S(P).SFCSCOMR and S(P).SFCTCOMR instructions.
10
The OPERATION ERROR has
occurred at the execution of
SP.SFCSCOMR and
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
SP.SFCTCOMR instructions.
11
Check the program file name and step
No. where error occurred on the PLC
diagnostic screen of GX Developer.
MAINTENANCE AND
INSPECTION
Check that the values of the following
instruction devices are within the
range.
n1 (Block No.)
n2 (No. of reading comment)
n3 (No. of reading comment pe scan) 12
TROUBLESHOOTING
Are the values
specified with n1, n2 and n3 within NO
the setting range?
YES
Correct the values specified with n1,
n2 and n3 of the instruction device
within the range.
APPENDICES
Set the comment file stored in the
memory other than ATA card *1 as
"Comment file used in a command".
1 : Program memory, Standard ROM, SRAM

memory card and Flash memory card
INDEX
12.2.22 Flowchart for when OPERATION ERROR occurs at the execution of S(P).SFCSCOMR and
12 - 27
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
12.2.23 Flowchart for when comments cannot be read at the execution of

S(P).SFCSCOMR and S(P).SFCTCOMR instructions
The following shows the flowchart for when any comment of active step or any comment of
transfer condition associating with active step cannot be read at the execution of
S(P).SFCSCOMR and S(P).SFCTCOMR instructions
The comment cannot be read.
Is the SFC program run? NO

(Check with SM331)
Run the SFC program.
Set the program execution type of
YES
the SFC program to "SCAN".
Can the comment

NO of active step or the
comment of transfer condition
associating with active
step be read?
YES
Is the comment file Completed

to be used for instructions
set with "Comment file used in a NO
command" setting of the PLC
parameter or with the
QCDSET instruction?
Set the comment file with the
"Comment file used in a command"
setting of the PLC parameter or with
the QCDSET instruction.
YES
Should the
comment file setting be
NO (Setting with the QCDSET instruction)
performed with the "Comment
file used in a command"
setting of the PLC
parameter?
YES
(Setting with the PLC parameter)
Execute the QCDSET instruction to
Switch the power from OFF to ON perform the comment file setting.
or reset, after writing the PLC
parameter to the CPU module.
Can the
NO comment of active step or the
comment of transfer condition
associating with active
step be read?
YES
(To next page) Completed
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
Is the "Comment
file used in a command"
YES
10
setting of the "PLC file setting" of
the PLC parameter the "Use
the same file name as
the program"?
Does a
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
comment file which
YES has the same name as the
NO
SFC program file exist in
the target memory?
11
NO
MAINTENANCE AND
Create a comment file which has the same
name as the SFC program file and store it
INSPECTION
in the target memory.
Switch the power from OFF to ON or

reset, after writing the PLC parameter. 12
TROUBLESHOOTING
Can the
comment of active step or
NO the comment of transfer
condition associating
Check the activated SFC block with the with active step
"All block batch monitor" of GX be read?
Developer.
YES
APPENDICES
Is the block Completed
specified with the
SP.SFCSCOMR and NO
SP.SFCTCOMR instructions
activated?
YES
Check the active step in the block Correct the block specified with the
specified with the SP.SFCSCOMR and instruction or review the executing
SP.SFCTCOMR instructions on "Active condition of instruction. (The comment of
INDEX
step monitor" of GX Developer. the active step or the comment of transfer

condition associating with the active step
cannot be read, since the block specified
Does with the instruction is not activated.)
an activated step
exist in the block specified NO
with the SP.SFCSCOMR
and SP.SFCTCOMR
instructions?
YES
Review the executing condition of
Confirm that the comment of the activated
instruction. (The comment of the active
step or the comment of transfer condition
step or the comment of transfer condition
associating with the activated step can be
associating with the active step cannot
read.
be read, since no activated step exists in
the block specified with the instruction.)
12 - 29
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
12.2.24 Flowchart for when PARAMETER ERROR occurs at power ON/

reset.
The following shows the flowchart for when PARAMETER ERROR occurs at power ON/
reset.
(1) Flowchart for when PARAMETER ERROR (error code: 3013) occurs
The PARAMETER ERROR
(error code: 3013) has occurred.
Read the PLC parameter from the

parameter-valid drive on GX
Developer.
Check the parameter on GX

Developer.
Is the error
detected as the result of the YES
parameter check on GX
Developer?
Correct the item where the error has
NO occurred. Perform the parameter
check on GX Developer again and
confirm that no error is detected.
Is a device set
for each CPU transmission YES
range individually with
the multiple CPU
refresh setting?
Is a device
for each refresh of
NO the transmission range for the NO
host CPU set as " "
(Blank)?
YES Check the product information of the

CPU module on the GX Developer
Set the refresh source device of the
system monitor.
transmission range for the host CPU
set as other than " "(Blank).
(The refresh source device of the
transmission range for the host CPU
cannot be set as " "(Blank).)
Is the product
YES information of the CPU
module "070320000000000"
or later?
Switch the power from OFF to ON or
reset, after writing the PLC parameter
to the CPU module again. NO
Confirm that the same error does not Uncheck "Set starting device for each
occur. PLC" or change to a CPU module of
which product information is
"070320000000000" or later. (If the
product information is not
"070320000000000" or later, the
function for setting a device of each
transmission range individually cannot
be used.)
12.2.24 Flowchart for when PARAMETER ERROR occurs at power ON/reset.
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
(2) Flowchart for when PARAMETER ERROR (error code: 3040) occurrs.
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
The PARAMETER ERROR (error
VOLTAGE
code: 3040) has occurred.
Write the "parameter 10

(PLC/Network/Remote)" to the
Developer.
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
Switch the power of the system
from OFF to ON or reset the CPU
module.
11
NO
MAINTENANCE AND
Is the PARAMETER ERROR (error
code: 3040) detected again?
INSPECTION
Completed
YES
Has the "Target 12

memory" selected the
NO
TROUBLESHOOTING
current parameter-valid
drive on the screen of
write to PLC of GX
Developer?
YES
Since the CPU module may be Select a parameter-valid drive with

faulty, please contact your local the "target memory" on the PLC
Mitsubishi representative, explaining writing screen of GX Developer.
APPENDICES
INDEX
12 - 31
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
The PARAMETER ERROR (error
code: 3041) has occurred.
Write the "parameter (Intelligent

function module)" to the parameter-
valid drive on GX Developer.
Switch the power of the system

from OFF to ON or reset the CPU
module.
NO
Is the PARAMETER ERROR (error
code: 3041) detected again?
Completed
YES
Has the "Target

NO
current parameter-valid
write to PLC of GX
Developer?
YES

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
The PARAMETER ERROR
VOLTAGE
(error code: 3042) has occurred.
Is the parameter-valid NO
10
drive set in the program
memory?
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
YES
Is the "PARAM" set for
YES booting to the program
memory with the "Boot
file setting" of the PLC
parameter? 11
MAINTENANCE AND
NO
INSPECTION
Set the "PARAM" for booting to the
program memory with the "Boot file
setting" of the PLC parameter.
12
TROUBLESHOOTING
Write the "parameter
(PLC/Network/Remote)" to the
Developer.
Switch the power of the system from

OFF to ON or reset the CPU
APPENDICES
module.
Is the PARAMETER ERROR NO

(error code: 3042) detected
again?
Completed
YES
INDEX
Has the "Target

current parameter-valid NO
write to PLC of GX
Developer?
YES
12 - 33
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
12.2.25 Flowchart for when the CPU cannot communicate with the GX
Developer
The following shows the flowchart for when communication with peripheral device is
disabled at connecting the CPU module with GX Developer.
The CPU cannot communicate
with the GX Developer.
Is the connection cable NO Connect the connection cable

connected properly? properly.
YES NO Can the CPU YES

communicate with the GX
Developer?
Can the CPU

communicate with the GX YES
Developer by replacing the
connection cable?
NO
Replace the
CPU module with Replace the replaced CPU module
another one and check to see YES
if communication can be made
with the original CPU module and
between the replaced CPU check to see if the CPU module
module and GX starts up normally.
Developer.
NO (To next page)
Is the connection USB Is the USB driver NO Install the USB driver into
type RS-232? installed in the personal the personal computer.
computer?
RS-232 YES
NO Can the CPU YES
communicate with the GX
Developer?

the problem.
Can the CPU

communicate with GX YES
Developer by lowering the
baud rate?
NO

the problem.
Completed
12.2.25 Flowchart for when the CPU cannot communicate with the GX Developer
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
EMC AND LOW

(When off)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
the "POWER" LED turns off.
How is the "POWER" LED NO (When on (red))
of the power supply module? Section 12.2.6 Flowchart for when
the "POWER" LED turns on (red).
YES
10
Are all the power
supply modules powered on? NO Check the wiring and power on all
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
Is the wiring of the power supply the power supply modules.
module correct?
YES NO Can the CPU communicate YES
11
with the GX Developer?
MAINTENANCE AND
Is the extension
INSPECTION
cable connected properly? NO
(Isn't IN connected to Connect the extension cable properly.
IN or OUT connected
to OUT?)
YES NO Can the CPU communicate

YES
12
TROUBLESHOOTING
Is the CPU module RESET position
RESET/L. CLR switch in Cancel the RESET.
the neutral position?
Other than RESET position NO Can the CPU communicate YES

Replace the power supply module and
confirm that the "POWER" LED is turned
on green.
APPENDICES
Can the CPU communicate YES
Hardware fault of power supply module.
NO
A hardware fault may have occurred in any of the following modules.
1) CPU module
3) Extension cable Completed
4) I/O Module (If one is installed)
5) Interlligent function module (If one is installed)
INDEX

Perform operations in due order, starting with the minimum system
where the power supply module and CPU module are mounted on the
main base unit.
If the module will not work, please consalt your local nearest Mitsubishi
or representative, explaining a detailed discription of the problem.
12.2.25 Flowchart for when the CPU cannot communicate with the GX Developer
12 - 35
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
12.2.26 When Ethernet communication is not available by a method other

than direct connection to GX Developer
The following flowchart is provided to help you when Ethernet communication is not
available by a method other than direct connection to GX Developer.
Ethernet communication is not available

by a method other than direct connection
to GX Developer.
In "Transfer Setup" of GX Developer,

select "Ethernet" for "PC side I/F", "PLC
module" for "PLC side I/F", and "Other
station" for "Other station", and then
click "Connection test".
YES
Is the Find CPU function used
for IP address setting? *1
YES
NO Is duplicate IP address Set unique IP addresses.
warning displayed?
NO
NO Is Ethernet YES
communication available
with GX Developer?
Are settings in NO Correct the "Transfer Setup"

"Transfer Setup" of GX Developer
settings in GX Developer.
correct? *2
YES
NO Is Ethernet YES
with GX Developer?
YES
Accessing a QnA/A series
CPU on another station?
Replace the MELSECNET/H

YES network module with the one
NO
Are the conditions in *3 met? whose product information is
100420000000000-D or later.
NO
NO Is Ethernet YES
with GX Developer?
Section 12.2.27
When Ethernet communication with the target device is not available

Completed
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
* 1: If the target CPU is not found by the Find CPU function, check the following.
Route:
• Check that access to the target CPU does not pass through any router.
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
• Check the parameters.
VOLTAGE
• Check that the Find CPU function is not rejected by a parameter setting of the target CPU.
Computer-side settings:
• Check if an IP address is set.
• Check if use of the Ethernet port is enabled.
• Check if the firewall setting is disabled. 10
When enabled, check if communication with QnUDE(H)CPU is excluded in the setting.
• Check if communication with QnUDE(H)CPU is disabled by security software.
CPU-side settings:
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
• Is the load for service processing too high in the target CPU? (If so, increase the service
process time in Service process setting of PLC parameters.)
* 2 : Check the following:
PC side I/F Ethernet board setting
• Correct protocol specification (TCP/UDP)?
PC side I/F Detailed setting of PLC module 11
• Isn't direct CPU connection selected?
• Correct IP address specification?
MAINTENANCE AND
* 3: Check if all of the following conditions are met:
• The QnUDE(H)CPU connected to GX Developer is in a multiple CPU configuration.
INSPECTION
• The control CPU of the MELSECNET/H network module on the route is any other than
QnUDE(H)CPU.
• The product information of the MELSECNET/H network module on the route is:
(100320000000000-D or earlier)
12
TROUBLESHOOTING
APPENDICES
INDEX
12 - 37
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
12.2.27 When Ethernet communication with the target device is not

available
The following flowchart is provided to help you when Ethernet communication with the
target device is not available.
Ethernet communication with the target

device is not available.

Any cable disconnection, Connect cables properly.
NO
poor contact, or power-off or Power on the hub.
an error of the hub? *1 Remove the error in the hub.
YES Is Ethernet
NO communication available YES
with the target device?
Is the target device's NO Ask your network administrator for the

IP address set correctly? *2 target device's IP address, and set it
correctly.
YES Is Ethernet
NO communication available YES
How is the "SD/RD" Off

LED of the CPU module during
communication?
Flashing YES Are cables and

hub connected correctly? *1
NO
Check wiring of cables and hub
and connect them correctly. *1
Is Ethernet
NO YES
Off or
How is the "POWER" on (red) (When off)
LED of the power supply module? Section 12.2.5 When the "POWER" LED turns off
(When on (red))
Section 12.2.6 When the "POWER" LED turns on (red)
On (green)
*1: Supplemental remarks on switching hubs
Reconnecting a personal computer or CPU to a
To diagnose the built-in
switching hub or replacing the switching hub with
Ethernet port, power on the
another may take time for the hub to read MAC
CPU module again or reset it.
addresses.
Retry it after a little while, or power on the hub again.
Completed
*2: Check the following:

Is an IP address set?
Is the Ethernet port enabled?
(To next page) Is the Ethernet port device operating normally?
Is the firewall setting disabled?
If enabled, is communication with QnUDE(H)CPU excluded in the setting?
Isn't communication with QnUDE(H)CPU disabled by security software?
12.2.27 When Ethernet communication with the target device is not available
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
How is the "ERR." On or flashing
LED of the CPU module?
10
Hardware fault
Off YES
"LAN CTRL. DOWN"? Mitsubishi or representative,
explaining a detailed description
of the problem.
Change to USB connection to read NO
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
CPU setting parameters.
Section 12.2.9
Flowchart for when the "ERR." LED is on/flickering

11
MAINTENANCE AND
Is the Ethernet
port setting in "PLC parameter" for NO
INSPECTION
Enter correct parameters.
QnUDE(H)CPU correct? *3
YES Is Ethernet
NO YES
communication available with
the target device? 12
TROUBLESHOOTING
Is forced deactivation
YES Disable the forced
set in "Status of each connection"
of "Ethernet diagnosis"? deactivation.
NO Is Ethernet
NO YES
the target device?
Any error in
APPENDICES
"Status of each connection" or YES Take actions according to
"Error log" of "Ethernet the error code.
diagnosis"?
NO Is Ethernet
NO YES
the target device?
(To next page)

INDEX
Completed
* 3: Confirm the following:

• Correct IP address?
• Normal subnet mask pattern?
• Normal default router IP address?
• Protocol in the open setting, protocol desired for the function, and whether the settings are
completed for the number of modules used for the function?
12 - 39
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Use TCP or UDP in

Is TCP or UDP in MELSOFT YES MELSOFT connection for
connection used for more than
the specified number of
the number of modules set
modules or less.
by the parameter?
NO Is Ethernet
NO YES
the target device?
YES
TCP/IP?
NO
NO Has any device been

turned off during TCP/IP connection?
YES

Wait for a little while (approx. 1 min.),
and retry it after the connection is closed
by the alive check function of
QnUDE(H)CPU.
Increase the number of connections in the
setting to allow some spare connections.
NO Is Ethernet YES
the target device?
In the detailed
host station setting of Set a time out value or number
YES
"Transfer Setup", increase the time out of retries again.
value or the number of retries. Consult your network administrator
Is communication now and check the network status.
available?
NO
Is Ethernet
NO YES
the target device?
(To next page)
Completed
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
Is a response returned in YES
PING test?
Does transmission NO
NO pass through a router?
10
YES (To next page)
1)
Is the same network
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
Does transmission NO address set for IP addresses of the target NO Correct the network
pass through a router? device and CPU? address and subnet mask
Is the same subnet mask used? of the IP address.
YES
YES
11
Is the same network address set NO (To next page)
Set the same network address for the IP addresses.
MAINTENANCE AND
for IP addresses of the target
device, router, and CPU?
INSPECTION
Is Ethernet
NO YES
YES communication available with
the target device?
12
Is there default router IP address NO
TROUBLESHOOTING
Enter a default router IP address and subnet
and subnet mask pattern settings in mask pattern correctly.
CPU parameters?
Is Ethernet
YES NO YES
the target device?
Are the router IP address and NO Set the router IP address and subnet
subnet mask set on the target mask correctly.
device side?
APPENDICES
NO Is Ethernet YES
YES
1) the target device?
NO
Any error in the router? Remove the error in the router.
YES
NO Is Ethernet YES
INDEX

the target device?
Are the router NO

settings correct? *4 Modify the router settings.
YES
Is Ethernet
NO YES
the target device?
Completed
(To next page) *4: Check the following.
Are the routing settings for the QnUDE(H)CPU and target device correct?
Isn't communication with the QnUDE(H)CPU disabled by any security/firewall setting?
12 - 41
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Do PING replies return Check the cables and hub in the

NO
between each pair of nodes on the network to ensure normal
same network? communication route.
YES
Is Ethernet
NO YES
the target device?
Replace the hub, router, or Normal operation

cables to check for
communication.
Error detection
Hardware fault
Completed
the problem.
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
12.2.28 When Ethernet communication is not available by direct connection
to GX Developer
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
The following flowchart is provided to help you when Ethernet communication is not
available by direct connection to GX Developer.
10
Ethernet communication is not available
by direct connection to GX Developer.
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
Is one cable used for NO Connect the CPU to GX
connection? Developer directly with one cable.
YES
11
Is Ethernet
MAINTENANCE AND
NO YES
communication with GX Developer
available?
INSPECTION
Any cable NO
disconnection or poor contact? Connect the cable correctly.
YES
12
TROUBLESHOOTING
NO Is Ethernet YES
available?
Is the computer's IP address set NO Ask your network administrator for the
correctly? *1 computer's IP address, and set it correctly.
YES
Is Ethernet
APPENDICES
NO YES
available?
Was direct NO
CPU connection selected
in "PLC side I/F Detailed setting Select direct CPU connection
of PLC module" of "Transfer in "Transfer Setup".
Setup"?
YES
Is Ethernet
NO YES
INDEX
available?
In "Transfer Setup" of GX Developer, select

"Ethernet" for "PC side I/F", "PLC module"
for "PLC side I/F" and "No specification" for
"Other station", and click "Connection test".

Is the Ethernet port device operating normally? Completed
(To next page) Is the firewall setting disabled?
If enabled, are communications with MELSOFT products excluded in the setting?
Are multiple Ethernet ports enabled at the same time?
12.2.28 When Ethernet communication is not available by direct connection to GX Developer
12 - 43
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
How is Off
the "SD/RD" LED of the CPUmodule?
Flashing YES
Are cables connected properly? *2
NO
Check cables and wiring and

connect them properly. *2
NO Is Ethernet YES
available?
(When off)
How is Off or on (red) Section 12.2.5 When the "POWER" LED turns off
the "POWER" LED of the power
(When on (red))
supply module?
Section 12.2.6 When the "POWER" LED turns on (red)
On (green)
To diagnose the built-in Ethernet port, power on

the CPU again or reset it.
How is On or flashing
the "ERR." LED of the CPU module?
Hardware fault
Off YES Mitsubishi or representative,
"LAN CTRL. DOWN"?
explaining a detailed description
of the problem.
NO
Change to USB connection to read
CPU setting parameters.
Section 12.2.9
Is direct
MELSOFT connection NO Deselect "Disable direct
disabled in "Built-in Ethernet port" connection to MELSOFT".
of "PLC parameter"?
YES
Is Ethernet
NO YES
available?

(To next page)
Completed
Is the Ethernet port device operating normally?
Is the firewall setting disabled?
If enabled, are communications with MELSOFT products excluded in the setting?
Are multiple Ethernet ports enabled at the same time?
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
In "Status of
each connection" of
"Ethernet diagnosis", is the directly NO
Disable the forced deactivation.
connected connection set in
forced deactivation
10
status?
Is Ethernet
YES NO YES
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
with GX Developer?
Any error in "Status of

each connection" or "Error log" of
NO
Take actions according to the error code. 11
"Ethernet diagnosis"?
MAINTENANCE AND
INSPECTION
Is Ethernet
YES NO YES
with GX Developer?
12
In the detailed
TROUBLESHOOTING
host station setting of Perform the following.
"Transfer Setup", increase the value YES Adjust the communication timeout or the
of Time out or Retry times. number of retries again.
Is communication now Check the cables, connected device,
available? and the QnUDE(H)CPU status.
NO
Normal operation
Replace the cable.
APPENDICES
Error detection
Is direct connection
available for the connected YES Connect a hub to the line and
device? (Check the Ethernet interface communicate with others through
specifications.) the hub.
INDEX
NO
NO Is Ethernet YES
with GX Developer?
Hardware fault
the problem.
Completed
12 - 45
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
12.2.29 When Ethernet communication with CPU module is slow or unstable
The following flowchart is provided to help you when Ethernet communication with a CPU
module is slow or unstable.
Ethernet communication with the CPU module

is slow or unstable.
YES
Does a duplicate IP
address exist? *1 Set unique IP addresses.
NO
NO Is Ethernet YES
communication stabilized?
Is UDP in
MELSOFT connection YES Use UDP in MELSOFT connection for the specified
or MC protocol used for more the number
number of modules or less.
of modules set by the
parameter?
NO
NO Is Ethernet YES
Use TCP instead of UDP. YES

Use TCP.
Improved?
NO
YES
Retry or increase the number of Use retries. *2
retries. Improved?
NO
YES
Replace the hub, router or cables. Replace the faulty one with another.
Stabilized?
NO
Is the hub
capable of flow control
(IEEE802.3x PAUSE)? NO Consult your network administrator and correct the hub.
Is the flow control enabled? Use a hub that is capable of flow control.
(Consult your network administrator.) Enable the flow control.
YES NO Is Ethernet YES

*1: Checking methods:

(To next page) With the Find CPU function of GX Developer, check the QnUDE(H)CPU for
IP address duplication.
Disconnect a suspected device from the network, and run PING test from Completed
another device to its address. If a reply is returned, there is a device with
a duplicate IP address.
Check respective IP address settings.
*2: If transmissions pass through a wireless LAN, some packets may be lost resulting
in unstable Ethernet communication.
Using retries may increase stability of Ethernet communication.
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
Has the hub
or router discarded messages Consult your network administrator and check the hub
YES
because of its too-small packet buffer and router.
Use a hub or router that has a large packet buffer
capacity? (Consult your network
administrator.)
capacity. 10
Is Ethernet
INSTALLATION
NO NO YES
LOADING AND
Consult your network administrator and check the

Is communication of network condition.
a device other than QnUDE(H)CPU
unstable? (Consult your network
YES Take actions against noise to reduce communication
errors. *3 11
administrator.) Check the traffic, and if a high traffic is a cause of the
problem, take actions for it.
MAINTENANCE AND
NO
INSPECTION
NO Is Ethernet YES
Have many
unnecessary broadcast data YES
been received? (See Connection
status in Ethernet
12
diagnosis.)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Unnecessary broadcast data have been highly loaded.
NO Increase service process time for QnUDE(H)CPU.
Consult your network administrator, and check the network condition.
Identify a broadcasting device, and restrict the broadcast data volume.
(Devices such as computers or routers may broadcast data.)
Use filtering of broadcast data with a router to prevent QnUDE(H)CPU from
receiving them.
Separate the network where frequent broadcasts occur from the network
containing QnUDE(H)CPU.
APPENDICES
NO Is Ethernet YES
Reduce the Ethernet communication load on QnUDE(H)CPU.

YES Increase the service time of QnUDE(H)CPU.
Is Ethernet communication load on Reduce the number of connected devices.
QnUDE(H)CPU too high? Reduce the connection setting value.
Reduce the communication frequency per connection
NO and data volume.
INDEX
NO Is Ethernet YES
YES
Is any interrupt program used? Reduce the frequency and process time of the interrupt
program.
NO
NO Is Ethernet YES
Check the communications referring to the following.

Section 12.2.27
Completed
12 - 47
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
* 3 : A communication error may occur due to high-frequency noise emitted from a device other than
programmable controllers. The following measures can be taken to protect network systems from
high-frequency noise.
Wiring
• Do not install twisted pair cables together with the main circuit or power cables.
• Put twisted pair cables in a duct.
• Replace UTP cables with STP cables.
Communication method
• Use TCP/IP to exchange data with the target device.
• Increase the number of communiccation retries, if necessary.
• 10Mbps communication
• In the case of using 100Mbps, replace the hub with a 10Mbps hub and perform data
communication at a transmission speed of 10Mbps.
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
12.2.30 When an error has occurred during MC protocol communication
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
The following flowchart is provided to help you when an error has occurred during MC
VOLTAGE
protocol communication.
Communication error
10
NO
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
Was the command sent from Send the command to QnUDE(H)CPU.
another device?
YES
NO
Was the error resolved?
YES
11
MAINTENANCE AND
Was a response YES
returned to the device that sent
INSPECTION
the command?
NO
(To next page)
12
TROUBLESHOOTING
NO According to the end code or error code, repair the
Is the end code of the response "0"?
error part.
YES
NO YES
Is the IP address NO
specified in the command correct? Correct the IP address and send the command again.
APPENDICES
YES
NO YES
Are command
Correct the command format referring to the following
format specifications such as NO
manual.
command type, device,
MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual
or address correct? INDEX
YES
NO YES
Hardware fault
Please consult your local nearest Mitsubishi or
representative, explaining a detailed description of the
problem.
Completed
12 - 49
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Is the same
protocol (TCP/IP) used for NO Use the same protocol (TCP/IP) for communication with
communication with the target the target device.
device?
YES
NO YES
Is the IP address NO
specified in the command correct? Correct the IP address and send the command again.
YES
NO YES
Are the data sent to NO

the port No. specified in Open settings Send the data to the specified port No.
of QnUDE(H)CPU?
YES
NO YES
Is the Communication NO
data code setting (binary/ASCII) Send a command matched with Communication data
matched with the sent code setting.
command?
YES
NO YES
NO
Is the sub-header
Send a sub-header of a normal value.
value correct?
YES
NO YES
NO
Were data of the request Send data of the request data length.
data length sent?
YES
NO YES
(To next page)
Completed
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
Are the data
specified for command format, NO Correct the command format referring to the following manual.
such as command type, device or
address correct? MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual
10
YES
NO YES
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
Were requests Perform the following.
from multiple devices YES
Disable simultaneous request
simultaneously sent to the MC protocol
port specified in Open
transmissions from multiple devices. 11
settings? Set a different MC protocol port for
MAINTENANCE AND
each target.
NO
INSPECTION
NO YES
Section 12.2.27

12
TROUBLESHOOTING
Completed
APPENDICES
INDEX
12 - 51
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
12.2.31 When time cannot be set by SNTP
The following flowchart is provided to help you when time cannot be set by SNTP.
Time cannot be set by SNTP.
Is the time setting

NO
functioning? (See Ethernet
Check the time setting function settings. *1
diagnosis screen or SD1270.)
NO YES
YES Is the time setting available?
Failed to set time? YES

(See Ethernet diagnosis screen or
SD1270.)
(To next page)

NO
YES
Is the multiple CPU function used?
NO
NO
Has time been set on CPU
No.1 in the multiple CPU system? Set time on CPU No.1.
YES
NO YES
Is the time setting available?
Are parameters of NO
Enter correct parameters.
QnUDE(H)CPU correct? *1
YES
NO YES
Check if time was overwritten from the

sequence program or another device. Completed
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
Are parameters of NO
QnUDE(H)CPU correct? Enter correct parameters.
YES NO YES 10
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
Is the SNTP server NO
specified for Q series running Repair the SNTP server.
properly?
NO YES
11
YES Is the time setting available?
MAINTENANCE AND
INSPECTION
Section 12.2.27 Completed
12
TROUBLESHOOTING
APPENDICES
INDEX
12 - 53
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
12.3 Error Code List
The Q series CPU module uses the self diagnostics function to display error information
(on the LED) and stores the information into the special relay SM and special register SD,
when an error occurs in the following situations:
• When the programmable controller is powered ON.
• When the CPU module is switched from STOP to RUN.
• While the CPU module is running.
If an error occurs when a communication request is issued from GX Developer, intelligent
function module or network system to the CPU module, the CPU module returns the error
code (4000H to 4FFFH) to the request source.
12.3.1 Error codes
Errors are detected by the self diagnostic function of the CPU module or detected during
communication with the CPU module.
The relation between the error detection pattern, error detection location and error code is
shown in Table12.4.
Table12.4 Reference destination
Error detection
Error detection pattern Error code Reference
location
Detection by the self
diagnostics function of CPU module 1000 to 10000*1*2 Section 12.3.3 to Section 12.3.9
CPU module
CPU module 4000H to 4FFFH Section 12.3.11
Serial communication Serial Communication User’s
7000H to 7FFFH
module, etc. Manual, etc.
CC-Link System Master/Local
CC-Link module B000H to BFFFH
Module User’s Manual
Detection at
Ethernet Interface Module User’s
communication with CPU Ethernet module C000H to CFFFH
Manual
module
CC-Link IE controller CC-Link IE Controller Network
E000H to EFFFH
network module System Reference Manual
For Q Corresponding MELSECNET/
MELSECNET/H
F000H to FFFFH H Network System Reference
network module
Manual
* 1: CPU module error codes are classified into minor, moderate, major errors as shown below.
• Minor error: Errors that may allow the CPU module to continue the operation, e.g., battery
error.
• Moderate error: Errors that may cause the CPU module to stop the operation, e.g., WDT error.
(Error code: 1300 to 10000)
• Major error: Errors that may cause the CPU module to stop the operation, e.g., RAM error.
(Error code: 1000 to 1299)
* 2: When detected an error code without being noted in the reference table, please contact your local
Mitsubishi representive.
12 - 54 12.3 Error Code List

12.3.1 Error codes
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
12.3.2 CPU module errors
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
(1) Reading an error code
VOLTAGE
If an error occurs, its error code, error message, etc. can be read using GX Developer
as shown below.
10
1) Start GX Developer.
2) Connect the CPU module and personal computer.
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
3) On GX Developer, choose the [Online] [Read from PLC] menu and read the
project from the CPU module.
4) Choose the [Diagnostic] [PLC diagnostic] menu.
5) Click the "Current error" button in the PLC diagnostic dialog box to display the 11
error code and error message.
MAINTENANCE AND
6) Choose the [Help] [CPU error] menu and check details of the corresponding
INSPECTION
error code.
Refer to the following manual for details of the GX Developer operating method.
12
TROUBLESHOOTING
(2) Error code list
The following information deals with error codes and the meanings, causes, and
corrective measures of error messages.
<Relevant CPU>
: Indicates all the QnACPUs and QCPU.
QCPU : Indicates all the Q series CPU modules.
Q00J/Q00/Q01 : Indicates the Basic model QCPU.
APPENDICES
Qn(H) : Indicates the High Performance model QCPU.
QnPH : Indicates the Process CPU.
QnPRH : Indicates the Redundant CPU.
QnU : Indicates the Universal model QCPU.
QnA : Indicates the QnA series and Q2ASCPU series.
Rem : Indicates the MELSECNET/H remote I/O modules.
Each CPU module model name: Indicates the relevant specific CPU module.
( Example: Q4AR, Q2AS)
INDEX

12.3.2 CPU module errors
12 - 55
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
12.3.3 Error code list (1000 to 1999)
The following shows the error messages from the error code 1000 to 1999, the contents
and causes of the errors, and the corrective actions for the errors.
Table12.5 Error code
Error Common Individual LED Status CPU

Error Diagnostic
Code Information Information Operation
Message RUN ERROR Timing
(SD0) (SD5 to 15) (SD16 to 26) Status
1000
1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
MAIN CPU
1006 – – Off Flicker Stop Always
DOWN
1007
1008
1009
*1 CPU operation can be set in the parameters at error occurrence. (LED indication varies.)
*2 In the QCPU except for remote I/ O module, either error stop or continue can be selected for each intelligent function module by the parameters.
*3 BAT.ALM LED is displayed at BATTERY ERROR.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
10
Error
Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
CPU
(SD0)
1000
1001 Q00J/Q00/Q01
1002 Qn(H) 11
1003 QnPH
MAINTENANCE AND
QnPRH
1004
INSPECTION
QnU
Q00J/Q00/Q01
• Take noise reduction measures. Qn(H)
Runaway or failure of CPU module or
1005 failure of main CPU
• Reset the CPU module and RUN it QnPH 12
again.If the same error is displayed QnPRH
• Malfunctioning due to noise or other
TROUBLESHOOTING
again, this suggests a CPU module QnU
reason
hardware fault.(Contact your local Rem
• Hardware fault
Mitsubishi representative.) Q00J/Q00/Q01
Qn(H)
1006 QnPH
QnPRH
QnU
1007 Qn(H)
APPENDICES
QnPH
1008
QnPRH
• A failure is detected on the power
Reset the CPU module and RUN it
supply module, CPU module, main Q00J/Q00/
again.If the same error is detected
base unit, extension base unit or
again, it is considered that the power Q01*4
extension cable.
supply module, CPU module, main Qn(H)*6
1009 • When using the redundant base unit,
base unit, extension base unit or QnPH
the redundant power supply module
extension cable is faulty. QnPRH
INDEX
failure in both systems and/or the

(Contact your local Mitsubishi QnU
redundant base unit failure are
representative.)
detected.
*4 Function version is B or later.

*5 Function version is A.
*6 The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is 04101 or later.
*10 The Universal model QCPU except the Q02UCPU.
*11 The Q13UDHCPU and Q26UDHCPU
*12 This applies to the QnUDE(H)CPU.

12 - 57
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
When an END
END NOT
1010 – – Off Flicker Stop instruction
EXECUTE
executed
When SFC
SFCP. END
1020 – – Off Flicker Stop program is
ERROR
executed
MAIN CPU
DOWN

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
Entire program was executed without
the execution of an END instruction.
• When the END instruction is
executed it is read as another 10
1010
instruction code, e.g. due to noise.
• Take noise reduction measures.
• The END instruction has been
• Reset the CPU module and RUN it
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
changed to another instruction code
again. If the same error is displayed
somehow.
again, this suggests a CPU module
The SFC program cannot be normally
hardware fault. (Contact your local
terminated due to noise or other reason.
Mitsubishi representative.) Q00J/Q00/ 11
• The SFC program cannot be normally
Q01*4
MAINTENANCE AND
1020 terminated due to noise or any similar
QnPH
cause.
INSPECTION
QnU
• The SFC program cannot be normally
terminated for any other reason.
• Take measures against noise.
• Reset the CPU module and run it 12
Runaway or error of the CPU module
TROUBLESHOOTING
was detected.
1035 again, the CPU module has hardware QnU
• Malfunction due to noise etc.
failure.(Contact your local Mitsubishi
• Hardware failure
description of the problem.)
APPENDICES
INDEX


12 - 59
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
At power ON/
At reset/ When
1101 an END
instruction
executed
At power ON/
At reset/ When
1102 an END
instruction
RAM ERROR – – Off Flicker Stop
executed
At power ON/
At reset
At power ON/
1103 At reset/ When
an END
instruction
executed
1104
At power ON/
At reset
1105

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
The sequence program storing built-in
1101 RAM/program memory in the CPU
again,this suggests a CPU module 10
module is faulty.
hardware fault.(Contact your local
Mitsubishi representative.)
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
The work area RAM in the CPU module again. If the same error is displayed
1102
is faulty. again,this suggests a CPU module 11
hardware fault.(Contact your local
MAINTENANCE AND
The device memory in the CPU module • Take noise reduction measures.
INSPECTION
is faulty. • When indexing is performed, check
the value of index register to see if it
• The device memory in the CPU is within the device range.
1103 module is faulty. • Reset the CPU module and RUN it Qn(H)*8 12
• The device out of range is accessed again. If the same error is displayed QnPH*8
TROUBLESHOOTING
due to indexing, and the device for again,this suggests a CPU module QnPRH*9
system is overwritten. hardware fault.(Contact your local
The address RAM in the CPU module is
1104
faulty.
The system RAM in the CPU module is • Take noise reduction measures.
Q4AR
faulty. • Reset the CPU module and RUN it
The CPU memory in the CPU module is again.If the same error is displayed Q00J/Q00/Q01
APPENDICES
faulty. again, this suggests a CPU module QnU
1105
hardware fault. (Contact your local Qn(H)*4
The CPU shared memory in the CPU Mitsubishi representative.) QnPH
module is faulty. QnPRH
QnU
INDEX


12 - 61
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
STOP RUN/
When an END
1106 RAM ERROR – – Off Flicker Stop
instruction
executed
1107
At power ON/
At reset
1108
1109 Always
1110 TRK. CIR. – – Off Flicker Stop At power ON/

ERROR At reset
1111 – – Off Flicker Stop

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
• Check the battery to see if it is dead
or not. If dead, replace the battery.
• Format the program memory, write all 10
files to the programmable controller,
The battery is dead. Qn(H)
then reset the CPU module, and RUN
1106 The program memory in the CPU QnPH*7
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
it again.
module is faulty. QnPRH
If the same error is displayed again,
the possible cause is a CPU module
hardware fault. (Contact your local 11
Mitsubishi representative, explaining
MAINTENANCE AND
a detailed description of the problem.)
1107
INSPECTION
QnPRH
1108
The work area RAM in the CPU module
is faulty. This suggests a CPU module hardware Qn(H)*8 12
fault. (Contact your local Mitsubishi
1109 QnPH*8
TROUBLESHOOTING
representative.)
QnPRH*9
A fault was detected by the initial check
1110
of the tracking hardware. QnPRH
1111 A tracking hardware fault was detected.
APPENDICES
INDEX


12 - 63
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
1112
TRK. CIR.
– – Off Flicker Stop During running
ERROR
1113
TRK. CIR. At power ON/

ERROR At reset
TRK. CIR.
1116 – – Off Flicker Stop During running
ERROR
At power ON/
1150 RAM ERROR – – Off Flicker Stop
At reset

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
• Start after checking that the tracking
cable is connected.
A tracking hardware fault was detected
1112 during running.
the cause is the hardware fault of the 10
• The tracking cable was disconnected
tracking cable or CPU module.
and reinserted without the standby
(Please contact your local Mitsubishi
system being powered off or reset.
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
• The tracking cable is not secured by
the connector fixing screws.
• Confirm the redundant system startup
• The error occurred at a startup since
1113
the redundant system startup
procedure, and execute a startup 11
again. For details, refer to the
procedure was not followed.
MAINTENANCE AND
QnPRHCPU User's Manual
(Redundant System).
INSPECTION
This suggests a CPU module hardware
A fault was detected by the initial check
1115 fault. (Contact your nearest Mitsubishi QnPRH
of the tracking hardware.
representative.)
• Start after checking that the tracking 12
cable is connected.
TROUBLESHOOTING
A tracking hardware fault was detected
during running.
the cause is the hardware fault of the
• The tracking cable was disconnected
tracking cable or CPU module.
and reinserted without the standby
(Please contact your local Mitsubishi
system being powered off or reset.
1116 representative, explaining a detailed
procedure, and execute a startup
APPENDICES
again. For details, refer to the
QnPRHCPU User's Manual
(Redundant System).
again.
The memory of the CPU module in the
If the same error is displayed again, the
1150 Multiple CPU high speed transmission QnU*10
CPU module has hardware failure.
INDEX
area is faulty.
Contact your local Mitsubishi


12 - 65
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
At program
1160
execution
At program
1161
execution
At power ON/
1162
At reset
When
1164 instruction
executed
1200
OPE. CIRCUIT At power ON/

ERR. At reset
1202

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
•Format the program memory, write all
files to the programmable controller,
then reset the CPU module, and RUN 10
The program memory in the CPU it again.
1160
module is overwritten. If the same error is displayed again,
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
the CPU module has hardware
failure. Contact your local Mitsubishi
description of the problem. 11
MAINTENANCE AND
QnU
The data of the device memory built in the CPU module has hardware
INSPECTION
1161
the CPU module is overwritten. failure. Contact your local Mitsubishi
• Change the CPU main body or SRAM 12
card battery.
TROUBLESHOOTING
The error of the data held by the battery • Take noise reduction measures.
in the CPU module is detected. (It If the same error is displayed again,
1162
occurs when the automatic format is not the CPU module has hardware
set.) failure. Contact your local Mitsubishi
APPENDICES
Data corruption is detected in
the CPU module has hardware
1164 thememory of the QnU*11
failure. Contact your local Mitsubishi
Q13UDHCPU,Q26UDHCPU.
The operation circuit for index
1200 modification in the CPU module does
not operate normally. This suggests a CPU module hardware
The hardware (logic) in the CPU fault. (Contact your local Mitsubishi
INDEX
1201
module does not operate normally. representative, explaining a detailed
The operation circuit for sequence description of the problem.)
1202 processing in the CPU module does not
operate normally.


12 - 67
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
1203
When an END
OPE. CIRCUIT
ERR.
executed
1205
When
OPE. CIRCUIT
ERR.
executed
Module No.
(Slot No.)
FUSE BREAK [For Remote I/ Off/ Flicker/ Stop/
1300 – Always
OFF O network] On On Continue*1
Network No./
Station No.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
The operation circuit for index
1203 modification in the CPU module does
not operate normally.
The hardware (logic) in the CPU Q4AR
10
1204 This suggests a CPU module hardware
module does not operate normally. QnPRH
The operation circuit for sequence
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
1205 processing in the CPU module does not
operate normally.
The DSP operation circuit in the CPU

1206
module does not operate normally.
Q4AR 11
MAINTENANCE AND
• Check FUSE. LED of the output
modules and replace the module
INSPECTION
whose LED is lit.
(The module with a blown fuse can
also be identified using GX
Developer.
Qn(H) 12
QnPH
There is an output module with a blown Check the special registers SD1300
TROUBLESHOOTING
QnPRH
fuse. to SD1331 to see if the bit
QnU
corresponding to the module is "1".)
Rem
• When a GOT is bus-connected to the
main base unit or extension base
1300
unit, check the connection status of
the extension cable and the earth
status of the GOT.
Check ERR. LED of the output modules
APPENDICES
and replace the module whose LED is
lit.
There is an output module with a blown (The module with a blown fuse can also
Q00J/Q00/Q01
fuse. be identified using GX Developer.
Check the special registers SD130 to
SD137 to see if the bit corresponding to
the module is "1".) INDEX


12 - 69
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
Module No.
(Slot No.)
FUSE BREAK [For Remote I/ Off/ Flicker/ Stop/
1300 – Always
OFF O network] On On Continue*1
Network No./
Station No.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
• Check ERR. LED of the output
modules and replace the fuse of the
module whose LED is lit.
• Read the common information of the 10
error using the peripheral device and
replace the fuse at the output module
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
corresponding to the numerical value
(module No.) reading.
There is an output module with a blown Alternatively, monitor special QnA
fuse. registers SD1300 to SD1331 with the Q4AR 11
peripheral device and change the
MAINTENANCE AND
fuse of the output module whose bit
has a value of "1".
INSPECTION
the extension cable and the 12
grounding status of the GOT.
TROUBLESHOOTING
• Check ERR. LED of the output
1300
modules and replace the module
whose LED is lit.
• Read the common information of the
error using the peripheral device and
replace the fuse at the output module
(module No.) reading.
APPENDICES
• There is an output module with a Alternatively, monitor special
blown fuse. registers SD1300 to SD1331 with the
Q2AS
• External power supply for output load peripheral device and change the
is turned off or disconnected. fuse of the output module whose bit
has a value of "1".
• Check whether the external power
supply for output load is ON or OFF.
INDEX

the extension cable and the earth
status of the GOT.


12 - 71
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
1310
I/O INT. During

– – Off Flicker Stop
ERROR interrupt
1311
1320
LAN At power ON/
1321 CTRL.DOWN At reset

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
Any of the mounted modules is
experiencing a hardware fault.
An interruption has occurred although
1310 Therefore, check the mounted modules
there is no interrupt module.
and change the faulty module. (Contact 10
your local Mitsubishi representative.)
Take action so that an interrupt will not Q00J/Q00/
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
An interrupt request from other than the
be issued from other than the interrupt Q01*4
interrupt module was detected.
module. QnU
• Correct the interrupt pointer setting in
the PLC system setting of the PLC 11
MAINTENANCE AND
• Take measures so that an interrupt is
not issued from the module where the
INSPECTION
1311 An interrupt request from the module interrupt pointer setting in the PLC Q00J/Q00/
where interrupt pointer setting has not system setting of the PLC parameter Q01 *5
been made in the PLC parameter dialog dialog box has not been made. QnPRH
box was detected. Correct the interrupt setting of the QnU
12
network parameter. Correct the
TROUBLESHOOTING
interrupt setting of the intelligent
function module buffer memory.
Correct the basic program of the
QD51.
1320 This suggests a CPU module hardware
The H/W self-diagnostics detected a
fault. (Contact your local Mitsubishi QnU*12
1321 LAN controller failure.
representative.)
APPENDICES
INDEX


12 - 73
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
At power ON/
At reset/When
Off/ Flicker/ Stop/ intelligent
On On Continue*2 function
module is
accessed
SP. UNIT Module No.
1401 –
DOWN (Slot No.)
At power ON/
Off Flicker Stop*2
At reset
When an
intelligent
Off/ Flicker/ Stop/ function
On On *2 module access
Continue
instruction is
executed
SP. UNIT Module No. Program error
1402
DOWN (Slot No.) location
During
execution of
Off Flicker Stop
FROM/TO
instruction set

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
• There was no response from the When the unsupported module is
intelligent function module/special mounted, remove it.
function module in the initial When the corresponding module is
processing. supported, this suggests the intelligent QCPU 10
• The size of the buffer memory of the function module/special function Rem
intelligent function module/special module, CPU module and/or base unit
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
function module is invalid. is expecting a hardware fault (Contact
• The unsupported module is mounted. your local Mitsubishi representative.)
1401
When PLC parameter I/O allocation
was being made, there was no return
The CPU module, base unit and/or the 11
signal from the special function module
special function module that was
MAINTENANCE AND
during initial processing stage.(When
accessed is experiencing a hardware QnA
error is generated, the head I/O number
INSPECTION
of the special function module that
representative.)
corresponds to the common information
is stored.)
12
This suggests the intelligient function
TROUBLESHOOTING
The intelligent function module/special module/special function module , CPU
QCPU
function module was accessed in the module and/or base unit is expecting a
Rem
program, but there was no response. hardware fault (Contact your local
1402 The special function module was

accessed during the execution of a The CPU module, base unit and/or the
FROM/TO instruction set, but there was special function module that was
no response. accessed is experiencing a hardware QnA
APPENDICES
(When an error is generated, the fault.(Contact your local Mitsubishi
program error location corresponding to representative.)
the individual information is stored.)
INDEX


12 - 75
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
When an END
Off/ Flicker/ Stop/
instruction
On On Continue*2
executed
SP. UNIT Module No.

1403 –
DOWN (Slot No.)
Off/ Flicker/ Stop/

Always
On On Continue*2
CONTROL- Module No. At power ON/

1411 – Off Flicker Stop
BUS. ERR. (Slot No.) At reset
During
CONTROL- Module No. Program error execution of
1412 Off Flicker Stop
BUS. ERR. (Slot No.) location FROM/TO
instruction set

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
When the unsupported module is
mounted, remove it.
When the corresponding module is
supported, this suggests the intelligent 10
• The unsupported module is mounted. QCPU
function module/special function
module , CPU module and/or base unit
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
is expecting a hardware fault (Contact
• There was no response from the
1403 intelligent function module/special 11
function module when the END
MAINTENANCE AND
instruction is executed. The CPU module, base module and/or
• An error is detected at the intelligent the intelligent function module/special
INSPECTION
QCPU
function module/special function function module that was accessed is
Rem
module. experiencing a hardware fault. (Contact
• The I/O module (intelligent function your local Mitsubishi representative.)
module/special function module) is 12
nearly removed, completely removed,
TROUBLESHOOTING
or mounted during running.
When performing a parameter I/O
allocation the intelligent function
module/special function module could
not be accessed during initial
communications.
1411
(On error occurring, the head I/O Rem
number of the corresponding intelligent
APPENDICES
again, the intelligent function module/
module is stored in the common
special function module, CPU module
information.)
or base unit is faulty. (Contact your local
The FROM/TO instruction is not
executable, due to a control bus error
with the intelligent function module/
1412 special function module.
(On error occurring, the program error
INDEX
location is stored in the individual

information.)


12 - 77
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
CONTROL-
BUS. ERR.
CONTROL- Module No.

1414 – Off Flicker Stop Always
BUS. ERR. (Slot No.)

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
• Remove the CPU module
incompatible with the multiple CPU
system from the main base unit, or
replace the CPU module 10
Q00J/Q00/
In a multiple CPU system, a CPU incompatible with the multiple CPU
Q01*4
module incompatible with the multiple system with a CPU module
Qn(H)*4
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
CPU system is mounted. compatible with the multiple CPU
system. QnPH
1413 • The intelligent function module, CPU
module or base unit is faulty. (Contact 11
MAINTENANCE AND
An error is detected on the system bus.
INSPECTION
• Self-diagnosis error of the system
again, the intelligent function module, QCPU
bus.
CPU module or base unit is faulty. Rem
• Self-diagnosis error of the CPU
(Contact your local Mitsubishi
module
representative.) 12
• Remove the CPU module
TROUBLESHOOTING
system from the main base unit, or
replace the CPU module with a CPU Q00J/Q00/
• Fault of a loaded module was
module compatible with the multiple
detected. Q01*4
CPU system.
• In a multiple CPU system, a CPU Qn(H)*4
module incompatible with the multiple QnPH
CPU system is mounted. QnU
again, the intelligent function module,
APPENDICES
1414 CPU module or base unit is faulty.
representative.)
Q00J/Q00/
Q01*4
Qn(H)
An error is detected on the system bus. QnPH
CPU module or base unit is faulty.
QnPRH
INDEX

QnU
representative.)
Rem


12 - 79
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
When an END
instruction
executed
CONTROL- Module No.
BUS. ERR. (Slot No.)
At power-ON/
At reset/ When
an END
instruction
executed
CONTROL- Module No. At power ON/

BUS. ERR. (Slot No.) At reset
CONTROL-
BUS. ERR.
At power-ON/
CONTROL- At reset/ At
BUS.ERR. Switching
execution
SYS. UNIT
DOWN

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
Q00J/Q00/Q01
Qn(H)*4
QnPH
QnPRH
10
Reset the CPU module and RUN it QnU
Fault of the main or extension base unit
1415 again. If the same error is displayed Rem
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
was detected.
CPU module or base unit is faulty.
Qn(H)*8
representative.) QnPH*8 11
MAINTENANCE AND
Qn(H)*4
System bus fault was detected at
QnPH
INSPECTION
power-on or reset.
1416 QnU
In a multiple CPU system, a bus fault Reset the CPU module and RUN it Q00/Q01*4
was detected at power-on or reset. again. If the same error is displayed QnU 12
TROUBLESHOOTING
A reset signal error was detected on the CPU module or base unit is faulty.
1417 QnPRH
system bus. (Contact your local Mitsubishi
representative.)
In the redundant system, at power-on/ again. If the same error is displayed
reset or switching system, the control again, the CPU module, the Q6 WRB,
1418 system cannot access the extension or hardware of extension cable is faulty. QnPRH*9
base unit since it failed to acquire the (Contact your local Mitsubishi
APPENDICES
access right. representative, explaining a detailed
This suggests a system management

Hardware fault at the system module AS92R hardware fault.
1421 Q4AR
management module AS92R. (Contact your local Mitsubishi
representative.)
INDEX


12 - 81
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
1430 –
MULTI-C.BUS At power ON/

ERR. At reset
Module No.
(CPU No.)
1432
1433
1434
MULTI-C.BUS Module No.

– Off Flicker Stop Always
ERR. (CPU No.)
1435

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
The error of host CPU is detected in the again, the CPU module has hardware
1430
Multiple CPU high speed bus. failure. (Contact your local Mitsubishi 10
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
• Check the main base unit mounting
status of the CPU module.
The communication error with other • Reset the CPU module and RUN it 11
1431 CPU is detected in the Multiple CPU again. If the same error is displayed
MAINTENANCE AND
high speed bus. again, the CPU module has hardware
failure. (Contact your local Mitsubishi
INSPECTION
QnU*10
again. If the same error is displayed 12
The communication time out with other
again, the CPU module has hardware
TROUBLESHOOTING
1432 CPU is detected in the Multiple CPU
high speed bus.
1433 • Take noise reduction measures.
1434 • Check the main base unit mounting
The communication error with other • Reset the CPU module and RUN it
CPU is detected in the Multiple CPU again. If the same error is displayed
APPENDICES
1435 high speed bus. again, the CPU module has hardware
INDEX


12 - 83
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
1436

ERR. At reset
1437

ERR. At reset
1500 AC/DC DOWN – – On Off Continue Always
DUAL DC
– – On On Continue Always
DOWN 5V
1510
Base No./
SINGLE PS.
Power supply – On On Continue Always
DOWN
No.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
1436
failure. (Contact your local Mitsubishi 10
The error of the Multiple CPU high
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
speed main base unit is detected. (An
• Check the main base unit mounting
error of the multiple CPU high speed
transmission was detected.)
• Reset the CPU module and RUN it 11
1437 again. If the same error is displayed QnU*10
MAINTENANCE AND
INSPECTION
Reset the CPU module and Run it
An error of the multiple CPU high speed again. If the same error is displayed 12
main base unit was detected. (An error again, the CPU module has hardware
TROUBLESHOOTING
1439
of the multiple CPU high speed failure. (Contact your local Mitsubishi
transmission was detected.) representative, explaining a detailed
• A momentary power supply
1500 interruption has occurred. Check the power supply.
Rem
• The power supply went off.
The power supply voltage (100 to
240VAC) of either of the two power
APPENDICES
Check the supply voltage of the power
supply modules on the power supply
supply module. If the voltage is
duplexing extension base unit dropped Q4AR
abnormal then replace the power supply
to or below 85% of the rated voltage.
module.
(This can be detected from the control
1510 system of the redundant system.)
Qn(H)*6
The power supply voltage of either of Check the power supplied to the QnPH*6
INDEX
redundant power supply modules on redundant power supply modules QnPRH

the redundant base unit dropped. mounted on the redundant base unit. QnU*13
Rem


12 - 85
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
DC DOWN 5V – – Off Flicker Stop Always
1520
Base No./
SINGLE PS.
Power supply – On On Continue Always
ERROR
No.
DC DOWN
1530 – – On On Continue Always
24V
1600
Off
BATTERY
Drive Name – On Continue Always
ERROR*3
1601
1602 On
FLASH ROM When writing

1610 – – On On Continue
ERROR to ROM

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
The voltage(100 to 240VAC) of the
power supply module on the extension
Check the supply voltage of the power
base unit dropped to or below 85% of
the rated voltage.
supply module. If the voltage is
Q4AR 10
abnormal then replace the power supply
module.
system of the stand-alone system or
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
1520 redundant system.)
Qn(H)*6
Hardware fault of the redundant power
On the redundant base unit, the one QnPH*6
supply module. (Contact your local
damaged redundant power supply
Mitsubishi representative, explaining a
QnPRH 11
module was detected. QnU*13
detailed description of the problem.)
MAINTENANCE AND
Rem
INSPECTION
The 24 VDC power supplied to the
system management module AS92R
has dropped below 90% of the rated
Check the 24VDC power supplied to the
1530 voltage.
system management module AS92R.
Q4AR 12
TROUBLESHOOTING
system or standby system of the
redundant system.)
• The battery voltage in the CPU • Change the battery.
module has dropped below stipulated • If the battery is for program memory,
1600 level. standard RAM or for the back-up
• The lead connector of the CPU power function, install a lead
module battery is not connected. connector.
QnA
APPENDICES
Qn(H)
Voltage of the battery on memory card 1
1601 Change the battery. QnPH
has dropped below stipulated level.
QnPRH
QnU
Voltage of the battery on memory card 2
1602 Change the battery. QnA
has dropped below stipulated level.
The number of writing to flash ROM
(standard ROM and system securement
1610 Change the CPU module. QnU
INDEX
area) exceeds 100,000 times.

(Number of writings >100,000 times)


12 - 87
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
Module No.
(Slot No.)
When an END
UNIT VERIFY [For Remote I/ Off/ Flicker/ Stop/
2000 – instruction
ERR. O network] On On Continue*1
executed
Network No./
Station No.
When an END
UNIT VERIFY Module No. Off/ Flicker/ Stop/
ERR. (CPU No.) On On Continue*2
executed
*2 Either error stop or continue can be selected for each module by the parameters.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
10
Error
Corresponding
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
CPU
(SD0)
Replace the CPU module incompatible
In a multiple CPU system, a CPU
with the multiple CPU system with a Qn(H)*3
module incompatible with the multiple
CPU system is mounted.
CPU module compatible with the QnPH 11
MAINTENANCE AND
Read the error common information at
the GX Developer, and check and/or
INSPECTION
The I/O module status is different from
change the module that corresponds to
the I/O module information at power
the numerical value (module number)
ON.
there. Q00J/Q00/Q01
• I/O module (or intelligent function
Alternatively, monitor special registers
12
module) is not installed properly or
SD150 to SD157 using GX Developer,
TROUBLESHOOTING
installed on the base unit.
and check and replace the module
where the bit of its data is "1".
2000
error using the peripheral device, and
check and/or change the module that
corresponds to the numerical value
(module number) there.
I/O module information power ON is QnA
• Alternatively, monitor the special
APPENDICES
changed. Qn(H)
registers SD1400 to SD1431 at a
• I/O module (or intelligent function QnPH
peripheral device, and change the
module/special function module) not QnPRH
fuse at the output module whose bit
installed properly or installed on the QnU
has a value of "1".
base unit. Rem
the extension cable and the
INDEX
grounding status of the GOT.

During operation, a module was During operation, do not mount a Q00J/Q00/
2001 mounted on the slot where the empty module on the slot where the empty Q01*3
setting of the CPU module was made. setting of the CPU module was made. QnU
*3 The function version is B or later.

*4 The function version is A.

12 - 89
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
2010
BASE LAY At power ON/

Base No. – Off Flicker Stop
ERROR At reset
2011

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
• More than applicable number of
• Use the allowable number of Q00J/Q00/
extension base units have been used.
extension base units or less. Q01*3
2010 • When a GOT was bus-connected, the
CPU module was reset while the
• Power on the Progammable QnPRH 10
Controller and GOT again. Q02U
power of the GOT was OFF.
Q00J/Q00/
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
The QA1S6 B, QA6 B or Do not use the QA1S6 B, QA6 B or
Q01*3
2011 QA6ADP+A5 B/A6 B was used as QA6ADP+A5 B/A6 B as the base
QnPRH
the base unit. unit.
QnU
11
MAINTENANCE AND
INSPECTION
12
TROUBLESHOOTING
APPENDICES
INDEX


12 - 91
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
2012
BASE LAY At power ON/

Base No. – Off Flicker Stop
ERROR At reset
2013
At power-ON/
At reset/ When
EXT.CABLE
2020 – – Off Flicker Stop an END
ERR.
instruction
executed

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
The GOT is bus-connected to the main
base unit of the redundant system.
The following errors are detected in the • Remove a bus connection cable for
CPU redundant system compatible with GOT connection connected to the
10
the extension base unit. main base unit.
• The base unit other than the • Use the Q6 WRB (fixed to the
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
Q6 WRB is connected to the extension stage No.1)
extension stage No.1. • Use the CPU module compatible with
• The base unit is connected to any the extension base unit for the other
one of the extension stages No.2 to system. 11
2012 No.7, although the Q6 WRB does • Do not use the Q5 B, QA1S6 B,
MAINTENANCE AND
not exist in the extension stage No.1 . QA6 B, or QA6ADP+A5 B/A6 B
• The other system CPU module is for the base unit.
INSPECTION
incompatible with the extension base • Use the main base unit which has the
unit. same number of slots.
• The Q5 B, QA1S6 B, QA6 B, or • Hardware failure of the Q6 WRB.
QA6ADP+A5 B/A6 B is connected. (Contact your local Mitsubishi
12
• The number of slots of the main base representative, explaining a detailed
TROUBLESHOOTING
unit for both systems is different. description of the problem.) QnPRH*6
Information of the Q6 WRB cannot
be read correctly.
Hardware failure of the Q6 WRB.
Stage number of the Q6 WRB is
2013 recognized as other than extension
stage No.1 in the redundant system.
APPENDICES
Check to see if the extension cable
The following errors are detected in the between the main base unit and the
redundant system. Q6 WRB is connected correctly. If not,
• At power-on/reset, the standby connect it after turning OFF the main
system has detected the error in the base unit where the extension cable will
path between the control system and be connected.
2020
the Q6 WRB. If the cable is connected correctly,
• The standby system has detected the hardware of the CPU module,
INDEX
error in the path between the host Q6 WRB, or extension cable is faulty.
system CPU and the Q6 WRB at (Contact your local Mitsubishi
END processing. representative, explaining a detailed


12 - 93
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
SP. UNIT LAY Module No. At power ON/

ERR. (Slot No.) At reset

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
The slot to which the QI60 is mounted is
set to other than Inteli (intelligent Make setting again to match the PLC Qn(H)*3
function module) or Interrupt (interrupt parameter I/O assignment with the QnPH
module) in the I/O assignment of PLC actual loading status. QnPRH
10
parameter.
• In the I/O assignment setting of PLC
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
parameter, Inteli (intelligent function
module) was allocated to an I/O
module or vice versa.
• In the I/O assignment setting of PLC 11
parameter, a module other than CPU
• Make the PLC parameter’s I/O
MAINTENANCE AND
(or nothing) was allocated to the
assignment setting again so it is
location of a CPU module or vice Qn(H)
INSPECTION
consistent with the actual status of
versa. QnPH
the intelligent function module and
• In the I/O assignment setting of the QnPRH
the CPU module.
PLC parameter, switch setting was QnU
made to the module that has no
• Delete the switch setting in the I/O
Rem 12
assignment setting of the PLC
switch setting.
TROUBLESHOOTING
parameter.
• In the I/O assignment setting of the
PLC parameter dialog box, the
2100
number of points assigned to the
intelligent function module is less
than the number of points of the
mounted module.
• In the parameter I/O allocation
settings, an Inteli (intelligent function
APPENDICES
module) was allocated to a location
reserved for an I/O module or vice
versa.
• In the parameter I/O allocation
settings, a module other than CPU (or Reset the parameter I/O allocation
nothing) was allocated to a location setting to conform to the actual status of
Q00J/Q00/Q01
reserved for a CPU module or vice the intelligent function module and the
versa. CPU module.
INDEX
• In the I/O assignment setting of the

PLC parameter dialog box, the
number of points assigned to the
intelligent function module is less
than the number of points of the
mounted module.


12 - 95
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic

2101

– Off Flicker Stop
2102

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
In PLC parameter I/O allocation
settings, a special function module was Reset the PLC parameter I/O allocation
2100 allocated to a location reserved for an I/ setting to conform with the actual status QnA
O module. Or, the opposite has of the special function modules. 10
happened.
13 or more A-series special function Reduce the A series special function
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
modules (except for the A1SI61) that modules (except the A1SI61) that can
Qn(H)
can initiate an interrupt to the CPU make an interrupt start to the CPU
module have been installed. module to 12 or less.
2101
13 or more special function modules Keep the number of special function 11
(not counting the A(1S)I61) capable of modules that can initiate an interrupt
QnA
MAINTENANCE AND
sending an interrupt to the CPU module (with the exception of the A(1S)I61
have been installed. module) to 12 or fewer.
INSPECTION
Seven or more A1SD51S have been Keep the number of A1SD51S to six or
Qn(H)
installed. fewer.
2102 Seven or more serial communication Keep the number of serial
modules (excludes A (1S) J71QC24) communication modules (excludes QnA 12
have been installed. A(1S)J71QU24) installed to six or fewer.
TROUBLESHOOTING
APPENDICES
INDEX


12 - 97
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic



12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
• Reduce the number of QI60/A1SI61
modules mounted in the single CPU
system to one.
• Change the number of QI60/A1SI61 10
• Two or more QI60/A1SI61 modules modules set to the same control CPU
are mounted in a single CPU system. to only one in the multiple CPU
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
• Two or more QI60/A1SI61 modules system.
Qn(H)*3
are set to the same control CPU in a • Reduce the number of A1SI61
QnPH
multiple CPU system. modules to only one in the multiple
• Two or more A1SI61 modules are CPU system. When using an interrupt 11
loaded in a multiple CPU system. module with each QCPU in a multiple
MAINTENANCE AND
CPU system, replace it with the QI60.
2103 (Use one A1SI61 module + max.
INSPECTION
three QI60 modules or only the QI60
modules.)
Two or more QI60, A1SI61 interrupt Qn(H)
modules have been mounted.
Install only 1 QI60, A1SI61 module.
QnPRH 12
The QI60 is mounted. Remove the QI60. Rem
TROUBLESHOOTING
Two or more A1SI61 interrupt modules
Install only 1 AI61 module. QnA
have been mounted.
Two or more QI60 modules are Q00J/Q00/
Reduce the QI61 modules to one.
mounted. Q01*5
Two or more QI60 modules where • Reduce the QI60 modules to one. Q00J/Q00/
interrupt pointer setting has not been • Make interrupt pointer setting to the Q01*3
made are mounted. second QI60 module and later. QnU
APPENDICES
At the MELSECNET/MINI auto refresh Reset the network parameter
network parameter settings, the module MELSECNET/MINI auto refresh unit
2104 allocation that was set is different from module allocation setting so that it QnA
the actual module models at the station conforms to the station number of the
numbers in the link system. module that is actually linked.
INDEX


12 - 99
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic

SP.UNIT LAY At power ON/

2106 Module No. – Off Flicker Stop
ERR. At reset

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
There are too many special function
modules that can use dedicated
instructions allocated (number of
modules installed). 10
(The total of the figures indicated below
is above 1344.)
Reduce the number of special function
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
2105 (AD59 modules installed 5) QnA
(AD57(S1)/AD58 modules installed 8) modules installed.
(AJ71C24(S3/S6/S8) modules installed 10)
(AJ71UC24 modules installed 10)
(AJ71C21(S1) modules installed 29)
11
(AJ71PT32-S3/AJ71T32-S3 modules installed 125)
(AJ71QC24(R2,R4) modules installed 29)
(AJ71ID1(2)-R4 modules installed 8)
+(AD75 modules installed 12)
total 1344
MAINTENANCE AND
*: When the expansion mode is used.
INSPECTION
• Three or more MELSECNET/H and
• Reduce the MELSECNET/H and CC-
CC-Link IE controller network
Link IE controller network modules up
modules in total are mounted in the
to two or less in the entire system.
entire system.
• Reduce the Ethernet interface
Q02U 12
• Three or more Ethernet interface
modules up to two or less in the entire
TROUBLESHOOTING
modules are mounted in the entire
system.
system.
• Five or more MELSECNET/H and
• Reduce the MELSECNET/H and CC-
CC-Link IE controller network
Link IE controller network modules up
modules in total are mounted in the
to four or less in the entire system.
2106 entire system. QnU*7
• Reduce the Ethernet interface
• Five or more Ethernet interface
modules up to four or less in the
modules are mounted in the entire
entire system.
APPENDICES
system.
• Three or more CC-Link IE controller • Reduce the CC-Link IE controller
network modules are mounted in the network modules up to two or less in
entire system. the entire system. Qn(H)*6
• Five or more MELSECNET/H and • Reduce the total number of the QnPH*9
CC-Link IE controller network MELSECNET/H and CC-Link IE QnPRH*9
modules in total are mounted in the controller network modules up to four
entire system. or less in the entire system.
INDEX


12 - 101
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic


12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
• Five or more MELSECNET/H
• Reduce the number of MELSECNET/ Qn(H)
modules have been installed.
H modules to four or less. QnPH
• Five or more Q series Ethernet
interface modules have been
• Reduce the number of Q series QnPRH 10
Ethernet modules to four or less. Rem
installed.
• Two or more MELSECNET/H • Reduce the MELSECNET/H modules
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
modules were installed. to one or less.
• Two or more Q series Ethernet • Reduce the Q series Ethernet
Q00J/Q00/Q01
modules were installed. modules to one or less.
• Three or more Q series CC-Link • Reduce the Q series CC-Link 11
modules were installed. modules to two or less.
MAINTENANCE AND
Q00J/Q00/Q01
• The same network number or same Qn(H)
INSPECTION
• Check the network number and
station number is duplicated in the QnPH
station number.
MELSECNET/H network system. QnPRH
2106 Rem
• Five or more AJ71QLP21 & 12
AJ71QBR11 modules are installed.
TROUBLESHOOTING
• Three or more AJ71AP21/R21 & • Reduce the AJ71QLP21 and
AJ71AT21B modules are installed. AJ71QBR11 modules to four or less.
• The total number of installed • Reduce the AJ71AP21/R21 and
AJ71QLP21, AJ71QBR11, AJ71AT21B modules to two or less.
AJ71AP21/R21, and AJ71AT21B • Reduce the AJ71QLP21,
modules exceeds five. AJ71QBR11, AJ71AP21/R21 and QnA
• The same network numbers or AJ71AT21B modules to a total of four
identical station numbers exist in the or less.
APPENDICES
MELSECNET/10 network system. • Check the network Nos. and station
• Two or more master or load stations Nos.
exist simultaneously at the • Check the station Nos.
MELSECNET(II) or MELSECNET/B
data link system.
INDEX


12 - 103
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
2107
Stop

– Off Flicker
2108 ERR. (Slot No.) At reset
Stop/
2109
Continue*2
2110
When
SP. UNIT Module No. Program error Off/ Flicker/ Stop/
instruction
ERROR (Slot No.) location On On Continue*1
executed
2111

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
Make the PLC parameter’s I/O
The start X/Y set in the PLC
assignment setting again so it is
parameter’s I/O assignment settings is
2107 consistent with the actual status of the
overlapped with the one for another
intelligent function module/special
Rem 10
module.
function modules.
• Network module A1SJ71LP21,
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
A1SJ71BR11, A1SJ71AP21,
A1SJ71AR21, or A1SJ71AT21B
dedicated for the A2USCPU has Replace the network module to
Qn(H)
been installed. MELSECNET/H module. 11
2108 • Network module A1SJ71QLP21 or
MAINTENANCE AND
A1SJ71QBR11 dedicated for the
Q2AS has been installed.
INSPECTION
A(1S)J71LP21 or A(1S)J71BR11 for
Replace the network module to
use with the AnUCPU network module QnA
A(1S)J71QLP21 or A(1S)J71QBR11.
has been installed.
The control system and standby system 12
module configurations are different Check the module configuration of the
TROUBLESHOOTING
2109 Q4AR
when a redundant system is in the standby system.
backup mode.
• The location designated by the
FROM/TO instruction set is not the
function module.
• The module that does not include • Read the individual information of the Q00J/Q00/Q01
buffer memory has been specified by error using the GX Developer, check Qn(H)*3
APPENDICES
2110 the FROM/TO instruction. the FROM/TO instruction that QnPH
• The intelligent function module/ corresponds to that numerical value QnPRH
special function module, Network (program error location), and correct QnU
module being accessed is faulty. when necessary.
• Station not loaded was specified • The intelligent function module/
using the instruction whose target special function module that was
was the CPU share memory. accessed is experiencing a hardware
• The location designated by a link fault. Therefore, change the faulty
INDEX
direct device (J \ ) is not a network module. Alternatively, contact your

module. local Mitsubishi representative.
2111 • The I/O module (intelligent function
module/special function module) was
nearly removed, completely removed,
or mounted during running.


12 - 105
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
When
instruction
2112 executed/
ERROR (Slot No.) location On On Continue*1
STOP
RUN
When
instruction
SP. UNIT Program error Off/ Flicker/ Stop/
2113 FFFFH (fixed) executed/
ERROR location On On Continue*1
STOP
RUN

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
• Read the individual information of the
error using a peripheral device, and
• The module other than special
check the special function module
function module is specified by the
dedicated instruction (network 10
special function module dedicated
instruction) that corresponds to the
instruction.
value (program error part) to make
Or, it is not the corresponding special
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
modification. QnA
function module.
• Set the module model by PLC
• The module model specified by the
parameter I/O assignment according
special function module dedicated
instruction and that specified by the
to the special function module 11
dedicated instruction setting.
parameter I/O assignment is different.
MAINTENANCE AND
Example) Although AJ71QC24N is
2112 used actually, AJ71QC24 is set.
INSPECTION
• The module other than intelligent
module is specified by the intelligent
function module/special function 12
module dedicated instruction.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Or, it is not the corresponding Read the individual information of the QCPU
intelligent function module/special error using a peripheral device, and Rem
function module. check the special function module /
• There is no network No. specified by special function module dedicated
the network dedicated instruction. instruction (network instruction) that
Or the relay target network does not corresponds to the value (program error
exit. part) to make modification.
APPENDICES
The module other than network module QnA
2113 is specified bythe network dedicated Qn(H)
instruction. QnPH
INDEX


12 - 107
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
2114
2115
When
instruction
executed/
STOP
RUN
2116

ERROR (Slot No.) location On On Continue
2117
When
2118 instruction
executed

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
An instruction, which on execution Q00J/Q00/
specifies other stations, has been used Q01*3
2114 for specifying the host CPU. (An Qn(H)*3
instruction that does not allow the host
10
QnPH
CPU to be specified). QnU
An instruction, which on execution
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
Q00J/Q00/
specifies the host CPU, has been used
Q01*3
2115 for specifying other CPUs. (An
instruction that does not allow other Qn(H)*3
stations to be specified).
Read the individual information of the QnPH 11
error using the GX Developer, check the
• An instruction that does not allow the
program corresponding that value
MAINTENANCE AND
under the control of another CPU to Q00J/Q00/
(program error location), and make
be specified is being used for a Q01*3
INSPECTION
correction.
2116 similar task. Qn(H)*3
• Instruction was executed for the A or QnPH
QnA module under control of another QnU 12
CPU.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Q00J/Q00/
A CPU module that cannot be specified Q01*3
2117 in the instruction dedicated to the Qn(H)*3
multiple CPU system was specified. QnPH
QnU
• When performing the online module
change in a multiple CPU system,
When the online module change setting correct the program so that access
APPENDICES
is set to be “enabled” in the PLC will not be made to the intelligent
parameter in a multiple CPU system, function module controlled by the Qn(H)*3
2118 intelligent function module controlled by other CPU. QnPH
other CPU using the FROM instruction/ • When accessing the intelligent QnU*7
intelligent function module device function module controlled by the
(U \G ) is specified. other CPU in a multiple CPU system,
set the online module change setting
to be “disabled” by parameter.
INDEX


12 - 109
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
2120
SP. UNIT LAY At power ON/

ERR. At reset
2122

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
Q00J/Q00/
The locations of the Q5 B/Q6 B,
Q01*4
2120 QA1S6 B/QA6 B, and Check the location of the base unit.
Qn(H)
QA6ADP+A5 B/A6 B are improper.
QnPH
10
Check the loading position of the CPU Qn(H)
The CPU module is installed to other
2121 module and reinstall it at the correct QnPH
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
than the CPU slot and slots 0 to 2.
slot. Rem
Qn(H)
The QA1S6 B/QA6 B and
Replace the main base unit with a QnPH
2122 QA6ADP+A5 B/A6 B are used for
usable one. QnPRH 11
the main base unit.
Rem
MAINTENANCE AND
INSPECTION
12
TROUBLESHOOTING
APPENDICES
INDEX


12 - 111
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
SP. UNIT LAY At power ON/

ERR. At reset

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
• A module is mounted on the 65th slot • Remove the module mounted on the
or later slot. 65th slot or later slot.
• A module is mounted on the slot • Remove the module mounted on the
whose number is greater than the slot whose number is greater than the 10
Qn(H)
number of slots specified at [Slots] in number of slots specified at [Slots] in
QnPH
[Standard setting] of the base setting. [Standard setting] of the base setting.
QnPRH
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
QnU*7
whose number of I/O points exceeds slot whose number of I/O points
Rem
4096 points. exceeds 4096 points.
• A module is mounted on the slot • Replace the module with the one 11
whose number of I/O points strides whose number of occupied points
MAINTENANCE AND
4096 points. does not exceed 4096 points.
INSPECTION
or later slot. 37th slot or later slot.
whose number is greater than the slot whose number is greater than the
number of slots specified at [Slots] in number of slots specified at [Slots] in 12
TROUBLESHOOTING
Q02U
2124 2048 points. exceeds 2048 points.
• A module is mounted on the slot • Replace the module with the one
2048 points. does not exceed 2048 points.
or later slot. (The 17th slot or later slot 25th slot or later slot. (The 17th slot or
APPENDICES
for the Q00J.) later slot for the Q00J.)
whose number is greater than the slot whose number is greater than the
number of slots specified at [Slots] in number of slots specified at [Slots] in
• A module is mounted on the slot • Remove the module mounted on the Q00J/Q00/Q01
1024 points. (256 points for the exceeds 1024 points. (256 points for
INDEX
Q00J.) the Q00J.)

• A module is mounted on the slot • Replace the module with the one
1024 points. (256 points for the does not exceed 1024 points. (256
Q00J.) points for the Q00J.)
5 or more extension base units were Remove 5 or more extension base Q00J/Q00/
added. (3 bases for Q00J) units. (3 bases for Q00J) Q01*4


12 - 113
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
2125
SP. UNIT LAY. Module No. At power ON/

2126
SP.UNIT LAY At power-ON/

2128 Module No. – Off Flicker Stop
ERR. At reset
2150
At power ON/
At reset/
SP. UNIT VER. Module No.
– Off Flicker Stop At writing to
ERR. (Slot No.)
programmable
controller
2151

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
• Install a usable module.
• A module which the QCPU cannot
• The intelligent function module/
recognise has been installed.
special function module is QCPU
2125 • There was no response form the
experiencing a hardware fault. Rem 10
function module.
representative.)
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
• Mount modules on the available slots
so that the empty slots will be located
CPU module locations in a multiple
on the right-hand side of the CPU
CPU system are either of the following.
• There are empty slots between the
module. 11
• Remove the module mounted on the
QCPU and QCPU/motion controller.
MAINTENANCE AND
left-hand side of the High
• A module other than the High Qn(H)*3
2126 Performance model QCPU/Process
INSPECTION
Performance model QCPU/Process QnPH
CPU, and mount the High
CPU (including the motion controller)
Performance model QCPU/Process
is mounted on the left-hand side of
CPU on the empty slot.
the High Performance model QCPU/
Mount the motion CPU on the right- 12
Process CPU.
hand side of the High Performance
TROUBLESHOOTING
model QCPU/Process CPU.
The unusable module is mounted on
• Remove the unusable module from
2128 the extension base unit in the redundant QnPRH*6
the extension base unit.
system.
• Change the intelligent function
module for the one compatible with
In a multiple CPU system, the control the multiple CPU system (function Q00J/Q00/
CPU of the intelligent function module version B). Q01
APPENDICES
2150
incompatible with the multiple CPU • Change the setting of the control QnPH
system is set to other than CPU No.1. CPU of the intelligent function module QuU
system to CPU No.1.
Either of the following modules
incompatible with the redundant system Use either of the following modules
has been mounted in a redundant compatible with the redundant system.
system. • CC-Link IE controller network
INDEX
2151 QnPRH
• CC-Link IE controller network modules
modules • MELSECNET/H
• MELSECNET/H • Ethernet interface modules
• Ethernet interface modules


12 - 115
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
At power ON/
MISSING
2200 Drive Name – Off Flicker Stop At reset/
PARA.
STOP RUN
2210
At power ON/
BOOT ERROR Drive name – Off Flicker Stop
At reset
2211

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
• Check and correct the valid
parameter drive settings made by the
There is no parameter file in the drive Qn(H)
DIP switches.
specified as valid parameter drive by
• Set the parameter file to the drive
QnPH 10
the DIP switches. QnPRH
specified as valid parameter drive by
2200
the DIP switches.
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
There is no parameter file at the Set the parameter file to the program
Q00J/Q00/Q01
program memory. memory.
Parameter file does not exist in all Set a parameter file in a drive to be
QuU
drives where parameters will be valid. valid. 11
Q00J/Q00/
MAINTENANCE AND
Q01*3
The contents of the boot file are Qn(H)
INSPECTION
Check the boot setting.
incorrect. QnPH
QnPRH
2210 QnU
Check and correct the valid parameter
12
There is no boot file in the drive
drive settings made by the DIP
TROUBLESHOOTING
designated by the parameter enabled
switches. QnA
drive switch even though the Boot DIP
Set the boot file to the drive specified by
switch is ON.
the parameter drive DIP switches.
• Reboot.
• CPU module hardware fault. (Contact Qn(H)
2211 File formatting is failed at a boot. your local Mitsubishi representative, QnPRH
explaining a detailed description of QnU
the problem.)
APPENDICES
INDEX


12 - 117
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
2220
RESTORE At power ON/

ERROR At reset
2221
2300
When memory
card is
inserted or
removed/
When memory
ICM. OPE. Off/ Flicker/ Stop/ card is
Drive name – *1
2301 ERROR On On Continue inserted
When memory
card is
2302
inserted or
removed

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
• The device information (number of
points) backuped by the device data
• Set the number of device points at the
backup function is different from the
number of device points of the PLC
time of backup to the device point 10
setting in [PLC parameter]. Then,
parameter.
turn ON from OFF power supply, or
2220 After this error occurred, perform QnU
reset the CPU and cancel reset.
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
restore per power-on/reset until the
• Delete the backuped data, and turn
number of device points is identical to
ON from OFF power supply, or reset
the number of device points in the PLC
the CPU and cancel reset.
parameter, or until the backup data is 11
deleted.
MAINTENANCE AND
• The device information backuped by
the device data backup function is
INSPECTION
incomplete. (Turning power supply
OFF or reset is suspected.)
2221 Reset the CPU module and run it again. QnU
Do not return the data when this error
occurs. Also, delete the incomplete 12
device information at the time of this
TROUBLESHOOTING
error occurrence.
• A memory card was removed without
switching the memory card in/out • Remove memory card after placing
switch OFF. the memory card in/out switch OFF.
2300
• The memory card in/out switch is • Turn on the card insert switch after
QnA
turned ON although a memory card is inserting a memory card.
Qn(H)
not actually installed.
QnPH
• The memory card has not been
APPENDICES
QnPRH
formatted.
• Format memory card. QnU
• Memory card format status is
• Reformat memory card.
incorrect.
• Write the QCPU file to the Flash card.
• The QCPU file does not exist in the
2301 Flash card.
SRAM card failure is detected. (It Format SRAM card after changing
occurs when automatic format is not battery of SRAM card.
set.) • Write a parameter, which set the file QnU
INDEX
• Writing parameters was performed register at “Not available”, in CPU,

during setting file registers. and then perform the operation.
QnA
A memory card that cannot be used • Format memory card. Qn(H)
2302 with the CPU module has been • Reformat memory card. QnPH
installed. • Check memory card. QnPRH
QnU


12 - 119
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
At power ON/
At reset/
FILE SET File name/ Parameter
2400 Off Flicker Stop At writing to
ERROR Drive name number
programmable
controller

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
• Execute automatic write to standard
ROM on the CPU module which is
Automatic write to standard ROM was
compatible with automatic write to
performed on the CPU module that is
standard ROM. 10
incompatible with automatic write to
• Using GX Developer, perform write of Qn(H)*3
standard ROM.
parameters and programs to standard QnPH
(Memory card where automatic write to
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
ROM. QnPRH
standard ROM was selected in the boot
• Change the memory card for the one
file was fitted and the parameter enable
where automatic write to standard
drive was set to the memory card.)
ROM has not been set, and perform 11
boot operation from the memory card.
MAINTENANCE AND
2400
error using peripheral device, check
INSPECTION
to be sure that the parameter drive
The file designated at the PLC file name and file name correspond to
settings in the parameters cannot be the numerical values there
found. (parameter number), and correct. 12
• Create a file created using
TROUBLESHOOTING
parameters, and load it to the CPU
module.
The Ethernet parameter that was added
Change to QnACPU with the function
for QnACPU, with the function version
version "B". QnA
"B," has been set to QnACPU without
Delete the Ethernet parameter.
the function version "B."
APPENDICES
INDEX


12 - 121
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
At power ON/
2401
At reset/
FILE SET File name/ Parameter
Off Flicker Stop At writing to
programmable
controller
2402
When
FILE OPE. File name/ Program error Off/ Flicker/ Stop/
2410 instruction
ERROR Drive name location On On Continue*1
executed

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
Program memory capacity was • Check and correct the parameters Qn(H)*3
exceeded by performing boot operation (boot setting). QnPH
or automatic write to standard ROM. • Delete unnecessary files in the QnPRH
program memory. 10
• Choose "Clear program memory" for
Program memory capacity was
boot in the parameter so that boot is QnU
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
exceeded by performing boot operation.
started after the program memory is
cleared.
error using the peripheral device, 11
2401 check to be sure that the parameter
MAINTENANCE AND
The file specified by parameters cannot drive name and file name correspond
be made. to the numerical values there
INSPECTION
(parameter number), and correct.
• Check the space remaining in the
memory card.
Although setting is made to use the 12
device data storage file, there is no
TROUBLESHOOTING
Secure the empty capacity of the
empty capacity required for creating the QnU
standard ROM.
device data storage file in the standard
ROM.
Though the file register has been set in
2402 the pairing setting/tracking setting, the Confirm the file register and parameter. Q4AR
file register does not exist.
error using the peripheral device,
APPENDICES
check to be sure that the program
• The specified program does not exist
corresponds to the numerical values
in the program memory. QnA
there (program location), and correct.
This error may occur when the Qn(H)
Create a file created using
2410 ECALL, EFCALL, PSTOP, PSCAN, QnPH
parameters, and load it to the CPU
POFF or PLOW instruction is QnPRH
module.
executed. QnU
• In case a specified file does not exist,
• The specified file does not exist.
write the file to a target memory and/
INDEX
or check the file specified with the

instruction again.


12 - 123
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
2411
When
FILE OPE. File name/ Program error Off/ Flicker/ Stop/
instruction
ERROR Drive name location On On Continue*1
executed
2412
2413
CAN'T EXE. File name/ At power ON/

PRG. Drive name At reset

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
• The file is the one which cannot be
specified by the sequence program
(such as comment file).
• The specified program exists in the
Read the individual information of the QnA 10
error using the peripheral device, check Qn(H)
program memory, but has not been
2411 to be sure that the program QnPH
registered in the program setting of
corresponds to the numerical values QnPRH
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
the Parameter dialog box.
there (program location), and correct. QnU
This error may occur when the
ECALL, EFCALL, PSTOP, PSCAN or
POFF instruction is executed. 11
Read the individual information of the QnA
MAINTENANCE AND
The SFC program file is one that cannot error using the peripheral device, check Qn(H)
2412 be designated by the sequence to be sure that the program QnPH
INSPECTION
program. corresponds to the numerical values QnPRH
there (program location), and correct. QnU
Read the individual information of the
error using the peripheral device, check 12
QnA
to be sure that the program
TROUBLESHOOTING
No data has been written to the file Qn(H)
2413 corresponds to the numerical values
designated by the sequence program. QnPH
there (program location), and correct.
QnPRH
Check to ensure that the designated file
has not been write protected.
check to be sure that the parameter
• There is a program file that uses a
device allocation setting and the
APPENDICES
device that is out of the range set in
program file device allocation
the PLC parameter device setting.
correspond to the numerical values
• After the PLC parameter setting is
there (file name), and correct if
changed, only the parameter is
necessary.
2500 written into the programmable
• If PLC parameter device setting is
controller.
changed, batch-write the parameter
and program file into the
INDEX
After the index modification of the PLC When the index modification of the PLC
parameter is changed, only the parameter is changed, batch-write the
QnU
parameter is written to the parameter and program file into the
programmable controller. programmable controller.


12 - 125
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
2501
CAN'T EXE. File name/ At power ON/

2502 PRG. Drive name At reset
2503
2504

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
QnA
There are multiple program files Edit the PLC parameter program setting Qn(H)
although "none" has been set at the to "yes". Alternatively, delete unneeded QnPH
PLC parameter program settings. programs. QnPRH 10
2501 QnU
• There are three or more program
• Delete unnecessary program files.
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
files.
• Match the program name with the Q00J/Q00/Q01
• The program name differs from the
program contents.
program contents.
The program file is incorrect.

Check whether the program version 11
is .QPG, and check the file
Alternatively, the file contents are not
MAINTENANCE AND
contents to be sure they are for a
those of a sequence program.
sequence program.
INSPECTION
Create a program using GX Developer
2502
or PX Developer for which the
The program file is not the one for the programmable controller type has been
Redundant CPU. set to the Redundant CPU (Q12PRH/
QnPRH 12
Q25PRH), and write it to the CPU
TROUBLESHOOTING
module.
2503 There are no program files at all.
QnA
• Check program configuration.
Two or more SFC normal programs or Qn(H)
• Check parameters and program
control programs have been QnPH
configuration.
2504 designated. QnPRH
QnU
Q00J/Q00/
APPENDICES
There are two or more SFC programs. Reduce the SFC programs to one.
Q01*3
INDEX


12 - 127
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
REMOTE
2700 – – ON ON Continue Always
PASS.FAIL
When time
SNTP Flicker/ Stop/
2710 – – ON setting function
OPE.ERROR ON Continue
is executed

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
Check for illegal accesses. If any illegal
access is identified, take actions such
as disabling communication of the
connection. 10
If no illegal access is identified, clear
the error and perform the following.
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
(Clearing the error also clears the count
of remote password mismatches.)
The count of remote password
2700 • Check if the remote password sent is QnU*8
mismatches reached the upper limit.
correct. 11
• Check if the remote password has
MAINTENANCE AND
been locked.
• Check if concurrent access was
INSPECTION
made from multiple devices to one
connection by UDP.
• Check if the upper limit of the remote
password mismatch count is too low. 12
• Check if the time setting function is
TROUBLESHOOTING
set up correctly.
Time setting failed when the • Check if the specified SNTP server is
2710 programmable controller was powered operating normally, or if any failure QnU*8
ON or reset. has occurred on the network
connected to the specified SNTP
server computer.
APPENDICES
INDEX


12 - 129
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
At power ON/
At reset/
3000
PARAMETER File name/ Parameter STOP RUN/
Off Flicker Stop
ERROR Drive name number At writing to
programmable
controller
3001

*2 Parameter No. is the value gained by dividing the head I/O number of parameter in the intelligent function module set by GX Configurator by 10H.
*3 The diagnostic timing of CPU modules except for Universal model QCPU can be performed only when switching the CPU modules to run.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
10
Error
Corresponding
CPU
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
(SD0)
• Specify the head I/O number of the
In a multiple CPU system, the intelligent
intelligent function module under Qn(H)*1
function module under control of
control of the host CPU. QnPH
another CPU is specified in the interrupt
• Delete the interrupt pointer setting of QnU
11
pointer setting of the PLC parameter.
the parameter.
MAINTENANCE AND
The PLC parameter settings for timer
INSPECTION
time limit setting, the RUN-PAUSE
contact, the common pointer number,
general data processing, number of
empty slots, system interrupt settings, Rem 12
baud rate setting, and service
TROUBLESHOOTING
processing setting are outside the range • Read the individual information of the
that can be used by the CPU module. error using the peripheral device,
3000
In a program memory check, the check check the parameter item
QnPH
capacity has not been set within the corresponding to the numerical value
QnPRH*5
range applicable for the CPU module. (parameter No.), and correct it.
The parameter settings in the error • Rewrite corrected parameters to the
individual information (special register CPU module, reload the CPU power
SD16) are illegal. supply and/or reset the module.
APPENDICES
The ATA card is set to the memory card • If the same error occurs, it is thought
slot when the specified drive for the file to be a hardware error. (Contact your
register is set to "memory card (ROM)" local Mitsubishi representative.)
and [Use the following file] or [Use the QnU
same file name as the program] (either
one is allowed) is set in the PLC file
setting.
3001 The parameter settings are corrupted.

INDEX
Rem

*6 The MELSECNET/H module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is 08102 or later.

12 - 131
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
At power ON/
At reset/
programmable
controller
When an END
PARAMETER File name/ Parameter
Off Flicker Stop instruction
executed
At power-On/
3003 At reset/
Off Flicker Stop
programmable
controller
At power-On/
At reset/
programmable
controller


12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
When "Use the following file" is selected
QnA
for the file register in the PLC file setting
Qn(H)
of the PLC parameter dialog box, the
specified file does not exist although the
• Read the individual information of the QnPH 10
error using the peripheral device, QnPRH
file register capacity has been set.
check the parameter item
When [Use the following file] is set for
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
the file register in the PLC file setting of
(parameter No.), and correct it.
the PLC parameter dialog box and the
3002 • Rewrite corrected parameters to the QnU
capacity of file register is not set, the file
CPU module, reload the CPU power
register file does not exist in the
supply and/or reset the module. 11
specified target memory.
• If the same error occurs, it is thought
MAINTENANCE AND
When [Use the following file.] is set for
to be a hardware error. (Contact your
the device data storage file in [PLC file]
INSPECTION
local Mitsubishi representative.)
of [PLC parameter], and [Capacity] is QnU
not set, the device data storage file
does not exist in the target memory.
The automatic refresh range of the Qn(H)*1
12
Change the file register file for the one
multiple CPU system exceeded the file QnPH
TROUBLESHOOTING
refresh-enabled in the whole range.
register capacity. QnU
3003 (parameter No.), and correct it.
The number of devices set at the PLC
• If the error is still generated following
parameter device settings exceeds the
the correction of the parameter
APPENDICES
possible CPU module range.
settings, the possible cause is the
memory errorm of the CPU module's
built-in RAM or program memory or
the memory card. (Contact your local
Check whether the parameter file

The parameter file is incorrect.
INDEX
version is .QPA, and check the file

3004 Alternatively, the contents of the file are
contents to be sure they are
not parameters.
parameters.


12 - 133
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
At power-ON/
PARAMETER File name/ Parameter
3005 Off Flicker Stop At reset/
STOP RUN
3006
At power-On/
At reset/
Off Flicker Stop
programmable
controller
3007
3009


12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
corresponding to the numerical value 10
(parameter No.), and correct it.
• Write the modified parameter items to
Qn(H)*7
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
The contents of the parameter are the CPU module again, and power-on
3005 QnPH*9
broken. the Progammable Controller or reset
the CPU module. QnPRH*9
• When the same error occurs again, 11
the hardware is faulty. Contact your
MAINTENANCE AND
local Mitsubishi representative,
INSPECTION
the problem.
• Delete the setting of the Q02CPU' s
high speed interrupt. To use high
speed interrupts, change the CPU 12
module to one of the Q02H/Q06H/
TROUBLESHOOTING
Q12H/Q25HCPU.
• The high speed interrupt is set in a
• To use a multiple CPU system, delete
Q02CPU.
the setting of the high-speed
• The high speed interrupt is set in a
interrupt. To use high speed
interrupts, change the system to a
3006 • The high speed interrupt is set when Qn(H)*4
single CPU system.
aQA1S6 B or QA6 B is used.
• To use either the QA1S6 B or
• No module is installed at the I/O
QA6 B, delete the setting of the high
APPENDICES
address designated by the high
speed interrupt. To use high speed
speed interrupt.
interrupts, do not use the QA1S6 B/
QA6 B.
• Re-examine the I/O address
designated by the high speed
interrupt setting.
The parameter file in the drive specified Create parameters using GX
as valid parameter drive by the DIP Developer, and write them to the drive
INDEX
3007 QnPRH
switches is inapplicable for the CPU specified as valid parameter drive by
module. the DIP switches.
Re-set the parameter I/O assignment to
In a multiple CPU system, the modules
control them under one CPU module.
3009 for AnS, A, Q2AS and QnA have been Qn(H)*1
(Change the parameters of all CPUs in
set to multiple control CPUs.
the multiple CPU system.)


12 - 135
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
At power-On/
3010
At reset/
Off Flicker Stop
programmable
3012
controller
At power-On/
At reset/
programmable
controller


12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
Match the number of (CPU modules in
The parameter-set number of CPU
multiple CPU setting) - (CPUs set as Qn(H)*1
3010 modules differs from the actual number
empty in I/O assignment) with that of QnPH
in a multiple CPU system.
actually mounted CPU modules. 10
Match the multiple CPU setting or
Multiple CPU setting or control CPU Q00/Q01*1
control CPU setting in the PLC
3012 setting differs from that of the reference
INSTALLATION
Qn(H)*1
LOADING AND
parameter with that of the reference
CPU settings in a multiple CPU system. QnU
CPU (CPU No.1) settings.
Multiple CPU auto refresh setting is any
Check the following in the multiple CPU
of the followings in a multiple CPU
auto refresh setting and make 11
system.
correction.
MAINTENANCE AND
• When a bit device is specified as a
• When specifying the bit device,
refresh device, a number other than a
INSPECTION
specify a multiple of 16 for the refresh Qn(H)*1
multiple of 16 is specified for the
starting device. QnPH
refresh-starting device.
• Specify the device that may be
• The device specified is other than the
one that may be specified.
specified for the refresh device. 12
• Set the number of send points to an
• The number of send points is an odd
TROUBLESHOOTING
even number.
number.
In a multiple CPU system, the multiple Check the following in the multiple CPU
CPU auto refresh setting is any of the auto refresh setting and make
following. correction.
Q00/Q01*1
• The total number of transmission • The total number of transmission
points is greater than the maximum points is within the maximum number
3013
number of refresh points. of refresh points.
In a multiple CPU system, the multiple Check the following in the multiple CPU
APPENDICES
CPU auto refresh setting is any of the auto refresh setting and make
following. correction.
• The device specified is other than the • Specify the device that may be
one that may be specified. specified for the refresh device.
• The number of send points is an odd • Set the number of send points to an
number. even number.
• The total number of send points is • Set the total number of send points QnU
greater than the maximum number of within the range of the maximum
INDEX
refresh points. number of refresh points.

• The setting of the refresh range • Set the refresh range so that it does
crosses over the boundary between not cross over the boundary between
the internal user device and the the internal user device and the
extended data register (D) or extended data register (D) or
extended link register (W). extended link register (W).


12 - 137
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
At power-On/
At reset/
programmable
controller
At power-On/
At reset/
Parameter
PARAMETER File name/ STOP RUN/
3015 number/ Off Flicker Stop
ERROR Drive name At writing to
CPU No.
programmable
controller
At power ON/
Parameter At reset/
PARAMETER File name/
3016 number/ Off Flicker Stop At writing to
ERROR Drive name
CPU No. programmable
controller
3040
PARAMETER At power ON/

ERROR At reset
3041


12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
• In a multiple CPU system, the online
module change parameter (multiple • Match the online module change
CPU system parameter) settings parameter with that of the reference
differ from those of the reference CPU. 10
Qn(H)
CPU. • If the CPU module that does not
3014 QnPH
• In a multiple CPU system, the online support online module change is
QnU*8
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
module change setting is enabled mounted, replace it with the CPU
although the CPU module mounted module that supports online module
does not support online module change.
chang parameter. 11
MAINTENANCE AND
error using the peripheral device, check
In a multiple CPU system configuration,
the parameter item corresponding to the
INSPECTION
3015 the CPU verified is different from the QnU
numerical value (parameter No./CPU
one set in the parameter setting.
No.) and parameter of target CPU, and
correct them.
The CPU module incompatible with 12
multiple CPU synchronized boot-up is Delete the CPU module incompatible
TROUBLESHOOTING
3016 set as the target for the synchronized with multiple CPU synchronized boot-up QnU*8
boot-up in the [Multiple CPU from the setting.
synchronous startup setting].
With GX Developer, write [PLC
parameter/Network parameter/Remote
password] to a valid drive then reload
Qn(H)*5
the power supply for system and/or
3040 The parameter file is damaged. QnPH*5
reset the CPU module. If the same
APPENDICES
error occurs, it is thought to be QnPRH*5
hardware error. (Contact your local
With GX Developer, write [Intelligent
function module parameter] to a valid
drive to write the parameters then
Qn(H)*5
Parameter file of intelligent function reload the power supply for system and/
3041 QnPH*5
module is damaged. or reset the CPU module. If the same
INDEX
error occurs, it is thought to be a QnPRH*5

hardware error. (Contact your local


12 - 139
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
PARAMETER At power ON/

ERROR At reset
At power-ON/
LINK PARA. File name/ Parameter
STOP RUN


12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
• With GX Developer, write [PLC
parameter/Network parameter/
Remote password] to a valid drive
then reload the power supply for 10
system and/or reset the CPU module.
If the same error occurs, it is thought
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
to be a hardware error. (Contact your
• When a valid drive for parameter is
The system file that have stored the set to other than [program memory], Qn(H)*4 11
3042 remote password setting information is set the parameter file (PARAM) at the QnPH*4
MAINTENANCE AND
damaged. boot file setting to be able to transmit QnPRH*4
to the program memory.
INSPECTION
With GX Developer, write [PLC
parameter/Network parameter/
Remote password] to a valid drive
then reload the power supply for 12
system and/or reset the CPU module.
TROUBLESHOOTING
If the same error occurs, it is thought
to be hardware error. (Contact your
• Delete the network parameter of the
In a multiple CPU system, the CC-Link CC-Link IE controller network module
IE controller network module controlled controlled by another CPU. Qn(H)*7
by another CPU is specified as the • Change the setting to the head I/O QnPH*9
head I/O number of the CC-Link IE number of the CC-Link IE controller QnU
APPENDICES
controller network module. network module controlled by host
CPU.
The network parameter of the CC-Link
3100 IE controller network operating as the
normal station is overwritten to the
control station. Qn(H)*7
Or, the network parameter of the CC- QnPH*9
Reset the CPU module.
Link IE controller network operating as QnPRH*9
INDEX
the control station is overwritten to the QnU

normal station.
(The network parameter is updated on
the module by resetting.)


12 - 141
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
At power-ON/
STOP RUN


12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
• The number of actually mounted
modules is different from the number
of modules set in the network
parameter of the CC-Link IE 10
controller network.
• The head I/O number of the actually
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
mounted module is different from the
• Check the network parameter and
one set in the network parameter of
actual mounting status, and if they
the CC-Link IE controller network.
differ, make them matched. When
• Data cannot be handled in the
network parameters are modified, 11
parameter exists.
write them to the CPU module.
MAINTENANCE AND
• The network type of CC-Link IE
• Check the setting of extension base
controller network is overwritten
INSPECTION
unit stage number.
during power-on. (When changing the
• Check the connection status of
network type, switch RESET to RUN.) Qn(H)*7
extension base unit and extension
• The CC-Link IE controller network QnPH*9
3100
module is specified for the head I/O
cable. When the GOT is bus-
QnPRH*9
12
connected to the main base unit or
number of network parameter in the QnU
TROUBLESHOOTING
extension base unit, also check its
MELSECNET/H.
connection status.
• The MELSECNET/H module is
If an error occurs even after
specified for the head I/O number of
performing the above checks, the
network parameter in the CC-Link IE
hardware may be faulty.
controller network.
• Although the CC-Link IE controller
network module is mounted, network
parameter for the CC-Link IE
APPENDICES
controller network module is not set.
• Although the CC-Link IE controller
network and MELSECNET/H
modules are mounted, network
parameter for the MELSECNET/H
module is not set.
INDEX


12 - 143
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
At power ON/
STOP RUN


12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
• Delete the MELSECNET/H network
In a multiple CPU system, the
parameter of the MELSECNET/H Q00/Q01*1
MELSECNET/H under control of
under control of another CPU. Qn(H)*1
another CPU is specified as the head I/
• Change the setting to the head I/O QnPH
10
O number in the network setting
number of the MELSECNET/H under QnU
parameter of the MELSECNET/H.
control of the host CPU.
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
The network parameter of the
MELSECNET/H operating as the
normal station is overwritten to the
Qn(H)*1
control station.
QnPH
11
Or, the network parameter of the Reset the CPU module.
QnPRH
MAINTENANCE AND
MELSECNET/H operating as the
QnU
control station is overwritten to the
INSPECTION
normal station. (The network parameter
is updated on the module by resetting.)
• Check the network parameters and
actual mounting status, and if they 12
differ, make them matched.
TROUBLESHOOTING
• The number of actually installed
If any network parameter has been
modules is different from that
corrected, write it to the CPU module.
designated in the number of modules
3100 • Check the extension base unit stage
setting parameter of MELSECNET/H.
No. setting.
• The head I/O number of actually
• Check the connection status of the
installed modules is different from
extension base units and extension
that designated in the network
cables.
parameter of MELSECNET/H.
When the GOT is bus-connected to QCPU
APPENDICES
• Some data in the parameters cannot
the main base unit and extension
be handled.
base units, also check the connection
• The network type of MELSECNET/H
status.
is overwritten during power-on.
If the error occurs after the above
(When changing the network type,
checks, the possible cause is a
switch RESET to RUN.)
hardware fault. (Contact your local
• The mode switch of MELSECNET/H
Mitsubishi representative, explaining a
module*5 is outside the range. detailed description of the problem.)
INDEX
• Set the mode switch of MELSECNET/

H module*5 within the range.
• Correct and write the network
Although the QnACPU is a control parameters.
station or master station, the network • If the error occurs after correction, it QnA
parameters have not been written. suggests a hardware fault. (Contact


12 - 145
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
When an END
executed
3101
At power ON/
Off Flicker Stop At reset/
STOP RUN


12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
Qn(H)*1
The link refresh range exceeded the file Change the file register file for the one QnPH
register capacity. that enables entire range refresh. QnPRH
QnU
10
• When the station number of the
MELSECNET/H module is 0, the
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
PLC-to-PLC network parameter Correct the type or station number of
Qn(H)*1
setting has been set. the MELSECNET/H module in the
QnPH
• When the station number of the network parameter to meet the used
QnPRH
MELSECNET/H module is other than system. 11
0, the remote master parameter
MAINTENANCE AND
setting has been made.
• Check the network parameters and Qn(H)*7
INSPECTION
The refresh parameter for the CC-Link mounting status, and if they differ,
QnPH*9
IE controller network is outside the match the network parameters and
range. QnPRH*9
mounting status.
If any network parameter has been
QnU 12
corrected, write it to the CPU module.
TROUBLESHOOTING
• Confirm the setting of the number of
• The network No. specified by a extension stages of the extension
network parameter is different from base units.
3101 that of the actually mounted network. • Check the connection status of the
• The head I/O No. specified by a extension base units and extension
network parameter is different from cables.
that of the actually mounted I/O unit. When the GOT is bus-connected to
• The network class specified by a the main base unit and extension
APPENDICES
network parameter is different from base units, also check their
that of the actually mounted network. connection status.
• The network refresh parameter of the If the error occurs after the above
MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 is checks, the cause is a hardware fault.
out of the specified area. (Contact your local Mitsubishi
A multi-remote I/O network was
INDEX
Use a module that supports the

configured using a module that does not
MELSECNET/H multi-remote I/O QnPH
support the MELSECNET/H multi-
network.
remote I/O network.
• The system A of the MELSECNET/H • Set the system A of the
remote master station has been set to MELSECNET/H remote master
other than Station No. 0. station to Station No. 0.
QnPRH
• The system B of the MELSECNET/H • Set the system B of the
remote master station has been set to MELSECNET/H remote master
Station No. 0. station to any of Station No. 1 to 64.

12 - 147
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
At power ON/
STOP RUN
At power ON/
STOP RUN


12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
Since the number of points of the B/W
device set in [Device] of the PLC
parameter is lower than the number of
B/W refresh device points shown in the 10
following table when parameters of the
MELSECNET/H are not set, the refresh
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
between the CPU module and the Set the refresh parameter of the Qn(H)*6
MELSECNET/H cannot be performed. MELSECNET/H in accordance with the QnPH*6
3101 Refresh No. of refresh device No. of refresh device number of points of B/W devices set in QnPRH*6
device points of B device points of W device
8192 points
1 (8192 points 1
8192 points
(8192 points 1
[Device] of the PLC parameter. QnU 11
module) module)
MAINTENANCE AND
8192 points 8192 points
No. of 2 (4096 points 2 (4096 points 2
mountable modules) modules)
INSPECTION
network 6144 points 6144 points
modules 3 (2048 points 3 (2048 points 3
modules) modules)
8192 points 8192 points
4 (2048 points 4 (2048 points 4
modules) modules)
12
A CC-Link IE controller network Qn(H)*6
TROUBLESHOOTING
parameter error was detected. QnU
parameters.
• The network module detected a
• If the error occurs after correction, it
network parameter error.
suggests a hardware fault. (Contact
• A MELSECNET/H network parameter
error was detected.
The station No. specified in pairing
setting are not correct. Refer to the troubleshooting of the
• The stations are not numbered network module, and if the error is due
APPENDICES
consecutively. to incorrect pairing setting, reexamine QnPRH
• Pairing setting has not been made for the pairing setting of the network
3102 the CPU module at the normal parameter.
station.
The CC-Link IE controller network Mount the CC-Link IE controller network
module whose first 5 digits of serial No. module whose first 5 digits of serial No. QnU
is "09041" or earlier is mounted. is "09042" or later.
Paring setting in CC-Link IE controller Q00J/Q00/Q01
INDEX
network modules installed in CPUs Examine the paring setting for the Qn(H)*9
except for Redundant CPUs was network parameter in the control staion. QnPH*9
performed. QnU*9
• LB/LW own station send range at LB/ Examine the network range
LW4000 or later was set. assignments for the network parameter Q00J/Q00/Q01
• LB/LW setting (2) was performed. in the control station.


12 - 149
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
At power ON/
STOP RUN


12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
• Delete the Ethernet network
parameter of the Q series Ethernet
In a multiple CPU system, the Q series
interface module under control of Q00/Q01*1
Ethernet interface module under control
another station. Qn(H)*1
10
of another station is specified to the
• Change the setting to the start I/O QnPH
start I/O number of the Ethernet
number of the Q series Ethernet QnU
network parameter.
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
interface module under control of the
host station.
• Although the number of modules has
been set to one or greater number in 11
the Ethernet module count
MAINTENANCE AND
parameter setting, the number of
actually mounted module is zero.
INSPECTION
Rem
• The start I/O No. of the Ethernet
network parameter differs from the I/
O No. of the actually mounted
module. 12
3103
• AJ71QE71 does not exist in the
TROUBLESHOOTING
position of I/O number set by the
parameter.
parameters.
• I/O number designation is
• If the error occurs after correction, it
overlapping. QnA
• Numbers of the network parameter
and loaded AJ71QE71 are different.
• Ethernet (parameter + dedicated
instruction) is set to more than five.
APPENDICES
• Ethernet module whose network type
is set to “Ethernet (main base)” is
mounted on the extension base unit
in the redundant system.
QnPRH*6
• Ethernet module whose network type
is set to “Ethernet (extension base)”
is mounted on the main base unit in
the redundant system.
INDEX


12 - 151
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
3104
At power ON/
Off Flicker Stop At reset/
STOP RUN
3105


12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
• The Ethernet, MELSECNET/H and
MELSECNET/10 use the same
network number.
• The network number, station number
• Correct and write the network 10
parameters.
or group number set in the network
3104 • If the error occurs after correction, it
parameter is out of range. Rem
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
• The specified I/O number is outside
the range of the used CPU module.
• The Ethernet-specific parameter
setting is not normal. 11
• Delete the CC-Link network
MAINTENANCE AND
parameter of the Q series CC-Link
In a multiple CPU system, the Q series
module under control of another Q00/Q01*1
INSPECTION
CC-Link module under control of
station. Qn(H)*1
another station is specified as the head
• Change the setting to the start I/O QnPH
I/O number of the CC-Link network
number of the Q series CC-Link QnU
parameter.
module under control of the host 12
station.
TROUBLESHOOTING
• Though the number of CC-Link
modules set in the network
parameters is one or more, the
number of actually mounted modules
is zero.
• The start I/O number in the common
parameters is different from that of Rem
3105 the actually mounted module.
APPENDICES
• The station type of the CC-Link • Correct and write the network
module count setting parameters is parameters.
different from that of the actually • If the error occurs after correction, it
mounted station. suggests a hardware fault. (Contact
• CC-Link module whose station type is your local Mitsubishi representative.)
set to “master station (compatible
with redundant function)” is mounted
on the extension base unit in the
INDEX
redundant system. QnPRH*6

• CC-Link module whose station type is
set to “master station (extension
base)” is mounted on the main base
unit in the redundant system.
The contents of the Ethernet parameter
Write after correcting parameters. QnA
are incorrect.


12 - 153
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
When an END
executed
3106
At power ON/
LINK PARA. Parameter
File name Off Flicker Stop At reset/
ERROR number
STOP RUN
At power ON/
LINK PARA. Parameter
3107 File name Off Flicker Stop At reset/
ERROR number
STOP RUN
3200
STOP RUN
3201
SFC PARA. Parameter
File name Off Flicker Stop
ERROR number
3202
At power ON/
At reset/
3203
STOP RUN
*3


12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
Qn(H)*1
The CC-Link link refresh range Change the file register file for the one QnPH
exceeded the file register capacity. refresh-enabled in the whole range. QnPRH
QnU
10
The network refresh parameter for QCPU
Check the parameter setting.
3106 CC-Link is out of range. Rem
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
The setting of the network refresh range Set the network refresh range so that it
crosses over the boundary between the does not cross over the boundary
internal user device and the extended between the internal user device and QnU
data register (D) or extended link the extended data register (D) or 11
register (W). extended link register (W).
MAINTENANCE AND
• The CC-Link parameter setting is
incorrect.
INSPECTION
3107 • The set mode is not allowed for the Check the parameter setting.
Rem
version of the mounted CC-Link
module.
QnA
12
The parameter setting is illegal.
Q00J/Q00/
TROUBLESHOOTING
• Though Block 0 was set to "Automatic
Q01*1
3200 start" in the SFC setting of the PLC
QnPH
parameter dialog box, Block 0 does
QnPRH
not exist.
QnU
Read the common information of the
3201 The block parameter setting is illegal.
error using the peripheral device, check QnA
The number of step relays specified in
error step corresponding to its Qn(H)
the device setting of the PLC parameter
3202 numerical value (program error QnPH
APPENDICES
dialog box is less than that used in the
location), and correct the problem. QnPRH
program.
QnA
The execution type of the SFC program
Qn(H)
specified in the program setting of the
3203 QnPH
PLC parameter dialog box is other than
QnPRH
scan execution.
QnU INDEX


12 - 155
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
3300
At power-On/
At reset/
SP. PARA Parameter STOP RUN/
File name Off Flicker Stop
ERROR number*2 At writing to
3301
programmable
controller
3302
At power-On/
At reset/
SP. PARA File name/ Parameter STOP RUN/
programmable
controller
At power ON/
REMOTE
3400 – – Off Flicker Stop At reset/
PASS. ERR.
STOP RUN


12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
The start I/O number in the intelligent
function module parameter set on QCPU
3300 Check the parameter setting.
GX Configurator differs from the actual Rem
I/O number. 10
• The refresh setting of the intelligent
Q00J/Q00/Q01
function module exceeded the file • Change the file register file for the
Qn(H)*1
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
register capacity. one which allows refresh in the whole
QnPH
• The intelligent function module set in range.
QnPRH
3301 GX Configurator differs from the • Check the parameter setting.
QnU
actually mounted module. 11
The intelligent function module's refresh
QCPU
MAINTENANCE AND
parameter setting is outside the Check the parameter setting.
Rem
available range.
INSPECTION
The intelligent function module's refresh
3302 Check the parameter setting. QCPU
parameter are abnormal.
• Delete the automatic refresh setting
or other parameter setting of the 12
In a multiple CPU system, the automatic intelligent function module under
TROUBLESHOOTING
Q00/Q01*1
refresh setting or other parameter control of another CPU.
3303 setting was made to the intelligent • Change the setting to the automatic Qn(H)*1
function module under control of refresh setting or other parameter QnPH
another station. setting of the intelligent function QnU
module under control of the host
CPU.
Qn(H)*1
The head I/O number of the target Change the head I/O number of the QnPH
APPENDICES
module of the remote password is set to target module to be within the 0 to H QnPRH
other than 0 to 0FF0 .
H H 0FF0 range. H
QnU*8
Rem
The head I/O number of the target Change the head I/O number of the
3400 module of the remote password is set to target module to be within the 0 to H Q02U
other than 0 to 07E0 .
H H 07E0 range. H
Change the head I/O number of the

The head I/O number of the target
INDEX
target module of the remote password

module of the remote password is
for the number within the following Q00J/Q00/
outside the following range.
range. Q01*1
• Q00JCPU: 0 to 1E0 H H
• Q00JCPU: 0 to 1E0 H H
• Q00CPU/Q01CPU: 0 to 3E0 H H
• Q00CPU/Q01CPU: 0 to 3E0 H H


12 - 157
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
At power ON/
REMOTE
3401 – – Off Flicker Stop At reset/
PASS. ERR.
STOP RUN


12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
Position specified as the head I/O
number of the remote password file is
incorrect due to one of the following
reasons: 10
• Module is not loaded.
• Other than a the intelligent function
Mount the Q series serial
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
module (I/O module) Qn(H)*1
communication module, modem
• Intelligent function module other than QnPH
interface module or Ethernet module of
the Q series serial communication QnPRH
function version B or later in the position
module, modem interface module or QnU
Ethernet module
specified in the head I/O No. of the
Rem
11
remote password file.
• Q series serial communication
MAINTENANCE AND
module or Ethernet module of
INSPECTION
function version A
The intelligent function module where
remote password is available is not
3401
mounted.
12
Any of the following modules is not
Mount any of the following modules in
TROUBLESHOOTING
mounted on the slot specified for the
the position specified for the head I/O
head I/O number of the remote
number of the remote password.
password.
• Serial communication module of
• Serial communication module of Q00J/Q00/
function version B or later
function version B or later Q01*1
• Ethernet module of function version B
• Ethernet module of function version B
or later
or later
• Modem interface module of function
• Modem interface module of function
version B or later
version B or later
APPENDICES
The Q series serial communication
• Change it for the Ethernet module of
module, modem interface module or Qn(H)*1
function version B or later connected
Ethernet module of function version B QnPH
by the host CPU.
or later controlled by another CPU was QnU
• Delete the remote password setting.
specified in a multiple CPU system.
INDEX


12 - 159
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
4000
4001
At power ON/
At reset/
INSTRCT. Program error STOP RUN
CODE ERR location When
instruction
4002 executed
4003
4004
MISSING END Program error

INS. location
4020
At power ON/
Program error
CAN'T SET(P) – Off Flicker Stop At reset/
location
STOP RUN
4021
Program error
4030 CAN'T SET(I) – Off Flicker Stop
location

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
10
Error
Corresponding
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
CPU
(SD0)
• The program contains an instruction
code that cannot be decoded.
4000
• An unusable instruction is included in 11
the program.
MAINTENANCE AND
QnA
Q00J/Q00/
INSPECTION
The program contains a dedicated Q01*2
4001 instruction for SFC although it is not an Qn(H)
SFC program. QnPH
12
QnPRH
TROUBLESHOOTING
QnU
• The name of dedicated instruction
specified by the program is incorrect.
4002 • The dedicated instruction specified by
the program cannot be executed by
the specified module. Read the common information of the
The number of devices for the error using a peripheral device, check
Rem
4003 dedicated instruction specified by the error step corresponding to its
APPENDICES
program is incorrect. numerical value (program error
The device which cannot be used by location), and correct the problem.
4004 the dedicated instruction specified by
the program is specified.
There is no END (FEND) instruction in
4010
the program.
QnA
The total number of internal file pointers
Qn(H)
used by the program exceeds the
INDEX
4020 QnPH
number of internal file pointers set in the
QnPRH
parameters.
QnU
• The common pointer Nos. assigned
to files overlap.
4021
• The local pointer Nos. assigned to
files overlap.
The allocation pointer Nos. assigned by
4030
files overlap.
12 - 161
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
When
OPERATION Program error Off/ Flicker/ Stop/
executed

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
The instruction cannot process the
error step corresponding to its
contained data.
numerical value (program error
Rem 10
location), and correct the problem.
• Take measurements against noise.
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
• Reset and restart the CPU module.
When the same error is displayed
again, the ATA card has hardware Qn(H)
Access error of ATA card occurs by
4100 FREAD/FWRITE instructions.
failure. QnPH 11
(Please consult your local Mitsubishi QnPRH
MAINTENANCE AND
service center or representative,
INSPECTION
the problem.)
• Stop the file accessed with other
functions to execute FWRITE
The file being accessed by other
instruction. 12
functions with FWRITE instruction was QnU*8
• Stop the access with othrer functions
TROUBLESHOOTING
accessed.
and the FWRITE instructuion to
execute at same time.
APPENDICES
INDEX

12 - 163
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
When
executed

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
• The number of setting data dealt with
the instruction exceeds the applicable
range.
• The storage data and constant of the 10
device specified by the instruction
exceeds the applicable range.
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
• When writing to the host CPU shared
memory, the write prohibited area is
specified for the write destination
address. 11
• The range of storage data of the
MAINTENANCE AND
device specified by the instruction is
duplicated.
INSPECTION
• The device specified by the Read the common information of the
Rem
instruction exceeds the range of the error using the peripheral device, check
4101 number of device points. error step corresponding to its
• The interrupt pointer No. specified by numerical value (program error 12
the instruction exceeds the applicable location), and correct the problem.
TROUBLESHOOTING
range.
• The block data that crosses over the
boundary between the internal user
device and the extended data register
(D) or extended link register is
specified (including 32-bit binary, real
number (single precision, double
precision), indirect address, and
APPENDICES
control data)
• The storage data of file register
specified by the instruction exceeds
QnU
the applicable range. Or, file register
is not set.
INDEX

12 - 165
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
4102
When
– instruction
executed
4103
4104
4105
4107

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
• Delete from the program the link
direct device which specifies the
In a multiple CPU system, the link direct Q00/Q01*2
network module under control of
device (J \ ) was specified for the
another CPU. Qn(H)*2 10
network module under control of QnPH
• Using the link direct device, specify
another station. QnU
the network module under control of
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
the host CPU.
• The network No. or station No.
specified for the dedicated instruction
4102 is wrong. 11
• The link direct device (J \ ) setting
MAINTENANCE AND
is incorrect. Rem
• The module No./ network No./number
INSPECTION
of character strings exceeds the
range that can be specified.
• The specification of character string
(" ") specified by dedicated instruction
error step corresponding to its 12
numerical value (program error QnU
cannot be used for the character
TROUBLESHOOTING
string.
QnA
Q00J/Q00/
The configuration of the PID dedicated Q01*2
4103
instruction is incorrect. Qn(H)
QnPRH
QnU
APPENDICES
The number of settings is beyond the error using peripheral device, and check
4104 Q4AR
range. and correct the program corresponding
to that value (program error location).
• Delete the program memory check
PLOADP/PUNLOADP/PSWAPP setting.
4105 instructins were executed while setting • When using the program memory QnPH*5
program memory check. check, delete PLOADP/PUNLOADP/
INDEX
PSWAPP instructions.
Using the multiple CPU dedicated
Q00/Q01*2
33 or more multiple CPU dedicated instruction completion bit, provide
instructions were executed from one interlocks to prevent one CPU module Qn(H)*2
4107 CPU module. from executing 33 or more multiple CPU QnPH
dedicated instructions. Q02U
Numbers of execution to the CC-Link Set the numbers of execution to the
QnA
instruction are beyond 32. CC-Link instruction to 32 or less.

12 - 167
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
When
executed
When
executed
4111
When
– instruction
executed
4112
When
ERROR location On On Continue
executed
4120
When
– instruction
executed
4121

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
The CC-Link parameter is not set when Execute the CC-Link instruction after
4108 QnA
the CC-Link instruction is executed. setting the CC-Link parameter.
Delete the high-speed interrupt setting.

10
With high speed interrupt setting PR,
When using high-speed interrupt, delete
4109 PRC, UDCNT1, UDCNT2, PLSY or Qn(H)*3
the PR, PRC, UDCNT1, UDCNT2,
PWM instruction is executed.
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
PLSY and PWM instructions.
An attempt was made to perform write/
read to/from the CPU shared memory Read the common information of the
4111
write/read disable area of the host error using GX Developer, and check
Q00/Q01*2
11
station CPU module with the instruction. and correct the error step
QnU
MAINTENANCE AND
The CPU module that cannot be corresponding to that value (program
4112 specified with the multiple CPU error location).
INSPECTION
dedicated instruction was specified.
• Check that the number of execution
• When the SP.DEVST instruction is of the SP.DEVST instruction is
executed, the number of writing to the proper. 12
standard ROM of the day exceeds • Execute the SP.DEVST instruction
TROUBLESHOOTING
4113 QnU
the value specified by SD695. again the following day or later day.
• The value outside the specified range Or, arrange the value of SD695.
is set to SD695. • Correct the value of SD695 so that it
does not exceed the range.
Since the manual system switching
To execute control system switching by
enable flag (special register SM1592) is
the SP. CONTSW instruction, turn ON
4120 OFF, manual system switching cannot
the manual system switching enable
be executed by the control system
APPENDICES
flag (special register SM1592).
switching instruction (SP. CONTSW).
• Reexamine the interlock signal for the
SP. CONTSW instruction, and make
sure that the SP. CONTSW
• In the separate mode, the control instruction is executed in the control
QnPRH
system switching instruction system only. (Since the SP. CONTSW
(SP. CONTSW) was executed in the instruction cannot be executed in the
4121 standby system CPU module. standby system, it is recommended to
INDEX
• In the debug mode, the control provide an interlock using the

system switching instruction (SP. operation mode signal or like.)
CONTSW) was executed. • As the SP. CONTSW instruction
cannot be executed in the debug
mode, reexamine the interlock signal
related to the operation mode.

12 - 169
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
When
executed
When END/
OPERATION Program error Off/ Flicker/ Stop/ other
4130 –
ERROR location On On Continue*1 instruction
executed
When
executed
When
4140 OPERATION Program error OFF/ Flicker/ Stop/
– instruction
executed
4141

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
• The dedicated instruction was
executed to the module mounted on • Delete the dedicated instruction for
the extension base unit in the the module mounted on the extension
redundant system. base unit. 10
4122 • The instruction for accessing the • Delete the instruction for accessing QnPRH*6
intelligent function module mounted the intelligent function module
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
on the extension base unit from the mounted on the extension base unit
standby system at separate mode from the standby system.
was executed.
Instructions to read SFC step comment 11
(S(P).SFCSCOMR) and SFC transition Qn(H)*4
Target comment file is to be other than
MAINTENANCE AND
4130 condition comment (S(P).SFCTCOMR) QnPH*5
the comment file in ATA card.
are executed for the comment file in QnPRH
INSPECTION
ATA card
The SFC program is started up by the Check the SFC program specified by
4131 instruction while the other SFC program the instruction. Or, check the executing QnU
has not yet been completed. status of the SFC program. 12
Operation where the input data is Read the common information of the
TROUBLESHOOTING
special value ("-0", unnormalized error using the peripheral device, check
4140
number, nonnumeric, ) is the error step corresponding to the QnU
performed. numerical value (program error part),
4141 Overflow occurs at operation. and correct it.
APPENDICES
INDEX

12 - 171
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
When
FOR NEXT Program error
4200 – Off Flicker Stop instruction
ERROR location
executed
4201
When
FOR NEXT Program error
– Off Flicker Stop instruction
ERROR location
4202 executed
4203
4210
4211 When
CAN'T Program error
EXECUTE(P) location
executed
4212
4213
4220
4221
When
CAN'T Program error
EXECUTE(I) location
executed
4223
CAN'T At power-ON/
EXECUTE(I) At reset

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
No NEXT instruction was executed
following the execution of a FOR
4200 instruction.
Alternatively, there are fewer NEXT
Read the common information of the 10
instructions than FOR instructions.
A NEXT instruction was executed
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
although no FOR instruction has been
4201 executed.
Alternatively, there are more NEXT
instructions than FOR instructions. 11
More than 16 nesting levels are
4202 Keep nesting levels at 16 or under.
MAINTENANCE AND
programmed.
A BREAK instruction was executed
INSPECTION
4203 although no FOR instruction has been
executed prior to that.
The CALL instruction is executed, but Read the common information of the
4210 there is no subroutine at the specified error using the peripheral device, check 12
pointer. error step corresponding to its
TROUBLESHOOTING
There was no RET instruction in the numerical value (program error
4211
executed subroutine program. location), and correct the problem.
The RET instruction exists before the
4212 FEND instruction of the main routine
program.
More than 16 nesting levels are
4213 Keep nesting levels at 16 or under.
programmed.
Though an interrupt input occurred, the
APPENDICES
4220 corresponding interrupt pointer does not
exist.
An IRET instruction does not exist in the
4221
executed interrupt program.
The IRET instruction exists before the
FEND instruction of the main routine
program.
• The IRET instruction was executed in
INDEX

4223 the fixed scan execution type
program.
QnU
• The STOP instruction was executed
in the fixed scan execution type
program.
The interrupt pointer for the module Delete the setting of interrupt pointer for
4225 mounted on the extension base unit is the module mounted on the extension QnPRH*6
set in the redundant system. base unit, since it cannot be used.

12 - 173
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
4230
4231
INST. When
Program error
FORMAT – Off Flicker Stop instruction
location
ERR. executed
4235
4300 When
EXTEND Program error Off/ Flicker/ Stop/
– instruction
INST. ERR. location On On Continue*1
executed
4301
When
OPERATION Program error
4350 – OFF Flicker Stop instruction
ERROR location
executed

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
QnA
The number of CHK and CHKEND
4230 Qn(H)
instructions is not equal.
QnPH
The number of IX and IXEND Read the common information of the
10
4231
instructions is not equal. error using the peripheral device, check
The configuration of the check error step corresponding to its
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
conditions for the CHK instruction is numerical value (program error
QnA
incorrect. location), and correct the problem.
4235 Qn(H)
Alternatively, a CHK instruction has
QnPH
been used in a low speed execution 11
type program.
MAINTENANCE AND
The designation of a MELSECNET/ Read the common information of the
4300 MINI-S3 master module control error using the peripheral device, check
INSPECTION
instruction was wrong. error step corresponding to its QnA
The designation of an AD57/AD58 numerical value (program error
4301
control instruction was wrong. location), and correct the problem.
• The target CPU module specified by 12
the multiple CPU high-speed
TROUBLESHOOTING
transmission dedicated instruction,
specified by the program is wrong.
Or, the multiple CPU high-speed
transmission dedicated instruction
cannot be set in the setting.
• The reserved CPU is specified.
• The uninstalled CPU is specified.
• The head I/O number of the target Read the common information of the
APPENDICES
CPU/16 (n1) is outside the range of error using the peripheral device, check
4350 3EH to 3E3H. error step corresponding to its QnU
• The CPU module where the numerical value (program error
instruction cannot be executed is location), and correct the problem.
specified.
• The instruction is executed in a single
CPU system.
• The host CPU is specified.
INDEX
• The multiple CPU high-speed

transmission dedicated instruction
was executed when "Use multiple
CPU high speed transmission" is not
selected.

12 - 175
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
4351
4352
When
OPERATION Program error
– OFF Flicker Stop instruction
ERROR location
4353 executed
4354
4355

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
• The multiple CPU high-speed
transmission dedicated instruction by
the program cannot be executed to
4351 the specified target CPU module. 10
• The instruction name is wrong.
• The instruction unsupported by the QnU*7
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
target CPU module is specified.
The number of devices for the multiple
CPU high-speed transmission
4352
dedicated instruction by the program is
Read the common information of the 11
wrong.
MAINTENANCE AND
The device which cannot be used for
the multiple CPU high-speed
INSPECTION
4353 numerical value (program error QnU
transmission dedicated instruction by
the program is specified.
The character string which cannot be
handled by the multiple CPU high- 12
4354
speed transmission dedicated
TROUBLESHOOTING
instruction is specified.
The number of read/write data (number QnU*7
of request/receive data) for the multiple
4355 CPU high-speed transmission
dedicated instruction by the program is
not valid.
APPENDICES
INDEX

12 - 177
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
SFCP. CODE Program error

4400 – Off Flicker Stop STOP RUN
ERROR location
4410
CAN'T Program error
– Off Flicker Stop STOP RUN
SET(BL) location
4411
Program error
4420 CAN'T SET(S) – Off Flicker Stop STOP RUN
location
4421
4422
Program error
CAN'T SET(S) – Off Flicker Stop STOP RUN
location
4423
4430
SFC EXE. File name/

– Off Flicker Stop STOP RUN
ERROR Drive name
4431
4432

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
QnA
No SFCP or SFCPEND instruction in Qn(H)
4400
SFC program. QnPH
QnPRH 10
The block number designated by the QnA
4410
SFC program exceeds the range. Q00J/Q00/
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
4411
Block number designations overlap in Q01*2
SFC program. Qn(H)
Write the program to the CPU module QnPH
A step number designated in an SFC
4420
program exceeds the range.
again using GX Developer. QnPRH 11
QnU
MAINTENANCE AND
Total number of steps in all SFC QnA
4421
programs exceed the maximum. Q00J/Q00/
INSPECTION
Q01*2
Qn(H)
Step number designations overlap in
4422
SFC program.
QnPH
12
QnPRH
TROUBLESHOOTING
QnU
Correct the total number of step relays
The total number of (maximum step
so that it does not exceed the total
4423 No.+1) of each block exceeds the total
number of (maximum step No.+1) of
number of step relays.
each block.
• Write the program to the CPU module
The SFC program cannot be executed.
again using GX Developer.
• The data of the block data setting is
• After correcting the setting of the SFC
illegal.
APPENDICES
data device, write it to the CPU
4430 • The SFC data device of the block Q00J/Q00/
module.
data setting is beyond the device Q01*2
• After correcting the device setting
setting range set in the PLC QnU
range set in the PLC parameter, write
parameter.
it to the CPU module.
The SFC program cannot be executed.
4431 • The block parameter setting is
abnormal. Write the program to the CPU module
INDEX
The SFC program cannot be executed. again using GX Developer.

4432 • The structure of the SFC program is
illegal.

12 - 179
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
4500
4501
4502
4503
SFCP.
Program error
FORMAT – Off Flicker Stop STOP RUN
location
ERR.
4504
4505
4506
4600
When
4601 SFCP. OPE. Program error Off/ Flicker/ Stop/
– instruction
executed
4602

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
The numbers of BLOCK and BEND
4500 instructions in an SFC program are not QnA
equal. Qn(H)
The configuration of the STEP* to QnPH 10
4501 TRAN* to TSET to SEND instructions in Write the program to the CPU module QnPRH
the SFC program is incorrect. again using the peripheral device.
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
The structure of the SFC program is
illegal.
4502
• STEPI* instruction does not exist in
the block of the SFC program. 11
The structure of the SFC program is • Write the program to the CPU module QnA
MAINTENANCE AND
illegal. again using GX Developer. Q00J/Q00/
• The step specified in the TSET • Read the common information of the Q01*2
INSPECTION
4503 instruction does not exist. error using GX Developer, and check Qn(H)
• In jump transition, the host step and correct the error step QnPH
number was specified as the corresponding to that value (program QnPRH
destination step number. error location). QnU
12
TROUBLESHOOTING
illegal. Write the program to the CPU module
4504
• The step specified in the TAND again using GX Developer.
instruction does not exist.
illegal.
• In the operation output of a step, the
4505 Read the common information of the
SET Sn/BLmSn or RST Sn/BLmSn
error using GX Developer, and check Q00J/Q00/
instruction was specified for the host
APPENDICES
and correct the error step Q01*2
step.
corresponding to that value (program QnU
error location).
illegal.
4506
• In a reset step, the host step number
was specified as the destination step.
The SFC program contains data that
4600
cannot be processed. Read common information of the error
QnA
Exceeds device range that can be using the peripheral device, check error
INDEX
4601 Qn(H)
designated by the SFC program. step corresponding to its numerical
QnPH
The START instruction in an SFC value (program error location), and
QnPRH
4602 program is preceded by an END correct the problem.
instruction.

12 - 181
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
4610
SFCP. EXE. Program error

– On On Continue STOP RUN
ERROR location
4611
4620
When
BLOCK EXE. Program error
ERROR location
executed
4621
4630
When
4631 STEP EXE. Program error
ERROR location
executed
4632
4633

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
The active step information at Read common information of the error
4610 presumptive start of the SFC program is using the peripheral device, check error
incorrect. step corresponding to its numerical
value (program error location), and 10
Key-switch was reset during RUN when
correct the problem. QnA
4611 presumptive start was designated for
The program is automatically subjected Qn(H)
SFC program.
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
to an initial start. QnPH
Read common information of the error QnPRH
Startup was executed at a block in the using the peripheral device, check error
4620 SFC program that was already started step corresponding to its numerical 11
up. value (program error location), and
MAINTENANCE AND
correct the problem.
• Read the common information of the QnA
INSPECTION
error using GX Developer, and check Q00J/Q00/
and correct the error step Q01*2
Startup was attempted at a block that
4621 corresponding to that value (program Qn(H)
does not exist in the SFC program.
error location). QnPH
12
• Turn ON if the special relay SM321 is QnPRH
TROUBLESHOOTING
OFF. QnU
Read common information of the error
QnA
Startup was executed at a block in the using the peripheral device, check error
Qn(H)
4630 SFC program that was already started step corresponding to its numerical
QnPH
up. value (program error location), and
QnPRH
correct the problem.
• Startup was attempted at the step
that does not exist in the SFC
APPENDICES
program. • Read the common information of the QnA
Or, the step that does not exist in the error using the peripheral device, and Q00J/Q00/
SFC program was specified for end. check and correct the error step Q01*2
4631 • Forced transition was executed corresponding to that value (program Qn(H)
based on the transition condition that error location). QnPH
does not exit in the SFC program. • Turn ON if the special relay SM321 is QnPRH
Or, the transition condition for forced OFF. QnU
transition that does not exit in the
INDEX
SFC program was canceled.

There were too many simultaneous
Read common information of the error QnA
4632 active steps in blocks that can be
using the peripheral device, check error Qn(H)
designated by the SFC program.
step corresponding to its numerical QnPH
There were too many simultaneous
value (program error location), and QnPRH
4633 active steps in all blocks that can be
correct the problem. QnU
designated.

12 - 183
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
Time (value
Time (value
5000 WDT ERROR actually Off Flicker Stop Always
set)
measured)

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
10
Error
Corresponding
CPU
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
(SD0)
error from the peripheral device,
check its value (time), and shorten
• The scan time of the initial execution
the scan time.
QnA 11
type program exceeded the initial Qn(H)
• Change the initial execution
MAINTENANCE AND
execution monitoring time specified in QnPH
monitoring time or the WDT value in
the PLC RAS setting of the PLC QnPRH
INSPECTION
the PLC RAS setting of the PLC
parameter. QnU
parameter.
• Resolve the endless loop caused by
jump transition. 12
• Since power-off of the standby
TROUBLESHOOTING
system increases the control system
5000
scan time, reset the WDT value,
taking the increase of the control
• The power supply of the standby
system scan time into consideration.
system is turned OFF.
• When the tracking cable is
• The tracking cable is disconnected or
disconnected during operation,
connected without turning off or QnPRH
securely connect it and restart the
resetting the standby system.
CPU module. If the same error is
APPENDICES
displayed again, the tracking cable or
CPU module has a hardware fault.
INDEX

12 - 185
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
Time (value
Time (value
5001 WDT ERROR actually Off Flicker Stop Always
set)
measured)

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
check its value (time), and shorten
• The scan time of the program the scan time. 10
exceeded the WDT value specified in • Change the initial execution
the PLC RAS setting of the PLC monitoring time or the WDT value in
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
parameter. the PLC RAS setting of the PLC
parameter.
• Resolve the endless loop caused by
jump transition. 11
• Since power-off of the standby
MAINTENANCE AND
system increases the control system
5001
scan time, reset the WDT value,
INSPECTION
taking the increase of the control
• The power supply of the standby
system scan time into consideration.
system is turned OFF.
• When the tracking cable is
• The tracking cable is disconnected or
disconnected during operation, 12
connected without turning off or QnPRH
securely connect it and restart the
TROUBLESHOOTING
resetting the standby system.
CPU module. If the same error is
displayed again, the tracking cable or
CPU module has a hardware fault.
APPENDICES
INDEX

12 - 187
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
5010
Time (value
PRG. TIME Time (value
actually On On Continue Always
OVER set)
measured)
5011

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
QnA
The program scan time exceeded the
• Review the constant scan setting Qn(H)
constant scan setting time specified in
time. QnPH
the PLC RAS setting of the PLC
• Review the constant scan setting time QnPRH 10
parameter.
and low speed program execution QnU
The low speed program execution time time in the PLC parameter so that the QnA
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
5010 specified in the PLC RAS setting of the excess time of constant scan can be Qn(H)
PLC parameter exceeded the excess fully secured. QnPH
time of the constant scan. QnPRH
The program scan time exceeded the Review the constant scan setting time 11
constant scan setting time specified in in the PLC parameter so that the excess
Q00J/Q00/Q01
MAINTENANCE AND
the PLC RAS setting of the PLC time of constant scan can be fully
parameter. secured.
INSPECTION
The scan time of the low speed error using the peripheral device, check
execution type program exceeded the the numerical value (time) there, and QnA
5011 low speed execution watch time shorten scan time if necessary. Change Qn(H) 12
specified in the PLC RAS setting of the the low speed execution watch time in QnPH
TROUBLESHOOTING
PLC parameter dialog box. the PLC RAS setting of the PLC
APPENDICES
INDEX

12 - 189
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
and causes of the errors, and the corrective actions for the errors
.

Error Diagnostic
PRG. VERIFY
File name – Off Flicker Stop Always
ERR.
At power ON/
At reset/
At tracking
cable
connection/
6000
At changing to
backup mode/
FILE DIFF. File name – Off Flicker Stop At completion
of write during
RUN/
At system
switching/
At switching
both systems
into RUN

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
10
Error
Corresponding
CPU
INSTALLATION
(SD0)
LOADING AND
The control system and standby system
in the redundant system do not have Synchronise the programs and
the same programs and parameters. parameters of the control system and Q4AR
(This can be detected from the standby standby system. 11
system of the redundant system.)
MAINTENANCE AND
• Match the programs and parameters
INSPECTION
of the control system and standby
system.
In a redundant system, the control
• -verify inVerify the systems by either
system and standby system do not
have the same programs and
of the following procedures 1), 2) to 12
clarify the differences between the
parameters.
TROUBLESHOOTING
files of the two systems, then correct
the wrong file, and execute "Write to
The file type detected as different
PLC" again.
between the two systems can be
checked by the file name of the error 1) After reading the programs/
common information. parameters of System A using
GX Developer or PX Developer,
• The program is different.
verify them with those of System B.
(File name = ********.QPG)
2) Verify the programs/parameters of
6000 • The PLC parameters/network
APPENDICES
GX Developer or PX Developer
parameters/redundant parameters
saved in the offline environment
are different.
with those written to the CPU QnPRH
(File name = PARAM.QPA)
modules of both systems.
• The remote password is different.
• When the capacity of each write
(File name = PARAM.QPA)
destination within the CPU for online
• The intelligent function module
change of multiple program blocks is
parameters are different.
different between the two systems,
(File name = IPARAM.QPA)
INDEX
take corrective action 1) or 2).

• The device initial values are different.
1) Using the memory copy from control
(File name = ********.QDI)
system to standby system, copy the
• The capacity of each write destination
program memory from the control
within the CPU for online pchange of
system to the standby system.
multiple program blocks is different.
2) Format the CPU module program
(File name = MBOC.QMB)
memories of both systems. (For the
(This can be detected from the standby
capacity of each write destination
within the CPU for online change of
multiple program blocks, set the
same value to both systems.)

12 - 191
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
At power ON/
At reset/At
tracking cable
6001 FILE DIFF. – – Off Flicker Stop
connection/At
operation
mode change
MODE.
VERIFY ERR.
6010
OPE. MODE
DIFF.
OPE. MODE At power ON/

DIFF. At reset
UNIT LAY.
6030 Module No. – Off Flicker Stop At power ON/
DIFF.
At reset/At
tracking cable
connection/At
operation
mode change
UNIT LAY.
DIFF.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
In a redundant system, the valid
Match the valid parameter drive settings
parameter drive settings (SW2, SW3)
6001
made by the DIP switches are not the
(SW2, SW3) by the DIP switches of the QnPRH 10
control system and standby system.
same.
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
The operational status of the control
system and standby system in the
Synchronise the operation statuses of
redundant system is not the same. Q4AR
the control system and standby system.
(This can be detected from the standby 11
6010
MAINTENANCE AND
The operational status of the control
system and standby system in the
INSPECTION
Synchronise the operation statuses of
redundant system is not the same.
the control system and standby system.
At power ON/reset, the RUN/STOP 12
switch settings of the control system
TROUBLESHOOTING
and standby system are not the same in Set the RUN/STOP switches of the
6020 a redundant system. control system and standby system to
(This can be detected from the control the same setting.
redundant system.)
• In a redundant system, the module QnPRH
• Match the module configurations of
configuration differs between the
the control system and standby
APPENDICES
system.
• The network module mode setting
6030 • In the redundant setting of the
differs between the two systems.
network parameter dialog box, match
the mode setting of System B to that
of System A.
redundant system.)
In a redundant system, the CPU module
model name differs between the control
Match the model names of the control
6035 system and standby system.
INDEX
system and standby system.


12 - 193
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
UNIT LAY.
6036 Module No. – Off Flicker Stop Always
DIFF.
At power ON/
At reset
CARD TYPE
DIFF.
At power ON/
At reset
CAN'T EXE.
MODE
At power ON/
CPU MODE At reset/At
DIFF. tracking cable
connection
When an END
CPU MODE
DIFF.
executed
At power ON/
CPU MODE At reset/At
DIFF. tracking cable
connection

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
A difference in the remote I/O
configuration of the MELSECNET/H
multiplexed remote I/O network
between the control system and Check the network cables of the 10
6036 standby system of a redundant system MELSECNET/H multiplexed remote I/O
was detected. network for disconnection.
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
QnPRH
redundant system.)
In a redundant system, the memory
Match the memory card installation 11
card installation status (installed/not
6040 statuses (set/not set) of the control
MAINTENANCE AND
installed) differs between the control
INSPECTION
In a redundant system, the memory
Match the memory card types of the
6041 card type differs between the control
The function inexecutable in the debug 12
mode or operation mode (backup/
TROUBLESHOOTING
Execute the function executable in the
separate mode) was executed.
6050 debug mode or operation mode
(backup/separate mode).
redundant system.)
QnPRH
In a redundant system, the operation
6060 mode (backup/separate) differs
between the control system and Match the operation modes of the
APPENDICES
standby system. control system and standby system.
6061
Both System A and B are in the same

Power the CPU module (System B)
system status (control system).
6062 which resulted in a stop error, OFF and QnPRH
(This can be detected from the system
then ON.
B of the redundant system.)
INDEX

12 - 195
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
At power ON/
TRUCKINERR
– – On On Continue At reset/
.
STOP RUN
6100
Tracking
TRK. TRANS. transmission
– On On Continue Always
ERR. data
classification

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
Hardware fault of the CPU module.
(Please contact your local nearest
A CPU module tracking memory error
Mitsubishi or sales representative,
was detected during initial.
explaining a detailed description of the 10
(This can be detected from the control Q4AR
problem. Change the CPU modules in
order of the standby system CPU
redundant system.)
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
module and control system CPU
module.)
6100 • An error (e.g. retry limit exceeded) • Check the CPU module or tracking
occurred in tracking data cable. If the error still occurs, this 11
transmission. indicates the CPU module or tracking
MAINTENANCE AND
(This error may be caused by cable is faulty. (Contact your local
tracking cable removal or other Mitsubishi representative, explaining QnPRH
INSPECTION
system power-off (including reset).) a detailed description of the problem.)
• The error occurred at a startup since • Confirm the redundant system startup
the redundant system startup procedure, and execute a startup
procedure was not followed. again. 12
TROUBLESHOOTING
APPENDICES
INDEX

12 - 197
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
When an END
TRUCKIN
– – On On Continue instruction
ERR.
executed
6101
Tracking
transmission
data
classification
6102 TRK. TRANS.

ERR.
6103

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
The CPU module detected an error
during the handshake for tracking.
Check the condition of the other
(This can be detected from the control Q4AR
stations. 10
redundant system.)
• A timeout error occurred in tracking
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
(data transmission).
(This error may be caused by tracking
6101
cable removal or other system power-
off (including reset).) 11
MAINTENANCE AND
INSPECTION
• Check the CPU module or tracking
redundant system.)
A data sum value error occurred in
cable. If the error still occurs, this 12
indicates the CPU module or tracking
tracking (data reception).
TROUBLESHOOTING
cable is faulty. (Contact your local
6102 (This can be detected from the control
Mitsubishi representative, explaining QnPRH
a detailed description of the problem.)
redundant system.)
• A data error (other than sum value
error) occurred in tracking (data
again.
reception).
(This error may be caused by tracking
APPENDICES
off (including reset).)
6103
redundant system.) INDEX

12 - 199
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
6105
Tracking
TRK. TRANS. transmission
ERR. data
classification
6106
6107
TRK. TRANS.
ERR.
6108
Tracking When an END

TRK. SIZE
6110 capacity excess – On On Continue instruction
ERROR
error factor executed

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
• An error (e.g. retry limit exceeded)
occurred in tracking (data
transmission).
(This error may be caused by tracking 10
off (including reset).)
6105
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
the redundant system startup • Check the CPU module or tracking
procedure was not followed. cable. If the error still occurs, this
(This can be detected from the control indicates the CPU module or tracking 11
system or standby system of the cable is faulty. (Contact your local
MAINTENANCE AND
redundant system.) Mitsubishi representative, explaining QnPRH
• A timeout error occurred in tracking a detailed description of the problem.)
INSPECTION
(data transmission). • Confirm the redundant system startup
(This error may be caused by tracking procedure, and execute a startup
cable removal or other system power- again.
off (including reset).) 12
6106 • The error occurred at a startup since
TROUBLESHOOTING
redundant system.)
A data sum value error occurred in
tracking (data reception).
6107 (This can be detected from the control
APPENDICES
redundant system.) • Check the CPU module or tracking
• A data error (other than sum value cable. If the error still occurs, this
error) occurred in tracking (data indicates the CPU module or tracking
reception). cable is faulty. (Contact your local
(This error may be caused by tracking Mitsubishi representative, explaining QnPRH
cable removal or other system power- a detailed description of the problem.)
off (including reset).) • Confirm the redundant system startup
INDEX
6108
• The error occurred at a startup since procedure, and execute a startup
the redundant system startup again.
redundant system.)
The tracking capacity exceeded the
allowed range.
6110 (This can be detected from the control Reexamine the tracking capacity. QnPRH
redundant system.)

12 - 201
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
When an END
TRK. SIZE
6111 – – On On Continue instruction
ERROR
executed
When an END
TRK. SIZE
6112 – – On On Continue instruction
ERROR
executed
6120 TRK. CABLE At power ON/

ERR. At reset

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
The control system does not have
enough file register capacity for the file
registers specified in the tracking Switch to the file registers of which
6111 settings. capacity is greater than the file registers 10
(This can be detected from the control specified in the tracking settings.
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
redundant system.)
File registers greater than those of the
standby system were tracked and Switch to the file registers of which
6112 transmitted from the control system. capacity is greater than the file registers 11
(This can be detected from the standby specified in the tracking settings.
MAINTENANCE AND
QnPRH
• A start was made without the tracking
INSPECTION
cable being connected.
• A start was made with the tracking Make a start after connecting the
cable faulty. tracking cable. If the same error still
• As the tracking hardware on the CPU occurs, this indicates the tracking cable 12
module side was faulty, or CPU module side tracking
TROUBLESHOOTING
6120
communication with the other system transmission hardware is faulty.
could not be made via the tracking (Contact your local Mitsubishi
cable. representative, explaining a detailed
(This can be detected from the control description of the problem.)
redundant system.)
APPENDICES
INDEX

12 - 203
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
TRK.
DISCONNECT
TRK.INIT. At power ON/

ERROR At reset
Reason(s) for
CONTROL
system – On Off Continue Always
EXE.
switching
6200
Reason(s) for
CONTROL
system – On Off No error Always
EXE.
switching

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
• If the tracking cable was removed,
connect the tracking cable to the
connectors of the CPU modules of
• The tracking cable was removed. the two systems. 10
• The tracking cable became faulty • When the error is not resolved after
while the CPU module is running. connecting the tracking cable to the
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
• The CPU module side tracking connectors of the CPU modules of
6130
hardware became faulty. the two systems and resetting the
(This can be detected from the control error, the tracking cable or CPU
system or standby system of the module side tracking hardware is 11
redundant system.) faulty.
MAINTENANCE AND
representative, explaining a detailed QnPRH
INSPECTION
• Power the corresponding CPU
• The other system did not respond module OFF and then ON again, or
during initial communication at power reset it and then unreset. If the same 12
ON/reset. error still occurs, this indicates the
TROUBLESHOOTING
• The error occurred at a startup since CPU module is faulty. (Contact your
6140 the redundant system startup local Mitsubishi representative,
procedure was not followed. explaining a detailed description of
(This can be detected from the control the problem.)
system or standby system of the • Confirm the redundant system startup
redundant system.) procedure, and execute a startup
again.
The standby system in a redundant
APPENDICES
system is switched to the control
system. Check the control system condition. Q4AR
The standby system has been switched
to the control system in a redundant
system. (Detected by the CPU that was
switched from the standby system to
INDEX
6200
the control system)
Since this error code does not indicate
the error information of the CPU module – QnPRH
but indicates its status, the error code
and error information are not stored into
SD0 to 26, but are stored into the error
log every system switching.
(Check the error information by reading
the error log using GX Developer.)

12 - 205
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
Reason(s) for
CONTROL
system – On Off Continue Always
WAIT
switching
6210
Reason(s) for
STANDBY system – On Off No error Always
switching
Reason(s) for
CAN'T EXE. At switching
system – On On Continue
CHANGE request
switching
6220
Reason(s) for
Reason(s) for
CAN'T system At switching
system On On Continue
SWITCH switching execution
switching
failure

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
The control system in a redundant
system is switched to the standby
system. Check the control system condition. Q4AR
(This can be detected from the standby 10
The control system has been switched
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
to the standby system in a redundant
system. (Detected by the CPU that was
switched from the control system to the
6210
standby system) 11
Since this error code does not indicate
MAINTENANCE AND
the error information of the CPU module – QnPRH
but indicates its status, the error code
INSPECTION
and error information are not stored into
SD0 to 26, but are stored into the error
log every system switching.
(Check the error information by reading 12
the error log using GX Developer.)
TROUBLESHOOTING
• Since the standby system is in an
error or similar status in the
redundant system, the control system
cannot be switched to the standby
system.
• When an attempt was made to
Check the standby system condition. Q4AR
execute system switching, the control
system could not be switched to the
APPENDICES
standby system due to a network
error of the control system.
6220
System switching cannot be executed
due to standby system error/ tracking
cable error/ online module change in
execution at separate mode. Causes for
INDEX
• Check the status of the standby

switching system at control system are
system and resolve the error. QnPRH
as follows:
• Complete the online module change.
• System switching by SP. CONTSW
instruction
• System switching request from
network module

12 - 207
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
Reason(s) for
CAN'T EXE. At switching
6221 system – On On Continue
CHANGE request
switching
DUAL SYS.
ERROR
STANDBY
SYS. DOWN

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
Switching is disabled because of a bus
This is a bus switching module
switching module error.
6221 hardware fault. (Contact your local
Q4AR 10
The link module mounted on the
6230 standby system CPU module is the Check the system configuration status.
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
remote master station.
• Check whether the standby system is
on or not, and if it is not on, power it
Any of the following errors was detected

on. 11
• Check whether the standby system
in the backup mode.
MAINTENANCE AND
has been reset or not, and if it has
• The standby system has not started
been reset, unreset it.
INSPECTION
up in the redundant system.
• Check whether the standby system
• The standby system has developed a
has developed a stop error or not,
6300 stop error in the redundant system. QnPRH
and if it has developed the error,
• The CPU module in the debug mode
remove the error factor and restart it. 12
was connected to the operating
• When the CPU module in the debug
TROUBLESHOOTING
control system.
mode was connected to the control
system operating in the backup
mode, make connection so that the
control system and standby system
are combined correctly.
APPENDICES
INDEX

12 - 209
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
CONTROL
SYS. DOWN
6311
CONTROL At power ON/

SYS. DOWN At reset
6312
CONTROL At power ON/

SYS. DOWN At reset

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
• The standby system exists but the
control system does not exist.
• Check whether the system other than
the standby system is on or not, and if 10
it is not on, power it on.
• Check whether the system other than
Any of the following errors was detected
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
the standby system has been reset or
in the backup mode.
not, and if it is has been reset,
• The control system has not started up
unreset it.
in the redundant system.
• The control system has developed a
• Check whether the system other than 11
the standby system has developed a
stop error in the redundant system.
MAINTENANCE AND
stop error or not, and if has
• The CPU module in the debug mode
6310 developed the error, remove the error QnPRH
INSPECTION
was connected to the operating
factor, set the control system and
standby system.
standby system to the same
operating status, and restart.
• When the CPU module in the debug 12
mode was connected to the control
TROUBLESHOOTING
system operating in the backup
mode, make connection so that the
control system and control system
are combined correctly.
again.
• As consistency check data has not • Replace the tracking cable. If the
APPENDICES
6311 transmitted from the control system in same error still occurs, this indicates
a redundant system, the other system the CPU module is faulty. (Contact
cannot start as a standby system. your local Mitsubishi representative,
• The error occurred at a startup since explaining a detailed description of QnPRH
6312 the redundant system startup the problem.)
procedure was not followed. • Confirm the redundant system startup
(This can be detected from the standby procedure, and execute a startup
system of the redundant system.) again.
INDEX
The control system detected the error of Restart the system after checking that
the system configuration and informed it the connection between base unit and
6313 QnPRH*1
to the standby system (host system) in the system configuration (type/number/
the redundant system. parameter of module) are correct.

12 - 211
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
At execution of
the memory
PRG. MEM. copy from
CLEAR control system
to standby
system
At execution of
the function of
copying
MEM.COPY
6410 – – On On Continue memory from
EXE
control system
to standby
system
File name/ Parameter At power ON/

Drive name number At reset
TRK. PARA.
ERROR
File name/ Parameter At power ON/
Drive name number At reset

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
After the memory copy from control
The memory copy from control system
system to standby system is completed,
6400 to standby system was executed, and
switch power OFF and then ON, or 10
the program memory was cleared.
make a reset.
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
QnPRH
The memory copy from control system

to standby system was executed.
6410
– 11
MAINTENANCE AND
INSPECTION
The file register file specified in the
error using GX Developer, and check
6500 tracking setting of the PLC parameter
and correct the drive name and file
dialog box does not exist.
name. Create the specified file. 12
The file register range specified in the QnPRH
TROUBLESHOOTING
device detail setting of the tracking Read the individual information of the
6501 setting of the PLC parameter dialog box error using GX Developer, and increase
exceeded the specified file register file the file register capacity.
capacity.
APPENDICES
INDEX

12 - 213
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic
MULTI CPU Module No.

DOWN (CPU No.)
7002
MULTI CPU Module No. At power ON/

DOWN (CPU No.) At reset
7003

*2 For the Basic model QCPU, the special register (SD207 to DS209) for LED indication priority can turn off the indication. (The LED indication is always OFF
for the High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, Redundant CPU, and Universal model QCPU.)

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
Error 10
Corresponding
CPU
(SD0)
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
• In the operating mode of a multiple • Read the individual information of the
CPU system, a CPU error occurred at error using GX Developer, identify the
Q00/Q01*1
the CPU where "All station stop by error of the CPU module, and remove
Qn(H)*1
stop error of CPU " was selected. the error.
QnPH
11
• In a multiple CPU system, a CPU • Remove the CPU module
module incompatible with the multiple incompatible with the multiple CPU QnU
MAINTENANCE AND
7000
CPU system was mounted. system from the main base unit.
INSPECTION
In a multiple CPU system, CPU other
Read the individual information of the Q00/Q01*1
than CPU No.1 cannot be started up
error using GX Developer, identify the Qn(H)*1
due to stop error of the CPU No.1 at
power-on, which occurs to CPU No.2 to
error of the CPU module, and remove QnPH 12
the error. QnU
No.4.
TROUBLESHOOTING
again, this suggests the hardware
• There is no response from the target fault of any of the CPU modules.
CPU module in a multiple CPU (Contact your local Mitsubishi
Q00/Q01*1
system during initial communication. representative.)
• In a multiple CPU system, a CPU • Remove the CPU module Qn(H)*1
module incompatible with the multiple incompatible with the multiple CPU QnPH
APPENDICES
CPU system was mounted. system from the main base unit. Or,
7002
replace the CPU module
system with the compatible one.
• There is no response from the target
again, this suggests the hardware
CPU module in a multiple CPU QnU
fault of any of the CPU modules.
INDEX
system during initial communication.

representative.)
There is no response from the target again. If the same error is displayed Q00/Q01*1
7003 CPU module in a multiple CPU system again, this suggests the hardware fault Qn(H)*1
at initial communication stage. of any of the CPU modules. (Contact QnPH

*5 Abbreviation for "MELSEC-Q series-compatible PC CPU module bus interface driver software package"

12 - 215
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic

DOWN (CPU No.)
MULTI EXE. Module No. At power ON/

ERROR (CPU No.) At reset


12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
• Check the system configuration to
see if modules are mounted in excess
of the number of I/O points.
In a multiple CPU system, a data error • When there are no problems in the 10
Q00/Q01*1
7004 occurred in communication between the system configuration, this indicates
QnU
CPU modules. the CPU module hardware is faulty.
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
• In a multiple CPU system, a faulty 11
CPU module was mounted.
MAINTENANCE AND
• In a multiple CPU system, a CPU
error using GX Developer, and
module incompatible with the multiple
INSPECTION
replace the faulty CPU module.
CPU system was mounted. (The CPU
• Replace the CPU module with the Q00/Q01*1
module compatible with the multiple
one compatible with the multiple CPU Qn(H)*1
CPU system was used to detect an
error.)
system. QnPH 12
• Do not reset any of the No. 2 to 4 QnU
• In a multiple CPU system, any of the
TROUBLESHOOTING
CPU modules.
CPU No. 2 to 4 was reset with power
• Reset CPU No. 1 and restart the
ON. (The CPU whose reset state was
cancelled was used to detect an
error.)
7010 The PC CPU module-compatible
Change the version of the PC CPU
software package (PPC-DRV-01)*5 module-compatible software package Q00/Q01*1
whose version is 1.06 or earlier is used
(PPC-DRV-01)*5 to 1.07 or later.
in a multiple CPU system.
APPENDICES
The Q172(H)CPU(N) or
Replace the Q172(H)CPU(N) and
Q173(H)CPU(N) is mounted on the
Q173(H)CPU(N) with the Motion CPU
multiple CPU high-speed main base
compatible with the multiple CPU high-
unit (Q3 DB). (This may result in a
speed main base unit. Qn(H)*4
module failure.)
QnPH*4
The Universal model QCPU (except
Check the QCPU and Motion CPU that
Q02UCPU) and Q172(H)CPU(N) are
can be used in a multiple CPU system,
mounted on the same base unit. (This
INDEX
and change the system configuration.

may result in a module failure.)


12 - 217
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic



7020 – On On Continue Always
ERROR (CPU No.)
7030
CPU LAY. Module No. At power ON/

7031


12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
Either of the following settings was
made in a multiple CPU system.
• Multiple CPU automatic refresh • Correct the multiple CPU automatic
setting was made for the inapplicable refresh setting. Q00/Q01*1
10
CPU module. • Correct the "I/O sharing when using QnU
• "I/O sharing when using multiple multiple CPUs" setting.
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
CPUs" setting was made for the
inapplicable CPU module.
The system configuration for using the
Multiple CPU high speed transmission 11
function is not met.
7011 • Change the system configuration to
MAINTENANCE AND
• The QnUD(H)CPU is not used for the
meet the conditions for using the
CPU No.1.
INSPECTION
Multiple CPU high speed
• The Multiple CPU high speed main
transmission function.
base unit (Q3 DB) is not used.
• Set the send range of CPU, that does QnU*3
• Points other than 0 is set to the send
range for the CPU module
not correspond to multiple CPU 12
compatible area, at 0 point, when
TROUBLESHOOTING
performing automatic refreshing in
high speed transmission function.
multiple CPU compatible area.
• Points other than 0 is set to the send
range for the CPU module
incompatible with the multiple CPU.
The Q172(H)CPU(N) or Check the QCPU and Motion CPU that
Q173(H)CPU(N) is mounted to the CPU can be used in a multiple CPU
7013 QnU
slot or slots 0 to 2. (The module may system,and change the system
break down.) configuration.
APPENDICES
In the operating mode of a multiple CPU Read the individual information of the
Q00/Q01*1
system, an error occurred in the CPU error using the peripheral device, check
7020 where "system stop" was not selected. the error of the CPU module resulting in Qn(H)*1
(The CPU module where no error CPU module fault, and remove the QnPH
occurred was used to detect an error.) error. QnU
An assignment error occurred in the • Set the same value to the number of
CPU-mountable slot (CPU slot, I/O slot CPU modules specified in the
0, 1) in excess of the number of CPU multiple CPU setting of the PLC
INDEX
7030
modules specified in the multiple CPU parameter dialog box and the number
Q00J/Q01/
setting of the PLC parameter dialog of mounted CPU modules (including
Q01*1
box. CPU (empty)).
QnU
An assignment error occurred within the • Make the type specified in the I/O
range of the number of CPUs specified assignment setting of the PLC
7031
in the multiple CPU setting of the PLC parameter dialog box consistent with
parameter dialog box. the CPU module configuration.


12 - 219
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Diagnostic


ERROR (Slot No.) At reset
CPU RAY Module No. At power ON/

At power-On/
At reset/
INCORRECT File diagnostic STOP RUN/
FILE information At writing to
programmable
controller
On/
On When
Program error Annunciator Off *2
9000 F**** Continue instruction
location number
USER LED On executed
On Off
When
<CHK>ERR Program error
9010 Failure No. Continue instruction
***-*** location USER LED On
executed
At power ON/
9020 BOOT OK – – Off Flicker Stop
At reset
CONT. UNIT
10000 – – Off Flicker Continue Always
ERROR


12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error
Corresponding
CPU
EMC AND LOW

(SD0)
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
Configure a system so that the number
• The number of CPU modules of mountable modules of each CPU
Q00/Q01*1
7032 mounted in a multiple CPU system is module does not exceed the maximum
wrong. number of mountable modules specified
QnU 10
in the specification.
Q00J/Q00/
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
The CPU module has been mounted on Mount the CPU module on the Q01*1
7035
the inapplicable slot. applicable slot. QnPRH
QnU
• Mount the mounting slot of the CPU 11
The host CPU No. set by the multiple module correctly.
MAINTENANCE AND
CPU setting and the host CPU No. • Correct the host CPU No. set by the
7036 QnU*3
determined by the mounting position of multiple CPU setting to the CPU No.
INSPECTION
the CPU module are not the same. determined by the mounting position
of the CPU module.
Write the file shown as SD17 to SD22 of
individual information to the drive shown
12
as SD16(L) of individual information,
TROUBLESHOOTING
and turn ON from OFF the power supply
The error of stored file (enabled of the CPU module or cancel the reset.
8031 QnU
parameter file) is detected. If the same error is displayed again, the
CPU module has hardware failure.
Contact your local Mitsubishi
APPENDICES
error using the peripheral device, and
9000 Annunciator (F) was set ON
check the program corresponding to the
numerical value (annunciator number).
Read the individual information of the QnA
error using the peripheral device, and Qn(H)
9010 Error detected by the CHK instruction.
check the program corresponding to the QnPH
numerical value (error number) there. QnPRH
Use the DIP switches to set the valid
INDEX
Storage of data onto ROM was

parameter drive to the standard ROM. Qn(H)*1
completed normally in automatic write
9020 Then, switch power on again, and QnPH
to standard ROM.
perform boot operation from the QnPRH
(BOOT LED also flickers.)
standard ROM.
In the multiple CPU system, an error
Check the details of the generated error
occurred in the CPU module other than Qn(H)*1
10000 by connecting to the corresponding
the Process CPU/High Performance QnPH
CPU module using GX Developer.
model QCPU.


12 - 221
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
12.3.10 Canceling of Errors
Q series CPU module can perform the cancel operation for errors only when the
errors allow the CPU module to continue its operation.
To cancel the errors, follow the steps shown below.
1) Eliminate the cause of the error.

2) Store the error code to be canceled in the special register SD50.
3) Energize the special relay SM50 (OFF ON).
4) The error to be canceled is canceled.
After the CPU module is reset by the canceling of the error, the special relays, special
registers, and LEDs associated with the error are returned to the status under which
the error occurred.
If the same error occurs again after the cancellation of the error, it will be registered
again in the error history.
When multiple enunciators(F) detected are canceled, the first one with No. F only is
canceled.
Refer to the following manual for details of error canceling.

POINT
1. When the error is canceled with the error code to be canceled stored in the
SD50, the lower one digit of the code is neglected.
(Example)
If error codes 2100 and 2101 occur, and error code 2100 to cancel error code
2101.
If error codes 2100 and 2111 occur, error code 2111 is not canceled even if
error code 2100 is canceled.
2. Errors developed due to trouble in other than the CPU module are not
canceled even if the special relay (SM50) and special register (SD50) are
used to cancel the error.
(Example)
Since "SP. UNIT DOWN" is the error that occurred in the base unit (including
the extension cable), intelligent function module, etc. the error cause cannot
be removed even if the error is canceled by the special relay (SM50) and
special register (SD50).
Refer to the error code list and remove the error cause.

12.3.10 Canceling of Errors
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
12.3.11 Error codes returned to request source during communication with
CPU module
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
The Q series CPU module returns an error code to the request source if an error occurs at
a request of communication from GX Developer, intelligent function module or network
system. 10
POINT
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
This error code is not an error that is detected by the CPU module self-diagnosis
function, so it is not stored in the special relay (SD0).
When the request source is a GX Developer, a message or an error code is
displayed.
When the request source is an intelligent function module or network system, an
11
error is returned to the process that was requested.
MAINTENANCE AND
INSPECTION
The error contents of the error codes (4000H to 4FFFH) detected by the CPU module and
the messages displayed by the GX Developer are shown in Table12.12.

12
Error code
Error item Error details Corrective action
TROUBLESHOOTING
(Hexadecimal)
• Connect the serial communication cable correctly.
4000H Serial communication sum check error
• Check the command data of the MC protocol, etc.
4001H Unsupported request was executed. • Check the CPU module model name selected in the
peripheral device.
• Check the command data of the MC protocol, etc.
4002H Unsupported request was executed. • Check the CPU module model name selected in the
peripheral device.
Command for which a global request cannot
APPENDICES
4003H Check the command data of the MC protocol, etc.
be performed was executed.
Any operation for the CPU module is
• Set the system protect switch of the CPU module to
Common error prohibited by the system protect function
OFF.
4004H provided against the following events.
• Perform operation again after the CPU module has
• The system protect switch is ON.
completed starting.
• The CPU module is starting.
The volume of data handled according to the
4005H Check the command data of the MC protocol, etc.
specified request is too large.
• Check with the external device maker for the support
INDEX
condition.
4006H Serial communication could not be initialized.
• Check the CPU module model name selected in the
peripheral device.
The CPU module is BUSY.
4008H After the free time has passed, reexecute the request.
(The buffer is not vacant).
Since the CPU module is running, the request
4010H Execute after setting the CPU module to STOP status.
contents cannot be executed.
CPU mode
Since the CPU module is not in a STOP
error
4013H status, the request contents cannot be Execute after setting the CPU module to STOP status.
executed.

12.3.11 Error codes returned to request source during communication with CPU module
12 - 223
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error code
(Hexadecimal)
• Check the specified drive memory status.
The specified drive memory does not exist or
4021H • After backing up the data in the CPU module, execute
there is an error.
programmable controller memory format.
The file with the specified file name or file No.
4022H Check the specified file name and file No.
does not exist.
The file name and file No. of the specified file
4023H Delete the file and then recreate the file.
do not match.
4024H The specified file cannot be handled by a user. Do not access the specified file.
Forcibly execute the request, or make the request again
The specified file is processing the request
4025H after the processing from the other peripheral device is
from the other peripheral device.
completed.
The file password or drive keyword set to the Make access after specifying the file password or drive
4026H
target drive (memory) must be specified. keyword set to the target drive (memory).
4027H CPU file The specified range exceeds the file range. Check the specified range and access within that range.
related error Forcefully execute the request forcibly.
4028H The same file already exists.
Or reexecute after changing the file name.
Revise the specified file contents.
4029H The specified file capacity cannot be obtained. Or reexecute after cleaning up and reorganizing the
specified drive memory.
After backing up the data in the CPU module, execute
402AH The specified file is abnormal.
Execute again after setting the CPU module to the STOP
status.
The request contents cannot be executed in
402BH Execute programmable controller memory arrangement
the specified drive memory.
to increase the continuous free space of the drive
(memory).
The requested operation cannot be executed
402CH Execute again after a while.
currently.
4030H The specified device name cannot be handled. Check the specified device name.
• Check the specified device No.
4031H The specified device No. is outside the range. • Check the device assignment parameters of the CPU
module.
There is a mistake in the specified device
qualification.
The unusable device name
• Check the specified device qualification method.
4032H (TS,TC,SS,SC,CS,CC) must be specified in
• Check the specified device name.
CPU device MC protocol random reading, random writing
specified error (word), monitor registeration and monitor
command.
Writing cannot be done because the specified Do not write the data in the specified device, and do not
4033H
device is for system use. turn on or off.
Since the completion device for the target station CPU
Cannot be executed since the completion module cannot be turned ON by the SREAD instruction/
4034H device for the dedicated instruction cannot be SWRITE instruction, execute again after setting the
turned ON. operating status of the target station CPU module to the
RUN status.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
EMC AND LOW

Error code
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
(Hexadecimal)
The request contents cannot be executed in Check whether the specified module is the intelligent
4040H
the specified intelligent function module. function module having the buffer memory.
The access range exceeds the buffer memory Check the header address and access number of points 10
4041H range of the specified intelligent function and access using a range that exists in the intelligent
Intelligent
module. function module.
function
• Check that the specified intelligent function module is
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
module The specified intelligent function module
4042H operating normally.
specification cannot be accessed.
• Check the specified module for a hardware fault.
error
The intelligent function module does not exist Check the I/O No. of the specified intelligent function
4043H
in the specified position. module.
A control bus error occurred during access to Check the specified intelligent function module and other 11
4044H
the intelligent function module. modules and base units for a hardware fault.
MAINTENANCE AND
The request contents cannot be executed
4050H because the memory card write protect switch Turn off the memory card write protect switch.
INSPECTION
is on.
Check the following and make it countermeasures.
The specified device memory cannot be
4051H • Is the memory one that can be used?
accessed.
• Is the specified drive memory correctly installed? 12
The specified file attribute is read only so the Do not write data in the specified file.
4052H Protect error
TROUBLESHOOTING
data cannot be written. Or change the file attribute.
Check the specified drive memory.
An error occurred when writing data to the
4053H Or reexecute write after changing the corresponding
specified drive memory.
drive memory.
Check the specified drive memory.
An error occurred when deleting the data in
4054H Or re-erase after replacing the corresponding drive
the specified drive memory.
memory.
• Execute the function again after the operation of the
other peripheral device has ended.
The online debug function is being executed • When the operation was suspended by the other
APPENDICES
4060H
by the other peripheral device. peripheral device, execute the function again after
executing it on the other peripheral device to normally
complete the operation.
• Execute communication after the registering the online
Online debug function (e.g.online program change/trace/
Communication of the online debug function
4061H registration conditional monitor).
was unsuccessful.
error • Execute again after checking the communication route
such as the communication cable.
The registered number of locked files Execute again after file access by the other peripheral
INDEX
4063H
exceeded the maximum value. device has ended.
• Check the set data of the online debug function (e.g.
The specified data of the online debug online program change/trace/conditional monitor).
4064H
function is incorrect. • Execute again after checking the communication route
such as the communication cable.

12 - 225
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error code
(Hexadecimal)
The device allocation information differs from Check the device assignment parameters of the CPU
4065H
the parameter. module or the device assignment of the request data.
The specified drive keyword/file password is • Correct the drive keyword of the specified drive.
4066H
wrong. • Correct the file password of the specified file.
• Check the system area capacity of the user setting
Online specified for programmable controller memory format.
4067H Monitor communication was unsuccessful.
registration • Execute again after checking the communication route
error such as the communication cable.
Operation is disabled since the same
Execute the function again after the operation from the
4068H operation is being executed from the other
other peripheral device has been ended.
peripheral device.
The drive (memory) number that cannot be
406AH Check the specified drive and specify the correct drive.
handled (other than 0 to 4) was specified.
The program not yet corrected and the one Execute Read from PLC to make the program of the
Circuit inquiry
4070H corrected by online program change are peripheral device the same as that of the CPU module,
error
different. and then execute online program change again.
4080H Request data error Check the request data specified in the MC protocol, etc.
4081H The sort subject cannot be detected. Check the data to be searched.
The specified command is executing and Execute the command again after the request from the
4082H
therefore cannot be executed. other peripheral device is completed.
An attempt was made to perform operation for
4083H Register the program to the parameters.
the program not registered to the parameters.
4084H The specified pointer P, I did not exist. Check the pointer P, I in the specified data.
Pointer P, I cannot be specified because the Specify pointer P, I after registering the program to be
4085H
program is not specified in the parameter. executed in the parameter.
Other errors
4086H Pointer P, I has already been added. Check the pointer No. to be added and make correction.
4087H Trying to specify too many pointer P, I. Check the specified pointer P, I and make a correction.
• The specified step No. is not the start of the • Check and correct the specified step No.
instruction. • Read from PLC to make the program of the peripheral
4088H
• Program stored in the CPU is different from device the same as that of the CPU module, and write
the relevant program. to PLC during RUN again.
• Check the specified program file contents.
An attempt was made to insert/delete the END
4089H • Write the program after setting the CPU module to the
instruction by online program change.
STOP status.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
EMC AND LOW

Error code
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
(Hexadecimal)
• Check the capacity of the specified program file.
The file capacity was exceeded by the write
408AH • Write the program after setting the CPU module to the
during Run.
STOP status. 10
• Reexecute after the CPU module is in a status where
the mode request can be executed.
408BH The remote request cannot be executed.
• For remote operation, set the parameter to "Enable
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
remote reset".
An attempt was made to remote-start the • The program including the CHK instruction cannot be
408CH program, which uses the CHK instruction, as a executed at low speed. Execute again after checking
low speed program. the program.
• Check whether the model of the used CPU module is 11
correct or not.
Other errors
MAINTENANCE AND
• The sequence program where online program change
The instruction code that cannot be handled
408DH was attempted includes the instruction that cannot be
INSPECTION
exists.
handled by the CPU module model name set in the
project. Reexamine the sequence program and delete
that instruction.
• Write the program after setting the CPU module to the
STOP status.
12
• The starting position of online program change is not
TROUBLESHOOTING
408EH The write step is illegal. specified with the correct program step No. Check
whether the used peripheral device supports the CPU
module model name and CPU module version set in
the project.
40A0H A block No. outside the range was specified. Check the setting contents and make a correction.
A number of blocks that exceeds the range
40A1H Check the number of settings and make a correction.
was specified.
A step No. that is outside the range was
40A2H Check the setting contents and make a correction.
SFC device specified.
APPENDICES
40A3H specification Step range limit exceeded Check the number of settings and make a correction.
error The specified sequence step No. is outside
the range.
40A5H The specified device is outside the range. Check the number of settings and make a correction.
The block specification pattern and step
specification pattern were wrong.
The drive (memory) specified in SFC file
40B0H Check the setting contents and make a correction.
operation is wrong.
The SFC program specified in SFC file
INDEX
40B1H Check the specified file name and make a correction.

operation does not exist.
The program specified in SFC file operation is
40B2H Check the specified file name and make a correction.
not an SFC program.
SFC file Using online program change of SFC, an
related error attempt was made to execute rewrite
operation of the "SFC dedicated instruction",
such as the "STEP start instruction or Write the program after setting the CPU module to the
40B3H
transition start instruction", that shows an SFC STOP status.
chart.
(SFC dedicated instruction cannot be written
during RUN.)

12 - 227
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error code
(Hexadecimal)
4100H CPU module hardware fault Change the CPU module.
Serial communication connection was
4101H Check the CPU module series.
executed for a different CPU module series.
An attempt was made to erase the Flash ROM Execute again after setting the CPU module to the STOP
4102H
during use of the file register. status.
Execute online program change again, or write the
The instruction written during RUN is wrong or
4103H program after setting the CPU module to the STOP
illegal.
status.
4105H CPU module internal memory hardware fault Change the CPU module.
The command cannot be executed since the
Execute the operation again after the CPU module has
4106H CPU module is performing system initialization
started.
processing.
An attempt was made to perform the operation
Other errors Do not execute the function unsupported by the target
4107H of the function unavailable for the target CPU
CPU module.
module model name.
Execute device monitor/test again. Before execution,
Operation cannot be made normally by device
4108H check that access is not made to the access prohibited
monitor/test.
area.
The specified operation cannot be executed
since the monitoring, set the condition for Execute the request again after deregistering the
4109H
other application in same computer, is in monitoring condition on the same screen.
execution.
The specified command cannot be executed Execute the request again after the online program
410AH
because of online prgram change. change.
The registration of monitoring condition was Execute the registration of monitoring condition again
410BH
canceled because of online program change. after the online program change.
Since the CPU module is in a stop error Execute the request again after resetting the CPU
4110H
status, it cannot execute the request. module.
CPU mode
The requested operation cannot be performed
error Execute the request again after the other CPU modules
4111H since the other CPU modules have not yet
have started.
started in the multiple CPU system.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Error code
(Hexadecimal)
The specified drive (memory) or file does not Execute again after checking the specified drive
EMC AND LOW

4121H
DIRECTIVES
exist. (memory) or file.
VOLTAGE
The specified drive (memory) or file does not Execute again after checking the specified drive
4122H
exist. (memory) or file.
Execute programmable controller memory format to
make the drive (memory) normal. 10
4123H The specified drive (memory) is abnormal. In the case of the Flash ROM, check the data to be
written to the Flash ROM, and write them to the Flash
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
ROM.
Execute programmable controller memory format to
make the drive (memory) normal.
4124H The specified drive (memory) is abnormal. In the case of the Flash ROM, check the data to be
written to the Flash ROM, and write them to the Flash 11
ROM.
The specified drive (memory) or file is
MAINTENANCE AND
4125H Execute again after a while.
performing processing.
INSPECTION
The specified drive (memory) or file is
4126H Execute again after a while.
performing processing.
4127H File password mismatch Execute again after checking the file password.
4128H File password mismatch with copy destination Execute again after checking the file password.
Cannot be executed since the specified drive 12
4129H Execute again after changing the target drive (memory).
(memory) is ROM.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Cannot be executed since the specified drive
412AH Execute again after changing the target drive (memory).
(memory) is ROM.
The specified drive (memory) is write- Execute again after changing the write inhibit condition or
412BH
File-related inhibited. drive (memory).
errors The specified drive (memory) is write- Execute again after changing the write inhibit condition or
412CH
File-related inhibited. drive (memory).
errors The specified drive (memory) does not have Execute again after increasing the free space of the drive
412DH
enough free space. (memory).
The specified drive (memory) does not have Execute again after increasing the free space of the drive
412EH
APPENDICES
enough free space. (memory).
The drive (memory) capacity differs between
Execute again after checking the drive (memory) copy
412FH the drive (memory) copy destination and copy
destination and copy source.
source.
The drive (memory) type differs between the
Execute again after checking the drive (memory) copy
4130H drive (memory) copy destination and copy
destination and copy source.
source.
The file name of the file copy destination is the
4131H Execute again after checking the file names.
same as that of the copy source.
INDEX
4132H The specified number of files does not exist. Execute again after checking the specified data.
The specified drive (memory) has no free Execute again after increasing the free space of the drive
4133H
space. (memory).
The attribute specification data of the file is
4134H Execute again after checking the specified data.
wrong.
The date/time data of the peripheral device Execute again after checking the clock setting of the
4135H
(personal computer) is beyond the range. peripheral device (personal computer).
4136H The specified file already exists. Execute again after checking the specified file name.
Execute again after changing the condition of the
4137H The specified file is read-only.
specified file.
Simultaneously accessible files exceeded the
4138H Execute again after decreasing file operations.
maximum.
The specified file has exceeded the already Execute again after checking the size of the specified
4139H
existing file range. file.

12 - 229
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error code
(Hexadecimal)
The specified file has exceeded the already Execute again after checking the size of the specified
413AH
existing file size. file.
The same file was accessed simultaneously
413BH Execute again after a while.
from different peripheral devices.
File-related
413CH The specified file is write-inhibited. Execute again after changing the file condition.
errors
Execute again after increasing the capacity of the
413DH File-related The specified file capacity cannot be secured.
specified drive (memory).
errors
Operation is disabled for the specified drive
413EH Execute again after changing the target drive (memory).
(memory).
The file is inhibited from write to the standard Execute again after changing the specified drive
413FH
RAM. (memory).
Intelligent Operation was executed for the intelligent
Execute the operation again from the control CPU of the
414AH function function module of the non-control group in the
target module.
module multiple CPU system.
specification The I/O address of the specified CPU module Execute again after checking the I/O address of the
414CH
error is wrong. specified CPU module.
An attempt was made to format the drive Do not format the target drive (memory) as it cannot be
4150H
File-related protected by the system. formatted.
errors An attempt was made to delete the file
4151H Do not delete the target file as it cannot be deleted.
protected by the system.
The registered number of forced inputs/
4160H Deregister the unused forced inputs/outputs.
outputs exceeded the maximum value.
Execute again after securing the area that enables
The multiple-block online change system file
4165H multiple-block online change at the time of
does not exist.
Since the file batch online change executed previously
Cannot be executed since file batch online remains abnormally terminated for some reason
4166H change is being made by the same starting (example: communication disturbance during execution),
source. file batch online change is disabled.
Forcibly perform new file batch online change.
Since the file batch online change executed previously
from the other communication route remains abnormally
terminated for some reason (example: communication
Cannot be executed since file batch online
Online disturbance during execution), file batch online change is
4167H change is being made from the other starting
registration disabled.
source.
error If file batch online change is not being executed by the
other peripheral device, forcibly perform new file batch
online change.
Deregister the device test with executing condition in
The registered number of device test with
4168H CPU module, or decrease the number of registering
executing condition exceeds 32.
device test with executing condition at one time.
Deregister the device test with executing condition after
The device test with executing condition has
4169H checking the registered number of device test with
never been registered.
executing condition in CPU module.
The specified executing condition does not Check whether the specified executing conditions
416AH exist. (program, step No. operation timing, device name) in
(Device test with executing condition) deregistering are registered.
The specified program is SFC program. Check the specifing program name in de/registering the
416BH
(Device test with executing condition) device test with executing condition.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
EMC AND LOW

Error code
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
(Hexadecimal)
Check the specified remote passward then, execute the
4170H The passward is wrong.
lock/unlock processing of the remote password again.
4171H
The port for communication use is at remote Execute communication after unlocking the remote 10
passsword locking status. password processing.
• Stop transmitting from several modules simultaneously
when setting a remote password and using User
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
Requested for a wrong module to unlock Datagram Protocol (UDP) in MELSOFT connection.
4174H
remote password. • The MELSOFT connection can be used with
Transmission Control protocol (TCP) when setting a
remote password.
• Do not specify the direct connection when using other 11
connection setting.
Communication error occured in direct
MAINTENANCE AND
4176H • Do not turn off the CPU power during communication,
connection.
reset the power, and plug out the cable in direct
INSPECTION
connection.
• The file operation cannot be performed
since File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is being
Execute the file access again after the completion of the
4178H accessed.
• Online operation in peripheral file access
FTP file access. 12
was executed during FTP file access.
TROUBLESHOOTING
• Check whether the power module and the
Ethernet
programmable controller CPU are attached properly.
I/F
• Check whether the system's use environment is within
Error
the range of the programmable controller CPU
genaral specifications.
System error.(The setting data in OS is
4180H • Check whether the power capacity is sufficient.
abnormal.)
• Reset the CPU module.
If the error is shown once again, the CPU module
hardware must be abnormal. Please contact with system
APPENDICES
service stations, agencies, or branch offices nearby and
consult forl the problems.
• Check the receiving module operation.
• Check the status of the lines, such as cables, hubs
Transmission to the receiving modules is
4181H and routes,connected to receiving modules.
unsuccessful.
• Some line packets may be engaged. Retry to
communicate a little while later.
• Check the status of the lines such as a cable, a hub
Communication with receiving modules
INDEX
4182H and a route to receiving modules.

caused a time-out error.
• Some line packets may be engaged. Retry to
communicate a little while later.
Communication with receiving modules was
4183H • Check the status of the lines such as cables, hubs and
interrupted.
routes connected to receiving modules.

12 - 231
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error code
(Hexadecimal)
4184H System error (The buffer in OS is abnormal.)
System error (The connection processing in
4185H
OS is abnormal.)
System error (The argument data in OS is
4186H
abnormal.)
System error (The wait processing in OS is
4187H
abnormal.)
System error (The data length in OS is
4188H
abnormal.)
System error (The protocol information in OS
4189H
is abnormal.)
System error (The address data of
418AH
communicating module in OS is abnormal.)
System error (The protocol information in OS
418BH
is abnormal.) • Check whether the power module and programmable
System error (The protocol specification controller CPU are attached properly.
418CH
processing in OS is abnormal.) • Check whether the system use environment is within
System error the range of the programmable controller CPU
418DH
(The typed data in OS is abnormal.) genaral specifications.
System error (The expedited data processing • Check whether the power capacity is sufficient.
418EH
in OS is abnormal.) • Reset the CPU module.
Ethernet
418FH System error (The protocol information in OS If the error is shown once again, the CPU module
I/F
4190H is abnormal.) hardware is abnormal. Please contact with system
Error
System error (The address data of service, agency, or branch office nearby and tell the
4191H
communicating module in OS is abnormal.) problems.
System error (The host module address
4192H
processing in OS is abnormal.)
4193H to System error (The transmission processing in
4196H OS is abnormal.)
4197H System error (The connection processing in
4198H OS is abnormal.)
System error (The connection termination
4199H
processing is abnormal.)
System error (The connection processing in
419AH
OS is abnormal.)
System error (The connection termination
419BH
processing is abnormal.)
419CH System error (The processing order in OS is
419DH abnormal.)
• Check the status of the lines such as a cable, a hub
Connection to the module was unsuccessful
419EH and a route to receiving modules
or interrupped.
• Retry to connect a little while later, if the error occured
in communication.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
EMC AND LOW

Error code
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
(Hexadecimal)
System error (The I/O control processing is • Check whether the power module and programmable
419FH
abnormal.) controller CPU are attached properly.
• Check whether the system use environment is within 10
Ethernet the range of the programmable controller CPU
I/F genaral specifications.
System error (The processing in OS is
41A0H Error • Check whether the power capacity is sufficient.
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
abnormal.)
• Reset the CPU module.
If the error is shown once again, the CPU module
hardware is abnormal. Please contact with system
The file information data may be corrupted.
41C1H
The format information data of the specified
drive (memory) is abnormal.
After backing up the data in the CPU module, execute 11
MAINTENANCE AND
File open specification data for file access is
41C2H Execute again after checking the specification data.
wrong.
INSPECTION
41C3H Execute again after decreasing file operations.
maximum.
41C4H Execute again after decreasing file operations.
41C5H
maximum.
The specified file does not exist. Execute again after checking the file.
12
File-related
TROUBLESHOOTING
The specified file or drive (memory) does not
41C7H errors Execute again after checking the file or drive (memory).
exist.
Execute again after checking the size of the specified
file.
The specified file has exceeded the already If the error recurs after re-execution, the file information
41C8H
existing file range. data may be corrupted.
Access to the file sector was unsuccessful.
41C9H The format information data of the target drive
APPENDICES
(memory) is abnormal.
INDEX

12 - 233
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error code
(Hexadecimal)
41CAH The format information data of the target drive
41CBH The file name is specified in a wrong method. Execute again after checking the file name.
41CCH The specified file does not exist. Execute again after checking the file.
41CDH Access to the file is inhibited by the system. Do not access the specified file.
The specified file is write-disabled since its The specified file is write-inhibited. Execute again after
41CEH
attribute is read-only. checking the attribute.
The specified drive (memory) capacity was Execute again after checking the drive (memory)
41CFH
exceeded. capacity.
41D0H
space. (memory).
Execute again after checking the file name.
If the error recurs after re-execution, the file information
41D1H The file name is specified in a wrong method. data may be corrupted.
file.
41D4H
File-related
errors
Forcibly execute the request, or execute after changing
41D5H The file of the same name exists.
the file name.
41D6H After backing up the data in the CPU module, execute
41D8H The specified file is being accessed. Execute again after a while.
The specified drive (memory) is write- Execute again after canceling the write protect of the
41DFH
protected. specified drive (memory).
• Execute again after checking whether the memory
The specified drive (memory) is abnormal or card has been installed.
41E0H
does not exist. • After backing up the data, execute programmable
controller memory format.
• After backing up the data, execute write to PLC (Flash
ROM).
41E1H Access to the flash ROM was unsuccessful. • Execute again after checking whether the specified
drive is the Flash ROM card and whether the memory
card size is correct.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
EMC AND LOW

Error code
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
(Hexadecimal)
card has been installed.
41E4H Access to the memory card was unsuccessful. • Execute again after replacing the memory card. 10
• After backing up the data, execute programmable
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
41E7H After backing up the data in the CPU module, execute
programmable controller memory format. 11
41E9H The specified file is being accessed. Execute again after some time.
MAINTENANCE AND
41EBH The file name is specified in a wrong method. Execute again after checking the file name.
The file information data may have been corrupted.
INSPECTION
The file system of the specified drive
41ECH After backing up the data in the CPU module, execute
(memory) is logically corrupted.
The specified drive (memory) does not have
Execute again after deleting unnecessary files or
41EDH
continuous free space.
executing programmable controller memory 12
(The free space for file is sufficient but the
arrangement.
TROUBLESHOOTING
continuous free space is insufficient.)
Creation of power failure backup for the Execute again after checking whether the memory card
41EFH
File-related specified drive (memory) was unsuccessful. has been installed.
errors The power failure backup data of the specified Execute again after checking whether the memory card
41F0H
drive (memory) are corrupted. has been installed.
The power failure backup for the specified Execute again after checking whether the memory card
41F1H
drive (memory) has a repair command. has been installed.
Execute again after checking the specified drive
Operation cannot be performed since the (memory).
41F2H
specified drive (memory) is Flash ROM. When performing operation for the Flash ROM, use write
APPENDICES
to PLC (Flash ROM).
PLC write to the program memory or transfer to the
The identical data is being accessed by the backup memory is in execution.
41F8H
other peripheral devices. Access the data again after checking that the above-
mentioned function has been completed.
Program was written beyond the area where Execute again after reducing either the already written
41FAH
the program can be executed. program or newly written program.
Operation is being performed for the file
Execute again after the currently performed operation is
41FBH already specified for the same peripheral
INDEX
completed.
device.
An attempt was made to erase the drive The specified drive (memory) is being used and cannot
41FCH
(memory) being used. be erased.
41FDH There are no data written to the Flash ROM. Write a file by executing write to PLC (Flash ROM).
41FEH The memory card has not been inserted. Insert or re-insert the memory card.
41FFH The memory card type differs. Check the memory card type.

12 - 235
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error code
(Hexadecimal)
41CAH The format information data of the target drive
41CBH The file name is specified in a wrong method. Execute again after checking the file name.
41CCH The specified file does not exist. Execute again after checking the file.
41CDH Access to the file is inhibited by the system. Do not access the specified file.
The specified file is write-disabled since its The specified file is write-inhibited. Execute again after
41CEH
attribute is read-only. checking the attribute.
The specified drive (memory) capacity was Execute again after checking the drive (memory)
41CFH
exceeded. capacity.
41D0H
space. (memory).
Execute again after checking the file name.
If the error recurs after re-execution, the file information
41D1H The file name is specified in a wrong method. data may be corrupted.
file.
41D4H
File-related Forcibly execute the request, or execute after changing
41D5H The file of the same name exists.
errors the file name.
41D8H The specified file is being accessed. Execute again after a while.
The specified drive (memory) is write- Execute again after canceling the write protect of the
41DFH
protected. specified drive (memory).
The specified drive (memory) is abnormal or card has been installed.
41E0H
does not exist. • After backing up the data, execute programmable
• After backing up the data, execute write to PLC (Flash
ROM).
41E1H Access to the flash ROM was unsuccessful. • Execute again after checking whether the specified
drive is the Flash ROM card and whether the memory
card size is correct.
card has been installed.
41E4H Access to the memory card was unsuccessful. • Execute again after replacing the memory card.
• After backing up the data, execute programmable

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
EMC AND LOW

Error code
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
(Hexadecimal)
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
41E9H The specified file is being accessed. Execute again after some time.
41EBH The file name is specified in a wrong method. Execute again after checking the file name.
The file information data may have been corrupted.
The file system of the specified drive
41ECH After backing up the data in the CPU module, execute
(memory) is logically corrupted.
The specified drive (memory) does not have
Execute again after deleting unnecessary files or
MAINTENANCE AND
continuous free space.
41EDH executing programmable controller memory
(The free space for file is sufficient but the
INSPECTION
arrangement.
continuous free space is insufficient.)
Creation of power failure backup for the Execute again after checking whether the memory card
41EFH
specified drive (memory) was unsuccessful. has been installed.
41F0H
The power failure backup data of the specified Execute again after checking whether the memory card 12
drive (memory) are corrupted. has been installed.
File-related
TROUBLESHOOTING
The power failure backup for the specified Execute again after checking whether the memory card
41F1H errors
drive (memory) has a repair command. has been installed.
Execute again after checking the specified drive
Operation cannot be performed since the (memory).
41F2H
specified drive (memory) is Flash ROM. When performing operation for the Flash ROM, use write
to PLC (Flash ROM).
PLC write to the program memory or transfer to the
The identical data is being accessed by the backup memory is in execution.
41F8H
other peripheral devices. Access the data again after checking that the above-
mentioned function has been completed.
APPENDICES
Program was written beyond the area where Execute again after reducing either the already written
41FAH
the program can be executed. program or newly written program.
Operation is being performed for the file
Execute again after the currently performed operation is
41FBH already specified for the same peripheral
completed.
device.
An attempt was made to erase the drive The specified drive (memory) is being used and cannot
41FCH
(memory) being used. be erased.
41FDH There are no data written to the Flash ROM. Write a file by executing write to PLC (Flash ROM).
41FEH The memory card has not been inserted. Insert or re-insert the memory card.
INDEX
41FFH The memory card type differs. Check the memory card type.

12 - 237
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error code
(Hexadecimal)
The requested processing cannot be
Do not make a request where an error occurred, or make
performed since online module change is not
4200H a request again after enabling online module change in
enabled in the setting of the multiple CPU
the setting of the multiple CPU setting parameter.
setting parameter.
performed since online module change is
4201H a request again after disabling online module change in
enabled in the setting of the multiple CPU
the setting of the multiple CPU setting parameter.
setting parameter.
Make a request again after completion of the online
4202H performed since an online module change is
module change.
being performed.
Take following procedures to replace the module
The module mounted on the main base unit
• Switch the system where the target module to be
4203H cannot be replaced online since the extension
replaced is mounted to the standby system.
base unit is mounted.
• Turn OFF power supply of the standby system.
• Replace the target module.
Change the connection destination to the control system
The specified module of the extension base
and perform the online module change again. (This
4204H unit cannot be replaced online since it is
corrective action can be made to the module mounted on
connected to the standby system.
the extension base unit only.)
The specified head I/O number is outside the When making a request, specify the head I/O number of
4210H
range. the module that will be changed online.
4211H An online module change request is abnormal. Check the command used to make a request.
Online module
Make a request again after completion of the online
change-related An online module change is already being
4212H module change, or continue after changing the
error made for other equipment.
connection path.
The specified head I/O number differs from the When making a request, specify the head I/O number of
4213H
one registered for online module change. the module being changed online.
The specified module differs from the one Make a request again after mounting the module that is
4214H
changed online. the same as the one changed online.
When making a request, specify the head I/O number of
4215H The specified module does not exist. the module that will be changed online, or make a
request again after mounting the module.
4216H The specified module is faulty. Make a request again after changing the module.
There is no response from the specified
4217H Continue the online module changing operation.
module.
The specified module is incompatible with
4218H a request again to the module compatible with online
online module change.
module change.
The specified module is mounted on the Do not make a request to any modules mounted on the
4219H extension base unit of the type that requires extension base unit of the type that requires no power
no power supply module. supply module and the main base unit.
Make a request to the CPU module that controls the
421AH The specified module is not in a control group.
specified module.
An error occurred in the setting of the initial
Resume processing after checking the contents of the
421BH setting parameter of the intelligent function
intelligent function module buffer memory.
module.
Cannot be executed as the parameter file has
421CH Operation cannot be performed. Operation is interrupted.
been rewritten.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
EMC AND LOW

Error code
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
(Hexadecimal)
Connect GX Developer to the new control system and
System switching occurs during the online check the status of the online module change. According
421DH
module change. to the status of online module change, take procedures 10
for it.
The tracking cable may be faulty or the standby system
The information of the online module change may have an error.
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
Online module cannot be sent to the standby system. When • Check the mounting status of the tracking cable or
421EH change-related the system switching occurs during the online replace the tracking cable.
error module change, the online module change • Check the status of the standby system. When a stop
may not be continued. error was detected by the standby system, perform
troubleshooting. 11
The module mounted on the extension base • Set the connection destination of a programming tool
MAINTENANCE AND
unit cannot be replaced online when the to the present control system.
421FH
connection destination is set to the standby • Perform the online module change to the module
INSPECTION
system in the separate mode. mounted on the extension base unit again.
Any of the following unsupported operations
was executed for the standby system.
4240H
• Operation mode change
• System switching
Execute the operation again after changing the transfer
setup to the control system.
12
• Memory copy from control system to
TROUBLESHOOTING
standby system
Communication cannot be made since the
standby system has been powered off or reset Request communication after powering on the standby
4241H
or is in a user watchdog timer error or CPU system or setting its Reset switch to the neutral position.
module hardware fault status.
Cannot be executed since the tracking cable is
Communication with the standby system
disconnected or faulty. Execute again after checking the
4242H cannot be made since the tracking cable is
tracking cable for disconnection or changing it for a
faulty or disconnected.
normal one.
APPENDICES
The command cannot be executed since the Execute again after removing the stop error of the
4243H
standby system is in stop error. standby system.
The command cannot be executed since the Execute again after placing the standby system in the
4244H operation status differs from that of the same operation status (RUN/STOP) as the control
Redundant
standby system. system.
system-related
Check that the other system CPU module has normally
4245H error Other system CPU module status error
started up and that the tracking cable is connected.
The command cannot be executed since
operation mode (separate/backup) change or Execute again after the operation mode change or
4246H
INDEX
system (control/standby system) switching is system switching being executed is completed.

being executed.
Execute again after memory copy from control system to
standby system is completed.
Check the following and take corrective action.
• Is SM1596 of the control system or standby system
ON?
(ON: Memory copy being executed)
Memory copy from control system to standby
4247H Execute again after SM1596 has turned OFF since it is
system is already being executed.
turned OFF by the system on completion of memory
copy.
• Is SM1597 of the control system ON?
(ON: Memory copy completed)
Execute again after turning OFF SM1597 of the control
system.

12 - 239
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error code
(Hexadecimal)
• Communication was made during system
switching. • Execute again after system switching.
4248H • The system specified in the transfer setup • After checking whether the specified system exists or
(request destination module I/O number) not, restart communication.
does not exist.
• Normally start the system as the redundant system.
(Make communication again after establishing the
The redundant system is not established.
system.)
4249H (Control system/standby system or System A/
• Execute again after changing the transfer setup
System B not yet definite)
(request destination module I/O number) to "No
settings have been made" (03FFH).
The command that could not be processed
was executed when the transfer setup Execute again after changing the transfer setup (request
424AH (request destination module I/O number) is destination module I/O number) to "No settings have
Control system/Standby system/System A/ been made" (03FFH).
System B.
The command cannot be executed since Manual system switching is inhibited by the manual
424BH system switching is inhibited by the manual system switching enable flag (SM1592). Execute again
system switching enable flag (SM1592). after turning ON SM1592.
The specified command cannot be executed Execute again after the online program change operation
424CH
during online program change operation. is finished.
• Execute again after changing to the backup mode.
Redundant
The transfer setup or function unavailable for • Execute again after changing the transfer setup
424DH system-related
the debug mode was used. (request destination module I/O number) to System A
error
or control system.
The control system/standby system specifying This function cannot be executed since it is not
424EH
method is not supported. supported.
Although system switching was executed from GX
System switching was executed by the other
Developer, system switching was executed first by the
424FH condition during execution of system switching
other condition. Check the system for any problem and
by GX Developer.
execute the operation again as necessary.
Execute communication again after changing the
tracking cable.
If the same error recurs after the tracking cable is
Sum check error occurred in tracking changed, the cause is the hardware fault of the CPU
4250H
communication. module.
(Please contact your local nearest Mitsubishi or
representative, explaining a detailed description of the
problem.)
The command cannot be executed in the
4251H Execute again after changing to the backup mode.
separate mode.
By monitoring SD1690 (other system network module
System switching was not executed since an
No. that issued system switching request), identify the
error occurred in the redundant system
4252H faulty redundant-compatible intelligent module of the
compatible network module of the standby
standby system, then remove the module fault, and
system.
execute again.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
EMC AND LOW

Error code
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
(Hexadecimal)
Since a communication error or system switching
occurred during execution of online program change to
the control system CPU module, online program change 10
redundant tracking was suspended.
Since a communication error or system
Execute online program change again after confirming
switching occurred during online program
that communication with the control system CPU module
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
4253H change to the control system CPU module,
and standby system CPU module can be normally made.
online program change to the standby CPU
When long time is taken for communication between GX
module cannot be executed.
Developer and control system CPU module or standby
system CPU module, the error may be avoided by
adjusting SD1710 (standby system online program 11
change start waiting time).
MAINTENANCE AND
The tracking cable may not be connected correctly, or
the tracking communication hardware of the CPU
INSPECTION
The command cannot be executed since an module may be faulty. Check the connection status of the
4254H error was detected in the tracking tracking cable.
communication hardware. If the condition is not restored to normal after the cable
connection status is corrected, the possible cause is the
hardware fault of the CPU module.
12
Tracking communication is being prepared when it is
TROUBLESHOOTING
The command cannot be executed since
4255H connected. Execute the operation again after a while
tracking communication is being prepared.
(about 1 second).
The tracking cable may not be connected correctly, or
the tracking communication hardware of the CPU
The command cannot be executed since a module may be faulty. Check the connection status of the
Redundant
4256H time-out error occurred in tracking tracking cable.
system-related
communication. If the condition is not restored to normal after the cable
error
connection status is corrected, the possible cause is the
hardware fault of the CPU module.
APPENDICES
The command cannot be executed since the The command cannot be executed since the host system
host system CPU module is in a watchdog is in a watchdog timer error or CPU module hardware
4257H
timer error or CPU module hardware fault fault status. Execute again after checking the host
status. system status.
Execute again after completing the operation mode
Operation mode being changed (from backup change by changing the status from STOP to RUN using
4258H
mode to separate mode) the RUN/STOP switch of the CPU module whose RUN
LED is flickering or remote operation.
Operation mode change is being executed in
Execute again in the same communication route as the
INDEX
4259H the communication route different from the

one where the operation mode change was executed.
current one from the other peripheral device.
Although the communication was made via the
intelligent function module mounted on the
Change the combination of the connection destination
extension base unit, the combination of the
425BH specification and the command to the supported
connection destination specification
combination.
(Redundant CPU specification) and the
command is unsupported.
System switching cannot be made since the
Switch systems after the online module change has been
425CH module mounted on the extension base unit is
completed.
being replaced online.
Operation mode cannot be changed since the
Change the operation mode after the online module
425DH module mounted on the extension base unit is
change has been completed.
being replaced online.

12 - 241
12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Error code
(Hexadecimal)
• Access to the specified station cannot be
made since the routing parameters are not
set to the start source CPU module and/or
• Set to the related stations the routing parameters for
relay CPU module.
access to the specified station.
• For routing via a multiple CPU system, the
• Retry after a while, or start communication after
control CPU of the network module for data
4A00H confirming that the system for data routing has started.
routing has not started.
• In a redundant system configuration, connect the
• When System A/System B is not yet
tracking cable, start System A/System B normally, and
identified in a redundant system
Link-related then restart communication.
configuration, communication was made
error
with the other station via the network
module.
The network of the No. set to the routing Check and correct the routing parameters set to the
4A01H
parameters does not exist. related stations.
• Check the network module/link module for an error or
Access to the specified station cannot be offline status.
4A02H
made. • Check to see if the network number/PC number setting
has no mistake.
4A03H A request for network test was issued. Check the request data of the MC protocol, etc.
• Take corrective action after checking the error that
An error occurred in the access destination or occurred at the specified access destination or the
relay station, or the specified transfer setup relay station to the accessed station.
4B00H
(request destination module I/O number) is • Check the transfer setup (request destination module
illegal. I/O number or programmable controller number) in the
request data of the MC protocol, etc.
The target is not the No. 1 CPU of the multiple Execute the request for the No. 1 CPU of the multiple
4B01H
CPU system. CPU system.
Target-related
The request is not addressed to the CPU Perform operation for the module that can execute the
4B02H error
module. specified function.
• The specified route is not supported by the
specified CPU module version.
4B03H Check whether the specified route is supported or not.
• The communication target CsPU is not
mounted.
The specified transfer setup (request
In the target setup, an illegal value is set as the head I/O
4B04H destination module I/O number) is not
number of the target module.
supported.
The specified device is unavailable for the
4C00H Check the request data contents.
motion CPU or outside the device range.
Multiple CPU- There are a total of 33 or more DDWR and Execute again after reducing the number of DDWR and
4C08H
related error DDRD requests. DDRD requests to be executed simultaneously.
The specification of the requested CPU
4C09H Check the request data contents.
module No. is illegal.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
12.4 Module Change during System Operation
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
This section explains how to change the module online (with power on) without stopping
VOLTAGE
the system.
12.4.1 Online module change 10

High
Basic Performance Universal An online module changeNote12.15 is a function that allows the Q series module mounted on
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
UD the main base unit or extension base unit to be changed during system control executed
Note12.15 by the Process CPU or Redundant CPU.Note13
Using an online module change, the module that failed during control can be replaced with
the module of the same model name. 11
MAINTENANCE AND
POINT
1. An online module change cannot add a module or change the current module
INSPECTION
for another module.
2. When executing an online module change for the Process CPU in the multiple
CPU system, it is necessary to specify "Online module change enable for
12
other CPU" in the multiple CPU setting of the PLC parameter dialog box.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Also, there are restrictions on the versions of the CPU modules that comprise
the multiple CPU system. Refer to the following manual for details.
3. Perform an online module change after confirming that the system outside the
programmable controller will not malfunction.
4. To prevent an electric shock, operating module malfunction, etc., provide a
switch or similar individually cutting-off means for the external power supply of
the module to be changed online.
APPENDICES
5. It is recommended to verify that the operations of the unchanged modules will
not be affected by executing an online module change in an actual system
beforehand to confirm the following
• The means and structure that will cut off the connection with the external
device are correct.
• ON/OFF of switches, etc. has no influence.
6. Do not mount/remove the module onto/from base unit or terminal block more
than 50 times (IEC 61131-2 compliant), after the first use of the product.
INDEX
Failure to do so may cause the module to malfunction due to poor contact of

connector.
Note13
High
Basic Performance Universal
The Basic model QCPU, High Performance model QCPU and Universal model QCPU are not
UD compatible with an online module change.
Note12.15

12.4.1 Online module change
12 - 243
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(1) Conditions for performing online module change

An online module change can be made under the following conditions.
(a) Modules that can be changed online

The modules that can be changed online are shown in Table12.13.
Table12.13 Modules that can be changed online
Module type Restrictions

Input module
Output module No restrictions
Hybrid I/O module
Analog-digital converter module
Digital-analog converter module
Intelligent function
Temperature input module Supported by function version C.
module
Temperature control module
Pulse input module
The modules other than listed above cannot be changed online.

For whether the above intelligent function modules can be changed online or not
and their changing procedures, refer to the manual of the used intelligent function
module.
(b) GX Developer that supports online module change

GX Developer is required to perform an online module change.
Refer to the following for the GX Developer version.
When Process CPU is used : Section 2.1.4(2)(a)
When Redundant CPU is used :
QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Redundant
System)
An online module change can also be performed from GX Developer via a
network.
(c) Base unit for online module change

1) When the slim type main base unit (Q3 SB) is used, an online module
change cannot be performed.
2) When the extension base unit of the type that requires no power supply
module (Q5 SB) is used, an online module change cannot be performed for
the modules mounted on all base units connected.
3) When the redundant type extension base unit (Q6 WRB) is used, the online
module change cannot be performed to all modules connected to the main
base unit.
12 - 244 12.4 Module Change during System Operation

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
(d) Control status of CPU module
EMC AND LOW

1) An online module change can be executed when a stop error has not occurred.
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
Whether an online module change can be executed or not depending on the
control status of the CPU module is shown in Table12.14.
Table12.14 Whether online module change can be executed or not 10

Control status RUN status*1 STOP status PAUSE status At stop error
Whether online
Can’t be
INSTALLATION
module change can Can be executed Can be executed Can be executed
LOADING AND
executed
be executed or not
* 1: Including the case where a continue error has occurred in the RUN status.
2) An online module change can be continued if the control status of the CPU
module is changed to the STOP/PAUSE status during the online module
11
change.
MAINTENANCE AND
In either of the following cases, however, the online module change cannot be
INSPECTION
continued.
• When the CPU module is reset
• When a stop error occurs
(e) Number of modules that can be changed online

12
The number of modules that can be changed online at one time is one for
TROUBLESHOOTING
each CPU module.
Multiple modules cannot be changed simultaneously.
APPENDICES
INDEX

12 - 245
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(2) Restrictions on online module change

The following operations cannot be performed during an online module change.
• Issue an online module change request from multiple GX Developers to one CPU
module.
• Write parameters to the CPU module during online module change.
POINT
The following message appears (refer to Diagram 12.19) if an online module
change request is issued from another GX Developer to the CPU module during
After confirming the message, select "Yes" or "No".
Diagram 12.19 Message screen

1. When "Yes" is selected
Online module change operation is switched to "GX Developer 2)" that issued
the request later. (Operation is continued from the pre-switching status.)
"Yes" selected
Online module Online module change

change continued execution canceled
GX Developer 2) GX Developer 1)
Diagram 12.20 Online module change (When "Yes" is selected)
2. When "No" is selected
The operation of online module change "GX Developer 2)" requested later is
suspended. (Online module change "GX Developer 1)" executed first is
continued.)
"No" selected
Online module Online module change

change suspended execution continued
GX Developer 2) GX Developer 1)
Diagram 12.21 Online module change (When "No" is selected)

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
(3) Special relays and special register related to online module change
EMC AND LOW

Information during online module change is stored into the special relays (SM235,
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
SM236) and special register (SD235).
• Whether the online module change of the corresponding CPU module is executed
or not can be checked by monitoring SM235, SM236 and SD235. 10
• SM235: Online module change flag (turns ON during online module change)
• SM236: Flag that turns ON only one scan after online module change (turns ON
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
only one scan after completion of online module change)
• SD235: Module being changed online (stores the starting I/O number of the module
being changed online/10H)
Refer to Section 12.7 for details of SM235 and SM236 and to Section 12.8 for details 11
of SD235.
MAINTENANCE AND
Online module Online module
change start change completed
INSPECTION
ON
SM235 OFF 12
TROUBLESHOOTING
Starting I/O number of module being
SD235 changed online/10H
ON
SM236 OFF
1 scan
Diagram 12.22 Time chart
APPENDICES
INDEX

12 - 247
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(4) Online module change procedure

The following explains the online module change procedure of the I/O module.
For the online module change procedure of the intelligent function module, refer to the
manual of the used intelligent function module.
POINT
1. It is recommended to turn OFF the output (Y) from the output module/hybrid I/
O module to be changed online before it is changed.
2. When making an online module change for the Redundant CPU, specify "No
settings have been made (Default)", "System A" or "System B" as the target
system in the "transfer setup" by GX Developer.
Do not specify the "Control system" or "Standby system" as the target system.
If the "Control system" or "Standby system" is specified in the transfer setup,
the following error dialog (refer to Diagram 12.23) appears at execution of an
When the following error dialog is displayed, change the target system to "No
settings have been made (Default)", "System A" or "System B", and then
perform an online module change.
Diagram 12.23 Error dialog box

3. When executing online module change for the module mounted on the
extension base unit in the Redundant CPU, access cannot be made to a
module mounted on the extension base unit from the standby system. Set
[Transfer setup] in GX Developer, checking that the trasnfer target Redundant
CPU module is the control system.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
1) Choose [Diagnostics] [Online module change] on GX Developer, and select
the "Online module change" mode.
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
10
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
11
MAINTENANCE AND
INSPECTION
Diagram 12.24 System monitor 12
2) Double-click the module to be changed online to display the online module
TROUBLESHOOTING
change screen.
(Table12.15 shows the communication status with the target module for online
module change when the following screen (refer to Diagram 12.25) is
displayed.)
Table12.15 Communication status with the module

Executed/Not
Target module, item
executed
APPENDICES
Input module refresh Executed
Output module refresh Executed
Input refresh Executed
I/O hybrid module
Output refresh Executed
FROM/TO instruction Executed
Instruction using intelligent
Executed
function module device
Intelligent dedicated instruction Executed
Intelligent function Intelligent automatic refresh Executed
INDEX
module
Buffer memory batch monitor Executed
Diagram 12.25 Online module change screen

12 - 249
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
3) Click the "Execution" button to enable a module change.

displayed.)

Executed/Not
Target module, item
executed
Not executed
Input module refresh
(Data held)
Output module refresh Not executed
Not executed
Input refresh
I/O hybrid module (Data held)
Output refresh Not executed
Input refresh Not executed
Output refresh Not executed
FROM/TO instruction No processing
No processing
Intelligent function Intelligent dedicated instruction No processing
module Intelligent automatic refresh No processing
Communication
Buffer memory batch monitor
error
4) With a switch or other means, cut off the connection with the external device
(module I/O signals).
5) Turn off the switch of the external power supply for module to shut off power
supply.
6) Disconnect the terminal block or connector from the module.
7) Remove the module. ( Section 10.3.3)
8) Mount a new module on the same slot. ( Section 10.3.3)
9) Connect the terminal block or connector to the module.
10)Turn on the switch of the external power supply for module to resume power
supply.
11)With a switch or other means, make a connection with the external device
(module I/O signals).

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
12)After mounting the module, click the "Execution" button.
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
displayed.)

Executed/Not
10
Target module, item
executed
Not executed
Input module refresh
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
(Data held)
Output module refresh Not executed
Not executed
Input refresh
I/O hybrid module (Data held)
Output refresh
Input refresh
Not executed
Executed
11
MAINTENANCE AND
FROM/TO instruction No processing
INSPECTION
No processing
Intelligent function Intelligent dedicated instruction No processing
module Intelligent automatic refresh No processing
12
Buffer memory batch monitor Executed
TROUBLESHOOTING
POINT
When the initial settings of the intelligent function module have been made by GX
Configulator, the set data are written to the intelligent function module.
APPENDICES
13)Click the "Execution" button to start control.
14)The "Online module change completed" screen appears.
displayed.)

Executed/Not
Target module, item
INDEX
executed
Input module refresh Executed
Output module refresh Executed
I/O hybrid module
FROM/TO instruction Executed
Intelligent function Instruction using intelligent
Executed
module function module device
Intelligent dedicated instruction Executed
Intelligent automatic refresh Executed
Diagram 12.28 Online module change screen Buffer memory batch monitor Executed

12 - 251
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(5) Operation in case of system switching occurrence during online module

change (When Redundant type extension base unit is used)
The following describes the procedures to be taken when the system switching occurs
during online module change is performed to the module mounted on the extension
base unit in the Redundant CPU.
1) Connect GX Developer to the new control system.
2) Check the status of the module where the online module change was
performed at [System Monitor].
Diagram 12.29 System monitor
3) When selecting [Online module change] in a status of a module being replaced

online, screen shown in Diagram 12.30 is displayed.
4) Continue the operation that has been executed before system switching
occurrence.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
POINT
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
1. When connecting the new control system and clicking the [Execution] button,
VOLTAGE
the message shown in Diagram 12.31 may be shown. In this case, select
[Yes] and continue operation for the online module change.
10
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
Diagram 12.31 Message screen 11
2. At the time of completion of the online module change, the error dialog box
MAINTENANCE AND
shown in Diagram 12.32 may be shown, but the online module change is
completed normally.
INSPECTION
12
TROUBLESHOOTING
Diagram 12.32 Error dialog box
APPENDICES
INDEX

12 - 253
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
12.4.2 Change of redundant power supply module
Following the flowchart shown below, change a faulty redundant power supply module
online (with power on).
(It is assumed that the other redundant power supply module is normally operating.)
Start
Check the redundant power supply

module to be changed.
Power OFF the redundant power supply

module to be changed.
Change the redundant power supply

module.
Power ON the new redundant power

supply module.
Make sure that the "POWER" LED is

turned on green.
Completed
Diagram 12.33 Redundant power supply module replacement procedure

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
POINT
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
1. If either redundant power supply module fails, change it for a normal one
VOLTAGE
earlier than usual (within 14 days as a guideline).
If it does not fail, it is recommended to change the redundant power supply
module for a new one after five years have elapsed. 10
2. Change the redundant power supply module with extreme care, referring to
Section 10.3.3(1).
If the module fixing projection of the redundant power supply module comes
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
off from the module fixing hole of the redundant base unit, an error will occur
due to connector damage.
3. When the redundant power supply system is used, a "continue" error will
Basic
occur due to a redundant power supply module failure. Cancel the error after 11
changing the faulty redundant power supply module for a normal one.
MAINTENANCE AND
Note12.16 Note12.17
Note12.16
INSPECTION
High 4. When the redundant power supply system is used, the failure status of the
Performance Process
redundant power supply module can be checked by the system monitor of GX
Note12.17
Developer (Version 8.18U or later) or the special relay SM1781/special
register SD1781. Note12.16 Note12.17Note14Note15 12
Refer to the following manual for details of the system monitor.
TROUBLESHOOTING
APPENDICES
INDEX
Note14
Basic
Failure of redundant power supply cannot be detected by the Basic model QCPU.
Note12.16
Note15
High
Performance Process
When using the High Performance QCPU or the Process CPU, confirm the versions of CPU
module and GX Developer. ( Appendix 2)
Note12.17

12 - 255
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
12.5 I/O Module Troubleshooting
This section explains possible problems with I/O circuits and their corrective actions.
12.5.1 Input circuit troubleshooting
The following describes possible problems with input circuits and their corrective actions.
Table12.19 Input crcuit problems and corrective actions
Condition Cause Corrective Action

• Leakage current of input switch • Connect an appropriate CR so that the voltage
(e.g. drive by non-contact switch). across the terminals of the input module
becomes lower than the OFF voltage.
AC input
AC input
Example 1
Input signal is
Leakage Input
not turned current module Input
OFF. R module
Power supply
It is recommended to use 0.1 to 47 F+47 to

120 (1/2W) for the CR constant.
• Drive by a limit switch with neon lamp. • Same as Example 1.
• Provide an independent display circuit
AC input
Example 2
Input signal is separately.

not turned Leakage Input
OFF. current module
Power supply
• Leakage current due to line capacity of wiring • Same as Example 1.

cable. (However, leakage current is not generated
(Line capacity C of twisted pair wire is approx. when the power supply is located in the input
100 pF/m). equipment side as shown below.)
Example 3
Input signal is
not turned AC input AC input
OFF.
Leakage Input Input
current module module
Power supply Power supply

• Drive by a switch with LED display. • Connect an appropriate resistor so that the
current across the input module becomes lower
than the OFF current.
DC input (plus common) DC input (plus common)
Example 4
Input signal is
not turned
Leakage current Input Resister Input
OFF. module module
*: A calculation example of the resistance to be

connected is shown on the following page.
Table12.19 Input crcuit problems and corrective actions (Continued)
12 - 256 12.5 I/O Module Troubleshooting

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Condition Cause Corrective Action
• Use only one power supply.
• Sneak path due to the use of two power
• Connect a sneak path prevention diode.
EMC AND LOW

supplies.
DIRECTIVES
(Figure below)
VOLTAGE
DC input
Example 5
Input signal is
DC input
not turned
OFF. E1 E2 Input
module E1 Input
10
E2
module
E1 E2
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
Stepwise distortion as shown below appears to Improve input signal waveform by using the on-
Input signal is the zero cross voltage of input signal (AC). line system etc.
Example 6
not turned ON
(AC input Zero cross
11
module) voltage
MAINTENANCE AND
Change the response time setting.
INSPECTION
Example: 1ms to 5ms
(When excessive noise is cyclic, shorter
response time setting may produce a higher
12
Example 7
effect.) When the above action does not have an

False input Depending on response time setting, noise is
effect, take measures against noise to block
TROUBLESHOOTING
due to noise imported as input.
excessive noise, e.g. avoid tying the power
cables and control cables in a bundle, and add
surge absorbers to the noise sources such as the
relays and contactors used with the same power
supply.
<Calculation example of the resistance to be connected in Example 4>

• Connecting a switch with LED display, in which a maximum 2.33mA leakage
APPENDICES
current flows when 24VDC is supplied to the QX40.
QX40
Leakage current Input

2.33mA module
24VDC
• In this case, the circuit does not satisfy the condition that the OFF current of the
INDEX
QX40 is 1.7mA or less. Connect a resistance as follows.

QX40
2.33mA
IZ=1.7mA
IR=0.63mA R Input impedance
5.6k
24VDC
(To next page)

12 - 257
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(From preceding page)

• In order to satisfy the condition that the OFF current of the QX40 is 1.7mA or
less, the resistance 'R', in which a 0.63mA or more current flows, shall be
connected.
Calculating with the formula "IR: IZ = Z (Input impedance): R",
IZ 1.7
R< Z (Input impedance)= 5.6=15.11[k ]
IR 0.63
the resistance 'R' will be R<15.11k .

Consequently, if the resistance 'R' is set to 12k , the electric power 'W' of the
resistance 'R' will be calculated in the following formula,
W= (Input voltage)2/R=28.82/12000=0.069[W].
• Since the resistance requires the electric power which is 3 to 5 times of the power
actually consumed, the resistance to be connected to the corresponding terminal
shall be 12.0k and 1/4 to 1[W].
• The OFF voltage of the QX40 when the resistance 'R' calculated above is
connected will be 8.90[V]
1
2.33[mA]=8.90[V]
1 1
+
12.0[k ] 5.6[k ]
This also satisfies the condition that the OFF voltage of the QX40 is 11V or less.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
12.5.2 Output Circuit Troubleshooting
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
This section explains trouble examples and troubleshooting methods in the output circuit.
VOLTAGE
Table12.20 Output circuit troubleshooting
Condition Cause Corrective Action 10

• When load is half-wave rectified inside (This • Connect a resistor of several ten K to
is typical of some solenoids.) several hundred K across the load.
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
QY22
Output module D1 [1]
Resistor
Load
Excessive
Load 11
Example 1
voltage is [2]
applied to load
MAINTENANCE AND
• When the polarity of the power supply is [1],
when output
the capacitor C is charged. When the polarity
INSPECTION
turns off.
is [2], the voltage charged in C plus the power
supply voltage is applied to across D1. The
maximum value of the voltage is approx. 2.2E.
(This usage does not pose problems to the
12
TROUBLESHOOTING
output components but may deteriorate the
diode built in the load, causing burnout, etc.)
• Leakage current due to the built-in surge • Connect a resistor across the load.
suppressor (If the wiring from the output module to the
load is long, be careful since there may be a
QY22
Example 2
Load does not Output module leakage current due to the line capacity.)
Load
turn off.(Triac
Resistor
output) Leakage current
APPENDICES
Load
• The load current is lower than the minimum • Connect a resistor to both ends of a load so
load current. that the load current is higher than the
Surge suppressor minimum load current.
QY22
Phototriac Resistor
INDEX
Control
circuit Load
Load
Example 3
The load is not

turned OFF.
(Triac output)
Triac
• When the load current is lower than the

minimum load current of the output module,
the triac does not operate since the load
current flows into a phototriac as shown
below.When an inductive load is connected,
the load may not be turned OFF since surge
at the time of OFF is applied to the phototriac.

12 - 259
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Table12.20 Output circuit troubleshooting (Continued)

Situation Cause Countermeasure
When the external power turns ON/OFF,
Erroneous output due to the stray capacitance (C) between
check that the external power supply
collector and emitter of hotocoupler.
rising edge must be 10ms or more, and
switch the SW1 to the primary side of
There is no erroneous output at normal load.
An erroneous output may occur at high sensitivity load external power supply.
(such as solid state relay).
Primary Secondary
side side
Output module, Combined module
external power supply
Photocoupler SW1 Programmable

controller
C
Tr1 When switching to the secondary side of
IC Y0
the external power supply is required, the
external power supply rising edge
L
connected a condenser must be slow, and
measured 10ms or more.
Y0
12/24VDC
SW
Constant
voltage circuit COM
L
24V
If the external power supply is turned on precipitously, Ic R1

When the 12/24VDC
current flows due to the stray capacitance (C) between SW
external power
Example 4
collector and emitter of hotocoupler. C1

supply turns
COM
on, the load is
Ic current flows to the next stage of transister Tr1 gate and Y0 24V
turned on for a
output turns on by 100 s R1: Several tens of ohms
moment.
Power capacity
(external power supply current*1)2
resistance value (3 to 5)*2
C1: Several hundreds of microfarads 50V

SW: External power
supply (24V) at On
*1 Refer to consumption current of the
10ms or less
external power supply for modules
used in this manual.
*2 Select the power capacity of resistance

to be 3 to 5 times lager than the actual
Output Y0 power consumption.
Approx. 100 s (Example)
R1=40 , C1=300 F
Use the below expression to calculated a

time constant
C1 R1=300 10-6 40
=12 10-3s
=12ms

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Table12.20 Output circuit troubleshooting (Continued)
EMC AND LOW

Situation Cause Countermeasure
DIRECTIVES
The load [2] which was turned OFF may be turned ON due to To prevent the generation of the back
VOLTAGE
back electromotive force at the time of power-off [1] if an electromotive force, connect diode in
inductive load is used. parallel with load where the back
electromotive force has been generated. 10
Output module,
combined module
Back
Source output
Sink output electromotive
force [3] [3]
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
Load
ON TB1 ON Back
electromotive
force
[2] Load
TB2 OFF
11
Load
OFF
The load which
MAINTENANCE AND
[1]Shut off
was turned
OFF is turned COM+
Example 5
INSPECTION
ON for a
CTL-
moment at
power-off.
(Transistor
output)
Output module,
combined module
Sink output 12
[3]
Back
TROUBLESHOOTING
Sink output electromotive
force [3]
Back
Load electromotive
ON TB1 ON force
Load
[2]
TB2 OFF
Load
OFF
[1]Shut off
COM-
APPENDICES
CTL+
INDEX

12 - 261
12 TROUBLESHOOTING
12.6 Buit-in Ethernet Port Diagnosis
Using the diagnostic function of GX Developer, the module status, parameter settings,
communication status, and error log of the QnUDE(H)CPU can be checked.
The relevant screen can be activated by either of the following two methods.
• In GX Developer, select [Diagnostics] [PLC diagnostics] [Ethernet
diagnosis]
Diagram 12.34 PLC Diagnostics screen
• In GX Developer, select [Diagnostics] [Ethernet diagnostics]
Diagram 12.35 Ethernet diagnosis screen
On the following pages, details of the built-in Ethernet port diagnosis screens are
described.
12 - 262 12.6 Buit-in Ethernet Port Diagnosis

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
(1) Parameter status
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
10
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
11
MAINTENANCE AND
INSPECTION
12
Diagram 12.36 Ethernet diagnosis (Parameter status) screen
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table12.21 Ethernet diagnosis (Parameter status) items
Item Description
IP address
Subnet mask The Ethernet address (MAC address) of the
Default router IP address QnUDE(H)CPU can be monitored.
Ethernet address
APPENDICES
INDEX
12.6 Buit-in Ethernet Port Diagnosis 12 - 263

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(2) Error log
Diagram 12.37 Ethernet diagnosis (Error log) screen

Table12.22 Ethernet diagnosis (Error log) items
Item Description
Displays connection No. of the connection that has an error.
UDP connections that function in MELSOFT connection are
Connection No.
treated as one connection, and the lowest connection No. is
stored in the error log.
Protocol
Open system Displays the settings of PLC parameter.
Host station port No.
Displays a generated error code.*1
Error code In the case of MELSOFT connection, only the errors related to
Ethernet communication are stored in the Error log.
Displays the IP address of the other device when an error
Destination IP address
occurs in communication with it.
Displays the port number of the other device when an error
Destination port No.
occurs in communication with it.
Displays command No. when an error occurs in MC protocol
Command code
communication.
Year/Month/Day, Time Displays the date and time of error occurrence.
Clear history Clears the displayed error log.
Displays details of the selected error code and corrective
Error and solution
actions.
* 1 "SNTP OPE. ERROR" (error code: 2710) is stored in the error log only when the time setting at
power-ON or reset has failed.
For results in the case of executing the time setting regularly or by special relay "SM1270" from
the sequence program, check the SNTP status screen or special register "SD1270".
POINT
Because the error log is battery backed up, the information is retained even if the
power is turned off.
Note that the latch data backup function (to the standard ROM) cannot back up
the error log to the standard ROM.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
(3) Status of each connection
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
10
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
11
MAINTENANCE AND
INSPECTION
12
Diagram 12.38 Ethernet diagnosis (Status of each connection) screen
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table12.23 Ethernet diagnosis (Status of each connection) items
Item Description
Host station port number Displays the setting of PLC parameter.
Destination IP address Displays the IP address of the target device.*1
Destination port No. Displays the port number of the target device.*1
Displays an error code for an error that occurred on the
connection.*1
Latest Error Code In the case of MELSOFT connection, only the errors related to
Ethernet communication are stored in the Status of each
APPENDICES
connection.
Protocol
Displays the settings of PLC parameter.
Open system
In TCP connections, displays whether connection with the
TCP status
target device is established or not.*1
Remote password status Displays the remote password status.*2
Unlock error count Displays how many times an unlock error has occurred.*1*3
If this is set for a connection for which illegal accesses are
Force deactivation status
suspected, communication of the connection is disabled. *1*3
INDEX
* 1 UDP connections that function in MELSOFT connetion are treated as one connection. Therefore, for
multiple connections, the same information is displayed.
* 2 Not displayed when the the protocol is UDP and direct connection to GX Developer is used.
* 3 The same information is displayed when the protocol is TCP and when multiple MELSOFT connections
exist.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(4) Connection status
Diagram 12.39 Ethernet diagnosis (Connection status) screen

Table12.24 Ethernet diagnosis (Connection status) items
Item Description
Full duplex/Half duplex Displays whether the line uses the full or half duplex system.
Connection status Displays whether a hub or target device is connected or not.
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Displays whether the network is 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX.
Displays the maximum size of discarded broadcast message
Maximum size of detection
data.
Amount of data per unit time Displays the total size of discarded broadcast message data
(latest) per unit time.
Amount of data per unit time Displays the maximum total size of discarded broadcast
(maximum) message data per unit time.
Clears the number of receive buffer overflows and broadcast
Clear line status
information.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
(5) SNTP status
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
10
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
11
MAINTENANCE AND
INSPECTION
12
Diagram 12.40 Ethernet diagnosis (SNTP status) screen
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table12.25 Ethernet diagnosis (SNTP status) items
Item Description
Latest time setting Displays the operation result of the latest time setting.
Displays the time data collected by the latest time setting
Execution time
execution.
Displays the time that was required for time data acquisition in
Time required for response (ms)
the latest time setting execution.
Execute time setting Adjusts the clock time.
APPENDICES
INDEX

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(6) PING test

PING test is a test by which existence of the QnUDE(H)CPU can be checked from GX
Developer.
Performing a PING test for the QnUDE(H)CPU can determine the following:
• Whether the line is connected to the target QnUDE(H)CPU properly
• Whether the parameters for the QnUDE(H)CPU are set correctly
(a) Executing a PING test by GX Developer

In GX Developer, open [Ethernet diagnosis] and click [PING test]
Diagram 12.41 Ethernet diagnosis screen

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Table12.26 PING test items
Item Description Setting range
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
IP address Specify the IP address of the PING test target station. (Target station's IP address)
Address
VOLTAGE
IP address input form Select a form for IP address entry. Decimal/Hexadecimal
specification
IP address/Host name Specify a host name of the PING test target station. -
In the Result area, displays the test results for the host
Display the host name.
name corresponding to the IP address.
-
10
1 to 8192 bytes
Specify any size of the system data that are sent during a
Specify the data size. (For QnUDE(H)CPU, 1460 bytes
PING test.
or less)
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
Setting Options Specify the time of the
communication time Specify the time to wait for PING test completion. 1 to 30 seconds
check.
• Specify the number of times.
Specify the number of
transmissions.
Specify the number of transmissions. No. of times: 1 to 50 11
• Execute till interrupting
MAINTENANCE AND
Result Displays PING test results. -
Displays the total number of packet transmissions and the
Success/transmissions -
INSPECTION
number of successful transmissions.
POINT
If failed, check the following and run the PING test again. 12
• The QnUDE(H) CPU installation to the base unit
TROUBLESHOOTING
• Connection to Ethernet
• Respective parameters written to the QnUDE(H)CPU
• QnUDE(H)CPU operating status (whether an error has occurred or not)
• Respective IP addresses set in GX Developer and PING test target
stations
• Subnet addresses set in GX Developer and PING test target stations
when transmissions do not pass through any router
APPENDICES
INDEX

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
12.7 Special Relay List
Special relays, SM, are internal relays whose applications are fixed in the Programmable
Controller.
For this reason, they cannot be used by sequence programs in the same way as the
normal internal relays.
However, they can be turned ON or OFF as needed in order to control the CPU module
and remote I/O modules.
The heading descriptions in the following special relay lists are shown in Table12.27.
Table12.27 Explanation of special relay list

Item Function of Item
Number • Indicates special register number
Name • Indicates name of special register
Meaning • Indicates contents of special register
Explanation • Discusses contents of special register in more detail
• Indicates whether the relay is set by the system or user, and, if it is set by the system, when setting is performed.
<Set by>
S : Set by system
U : Set by user (sequence programs or test operations from GX Developer)
S/U : Set by both system and user
<When set>
Indicated only for registers set by system
Set by
Each END : Set during each END processing
(When set)
Initial : Set only during initial processing (when power supply is turned ON, or when going from STOP
to RUN)
Status change : Set only when there is a change in status
Error : Set when error occurs
Instruction execution : Set when instruction is executed
Request : Set only when there is a user request (through SM, etc.)
System switching : Set when system switching is executed.
• Indicates the corresponding special relay (M9 ) of the ACPU.
Corresponding (When the contents are changed, the special relay is represented M9 format change. Incompatible with the
ACPU M9 Q00J/Q00/Q01 and QnPRH.)
• New indicates the special relay newly added to the QnACPU or Q series CPU module.
Indicates the corresponding CPU module type name.
: Indicates all the QnACPUs and QCPU.
Corresponding Qn(H) : Indicates the High Performance model QCPU.
CPU QnPH : Indicates the Process CPU.
QnU : Indicates the Universal model QCPU
QnA : Indicates the QnA series and Q2ASCPU series.
Rem : Indicates the MELSECNET/H remote I/O modules.
Each CPU module model name: Indicates the relevant specific CPU module. (Example: Q4AR, Q3A)
For details on the following items, refer to the following manuals:

• Networks Manual of the corresponding network module
• SFC QCPU(Q mode)/QnACPU Programming Manual (SFC)
POINT
(1) SD1200 to SD1255 are used for QnACPU.
These relays are vacant with QCPU.
12 - 270 12.7 Special Relay List

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(1) Diagnostic Information
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
Table12.28 Special relay
Corres-
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU 10
M9
• Turns ON if an error occurs as a result of diagnosis. QnA
(Includes when an annunciator is ON, and when an Qn(H)
INSTALLATION
error is detected with CHK instruction) S (Error) New QnPH
LOADING AND
• Remains ON even if the condition is restored to QnPRH
OFF : No error normal thereafter. Rem
SM0 Diagnostic errors
ON : Error
• Turns ON if an error occurs as a result of diagnosis.
(Includes when an annunciator is ON) Q00J/Q00/Q01
S (Error) New
• Remains ON even if the condition is restored to QnU
normal thereafter.
• Turns ON if an error occurs as a result of diagnosis. QnA
11
(Does not include when an annunciator is ON or Qn(H)
MAINTENANCE AND
when an error is detected by the CHK instruction) S (Error) M9008 QnPH
OFF : No self-diagnosis • Remains ON even if the condition is restored to QnPRH
SM1 Self-diagnostic error errors normal thereafter. Rem
INSPECTION
ON : Self-diagnosis • Turns ON if an error occurs as a result of diagnosis.
(Does not include when an annunciator is ON) Q00J/Q00/Q01
S (Error) New
• Remains ON even if the condition is restored to QnU
normal thereafter.
OFF : No error common
SM5
Error common
information
information
ON : Error common
• When SM0 is ON, turns ON if there is error common
information
S (Error) New 12
information
TROUBLESHOOTING
OFF : No error individual
Error individual information • When SM0 is ON, turns ON if there is error individual Rem
SM16 S (Error) New
information ON : Error individual information
information
SM50 Error reset OFF ON: Error reset • Conducts error reset operation U New
• Turns ON if battery voltage at CPU module or
QnA
memory card drops below rated value.
Qn(H)
• Remains ON even if the battery voltage returns to
S (Error) M9007 QnPH
normal thereafter.
QnPRH
• Synchronizes with the BAT. ALARM/BAT.
OFF : Normal QnU
SM51 Battery low latch LED.
ON : Battery low
• Turns ON if battery voltage at CPU module or
memory card drops below rated value.
APPENDICES
• Remains ON even if the battery voltage returns to S (Error) New Q00J/Q00/Q01
normal thereafter.
• Synchronous with BAT. LED
OFF : Normal • Same as SM51, but turns OFF subsequently when
SM52 Battery low S (Error) M9006
ON : Battery low battery voltage returns to normal.
• Turns ON if an instantaneous power failure of within
20ms occurs during use of the AC power supply
module.
Reset when the power supply is switched OFF, then
ON.
OFF : AC/DC DOWN not
10ms occurs during use of the DC power supply
AC/DC DOWN detected
SM53 module. S (Error) M9005 QCPU
INDEX
detection ON : AC/DC DOWN

detected
ON.
1ms occurs during use of the DC power supply
module.
ON. QnA
• Turns ON if MINI (S3) link error is detected at even
OFF : Normal one of the installed AJ71PT32 (S3) modules.
SM54 MINI link error S (Error) M9004
ON : Error • Remains ON even if the condition is restored to
normal thereafter.
12.7 Special Relay List 12 - 271

12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Corres-
(When Set) ACPU CPU
M9
• ON when operation error is generated
OFF : Normal
SM56 Operation error • Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal S (Error) M9011
ON : Operation error
thereafter.
• Turns ON if there is at least one output module
whose fuse has blown.
OFF : Normal
• Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal
SM60 Blown fuse detection ON : Module with blown S (Error) M9000
thereafter.
fuse
• Blown fuse status is checked even for remote I/O
station output modules.
• Turns ON if the I/O module differs from the status Rem
registered at power on.
OFF : Normal • Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal
SM61 I/O module verify error S (Error) M9002
ON : Error thereafter.
• I/O module verification is also conducted for remote
I/O station modules.
OFF : Not detected S (Instruction
SM62 Annunciator detection • Goes ON if even one annunciator F goes ON. M9009
ON : Detected execution)
QnA
• Goes ON if error is detected by CHK instruction.
OFF : Not detected S (Instruction Qn(H)
SM80 CHK detection • Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal New
ON : Detected execution) QnPH
thereafter.
QnPRH
SM90 Corresponds to SD90 M9108
SM91 Corresponds to SD91 M9109
SM92 Corresponds to SD92 • Goes ON when M9110
SM93 Corresponds to SD93 measurement of step M9111
Startup of monitoring OFF : Not started(monitoring QnA
SM94 Corresponds to SD94 transition monitoring timer M9112
timer for step transition timer reset) Qn(H)
is commenced. U
SM95 (Enabled only when ON : Started(monitoring Corresponds to SD95 M9113 QnPH
• Resets step transition
SFC program exists) timer started) QnPRH
SM96 Corresponds to SD96 monitoring timer when it M9114
SM97 Corresponds to SD97 goes OFF. New
SM98 Corresponds to SD98 New
SM99 Corresponds to SD99 New
OFF : Serial communication
• Stores the setting of whether the serial
Serial communication function is not used. S (Power-ON or
SM100 communication function is used or not in the serial
function using flag ON : Serial communication reset)
communication setting parameter
function is used.
OFF : GX Developer • Stores whether the device that is communicating via
Communication S (RS232
SM101 ON : MC protocol the RS-232 interface is GX Developer or MC protocol
protocol status flag communication)
communication device communication device
• Turns ON when an abnormal protocol was used to
make communication in the serial communication
OFF : Normal
SM110 Protocol error function. S (Error)
ON : Abnormal
thereafter
• Turns ON when the mode used to make
communication was different from the setting in the New Q00J/Q00/Q01
OFF : Normal
SM111 Communication status serial communication function. S (Error)
ON : Abnormal
thereafter.
• Turns ON when the error codes stored in SM110,
SM112 Error information clear ON : Cleared SM111, SD110 and SD111 are cleared. (Activated U
when turned from OFF to ON)
OFF : Normal • Turns ON when an overrun error occurred in the
SM113 Overrun error S (Error)
ON : Abnormal serial communication error.
OFF : Normal • Turns ON when a parity error occurred in the serial
SM114 Parity error S (Error)
ON : Abnormal communication error.
OFF : Normal • Turns ON when a framing error occurred in the serial
SM115 Framing error S (Error)
ON : Abnormal communication error.
• Turns ON when data are written to the program cash
memory.
Program memory OFF : Completed • Turns OFF when the program batch transfer has
SM165 batch transfer ON : Notexecuted or been completed. S (Status change) New QnU*6
execution status execution under way • ON status is held when the program batch transfer is
not performed after data are written to the program
memory.
*6: The Q03UDCPU, Q04UDHCPU, Q06UDHCPU, Q13UDHCPU, and Q26UDHCPU whose first 5 digits of serial number is "10012" or later.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(2) System information
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
Corres-
(When Set) ACPU CPU 10
M9
QnA
Qn(H)
• When this relay goes from OFF to ON, the LEDs
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
SM202 LED OFF command OFF ON : LED OFF U New QnPH
corresponding to the individual bits at SD202 go off
QnPRH
QnU
SM203 STOP contact STOP status • Goes ON at STOP status S (Status change) M9042
SM204 PAUSE contact PAUSE status • Goes ON at PAUSE status S (Status change) M9041
SM205 STEP-RUN contact STEP-RUN status
OFF : PAUSE disabled
• Goes ON at STEP-RUN status
• PAUSE status is entered if this relay is ON when the
S (Status change) M9054 QnA
11
PAUSE enable coil U M9040
ON : PAUSE enabled PAUSE contact goes ON
MAINTENANCE AND
SM206 OFF : Device test not yet
Device test request • Comes ON when the device test mode is executed
executed S (Request) New Rem
acceptance status on GX Developer.
ON : Device test executed
INSPECTION
• When this relay goes from OFF to ON and after END
OFF : Ignored instruction execution of subsequent scan, clock data
SM210 Clock data set request U M9025
ON : Set request stored in SD210 to SD213 are written to the CPU
module.
SM211 Clock data error

OFF : No error
ON : Error
• ON when error is generated in clock data (SD210 to
SD213) value, and OFF if no error is detected.
S (Request) M9026 12
• Displays clock data as month, day, hour, minute, and Q3A
OFF : Ignored
TROUBLESHOOTING
SM212 Clock data display second at the LED display at front of CPU U M9027 Q4A
ON : Display
module.(Enabled only for Q3ACPU and Q4ACPU) Q4AR
Clock data read OFF : Ignored • When this relay is ON, clock data is read to SD210 to
SM213 U M9028
request ON : Read request SD213 as BCD values. Rem
Turned ON when access can be made to the CPU
OFF : CPU No.1 preparation
module No.1 from the other CPU module at power-on
CPU No.1 preparation uncompleted
SM220 or reset operation. SM220 is used as interlock for
completed ON : CPU No.1 preparation
accessing the CPU module No.1 when the multiple
completed
CPU synchronous setting is asynchronous.
SM221 or reset operation. SM221 is used as interlock for QnU
APPENDICES
completed
CPU synchronous setting is asynchronous. S (When status
New
Turned ON when access can be made to the CPU changed)
SM222 or reset operation. SM222 is used as interlock for
completed
SM223 or reset operation. SM223 is used as interlock for QnU*5
completed
OFF : Online module change
Online module change is not in progress • Turns on during online module change. (for host S (During online
INDEX
SM235 New
flag ON : Online module change CPU) module change)
in progress
QnPH
OFF :Online module change • Turns ON for one scan after online module change is
S (When online
Online module change incomplete complete.
SM236 module change is New
complete flag ON : Online module change • This contact point can only be used by the scan
complete)
complete program. (for host CPU)
OFF : Device range checked • Select whether to execute the device range check
Device range check
SM237 ON : Device range not with the BMOV or FMOV instruction (only when the U New QnU*6
inhibit flag
checked subset conditions are met).
*5: The Universal model QCPU except the Q02UCPU.

*6: The Q03UDCPU, Q04UDHCPU, Q06UDHCPU, Q13UDHCPU, and Q26UDHCPU whose first 5 digits of serial number is "10012" or later.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Corres-
(When Set) ACPU CPU
M9
• Goes OFF when reset of the No. 1 CPU is canceled.
OFF : No. 1 CPU reset • Comes ON when the No. 1 CPU is resetting
SM240 No. 1 CPU reset flag cancel (including the case where the CPU module is
ON : No. 1 CPU resetting removed from the base).
The other CPUs are also put in reset status.
• Comes ON when the No. 2 CPU is resetting Q00/Q01*1
OFF : No. 2 CPU reset
(including the case where the CPU module is Qn(H)*1
SM241 No. 2 CPU reset flag cancel
removed from the base). QnPH
ON : No. 2 CPU resetting
The other CPUs result in "MULTI CPU DOWN" (error QnU
code: 7000).
OFF : No. 3 CPU reset • Comes ON when the No. 3 CPU is resetting
SM242 No. 3 CPU reset flag cancel (including the case where the CPU module is
ON : No. 3 CPU resetting removed from the base).The other CPUs result in
"MULTI CPU DOWN" (error code: 7000).
• Goes OFF when reset of the No. 4 CPU is canceled. S (Status change) New
OFF : No. 4 CPU reset • Comes ON when the No. 4 CPU is resetting Qn(H)*1
SM243 No. 4 CPU reset flag cancel (including the case where the CPU module is QnPH
ON : No. 4 CPU resetting removed from the base).The other CPUs result in QnU*5
"MULTI CPU DOWN" (error code: 7000).
• Goes OFF when the No. 1 CPU is normal (including
OFF : No. 1 CPU normal
a continuation error).
SM244 No. 1 CPU error flag ON : No. 1 CPU during stop
• Comes ON when the No. 1 CPU is during a stop
error
error.
• Goes OFF when the No. 2 CPU is normal (including Q00/Q01*1
a continuation error). Qn(H)*1
• Comes ON when the No. 2 CPU is during a stop QnPH
error
error. QnU
error
error.
OFF : No. 4 CPU normal Qn(H)*1
SM247 No. 4 CPU error flag ON : No. 4 CPU during stop S (Status change) New QnPH
error QnU*5
error
QnA
Qn(H)
OFF : Ignored • When this relay goes from OFF to ON, maximum
SM250 Max. loaded I/O read U New QnPH
ON : Read loaded I/O number is read to SD250.
QnPRH
Rem
• By turning this relay ON after setting the head I/O
number of the replaced I/O module to SD251, the I/O
module can be replaced online (with power on).
(Only one module can be replaced for each setting.)
OFF : No replacement • Turn this relay ON in the test mode of the program or
SM251 I/O change flag U M9094 Q2A(S1)
ON : Replacement peripheral device for an I/O module change during
RUN, or in the test mode of the peripheral device for Q3A
an I/O change during STOP. Q4A
• Do not execute a RUN/STOP mode change until I/O Q4AR
module change is finished.
OFF : Replacement
SM252 I/O change OK prohibited • Goes ON when I/O replacement is OK. S (END) New
ON : Replacement enabled
• Effective for the batch refresh (also effective for the
Qn(H)
low speed cyclic)
QnPH
• Designate whether to receive arrival stations only or
QnPRH
to receive all slave stations in the MELSECNET/H.
Qn(H)*2
All stations refresh OFF : Refresh arrival station • Designate whether to receive arrival stations only or
SM254 U New QnPH*6
command ON : Refresh all stations to receive all slave stations in the MELSECNET/G.
QnPRH*6
• Effective for the batch refresh (also effective for the
low speed cyclic)
QnU
• Designate whether to receive arrival stations only or
to receive all slave stations.
*1: This applies to the CPU of function version B or later.

*2: The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is 09012 or later.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Corres-
EMC AND LOW

DIRECTIVES
(When Set) ACPU CPU
VOLTAGE
M9
• Goes ON for standby network(If no designation has
OFF : Operative network
SM255 been made concerning active or standby, active is S (Initial) New
MELSECNET/10,
MELSECNET/H
ON : Standby network
OFF : Reads
assumed.)
• For refresh from link to CPU module (B, W, etc.)
10
SM256 U New
module 1 information ON : Does not read indicate whether to read from the link module.
OFF : Writes • For refresh from CPU module to link (B, W, etc.),
SM257 U New
ON : Does not write designate whether to write to the link module.
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
• Goes ON for standby network
SM260 (If no designation has been made concerning active S (Initial) New
MELSECNET/10, or standby, active is assumed.)
MELSECNET/H OFF : Reads • For refresh from link to CPU module (B, W, etc.)
SM261 U New
SM262
OFF : Writes
ON : Does not write
• For refresh from CPU module to link (B, W, etc.),
designate whether to write to the link module.
U New QnA
Qn(H)
11
• Goes ON for standby network QnPH
SM265 (If no designation has been made concerning active S (Initial) New QnPRH
MAINTENANCE AND
MELSECNET/10, or standby, active is assumed.)
INSPECTION
SM266 U New
SM267 U New
• Goes ON for standby network
SM270 (If no designation has been made concerning active S (Initial) New
MELSECNET/10,
or standby, active is assumed.) 12
SM271 U New
TROUBLESHOOTING
SM272 U New
Qn(H)
• Goes ON when a CC-Link error is detected in any of
QnPH
the installed CC-Link module. Goes OFF when S (Status change) New
QnPRH
OFF : Normal normal operation is restored.
SM280 CC-Link error Rem
ON : Error
• Goes ON when a CC-Link error is detected in any of
the installed CC-Link module. Remains ON if the S (Error) New QnA
condition is restored to normal thereafter.
• This flag is enabled when the time reserved for
communication processing is set in SD315.
• Turns ON to delay the END processing by the time
set in SD315 in order to perform communication
APPENDICES
Communication
OFF : Without delay processing.
SM315 reserved time delay U New Q00J/Q00/Q01
ON : With delay (The scan time increases by the period set in
enable/disable flag
SD315.)
• Turns OFF to perform the END processing without a
delay of the time set in SD315 when there is no
communication processing. (Defaults to OFF)
Presence/absence of OFF : SFC program absent • Turns ON when an SFC program is registered.
SM320 S (Initial) M9100
SFC program ON : SFC program present • OFF when an SFC program is not registered. QnA
• Initial value is set at the same value as SM320. Q00J/Q00/Q01*1
OFF : SFC program not (Goes ON automatically if SFC program is present.) Qn(H)
Start/stop SFC executed (stop) • Turn this relay from ON to OFF to stop program M9101form QnPH
SM321 S (Initial)/U
program ON : SFC program executed execution. at change QnPRH
(start) • Turn this relay from OFF to ON to resume program QnU
INDEX
execution.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Corres-
(When Set) ACPU CPU
M9
• The SFC program starting mode in the SFC setting
of the PLC parameter dialog box is set as the initial
SFC program start OFF : Initial start M9102form
SM322 value. S (Initial)/U
status ON : Resume start at change
AT initial start: OFF
At continued start: ON
OFF : Continuous transition
Presence/absence of Set the presence/absence of continuous transition for
not effective
SM323 continuous transition the block where "Continuous transition bit" of the SFC U M9103
ON : Continuous transition
for entire block data device has not been set.
effective
• OFF during operation in the continuous transition S (Instruction QnA
M9104
OFF : When transition is mode or during continuous transition, and ON when execution) Q00J/Q00/Q01*1
Continuous transition
SM324 executed continuous transition is not executed. Qn(H)
prevention flag
ON : When no transition • Always ON during operation in the no continuous S (Status change) New QnPH
transition mode. QnPRH
Select whether the coil outputs of the active steps are QnU
held or not at the time of a block stop.
• As the initial value, the output mode at a block stop in
Output mode at block OFF : OFF
SM325 the parameter is OFF when the coil outputs are OFF, S (Initial)/U M9196
stop ON : Preserves
and ON when the coil outputs are held.
• All coil outputs go OFF when this relay is OFF.
• Coil outputs are preserved when this relay is ON.
Selects the device status when the stopped CPU is run
SFC device clear OFF : Clear device
SM326 after the sequence program or SFC program has been U New
mode ON : Preserves device
modified when the SFC program exists.
QnA
Qn(H)
OFF : Hold step output • Select the device status at the time of switching from S (Initial)/U QnPH
Output during end step
SM327 turned OFF (cleared) STOP to program write to RUN.(All devices except New QnPRH
execution
ON : Hold step output held the step relay) QnU
U Q00J/Q00/Q01*1
Select whether clear processing will be performed or
not if active steps other than the ones being held exist
in the block when the end step is reached.
OFF : Clear processing is • When this relay turns OFF, all active steps are
Clear processing
performed. forcibly terminated to terminate the block. Q00J/Q00/Q01*1
SM328 mode when end step U New
ON : Clear processing is not • When this relay is ON, the execution of the block is QnU
is reached
performed. continued as-is.
• If active steps other than the ones being held do not
exist when the end step is reached, the steps being
held are terminated to terminate the block.
Select whether the low speed execution type program
will be executed in the asynchronous mode or in the
synchronous mode.
• Asynchronous mode (this relay is turned OFF.)
Mode in which the operation of the low speed
Operation mode for QnA
OFF : Asynchronous mode execution type program is performed continuously
SM330 low speed execution U New Qn(H)
ON : Synchronous mode within the excess time.
type program QnPH
• Synchronous mode (this relay is turned ON.)
Mode in which the operation of the low speed
execution type program is not performed
continuously and operation is performed from the
next scan if there is excess time.
• Indicates whether the normal SFC program is being
Normal SFC program OFF : Not executed executed or not.
SM331
execution status ON : Being executed • Used as an SFC control instruction execution
Qn(H)*3
interlock.
S (Status change) New QnPH*4
Program execution • Indicates whether the program execution
QnPRH
management SFC OFF : Not executed management SFC program is being executed or not.
SM332
program execution ON : Being executed • Used as an SFC control instruction execution
status interlock.
• The status of the intelligent function module access
ON indicates completion of instruction executed immediately before is stored. Qn(H)
SM390 Access execution flag intelligent function module (This data is overwritten when the intelligent function S (Status change) New QnPH
access module access instruction is executed again.) QnPRH
• Used by the user in a program as a completion bit.
GINT instruction Indicates execution status of the S(P).GINT instruction.
OFF : Not executed S (Instruction
SM391 execution completion • Turned OFF before the instruction is executed. New QnU
ON : Execution completed execution)
flag • Turned ON after the instruction is completed.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(3) System clocks/counters
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
Corres-
(When Set) ACPU
M9
CPU
10
ON S (Every END
SM400 Always ON • Normally is ON M9036
OFF processing)
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
ON S (Every END
SM401 Always OFF • Normally is OFF M9037
OFF processing)
• After RUN, ON for 1 scan only.

• This connection can be used for scan execution type
programs only.
• When an initial execution type program is used, this QnA 11
relay turns OFF at the END processing of the scan Qn(H)
S (Every END
execution type program in the first scan after RUN. M9038 QnPH
MAINTENANCE AND
After RUN, ON for 1 ON processing)
SM402 1 scan QnPRH
scan only OFF ON
QnU
Initial 1 scan of scan
OFF
INSPECTION
execution execution type
type program program
S (Every END
• After RUN, ON for 1 scan only. New Q00J/Q00/Q01
processing)
• After RUN, OFF for 1 scan only.
• This connection can be used for scan execution type 12
programs only.
TROUBLESHOOTING
• When an initial execution type program is used, this QnA
relay turns OFF at the END processing of the scan Qn(H)
execution type program in the first scan after RUN. S (Every END
M9039 QnPH
After RUN, OFF for 1 ON processing)
SM403 1 scan ON QnPRH
scan only OFF QnU
OFF
Initial 1 scan of scan
execution execution type
type program program
S (Every END
• After RUN, OFF for 1 scan only. New Q00J/Q00/Q01
processing)
Low speed execution • After RUN, ON for 1 scan only.
ON S (Every END
SM404 type programON for 1 1 scan • This connection can be used for low speed execution type New
OFF processing)
scan only after RUN programs only. QnA
APPENDICES
Low speed execution Qn(H)
• After RUN, OFF for 1 scan only. QnPH
type programAfter ON S (Every END
SM405 1 scan • This connection can be used for low speed execution type New
RUN, OFF for 1 scan OFF processing)
programs only.
only
• Repeatedly changes between ON and OFF at 5-ms
interval.
• When Programmable Controller power supply is Qn(H)
0.005s turned ON or a CPU module reset is performed, QnPH
SM409 0.01 second clock 0.005s S (Status change) New
goes from OFF to start. QnPRH
(Note that the ON-OFF status changes when the QnU
designated time has elapsed during the execution of
the program.)
0.05s
INDEX
SM410 0.1 second clock 0.05s M9030

• Repeatedly changes between ON and OFF at each
designated time interval.
SM411 0.2 second clock 0.1s • When Programmable Controller power supply is M9031
0.1s
turned ON or a CPU module reset is performed,
S (Status change)
goes from OFF to start.
SM412 1 second clock 0.5s (Note that the ON-OFF status changes when the M9032
0.5s
the program.)
SM413 2 second clock 1s M9033
1s
• This relay alternates between ON and OFF at

intervals of the time (unit: s) specified in SD414.
• When Programmable Controller power supply is
ns turned ON or a CPU module reset is performed, M9034form
SM414 2n second clock ns S (Status change)
goes from OFF to start. at change
(Note that the ON-OFF status changes when the
the program.)

12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Corres-
(When Set) ACPU CPU
M9
• This relay alternates between ON and OFF at
intervals of the time (unit: ms) specified in SD415.
• When Programmable Controller power supply is Qn(H)
n(ms) turned ON or a CPU module reset is performed, QnPH
SM415 2n (ms) clock n(ms) S (Status change) New
goes from OFF to start. QnPRH
(Note that the ON-OFF status changes when the QnU
the program.)
SM420 User timing clock No.0 • Relay repeats ON/OFF switching at fixed scan M9020
SM421 User timing clock No.1 intervals. M9021
• When Programmable Controller power supply is
SM422 User timing clock No.2 M9022
turned ON or a CPU module reset is performed,
SM423 User timing clock No.3 goes from OFF to start. M9023
(For the Redundant CPU, however, this relay is
S (Every END
always OFF after system switching.)
processing)
• The ON/OFF intervals are set with the DUTY
n2 scan n2 scan instruction
SM424 User timing clock No.4 M9024
DUTY n1 n2 SM420
n1 scan
n1: ON scan interval
n2: OFF scan interval
SM430 User timing clock No.5
SM431 User timing clock No.6 QnA
S (Every END
SM432 User timing clock No.7 • For use with SM420 to SM424 low speed programs New Qn(H)
processing)
SM433 User timing clock No.8 QnPH
SM434 User timing clock No.9
(4) Scan information

Corres-
(When Set) ACPU CPU
M9
OFF : Completed or not QnA
Low speed program • Goes ON when low speed execution type program is S (Every END
SM510 executed New Qn(H)
execution flag executed. processing)
ON : Execution under way. QnPH
QnA
• When this relay goes from OFF to ON, the module Qn(H)
Reads module service OFF : Ignored
SM551 service interval designated by SD550 is read to U New QnPH
interval ON : Read
SD551 to SD552. QnPRH
Rem
(5) I/O refresh

Corres-
(When Set) ACPU CPU
M9
• When this special relay is turned ON, I/O refresh is
performed after execution of the first program, and
the next program is then executed.
Program to program I/ OFF : Not refreshed
SM580 When a sequence program and an SFC program are U New Q00J/Q00/Q01*1
O refresh ON : Refreshed
to be executed, the sequence program is executed,
I/O refresh is performed, and the SFC program is
then executed.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
(6) Drive information
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
Corres-
VOLTAGE
(When Set) ACPU CPU
M9
SM600
Memory card (A)
usable flags
OFF : Unusable
ON : Use enabled
• ON when memory card (A) is ready for use by user S (Status change) New
10
Memory card (A) OFF : No protect • Goes ON when memory card (A) protect switch is
SM601 S (Status change) New
protect flag ON : Protect ON
OFF : No drive 1 • Turns ON when the mounted memory card (A) is QnA
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
SM602 Drive 1 flag S (Status change) New
ON : Drive 1 present RAM Qn(H)
OFF : No drive 2 • Turns ON when the mounted memory card (A) is QnPH
SM603 Drive 2 flag S (Status change) New QnPRH
ON : Drive 2 present ROM
QnU
Memory card (A) in- OFF : Not used
SM604 • Goes ON when memory card (A) is in use S (Status change) New
use flag ON : In use
SM605
Memory card (A)
remove/insert prohibit
OFF : Remove/insert enabled
ON : Remove/insert
• Goes ON when memory card (A) cannot be inserted
U New
11
or removed
flag prohibited
MAINTENANCE AND
• Turned ON by user to enable the removal/insertion
of memory card. Qn(H)
OFF : Remove/insert
Memory card remove/ • Turned OFF by the system after the memory card is QnPH
INSPECTION
SM609 prohibited S/U New
insert enable flag removed. QnPRH
ON : Remove/insert enabled
• This contact can be used only when SM604 and QnU
SM605 are OFF.
Q2A(S1)
Memory card B usable OFF : Unusable Q3A
SM620
flags ON : Use enabled
• ON when memory card B is ready for use by user S (Initial) New
Q4A
Q4AR
12
OFF : No protect
TROUBLESHOOTING
Drive 3/4 protect flag • Always OFF S (Initial) New QCPU
ON : Protect
SM621 Q2A(S1)
Memory card B protect OFF : No protect Q3A
• Goes ON when memory card B protect switch is ON S (Initial) New
flag ON : Protect Q4A
Q4AR
• Always ON S (Initial) New QCPU
OFF : No drive 3 Q2A(S1)

SM622 Drive 3 flag
ON : Drive 3 present Q3A
• Goes ON when drive 3 (card 2 RAM area) is present S (Initial) New
Q4A
Q4AR
• Always ON S (Initial) New QCPU
APPENDICES
OFF : No drive 4 Q2A(S1)
SM623 Drive 4 flag
ON : Drive 4 present Q3A
• Goes ON when drive 4 (card 2 ROM area) is present S (Initial) New
Q4A
Q4AR
Q2A(S1)
Memory card B in-use OFF : Not used Q3A
• Goes ON when memory card B is in use S (Status change) New
flag ON : In use Q4A
Q4AR
SM624
Qn(H)
OFF : Not used • Goes ON when the file within Drive 3 (standard QnPH
Drive 3/4 in-use flag S (Status change) New
ON : In use RAM) or Drive 4 (standard ROM) is used. QnPRH
QnU
INDEX
Q2A(S1)
Memory card B OFF : Remove/insert enabled
• Goes ON when memory card B cannot be inserted or Q3A
SM625 remove/insert prohibit ON : Remove/insert U New
removed Q4A
flag prohibited
Q4AR
OFF : File register not used
SM640 File register use • Goes ON when file register is in use S (Status change) New
ON : File register in use

12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Corres-
(When Set) ACPU CPU
M9
QnA
Qn(H)
OFF : File register not used
SM650 Comment use • Goes ON when comment file is in use S (Status change) New QnPH
ON : File register in use
QnPRH
QnU
OFF : Internal memory QnA
execution • Goes ON while boot operation is in process Qn(H)
S (Status change) New
ON : Boot operation in • Goes OFF if boot designation switch is OFF QnPH
progress QnPRH
SM660 Boot operation
OFF : Program memory
execution Q00J/Q00/Q01
• Goes ON while boot operation is in process S (Status change) New
ON : Boot operation in QnU
progress
• Turned ON when latch data backup to the standard
Latch data backup to
OFF : Not completed ROM is completed.
SM671 standard ROM S (Status change) New QnU
ON : Completed • Time when the latch data backup to the standard
completion flag
ROM was performed is stored in SD672 or later.
• Goes ON when access is made to area outside the QnA
Memory card A file
OFF : Within access range range of file register of memory card A(Set within Qn(H)
SM672 register access range S/U New
ON : Outside access range END processing.) QnPH
flag
• Reset at user program QnPRH
• Goes ON when access is made outside the range of Q2A(S1)
Memory card B file
OFF : Within access range file registers, R. of memory card B.(Set within END Q3A
SM673 register access range S/U New
ON : Outside access range processing.) Q4A
flag
• Reset at user program Q4AR
• Turned ON when data cannot be backuped to the
Error completion of
OFF : No Error standard ROM by the latch data backup normally.
SM675 latch data backup to S New QnU
ON : Error • Turned OFF when data is backuped to the standard
standard ROM
ROM by the latch data backup normally.
• If latch data backup is performed when SM676 is
ON, restore the data every time turning ON from
Specification of OFF the power supply from the next power-on.
OFF : Not specified
SM676 restore repeated • Delete the backuped latch data, or restore the data U New QnU
ON : Specified
execution every time turning ON from OFF the power supply
until the latch data backup operation will be executed
again.
OFF : Write error • Turns ON if a write error is detected at writing to
Program memory write
SM680 ON : Write not executed/ program memory (flash ROM). S (At write) New QnU
error
normal Turns OFF by the write direction.
• Turns ON when writing to the program memory (flash
Program memory OFF : During writing
SM681 ROM) is in progress, and turns OFF when writing is S (At write) New QnU
writing flag ON : Write not executed
completed.
OFF : Overwrite count is
Program memory
100,000 or more • Turns ON when the overwrite count of program
SM682 overwrite count error S (At write) New QnU
ON : Overwrite count is less memory (flash ROM) reaches 100,000.
flag
than 100,000
OFF : Write error • Turns ON when write error is detected at writing to
Standard ROM write
SM685 ON : Write not executed/ standard ROM (flash ROM). S (At write) New QnU
error
normal • Turns OFF by the write direction.
• Turns ON when writing to the standard ROM (flash
Standard ROM writing OFF : During overwriting
SM686 ROM) is in progress, and turns OFF when writing is S (At write) New QnU
flag ON : Overwrite not executed
completed.
OFF : Overwrite count is
Standard ROM • Turns ON when the overwrite count of standard
100,000 or more
SM687 overwrite count error ROM (flash ROM) reaches 100,000. S (At write) New QnU
ON : Overwrite count is less
flag (It is necessary to change CPU module.)
than 100,000

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
(7) Instruction-Related Special Relays
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
Corres-
(When Set) ACPU CPU
SM700 Carry flag

OFF : Carry OFF
• Carry flag used in application instruction
S (Instruction
M9
M9012
10
ON : Carry ON execution)
QnA
Switching the number of Qn(H)
Number of output • Used for the PR, PRC, BINDA, DBINDA, BINHA,
SM701 output characters and the U M9049 QnPH
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
characters selection DBINHA, BCDDA, DBCDDA, or COMRD instruction
output pattern QnPRH
QnU
OFF : Search next • Designates method to be used by search instruction.
SM702 Search method U New
ON : 2-part search • Data must be arranged for 2-part search.
• The sort instruction is used to designate whether
OFF : Ascending order
SM703 Sort order
ON : Descending order
data should be sorted in ascending order or in
descending order.
U New
11
OFF : Non-match found • Goes ON when all data conditions have been met for S (Instruction
SM704 Block comparison New
ON : All match the BKCMP instruction. execution)
MAINTENANCE AND
• When SM707 is OFF, real number instructions are
Selection of real
OFF : Speed oriented processed at high speed.
SM707 number instruction U New Q4AR
INSPECTION
ON : Accuracy oriented • When it is ON, real number instructions are
processing type
processed with high accuracy.
QnA
CHK instruction OFF : Conditions priority • Remains as originally set when OFF. S (Instruction Qn(H)
SM710 New
priority ranking flag ON : Pattern priority • CHK priorities updated when ON. execution) QnPH
QnPRH
OFF : Other than during
• In processing of AD57(S1), goes ON when screen is
12
Divided transmission divided processing S (Instruction
SM711 split for transfer, and goes OFF when split M9065
status ON : During divided execution)
TROUBLESHOOTING
processing is completed
processing
Transmission OFF : Batch processing • In processing of AD57(S1), goes ON when canvas S (Instruction
SM712 M9066
processing selection ON : Divided processing screen is divided for transfer. execution)
OFF : Communication QnA
request to remote
terminal module
Communication • Used to determine whether communications
enabled S (Instruction
SM714 request registration requests to remote terminal modules connected to M9081
ON : Communication execution)
area BUSY signal the AJ71PT32-S3 can be executed or not.
request to remote
terminal module
disabled
OFF : During DI S (Instruction
SM715 EI flag • ON when EI instruction is being executed. New
ON : During EI execution)
APPENDICES
OFF : Comment read not • Turns on only during one scan when the processing Qn(H)
Comment read completed of the COMRD or PRC instruction is completed. QnPH
completion flag ON : Comment read • Turns on only during one scan when the processing QnPRH
completed of the COMRD instruction is completed. QnU
• Switches ON while a file is being accessed by the S.
Qn(H)
FWRITE, S. FREAD, COMRD, PRC, or LEDC
QnPH
instruction.
Qn(H)
QnPH
OFF : File not accessed FWRITE, S. FREAD, COMRD or LEDC instruction.
SM721 File being accessed S (Status change) New QnPRH
ON : File being accessed
FWRITE, S. FREAD, COMRD or SP.DEVST QnU
instruction.
• Turns ON while the ATA card or standard ROM is
INDEX
being accessed. QnU*2
OFF : Error detection

BIN/DBIN instruction performed • Turned ON when "OPERATION ERROR" is
SM722 U New QCPU
error disabling flag ON : Error detection not suppressed for BIN or DBIN instruction.
performed
OFF : Request for
communication with
BUSY signal for CC- intelligent device
• Used for determination whether to enable or disable
Link communication station enabled S (Instruction
SM730 the communication request for the intelligent device New QnA
request registration ON : Request for execution)
station connected with CC-Link module.
area communication with
intelligent device
station disabled
OFF : Not executed by
• During OFF, XCALL instructions will not be executed
XCALL instruction execution condition
even if execution condition is risen.
SM734 execution condition risen
• During ON, XCALL instructions will be executed
U New Qn(H)*1
designation ON : Executed by execution
when execution condition is risen.
condition risen

12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Corres-
(When Set) ACPU CPU
M9
OFF : SFC comment readout
instruction is • Turns on the instructions, (S(P).SFCSCOMR) to Qn(H)*2
SFC comment readout
inactivated. read the SFC step comments and (S(P).
SM735 instruction in
ON : SFC comment readout SFCTCOMR) to read the SFC transition condition
S (status change) New QnPH*3
execution flag QnPRH*3
instruction is comments.
activating.
PKEY instruction OFF : Instruction not • ON when PKEY instruction is being executed.
S (Instruction
SM736 execution in progress executed Goes OFF when CR is input, or when input character New
execution)
flag ON : Instruction execution string reaches 32 characters.
OFF : Keyboard input QnA
Keyboard input • Goes ON when keyboard input is being conducted.
reception enabled S (Instruction
SM737 reception flag for Goes when keyboard input has been stored at the New
ON : Keyboard input execution)
PKEY instruction CPU.
reception disabled
OFF : Instruction not
MSG instruction S (Instruction Qn(H)
SM738 executed • Goes ON when MSG instruction is executed New
reception flag execution) QnPRH
ON : Instruction execution
QnA
PID bumpless
processing OFF : Matched • Specifies whether to match the set value (SV) with Q00J/Q00/Q01*4
SM774 U New Qn(H)
(for complete ON : Not matched the process value (PV) or not in the manual mode.
derivative) QnPRH
QnU
• Select whether link refresh processing will be QnA
OFF : Performs link refresh
performed or not when only communication with the Q00J/Q00/Q01
ON : Performs no link U New
CPU module is made at the execution of the COM Qn(H)
refresh
Selection of refresh instruction. QnPH
processing during
SM775 Q00J/Q00/Q01*4
COM instruction OFF : Performs all refresh
execution processes
• Select whether to perform all refreshes or the refresh Qn(H)*5
processing set by SD778 when the COM instruction U New QnPH*3
ON : Performs refresh set
is executed. QnPRH
by SD778
QnU
• Set whether the local device of the subroutine
Enable/disable local OFF : Local device disabled QnA
SM776 program called at execution of the CALL instruction U New
device at CALL ON : Local device enabled Qn(H)
is valid or invalid.
QnPH
Enable/disable local QnPRH
OFF : Local device disabled • Set whether the local device at execution of the
SM777 device in interrupt U New QnU
ON : Local device enabled interrupt program is valid or invalid.
program
OFF : CC-Link dedicated
• Switches ON when the number of the CC-Link
instruction executable
CC-Link dedicated dedicated instructions that can be executed
SM780 ON : CC-Link dedicated U New QnA
instruction executable simultaneously reaches 32. Switches OFF when the
instruction not
number goes below 32.
executable
Q00J/Q00/Q01*4
PID bumpless
OFF : Matched • Specifies whether to match the set value (SV) with Qn(H)*6
SM794 processing(for U New
ON : Not matched the process value (PV) or not in the manual mode. QnPRH
incomplete derivative)
QnU
*4: This applies to the CPU module of function version B or later.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Corres-
EMC AND LOW

DIRECTIVES
(When Set) ACPU CPU
VOLTAGE
M9
• Turns ON when the number of the remaining blocks
Block information
of the dedicated instruction transmission area used
10
using the multiple CPU S (When
OFF : Block is secured for the multiple CPU high-speed transmission
high-speed instruction/END
SM796
transmission
ON : Block set by SD796 dedicated instruction (target CPU= CPU No.1) is less
processing
New QnU*7
cannot be secured than the number of blocks specified by SD796.
dedicated instruction executed)
Turns ON at instruction execution. Turns OFF when
(for CPU No.1)
the empty area exists at END processing.
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
Block information
SM797
transmission
processing
New QnU*7
(for CPU No.2)
Block information
11
QnU*7
MAINTENANCE AND
SM798 ON : Block set by SD798 dedicated instruction (target CPU= CPU No.3) is less New
transmission processing
(for CPU No.3)
INSPECTION
Block information
SM799
transmission
processing
New QnU*7
12
(for CPU No.4)
TROUBLESHOOTING
APPENDICES
INDEX

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(8) Debug
Corres-
(When Set) ACPU CPU
M9
Qn(H)
• Switches ON when the trace preparation is QnPH
Trace preparation S (Status change) New
OFF : Not ready completed QnPRH
SM800 QnU
ON : Ready
Sampling trace
• Goes ON when sampling trace is ready S (Status change) New QnA
preparation
Qn(H)
• Trace is started when this relay switches ON.
QnPH
Trace start • Trace is suspended when this relay switches OFF. U M9047
OFF : Suspend QnPRH
SM801 (All related special Ms switches OFF.)
ON : Start QnU
• Sampling trace started when this goes ON
Sampling trace start U M9047 QnA
• Suspended when OFF (Related special M all OFF)
Qn(H)
Trace execution in QnPH
• Switches ON during execution of trace. S (Status change) M9046
progress OFF : Suspend QnPRH
SM802 QnU
ON : Start
Sampling trace
• Goes ON during execution of sampling trace S (Status change) M9046 QnA
execution in progress
Qn(H)
• Trace is triggered when this relay switches from OFF
QnPH
Trace trigger to ON. (Identical to TRACE instruction execution U M9044
QnPRH
status)
SM803 OFF ON: Start QnU
• Sampling trace trigger goes ON when this goes from
Sampling trace trigger OFF to ON (Identical to STRA instruction execution U M9044 QnA
status)
Qn(H)
QnPH
After trace trigger • Switches ON after trace is triggered. S (Status change) New
OFF : Not after trigger QnPRH
SM804 QnU
ON : After trigger
After sampling trace
• Goes ON after sampling trace trigger S (Status change) New QnA
trigger
Qn(H)
QnPH
Trace completed • Switches ON at completion of trace S (Status change) M9043
OFF : Not completed QnPRH
SM805 QnU
ON : End
Sampling trace
• Goes ON at completion of sampling trace S (Status change) M9043
completed
Status latch OFF : Not ready
SM806 • Goes ON when status latch is ready S (Status change) New
preparation ON : Ready
SM807 Status latch command OFF ON: Latch • Runs status latch command U New
Status latch OFF : Latch not completed
SM808 • Comes ON when status latch is completed. S (Status change) M9055
completion ON : Latch completed
SM809 Status latch clear OFF ON: Clear • Enable next status latch U New
Program trace OFF : Not ready
SM810 • Goes ON when program trace is ready S (Status change) New
preparation ON : Ready
QnA
OFF : Suspend • Program trace started when this goes ON
SM811 Start program trace S (Status change) New
ON : Start • Suspended when OFF (Related special M all OFF)
Program trace OFF : Suspend
SM812 • ON when program trace execution is underway U New
execution under way ON : Start
• Program trace trigger goes ON when this goes from
SM813 Program trace trigger OFF ON: Start OFF to ON (Identical to PTRA instruction execution S (Status change) New
status)
After program trace OFF : Not after trigger
SM814 • Goes ON after program trace trigger S (Status change) New
trigger ON : After trigger
Program trace OFF : Not completed
SM815 • Goes ON at completion of program trace S (Status change) New
completion ON : End

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Corres-
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
(When Set) ACPU CPU
M9
OFF : Not ready
SM820 Step trace preparation • Goes ON after program trace registration, at ready S (Status change) New
ON : Ready
• Select whether execution of step trace is started or
10
OFF : Suspend suspended. M9182form
SM821 Step trace starts U
ON : Start • When this goes ON, step trace is started at change
• Suspended when OFF (Related special M all OFF)
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
Step trace execution OFF : Suspend • Goes ON when step trace execution is underway
SM822 S (Status change) M9181
underway ON : Start • Goes OFF at completion or suspension
QnA
• Goes ON if even 1 block within the step trace being
OFF : Not after trigger
SM823 After step trace trigger executed is triggered. S (Status change) New
ON : Is after first trigger
• Goes OFF when step trace is commenced.
• Goes ON if all blocks within the step trace being
SM824 After Step trace trigger
OFF : Is not after all triggers
ON : Is after all triggers
executed are triggered.
• Goes OFF when step trace is commenced.
S (Status change) New 11
OFF : Not completed • Goes ON at step trace completion.
MAINTENANCE AND
SM825 Step trace completed S (Status change) M9180
ON : End • Goes OFF when step trace is commenced.
Qn(H)
INSPECTION
QnPH
Trace error • Switches ON if error occurs during execution of trace S (Status change) New
OFF : Normal QnPRH
SM826 QnU
ON : Errors
• Goes ON if error occurs during execution of sampling
Sampling trace error S (Status change) New
trace.
SM827 Status latch error

OFF : Normal
ON : Errors
• Goes ON if error occurs during execution of status
latch.
S (Status change) New QnA 12
OFF : Normal • Goes ON if error occurs during execution of program
TROUBLESHOOTING
SM828 Program trace error S (Status change) New
ON : Errors trace.
• Even when the trace condition or the trigger
ON : Forced registration
Forced registration condition is established, the sampling trace setting
enabled
SM829 specification of trace can be set to the QnUCPU by turning SM829 ON U New QnU
OFF : Forced registration
setting and registering the sampling trace setting by GX
disabled
Developer.
(9) Latch area

Corres-
ponding
APPENDICES
Set by Corresponding
(When Set) ACPU CPU
M9
OFF : No power off file • Goes ON if a file is present during access when S (Status
SM900 Power off file New
ON : Power off file present power is interrupted. change)/U
OFF : Keyboard input QnA
notregistered • Goes ON at registration of keyboard input. S (Instruction
SM910 RKEY registration flag New
ON : Keyboard input • OFF if keyboard input is not registered. execution)
registered
INDEX

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(10)A to Q/QnA conversion correspondences

Special relays SM1000 to SM1255 are the relays which correspond to ACPU special
relays M9000 to M9255 after A to Q/QnA conversion.
(However, the Basic model QCPU, Redundant CPU, and Universal model QCPU do
not support the A to Q/QnA conversion.)
These special relays are all set by the system, and cannot be set by the user
program.
To turn them ON/OFF by the user program, change the special relays in the program
into those of QCPU/QnACPU.
However, some of SM1084 and SM1200 to SM1255 (corresponding to M9084 and
M9200 to M9255 before conversion) can be turned ON/OFF by the user program, if
they could be turned ON/OFF by the user program before conversion.For details on
the ACPU special relays, see the user's manuals for the individual CPUs, and
MELSECNET or MELSECNET/B Data Link System Reference Manuals
POINT
The processing time may be longer when converted special relays are used with
the High Performance model QCPU and Process CPU. Uncheck "Compatibility
with A-PLC" within the PLC system setting in GX Developer parameters when
converted special relays are not used.
The following are additional explanations about the Special Relay for Modification
column.
When a special relay for modification is provided, the device number should
be changed to the provided QCPU/QnACPU special relay.
When is provided, the converted special relay can be used for the device
number.
When is provided, the device number does not work with QCPU/
QnACPU.
ACPU Special Special

Corresponding
Special Relay after Relay for Name Meaning Details
CPU
Relay Conversion Modification
• Turned on when there is one or more output modules of
which fuse has been blown.
OFF : Normal
M9000 SM1000 – Fuse blown ON : Module with blown
thereafter.
fuse
• Output modules of remote I/O stations are also checked
fore fuse condition.
QnA
• Turned on if the status of I/O module is different form Qn(H)
entered status when power is turned on. QnPH
I/O module verify OFF : Normal thereafter.
M9002 SM1002 –
error ON : Error • I/O module verification is done also to remote I/O station
modules.
• Reset is enabled only when special registers SD1116 to
SD1123 are reset.
• Goes ON if MINI (S3) link error is detected at even one of
NIMI link master OFF : Normal the installed AJ71PT32 (S3) modules.
M9004 SM1004 – QnA
module error ON : Error • Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal
thereafter.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
EMC AND LOW

Corresponding
DIRECTIVES
CPU
VOLTAGE
• Turns ON if an instantaneous power failure of within 20ms QnA
occurs during use of the AC power supply module. Qn(H)
• Reset when the power supply is switched OFF, then ON. QnPH
M9005 SM1005 –
AC DOWN
OFF : AC DOWN not
detected
• Turns ON if an instantaneous power failure of within 10ms
occurs during use of the DC power supply module.
Qn(H) 10
detection QnPH
ON : AC DOWN detected • Reset when the power supply is switched OFF, then ON.
• Turns ON if an instantaneous power failure of within 1ms
occurs during use of the DC power supply module. QnA
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
• Reset when the power supply is switched OFF, then ON.
• Turns ON when the battery voltage drops to or below the
OFF : Normal specified.
M9006 SM1006 – Battery low
ON : Battery low • Turns OFF when the battery voltage returns to normal
thereafter.
M9007 SM1007 – Battery low latch

OFF : Normal
• Turns ON when the battery voltage drops to or below the
specified. 11
ON : Battery low • Remains ON if the battery voltage returns to normal
thereafter.
MAINTENANCE AND
Self-diagnosis OFF : No error • Turned on when error is found as a result of self-
M9008 SM1008 SM1
error ON : Error diagnosis.
INSPECTION
• Turned on when OUT F of SET F instruction is
Annunciator OFF : No F number detected
M9009 SM1009 SM62 executed.
detection ON : F number detected
• Switched off when SD1124 data is cleared to zero.
• Turned on when operation error occurs during execution
Operation error OFF : No error of application instruction.
M9011 SM1011 SM56
flag ON : Error • Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal
thereafter.
12
OFF : Carry OFF
TROUBLESHOOTING
M9012 SM1012 SM700 Carry flag • Carry flag used in application instruction.
ON : Carry ON
• Clears the data memory including the latch range (other QnA
Data memory clear OFF : lgnored Qn(H)
M9016 SM1016 than special relays and special registers) in remote run
flag ON : Output claered QnPH
mode from computer, etc. when SM1016 is on.
• Clears the unlatched data memory (other than special
Data memory clear OFF : lgnored
M9017 SM1017 relays and special registers) in remote run mode from
flag ON : Output claered
computer, etc. when SM1017 is on.
User timing clock
M9020 SM1020 –
No.0 • Relay which repeats on/off at intervals of predetermined
User timing clock scan.
M9021 SM1021 – • When power is turned on or reset is per-formed, the clock
No.1
n2 scan n2 scan starts with off.
User timing clock
M9022 SM1022 – Set the intervals of on/off by DUTY instruction.
APPENDICES
No.2
n1 scan
User timing clock DUTY n1 n2 SM1020
M9023 SM1023 –
No.3 n1: ON scan interval
User timing clock n2: OFF scan interval
M9024 SM1024 –
No.4
OFF : Ignored • Writes the clock data stored in SD1025 to SD1028 to the
Clock data set
M9025 SM1025 – ON : Set request present CPU module after the END instruction is executed in the
request
used scan in which SM1025 turned from OFF to ON.
OFF : No error
M9026 SM1026 – Clock data error • Switched on by clock data (SD1025 to SD1028) error
ON : Error
• Clock data is read from SD1025 to SD1028 and month, Q3A
OFF : Ignored
M9027 SM1027 – Clock data display day, hour, minute and minute are indicated on the CPU Q4A
ON : Display
module front LED display. Q4AR
INDEX
Clock data read OFF : Ignored • Reads clock data to SD1025 to SD1028 in BCD when
M9028 SM1028 –
request ON : Read request SD1028 is on.
• The SM1029 relay is turned on using a sequence program
to process all data communication requests accepted
Batch processing OFF : Batch processing not during one scan in the END processing of that scan.
of data conducted • The batch processing of the data communication requests
M9029 SM1029
communications ON : Batch processing can be turned on and off during running.
requests conducted • The default is OFF (processed one at a time for each END
processing in the order in which data communication
requests are accepted). QnA
Qn(H)
M9030 SM1030 – 0.1 second clock 0.05s
0.05s QnPH
• 0.1 second, 0.2 second, 1 second and 2 second, clocks

M9031 SM1031 – 0.2 second clock 0.1s are generated.
0.1s
• Not turned on or off per scan but turned on and off even
during scan if corresponding time has elapsed.
M9032 SM1032 – 1 second clock 0.5s
0.5s • Starts with off when Programmable Controller power
supply is turned on or CPU module reset is performed.
M9033 SM1033 – 2 second clock 1s

1s

12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Corresponding
CPU
• Alternates between ON and OFF according to the
seconds specified at SD414. (Default: n = 30)
2n minute clock(1 ns • Not turned on or off per scan but turned on and off even
M9034 SM1034 –
minute clock)* ns during scan if corresponding time has elapsed.
• Starts with off when Programmable Controller power
supply is turned on or CPU module reset is performed.
ON
M9036 SM1036 – Always ON
OFF • Used as dummy contacts of initialization and application
instruction in sequence program.
ON • SM1038 and SM1037 are turned on and off without regard
M9037 SM1037 – Always OFF to position of key switch on CPU module front. SM1038
OFF
and SM1039 are under the same condition as RUN status
except when the key switch is at STOP position, and
ON for 1 scan only ON turned off and on. Switched off if the key switch is in STOP
M9038 SM1038 – 1 scan
after RUN OFF position. SM1038 is on for one scan only and SM1039 is
off for one scan only if the key switch is not in STOP
RUN flag(After position.
ON
M9039 SM1039 – RUN, OFF for 1 1 scan
scan only) OFF
OFF : PAUSE disabled
M9040 SM1040 SM206 PAUSE enable coil • When RUN key switch is at PAUSE position or pause
ON : PAUSE enabled
contact has turned on and if SM204 is on, PAUSE mode is
PAUSE status OFF : PAUSE not in effect set and SM206 is turned on.
M9041 SM1041 SM204
contact ON : PAUSE in effect
STOP status OFF : STOP not in effect • Switched on when the RUN key switch or RUN/STOP
M9042 SM1042 SM203
contact ON : STOP in effect switch is in STOP position.
• Turned on upon completion of sampling trace performed
OFF : Sampling trace in
Sampling trace progress the number of times preset by parameter after STRA
M9043 SM1043 SM805
completed ON : Sampling trace instruction is executed.
completed QnA
Reset when STRAR instruction is executed.
Qn(H)
QnPH
• Turning on/off SM803 can execute STRA / STRAR
instruction.
OFF ON STRA Same as (SM803 is forcibly turned on/off by a peripheral device.)
execution When switched from OFF to ON: STRA instruction
M9044 SM1044 SM803 Sampling trace
ON OFF STRAR Same When switched from ON to OFF: STRAR instruction
as execution The value stored in SD1044 is used as the condition for
the sampling trace.
At scanning, at time Time (10 ms unit)
• The SM1015 relay is turned on to reset the WDT when the
Watchdog timer OFF : Does not reset WDT ZCOM instruction and data communication request batch
M9045 SM1045
(WDT) reset ON : Resets WDT processing are executed (used when the scan time
exceeds 200 ms).
OFF : Trace not in progress
M9046 SM1046 SM802 Sampling trace • Switched on during sampling trace.
ON : Trace in progress
OFF : Sampling trace • Sampling trace is not executed unless SM801 is turned
Sampling trace
M9047 SM1047 SM801 suspended ON.
preparations
ON : Sampling trace started Sampling trace is suspended when SM801 goes OFF.
• When SM701 is OFF, characters up to NULL (00H) code
Switching the OFF : Output until NULL
are output.
M9049 SM1049 SM701 number of output code encountered
• When SM701 is ON, ASCII codes of 16 characters are
characters ON : 16 characters output
output.
• Switched ON to disable the CHG instruction.
CHG instruction OFF : Enabled
M9051 SM1051 • Switched ON when program transfer is requested.
execution disable ON : Disable
Automatically switched OFF when transfer is complete.
• When SM1052 is ON, the SEG instruction is executed as
SEG instruction OFF : 7SEG segment display an I/O partial refresh instruction.
M9052 SM1052
switch ON : I/O partial refresh When SM1052 is OFF, the SEG instruction is executed as
a 7-SEG display instruction.
OFF : STEP RUN not in
• Switched on when the RUN key switch is in STEP RUN
M9054 SM1054 SM205 STEP RUN flag effect
position.
ON : STEP RUN in effect QnA
Status latch OFF : Not completed • Turned on when status latch is completed.
M9055 SM1055 SM808
completion flag ON : Completed • Turned off by reset instruction.
*: 1 minute clock indicates the name of the special relay (M9034) of the ACPU.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
EMC AND LOW

Corresponding
DIRECTIVES
CPU
VOLTAGE
OFF : Other than when P, I
Main side P, I set set being requested
M9056 SM1056
request ON : P, I set being • Provides P, I set request after transfer of the other
requested
program (for example subprogram when main program is
being run) is complete during run. Automatically switched
10
Sub side P, I set set being requested off when P, I setting is complete.
M9057 SM1057
request ON : P, I set being
requested
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
Main side P, I set Momentarily ON at P, I set
M9058 SM1058 QnA
completion completion • Turned ON once when the P, I set has been completed,
Qn(H)
Sub program P, I Momentarily ON at P, I set and then turned OFF again.
M9059 SM1059 QnPH
set completion completion
M9060 SM1060
Sub program 2 P, I
set request
set being requested
ON : P, I set being • Provides P, I set request after transfer of the other
11
requested program (for example subprogram when main program is
OFF : Other than when P, I being run) is complete during run. Automatically switched
MAINTENANCE AND
Sub program 3 P, I set being requested off when P, I setting is complete.
M9061 SM1061
set request ON : P, I set being
INSPECTION
requested
OFF : Divided processing not
• Turned on when canvas screen transfer to AD57(S1)/
Divided transfer underway
M9065 SM1065 SM711 AD58 is done by divided processing, and turned off at
status ON : During divided
completion of divided processing QnA
processing
M9066 SM1066 SM712

Transfer
processing switch
OFF : Batch transfer
ON : Divided transfer
• Turned on when canvas screen transfer to AD57(S1)/
AD58 is done by divided processing.
12
A8UPU/ OFF : Read time not • Turned ON to shorten the search time in the A8UPU/ QnA
TROUBLESHOOTING
M9070 SM1070 A8PUJrequired shortened A8PUJ. Qn(H)
search time* ON : Read time shortened (In this case, the scan time is extended by 10 %.) QnPH
OFF : Empty spaces in
communication
Communication request registration
• Indication of communication enable/disable to remote
request area
M9081 SM1081 SM714 terminal modules connected to the AJ71PT32-S3, A2C or QnA
registration area ON : No empty spaces in
A52G.
BUSY signal communication
request registration
area
It is set whether the error checks below are performed or not
when the END instruction is processed (to set the END
OFF : Error check executed instruction processing time).
M9084 SM1084 Error check
APPENDICES
ON : No error check • Check for fuse blown.
• Check of battery QnA
• Collation check of I/O module Qn(H)
QnPH
• Turns ON when the detail factor of the operation error is
Operation error OFF : No error stored into SD1091.
M9091 SM1091
details flag ON : Error • Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal
thereafter.
• The I/O module can be changed online (with power on)
when SM251 is turned ON after the head I/O number of
the I/O module is set to SD251. (One module only is
allowed to be changed by one setting.)
OFF : Exchanged • To be switched on in the program or peripheral device test
M9094 SM1094 SM251 I/O exchange flag QnA
ON : Not exchanged mode to change the module during CPU RUN. To be
switched on in peripheral device test mode to change the
INDEX
module during CPU STOP.

• RUN/STOP mode must not be changed until I/O module
change is complete.
OFF : SFC programs not
Presence/absence • Turned on if the SFC program is registered.
M9100 SM1100 SM320 used
of SFC program • Turned off if the SFC program is not registered.
ON : SFC programs used
• The value in SM320 is set as the initial value.
(The relay automatically turns ON when the SFC program
is present.)
Start/stop SFC OFF : SFC programs stop QnA
M9101 SM1101 SM321 • When this relay turns from ON to OFF, execution of the
program ON : SFC programs start Qn(H)
SFC program stops.
QnPH
• When this relay turns from OFF to ON, execution of the
SFC program resumes.
• The SFC program start mode in the SFC setting of the
SFC program start OFF : Initial start PLC parameter dialog box is set as the initial value.
M9102 SM1102 SM322
status ON : Resume start At initial start: OFF
At continue start: ON
*: The A8UPU/A8PUJ is not available for the QCPU/QnACPU.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Corresponding
CPU
OFF : Continuous transition
Presence/absence • Set whether continuous transition will be performed for the
not effective
M9103 SM1103 SM323 of continuous block where the "continuous transition bit" of the SFC
ON : Continuous transition
transition information device is not set.
effective
• OFF during operation in the continuous transition mode or
Continuous OFF : When transition is during continuous transition, and ON when continuous
M9104 SM1104 SM324 transition completed transition is not executed.
suspension flag ON : When no transition • Always ON during operation in the no continuous
transition mode.
Step transition
monitoring timer
M9108 SM1108 SM90
start (equivalent of
SD90)
Step transition
monitoring timer
M9109 SM1109 SM91
SD91)
Step transition QnA
monitoring timer Qn(H)
M9110 SM1110 SM92
start (equivalent of QnPH
SD92)
Step transition • Turns ON when the measurement of the step transition
OFF : Monitoring timer reset
monitoring timer monitoring timer is started.
M9111 SM1111 SM93 ON : Monitoring timer reset
start (equivalent of Turning this relay OFF resets the step transition
start
SD93) monitoring timer.
Step transition
monitoring timer
M9112 SM1112 SM94
SD94)
Step transition
monitoring timer
M9113 SM1113 SM95
SD95)
Step transition
monitoring timer
M9114 SM1114 SM96
SD96)
Active step
OFF : Trace started • Set when sampling trace of all specified blocks is
M9180 SM1180 SM825 sampling trace
ON : Trace completed completed. Reset when sampling trace is started.
completion flag
OFF : Trace not being
Active step
executed • Set when sampling trace is being executed.Reset when
M9181 SM1181 SM822 sampling trace
ON : Trace execution under sampling trace is completed or suspended
execution flag QnA
way
• Selects sampling trace execution enable/disable.
Active step ON : Sampling trace execution is enabled.
OFF : Trace disable/suspend
M9182 SM1182 SM821 sampling trace OFF : Sampling trace execution is disabled. If turned off
ON : Trace enable
permission during sampling trace execution, trace is
suspended.
• Selects the operation output when block stop is executed.
ON : Retains the ON/OFF status of the coil being used
by using operation output of the step being
Operation output OFF : Coil output OFF
M9196 SM1196 SM325 executed at block stop.
at block stop ON : Coil output ON
OFF : All coil outputs are turned off. (Operation output
by the SET instruction is retained regardless of
the ON/OFF status of M9196.)
I/O numbers
SM SM
to be
1197 1198
displayed
M9197 SM1197 QnA
OFF OFF X/Y0 to 7F0 Switches I/O numbers in the fuse blow module storage Qn(H)
Switch between
X/Y800 to registers (SD1100 to SD1107) and I/O module verify error QnPH
blown fuse and I/O ON OFF
FF0 storage registers (SD1116 to SD1123) according to the
verify error display
X/Y1000 to combination of ON/OFF of the SM1197 and SM1198.
OFF ON
17F0
M9198 SM1198
X/Y1800 to
ON ON
1FF0
• Recovers the setting data stored in the CPU module at
Data recovery of
OFF : Data recovery disabled restart when sampling trace/status latch is executed.
M9199 SM1199 online sampling
ON : Data recovery enabled • SM1199 should be ON to execute again. (Unnecessary
trace/status latch
when writing the data again from peripheral devices.)

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
EMC AND LOW

Corresponding
DIRECTIVES
CPU
VOLTAGE
ZNRD instruction • Depends on whether or not the ZNRD (word device read)
(LRDP instruction instruction has been received.
OFF : Not accepted
M9200 SM1200 – for ACPU) • Used in the program as an interlock for the ZNRD
10
ON : Accepted
reception (for instruction.
master station) • Use the RST instruction to reset.
ZNRD instruction • Depends on whether or not the ZNRD (word device read)
(LRDP instruction instruction execution is complete.
OFF : Not completed
M9201 SM1201 – for ACPU) • Used as a condition contact for resetting M9200 and
ON : End
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
completion (for M9201 after the ZNRD instruction is complete.
ZNWR instruction • Depends on whether or not the ZNWR (word device
(LWTP instruction write) instruction has been received.
OFF : Not accepted
M9202 SM1202 – for ACPU) • Used in the program as an interlock for the ZNWR
ON : Accepted
reception (for instruction.
master station)
ZNWR instruction
• Use the RST instruction to reset.
• Depends on whether or not the ZNWR (word device
11
(LWTP instruction write) instruction execution is complete.
OFF : Not completed
MAINTENANCE AND
M9203 SM1203 – for ACPU) • Used as a condition contact to reset M9202 and M9203
ON : End
completion (for after the ZNWR instruction is complete.
INSPECTION
ZNRD instruction
(LRDP instruction
OFF : Not completed • On indicates that the ZNRD instruction is complete at the
M9204 SM1204 – for ACPU)
ON : End local station.
reception (for local
station)
ZNWR instruction 12
(LWTP instruction
OFF : Not completed • On indicates that the ZNWR instruction is complete at the
M9205 SM1205 – for ACPU) recep-
TROUBLESHOOTING
ON : End local station.
tion (for local
station)
Host station link OFF : Normal • Depends on whether or not the link parameter setting of
M9206 SM1206 –
parameter error ON : Abnormal the host is valid.
• Depends on whether or not the link parameter setting of
Link parameter OFF : Match the master station in tier two matches that of the master
M9207 SM1207 –
check results ON : Mismatch station in tier three in a three-tier system.
(Valid for only the master station in a three-tier system.)
• Depends on whether or not the B and W data controlled QnA
Sets master
by higher-link master station (host station) is sent to lower-
station B and W
OFF : Transmits to tier2 and link local stations (tertiary stations).
transmission range
M9208 SM1208 – tier 3 When SM1208 is OFF............ B and W of host station is
(for lower link
ON : Transmits to tier2 only sent to tertiary stations.
APPENDICES
master stations
When SM1208 is ON ............. B and W of host station is
only)
not sent to tertiary stations.
• Set to ON not to match B and W of the higher and lower
Link parameter
links.
check command OFF : Executing the check
• When SM1209 is ON, the link parameters of the higher
M9209 SM1209 – (for lower link function
and lower link are not checked.
master stations ON : Check non-execution
• When SM1209 is OFF, the link parameters of the higher
only)
and lower link are checked.
Link card error (for OFF : Normal Control is performed depending on whether the link card
M9210 SM1210 –
master station) ON : Abnormal hardware is faulty or not.
Link module error
OFF : Normal Control is performed depending on whether the link card
M9211 SM1211 – (for local station
ON : Abnormal hardware is faulty or not.
use)
INDEX
OFF : Online
ON : Offline,station-to- Depends on whether the master station is online or offline or
M9224 SM1224 – Link status
station test, or self- is in station-to-station test or self-loopback test mode.
loopback test
OFF : Normal
M9225 SM1225 – Forward loop error Depends on the error condition of the forward loop line.
ON : Abnormal
OFF : Normal
M9226 SM1226 – Reverse loop error Depends on the error condition of the reverse loop line.
ON : Abnormal
OFF : Not being executed
ON : Forward or reverse Depends on whether or not the master station is executing a
M9227 SM1227 – Loop test status
loop test execution forward or a reverse loop test.
underway
OFF : RUN or STEP RUN
Local station status Control is performed depending on whether a local station is
M9232 SM1232 –
operation status ON : STOP or PAUSE in the STOP or PAUSE mode.
status
Local station error OFF : No errors Depends on whether or not a local station has detected an
M9233 SM1233 –
detect status ON : Error detection error in another station.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Corresponding
CPU
Local station,
remote I/O station OFF : No errors Depends on whether or not a local or a remote I/O station
M9235 SM1235 –
parameter error ON : Error detection has detected any link parameter error in the master station
detect status
Local station,
remote I/O station OFF : No communications Depends on the results of initial communication between a
M9236 SM1236 – initial ON : Communications local or remote I/O station and the master station.
communications underway (Parameter communication, etc.)
status
Local station,
OFF : Normal Depends on the error condition of a local or remote I/O
M9237 SM1237 – remote I/O station
ON : Abnormal station.
error
Local station,
remote I/O station OFF : Normal Depends on the error condition of the forward and reverse
M9238 SM1238 –
forward or reverse ON : Abnormal loop lines of a local or a remote I/O station.
loop error
OFF : Online
ON : Offline, station-to- Depends on whether the local station is online or offline, or is
M9240 SM1240 – Link status
stationtest, or self- in station-to-station test or self-loopback test mode.
loopback test
Forward loop line OFF : Normal
M9241 SM1241 – Depends on the error condition of the forward loop line.
error ON : Abnormal
Reverse loop line OFF : Normal
M9242 SM1242 – Depends on the error condition of the reverse loop line.
error ON : Abnormal
OFF : Loopback not being
Loopback conducted Depends on whether or not loopback is occurring at the local QnA
M9243 SM1243 –
implementation ON : Loopback station.
implementation
OFF : Reception Depends on whether or not data has been received from the
M9246 SM1246 – Data not received
ON : No reception master station.
OFF : Reception Depends on whether or not a tier three station has received
M9247 SM1247 – Data not received
ON : No reception data from its master station in a three-tier system.
Parameters not OFF : Reception Depends on whether or not link parameters have been
M9250 SM1250 –
received ON : No reception received from the master station.
OFF : Normal
M9251 SM1251 – Link relay Depands on the data link condition at the local station.
ON : Abnormal
OFF : Not being executed
ON : Forward or reverse Depends on whether or not the local station is executing a
M9252 SM1252 – Loop test status
loop test execution forward or a reverse loop test.
underway
Master station status Control is performed depending on whether the master
M9253 SM1253 –
operation status ON : STOP or PAUSE station is in the STOP or PAUSE mode.
status
Local station other
status Control is performed depending on whether a local station
M9254 SM1254 – than host station
ON : STOP or PAUSE other than the host is in the STOP or PAUSE mode.
operation status
status
Local station other
OFF : Normal Depends on whether or not a local station other than the host
M9255 SM1255 – than host station
ON : Abnormal is in error.
error
(11)QCPU with built-in Ethernet port

Corres-
(When Set) ACPU CPU
M9
OFF: No time setting function Set this to ON when executing the time setting function
Time setting function
(SNTP client) execution (SNTP client).
SM1270 (SNTP U New
ON: Time setting function (Only when the time setting function is in "Use" with the
client)execution
(SNTP client) execution time setting parameter.) QnU*1
To clear the acumulated numeber (SD979~999) of
Remote password OFF: Not clear
SM1273 mismatched remote passwords, the setting SM1273 is U New
mismatch count clear ON: Clear
executed.
* 1: This applies to the QnUDE(H)CPU.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(12)Process control instructions
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
Corres-
(When Set) ACPU
M9
CPU
10
• Specifies whether or not to hold the output value
OFF : No-hold
SM1500 Hold mode when a range over occurs for the S.IN instruction U New
ON : Hold Q4AR
range check.
QnPH
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
• Specifies whether or not the output value is held QnPRH
OFF : No-hold
SM1501 Hold mode when a range over occurs for the S.OUT instruction U New
ON : Hold
range check.
(13)For redundant systems (Host system CPU information *1)

11
SM1510 to SM1599 are only valid for redundant systems.
MAINTENANCE AND
All off for standalone systems.
INSPECTION
Corres-
(When Set) ACPU CPU
OFF : Redundant system

M9
12
backup mode, stand-
TROUBLESHOOTING
• Turns on when the operating mode is redundant Q4AR
SM1510 Operation mode alone system S (Each END) New
system separate. QnPRH
ON : Redundant system
separate mode
OFF : System A fixed mode • Turns on when the start mode for a redundant
Start mode when
SM1511 ON : Previous control system when the power is turned on is the previous S (Initial) New
power supply is on
system latch mode control system latch mode. Q4AR
Start mode when CPU OFF : Initial start • Turns on when the CPU module operation mode is
SM1512 S (Initial) New
is started ON : Hot start hot start when the redundant system is started up.
• Distinguishes between system A and system B.
System A identification • The flag status does not change even if the tracking cable is disconnected.
SM1511
flag
When TRK. CABLE ERR.
System A System B (error code: 6210) occurs (Unknown) S (Initial) New QnPRH
APPENDICES
System B identification SM1511 ON OFF OFF
SM1512
flag
SM1512 OFF ON OFF
• Turns on when the CPU module operation mode is

Operation status when OFF : Initial start
hot start when the redundant system is actually start S (Initial) New Q4AR
CPU is started ON : Hot start
SM1513 up.
Debug mode status OFF : Not in debug mode • Turns on when the redundant system operating
S (Initial) New QnPRH
flag ON : Debug mode mode is set to debug mode.
• Turns on when the operation is hot start when the
Operation mode at OFF : Initial start
SM1514 CPU module operation is switched for a redundant S (Initial) New
CPU module change ON : Hot start
system.
OFF : Output reset • Turns on when the output mode during a stop error is Q4AR
SM1515 Output hold mode S (Each END) New
ON : Output hold output hold.
INDEX
Operation system OFF : Control system • Turns on when the CPU module operation system
status ON : Standby system status is the standby system.
• Indicates operation system status.
Control system • The flag status does not change even if the tracking cable is disconnected.
SM1515
judgment flag
Control Standby When TRK. CABLE ERR.
system system (error code: 6210) occurs (Unknown) S (Status change) New QnPRH
Standby system SM1515 ON OFF OFF
SM1516
judgment flag
SM1516 OFF ON OFF
*1: The information of the host CPU module is stored.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Corres-
(When Set) ACPU CPU
M9
• Turns on when the CPU module is started up by the
S (Status
operation system switch. New Q4AR
change)/U
OFF : Power supply on • Reset using the user program.
CPU module startup startup • Turns on when the CPU module is started up by the
SM1517
status ON : Operation system system switching (switching from the standby system
switch start up to the control system). Remains OFF when the S (Status change) New QnPRH
standby system is switched to the control system by
a power-ON startup.
• When this relay is turned OFF, the start of tracking is
delayed until it is executable if the tracking memory
Tracking execution OFF : Batch transfer mode is being used at END.
U New Q4AR
mode ON : Carryover mode • When this relay is turned ON, the start of tracking is
carried over to next END if the tracking memory is
SM1518 being used at END.
• Turns ON once switch between standby system to
Standby system to
ON control system, (ON for 1 scan only) occurs.
control system 1 scan S (Each END) New
OFF • This status flag can only be used for scan execution
switching status flag
type programs.
QnPRH
• On the last operation Control System was System
Previous Control
ON B,if power supply is supplied, or reset is released on
SM1519 System Identification 1 scan S (Each END) New
OFF both SYSTEM together,After RUN, ON for 1 scan
Flag
only by System A side.
SM1520 SM1520 Block 1
SM1525 SM1525 Block 6 <In the case of Q4AR>
SM1526 SM1526 Block 7 • When data is transferred
SM1527 SM1527 Block 8 by the data tracking
instruction S. TRUCK, the
target block is specified
SM1529 SM1529 Block 10 as trigger.
<In the case of QnPRH>
• When data is transferred
SM1532 SM1532 Block 13 <In the case of
based on the tracking Q4AR>
SM1533 SM1533 Block 14 setting of the redundant U
Data tracking transfer OFF : No trigger parameter dialog box, the Q4AR
SM1534 SM1534 Block 15 New
trigger specification ON : Trigger target block is specified QnPRH
SM1535 SM1535 Block 16 <In the case of
as trigger. QnPRH>
S (initial)/U
SM1537 SM1537 Block 18 • When "Auto Tracking
block No.1" is enabled in
the tracking setting,
SM1539 SM1539 Block 20 SM1520 is turned ON by
SM1540 SM1540 Block 21 the system at power ON/
STOP to RUN. In other
cases, SM1520 to
SM1542 SM1542 Block 23 SM1583 are turned ON
SM1543 SM1543 Block 24 by the user.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Corres-
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
(When Set) ACPU CPU
M9
SM1550
SM1551
SM1550
SM1551
Block 31
Block 32
10
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
<In the case of Q4AR>
SM1558 SM1558 Block 39 When data is transferred by
SM1559 SM1559 Block 40 the data tracking instruction
S. TRUCK, the target block
11
is specified as trigger.
MAINTENANCE AND
SM1562 SM1562 Block 43 <In the case of QnPRH>
SM1563 SM1563 Block 44 • When data is transferred
INSPECTION
based on the tracking <In the case of
setting of the redundant Q4AR>
SM1565 SM1565 Block 46 parameter dialog box, the U
Data tracking transfer OFF : No trigger Q4AR
SM1566 SM1566 Block 47 target block is specified New
trigger specification ON : Trigger QnPRH
as trigger. <In the case of
• When "Auto tracking
QnPRH>
S (initial)/U
12
SM1569 SM1569 Block 50 block No. 1" is enabled in
TROUBLESHOOTING
SM1570 SM1570 Block 51 the tracking setting,
SM1520 is turned ON by
the system at power ON/
SM1572 SM1572 Block 53 STOP to RUN. In other
SM1573 SM1573 Block 54 cases, SM1520 to
SM1583 are turned ON
by the user.
APPENDICES
• Turns ON when switching could not be executed
OFF : Normal
Switching status from normally if the network module had detected a
ON : Switching S (Error ocurrs) Q4AR
the network module network fault and issued a switching request to the
unsuccessful
host CPU module.
SM1590 OFF : System switching New

request issuing module • Turns ON when a system switching request is issued
System switching
absent from the network module. The module No. that
enable/disable flag S (Each END)
ON : System switching issued system switching can be checked by SD1590.
from network module
request issuing module • Turns OFF when all bits of SD1590 are OFF.
present
INDEX
ON : Error is not detected by This flag is used to determine if the new standby station
new standby system at detects 6210:STANDBY during system switching.
Standby system error QnPRH
system switching This applies to the following switching methods:
SM1591 detection disable flag U New
OFF : Error is detected by • System switching from GX Developer
at system switching
new standby system at • System switching using dedicated instruction
system switching • System switching by the intelligent function module
OFF : Disable user system
• This flag enables system switching by the user from
Enable/disable user switching
SM1592 GX Developer or by dedicated instruction. U New
system switching ON : Enable user system
(SP.CONTSW).
switching

12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Corres-
(When Set) ACPU CPU
M9
Sets the operation for the case accessing buffer
memory of the intelligent function module mounted on
the extension base unit from the standby system CPU
in separate mode.
OFF : “OPERATION ERROR” (error code: 4112) will be
Setting to access
OFF : Error returned when accessing buffer memory of the
SM1593 extension base unit of QnPRH*2
ON : Ignored intelligent function module on the extension base
standby system CPU
unit from the standby system CPU.
ON : No processing is performed when accessing
buffer memory of intelligent function module on U
the extension base unit from the standby system New
CPU.
• When SM1595 is turned from OFF to ON, memory
copy from control system to standby system starts.
OFF : Start memory copy
Memory copy to other Note that when SM1595 is turned from OFF to ON,
SM1595 ON : No memory copy
system start flag memory copy does not start if the I/O No. of the copy
initiated
destination (standby system CPU module: 3D1H) is QnPRH
not stored in SD1595.
OFF : Memory copy not • Turns on while memory is copied to other system.
Memory copy to other S (Starting to
SM1596 executed • Turns off when memory copy execution has
system status flag copy/finish)
ON : Memory copy executed completed.
OFF : Memory copy not
Memory copy to other
completed • Turns on once the memory copying to the other
SM1597 system completion S (finish)/U
ON : Memory copy system has completed.
flag
completed
New QnPRH
OFF : Copy standard ROM
Copy contents of • If set to on by user, the standard ROM data is not
data
SM1598 standard ROM during copied to the other system while memory copy is U
ON : Standard ROM data is
memory copy executing.
not copied
(14)For redundant system (Other system CPU information *1)

SM1600 to SM1650 only valid for the CPU redundant system backup mode, so they
cannot be refreshed during the separate mode.
Either the backup mode or the separate mode is valid for the SM4651 to SM1699.
SM1600 to SM1699 are all turned off for stand-alone system.
Corresp
onding
Number Name Meaning Explanation Host
(When Set) CPU
SM
*2
• Turns on if a error occurs in the diagnosis results.
OFF : No error
Diagnosis error (Including external diagnosis) S (Each END) SM0 Q4AR
ON : Error
• Remains on even if returns to normal thereafter.
SM1600
• Turns on when an error occurs during redundant
Other system error OFF : No error
system. Error check (Turns on single bit of SD1600.) S (Each END) – QnPRH
flag ON : Error
• Is off when no errors are present
• Turns on when an error occurs in the self-diagnosis
OFF : No self diagnosis error
SM1601 Self diagnosis error results. S (Each END) SM1
ON : Self diagnosis error
• Remains on even if returns to normal thereafter.
OFF : No error common Q4AR
Error common information • Turns on when there is error common information
SM1605 S (Each END) SM5
information ON : Error common and the SM1600 is on.
information
*1 Stores other system CPU diagnostic information and system information.

*2 This shows the special relay(SM ) for the host system CPU.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
EMC AND LOW

Corresp
DIRECTIVES
onding
VOLTAGE
Number Name Meaning Explanation Host
(When Set) CPU
SM
*2
Other system OFF : No error

• Turns on when a diagnostics error occurs. (Includes
error detection when annunciator is ON, and by CHK
10
SM1610 S (Each END) SM0
diagnostics error ON : Error instruction)
• Corresponds to status of SM0 at other system
OFF : No self diagnostics • Turns on when a self diagnostics error occurs.
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
Other systems self error occurred (Does not include error detection when annunciator
SM1611 S (Each END) SM1 QnPRH
diagnostics error. ON : Self diagnostics error is ON, and by CHK instruction)
occurred • Corresponds to status of SM1 at other system
OFF : No common error
• Turns on when there is common error information at
Other system common information present
SM1615 other system S (Each END) SM5
11
error information ON : Common error
• Corresponds to status of SM5 at other system
information present
OFF : No error individual
Error individual information • Turns on when there is error individual information
MAINTENANCE AND
SM1616 S (Each END) SM16 Q4AR
information ON : Error individual and the SM1600 is on.
information
INSPECTION
OFF : No individual error
Error individual • Turns on when there is individual error information at
information present
SM1626 information for other other system S (Each END) SM16
ON : Individual error
systems • Corresponds to status of SM16 at other system
information present
By turning this relay from OFF to ON, the continue error QnPRH
SM1649
Standby system
cancel error flag
OFF to ON:
Cancels error of standby
that occurred in the standby system CPU module can
be canceled. U – 12
system Use SD1649 to specify the error code of the error to be
TROUBLESHOOTING
canceled.
SM1653 STOP contact STOP status • Turns on when in the STOP status. S (Each END) SM203
SM1654 PAUSE contact PAUSE status • Turns on when in the PAUSE status. S (Each END) SM204 Q4AR
SM1655 STEP-RUN contact STEP-RUN status • Turns on when in the STEP-RUN status. S (Each END) SM205
*2 This shows the special relay(SM ) for the host system CPU.
APPENDICES
INDEX

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(15)For redundant system (Tracking)

Either the backup mode or the separate mode is valid for SM1700 to SM1799.
All is turned off for stand-alone system.
Corres-
(When Set) ACPU CPU
M9
Tracking execution OFF : Execution not possible
• Turns on when tracking can be normally executed. S (status change) New Q4AR
flag ON : Execution possible
SM1700
Transfer trigger OFF : Transfer not completed • Turns on for one scan, once transfer of block 1 to
S (status change)
completion flag ON : Transfer completed block 64 is completed.
(1) Turning this relay from OFF to ON enables
manual system switching during online program
change redundant tracking.
After the manual system switching disable status
is canceled, the system automatically turns off
SM1709.
Manual system (2) System switching due to any of the following
ON : Manual system
switching disable/ conditions is executed even during online
switching enabled
enable setting during program change redundant tracking, regardless of S (When
SM1709 (Disable canceled)
online program the status of this relay. executed)/U
OFF : Manual system
change redundant •Power off, reset, hardware failure, CPU stop error
switching disabled
tracking (3) In either of the following statuses, the system
switching disable status can also be canceled by
this relay.
•Multiple-block online program change redundant
tracking execution status New QnPRH
•File batch online program change redundant
tracking execution status
(1) Set whether the tracking of the following data will
be executed or not during online program change
redundant tracking.
•Device memory
(Including SM/SD that will automatically execute
tracking)
Transfer tracking data OFF : No device tracking •PIDINIT information, S.PIDINIT information, SFC
SM1710 during online program ON : Transfer device information U
change enable flag memory (2) SM1710 can be also used to set whether tracking
will be executed or not while online change of
multiple program blocks or batch of files is being
performed to ensure consistency of both systems.
(3) This SM is also transferred form control system
CPU module to standby system CPU module by
tracking data.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Corres-
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
(When Set) ACPU CPU
M9
SM1713
SM1714
SM1713
SM1714
Block 2
Block 3
10
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
SM1722 SM1722 Block 11 11
MAINTENANCE AND
INSPECTION
<In the case of Q4AR>
12
Turns ON only during one
TROUBLESHOOTING
SM1733 SM1733 Block 22 scan when the transmission
SM1734 SM1734 Block 23 of the corresponding data is
SM1735 SM1735 Block 24 completed.
Transfer trigger OFF : Transfer uncompleted Q4AR
S (status change) New
SM1736 completion flag ON : Transfer completed SM1736 Block 25 QnPRH
<In the case of QnPRH>
SM1737 SM1737 Block 26 Turns ON only during one
of the corresponding block is
completed.
APPENDICES
INDEX


12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Corres-
(When Set) ACPU CPU
M9
SM1763 SM1763 Block 52 <In the case of Q4AR>
SM1766 SM1766 Block 55 of the corresponding data is
OFF : Transmission completed.
SM1767 Transfer trigger SM1767 Block 56 Q4AR
uncompleted S (status change) New
SM1768 completion flag SM1768 Block 57 QnPRH
ON : Transmission end <In the case of QnPRH>
SM1771 SM1771 Block 60 of the corresponding block is
SM1772 SM1772 Block 61 completed.

(16)Redundant power supply module information

Corres-
(When Set) ACPU CPU
M9
• Turns ON when one or more redundant power
OFF : No redundant power
supply modules with input power OFF are detected.
supply module with
• Turns on if any of SD1780 bits is on.
input power OFF
• Turns off if all bits of SD1780 are off.
Power supply off detected
SM1780 • Turns OFF when the main base unit is not the S (Each END)
detection flag ON : Redundant power
redundant main base unit (Q38RB).
supply module with
0: communication with peripheral device is executed
input power OFF
1: communication with peripheral device is
detected
nonexecuted
• Turns ON when one or more faulty redundant power
supply modules are detected.
OFF : No faulty redundant
• Turns on if any of SD1781 bits is on.
power supply module
• Turns off if all bits of SD1781 are off.
Power supply failure detected
SM1781 • Turns OFF when the main base unit is not the S (Each END)
detection flag ON : Faulty redundant
power supply module Qn(H)*2
detected QnPH*2
1: communication with peripheral device is New
QnPRH
nonexecuted
Rem
Momentary power • Turns ON when a momentary power failure of the
SM1782 failure detection flag input power supply to the power supply 1 or 2 is
for power supply 1 *1 detected one or more times. After turning ON,
remains ON even if the power supply recovers from
the momentary power failure.
• Turns OFF the flag (SM1782, SM1783) of the power
OFF : No momentary power
supply 1/2 when the CPU module starts.
failure detected
• When the input power to one of the redundant power S (Each END)
Momentary power ON : Momentary power
supply modules turns OFF the corresponding flag
SM1783 failure detection flag failure detected
turns OFF.
for power supply 2 *1 • Turns OFF when the main base unit is not the
1: communication with peripheral device is
nonexecuted
*1: The "power supply 1" indicates the redundant power supply module (Q64RP) mounted on the POWER 1 slot of the redundant base unit (Q38RB/Q68RB/
Q65WRB).
The "power supply 2" indicates the redundant power supply module (Q64RP) mounted on the POWER 2 slot of the redundant base unit (Q38RB/Q68RB/
Q65WRB).
However, for the multiple CPU system configuration, this applies to all CPU modules whose first 5 digits of serial No. are 07032 or later.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
12.8 Special Register List
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
The special registers, SD, are internal registers with fixed applications in the
VOLTAGE
Programmable Controller.
For this reason, it is not possible to use these registers in sequence programs in the same
way that normal registers are used. 10
However, data can be written as needed in order to control the CPU modules and remote
I/O modules.
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
Data stored in the special registers are stored as BIN values if no special designation has
been made to the contrary.
The heading descriptions in the following special register lists are shown in Table 12.37.
Table12.44 Descriptions of the special register lists headings
11
Item Function of Item
MAINTENANCE AND
Number • Indicates special register number
INSPECTION
Name • Indicates name of special register
Meaning • Indicates contents of special register
Explanation • Discusses contents of special register in more detail
• Indicates whether the relay is set by the system or user, and, if it is set by the system, when setting is performed.
<Set by>
S : Set by system
12
U : Set by user (sequence programs or test operations from GX Developer)
TROUBLESHOOTING
S/U : Set by both system and user
<When set>
Set by Indicated only for registers set by system
(When set) Each END : Set during each END processing
Initial : Set only during initial processing (when power supply is turned ON, or when going from STOP to RUN)
Status change : Set only when there is a change in status
Error : Set when error occurs
Instruction execution : Set when instruction is executed
Request : Set only when there is a user request (through SM, etc.)
System switching : Set when system switching is executed.
• Indicates corresponding special register in ACPU
APPENDICES
Corresponding ACPU (When the contents are changed, the special register is represented D9 format change. Incompatible with the Q00J/Q00/Q01
M9 and QnPRH.)
• New indicates the special register newly added to the QnACPU or Q series CPU module.
Indicates the relevant CPU module.
: Indicates all the QnACPU and QCPU.
Qn(H) : Indicates the High Performance model QCPU.
Corresponding CPU QnPH : Indicates the Process CPU.
QnU : Indicates the Universal model QCPU
INDEX
QnA : Can be applied to QnA series and Q2ASCPU series

Rem : Can be applied to the MELSECNET/H remote I/O modules.
Each CPU type name : Can be applied only to the specific CPU. (e.g. Q4AR, Q3A)
For details on the following items, refer to the following manuals:

• Networks Manual of the corresponding network module
• SFC QCPU(Q mode)/QnACPU Programming Manual (SFC)
POINT
(1) SD1200 to SD1255 are used for the QnACPU.
These relays are empty for the QCPU.
12.8 Special Register List 12 - 301

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(1) Diagnostic Information

Table12.45 Special register
Corres-
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
D9008
Diagnostic Diagnosis error • Error codes for errors found by diagnosis are stored as BIN data.
SD0 S (Error) format
errors code • Contents identical to latest fault history information.
change
• Year (last two digits) and month that SD0 data was updated is stored as
BCD 2-digit code.
SD1 b15 to b8 b7 to b0 (Example) October, 1995
Year (0 to 99) Month (1 to 12) H9510
• The day and hour that SD0 was updated is stored as BCD 2-digit code.
Clock time for Clock time for
SD2 diagnosis error diagnosis error b15 to b8 b7 to b0 (Example) 10 a.m. on 25th S (Error) New
occurrence occurrence Day (1 to 31) Hour (0 to 23) H2510
• The minute and second that SD0 data was updated is stored as BCD 2-
digit code.
SD3 (Example) 35 min. 48 sec.
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
Minutes (0 to 59) Seconds (0 to 59) H3548
Category codes which help indicate what type of information is being

stored in the common information areas (SD5 through SD15) and the
individual information areas (SD16 through SD26) are stored here.
The category code for judging the error information type is stored.
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
Individual information Common information
category codes category codes
• The common information category codes store the following codes:

0 : No error
1: Unit/module No./ CPU No./Base No.* Rem
2: File name/Drive name
3: Time (value set)
4: Program error location
5: System switching cause (for Q4ARCPU, Redundant CPU only)
6: Reason(s) for tracking capacity excess error (specific to Redundant
CPU)
7: Base No./Power supply No. (The first 5 digits of serial No. 10042 or
Error higer are chosen for Universal model QCPU.)
Error information
SD4 information 8: Tracking transmission data classification (specific to Redundant CPU) S (Error) New
category code
categories *: For a multiple CPU system that consists of the Basic model QCPU,
High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, Universal model
QCPU the module number or CPU number is stored depending on the
error that occurred.
(Refer to the corresponding error code for which number has been
stored.)
CPU No. 1: 1, CPU No. 2: 2, CPU No. 3: 3, CPU No. 4: 4
• The individual information category codes store the following codes:
0: No error
1: (Empty)
2: File name/Drive name
3: Time (value actually measured)
4: Program error location
5: Parameter number
6: Annunciator number
7: CHK instruction failure No. (except for the Basic model QCPU and the
Universal model QCPU)
8: Reason(s) for system switching failure (specific to Redundant CPU)
12: File diagnostic information (specific to the Universal model QCPU)
13: Parameter No./CPU No. (specific to the Universal model QCPU)
12 - 302 12.8 Special Register List

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Corres-
EMC AND LOW

DIRECTIVES
(When Set) ACPU CPU
VOLTAGE
D9
• Common information corresponding to the error codes (SD0) is stored
here.
SD5 • The following ten types of information are stored here:
• The error common information type can be judged by the "common
information category code" in SD4. (The values of the "common
10
information category code" stored in SD4 correspond to following 1) to 8).)
1) Slot No.
SD6
Number Meaning
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
SD5 Slot No./CPU No./Base No. 1, 2, 3, 4
SD6 I/O No. 5
SD7
SD7
SD8
SD9
SD10
SD8
SD11
SD12
(Empty)
11
SD13
SD14
MAINTENANCE AND
SD15
SD9 *1: For a multiple CPU system that consists of the Basic model QCPU, High
INSPECTION
Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, Universal model QCPU, the
slot number or CPU number is stored depending on the error that
occurred.
Slot 0 in the multiple CPU system is the one on the slot on the right of the
SD10 rightmost CPU module.
(Refer to the corresponding error code for which number has been
stored.)
No. 1 CPU: 1, No. 2 CPU: 2, No. 3 CPU: 3, No. 4 CPU: 4
12
*2: If a fuse blown or I/O verify error occurred in the module loaded in the
SD11
TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSECNET/H remote I/O station, the network number is stored into the
upper 8 bits and the station number into the lower 8 bits.
Use the I/O No. to check the module where the fuse blown or I/O verify
error occurred.
SD12 *3: 255 is stored into SD5 of the Basic model QCPU when an instruction, etc.
has been executed for the module later than the one on the last slot
where a module can be mounted.
*4: Definitions of base No. and slot No.
<Base No.>
SD13 Value used to identify the base unit on which the CPU module has
Error common Error common
been mounted. The following shows the definition of the base No. S (Error) New
information information Rem
Base No. Definition
0 Indicates the main base unit mounted with the CPU
module.
SD14
1 to 7 Indicates the extension base unit. The stage
APPENDICES
number setting made by the stage number setting
connector on the extension base unit is the base
No.
When stage number setting is extension 1:
Base No. = 1
when stage number setting is extension 7:
Base No. = 7
<Slot No.>
Value used to identify the slot of each base unit and the module
mounted on that slot.
•The I/O slot 0 (slot on the right side of the CPU slot) of the main base
unit is defined as the slot of "Slot No. = 0".
•The slot Nos. are consecutively assigned to the slots of the base
units in order of the main base unit and extension base units 1 to 7.
•When the number of base unit slots has been set in the I/O
INDEX
assignment setting of the PLC parameter dialog box, the slot Nos.
are assigned for only the number of set slots.
*5: When 0FFFFH is stored into SD6 (I/O No.), the I/O No. cannot be
SD15
identified due to overlapping I/O No., etc. in the I/O assignment setting of
the PLC parameter dialog box. Therefore, identify the error location using
SD5.
2) File name/Drive name
Number Meaning (Example) File name =
SD5 Drive ABCDEFGH. IJK
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
SD6
42H(B) 41H(A)
SD7 File name 44H(D) 43H(C)
SD8 (ASCII code: 8 characters) 46H(F) 45H(E)
SD9
48H(H) 47H(G)
SD10 Extension 6 2EH(.)
49H(I) 2EH(.)
SD11 (ASCII code: 3 characters)
4BH(K) 4AH(J)
SD12
SD13
(Empty)
SD14
SD15

12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Corres-
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
3) Time (value set)
Number Meaning
SD5 SD5 Time : 1 s units (0 to 999 s)
SD6 Time : 1ms units (0 to 65535ms)
SD7
SD8
SD9
SD10
SD6 SD11 (Empty)
SD12
SD13
SD14
SD15
4) Program error location
SD7
Number Meaning
SD5
SD6 File name
S (Error) New
SD8 Rem
SD8 SD9 Extension 6 2EH(.)
SD11 Pattern 7
SD12 Block No.
SD13 Step No./transition condition
SD14 Sequence step No. (L)
SD15 Sequence step No. (H)
SD9
*7 : Contents of pattern data
15 14 to 4 3 2 1 0 (Bit number)
0 0 to 0 0
(Not used) SFC block designation present

(1)/absent (0)
SD10 Error common Error common SFC step designation present
information information (1)/absent (0)
SFC transition designation present
(1)/absent (0)
5) Reason(s) for system switching

Number Meaning
SD11
System switching condition
SD5 (0: automatic system switching/
1: manual system switching)
System switching direction
SD6 (0:standby system to control system/
1: control system to standby system)
SD12
SD7 Tracking flag 8
SD8
SD9
SD10
SD11 (Empty)
SD13 SD12
SD13
SD14 S (Error) New Q4AR
SD15
SD14 *8 : Tracking flag contents

Shows whether or not the tracking data is valid.
15 14 to 4 3 2 1 0 (Bit number)
0 0 to 0 0
(Not used) Initial work data

invalid (0)/valid (1)
System data
SD15
(SFC active step information)
invalid (0)/valid (1)
System switching condition

invalid (0)/valid(1)

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Corres-
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
5) Reason(s) for system switching
SD5
Number Meaning 10
SD5 System switching condition 13
Control system switching
SD6
instruction argument
SD7
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
SD8
SD9
SD6 SD10
SD11 (Empty)
SD12
SD13
SD14
SD15
11
SD7
*13: Details of reason(s) for system switching
MAINTENANCE AND
INSPECTION
0 : No system switching condition
(default)
SD8 1 : Power-OFF, reset, hardware failure,
watchdog timer error
12
2 : Stop error
(except watchdog timer error) S (Error) New QnPRH
3 : System switching request by
network module
TROUBLESHOOTING
16 : Control system switching instruction
SD9
17 : Control system switching request
from GX Developer
6) Reason(s) for tracking capacity excess error

The block No. when the data amount that can be tracked (100k) is
exceeded is indicated by the bit pattern of the corresponding special
SD10 relay.
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Error common Error common
1 1 1
information information SD5 (SM1535) 0 0 0 0 0 0 (SM1528) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (SM1520)
(Block16) (Block9) (Block1)
SD6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SD11 SD7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
APPENDICES
1 1
SD8 (SM1583) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (SM1568)
(Block64) (Block49)
SD9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SD12 SD15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7) Power supply No.

Number Meaning
SD13 SD5 Base No.
SD6 Power supply No.
INDEX
SD7
SD8
SD9
SD10
SD11 (Empty)
SD14
SD12 Qn(H)*1
SD13 QnPH*1
S (Error) New
SD14 QnPRH
SD15 QnU*2
1: Power supply 1 fault
2: Power supply 2 fault
"Power Redundant power supply module
SD15 supply mounted on POWER 1 slot of redundant
module 1": base unit (Q38RB, Q68RB, Q65WRB)
"Power Redundant power supply module
supply mounted on POWER 2 slot of redundant
module 2": base unit (Q38RB, Q68RB, Q65WRB)

12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Corres-
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
SD5
SD6
SD7
8) Tracking transmission data classification

Stores the data classification during tracking.
Number Meaning
SD8 SD5 Data type 15
SD6
SD7
SD8
SD9
SD10 (Empty)
SD11
SD9
SD12
SD13
SD14
SD15
Error common Error common *15: Details of data classification

SD10 S (Error) New QnPRH
information information b15 b14 to b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Each bit
0 0: Not sent
1: Being sent
Device data
SD11 Signal flow

PIDINIT/S. PIDINIT
instruction data
SFC execution data
System switching
request
SD12 Operation mode
change request
System data
SD13
SD14
SD15

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Corres-
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
• Individual information corresponding to error codes (SD0) is stored here.
SD16
• There are the following eight different types of information are stored.
• The error individual information type can be judged by the "individual 10
information category code" in SD4. (The values of the "individual
information category code" stored in SD4 correspond to following 1) to
8), 12), and 13).)
1) (Empty)
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
2) File name/Drive name
SD17 (Example) File name =

Number Meaning ABCDEFGH. IJK
SD16 Drive b15 to b8 b7 to b0
SD17 42H(B) 41H(A)
SD18 File name
44H(D) 43H(C)
46H(F) 45H(E)
11
SD20 48H(H) 47H(G)
SD21 Extension 6 2EH(.) 49H(I) 2EH(.)
MAINTENANCE AND
SD18
SD22 (ASCII code: 3 characters) 4BH(K) 4AH(J)
SD23
INSPECTION
SD24
(Empty)
SD25
SD26
3) Time (value actually measured)
SD19
Number Meaning
SD16
SD17
Time : 1 s units (0 to 999 s)
Time : 1ms units (0 to 65535ms)
12
SD18
TROUBLESHOOTING
SD19
SD20
SD20 SD21
SD22 (Empty)
SD23
SD24
SD25
SD26
4) Program error location
SD21
Number Meaning
Error individual Error individual SD16 S (Error) New
information information SD17 File name Rem
APPENDICES
SD19
SD20 Extension 6 2EH(.)
SD22 SD21 (ASCII code: 3 characters)
SD22 Pattern 7
SD23 Block No.
SD24 Step No./transition No.
SD23 *7 : Contents of pattern data
15 14 to 4 3 2 1 0 (Bit number)
0 0 to 0 0
(Not used) SFC block designation

present (1)/absent (0)
INDEX
SFC step designation

SD24 present (1)/absent (0)
SFC transition designation
present (1)/absent (0)
5) Parameter No. 6) Annunciator number /

7) CHK instruction
SD25 malfunction number
Number Meaning Number Meaning

SD16 Parameter No. 16 SD16 No.
SD17 SD17
SD18 SD18
SD19 SD19
SD20 SD20
SD21 SD21
(Empty) (Empty)
SD22 SD22
SD23 SD23
SD26 SD24 SD24
SD25 SD25
SD26 SD26
*16: For details of the parameter No., refer to the QCPU User's
Manual (Function Explanation Program Fundamentals) or to
the User's Manual of the CPU module used.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Remark
*6 : Extensions are shown below.

Table12.46 Extension name
SDn SDn+1 Extension

File Type
Higher 8 bits Lower 8 bits Higher 8 bits Name
51H 50H 41H QPA Parameters
• Sequence program
51H 50H 47H QPG
• SFC program
51H 43H 44H QCD Device comment
51H 44H 49H QDI Initial device value
51H 44H 52H QDR File register
Simulation data
51H 44H 53H QDS
(For QnA)
Local device
51H 44H 4CH QDL
(Other than the Basic model QCPU)
Sampling trace data
51H 54H 44H QTD
(Other than the Basic model QCPU)
51H 54H 4CH QTL Status latch data (For QnA)
51H 54H 50H QTP Program trace data (For QnA)
SFC trace file
51H 54H 52H QTR
(For QnA)
Breakdown history data
51H 46H 44H QFD (Other than the Basic model QCPU and
the Universal model QCPU)
SP.DEVST/S.DEVLD instruction file
51H 53H 54H QST
(For Universal model QCPU only)

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
EMC AND LOW

Corres-
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
10
8) Reason(s) for system switching failure
Number Meaning
System switching prohibition
SD16 condition 14
SD17
SD18
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
SD19
SD20
SD21
(Empty)
SD22
SD23
SD24
SD25
SD26 11
*14: Details of reason(s) for system switching failure
MAINTENANCE AND
INSPECTION
0 : Normal switching completion
(default) QnPRH
1 : Tracking cable fault (cable
removal, cable fault, internal
circuit fault, hardware fault)
2 : Hardware failure, power OFF,
reset or watchdog timer error 12
occurring in standby system
3 : Hardware failure, power OFF,
TROUBLESHOOTING
reset or watchdog timer error
occurring in control system
4 : Preparing for tracking
5 : Time limit exceeded
6 : Standby system is in stop error
(except watchdog timer error)
7 : Operation differs between two
systems (in backup mode only)
8 : During memory copy from control
system to standby system
Error common Error common 9 : Online program change
SD26 S (Error) New
information information 10 : Error detected by network
module of standby system
11 : System switching being executed
12 : Online module change in
progress
APPENDICES
12) File diagnostic information
SD16 Failuer information (H) drive No.(L)

SD17
SD18 File name
SD19 (ASCll: 8 characters)
SD20
SD21 EXtension *6 2EH(.)
SD22 (ASCll; 3 characters)
SD23 Failure information 2
SD24 (CRC value that is read)
SD25 Failure information 3
SD26 (CRC value that is calculated)
INDEX
13) Parameter No./CPU No. QnU
Number Meaning
SD16 Parameter No.*16
SD17 CPU No. (1 to 4)
SD18
SD19
SD20
SD21
SD22 (Empty)
SD23
SD24
SD25
SD26

12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Corres-
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
Error number that
SD50 Error reset performs error • Stores error number that performs error reset U New
reset Rem
• All corresponding bits go 1(ON) when battery voltage drops.

• Subsequently, these remain 1(ON) even after battery voltage has been
returned to normal.
b15 to b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
0
CPU error
Memory card A alarm
Bit pattern
Memory card A error
Battery low indicating where
SD51 Memory card B alarm S (Error) New
latch battery voltage
drop occurred Memory card B error
: This does not apply to Basic model QCPU.
• In the alarm, data can be held within the time specified for battery low.
• The error indicates the complete discharge of the battery.
• When the High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, Redundant
CPU or Universal model QCPU is used, the corresponding bits always
remain OFF since the memory card B is a standard memory.
• Same configuration as SD51 above
• After the alarm is detected (ON), the alarm turns OFF by error detection
Bit pattern
(ON). (For the Universal model QCPU only)
indicating where
SD52 Battery low • Turns to 0 (OFF) when the battery voltage returns to normal thereafter. S (Error) New
battery voltage
• When the High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, Redundant
drop occurred
CPU or Universal model QCPU is used, the corresponding bits always
remain OFF since the memory card B is a standard memory.
• Every time the input voltage falls to or below 85% (AC power)/65% (DC
Number of times power) of the rating during operation of the CPU module, the value is
AC/DC DOWN
SD53 for AC/DC DOWN incremented by 1 and stored in BIN code. S (Error) D9005
detection Rem
detection • The counter repeats an increment and decrement of the value;
0 32767 -32768 0
1) When any of X(n+0)/X(n+20), X(n+6)/X(n+26), X(n+7)/X(n+27) and X(n+8)/X(n+28) of
the mounted MINI(-S3) turns ON, the bit of the corresponding station turns to 1 (ON).
2) Turns to 1 (ON) when communication between the mounted MINI(-S3) and CPU module
cannot be made.
Error detection b15 to b9 b8 to b0
SD54 MINI link errors S (Error) QnA
state
8th 1st 8th 1st
module module module module
Information of 2) Information of 1)
Number of
Number of module
SD60 module with • Value stored here is the lowest station I/O number of the module with the blown fuse. S (Error)
with blown fuse
blown fuse
I/O module I/O module verify Rem
SD61 verify error error module • The lowest I/O number of the module where the I/O module verification number took place. S (Error)
number number

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Corres-
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
Annunciator Annunciator S (Instruction
SD62 • The first annunciator number (F number) to be detected is stored here. D9009
number
Number of
number
Number of
execution)
S (Instruction
10
SD63 • Stores the number of annunciators searched. D9124
annunciators annunciators execution)
SD64 When F goes ON due to OUT F or SET F , the F numbers which go D9125
progressively ON from SD64 through SD79 are registered.
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
SD65 D9126
The F numbers turned OFF by RST F are deleted from SD64 - SD79,
and the F numbers stored after the deleted F numbers are shifted to the
SD66 preceding registers. D9127
SD67 Execution of the LEDR instruction shifts the contents of SD64 to SD79 D9128
up by one.
SD68
(This can also be done by using the INDICATOR RESET switch on the of
the Q3A/Q4ACPU.)
D9129 11
After 16 annunciators have been detected, detection of the 17th will not be
SD69 D9130
MAINTENANCE AND
stored from SD64 through SD79.
SET SET SET RST SET SET SET SET SET SET SET
SD70 D9131
INSPECTION
F50 F25 F99 F25 F15 F70 F65 F38 F110 F151 F210 LEDR
SD71 SD62 0 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 99 (Number D9132

Table of detected)
SD72 detected Annunciator S (Instruction New
SD63 0 1 2 3 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 8 (Number of
annunciator detection number annunciators execution)
12
numbers detected)
SD73 New
SD64 0 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 99
SD74 SD65 0 0 25 25 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 15 New
TROUBLESHOOTING
SD66 0 0 0 99 0 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 70
SD67 0 0 0 0 0 0 70 70 70 70 70 70 65
SD75 New
SD68 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 65 65 65 65 65 38
SD69 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 38 38 38 38 110
SD76 New
SD70 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 110 110 110 151
SD71 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 151 151 210 (Number
SD77 SD72 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 210 0 detected) New
SD73 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SD78 SD74 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 New
SD75 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SD76 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SD77 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SD79 New
SD78 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SD79 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
APPENDICES
QnA
S (Instruction Qn(H)
SD80 CHK number CHK number • Error codes detected by the CHK instruction are stored as BCD code. New
execution) QnPH
QnPRH
SD90 Corresponds to D9108

SM90 • Set the annunciator number (F number) that will
Corresponds to be turned ON when the step transition
SD91 monitoring timer setting or monitoring timeout D9109
SM91
occurs.
SM92
Corresponds to b15 to b8 b7 to b0
SD93 D9111
Step transition SM93
SD94 monitoring timer Corresponds to D9112 QnA
F number for timer
setting value SM94 Qn(H)
set value and time F number setting Timer time limit U
INDEX
(Enabled only Corresponds to QnPH

SD95 over error (0 to 255) setting D9113
when SFC SM95 QnPRH
program exists) (1 to 255s:
SM96 (1s units))
SD97 Corresponds to • Turning ON any of SM90 to SM99 during an New
SM97 active step starts the timer, and if the transition
SD98 Corresponds to condition next to the corresponding step is not New
SM98 met within the timer time limit, the set
Corresponds to annunciator (F) turns ON.
SD99 New
SM99

12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Corres-
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
Stores the
transmission
Transmission
speed specified in 96 : 9.6kbps, 192 : 19.2kbps, 384 : 38.4kbps, S (Power-ON or
SD100 speed storage New
the serial 576 : 57.6kbps, 1152 : 115.2kbps reset)
area
communication
setting.
b15 to b6 b5 b4 b3 to b0
Stores the
communication
Communication
setting specified in S (Power-ON or
SD101 setting storage New Q00/Q01
the serial reset)
area Sumcheck presence
communication
setting. Write during RUN setting 0: Absent
0: Disabled 1: Present
1: Enabled
* : Since the data is used by the system, it is undefined.
Stores the
transmission wait 0 : No waiting time
Transmission
time specifed in 1 to FH : Waiting time (unit: 10ms) S (Power-ON or
SD102 wait time New
the serial reset)
storage area Defaults to 0.
communication
setting.
Stores the preset Qn(H)
CH1 96 : 9600bps, 192 : 19.2kbps, 384 : 38.4kbps, QnPH
transmission
transmission 576 : 57.6kbps, 1152 : 115.2kbps QnPRH
SD105 speed when GX S New
speed setting *: Other than RS-232 connection holds the data at RS-232 connection.
(RS-232)
Developer is
(When disconnected, the default value is 1152.) QnU*3
used. Rem
Stores the data
Data sending sending result
SD110 result storage when the serial Stores the error code at the timeout sending data. S (Error)
area communication
function is used.
New Q00/Q01
Stores the data
Data receiving receiving result
SD111 result storage when the serial Stores the error code at the time of receiving data. S (Error)
area communication
function is used.
Displays the amount of battery consumption.Value range:
Amount of 1 and 2 (Q02UCPU, Q03UDCPU, Q04UDHCPU, Q03UDECPU,
Amount of battery S (Status
SD118 battery Q04UDEHCPU)
change)
New QnU*4
consumption
consumption 1 to 3 (Q06UDHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU)
1 to 4 (Q13UDHCPU, 26UDHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU, Q26UDEHCPU)
Stores the factor which makes the battery life-prolonging function valid.
When SD119 is other than 0, the battery life-prolonging function is valid.
0:No factor
Battery life- b15 to b2 b1 b0 1:Foctor
Battery life- S (Status
SD119 prolonging New QnU
prolonging factor change)
factor b0: CPU switch setting
b1: Backup in execution by
latch data backup function
(to standard ROM)
*3: This applies to Universal model QCPUs except for the QnUDE(H) CPU.
*4: This applies to the following modules.
•Q02UCPU, Q03UDCPU, Q04UDHCPU, Q06UDHCPU that the first 5 digits of the serial No. is “10012” or higher.
•Q13UDHCPU, Q26UDHCPU, QnUDE(H)CPU

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Corres-
EMC AND LOW

ponding
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
SD130 • The numbers of output modules whose fuses have blown are input as a
bit pattern (in units of 16 points).
SD131 (If the module numbers are set by parameter, the parameter-set
numbers are stored.)
10
SD132 Bit pattern in units b15 b14 b13 b12 b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
of 16 points,
1 1
SD133 indicating the SD130 0 0 0 (YC0) 0 0 0 (Y80) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Fuse blown modules whose
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
1 1
SD134 module fuses have blown SD131 (Y1F0) 0 0 0 0 (Y1A0) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0: No blown fuse
SD135 1: Blown fuse 1 1
present SD137 0 0 0 0 (Y7B0) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Y730) 0 0 0
SD136 Indicates fuse blow.
SD137
• Not cleared even if the blown fuse is replaced with a new one.
This flag is cleared by error resetting operation 11
• When I/O modules, of which data are different from those entered at S (Error) New Q00J/Q00/Q01
SD150
MAINTENANCE AND
power-ON, have been detected, the I/O module numbers (in units of 16
SD151 points) are entered in bit pattern. (Preset I/O module numbers set in
parmeters when parameter setting has been performed.)
INSPECTION
Bit pattern, in units
SD152
of 16 points, b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
indicating the 1
SD153 SD150 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (X Y)
modules with
I/O module 0
verify errors. 1
verify error SD151 0 0 0 0 0 0 ( X Y) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SD154 0: No I/O verify
12
190
errors
1: I/O verify error 1
SD155 SD157 0 ( X Y) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
present 7E0
Indicates an I/O module verify error.
TROUBLESHOOTING
SD156
SD157 This flag is cleared by error resetting operation.
APPENDICES
INDEX

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(2) System information

Corres-
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
• The switch status of the remote I/O module is stored in the following
format.
b15 to b4 b3 to b0
S (Always) New Rem
Empty 1)
1) Remote I/O module switch statusAlways 1: STOP

• The CPU switch status is stored in the following format:
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0
3) Empty 2) 1)
0: RUN
1): CPU switch status 1: STOP Qn(H)
2: L.CLR S (Every END
New QnPH
processing)
QnPRH
2): Memory card
Always OFF
switch
b8 through b12 correspond to
SW1 through SW5 of system
3): DIP switch setting switch 1.
0: OFF, 1: ON.
b13 through b15 are empty.
b15 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0
Empty 2) 1) S (Every END

New Q00J/Q00/Q01
processing)
1): CPU switch status 0: RUN
Status of CPU 1: STOP
SD200 Status of switch
switch
2): Memory card switch Always OFF
Empty 2) 1) S (when RUN/

STOP/RESET New QnU
switch changed)
1: STOP
2): Memory card switch Always OFF
3) Empty 2) 1)

1: STOP
2: L.CLR
b4 corresponds to memory card S (Every END
2): Memory card New QnA
A, and b5 corresponds to processing)
switch
memory card B.
0: OFF, 1: ON
b8 through b12 correspond to
SW1 through SW5 of system
3): DIP switch setting switch 1.
b14 and b15 correspond to SW1
and SW2 of system setting switch
2, respectively.
OFF at 0; ON at 1

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Corres-
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
• The following bit patterns store the status of the LEDs on the CPU
module:
• 0 is off, 1 is on, and 2 is flicker. 10
b15 to b12b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0
Q00J/Q00/Q01
S (Status Qn(H)
New
INSTALLATION
8) 7) 6) 5) 4) 3) 2) 1)
LOADING AND
change) QnPH
QnPRH
1): RUN 5): BOOT
2): ERR. 6): Empty Mode bit pattern
3): USER 7): Empty 0: OFF 1: Green
4): BAT. 8): MODE 2: Orange
11
(The Basic model QCPU does not include 3) to 8).)
module:
• 0 is off, 1 is on, and 2 is flicker.
MAINTENANCE AND
Status of
INSPECTION
SD201 LED status S (Status
CPU-LED New QnU
8) 7) 6) 5) 4) 3) 2) 1) change)
1): RUN 5): BOOT

2): ERROR 6): Empty
3): USER
4): BAT.
7): Empty
8): MODE 12
TROUBLESHOOTING
module:
• 0 is off, 1 is on, and 2 is flicker
S (Status
New
8) 7) 6) 5) 4) 3) 2) 1) change)
QnA
1): RUN 5): BOOT
2): ERROR 6): CARD A (memory card A)
3): USER 7): CARD B (memory card B)
4): BAT.ALARM 8): Empty
• Stores bit patterns of LEDs turned off
(Only USER and BOOT enabled) U New
• Turned off at 1, not turned off at 0
APPENDICES
• Specify the LEDs to be turned off using this register, and turn SM202
from OFF to ON to turn off the specified LEDs.
USER and BOOT can be specified as the LEDs to be turned off.
• Specify the LEDs to be turned off in the following bit pattern.
(Turned off at 1, not be turned off at 0.)
LED off Bit pattern of LED
SD202 Qn(H)
command that is turned off b15 b8 b4 b0
QnPH
Fixed Fixed Fixed U New
QnPRH
to 0 to 0 to 0 QnU
USER
LED
BOOT
INDEX
LED

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Corres-
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
• The operating status of the remote I/O module is stored in the following
format.
b15 to b4 b3 to b0
S (Always) New Rem
1)
1) Remote I/O module operating statusAlways 2: STOP

• The CPU operating status is stored as indicated in the following figure:
2) 1)
Operating Operating status
SD203
status of CPU of CPU
1): Operating status 0: RUN
of CPU 1: STEP-RUN (For the QnACPU only)
2: STOP D9015
S (Every END
3: PAUSE format
processing)
change
2): STOP/PAUSE 0: Instruction in remote operation program
cause from RUN/STOP switch ("RUN/STOP/
RESET switch" for Basic model QCPU)
1: Remote contact
2: Remote operation from GX Developer/
serial communication, etc.
3: Internal program instruction
Note: Priority is
earliest first 4: Error
• The LED display color of the LED status shown in SD201 1) to 8).
b15 b12 b11 b8 b7 b4 b3 b0
1)RUN LED
0: OFF
1: Green
2)ERROR LED
0: OFF
1: Red
3)USER LED
0: OFF
LED display CPU-LED display 1: Red S (status
SD204 New QnU
color color change)
4)BAT. LED
0: OFF
1: Yellow
2: Green
5)BOOT LED
0: OFF
1: Green
6)Empty
7)Empty
8)MODE LED
0: OFF
1: Green

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Corres-
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
0: Test not yet
10
executed
1: During X device
Device test test
SD206 • Set when the device test mode is executed on GX Developer. S (Request) New Rem
execution type 2: During Y device
test
3: During X/Y
device test
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
• When error is generated, the LED display (flicker) is made according to
the error number setting priorities.
(The Basic model QCPU supports only the annunciator (error item No.
7).
SD207 Priorities 1 to 4 D9038
• The Universal model QCPU sets execution/non-execution of LED
display of the error corresponding to the each priority ranking when the
error occurs. 11
• The setting areas for priorities are as follows:
MAINTENANCE AND
SD207 Priority 4 Priority 3 Priority 2 Priority 1
SD208 Priority 8 Priority 7 Priority 6 Priority 5 D9039
INSPECTION
SD208 Priorities 5 to 8 SD209 Priority 11 Priority 10 Priority 9 format QnA
(Priority 11 is valid when Redundant CPU is used.) change Q00J/ Q00/Q01*9
LED display Qn(H)
Default Value U
priority ranking QnPH
SD207 = 4321H(0000H for Basic model QCPU) QnPRH
SD208 = 8765H(0700H for Basic model QCPU)
(0765H for Redundant CPU)
QnU
12
SD209 = 00A9H(0000H for Basic model QCPU)
(0B09H for Redundant CPU)
TROUBLESHOOTING
• No display is made if "0" is set.
• In case of the Basic model QCPU, the ERR. LED turns ON when the
SD209 Priorities 9 to 11 annunciator turns ON, if "7" has been set to either of priorities 1 to 11. New
• In case of the Basic model QCPU, the ERR. LED does not turn ON
when the annumciator turns ON, if "7" has not been set to either of
priorities 1 to 11.
However, even if "0" has been set, information concerning CPU module
operation stop (including parameter settings) errors will be indicated by
the LEDs without conditions.
• The year (last two digits) and month are stored as BCD code as shown
below:
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 Example:

Clock data (year,
SD210 Clock data July, 1993 D9025
APPENDICES
month)
9307H
Year Month
• The day and hour are stored as BCD code as shown below:

Clock data (day, 31st, 10 a.m.
SD211 Clock data S (Request)/U D9026
hour) 3110H Rem
Day Hour
• The minutes and seconds (after the hour) are stored as BCD code as
shown below:
INDEX

Clock data
SD212 Clock data 35 min, 48 s D9027
(minute, second)
3548H
Minute Second
*9: Function version is B or later.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Corres-
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
• The year (first two digits) and the day of the week are stored as BCD
code as shown below.
1993, Friday
1905H
Clock data
Day of the week QCPU
(higher digits of
0 Sunday Rem
year, day of week)
Higher digits of year (19 or 20) 1 Monday
2 Tuesday
3 Wednesday
4 Thursday
5 Friday
6 Saturday
SD213 Clock data S (Request)/U D9028
• The day of the week is stored as BCD code as shown below.
Friday
0005H
Clock data Day of the week

0 Sunday QnA
(day of week)
Always set "0". 1 Monday
2 Tuesday
3 Wednesday
4 Thursday
5 Friday
6 Saturday
• LED display ASCII data (16 characters) stored here.

SD220 (On the Basic model QCPU, the registers store the message (16
characters of ASCII data) at error occurrence (including annunciator
ON).
SD221
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
15th character from 16th character from
SD220 the right the right
SD222
SD223 11th character from 12th character from
LED display S (When
LED display data 9th character from 10th character from New
data SD223 changed)
the right the right
SD224
SD225 5th character from 6th character from
3rd character from 4th character from
SD226
1st character from 2nd character from
SD227 • The LED display device data at the time of CHK is not stored in the
Basic model QCPU and the Universal model QCPU.
The header I/O
Module to which number of the
online module module to which • 10H is added to the value of the header I/O number of which the online S (During online QnPH
SD235 New
change is being online module module change is being performed. module change) QnPRH
performed change is being
performed /10H
0: Automatic
SD240 Base mode mode • Stores the base mode. S (Initial) New
1: Detail mode QCPU
0: Main base only Rem
Extension stage
SD241 1 to 7: Extension • Stores the maximum number of the extension bases being installed. S (Initial) New
number
stage number

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Corres-
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
b7 b2 b1 b0
Base type
Fixed to 0 to 10
differentiation Main base unit
Qn(H)
A/Q base 0: QA**B is 1st extension QnPH
installed base S (Initial) New
differentiation Fixed to 0 QnPRH
(A mode)
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
2nd extension when the Rem
1: Q**B is installed base
(Q mode) base is not
to installed.
7th extension
base
Fixed to 0
b4
to
b2 b1 b0
11
Base type
Installed Q base differentiation Main base unit
MAINTENANCE AND
SD242 presence/ 0: Base not 1st extension base S (Initial) New Q00J/Q00/Q01
absence installed 2nd extension base
1: Q**B is installed
INSPECTION
to
4th extension base
b7 b2 b1 b0
Base type
Fixed to 0 to
Main base unit
12
Installed Q base differentiation 1st extension
TROUBLESHOOTING
presence/ 0: Base not base S (Initial) New QnU
absence installed Fixed to 0
2nd extension when the
1: Q**B is installed base base is not
to installed.
7th extension
base
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 Qn(H)

SD243
SD243 Extension
3
Extension Extension
2 1 Main QnPH
No. of base
No. of base slots S (Initial) New QnPRH
slots SD244 Extension
7
Extension Extension Extension
6 5 4 QnU
SD244
Rem
• As shown above, each area stores the number of slots being installed.
APPENDICES
SD243
Extension Extension Extension Main
No. of base SD243 3 2 1
slots (Operation No. of base slots SD244 Fixed to Fixed to Fixed to Extension S (Initial) Q00J/Q00/Q01
0 0 0 4
status)
SD244
• As shown above, each area stores the number of slots being installed.
(Number of set slots when parameter setting has been made)
New
SD245
No. of base SD245 Extension
3
Extension Extension Main
2 1
slots (Mounting No. of base slots SD246 Fixed0
to Fixed to Fixed to Extension
0 0 4
S (Initial) Q00J/Q00/Q01*9
status)
SD246
• As shown above, each area stores the number of module-mounted slots
of the base unit (actual number of slots of the installed base unit).
Qn(H)
INDEX
• When SM250 goes from OFF to ON, the upper 2 digits of the final I/O S (Request QnPH
New
number plus 1 of the modules loaded are stored as BIN values. END) QnPRH
Loaded Loaded maximum Rem
SD250
maximum I/O I/O No.
Q00J/Q00/Q01
• The upper 2 digits of the final I/O number plus 1 of the modules loaded
S (Initial) New QnU
are stored as BIN values.
Rem
Q2A(S1)
Head I/O Head I/O No. for • Stores the upper two digits of the head I/O number of an I/O module that
Q3A
SD251 number for module is removed/replaced in the online status (with power on). (Default value: U D9094
Q4A
replacement replacement 100H).
Q4AR
RS422 RS422
• Stores transmission speed of RS422. S (When
SD253 transmission transmission New QnA
0 : 9600bps 1 : 19.2kbps 2 : 38.4kbps changed)
speed speed

12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Corres-
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
Number of • Indicates the number of mounted MELSECNET/10 modules or
SD254
modules installed MELSECNET/H modules.
• Indicates I/O number of mounted MELSECNET/10 module or
SD255 I/O No.
MELSECNET/H module
Information from 1st module
Network • Indicates network No. of mounted MELSECNET/10 module or

SD256
No. MELSECNET/H module
Group • Indicates group No. of mounted MELSECNET/10 module or
SD257
number MELSECNET/H module
Station • Indicates station No. of mounted MELSECNET/10 module or
SD258
MELSECNET/ No. MELSECNET/H module
10. Standby
• In the case of standby stations, the module number of the standby S (Initial) New
SD259 MELSECNET/H informa- QnA
information station is stored. (1 to 4) Qn(H)
tion
QnPH
SD260 QnPRH
Information from
to • Configuration is identical to that for the first module. QnU
2nd module
SD264
SD265
Information from QnA
to • Configuration is identical to that for the first module.
3rd module Qn(H)
SD269
QnPH
SD270 QnPRH
Information from
4th module QnU*10
SD274
1) When Xn0 of the mounted CC-Link module turns ON, the bit of the
corresponding station turns to 1 (ON).
2) When either Xn1 or XnF of the mounted CC-Link module turns OFF, the
bit of the corresponding station turns to 1 (ON).
3) Turns to 1 (ON) when communication between the mounted CC-Link
module and CPU module cannot be made.
Information Information Information

of 3) of 2) of 1)
Qn(H)
Empty QnPH
S (Error) New
1st QnPRH
module Rem
2nd
module
3rd
Error detection module
SD280 CC-Link error
status 4th
module
The above module Nos. n are in order of the head I/O numbers.
(However, the one where parameter setting has not been made is not
counted.)
• When Xn0 of the mounted CC-Link module turns ON, the bit of the
• When either Xn1 or XnF of the mounted CC-Link module turns OFF, the
• Turns to 1 (ON) when communication between the mounted CC-Link
S (Error) New QnA
b15 to b9 b8 to b0
8th 1st 8th 1st
module module module module
Information of 2) Information of 1)

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Corres-
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
1) When Xn0 of the mounted CC-Link module turns ON, the bit of the
2) When either Xn1 or XnF of the mounted CC-Link module turns OFF, the 10
3) Turns to 1 (ON) when communication between the mounted CC-Link
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
Information Information Information
of 3) of 2) of 1)
Qn(H)*14
Error detection Empty
SD281 CC-Link error S (Error) New QnPH*14
status 5st
QnPRH*15
module
6nd 11
module
7rd
MAINTENANCE AND
module
8th
module
INSPECTION
The above module Nos. n are in order of the head I/O numbers.
(However, the one where parameter setting has not been made is not
counted.)
SD286 • The number of points assigned to M is stored with 32 bits.
12
Points assigned to
• Even if the points assigned to M are 32K points or less, the points are
SD287 M (for extension)
Device stored.
S (Initial) New QnU*16
SD288 assignment • The number of points assigned to B is stored with 32 bits.
Points assigned to
TROUBLESHOOTING
• Even if the points assigned to B are 32K points or less, the points are
SD289 B (for extension)
stored.
Number of points
SD290 • Stores the number of points currently set for X devices
assigned for X
Number of points
SD291 • Stores the number of points currently set for Y devices
assigned for Y Rem
Number of points
SD292 • Stores the number of points currently set for M devices
Device assigned for M
assignment Number of points
SD293 (Same as • Stores the number of points currently set for L devices S (Initial) New
assigned for L
parameter
contents) Number of points
SD294 • Stores the number of points currently set for B devices
assigned for B Rem
APPENDICES
Number of points
SD295 • Stores the number of points currently set for F devices
assigned for F
Number of points
SD296 • Stores the number of points currently set for SB devices
assigned for SB Rem
Number of points
SD297 • Stores the number of points currently set for V devices
assigned for V
Number of points
SD298 • Stores the number of points currently set for S devices
assigned for S
Number of points
SD299 • Stores the number of points currently set for T device
assigned for T
Device Number of points
SD300 assignment • Stores the number of points currently set for ST devices
assigned for ST
INDEX
(Same as S (Initial) New

parameter Number of points
SD301 • Stores the number of points currently set for C devices
contents) assigned for C
Number of points
SD302 • Stores the number of points currently set for D devices
assigned for D
Number of points
SD303 • Stores the number of points currently set for W devices
assigned for W Rem
Number of points
SD304 • Stores the number of points currently set for SW devices
assigned for SW

12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Corres-
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
• Stores the number of points of index register (Z) to be modified in the
Device 16 bit modification
range of 16 bits.
SD305 assignment Number of points S (Initial) New QnU
(The assignment is set by the ZR device index modification setting
(Index register) assigned for Z
parameter.)
SD306 Device • Stores the number of ZR device points (except the number of points of
assignment Number of points extended data register (D) and extended link register (W)). The number
(Same as assigned for ZR of assignment points of ZR device is stored into this SD only when 1k
SD307 parameter (for extension) point or more is set to the extended data register (D) and extended link
contents) register (W).
SD308 Device Number of points
• Stores the total number of points of the extended data register (D) and
assignment assigned for D (for
data register in internal device memory area (stores the value in 32-bit S (Initial) New
SD309 (assignment inside + for QnU
binary).
including the extension)
SD310 number of
points set to the Number of points
extended data • Stores the total number of points of the extended link register (W) and
assigned for W
register (D) and link register in internal device memory area (stores the value in 32-bit
SD311 (for inside + for
extended link binary).
extension)
register (W)
• Reserves the designated time for communication processing with GX
Developer or other units.
• The greater the value is designated, the shorter the response time for Q00J/Q00/Q01
Time reserved
Time reserved for communication with other devices (GX Developer, serial communication Qn(H)
for
SD315 communication units) becomes. U New QnPH
communication
processing • If the designated value is out of the range above, it is processed that no QnPRH
processing
setting is made. Rem
• Setting range: 1 to 100 ms
• Note that the scan time becomes longer by the designated time.
No. of modules
SD340 • Indicates the number of mounted Ethernet module.
installed
SD341 I/O No. • Indicates I/O No. of mounted Ethernet module
Network QCPU
SD342 • Indicates network No. of mounted Ethernet module
No. Rem
Information of 1st module
SD343 Group No. • Indicates group No. of mounted Ethernet module

Ethernet Station
SD344 • Indicates station No. of mounted Ethernet module S (Initial) New
information No.
SD345 • Empty
to Empty (With QCPU, the Ethernet module IP address of the 1st module is stored
SD346 in buffer memory.) Qn(H)
QnPH
• Empty
QnPRH
SD347 Empty (With QCPU, the Ethernet module error code of the 1st module is read
QnU
with the ERRRD instruction.)
Rem
SD348 to Information from
• Configuration is identical to that for the first module.
SD354 2nd module
SD355
Information from Qn(H)
to Ethernet • Configuration is identical to that for the first module.
3rd module S (Initial) New QnPH
SD361 information
QnPRH
SD362
Information from QnU*10
4th module Rem
SD368

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Corres-
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
No. of modules
SD340 • Indicates the number of mounted Ethernet module.
SD341
installed
I/O No. • Indicates I/O No. of mounted Ethernet module
10
Information of 1st module
Network
SD342 • Indicates network No. of mounted Ethernet module
No.
SD343 Group No. • Indicates group No. of mounted Ethernet module
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
SD344 Station No. • Indicates station No. of mounted Ethernet module
SD345
to IP address • Indicates IP address of mounted Ethernet module
SD346 Ethernet
S (Initial) New
information
SD347 Error code • Indicates error code of mounted Ethernet module
SD348
to
Information from
• Configuration is identical to that for the first module.
QnA 11
2nd module
SD354
MAINTENANCE AND
SD355
Information from
3rd module
SD361
INSPECTION
SD362
Information from
4th module
SD368
b15 to b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
0 S (Initial) 12
Not used Instruction reception
status of channel 1
TROUBLESHOOTING
Instruction reception
status of channel 2
status of channel 3
Ethernet Instruction
status of channel 4
SD380 instruction reception status of
reception status 1st module
status of channel 5
status of channel 6
New
status of channel 7
status of channel 8 S (Instruction
APPENDICES
QnPRH
execution)
ON: Received (Channel is being used.)
OFF: Not received (Channel is not used.)
Instruction
SD381 reception status of • Configuration is identical to that for the first module.
2nd module
Ethernet
Instruction
SD382 instruction reception status of • Configuration is identical to that for the first module.
reception 3rd module
status
Instruction
SD383 reception status of • Configuration is identical to that for the first module.
4th module
INDEX
• Stores the internal system software version in ASCII code.
Stored into lower

Higher byte Lower byte byte
Software Internal system Stored into higher
SD392 byte S (Initial) D9060 QnA
version software version
For version "A", for example, "41H" is stored.
Note: The internal system software version may differ from the version
indicated by the version symbol printed on the case.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Corres-
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
Number of • The number of CPU modules that comprise the multiple CPU system is Q00/Q01*9
SD393
multiple CPUs stored. (1 to 3, Empty also included) QnU
• The CPU module types of No. 1 CPU to 3 and whether the CPU
modules are mounted or not are stored.
SD394 Empty (0) CPU No.3 CPU No.2 CPU No.1
S (Initial) New
CPU mounting
SD394 Q00/Q01*9
information
CPU module mounted or CPU module type

not mounted 0: Programmable
0: Not mounted controller CPU
1: Mounted 1: Motion CPU
2: PC CPU
Q00/Q01*9
• In a multiple CPU system configuration, the CPU number of the host
Multiple CPU Qn(H)*9
SD395 CPU is stored. S (Initial) New
Multiple CPU number QnPH
CPU No. 1: 1, CPU No. 2: 2, CPU No. 3: 3, CPU No. 4: 4
system QnU
information
No. 1 CPU
SD396
operation status The operation information of each CPU No. is stored.
(The information on the number of multiple CPUs indicated in SD393 is
stored.)
b15 b14 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0
No. 2 CPU Q00/Q01*9
SD397 Vacancy Classification Operation status
operation status QnU
mounted S (END
0: Not mounted processing New
1: Mounted error)
No. 3 CPU
SD398 0: Normal 0: RUN
operation status
1: Minor fault 2: STOP
2: Medium fault 3: PAUSE
3: Major fault 4: Initial
FH: Reset FH: Reset
No. 4 CPU
SD399 QnU
operation statu
(3) System clocks/counters

Corres-
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
• Following programmable controller CPU module RUN, 1 is added each
1 second Number of counts S (Status
SD412 second D9022
counter in 1-second units change)
• Count repeats from 0 to 32767 to -32768 to 0
2n second clock 2n second clock • Stores value n of 2n second clock (Default is 30)
SD414 U New
setting units • Setting can be made between 1 and 32767
Qn(H)
2nms clock • Stores value n of 2nms clock (Default is 30) QnPH
SD415 2nms clock units U New
setting • Setting can be made between 1 and 32767 QnPRH
QnU
QnA
• Incremented by 1 for each scan execution after the CPU module is set to
Qn(H)
RUN. S (Every END
New QnPH
(Not counted by the scan in an initial execution type program.) processing)
Number of counts QnPRH
SD420 Scan counter • Count repeats from 0 to 32767 to -32768 to 0
in each scan QnU
S (Every END
RUN. New Q00J/Q00/Q01
processing)
• Count repeats from 0 to 32767 to -32768 to 0
QnA
Low speed scan Number of counts RUN. S (Every END
SD430 New Qn(H)
counter in each scan • Count repeats from 0 to 32767 to -32768 to 0 processing)
QnPH
• Used only for low speed execution type programs

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(4) Scan information
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
Corres-
(When Set) ACPU
D9
CPU
10
QnA
Qn(H)
Execution Program No. in • Program number of program currently being executed is stored as BIN S (Status
SD500 New QnPH
program No. execution value. change)
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
QnPRH
QnU
Low speed
Low speed • Program number of low speed excution type program No. currently QnA
execution type S (Every END
SD510 excution type being executed is stored as BIN value. New Qn(H)
program No. in processing)
program No. • Enabled only when SM510 is ON. QnPH
execution
Current scan time

• The current scan time is stored into SD520 and SD521.
(Measurement is made in 100 s units. (For the Universal model QCPU,
S (Every END
D9018 11
SD520 format
(in 1 ms units) processing)
in 1 þs units.)) change QnA
MAINTENANCE AND
SD520: Stores the ms place. (Storage range: 0 to 65535) Q00J/Q00/Q01
Current scan SD521: Stores the s place. (Storage range: 0 to 900 (For the Qn(H)
time Universal model QCPU, storage range is 0 to 999)) QnPH
INSPECTION
Current scan time (Example) When the current scan time is 23.6ms, the following values are S (Every END QnPRH
SD521 New
(in 100 s units) stored. processing) QnU
SD520 = 23
SD521 = 600
Initial scan time • Stores the scan time of an initial execution type program into SD522 and
SD522
(in 1 ms units) SD523.
(Measurement is made in 100 s units. (For the Universal model QCPU,
12
S (First END
Initial scan time in 1 s units.)) New
TROUBLESHOOTING
Initial scan time processing)
SD523 SD522: Stores the ms place. (Storage range: 0 to 65535)
(in 100 s units) SD523: Stores the s place. (Storage range: 0 to 900 (For the Universal
model QCPU, storage range is 0 to 999))
Minimum scan • Stores the minimum value of the scan time except that of an initial D9017 QnA
S (Every END
SD524 time (in 1 ms execution type program into SD524 and SD525. (Measurement is made format Qn(H)
processing)
Minimum scan units) in 100 s units. (For the Universal model QCPU, in 1 s units.)) change QnPH
time Minimum scan SD524: Stores the ms place. (Storage range: 0 to 65535) QnPRH
SD525: Stores the s place. (Storage range: 0 to 900 (For the Universal S (Every END
SD525 time (in 100 s New QnU
model QCPU, storage range is 0 to 999)) processing)
units)
Maximum scan • Stores the maximum value of the scan time except that of an initial D9019
SD526 time (in 1 ms execution type program into SD526 and SD527. (Measurement is made format
Maximum scan units) in 100 s units. (For the Universal model QCPU, in 1 s units.)) S (Every END change
time Maximum scan SD526: Stores the ms place. (Storage range: 0 to 65535) processing)
APPENDICES
SD527 time (in 100 s SD527: Stores the s place. (Storage range: 0 to 900 (For the Universal New
units) model QCPU, storage range is 0 to 999))
Current scan time • Stores the current scan time of a low speed execution type program into
SD528 Current scan
(in 1 ms units) SD528 and SD529.
time for low S (Every END
(Measurement is made in 100 s units.) New
speed execution processing)
Current scan time SD528: Stores the ms place. (Storage range: 0 to 65535)
SD529 type programs
(in 100 s units) SD529: Stores the s place. (Storage range: 0 to 900)
Minimum scan
SD532 time (in 1 ms • Stores the minimum value of the scan time of a low speed execution
Minimum scan
units) type program into SD532 and SD533.
time for low S (Every END QnA
speed execution Minimum scan processing) Qn(H)
SD532: Stores the ms place. (Storage range: 0 to 65535)
SD533 type programs time (in 100 s QnPH
SD533: Stores the s place. (Storage range: 0 to 900)
units)
INDEX
Maximum scan
SD534 time (in 1 ms • Stores the maximum value of the scan time except that of the first scan
Maximum scan
units) of a low speed execution type program into SD534 and SD535.
time for low S (Every END
speed execution Maximum scan processing)
SD535 type programs time (in 100 s SD535: Stores the s place. (Storage range: 0 to 900)
units)
END processing • Stores the time from the end of a scan execution type program to the
SD540 time (in 1 ms start of the next scan into SD540 and SD541. QnA
units) (Measurement is made in 100 s units.(For the Universal model QCPU, Qn(H)
END processing S (Every END
in 1 s units.)) New QnPH
time END processing processing)
SD540: Stores the ms place. (Storage range: 0 to 65535) QnPRH
SD541 time (in 100 s SD541: Stores the s place. (Storage range: 0 to 900) (Storage range: 0 QnU
units) to 900 (For the Universal model QCPU, storage range is 0 to 999))

12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Corres-
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
Minimum scan
SD524 time (in 1 ms • Stores the minimum value of the scan time into SD524 and SD525.
Minimum scan units) (Measurement is made in 100 s units.) S (Every END
time Minimum scan SD524: Stores the ms place. (Storage range: 0 to 65535) processing)
SD525 time (in 100 s SD525: Stores the s place. (Storage range: 0 to 900)
units)
New Q00J/Q00/Q01
Maximum scan
SD526 time (in 1 ms • Stores the maximum value of the scan time into SD526 and SD527.
Maximum scan units) (Measurement is made in 100 s units.) S (Every END
time Maximum scan SD526: Stores the ms place. (Storage range: 0 to 65535) processing)
units)
END processing
SD540 time (in 1 ms • Stores the time from when the scan program ends until the next scan
units) starts into SD540 and SD541.
END processing S (Every END
(Measurement is made in 100 s units.) New Q00J/Q00/Q01
time END processing processing)
units)
Constant scan • Stores the wait time for constant scan setting into SD542 and SD543.
SD542 wait time (in 1 ms (Measurement is made in 100 s units. (For the Universal model QCPU,
Constant scan units) in 1 s units.)) S (Every END
New
wait time Constant scan SD542: Stores the ms place. (Storage range: 0 to 65535) processing)
SD543 wait time (in 100 SD543: Stores the s place. (Storage range: 0 to 900 (For the Universal
s units) model QCPU, storage range is 0 to 999))
Cumulative
execution time for
low speed
SD544
execution type • Stores the cumulative execution time of a low speed execution type
Cumulative programs program into SD544 and SD545.
execution time (in 1 ms units) (Measurement is made in 100 s units.) S (Every END
for low speed New
Cumulative SD544: Stores the ms place. (Storage range: 0 to 65535) processing)
execution type
execution time for SD545: Stores the s place. (Storage range: 0 to 900)
programs
low speed • Cleared to 0 after the end of one low speed scan.
SD545
execution type
programs QnA
(in 100 s units) Qn(H)
QnPH
Execution time for
low speed
SD546 execution type • Stores the execution time of a low speed execution type program during
Execution time programs one scan into SD546 and SD547.
for low speed (in 1 ms units) (Measurement is made in 100 s units.) S (Every END
New
execution type Execution time for SD546: Stores the ms place. (Storage range: 0 to 65535) processing)
programs low speed SD547: Stores the s place. (Storage range: 0 to 900)
SD547 execution type • Stored every scan.
programs
(in 100 s units)
Scan execution
type program • Stores the execution time of a scan execution type program during one
SD548
execution time (in scan into SD548 and SD549. QnA
Scan execution 1 ms units) (Measurement is made in 100 s units.) S (Every END Qn(H)
type program New
Scan execution SD548: Stores the ms place. (Storage range: 0 to 65535) processing) QnPH
execution time
type program SD549: Stores the s place. (Storage range: 0 to 900) QnPRH
SD549 • Stored every scan.
execution time (in
100 s units)
Scan program • Stores the execution time of a scan program during one scan into
SD548 execution time SD548 and SD549.
(in 1 ms units) (Measurement is made in 100 s units. (For the Universal model QCPU,
Scan program in 1 s units.)) S (Every END Q00J/Q00/Q01
New
execution time Scan program SD548: Stores the ms place. (Storage range: 0 to 65535) processing) QnU
SD549 execution time SD549: Stores the s place. (Storage range: 0 to 900 (For the Universal
(in 100 s units) model QCPU, storage range is 0 to 999))
• Stored every scan.
Service interval
SD550 measurement Unit/module No. • Sets I/O number for module that measures service interval. U New
module QnA
Module service Qn(H)
SD551 interval • Stores the service interval for the module specified in SD550 into SD551 QnPH
(in 1 ms units) and SD552 when SM551 is turned ON. QnPRH
Service interval
(Measurement is made in 100 s units.) S (Request) New Rem
time Module service SD551: Stores the ms place. (Storage range: 0 to 65535)
SD552 interval SD552: Stores the s place. (Storage range: 0 to 900)
(in 100 s units)

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(5) Drive information
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
Corres-
10
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
• Indicates the type of the memory card installed.

INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
0
Qn(H)
Memory card Drive 1 0: Does not exist S (Initial and QnPH
Memory card typs (RAM) type
1: SRAM card New
typs card removal) QnPRH
0: Does not exist QnU
Drive 2 type
(1: SRAM)
2: ATA card 11
3: Flash card
MAINTENANCE AND
SD600
• Indicates the type of memory card A installed.
INSPECTION
0
Drive 1 0: Does not exist

Memory card A Memory card A S (Initial and
(RAM) type 1: SRAM New QnA
12
typs typs card removal)
0: Does not exist
Drive 2
2: E 2 PROM
TROUBLESHOOTING
(ROM) type
3: Flash ROM
QnA
Drive 1 Qn(H)
• Drive 1 capacity is stored in 1 k byte units. S (Initial and
SD602 (Memory card Drive 1 capacity New QnPH
• (Empty capacity after format is stored.) card removal)
RAM) capacity QnPRH
QnU
Qn(H)
• Drive 2 capacity is stored in 1 k byte units.*1 S (Initial and QnPH
Drive 2 New
• (Empty capacity after format is stored.) card removal) QnPRH
SD603 (Memory card Drive 2 capacity
QnU
ROM) capacity
S (Initial and
• Drive 2 capacity is stored in 1 k byte units. New QnA
card removal)
APPENDICES
*1: When the Q2MEM-8MBA is used, value stored in the special register SD603 differs depending on the combination of the serial number of the High
Performance model QCPU and the manufacture control number of the ATA card.
For details, refer to Section 7.1.2.
INDEX

12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Corres-
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
• The use conditions for memory card (A) are stored as bit patterns .
(In use when ON)
• The significance of these bit patterns is indicated below:
b0 : Boot operation (QBT) b8 : Not used

b1 : Parameters (QPA) b9 : CPU fault history (QFD) Qn(H)
Memory card Memory card use S (Status
b2 : Device comments (QCD) b10 : Not used New QnPH
use conditions conditions change)
b3 : Device initial value (QDI) b11 : Local device (QDL) QnPRH
b4 : File register R (QDR) b12 : Not used
b5 : Sampling trace (QTD) b13 : Not used
b6 : Not used b14 : Not used
• The use conditions for memory card A are stored as bit patterns.
(In use when ON)
b0 : Boot operation (QBT) b8 : Simulation data (QDS)

b1 : Parameters (QPA) b9 : CPU fault history (QFD)
Memory card A Memory card A S (Status
b2 : Device comments (QCD) b10 : SFC trace (QTR) New QnA
use conditions use conditions change)
b3 : Device initial value (QDI) b11 : Local device (QDL)
SD604
b4 : File R (QDR) b12 : Not used
b6 : Status latch (QTL) b14 : Not used
b7 : Program trace (QTP) b15 : Not used
• The use conditions for memory card (A) are stored as bit patterns .
(In use when ON)
b0 : Boot operation (QBT)*1 b8 : Not used

b1 : Parameters (QPA) b9 : Not used
b2 : Device comments (QCD) b10 : Not used
Memory card Memory card use b3 : Device initial value (QDI)*2 b11 : Local device (QDL) S (Status
New QnU
use conditions conditions b4 : File register R (QDR) b12 : Not used change)
*1: Turned ON at boot start and OFF at boot completion.

*2: Turned ON when reflection of device initial value is started and OFF
when reflection of device initial value is completed.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Corres-
EMC AND LOW

ponding
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
• Indicates the drive 3/4 type.
10
0
Qn(H)
Drive 3 QnPH
(Standrd Fixed to 1 S (Initial) New
QnPRH
RAM) QnU
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
Drive 4
(Standrd Fixed to 3
Drive 3/4 typs Drive 3/4 typs ROM)
• Indicates the drive 3/4 type.
0
11
SD620 Drive 3 0: Absent S (Initial) New Q00J/Q00/Q01
(Standard RAM) 1: Present
MAINTENANCE AND
Drive 4 Fixed to
INSPECTION
(Standrd ROM) "3 (FLASH ROM)"
• Indicates memory card B type installed
0
Q2A(S1)
Memory card B
typs
Memory card B
typs
Drive 3
(RAM)
0: Does not exist
1: SRAM
S (Initial/Card
installation and New
Q3A
Q4A
12
removal)
Q4AR
TROUBLESHOOTING
Drive 4 0: Does not exist
(ROM) 2: E2PROM
3: Flash ROM
Qn(H)
QnPH
S (Initial) New
QnPRH
• Drive 3 capacity is stored in 1 k byte units. QnU
(Empty capacity after format is stored.) Q2A(S1)
Drive 3 S (Initial/Card
Q3A
SD622 (Standard RAM) Drive 3 capacity installation and New
Q4A
capacity removal)
Q4AR
APPENDICES
• Drive 3 capacity is stored in 1k byte units. S (Initial) New Q00J/Q00/Q01
Qn(H)
QnPH
S (Initial) New
QnPRH
• Drive 4 capacity is stored in 1 k byte units. QnU
(Empty capacity after format is stored.) Q2A(S1)
Drive 4 S (Initial/Card
Q3A
SD623 (Standard Drive 4 capacity installation and New
Q4A
ROM) capacity removal)
Q4AR
• Drive 4 capacity is stored in 1k byte units. S (Initial) New Q00J/Q00/Q01

INDEX

12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Corres-
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
• The conditions for usage for drive 3/4 are stored as bit patterns.
(In use when ON)
b0 : Boot operation (QBT) b8 : Not used

b1 : Parameters (QPA) b9 : CPU fault history (QFD) Qn(H)
Drive 3/4 use Drive 3/4 use S (Status
b2 : Device comments (QCD) b10 : SFC trace (QTS) New QnPH
conditions conditions change)
b3 : Device initial value (QDI) b11 : Local device (QDL) QnPRH
b4 : File register (QDR) b12 : Not used
• The use conditions for memory card B are stored as bit patterns.
(In use when ON)
b0 : Boot operation (QBT) b8 : Simulation data (QDS)

b1 : Parameters (QPA) b9 : CPU fault history (QFD) Q2A(S1)
Memory card B Memory card B S (Status Q3A
b2 : Device comments (QCD) b10 : SFC trace (QTS) New
use conditions use conditions change) Q4A
b3 : Device initial value (QDI) b11 : Local device (QDL)
Q4AR
b4 : File register (QDR) b12 : Local device (QDL)
b6 : Status latch (QTL) b14 : Not used
SD624 b7 : Program trace (QTP) b15 : Not used
• The conditions for usage for drive 3/4 are stored as bit patterns.
(In use when ON)

b1 : Parameters (QPA) b9 : Not used
b2 : Device comments (QCD) b10 : Not used S (Status
b3 : Device initial value (QDI)*1 b11 : Local device (QDL) New QnU
change)
b4 : File register (QDR) b12 : Not used
Drive 3/4 use Drive 3/4 use
conditions conditions
*1: Turned ON at boot start and OFF at boot completion.

• Drive 3/4 use conditions are stored in bit pattern.
b15 to b5 b4 to b0
0 0 0 0 0 0
S (Status
Boot operation(QBT) New Q00J/Q00/Q01
change)
0: Not used 1: In use
File register (QDR)

0: Not used 1: In use
File register S (Status

SD640 Drive number: • Stores drive number being used by file register New
drive change) *10
*10: On the Basic model QCPU, data is set at STOP to RUN or RSET instruction execution after parameter execution.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Corres-
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
• Stores file register file name (with extension) selected at parameters or
SD641
SD642
by use of QDRSET instruction as ASCII code.
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
10
SD641 2nd character 1st character QnA
SD643
SD642 4th character 3rd character Qn(H)
S (Status
SD643 6th character 5th character New QnPH
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
SD644 change)
QnPRH
SD644 8th character 7th character
QnU
SD645 SD645 1st character of 2EH(.)
extension
SD646 3rd character of 2nd character of
the extension the extension
File register file
name
File register file
name • Stores file register file name (MAIN.QDR) selected at parameters as 11
ASCII code.
MAINTENANCE AND
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
SD641 2nd character (A) 1st character (M)
SD646
INSPECTION
SD642 4th character (N) 3rd character (I)
SD643 6th character ( ) 5th character ( ) S (Initial) New Q00J/Q00/Q01
SD644 8th character ( ) 7th character ( )
1st character of
SD645 the extension (Q) 2EH(.)
SD646
3rd character of 2nd character of 12
the extension (R) the extension (D)
TROUBLESHOOTING
QnA
Qn(H)
S (Status
QnPH
File register File register • Stores the data capacity of the currently selected file register in 1 k word change)
SD647 New QnPRH
capacity capacity units.
QnU
S (Initial) Q00J/Q00/Q01
File register File register block S (Status

SD648 • Stores the currently selected file register block number. D9035
block number number change) *10
Comment drive • Stores the comment drive number selected at the parameters or by the S (Status
SD650 Comment drive New
number QCDSET instruction. change)
SD651 • Stores the comment file name (with extension) selected at the
parameters or by the QCDSET instruction in ASCII code.
APPENDICES
SD652
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
SD653 QnA
SD651 2nd character 1st character Qn(H)
SD654 SD652 4th character 3rd character QnPH
Comment file Comment file S (Status QnPRH
SD655 SD653 6th character 5th character New
name name change) QnU
1st character of
SD655 2EH(.)
the extension
SD656
3rd character of 2nd character of
SD656 the extension the extension
Boot designation • Stores the drive number where the boot designation file (*.QBT) is being
SD660 S (Initial) New
file drive number stored.
INDEX
SD661 • Stores the file name of the boot designation file (*.QBT).
SD662 b15 to b8 b7 to b0
SD661 2nd character 1st character QnA
SD663 Qn(H)
Boot operation SD662 4th character 3rd character
SD664 QnPH
designation file File name of boot SD663 6th character 5th character
S (Initial) New QnPRH
SD665 designation file SD664 8th character 7th character QnU
1st character of
SD665 2EH(.)
the extension
SD666 3rd character of 2nd character of
SD666
*10: On the Basic model QCPU, data is set at STOP to RUN or RSET instruction execution after parameter execution.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Corres-
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
• Stores information of parameter storage destination drive which is
enabled.
Parameter
Parameter enable 0: Drive 0 (Program memory)
SD670 enable drive S (Initial) New QnU
drive No. 1: Drive 1 (SRAM card)
information
2: Drive 2 (Flash card/ATA card)
4: Drive 4 (Standard ROM)
Indicates the status of the latch data backup function.
Presence/ Restore operation at

Status absence of turning power supply
backup data ON from OFF
0 No backup data Absent Restoring not executed
Restoring executed when
Restore ready turning power supply
1 ON from OFF the
completion
following time
Status of latch
Restore execution S (Status
SD671 data backup Status display 2 Restoring not executed New QnU
completion Present change)
function
3 Backup execution wait Restoring not executed
Restore repeated Restoring executed
4 execution ready when turning power
completion supply ON from OFF
• "2 Restore ready completion" is a status immediately after restoring

data.
"3 Backup execution wait" is a status after turning power supply ON from
OFF at "2 Restore ready completion".
• Stores the last 2 digits of year and month when backup is performed in
2-digit BCD code.

Backup time (Year
SD672 July, 1993
and month)
9307H
Year Month
• Stores the day and hour when backup is performed in 2-digit BCD code.

Backup time (Day 31st, 10 a.m.
SD673
and hour) 3110H
Day Hour
• Stores the minute and second when backup is performed in 2-digit BCD
code.
Backup time b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 Example:

SD674 Backup (Minute and 35 min., 48 sec. S (At write) New QnU
information second) 3548H
Minute Second
• Stores the first 2 digits of year and day of week when backup is
performed in BCD code.
1993, Friday
1905H
Backup time (Year Day of the week

SD675
and day of week) 0 Sunday
Higher digits of year (0 to 99) 1 Monday
2 Tuesday
3 Wednesday
4 Thursday
5 Friday
6 Saturday

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Corres-
(When Set) ACPU CPU
EMC AND LOW

D9
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
• Stores the last 2 digits of year and month when data is restored in 2-digit
BCD code.

Restore time
SD676 July, 1993
(Year and month)
9307H 10
Year Month
• Stores the day and time when data is restored in 2-digit BCD code.
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
Restore time (Day 31st, 10 a.m.
SD677
and time) 3110H
Day Hour
• Stores the minute and second when data is restored in 2-digit BCD
code.
11
Backup data Restore time b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 Example:
MAINTENANCE AND
SD678 restore (Minute and 35 min., 48 sec. S (Initial) New QnU
information second) 3548H
INSPECTION
Minute Second
• Stores the first 2 digits of year and day of week when data is restored in
BCD code.
12
1993, Friday
1905H
TROUBLESHOOTING
Restore time
SD679 (Year and day of Day of the week
week) 0 Sunday
2 Tuesday
3 Wednesday
4 Thursday
5 Friday
6 Saturday
Program Write (transfer)

Displays the status of writing (transferring) the program memory (flash
SD681 memory write status display S (At write) New QnU
ROM) in percentage. (0 to 100%) "0" is set when the write direction is set.
(transfer) status (percentage)
• Stores the index value for the number of write operations to the program
APPENDICES
SD682
memory (flash ROM) up to the present in BIN 32-bit value.
When the index value exceeds 100 thousand times, "FLASH ROM
Program
Write count index ERROR" (error code: 1610) occurs. (The index value is calculated even
memory write S (At write) New QnU
SD683 up to present when exceeding 100 thousand times.)
count index
Note) The write count does not equal to the index value.(Since a flash
ROM write life is prolonged by the system, 1 is added to the write count
index when writing is performed twice or so.).
Standard ROM Write (transfer)
Displays the status of writing (transferring) the standard ROM (flash ROM)
SD686 write (transfer) status display S (At write) New QnU
in percentage. (0 to 100%) "0" is set when the write direction is set.
status (percentage)
SD687 • Stores the index value for the number of write operations to the standard
ROM (flash ROM) up to the present in BIN 32-bit value.
When the index value exceeds 100 thousand times, "FLASH ROM
INDEX
ERROR" (error code: 1610) occurs. (The index value is calculated even
Standard ROM Write count index
when exceeding 100 thousand times.) S (At write) New QnU
SD688 write count index up to present
Note) The write count does not equal to the index value. (Since a flash
ROM write life is prolonged by the system, 1 is added to the write count
index when the total write capacity after the previous count up reaches
about 1M byte.)
• Specifies the maximum number of executing the instruction (SP.DEVST)
to write to the standard ROM per day.
Specification of Specification of • When the number of execution of writing to the standard ROM
writing to writing to standard instruction exceeds the number of times set by SD695, [OPERATION
SD695 U New QnU
standard ROM ROM instruction ERROR] (error code: 4113) occurs.
instruction count count • The setting range for SD695 is 0 to 32767. If 0 or value outside the
range is set, [OPERATION ERROR] (error code: 4113) occurs when
executing the writing to standard ROM instruction.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(6) Instruction-Related Registers

Corres-
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
Q00J/Q00/Q01
SD705 • During block operations, turning SM705 ON makes it possible to use the
Qn(H)
mask pattern being stored at SD705 (or at SD705 and SD706 if double
Mask pattern Mask pattern U New QnPH
words are being used) to operate on all data in the block with the
SD706 QnPRH
masked values.
QnA
Number of
empty
communication • Stores the number of empty blocks in the communications request area S (During
SD714 0 to 32 D9081 QnA
request for remote terminal modules connected to the MELSECNET/MINI-S3. execution)
registration
areas
• Patterns masked by use of the IMASK instruction are stored in the
SD715
following manner:
SD716 b15 b1 b0
IMASK
S (During
instruction mask Mask pattern SD715 l15 to l1 l0 New
execution)
pattern
SD716 l31 to l17 l16
SD717
SD717 l47 to l33 l32
SD718
Accumulator Accumulator • For use as replacement for accumulators used in A series programs. S/U New
SD719
Program No. Program No.

Stores the program number of the program to be loaded by the PLOADP
designation for designation for Qn(H)
SD720 instruction when designated. U New
PLOADP PLOADP QnPH
Designation range: 1 to 124
instruction instruction
No. of empty
areas for CC-
• Stores the number of empty registration area for the request for
Link S (During
SD730 0 to 32 communication with the intelligent device station connected to New
communication execution)
A(1S)J61QBT61. QnA
reguest register
area
• Special register that temporarily stores keyboard data input by means of S (During
SD736 PKEY input PKEY input New
the PKEY instruction. execution)

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Corres-
EMC AND LOW

DIRECTIVES
(When Set) ACPU CPU
VOLTAGE
D9
SD738
• Stores the message designated by the MSG instruction.
SD739
SD740
SD738
b15 to
2nd character
b8 b7 to
1st character
b0
10
SD741
SD739 4th character 3rd character
SD742 SD740 6th character 5th character
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
SD747
SD748
SD746
SD747
18th character
20th character
17th character
19th character
11
SD749
SD748 22nd character 21st character
SD750
MAINTENANCE AND
SD752
INSPECTION
SD753 Message SD752 30th character 29th character S (During
Message storage New QnA
SD754 storage SD753 32nd character 31st character execution)
SD755 SD754 34th character 33rd character

SD756
SD757
SD756 38th character 37th character 12
SD758
TROUBLESHOOTING
SD763 SD763 52nd character 51st character
SD764
SD765
SD766
SD767
APPENDICES
SD769
• Specify the limit of each PID loop as shown below.
SD774 PID limit setting b15 b1 b0 Qn(H)

0: With limit
to (for complete SD774 Loop16 to Loop2 Loop1 U New QnPRH
1: Without limit
SD775 derivative) QnU
SD775 Loop32 to Loop18 Loop17
PID limit setting
0: With limit b15 to b8 b7 to b1 b0
SD774 (for complete U New Q00J/Q00/Q01*9
1: Without limit
derivative) SD774 Loop8 to Loop2 Loop1

INDEX

12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Corres-
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
• Selects whether or not the data is refreshed when the COM instruction is
executed.
• Designation of SD778 is made valid when SM775 turns ON.
b15 b14 to b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
SD778 0/1 0 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1
I/O refresh
CC-Link refresh
MELSECNET/H
refresh
Automatic refresh of
intelligent function
Q00J/Q00/Q01*9
modules Qn(H)*11
U New
QnPH*12
Automatic refresh of
CPU shared memory
(Fixed to "0" for QnPRH
Redundant CPU)
Execution/non-
execution of
communication with
CPU module
• Refresh between multiple CPUs by COM instruction is performed under

the following occasion.
Receiving operation from other device: b4 of SD778(refresh in the CPU
b0 to b14: shared memory) is turned to 1.
0: Do not Sending operation from host CPU : b15 of SD778(communication with
refresh peripheral device is executed/nonexecuted) is turned to 0.
1: Refresh • Selects whether or not the data is refreshed when the COM instruction is
Refresh executed.
b15 bit
processing • Designation of SD778 is made valid when SM775 turns ON.
0: Communication
selection when
SD778 with CPU b15 b14 to b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
the COM
module is
instruction is SD778 0/1 0 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1
executed
executed I/O refresh
1: Communication
CC-Link refresh
withCPU
MELSECNET/G or
module is MELSECNET/H
nonexecuted Automatic refresh of
intelligent function
modules
Reading input/output
from group outside
multiple CPU system
Auto refresh using the
multiple CPU high speed U New Qn(H)*13
transmission area of
multiple CPU system
Execution/non-
execution of
communication with
CPU module
• Refresh between multiple CPUs by COM instruction is performed under

the following occasion.
Receiving operation from other device: b4 of SD778(refresh in the CPU
shared memory) is turned to 1.
Sending operation from host CPU : b15 of SD778(communication with
peripheral device is executed/nonexecuted) is turned to 0.
• When b2 (refresh of the MELSECNET/G and MELSECNET/H) of SD778
is 1, the MELSECNET/G and MELSECNET/H perform refresh.
Therefore, if there are many refresh points, processing time for the COM
instruction will be extended.


12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Corres-
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
• Selects whether or not the data is refreshed when the COM instruction is
executed.
• Designation of SD778 is made valid when SM775 turns ON.
10
b15 b14 to b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
SD778 0/1 0 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1
b0 to b14: I/O refresh
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
0: Do not CC-Link refresh
refresh Refresh of
MELSECNET/H and
1: Refresh
Refresh MELSECNET/G
b15 bit
processing Automatic refresh of
0: communication intelligent function
selection when
SD778 with peripheral modules U New QnU
the COM
instruction is
executed
device is
executed
Auto refresh using
QCPU standard area of
multiple CPU system and
11
1: communication reading input/output from
with peripheral group outside.
MAINTENANCE AND
device is Auto refresh using the
nonexecuted multiple CPU high speed
transmission area of
INSPECTION
multiple CPU system
Execution/non-
execution of
communication with
CPU module
Remaining No. 12
of simultaneous
execution of • Stores the remaining number of simultaneous execution of the CC-Link
TROUBLESHOOTING
SD780 0 to 32 U New QnA
CC-Link dedicated instructions.
dedicated
instruction
• Stores the mask patterns masked by the IMASK instruction as follows:
b15 b1 b0
SD781 l63 to l49 l48 Qn(H)
SD781 Mask pattern of
SD782 l79 to l65 l64 S (During QnPH
to IMASK Mask pattern New
execution) QnPRH
SD793 instruction
QnU
to
SD793 l255 to l241 l240
APPENDICES
• Stores the mask patterns masked by the IMASK instruction as follows:
b15 b1 b0
SD781 l63 to l49 l48
SD781 Mask pattern of
SD782 l79 to l65 l64 S (During
to IMASK Mask pattern New Q00J/Q00/Q01
execution)
SD785 instruction
to to
SD785 l127 to l113 l112
SD794 PID limit setting b15 b1 b0 Qn(H)*13

0: With limit
INDEX
to (for incomplete SD794 Loop16 to Loop2 Loop1 U New QnPRH

1: Without limit
SD795 derivative) QnU
SD795 Loop32 to Loop18 Loop17

PID limit setting
0: With limit b15 to b8 b7 b1 b0
SD794 (for incomplete U New Q00J/Q00/Q01*9
1: Without limit
derivative) SD794 Loop8 to Loop2 Loop1


12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Corres-
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
Maximum
number of blocks • Specifies the maximum number of blocks used for the multiple CPU
used for the high-speed transmission dedicated instruction (target CPU=CPU No.1).
multiple CPU When the dedicated instruction of Multiple CPU transmission is
high-speed executed to the CPU No.1, and the number of empty blocks of the U (At 1 scan
SD796 New
transmission dedicated instruction transmission area is less than the setting value of after RUN)
dedicated this register, SM796 is turned ON, which is used as the interlock signal
instruction for consecutive execution of the dedicated instruction of Multiple CPU
setting (for CPU transmission.
No.1)
Maximum
high-speed Maximum executed to the CPU No.2, and the number of empty blocks of the U (At 1 scan
SD797 New
transmission number of blocks dedicated instruction transmission area is less than the setting value of after RUN)
dedicated range for this register, SM797 is turned ON, which is used as the interlock signal
instruction dedicated for consecutive execution of the dedicated instruction of Multiple CPU
setting (for CPU instructions transmission.
No.2)
QnU*14*15
Maximum Range: 1 to 7
number of blocks (Default: 2 Or • Specifies the maximum number of blocks used for the multiple CPU
used for the when setting high-speed transmission dedicated instruction (target CPU=CPU No.3).
multiple CPU other than 1 to 7, When the dedicated instruction of Multiple CPU transmission is
high-speed the register executed to the CPU No.3, and the number of empty blocks of the U (At 1 scan
SD798
operates as 7).
New
No.3)
Maximum
high-speed executed to the CPU No.4, and the number of empty blocks of the U (At 1 scan
SD799 New
No.4)

*15: The range is from 1 to 9 for the Q03UDCPU, Q04UDHCPU, and Q06UDHCP whose first 5 digits of serial number is "10012" or earlier.
(Default: 2 Or when setting other than 1 to 9, the register operates as 9).

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(7) Debug
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
Corres-
(When Set) ACPU
D9
CPU
10
• Stores file name (with extension) from point in time when status latch
SD806
was conducted as ASCII code.
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
Status latch file Status latch file SD808 S (During
6th character 5th character New
SD809 name name execution)
SD810
SD810
1st character of
the extension
2EH(.) 11
SD811
SD811
MAINTENANCE AND
• Stores step number from point in time when status latch was conducted.
INSPECTION
SD812
SD812 Pattern QnA
SD813 Block No.
SD813 SD814 Step No./transition condition No.
SD814
D9055
12
Status latch *: Contents of pattern data S (During
Status latch step format
TROUBLESHOOTING
step execution)
15 14 to 4 3 2 1 0 change
(Bit number)
SD815 0 0 to 0 0
(Not used) SFC block designation present

(1)/absent (0)
SFC step designation present
SD816 (1)/absent (0)
SFC transition designation present
(1)/absent (0)
Stores the status of the debug function usage as shown below.

0: Forced ON/OFF for external I/O
1: Executional conditioned device test
2 to 15:Absent (0 fix)
APPENDICES
Debug
Debug function b15 to b2 b1 b0 S (Status
SD840 function New QnU*1
usage 0 change)
usage
Forced ON/OFF for external
I/O
Executional conditioned device
test
(0: Not used, 1: Used)
INDEX

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(8) Latch area

Corres-
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
Drive where Access file drive
S (Status
SD900 power was number during • Stores drive number if file was being accessed during power loss. New
change)
interrupted power loss
• Stores file name (with extension) in ASCII code if file was being
SD901
accessed during power loss.
SD903
File name active SD902 4th character 3rd character
Access file name S (Status
during power SD903 6th character 5th character New
SD904 during power loss change)
loss SD904 8th character 7th character
SD905 1st character of 2EH(.)
SD905
the extension
SD906 SD906
SD910 • Stored in sequence that PU key code was entered.

2nd character 1st character QnA
SD912 SD910
SD914
SD915
SD917 SD916 14th character 13th character S (During
RKEY input RKEY input New
SD918 SD917 16th character 15th character execution)
SD919
SD920
SD924
SD925
(9) Redundant CPU information (host system CPU information*1)

Corres-
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
Stores the completion status of the memory copy from control system to
standby system executed last.
History of Latest status of
1) Stores the same value as stored into SD1596 at normal completion/
memory copy memory copy
abnormal completion of the memory copy from control system to S (Status
SD952 from control from control New QnPRH
standby system. change)
system to system to standby
2) Backed up for a power failure, this special register holds the status of
standby system system
memory copy from control system to standby system executed last.
3) Cleared to 0 by latch clear operation.
*1: The host system CPU information is stored.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
(10)Remote password count
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
Corres-
VOLTAGE
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
SD979
Direct
MELSOFT
10
connection
SD980
Connection 1
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
to
to 16
SD995
MELSOFT
Count of unlock
connection Stores the count of unlock processing failures. S(Status
SD997 processing New QnU*1
using UDP Range: 0 to FFFEH (FFFFH when the limit is exceeded) change)
port
failures
11
MELSOFT
connection
MAINTENANCE AND
SD998
using TCP
port
INSPECTION
FTPcommuni
SD999
cation port
*1: This applies to the QnUDE(H)CPU.
12
(11) A to Q/QnA conversion
TROUBLESHOOTING
ACPU special registers D9000 to D9255 correspond to Q/QnA special registers
SD1000 to SD1255 after A to Q/QnA conversion.
(However, the Basic model QCPU, Redundant CPU, and Universal model QCPU do
not support the A to Q/QnA conversion.)
These special registers are all set by the system, and cannot be set by the user
program.
To set data by the user program, correct the program for use of the Q/QnACPU
special registers.
APPENDICES
However, some of SD1200 to SD1255 (corresponding to D9200 to 9255 before
conversion) can be set by the user program if they could be set by the user program
before conversion.
For details on the ACPU special registers, refer to the user's manual for the
corresponding CPU, and MELSECNET or MELSECNET/B Data Link System
Reference Manuals.
INDEX
Remark
Supplemental explanation on "Special Register for Modification" column
For the device numbers for which a special register for modification is
specified, modify it to the special register for QCPU/QnACPU.
For the device numbers for which is specified, special register after
conversion can be used.
Device numbers for which is specified do not function for QCPU/
QnACPU.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Special
ACPU Special
Register Corresponding
Special Register for Name Meaning Details
after CPU
Register Modification
Conversion
• When fuse blown modules are detected, the first I/O number of the
lowest number of the detected modules is stored in hexadecimal.
(Example: When fuses of Y50 to 6F output modules have blown,
"50" is stored in hexadecimal)
Number of module
D9000 SD1000 – Fuse blown To monitor the number by peripheral devices, perform monitor
with blown fuse
operation given in hexadecimal.
(Cleared when all contents of SD1100 to SD1107 are reset to 0.)
• Fuse blow check is executed also to the output modules of remote
I/O stations.
• Stores the module numbers corresponding to setting switch
numbers or base slot numbers when fuse blow occurred.
AJ02 I/O module Extension base unit QnA

Setting Stored Base unit Stored Qn(H)
switch data slot No. data QnPH
0 0 0 4
1 1 1 5
Number of module
D9001 SD1001 – Fuse blown 2 2 2 6
with blown fuse
3 3 3 7
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
• For the remote I/O station, the value of (module I/O No./10H) + 1 is
stored.
• If I/O modules, of which data are different from data entered, are
detected when the power is turned on, the first I/O number of the
lowest number unit among the detected units is stored in
hexadecimal. (Storing method is the same as that of SD1000.) QnA
I/O module I/O module verify
D9002 SD1002 – To monitor the number by peripheral devices, perform monitor Qn(H)
verify error error module number
operation given in hexadecimal. QnPH
(Cleared when all contents of SD1116 to SD1123 are reset to 0.)
• I/O module verify check is executed also to the modules of remote
I/O terminals.
• Error status of the MINI(S3) link detected on loaded AJ71PT32(S3)
is stored.
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
8th 7th 6th 5th 4th 3rd2nd1st 8th 7th 6th 5th 4th 3rd 2nd1st
MINI link
Stores setting status
D9004 SD1004 – master module Bits which correspond to faulty Bits which correspond to the signals of QnA
made at parameters AJ71PT32(S3) are turned on. AJ71PT32(S3), shown below, are
errors
turned on as the signals are turned
on.
Hardware error (X0/X20)
MINI(S3) link error datection
(X6/X26)
MINI(S3) link
communication error
(X7/X27)
• When the AC power supply module is used, 1 is added at

QnA
occurrence of an instantaneous power failure of within 20ms.
Qn(H)
(The value is stored in BIN code.) It is reset when the power supply
QnPH
is switched from OFF to ON.
• When the DC power supply module is used, 1 is added at
AC DOWN Number of times for occurrence of an instantaneous power failure of within 10ms. Qn(H)
D9005 SD1005 –
counter AC DOWN (The value is stored in BIN code.) It is reset when the power supply QnPH
• When the DC power supply module is used, 1 is added at
occurrence of an instantaneous power failure of within 1ms.
QnA
(The value is stored in BIN code.) It is reset when the power supply
QnA
Self-diagnostic Self-diagnostic error • When error is found as a result of self-diagnosis, error number is
D9008 SD1008 SD0 Qn(H)
error number stored in BIN code.
QnPH

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Special
EMC AND LOW

ACPU Special
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
after CPU
Conversion
• When one of F0 to 2047 is turned on by OUT F or

SET F , the F number, which has been detected earliest among Qn(H)
QnPH
10
the F numbers which have turned on, is stored in BIN code.
Q2AS
• SD62 can be cleared by RST F or LEDR instruction. Q2A
If another F number has been detected, the clearing of SD62
causes the next number to be stored in SD62.
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
F number at which
Annunciator
D9009 SD1009 SD62 external failure has • When one of F0 to 2047 is turned on by OUT F or SET F , the
detection
occurred F number, which has been detected earliest among the F numbers
which have turned on, is stored in BIN code.
Q3A
• SD62 can be cleared by executing RST F or LEDR Q4A
instruction or moving INDICATOR RESET switch on CPU module
front to ON position.
Q4AR
11
If another F number has been detected, clearing of SD62 stores
the next F number into SD62.
MAINTENANCE AND
• When operation error has occurred during execution of application
Step number at which instruction, the step number, at which the error has occurred, is
INSPECTION
D9010 SD1010 Error step operation error has stored in BIN code.
occurred. Thereafter, each time operation error occurs, the contents of
SD1010 are renewed.
• When operation error has occurred during execution of application
Step number at which instruction, the step number, at which the error has occurred, is
D9011 SD1011 Error step operation error has
occurred.
stored in BIN code. Since the step number is stored into SD1011
when SM1011 turns from OFF to ON, the data of SD1011 is not
Qn(H)
QnPH 12
updated unless SM1011 is cleared by a user program.
TROUBLESHOOTING
• The I/O control mode set is returned in any of the following
numbers:
I/O control I/O control mode
D9014 SD1014 0: Both input and output in direct mode
mode number
1: Input in refresh mode, output in direct mode
3: Both input and output in refresh mode
• The operation status of CPU as shown below are stored in SD203.
Remote RUN/STOP CPU key switch

by computer
0 RUN
APPENDICES
0 RUN
1 STOP
1 STOP QnA
2 PAUSE 1
Operating Operating status of 2 PAUSE 1
D9015 SD1015 SD203 3 STEP RUN Qn(H)
status of CPU CPU
QnPH
Remains the same in
remote RUN/STOP
mode.
Status in program Remote RUN/STOP
by parameter setting
0 Except below
0 RUN
STOP
1 Instruction 1 STOP
execution
2 PAUSE 1
*1: When the CPU mdoule is in RUN mode and SM1040 is off, the
CPU module remains in RUN mode if changed to PAUSE mode.
INDEX

12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Special
ACPU Special
after CPU
Conversion
0: Main program
(ROM)
1: Main program
(RAM)
2: Subprogram 1
(RAM)
3: Subprogram 2
(RAM)
4: Subprogram 3
(RAM)
5: Subprogram 1
(ROM)
Program • Indicates which sequence program is run presently. One value of 0
D9016 SD1016 6: Subprogram 2
number to B is stored in BIN code.
(ROM)
7: Subprogram 3
(ROM)
8: Main program
(E2PROM)
9: Subprogram 1
(E2PROM)
A: Subprogram 2
(E2PROM)
B: Subprogram 3
(E2PROM)
• If scan time is smaller than the content of SD520, the value is
Minimum scan time
D9017 SD1017 SD524 Scan time newly stored at each END. Namely, the minimum value of scan
(10 ms units)
time is stored into SD520 in BIN code.
Scan time • At every END, the scan time is stored in BIN code and always
D9018 SD1018 SD520 Scan time
(10 ms units) rewritten.
• If scan time is larger than the content of SD526, the value is newly
Maximum scan time
D9019 SD1019 SD526 Scan time stored at each END. Namely, the maximum value of scan time is
(10 ms units) QnA
stored into SD526 in BIN code.
Qn(H)
• Sets the interval between consecutive program starts in multiples
QnPH
Constant scan time of 10 ms.
D9020 SD1020 Constant scan (User sets in 10 ms 0 : No setting
units) 1 to 200 : Set. Program is executed at intervals of (set
value) 10 ms.
Scan time • At every END, the scan time is stored in BIN code and always
D9021 SD1021 – Scan time
(1 ms units) rewritten.
• When the PC CPU starts running, it starts counting 1 every
1 second second.
D9022 SD1022 SD412 Count in units of 1s.
counter • It starts counting up from 0 to 32767, then down to -32768 and
then again up to 0. Counting repeats this routine.
• The year (last two digits) and month are stored as BCD code as
shown below.
Clock data b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 Example:

D9025 SD1025 – Clock data 1987, July
(year, month)
H8707
Year Month
• The day and hour are stored as BCD code as shown below.
Clock data 31st, 10 a.m.
D9026 SD1026 – Clock data
(day, hour) H3110
Day Hour
• The minute and second are stored as BCD code as shown below.

Clock data 35 min, 48 sec.
(minute, second) H3548
Minute Second

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Special
EMC AND LOW

ACPU Special
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
after CPU
Conversion
• The day of the week is stored as BCD code as shown below.
Example:
Friday
10
H0005
Day of the week
Clock data
INSTALLATION
0
LOADING AND
Sunday
(day of week)
Always set "0". 1 Monday
2 Tuesday
3 Wednesday
4 Thursday
5 Friday
6 Saturday
D9035 SD1035 SD648

Extension file
Use block No.
• Stores the block No. of the extension file register being used in 11
register BCD code.
MAINTENANCE AND
• Designate the device number for the extension file register for
direct read and write in 2 words at SD1036 and SD1037 in BIN
data.
INSPECTION
D9036 SD1036 Use consecutive numbers beginning with R0 of block No. 1 to
designate device numbers.
Device number when Extension file register
Extension file
individual devices 0
registerfor to Block No.1
from extension file
designation of
12
16383 area
register are directly
device number
accessed 16384 Block No.2
to area
TROUBLESHOOTING
D9037 SD1037 SD1037,SD1036
Device No. (BIN data)
to
• Sets priority of ERROR LEDs which illuminate (or flicker) to

indicate errors with error code numbers.
D9038 SD1038 SD207 Priorities 1 to 4 QnA
• Configuration of the priority setting areas is as shown below.
Qn(H)
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 QnPH
LED display
SD207 Priority 4 Priority 3 Priority 2 Priority 1
priority ranking
SD208 Priority 7 Priority 6 Priority 5
D9039 SD1039 SD208 Priorities 5 to 7
APPENDICES
• For details, refer to the applicable CPUs User's Manual and the
ACPU Programming manual (Fundamentals).
• Turned on/off with a peripheral device.

When STRA or STRAR is executed, the value stored in
For sampling Step or time during SD1044 is used as the sampling trace condition.
D9044 SD1044
trace sampling trace At scanning--------0
At time--------------Time (10 msec unit)
The value is stored into SD1044 in BIN code.
• Stores the block number of the expansion file register which is
used as the work area for the execution of a SFC program in a
Work area for Block number of
D9049 SD1049 binary value.
SFC extension file register
• Stores "0" if an empty area of 16K bytes or smaller, which cannot
INDEX
be expansion file register No. 1, is used or if SM320 is OFF.

• Stores error code of errors occurred in the SFC program in BIN
code.
0 : No error
SFC program Error code generated 80: SFC program parameter error
D9050 SD1050
error number by SFC program 81: SFC code error
82: Number of steps of simultaneous execution exceeded
83: Block start error
84: SFC program operation error
• Stores the block number in which an error occurred in the SFC
Block number where
D9051 SD1051 Error block program in BIN code.
error occurred
In the case of error 83 the starting block number is stored.
• Stores the step number, where error code 84 occurred in an SFC
Step number where program, in BIN value.
D9052 SD1052 Error step
error occurred • Stores "0" when error code 80, 81 or 82 occurred.
• Stores the block stating step number when error code 83 occurs.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Special
ACPU Special
after CPU
Conversion
Transition condition • Stores the transition condition number, where error code 84 occurred
D9053 SD1053 Error transition number where error in an SFC program, in BIN value.
occurred Stores "0" when error code 80, 81, 82 or 83 occurred.
Sequence step • Stores the sequence step number of transfer condition and
Error sequence
D9054 SD1054 number where error operation output in which error 84 occurred in the SFC program in
step
occurred BIN code.
• Stores the step number when status latch is executed. QnA
• Stores the step number in a binary value if status latch is executed Qn(H)
in a main sequence program. QnPH
• Stores the block number and the step number if status latch is
Status latch
executed in a SFC program.
D9055 SD1055 SD812 execution step Status latch step
number Block No. Step No.
(BIN) (BIN)
Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits
• Stores the software version of the internal system in ASCII code.

Stored into lower
Upper byte Lower byte byte
Undefind value in
Software Software version of higher byte
D9060 SD1060 SD392 For version "A", for example, "41H" is stored. QnA
version internal software
Note: The software version of the initial system may differ from the
version indicated by the version information printed on the rear
of the case.
Programmable
Data check of serial • In the self-loopback test of the serial communication module, the QnA
controller
D9072 SD1072 communication serial communication module writes/reads data automatically to Qn(H)
communication
module make communication checks. QnPH
check
Number of Number of empty
empty blocks in blocks in • Stores the number of empty blocks in the communication request
D9081 SD1081 SD714 communications communications registration area to the remote terminal module connected to the QnA
request request registration MELSECNET/MINI-S3 master unit, A2CCPU or A52GCPU.
registrtion area area
• Sets the time check time of the data link instructions (ZNRD,
Register for ZNWR) for the MELSECNET/10.
D9085 SD1085 setting time 1 s to 65535 s • Setting range : 1 s to 65535 s (1 to 65535)
check value • Setting unit :1s
• Default value : 10 s (If 0 has been set, default 10 s is applied)
Number of
Number of special
special • For details, refer to the manual of each microcomputer program QnA
D9090 SD1090 functions modules
functions package. Qn(H)
over
modules over QnPH
Detailed error Self-diagnosis
D9091 SD1091 • Stores the detail code of cause of an instruction error.
code detailed error code
Head I/O • Stores the first two digits of the head I/O number of the I/O module,
Head I/O number of I/
number of I/O which will be dismounted/mounted online (with power on), in BIN
D9094 SD1094 SD251 O module to be
module to be value.
replaced
replaced Example) Input module X2F0 H2F
• The DIP switch information of the CPU module is stored in the
following format.
0: OFF
1: ON
b15 to b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
DIP switch DIP switch D9095 0 Qn(H)
D9095 SD1095 SD200
information information QnPH
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
SW5

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
Special
EMC AND LOW

ACPU Special
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
after CPU
Conversion
• Output module numbers (in units of 16 points), of which fuses have
D9100 SD1100
10
blown, are entered in bit pattern. (Preset output module numbers
when parameter setting has been performed.)
D9101 SD1101
b15 b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
D9102 SD1102 1 1
SD1100 0 0 0 (YC0)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
(Y80)
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
D9103 SD1103 Bit pattern in units of SD1101 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Fuse blown 16 points, indicating
– 1 1
module the modules whose SD1107 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D9104 SD1104 Y7 Y7
fuses have blown B0 30
D9105 SD1105 Indicates fuse blow.
D9106 SD1106 • Fuse blow check is executed also to the output module of remote I/
11
O station.
MAINTENANCE AND
(If normal status is restored, clear is not performed. Therefore, it is
D9107 SD1107
required to perform clear by user program.)
INSPECTION
D9108 SD1108
• Set the value of the step transition monitoring timer and the
annunciator number (F number) that will be turned ON when the
D9109 SD1109 monitoring timer times out.
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
D9110 SD1110
Step transfer Timer setting valve
12
D9111 SD1111 – monitoring timer and the F number at
TROUBLESHOOTING
setting time out F number setting Timer time limit setting
(02 to 255) (1 to 255 s:(1 s units))
D9112 SD1112
• By turning ON any of SM1108 to SM1114, the monitoring timer
D9113 SD1113 starts. If the transition condition following a step which corresponds QnA
to the timer is not established within set time, set annunciator (F) is Qn(H)
turned on.) QnPH
D9114 SD1114
• When I/O modules, of which data are different from those entered
D9116 SD1116
at power-ON, have been detected, the I/O module numbers (in
units of 16 points) are entered in bit pattern. (Preset I/O module
D9117 SD1117 numbers set in parmeters when parameter setting has been
performed.)
APPENDICES
D9118 SD1118
b15 b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
1
SD1116 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 XY
D9119 SD1119 Bit pattern, in units of 0
I/O module 16 points, indicating 1
– SD1117 0 0 0 0 0 0 XY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
verification error the modules with 190
D9120 SD1120
verification errors. 1
SD1123 0 0 0 0 XY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7B0
D9121 SD1121
Indicates an I/O module verify error.
D9122 SD1122
• I/O module verify check is executed also to remote I/O station
modules.
D9123 SD1123 (If normal status is restored, clear is not performed. Therefore, it is
required to perform clear by user program.)
INDEX
• When one of F0 to 255 (F0 to 2047 for AuA and AnU) is turned on
by SET F 1 is added to the contents of SD63. When RST F or
Number of LEDR instruction is executed, 1 is subtracted from the contents

Number of annuciator of SD63.
D9124 SD1124 SD63 annuciator
detections (If the INDICATOR RESET switch is provided to the CPU module,
detections
pressing the switch can execute the same processing.)
• Quantity, which has been turned on by SET F is stored into
SD63 in BIN code. The value of SD63 is maximum 8.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Special
ACPU Special
after CPU
Conversion
• When any of F0 to 2047 is turned on by SET F , the annunciator

D9125 SD1125 SD64 numbers (F numbers) that are turned on in order are registered into
D9125 to D9132.
• The F number turned off by RST F is erased from any of D9125
to D9132, and the F numbers stored after the erased F number are
D9126 SD1126 SD65
shifted to the preceding registerers.
By executing LEDR instruction, the contents of SD64 to SD71
are shifted upward by one. (For A3N, A3HCPU, it can be
D9127 SD1127 SD66 performed by use of INDICATOR RESET switch on front of CPU
module.)
When there are 8 annunciator detections, the 9th one is not stored
into SD64 to SD71 even if detected.
D9128 SD1128 SD67 SET SET SET RST SET SET SET SET SET SET SET
F50 F25 F99 F25 F15 F70 F65 F38 F110 F151 F210 LEDR
Annunciator QnA
Annunciator 0 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 99
detection SD62 Qn(H)
D9129 SD1129 SD68 detection number
number QnPH
SD63 0 1 2 3 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 8
SD64 0 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 99
D9130 SD1130 SD69
SD65 0 0 25 25 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 15
SD66 0 0 0 99 0 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 70
D9131 SD1131 SD70 SD67 0 0 0 0 0 0 70 70 70 70 70 70 65
SD68 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 65 65 65 65 65 38
SD69 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 38 38 38 38 110
D9132 SD1132 SD71 SD70 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 110 110 110 151
SD71 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 151 151 210

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(12) Special register list dedicated for QnA
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
Special
ACPU Special
Register
after
Conversion
Modification
CPU
10
Stores the execution result of the ZNRD (word device read)
0 : Normal end instruction
ZNRD 2 : ZNRD instruction • ZNRD instruction setting fault ....Faulty setting of the ZNRD
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
instruction setting fault instruction constant, source, and/
processing 3 : Error at relevant or destination.
D9200 SD1200 –
result station • Corresponding station error .......One of the stations is not
(LRDP for 4 : Relevant station communicating.
ACPU) ZNRD execution • ZNRD cannot be executed in the corresponding station.....
disabled The specified station is a remote I/
O station.
Stores the execution result of the ZNWR (word device write)
11
0 : Normal end instruction.
MAINTENANCE AND
ZNWR 2 : ZNWR instruction • ZNWR instruction setting fault....Faulty setting of the ZNWR
instruction setting fault instruction constant, source, and/
processing 3 : Error at relevant or destination.
D9201 SD1201 –
INSPECTION
result station • Corresponding station error .......One of the stations is not
(LWTP for 4 : Relevant station communicating.
ACPU) ZNWR execution • ZNWR cannot be executed in the corresponding station.....
disabled The specified station is a remote I/
O station.
Stores whether the slave station corresponds to MELSECNET or
MELSECNET II. 12
• Bits corresponding to the MELSECNET II stations become "1."
TROUBLESHOOTING
• Bits corresponding to the MELSECNET stations or unconnected
Stores conditions for become "0."
D9202 SD1202 –
up to numbers 1 to 16
Device
Bit
number b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
SD1202 L16 L15 L14 L13 L12 L11 L10 L9 L8 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 L1
Local station SD1203 L32 L31 L30 L29 L28 L27 L26 L25 L24 L23 L22 L21 L20 L19 L18 L17
link type SD1241 L48 L47 L46 L45 L44 L43 L42 L41 L40 L39 L38 L37 L36 L35 L34 L33
• If a local station goes down during the operation, the contents

Stores conditions for before going down are retained.
D9203 SD1203 – up to numbers 17 to QnA
Contents of SD1224 to SD1227 and SD1228 to SD1231 are ORed.
32 If the corresponding bit is "0", the corresponding bit of the special
register above becomes valid.
APPENDICES
• If the host (master) station goes down, the contents before going
down are also retained.
Stores the present path status of the data link.
• Data link in forward loop
Master
station Station Station
Station n
No.1 No.2
0 : Forward loop,
during data link
1 : Reverse loop,
during data link Forward loop Reverse loop
2 : Loopback
• Data link in reverse loop
implemented in
INDEX
forward/reverse Master
directions station Station Station Station n
D9204 SD1204 – Link status 3 : Loopback No.1 No.2
implemented only
in forward
direction
4 : Loopback
Forward loop Reverse loop
implemented only
in reverse • Loopback implemented in forward/reverse directions
direction
5 : Data link disabled Master
station Station Station Station Station n
No.1 No.2 No.3
Forward loopback Reverse loopback

12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Special
ACPU Special
after CPU
Conversion
• Loopback in forward loop only
0 : Forward loop,
during data link Master
1 : Reverse loop, station Station Station Station Station n
during data link No.1 No.2 No.3
2 : Loopback
implemented in
forward/reverse
directions Forward loopback
D9204 SD1204 – Link status 3 : Loopback
implemented only • Loopback in reverse loop only
in forward Master
direction station Station Station Station Station n
4 : Loopback No.1 No.2 No.3
implemented only
in reverse
direction
5 : Data link disabled Reverse loopback
Stores the local or remote I/O station number at which loopback is

being executed.
Station Station that Master
D9205 SD1205 – implementing implemented forward station Station Station Station Station n
loopback loopback No.1 No.2 No.3
Forward loopback Reverse loopback

Station Station that
In the above example, 1 is stored into D9205 and 3 into D9206.
D9206 SD1206 – implementing implemented reverse
If data link returns to normal status (data link in forward loop), values
loopback loopback
in D9205 and D9206 remain 1 and 3. To return them to "0", therefore,
use a sequence program or perform reset operation.
Stores the number of retry times due to transmission error.
Number of Stored as cumulative
D9210 SD1210 – Count stops at maximum of "FFFFH" .
retries value
To return the value to "0", perform reset operation. QnA
Stores the number of times the loop line has been switched to reverse
Number of
Stored as cumulative loop or loopback.
D9211 SD1211 – times loop
value Count stops at maximum of "FFFFH".
selected
To return the value to "0", perform reset operation.
Local station Stores conditions for Stores the local station numbers which are in STOP or PAUSE mode.
D9212 SD1212 –
operation status up to numbers 1 to 16
Device
Bit
Stores conditions for SD1212 L16 L15 L14 L13 L12 L11 L10 L9 L8 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 L1
Local station
D9213 SD1213 – up to numbers 17 to SD1213 L32 L31 L30 L29 L28 L27 L26 L25 L24 L23 L22 L21 L20 L19 L18 L17
operation status
32 SD1214 L48 L47 L46 L45 L44 L43 L42 L41 L40 L39 L38 L37 L36 L35 L34 L33
Stores conditions for
Local station
D9214 SD1214 – up to numbers 33 to When a local station is switched to STOP or PAUSE mode, the bit
operation status
48 corresponding to the station number in the register becomes "1".
Example: When station 7 switches to STOP mode, b6 in SD1212
Stores conditions for becomes "1" , and when SD1212 is monitored, its value is
Local station
D9215 SD1215 – up to numbers 49 to "64 (40H)".
operation status
64
Local station Stores the local station numbers which are in error.
D9216 SD1216 – error detect
up to numbers 1 to 16 Bit
status Device
Local station Stores conditions for SD1216 L16 L15 L14 L13 L12 L11 L10 L9 L8 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 L1
D9217 SD1217 – error detect up to numbers 17 to SD1217 L32 L31 L30 L29 L28 L27 L26 L25 L24 L23 L22 L21 L20 L19 L18 L17
status 32 SD1218 L48 L47 L46 L45 L44 L43 L42 L41 L40 L39 L38 L37 L36 L35 L34 L33
Local station Stores conditions for
D9218 SD1218 – error detect up to numbers 33 to
If a local station detects an error, the bit corresponding to the station
status 48
number becomes "1".
Local station Stores conditions for Example: When station 6 and 12 detect an error, b5 and 11 in
D9219 SD1219 – error detect up to numbers 49 to SD1216 become "1", and when SD1216 is monitored, its
status 64 value is "2080 (820H)".

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
EMC AND LOW

Special
DIRECTIVES
ACPU Special
VOLTAGE
after CPU
Conversion
Local station
parameters
non-conforming;
10
D9220 SD1220 – remote I/O
up to numbers 1 to 16
station I/O
assignment
Stores the local station numbers which contain mismatched
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
error
parameters or of remote station numbers for which incorrect I/O
Local station assignment has been made.
parameters
Device Bit
non-conforming; Stores conditions for number b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
D9221 SD1221 – remote I/O up to numbers 17 to
station I/O 32
assignment
error
SD1222 L48 L47 L46 L45 L44 L43 L42 L41 L40 L39 L38 L37 L36 L35 L34 L33 11
Local station
MAINTENANCE AND
parameters
non-conforming; Stores conditions for If a local station acting as the master station of tier three detects a
D9222 SD1222 – remote I/O up to numbers 33 to parameter error or a remote I/O station whose I/O assignment is
INSPECTION
station I/O 48 abnormal, the bit of the device number corresponding to the station
assignment number of that local station or remote I/O station turns to "1".
error Example: When local station 5 and remote I/O station 14 detect an
error, b4 and b13 in SD1220 become "1" , and when
Local station
SD1220 is monitored, its value is "8208 (2010H) " .
parameters
D9223 SD1223 –
non-conforming;
remote I/O
up to numbers 49 to
12
station I/O 64
TROUBLESHOOTING
assignment
error
Local station
and remote I/O
D9224 SD1224 – station initial
up to numbers 1 to 16 Stores the local or remote station numbers while they are
communications communicating the initial data with their relevant master station. QnA
underway
Device Bit
Local station
and remote I/O Stores conditions for
SD1224 L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R
D9225 SD1225 – station initial up to numbers 17 to 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
communications 32 32 31 30
L/R L/R L/R
29
L/R
28
L/R
27
L/R
26
L/R
25
L/R
24
L/R
23
L/R
22
L/R
21
L/R
20
L/R
19
L/R
18
L/R
17
L/R
SD1226
underway 48 47 46
L/R L/R L/R
45
L/R
44
L/R
43
L/R
42
L/R
41
L/R
40
L/R
39
L/R
38
L/R
37
L/R
36
L/R
35
L/R
34
L/R
33
L/R
SD1227 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
Local station
APPENDICES
D9226 SD1226 – station initial up to numbers 33 to The bit corresponding to the station number which is currently
communications 48 communicating the initial settings becomes "1" .
underway Example: When stations 23 and 45 are communicating, b6 of SD1225
Local station and b12 of SD1226 become "1", and when SD1225 is
and remote I/O Stores conditions for monitored, its value is "64 (40H)", and when SD1226 is
D9227 SD1227 – station initial up to numbers 49 to monitored, its value is "4096 (1000H) " .
communications 64
underway
Local station Stores the local or remote station numbers which are in error.
D9228 SD1228 – and remote I/O
up to numbers 1 to 16 Bit
station error Device
INDEX
Local station Stores conditions for 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

D9229 SD1229 – and remote I/O up to numbers 17 to SD1229 L/R L/R
32 31
L/R
30
L/R
29
L/R
28
L/R
27
L/R
26
L/R
25
L/R
24
L/R
23
L/R
22
L/R
21
L/R
20
L/R
19
L/R
18
L/R
17
L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R L/R
station error 32 SD1230 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
Local station Stores conditions for
D9230 SD1230 – and remote I/O up to numbers 33 to
station error 48 The bit corresponding to the station number with the error becomes
"1" .
Local station Stores conditions for Example: When local station 3 and remote I/O station 14 have an
D9231 SD1231 – and remote I/O up to numbers 49 to error, b2 and b13 of SD1228 become "1", and when
station error 64 SD1228 is monitored, its value is "8196 (2004H)".

12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Special
ACPU Special
after CPU
Conversion
Local station
D9232 SD1232 –
station loop up to numbers 1 to 8
error Stores the local or remote station number at which a forward or
Local station reverse loop error has occurred
and remote I/O Stores conditions for Bit
D9233 SD1233 – Device
station loop up to numbers 9 to 16 number b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
error R F R F R F R F R F R F R F R F
SD1232
Local station L/R8 L/R7 L/R6 L/R5 L/R4 L/R3 L/R2 L/R1
Stores conditions for R F R F R F R F R F R F R F R F
and remote I/O
D9234 SD1234 – up to numbers 17 to SD1233
L/R16 L/R15 L/R14 L/R13 L/R12 L/R11 L/R10 L/R9
station loop
24 R F R F R F R F R F R F R F R F
error SD1234
Local station
Stores conditions for R F R F R F R F R F R F R F R F
and remote I/O SD1235
D9235 SD1235 – up to numbers 25 to L/R32 L/R31 L/R30 L/R29 L/R28 L/R27 L/R26 L/R25
station loop
32 R F R F R F R F R F R F R F R F
error SD1236
Local station R F R F R F R F R F R F R F R F
Stores conditions for SD1237
and remote I/O L/R48 L/R47 L/R46 L/R45 L/R44 L/R43 L/R42 L/R41
D9236 SD1236 – up to numbers 33 to
station loop R F R F R F R F R F R F R F R F
40 SD1238
error L/R56 L/R55 L/R54 L/R53 L/R52 L/R51 L/R50 L/R49
Local station R F R F R F R F R F R F R F R F
Stores conditions for SD1239
and remote I/O L/R64 L/R63 L/R62 L/R61 L/R60 L/R59 L/R58 L/R57
station loop
48 "F" in the above table indicates a forward loop line, and "R" a reverse
error
loop line. The bit of the device number corresponding to the station
Local station number of the local station or remote I/O station that has a forward
and remote I/O loop line or reverse loop line error.
station loop Example: When the forward loop line of station 5 has an error, b8 of
56
error SD1232 become "1", and when SD1232 is monitored, its
Local station value is "256 (100H)".
and remote I/O
station loop
64
error
Stores the number of times the following transmission errors have
Number of
been detected: QnA
times Stores cumulative
D9240 SD1240 – CRC, OVER, AB. IF
communications total of receive errors
Count is made to a maximum of FFFFH.
errors detected
To return the value to "0", perform reset operation.
Stores whether the slave station corresponds to MELSECNET or
MELSECNET II.
• Bits corresponding to the MELSECNET II stations become "1."
Stores conditions for • Bits corresponding to the MELSECNET stations or unconnected
D9241 SD1241 up to numbers 33 to become "0."
48 Bit
Device
– SD1241 L48 L47 L46 L45 L44 L43 L42 L41 L40 L39 L38 L37 L36 L35 L34 L33
link type
• If a local station goes down during the operation, the contents

Stores conditions for before going down are retained.
D9242 SD1242 up to numbers 49 to Contents of SD1224 to SD1227 and SD1228 to SD1231 are ORed.
64 If the corresponding bit is "0", the corresponding bit of the special
register above becomes valid.
• If the host (master) station goes down, the contents before going
down are also retained.
Station number
Stores station
D9243 SD1243 – information for Allows a local station to confirm its own station number
number (0 to 64)
host station
Number of link Stores number of

D9244 SD1244 – Indicates the number of slave stations in one loop.
device stations slave stations
Stores the number of times the following transmission errors have

Receive error Stores cumulative been detected: CRC, OVER, AB. IF
D9245 SD1245 –
detection count total of receive errors Count is made to a maximum of FFFFH. To return the value to "0",
perform reset operation.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
EMC AND LOW

Special
DIRECTIVES
ACPU Special
VOLTAGE
after CPU
Conversion
D9248 SD1248 –
Local station
operation status
up to numbers 1 to 16 Stores the local station number which is in STOP or PAUSE mode.
10
Device Bit
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
operation status SD1249 L32 L31 L30 L29 L28 L27 L26 L25 L24 L23 L22 L21 L20 L19 L18 L17
32
Local station
D9250 SD1250 – up to numbers 33 to The bit corresponding to the station number which is in STOP or
operation status
48 PAUSE mode, becomes "1".

Example: When local stations 7 and 15 are in STOP mode, b6 and
b14 of SD1248 become "1", and when SD1248 is 11
Local station monitored, its value is "16448 (4040H)".
operation status
QnA
MAINTENANCE AND
64
Local station Stores conditions for Stores the local station number other than the host, which is in error.
INSPECTION
D9252 SD1252 –
error conditions up to numbers 1 to 16 Device Bit
number
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Stores conditions for SD1252 L16 L15 L14 L13 L12 L11 L10 L9 L8 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 L1
Local station
D9253 SD1253 – up to numbers 17 to SD1253 L32 L31 L30 L29 L28 L27 L26 L25 L24 L23 L22 L21 L20 L19 L18 L17
error conditions
32
12
Local station
D9254 SD1254 – up to numbers 33 to The bit corresponding to the station number which is in error,
error conditions
TROUBLESHOOTING
48 becomes "1".
Stores conditions for Example: When local station 12 is in error, b11 of SD1252 becomes
Local station "1", and when SD1252 is monitored, its value is "2048
error conditions (800H) ".
64
APPENDICES
INDEX

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(13) QCPU with built-in Ethernet port

Corres-
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
Stores the operation result of the time setting function.
Stores
Operation 0: Not executed
SD1270 operation result
result 1: Success
.
FFFFH: Failure
Stores years (last two digits of the Christian Era) and monthes
by two digits of BCD code.
SD1271 July, 1993
9307H
Year Month
Stores dates and hours acquired with time setting function by
two digits of BCD code.
SD1272 31st, 10 a.m.
3110H
Day Hour
Time setting function
Stores minutes and seconds acquired with time setting function

Stores time by two digits of BCD code.
Execution acquired with b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 Example: S (status
SD1273 35 min., 48 sec.
time time setting change)
function 3548H
Minute Second
Stores years (first two digits of the Christian Era) and days
acquierd with time setting function.
1993, Friday
1905H
New QnU*1
SD1274 Day of the week
0 Sunday
2 Tuesday
3 Wednesday
4 Thursday
5 Friday
6 Saturday
Stores time Stores time taken from transmission to SNTP server until time is
Required
required for set up at CPU.
SD1275 response
clock time Range: 0 to FFFEH (Unit: ms)
time
aquisition. FFFFH when the above limit is exceeded.
Specify this when a connection is to be invalidated forcibly on
the user program. If invalidation is specified for a connection, it
stops communication and does not respond. (When a remote
SD1276 password is used and frequent unlock processing errors have
occurred on a connection, this is useful for temporarily inhibiting
access to the connection.)
b15b14 to b2 b0
SD1276
Forced Specifies forced Connection 1

Connection 2
connection connection to
Connection 15
U
invalidation invalidation. Connection 16
b15b14 to b12 to b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
SD1277 0 0 0
SD1277 MELSOFT communication

port (UDP/IP)
MELSOFT communication
port (TCP/IP)
FTP communication port
Directconnection to
MESOFT
0: Valid (default)
1: Invalid
*1: This applies to the QnUDE(H)CPU.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(14) Fuse blown module
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
Corres-
(When Set) ACPU
D9
CPU
10
SD1300 • The numbers of output modules whose fuses have blown are input as a D9100
SD1301 bit pattern (in units of 16 points). D9101
(If the module numbers are set by parameter, the parameter-set
SD1302 D9102
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
numbers are stored.)
SD1303 • Also detects blown fuse condition at remote station output modules D9103
Bit pattern in units
SD1304 of 16 points, b15 b14 b13 b12 b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 D9104 QnA
SD1305 indicating the 1 1 D9105 Qn(H)
SD1300 0 0 0 (YC0) 0 0 0 (Y80) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Fuse blown modules whose QnPH
SD1306 S (Error) D9106
module fuses have blown 1 QnPRH
11
1
SD1301 (Y1F0) 0 0 0 0 (Y1A0) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SD1307 0 : No blown fuse D9107 QnU
SD1308 1 : Blown fuse 1 1 New Rem
Y1F Y1F
SD1331 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
present B0 30
SD1309
MAINTENANCE AND
to Indicates fuse blow. New
SD1330
INSPECTION
SD1331 This flag is cleared by error resetting operation. New
(15) I/O module verification

Table12.58 Special register 12
TROUBLESHOOTING
Corres-
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
SD1400 • When the I/O modules whose I/O module information differs from that D9116
SD1401 registered at power-ON are detected, the numbers of those I/O modules D9117
are entered in bit pattern.
SD1402 D9118
(If the I/O numbers are set by parameter, the parameter-set numbers
Bit pattern, in units
SD1403 are stored.) D9119
of 16 points,
SD1404 • Also detects I/O module information. D9120
indicating the QnA
SD1405 modules with b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 D9121 Qn(H)
1
SD1406 I/O module verification errors. SD1400 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X0Y D9122 QnPH
S (Error)
APPENDICES
verify error 0 : No I/O 1 QnPRH
SD1407 D9123
verification SD1401 0 0 0 0 0 0 XY
190
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 QnU
SD1408 errors New Rem
1
SD1409 1 : I/O verification SD1431 0 XY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1FE0
to error present New
SD1430 Indicates an I/O module verify error.
SD1431 New
This flag is cleared by error resetting operation.
INDEX

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(16) Process control instructions

Corres-
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
• Set the basic period (1 second units) use for the process control
SD1500 instruction using floating point data.
Basic period Basic period tome U New
SD1501
Floating point data = SD1501 SD1500
Process control Process control

• Shows the detailed error contents for the error that occurred in the Q4AR
SD1502 instruction detail instruction detail S (Error) New
process control instruction. QnPH
error code error code
Process control Process control
instruction instruction • Shows the error process block that occurred in the process control
SD1503 S (Error) New
generated error generated error instruction.
location location
SD1506 QnPH
Dummy device Dummy device • Used to specify dummy devices by a process control instruction. U New
SD1507 QnPRH
b0 • Selects the availability (enabled/disabled) of the function for process
Bumpless function control instructions.
Function
availability setting
availability b15 b14 to b2 b1 b0
for the S.PIDP QnPH
SD1508 selection for SD1508 0 0 0 I/O U New
instruction QnPRH
process control
0: Enabled Bumpless function
instruction
1: Disabled availability for the
(Default: 0) S.PIDP instruction
(17) For redundant systems (Host system CPU information *1)

SD1510 to SD1599 are only valid for redundant systems.
They are all set to 0 for stand-alone systems.
Corres-
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
Operation mode
Hot start switch • Shows the power out time (S) during the automatic switch from hot start
SD1512 during CPU S (Initial) New Q4AR
power out time to initial start in the operation mode when the CPU module is started up.
module start up
The LED status for BACKUP, CONTROL, SYSTEM A, SYSTEM B is
stored in the following format:
b15 to b10b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 to b0
0 0
4 LED states
BACKUP
Redundant • BACKUP
SYSTEM B 0: Off S (status
SD1585 system LED • CONTROL 1: On (red) 5: On (orange-yellow) New
0: Off change)
status • SYSTEM A 1: On
2: Flicker(red) 6: Flicker
(orange-yellow)
• SYSTEM B 2: Flicker 3: On(green)
4: Flicker(green)
SYSTEM A
0: Off CONTROL
1: On 0: Off
QnPRH
2: Flicker 1: On
Stores the reason(s) for system switching on the host system.

The following values are stored corresponding to the methods for system
switching:
Initialized to 0 when the power supply is switched off and then on or the
Reason(s) for RESET switch is set to the RESET position and then to the neutral
Reason(s) for
system switching position. S (when
SD1588 system
that occurred in 0: Initial value (control system has not been switched) condition occurs)
switching
host station 1: Power off, Reset, H/W failure, WDT error,
2: CPU stop error (except WDT)
3: System switching request from network module
16: System switching dedicated instruction
17: System switching request from GX Developer
*1: The information of the host CPU module is stored.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
EMC AND LOW

Corres-
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
• Stores the reason(s) for system switching failure.
0: System switching normal (default)
1: Tracking cable is not connected , tracking cable error, FPGA circuit
10
failure.
2: H/W failure, power-OFF, Reset, WDT error on the standby system
3: H/W failure, power-OFF, Reset, WDT error on the Control system
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
4: Tracking data transfer initialization
Reason(s) for 5: Communication timeout
Reason(s) for
system 6: Serious error(except WDT error) on the Standby system S(when system
SD1589 system switching QnPRH
switching failure 7: There is difference between both systems is switched)
failure No.
conditions (detected as Backup mode only)
8: During memory copy from control system to standby system
9: During online program change
10: During detection of intelligent function module failure on the standby 11
system
11: System switching being executed
MAINTENANCE AND
• Resets to "0" when host system is powered on.
• Resets to "0" once system has been switched successfully.
INSPECTION
Switch request Request source
• Stores the request source at work No. when the SM1590 is turned on. S (Error) New Q4AR
network No. network No.
• Stores head address of network module which a system switch request
was initiated.
• Turns off automatically by system, after network error is reset by user.
b15 to b11 to b1 b0
Each bit
0:OFF
12
SD1590 0 0/1 0/1 0 1:ON
Network module
Network module
TROUBLESHOOTING
SD1590 head address, Module 0: CPU module is invalid
head address, as it is 2-slot model. S (Error/Status
which requested New
which requested Module 1: Module on the right change)
system
system switching to
side of the CPU module
switching
Module11: Module at the
rightmost end of the
12-slot base (Q312B)
QnPRH
• Please refer to SD1690 which stores the corresponding head address of
network module on other system.
Memory copy
Memory copy • Stores the memory copy target I/O No.(Standby system CPU module:
SD1595 target I/O U New
target I/O number 3D1H) of before SM1595 is turned from OFF to ON.
number
• Stores the execution result of Memory copy function.
APPENDICES
0 : Memory copy successfully completed
Memory copy Memory copy 4241H : Standby system power supply off S (Status
SD1596 New
status status 4242H : Tracking cable is disconnected or is damaged change)
4247H : Memory copy function is being executed
4248H : Unsupported memory copy destination I/O Number
INDEX

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(18)For redundant systems (Other system CPU information *1)

SD1600 to SD1659 is only valid during the back up mode for redundant systems, and
refresh cannot be done when in the separate mode.
SD1651 to SD1699 are valid in either the backup mode or separate mode.
When a stand-alone system SD1600 to SD1699 are all 0.
Corres-
(When Set) ACPU CPU
SD *2
• Stores as BIN code the error No. of the error that occurred during the
Diagnosis error
SD1600 Diagnosis error other system CPU module diagnosis. S (Each END) SD0
No.
• Stores the latest error currently occurring.
SD1601 • SD1600 stores the updated date and time.

Diagnosis error Diagnosis error • Stores each of the BCD two digits. SD1 to
SD1602 S (Each END)
occurrence time occurrence time • Refer to SD1 to SD3 for the storage status. SD3
SD1603 (SD1 SD1601, SD2 SD1602, SD3 SD1603)
Error • Stores the error comment information/individual information

Error information
SD1604 information classification code. S (Each END) SD4
classification
classification • Refer to SD4 for the storage status.
SD1605
SD1606
SD1607
SD1608
• Stores the common information for the error code.
SD1609 • Refer to SD5 to SD15 for the storage status.
Error common Error common SD5 to
SD1610 (SD5 SD1605, SD6 SD1606, SD7 SD1607, SD8 SD1608, S (Each END)
information information SD15
SD1611 SD9 SD1609, SD10 SD1610, SD11 SD1611, SD12 SD1612,
SD13 SD1613, SD14 SD1614, SD15 SD1615)
SD1612
SD1613
SD1614
SD1615 Q4AR
SD1616
SD1617
SD1618
SD1619
• Stores the individual information for the error code.
SD1620 • Refer to SD16 to SD26 for the storage status.
Error individual Error individual SD16 to
SD1621 (SD16 SD1616, SD17 SD1617, SD18 SD1618, S (Each END)
information information SD26
SD1622 SD19 SD1619, SD20 SD1620, SD21 SD1621, SD22 SD1622,
SD23 SD1623, SD24 SD1624, SD25 SD1625, SD26 SD1626)
SD1623
SD1624
SD1625
SD1626
• Stores the CPU module switch status.
CPU module
SD1650 Switch status • Refer to SD200 for the storage status. S (Each END) SD200
switch status
(SD1650 SD200)
• Stores the CPU module's LED status.
CPU module -LED • Shows 0 when turned off, 1 when turned on, and 2 when flicking.
SD1651 LED status S (Each END) SD201
status • Refer to SD201 for the storage status.
(SD1651 SD201)
• Stores the CPU module operation status.
CPU module CPU module
SD1653 • Refer to SD203 for the storage status. S (Each END) SD203
operation status operation status
(SD1653 SD203)
*1 : Stores other system CPU module diagnostics information and system information.
*2 : Shows the special register (SD ) for the host system CPU module.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
EMC AND LOW

Corres-
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
(When Set) ACPU CPU
SD *2
• If an error is detected by the error check for redundant system, the
corresponding bit shown below turns ON. That bit turns OFF when the
error is cleared after that.
10
Each bit
b15 b2 b1 b0 0: OFF
SD1600 Fixed to 0 1: ON
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
Tracking cable is not
connected or damaged
Power-OFF, reset,
watchdog timer error or
hardware failure occurred
in other system
SD1600
System error
information
System error
information
Other system stop error
(except watchdog timer
S(Every END) 11
error)
MAINTENANCE AND
Bit turns on when failing to
connect with other system.
The following causes are
shown below:
INSPECTION
Tracking H/W failure
Host system WDT
error
Cannot recognize
other system therefore
12
causing error –
• If any of b0, b1, b2 and b15 is ON, the other bits are all OFF.
• In the debug mode, b0, b1, b2 and b15 are all OFF.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Stores the reasons for system switching.
• Stores the reasons for system switching into SD1601 of both systems
when system switching occarred.
• Initialized to 0 at power OFF to ON/reset to unreset.
• The following shows values stored into this register.
System 0: Initial value (System switching has not occurred)
System switching S(when system
SD1601 switching 1: Power-OFF, Reset, H/W failure, WDT error,(*)
results is switched)
results 2: CPU stop error (except WDT)
3: System switching request by network module
16: System switching dedicated instruction
17: System switching request from GX Developer QnPRH
*: When the system is switched by the power OFF/reset of the control
system, "1" is not stored into SD1601 of the new standby system.
• Stores the parameters for system switching dedicated instruction
APPENDICES
System SP.CONTSW.
System switching
switching (The parameters (SD1602) for SP.CONTSW are stored in both systems
dedicated S(when system
SD1602 dedicated A&B)
instruction is switched)
instruction • SD1602 is only valid when "16" is stored in SD1601.
parameter
parameter • This SD1602 is updated once system switch instruction SP.CONTSW is
activated.
Other system Diagnostic error • The error value sorted in BIN code.
SD1610 S(Every END) SD0
diagnostic error code • Stores SD0 of the other system CPU module
SD1611 Other system • Stores the date and time when diagnostics error occurred corresponding
SD1612 diagnostic error Diagnostic error to error code stored in SD1610. SD1 to
S(Every END)
occurrence occurrence time • Data format is the same as SD1 to SD3. SD3
SD1613 time • Also, stores the value to SD1 to SD3.
Other system • Stores the category code corresponding to the error comment
INDEX
error Error information information/individual information code.

SD1614 S(Every END) SD4
information category code • Data format is the same as SD4.
category • Also, stores the value to SD4.
• Stores the common information corresponding to the error code stored
SD1615 Other system
Error common in this system CPU. SD5 to
to error common S(Every END)
information • Data composition is the same as SD5 to SD15. SD15
SD1625 information
• Also, stores the value to SD5 to SD15.
• Stores the individual information corresponding to the error code stored
SD1626 Other system
Error individual in this system CPU. SD16 to
to error individual S(Every END)
information • Data composition is the same as SD16 to SD26. SD26
SD1636 information
• Also, stores the value to SD16 to SD26.
• Stores the error code of the error to be cleared by clearing a standby
system error.
• Stores the error code of the error to be cleared into this register and turn
Standby system
Error code of error SM1649 from OFF to ON to clear the standby system error.
SD1649 error cancel S(Every END) –
to be cleared • The value in the lowest digit (1 place) of the error code is ignored when
command
stored into this register.
(By storing 4100 in this register and resetting the error, errors 4100 to
4109 can be cleared.)
*2: Shows the special register (SD ) for the host system CPU module.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING

Corres-
(When Set) ACPU CPU
SD *2
Stores the operation information of the other system CPU module in the
following format.
"00FFH" I stored when a communication error occurs, or when in debug
mode.
b15 to b8 b7tob4 b3to b0

SD1650 0
0:No error
1:Continue error
2:Stop error
F:Communication with
other system
Other system Other system disabled ( )
SD1650 operating operating S(Every END)
information information 0:RUN : Communication
2:STOP with other system
3:PAUSE disabled, debug
F:Communication with mode
other system
disabled ( )
Note : A communication error is caused by the following:.

• When the power supply is switched off, or when the other system is – QnPRH
reset.
• H/W error occurs on either of system A or B.
• WDT error occurs.
• Tracking cable is not connected.
• Tracking cable is disconnected or damaged.
• Stores head address of network module which a system switch request
was initiated, using the following format.
• Turns off automatically by system, after network error is reset by user.
Each bit
b15 to b11 to b1 b0 0:OFF
SD1690 0 0/1 0/1 0 1:ON
Network module
Network module
head address, Module 0: CPU module is
head address,
which requested invalid as it is 2-
which requested slot model
SD1690 system S(Every END)
system switching Module 1: Module on the
switching on
on host (control) to
right side of the
host (control) CPU module
system
system Module11: Module at the
rightmost end of
the 12-slot base
(Q312B)
• Please refer to SD1590 which stores the corresponding head address of

network module on host system.
*2 : Shows the special register (SD ) for the host system CPU.

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
9
(19)For redundant systems (Trucking)
EMC AND LOW

SD1700 to SD1779 is valid only for redundant systems.
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
These are all 0 for stand-alone systems.
Corres- 10
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
• When the tracking error is detected, count is added by one.
Tracking error Tracking error Q4AR
SD1700 • The counter repeats an increment and decrement of the value; S(Error)
detection count detection count QnPRH
0 32767 -32768 0
• Set in seconds the waiting time of the standby system CPU module from
when online program change to the control system CPU module is
completed by the online program change for redundancy function until
the online program change to the standby system CPU module starts. 11
• If no online program change request is issued to the standby system
CPU module within the preset time after completion of the online
MAINTENANCE AND
program change to the control system CPU module, both system CPU
modules judge it as the failure of the online program change for
INSPECTION
redundancy. In this case, both system CPU modules resume the
Waiting time for New
Waiting time for consistency check between system A & B suspended during the online
online program
online program program change. Also, the control system CPU module is set to accept a
SD1710 change U/ S (Initial) QnPRH
change (standby new request of online program change for redundancy.
(standby
system) • When both systems are powered on, 90 seconds are set to SD1710 as
system)
the default value.
• Set the value within the range 90 to 3600 seconds. When the setting is 0
to 89 seconds, it is regarded as 90 seconds for operation. If the setting is
12
outside the allowed range, it is regarded other than 0 to 3600 seconds
TROUBLESHOOTING
for operation.
• The waiting time for a start of online program change to the standby
system CPU module is checked according to the SD1710 setting during
online change of multiple blocks and online change of batch of files for
redundancy.
APPENDICES
INDEX

12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(20)Redundant power supply module information

SD1780 to SD1789 are valid only for a redundant power supply system.
The bits are all 0 for a singular power supply system.
Corres-
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
• Stores the status of the redundant power supply module with input
power OFF in the following bit pattern.
• Stores 0 when the main base unit is not the redundant power main base
unit (Q38RB).
Input power OFF Input power OFF
detection status of detection status of
1 Each bit
power supply 2 power supply 1 1
0: Input power ON status/ No
Power supply b15 to b9 b8 b7 to b1 b0
redundant power supply
Power supply off module
SD1780 off detection S(Every END) New
detection status SD1780 to to 1: Input power OFF status
status
Main base unit
Extension base unit 1st stage
:
Extension base unit 7th stage
Main base unit

:
• When configuring multiple CPU, the status is stored to 1st CPU module.
• Stores the failure detection status of the redundant power supply module
in the following bit pattern. (The corresponding bit is cleared to 0 when
the input power to the faulty redundant power supply module is switched
OFF after detection of the redundant power supply module failure.)
unit (Q38RB).
Failure detection Failure detection
status of power status of power
supply 2 1 supply 1 1 Each bit
0: Redundant power supply
b15 to b9 b8 b7 to b1 b0 module failure not
Power supply Power supply detected/No redundant power
SD1781 to to
SD1781 failure detection failure detection supply module S(Every END) New
status status 1: Redundant power supply Qn(H)*2
module failure detected
(Detectable for redundant QnPH*2
power supply module only)
QnPRH
Main base unit
Extension base unit 1st stage QnU*3
: Rem
Main base unit

:
• Counts the number of times of momentary power failure of the power
Momentary supply 1/2.
power failure Momentary power • Monitors the status of the power supply 1/ 2 mounted on the redundant
detection failure detection power main base unit (Q38RB) and counts the number of times of
SD1782 S(Every END) New
counter for count for power momentary power failure.
power supply supply 1 Status of power supply 1/power supply 2 mounted on the redundant
1*1 power extension base unit is not monitored.
• When the CPU module starts, the counter of the power supply 1/ 2 is
cleared to 0.
• If the input power to one of the redundant power supply modules is
turned OFF, the corresponding counter is cleared to 0.
• The counter is incremented by 1 every time the momentary power failure
of the power supply 1/ 2 is detected.(The counter repeats increment and
Momentary
decrement of the value; 0 32767 -32768 0(The system monitor
power failure Momentary power
of GX Developer shows the counter within the range between 0 and
detection failure detection
SD1783 65535.) S(Every END) New
counter for count for power
(0 to 65535: When the count exceeds 65535, it starts with 0.)
power supply supply 2
2*1 unit (Q38RB).
• The counter repeats increment and decrement of the value,
0 32767 -32768 0(The system monitor of GX Developer shows
the counter within the range between 0 and 65535.)
*1: The "power supply 1" indicates the redundant power supply module mounted on the POWER 1 slot of the redundant base unit (Q38RB/68RB/Q65WRB).
The "power supply 2" indicates the redundant power supply module mounted on the POWER 2 slot of the redundant base unit (Q38RB/68RB/Q65WRB).
However, for the multiple CPU system configuration, this applies to all CPU modules whose first 5 digits of serial No. are 07032 or later.

APPENDICES
9
APPENDICES
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
Appendix 1 External Dimensions
Appendix 1.1 CPU module 10
(1) Q00JCPU
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
4-mounting screws (M4×14)
11
MAINTENANCE AND
98 (3.86)
80 (3.15)
INSPECTION
12
(0.28)
TROUBLESHOOTING
7
15.5 224.5 (8.84)

(0.61) 245 (9.65)
98 (3.86)
APPENDICES
Unit : mm (inch)
Diagram App.1 Q00JCPU
INDEX

Appendix 1.1 CPU module
App - 1
APPENDICES
(2) Q00CPU,Q01CPU,Q02CPU,Q02HCPU,Q06HCPU,Q12HCPU,Q25HCPU,
Q02PHCPU, Q06PHCPU, Q12PHCPU,Q25PHCPU, Q02UCPU,
Q03UDCPU, Q04UDHCPU, Q06UDHCPU,Q13UDHCPU,Q26UDHCPU
Q02HCPU
MODE
RUN
ERR.
USER
BAT.
BOOT
(3.86)
98
PULL
USB
RS-232
(0.16) 23 (0.92)
4
89.3 (3.52) 27.4

(1.08)
Unit : mm (inch)
Diagram App.2 Q00CPU,Q01CPU,Q02CPU,Q02HCPU,Q06HCPU,Q12HCPU,Q25HCPU,Q02PHCPU,Q06PHCPU,
Q12PHCPU,Q25PHCPU,Q02UCPU,Q03UDCPU,Q04UDHCPU,Q06UDHCPU, Q13UDHCPU,
Q26UDHCPU
(3) Q03UDECPU,Q04UDEHCPU,Q06UDEHCPU,Q13UDEHCPU,Q26UDEHCPU
(3.86)
98
23 (0.92)
(0.16)
4
115 (4.53) 27.4

(1.08)
Unit : mm (inch)
Diagram App.3 Q03UDECPU,Q04UDEHCPU,Q06UDEHCPU,Q13UDEHCPU,Q26UDEHCPU
App - 2 Appendix 1 External Dimensions

APPENDICES
9
(4) Q12PRHCPU,Q25PRHCPU
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
Q25PRHCPU
MODE BACKUP
RUN CONTROL
ERR. SYSTEM A
10
USER SYSTEM B
BAT.
BOOT
INSTALLATION
TRACKING
LOADING AND
98 (3.86)
98 (3.86)
PULL
USB
11
MAINTENANCE AND
RS-232
INSPECTION
(0.16)
50.8
4 (2.03)
89.3 (3.52) 2 55.2
12
(0.08) (2.17)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Unit : mm (inch)
Diagram App.4 Q12PRHCPU,Q25PRHCPU
APPENDICES
INDEX

App - 3
APPENDICES
(5) When Q7BAT-SET is mounted on CPU module

Q25HCPU
MODE
RUN
ERR.
USER
BAT.
BOOT
98 (3.86)
PULL
USB
RS-232
30 (1.18)
LITHIUM BATTERY
MODEL Q7BAT-SET
89.3 (3.52) 27.4

(1.08)
Unit : mm (inch)
Q25PRHCPU
MODE BACKUP
RUN CONTROL
ERR. SYSTEM A
USER SYSTEM B
BAT.
BOOT
TRACKING
98 (3.86)
PULL
USB
RS-232
30 (1.18)
2
(0.08)
LITHIUM BATTERY
MODEL Q7BAT-SET
89.3 (3.52) 27.4

(1.08)
Unit : mm (inch)
Diagram App.5 When Q7BAT-SET is mounted on CPU module

APPENDICES
(6) When Q3MEM-4MBS or Q3MEM-8MBS is mounted on CPU module
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
10
98 (3.86)
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
11
MAINTENANCE AND
89.3 (3.52) 24.5 5
INSPECTION
(5.95) (0.20)
118.8 (4.68) 27.4
(1.09)
Unit : mm (inch)
Diagram App.6 When Q3MEM-4MBS, Q3MEM-8MBS is mounted on CPU module 12
TROUBLESHOOTING
APPENDICES
INDEX

App - 5
APPENDICES
Appendix 1.2 Power supply module
(1) Q61P-A1,Q61P-A2,Q61P,Q62P,Q63P
Q61P-A1
POWER
98 (3.86)
PULL
90 (3.54) 55.2
(2.17)
Unit : mm (inch)
Diagram App.7 Q61P-A1,Q61P-A2,Q62P,Q63P
(2) Q64P
Q64P
POWER
98 (3.86)
PULL
115 (4.53) 55.2

(2.17)
Unit : mm (inch)
Diagram App.8 Q64P

APPENDICES
9
(3) Q64PN
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
10
98 (3.86)
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
11
MAINTENANCE AND
INSPECTION
115 (4.53) 55.2 (2.17)
12
Unit : mm (inch)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Diagram App.9 Q64PN
(4) Q61SP
Q61SP
INPUT Q61SP
100-240VAC
APPENDICES
98 (3.86)
INDEX
MITSUBISHI
90 (3.54) 14 27.4
(0.55) (1.08)
Unit : mm (inch)
Diagram App.10 Q61SP

App - 7
APPENDICES
(5) Q63RP
Q63RP POWER
98 (3.86) PULL
115 (4.53) 83 (3.27)
Unit : mm (inch)
Diagram App.11 Q63RP
(6) Q64RP
Q64RP POWER
98 (3.86)
PULL
115 (4.53) 83 (3.27)
Unit : mm (inch)
Diagram App.12 Q64RP

APPENDICES
9
(7) A1S61PN,A1S62PN,A1S63P
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
A1S61PN
VOLTAGE
POWER
10
INPUT OUTPUT
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
100-240VAC DC 5V 5A
105VA
50 / 60Hz
130 (5.12)
NP
11
MAINTENANCE AND
INSPECTION
12
TROUBLESHOOTING
6.5 93.6 (3.69) 54.5 (2.15)
(0.26)
Unit : mm (inch)
Diagram App.13 A1S61PN,A1S62PN,A1S63P
APPENDICES
INDEX

App - 9
APPENDICES
Appendix 1.3 Main base unit
(1) Q33B
OUT
5V
98 (3.86)
(3.15 0.01)
SG
80 0.3
POWER CPU I/O0 I/O1 I/O2
FG
(0.28)
7.5
(0.30) 7
44.1
(1.74) 15.5 169 0.3 (0.65 0.01)
(0.61) 189 (7.44)
Unit : mm (inch)
Diagram App.14 Q33B
(2) Q35B
OUT
98 (3.86)
5V
(3.15 0.01)
SG
80 0.3
POWER CPU I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4

FG
(0.28)
7.5
7
(0.30) 44.1
(1.74) 15.5 224.5 0.3 (8.84 0.01)
(0.61) 245 (9.65)
Unit : mm (inch)
Diagram App.15 Q35B

APPENDICES
9
(3) Q38B
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
(a) Q38B with 5 base mounting holes
VOLTAGE
5-mounting screws
(M4 14)
10
OUT
80 0.3(3.15 0.01)
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
5V
98(3.86)
SG
a1 b1
POWER CPU I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7
FG
11
MAINTENANCE AND
(0.28)
7.5(0.30) 15.5 170 0.3(6.69 0.01) 138 0.3 (5.43 0.01)

7
44.1 (0.61) 328(12.91)
INSPECTION
(1.74)
Unit : mm (inch)
Diagram App.16 Q38B (5 base mounting holes)
(b) Q38B with 4 base mounting holes

12
TROUBLESHOOTING
OUT
5V
(3.15 0.01)
98 (3.86)
SG
80 0.3
POWER I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7

CPU
FG
(0.28)
7.5
7
APPENDICES
(0.30) 44.1
(1.74) 15.5 308 0.3 (12.13 0.01)
(0.61)
328 (12.91)
Unit : mm (inch)
(4) Q312B
INDEX
5-mounting screws
(M4 14)
OUT
5V
(3.15 0.01)
98(3.86)
SG
80 0.3
a1 b1
FG
(0.28)
7
7.5(0.30) 15.5 170 0.3(6.69 0.01) 249 0.3(9.8 0.01)

44.1 (0.61) 439(17.28)
(1.74)
Unit : mm (inch)

App - 11
APPENDICES

OUT
(3.15 0.01)
98 (3.86)
80 0.3
(0.28)
7.5
7
(0.30) 44.1
(1.74) 15.5 419 0.3 (16.50 0.01)
(0.61) 439 (17.28)
Unit : mm (inch)
(5) Q32SB
(3.15 0.01)
98 (3.86)
5V
80 0.3
SG
CPU I/O0 I/O1

POWER
(0.28)
7.5
7
(0.30) 18.5 101 0.3 (3.98 0.01)

(0.73) 8.5 (0.33) 114 (4.49)
Unit : mm (inch)
Diagram App.20 Q32SB
(6) Q33SB
(3.15 0.01)
98 (3.86)
5V
80 0.3
SG
CPU I/O0 I/O1 I/O2

POWER
(0.28)
7.5
7
(0.30) 18.5 129 0.3 (5.08 0.01)

(0.73) 8.5 (0.33) 142 (5.59)
Unit : mm (inch)

APPENDICES
9
(7) Q35SB
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
10
(3.15 0.01)
98 (3.86)
5V
80 0.3
SG
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
(0.28)
7.5
7
(0.30) 18.5
(0.73) 8.5 184.5 0.3 (7.26 0.01)
(0.33) 197.5 (7.78) 11
MAINTENANCE AND
Unit : mm (inch)
INSPECTION
(8) Q38RB
12
5-mounting
screws
(M4×14)
TROUBLESHOOTING
OUT
5V 5V
(3.15 0.01)
98 (3.86)
SG SG
80 0.3
CPU I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7

FG FG
(0.28)
7.5
7
(0.30)
170 0.3 (6.69 0.01) 249 0.3 (9.80 0.01)
APPENDICES
44.1 (1.74)
15.5 (0.61) 439 (17.28)
Unit : mm (inch)
Diagram App.23 Q38RB
INDEX

App - 13
APPENDICES
(9) Q38DB
5-mounting
screws
(M4 14)
OUT
5V
98 (3.86)
0.3
SG
a1 b1
POWER CPU I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7
80
FG 38D
15.5 170 0.3 (6.69 0.01) 138 0.3 (5.43 0.01)

(0.28)
7.5
7
(0.30) (0.61) 328 (12.91)

44.1 (1.74)
Unit : mm (inch)
Diagram App.24 Q38DB
(10)Q312DB
5-mounting
screws
(M4 14)
OUT
0.01)
5V
98 (3.86)
0.3
SG
a1 b1
(3.15
FG
80
312D
(0.28)
7.5
7
(0.30) 170 0.3 (6.69 0.01) 249 0.3 (9.80 0.01)

44.1 (1.74) 15.5 (0.61)
439 (17.28)
Unit : mm (inch)
Diagram App.25 Q312DB

APPENDICES
9
Appendix 1.4 Extension base unit
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
(1) Q52B
VOLTAGE
10
IN OUT
(3.15 0.01)
98 (3.86)
80 0.3
I/O0 I/O1
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
(0.28)
7.5
7
(0.30)
44.1
15.5 83.5 0.3
11
(1.74)
(0.16) (3.29 0.01)
MAINTENANCE AND
106 (4.17)
INSPECTION
Unit : mm (inch)
Diagram App.26 Q52B
(2) Q55B 12
TROUBLESHOOTING
IN OUT
(3.15 0.01)
98 (3.86)
80 0.3
I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4

(0.28)
7.5
7
(0.30)
44.1
APPENDICES
(1.74) 15.5 167 0.3 (6.57 0.01)
(0.61) 189 (7.44)
Unit : mm (inch)
Diagram App.27 Q55B
(3) Q63B
INDEX
IN OUT
5V
98 (3.86)
(3.15 0.01)
SG
80 0.3
POWER I/O0 I/O1 I/O2

FG
(0.28)
7.5
7
(0.30)
44.1
(1.74) 15.5 167 0.3 (6.57 0.01)
(0.61) 189 (7.44)
Unit : mm (inch)
Diagram App.28 Q63B

App - 15
APPENDICES
(4) Q65B
IN OUT
5V
(3.15 0.01)
98 (3.86)
SG
80 0.3
POWER I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4
FG
(0.28)
7.5
7
(0.30)
44.1
(1.74) 15.5 222.5 0.3 (8.76 0.01)
(0.61) 245 (9.65)
Unit : mm (inch)
Diagram App.29 Q65B
(5) Q68B
(a) Q68 with 5 base mounting holes
5-mounting screws
(M4 14)
IN OUT
5V
98(3.86)
(3.15 0.01)
SG
80 0.3
a1 b1
FG
(0.28)
7.5(0.30) 15.5 190 0.3(7.48 0.01) 116 0.3 ( 4.57 0.01)

7
44.1 (0.61) 328(12.91)

(1.74)
Unit : mm (inch)
(b) Q68 with 4 base mounting holes

IN OUT
5V
(3.15 0.01)
98 (3.86)
SG
80 0.3

FG
(0.28)
7.5
7
(0.30)
44.1
(1.74) 15.5 306 0.3 (12.05 0.01)
(0.61) 328 (12.91)
Unit : mm (inch)

APPENDICES
9
(6) Q612B
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
5-mounting screws
(M4 14)
10
IN OUT
5V
(3.15 0.01)
98(3.86)
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
80 0.3
SG
a1 b1
POWER I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7 I/O8 I/O9 I/O10 I/O11
FG
(0.28)
11
7
7.5(0.30) 15.5 190 0.3 (7.48 0.01) 227 0.3 (8.94 0.01)
44.1 (0.61) 439 (17.28)
MAINTENANCE AND
(1.74)
Unit : mm (inch)
INSPECTION
IN OUT
4-mounting screws (M4×14) 12
TROUBLESHOOTING
5V
(3.15 0.01)
98 (3.86)
SG
80 0.3
POWER I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7 I/O8 I/O9
FG
(0.28)
7.5
7
(0.30)
44.1
(1.74) 15.5 417 0.3 (16.42 0.01)
(0.61)
APPENDICES
439 (17.28)
Unit : mm (inch)
INDEX

App - 17
APPENDICES
(7) QA1S65B
110 0.3 (4.33 0.01)

IN OUT
130 (5.12)
5V
SG
FG
POWER I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4
(0.39) QA1S65B
16.4
10
(0.65)
51.2
10 295 0.3 (11.61 0.01)
(2.02)
(0.39) 315 (12.40)
Unit : mm (inch)
Diagram App.34 QA1S65B
(8) QA1S68B
110 0.3 (4.33 0.01)
IN OUT
130 (5.12)
5V
SG
FG

QA1S68B
(0.39)
16.4
10
(0.65)
51.2
(2.02) 10 400 0.3 (15.75 0.01)
(0.39) 420 (16.54)
Unit : mm (inch)
Diagram App.35 QA1S68B

APPENDICES
(9) QA65B
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
2 6-M4 screw 4- 6 installation holes
Base cover (for module installation) (M5 mounting screw)
10
0.01)
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
250 (9.84)
0.3 (7.87
11
200
MAINTENANCE AND
INSPECTION
332 0.3 (13.07 0.01)
46.6
(1.83) 352 (13.87)
Hand hold 12
Unit : mm (inch)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Diagram App.36 QA65B
(10) QA68B
2 9-M4 screw 4- 6 installation holes
Base cover (for module installation) (M5 mounting screw)
APPENDICES
0.01)
250 (9.84)
0.3 (7.87
200
INDEX
446 0.3 (17.56 0.01)

46.6
(1.83) 466 (18.35)
Hand hold
Unit : mm (inch)
Diagram App.37 QA68B

App - 19
APPENDICES
(11) Q68RB
5-mounting
screws
(M4×14)
IN OUT
5V 5V
(3.15 0.01)
98 (3.86)
SG SG
80 0.3

FG FG
(0.28)
7.5
7
(0.30)
44.1 (1.74) 15.5 170 0.3 (6.69 0.01) 247 0.3 (9.72 0.01)
(0.61) 439 (17.28)
Unit : mm (inch)
Diagram App.38 Q68RB
(12) Q65WRB
5-mounting
screws
(M4×14)
IN1 IN2 OUT
5V 5V
(3.15 0.01)
98 (3.86)
80 0.3
SG SG
POWER 1 POWER 2 I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4

(0.28)
7.5
7
(0.30)
44.1 15.5 170 0.3 (6.69 0.01) 247 0.3 (9.72 0.01)
(1.74) (0.61) 439 (17.28)
Unit : mm (inch)
Diagram App.39 Q65WRB

APPENDICES
9
Appendix 1.5 Extension cable
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
QC05B,QC06B,QC12B,QC30B,QC50B,QC100B
VOLTAGE
10
(1.65)
42.0
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
10 34.2 6.0
(0.39) (1.35) (0.24)
Unit : mm (inch)
Diagram App.40 QC05B,QC06B,QC12B,QC30B,QC50B,QC100B 11
MAINTENANCE AND
Appendix 1.6 Tracking cable
INSPECTION
QC10TR,QC30TR
12
TROUBLESHOOTING
A
B
(1.56)
B
39.7
12.4 33.5
(0.49) (1.32)
Unit : mm (inch)
Diagram App.41 QC10TR,QC30TR
APPENDICES
INDEX

Appendix 1.5 Extension cable
App - 21
APPENDICES
Appendix 1.7 Q8BAT-SET
Q8BAT
4.5mounting screws(M4 14)

87(3.43)
55.2(2.17)
Q8BAT
89.8(3.54)
98(3.86)
OUTPUT
3VDC
49(1.93)
5.8
(0.18)
(0.23) 47.1(1.85)
4.5
4.5 5.1mounting screws(M4 14)
Unit : mm (inch)
Diagram App.42 Q8BAT
QC10BAT
QC10BAT
30
55(2.17)
(1.18)
39(1.54) 1000(39.37)
Unit : mm (inch)
Diagram App.43 QC10BAT

Appendix 1.7 Q8BAT-SET
APPENDICES
9
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
Q series CPU module is updated to add functions and change the specifications.
VOLTAGE
The functions and specifications that can be used by the CPU module change depending
on the function version.
10
Appendix 2.1 Basic Model QCPU Upgrade
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
(1) Specification comparison
TableApp.1 Specification comparison
Function Version of CPU Module 11

Specifications Function Version A Function Version B
"04121" or earlier "04122" or later
MAINTENANCE AND
Q00JCPU
INSPECTION
Standard RAM capacity Q00CPU 64k bytes 128k bytes
Q01CPU 64k bytes 128k bytes
Q00JCPU
CPU shared memory Q00CPU 12
Q01CPU
TROUBLESHOOTING
: Usable/compatible, : Unusable/incompatible
APPENDICES
INDEX

App - 23
APPENDICES
(2) Additional functions and availability of the functions according to the

version of GX Developer
TableApp.2 Additional functions and availability of the functions according to the version of GX Developer
Compatible Compatible serial Compatible GX

New Function
function version No. Developer
Function block
( GX Developer Operating Manual (Function
Block))
A 04121 of earlier
Structured text (ST) language
( QCPU (Q Mode) Programming Manual
(Structured Text))
MELSAP3
( QCPU (Q Mode)/QnACPU Programming
Manual (SFC))
PID operation function*1
( QCPU (Q Mode)/QnACPU Programming
Manual (PID Control Instructions))
Real number operation*1
( QCPU User’s Manual (Function Explanation,
Program Fundamentals))
Intelligent function module event interruption
Version 8.00A of
later
-
Device initial value automatic setting function
Remote password setting function
( QCPU User’s Manual (Function Explanation, B 04122 of later
E-mail parameter
( Manual of the module that includes e-mail
function)
Online change using pointer
Increased file register capacity (32k points to 64k
points)*2
Multiple CPU System compatibility
( QCPU User's Manual (Multiple CPU System))
Version 8.00A of
Multiple-block online change
later
App - 24 Appendix 2 Functions Added or Changed Due to Version Upgrade

APPENDICES
9
New Function
EMC AND LOW

CC-Link Remote network additional mode
DIRECTIVES
Version 8.03D of
VOLTAGE
( CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's B 06112 of later
later
Manual)
- : Not related to GX Developer * : Incompatible with Q00JCPU
*1 : When the CPU instruction installed by GX Developer Version 8 is read by GX Developer of Version 7 or earlier, it is
10
processed as an "instruction code error" by GX Developer.
*2 : Unsupported by the Q00JCPU.
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
11
MAINTENANCE AND
INSPECTION
12
TROUBLESHOOTING
APPENDICES
INDEX

App - 25
APPENDICES
Appendix 2.2 High Performance Model QCPU Upgrade
(1) Specification comparison

TableApp.3 Specification comparison
First 5 digits of Serial No. of CPU Module

Function Version A Function Version B
Specifications
02091 or
02092 or later 02112 or later 03051 or later 04012 or later
earlier
Q02CPU 64kbyte
Q02HCPU 64kbyte 128kbyte
Standard RAM capacity Q06HCPU 64kbyte 128kbyte
CPU shared memory
Extended life battery SRAM card *3
Compatibility with 2Mbyte SRAM card
: Usable/compatible, : Unusable/incompatible
*3: Refer to Section 11.3.4 for details of the SRAM card battery life.

APPENDICES
9
EMC AND LOW

DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE

New Function
function version No. Developer 10
*4
Automatic write to standard ROM
Enforced ON/OFF for external I/O *4
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
Remote password setting *4 Version 6 or later
Compatibility with MELSECNET/H remote I/O network *4 A 02092 or later
Interrupt module (QI60) compatibility *4
Programming module compatibility
-
11
( Section 2.1.3)
MAINTENANCE AND
Compatibility with the multiple CPU system *5 02122 or later Version 7 or later
Installation of PC CPU module into the multiple CPU Version 7.10L or
INSPECTION
03051 or later
*5 later
system
High speed interrupt *4 Version 8 or later
Compatibility with index modification for module
- 12
designation of dedicated instruction
04012 or later
TROUBLESHOOTING
Selection of refresh item for COM instruction
QCPU (Q Mode) / QnACPU Programing Manual (Comon -
Instructions)
SFC program online batch change *4
04122 or later Version 8 or later
File memory capacity change*4
CC-Link remote network additional mode
Version 8.03D or
( CC-Link Manual)
05032 or later later
Incomplete derivative PID operation function *6
APPENDICES
Floating-point comparison instruction speedup -
Read of the SFC activity step comment compatible
( QCPU (Q mode)/ QnACPU programming manual B 07012 or later
(SFC))
Version 8.23Z or
Error detection in the redundant power supply system *4
later
Clock data in 1/1000 sec. units compatible *4 -
*4
07032 or later
Storage of sampling trace files in standard RAM
INDEX
Version 8.23Z or
Individual setting of refresh device on multiple CPU
later
system *5
Selection of trailing edge instruction execution/non- Version 8.27D or
07092 or later
execution at online change *4 later
Block assurance function of CC-Link cyclic data per
station
( CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's
Version 8.32J or
Manual (Details)) 08032 or later
later
CC-Link network parameter can be set up to 8 modules.
Manual (Details))

App - 27
APPENDICES

New Function
Compatibility with MELSECNET/G network
Version 8.45X or
( MELSECNET/G Network System Reference
later
Manual (Controller Network)) B 09012 or later
Compatibility with ATA card
-
( Section 7.1.2)
- : Not related to GX Developer
*4: Refer to the following manual for details of the functions.
QCPU (Q Mode) / QnACPU Programming Manual (PID Control Instructions)

APPENDICES
9
Appendix 2.3 Precautions for Using the High Performance Model QCPU of
Older Versions
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
(1) Q6BAT/Q7BAT battery life when QCPU used has serial No. whose first 5
digits are "05010" or earlier
10
TableApp.5 Q6BAT/Q7BAT Battery life
Battery life
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
Q6BAT Q7BAT
Actual After SM52 Actual After SM52
CPU module Power-on turns ON. turns ON.
Guaranteed service Guaranteed service
model time ratio (Power failure (Power failure
value value value value
(70 ) (Reference
compensatio
(70 ) (Reference
compensatio 11
n time after n time after
value) (40 ) alarm) value) (40 ) alarm)
MAINTENANCE AND
5,433 hr 43,800hr 120 hr 13,000 hr 43,800hr 240 hr
0%
INSPECTION
7,761 hr 43,800hr 120 hr 18,571 hr 43,800hr 240 hr
30%
Q02CPU 50%
10,866 hr 43,800hr 120 hr 26,000 hr 43,800hr 240 hr 12
TROUBLESHOOTING
18,110 hr 43,800hr 120 hr 43,333 hr 43,800hr 240 hr
70%
43,800 hr 43,800hr 120 hr 43,800 hr 43,800hr 240 hr
100%
2,341 hr 14,550hr 120 hr 5,000 hr 38,881hr 240 hr
0%
3,344 hr 20,786hr 120 hr 7,142 hr 43,800hr 240 hr
30%
APPENDICES
50%
7,803 hr 43,800hr 120 hr 16,666 hr 43,800hr 240 hr
70%
43,800 hr 43,800hr 120 hr 43,800 hr 43,800hr 240 hr
100%
1,260 hr 6,096hr 48 hr 2,900 hr 16,711hr 96 hr
0%
1,800 hr 8,709hr 48 hr 4,142 hr 23,873hr 96 hr
INDEX
30%
50%
4,200 hr 20,320hr 48 hr 9,666 hr 43,800hr 96 hr
70%
43,800 hr 43,800hr 48 hr 43,800 hr 43,800hr 96 hr
100%

Appendix 2.3 Precautions for Using the High Performance Model QCPU of Older Versions
App - 29
APPENDICES
TableApp.6 Q6BAT/Q7BAT Battery life
Battery life
Q6BAT
CPU module Power-on
Guaranteed value Actual service value After SM52 ON. (Backup
model time ratio
time after alarm
(70 ) (Reference value) (40 ) occurrence)
43,800hr 43,800hr 600 hr
0%
43,800hr 43,800hr 600 hr
30%
43,800hr 43,800hr 600 hr
Q02CPU 50%
43,800hr 43,800hr 600 hr
70%
43,800hr 43,800hr 600 hr
100%
20,498hr 43,800hr 600 hr
0%
29,959hr 43,800hr 600 hr
30%
Q02HCPU 41,785hr 43,800hr 600 hr
50%
Q06HCPU 4.77years 5.00years 25 days
43,800hr 43,800hr 600 hr
70%
43,800hr 43,800hr 600 hr
100%
11,038hr 43,800hr 240 hr
0%
16,200hr 43,800hr 240 hr
30%
Q12HCPU 22,075hr 43,800hr 240 hr
50%
Q25HCPU 2.52years 5.00years 10 days
37,055hr 43,800hr 240 hr
70%
43,800hr 43,800hr 240 hr
100%

APPENDICES
9
(2) SRAM card battery life when QCPU used has serial No. whose first 5
EMC AND LOW

digits are "04011" or earlier
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
TableApp.7 SRAM card Battery life
Battery life
After SM52 turns
10
Power-on Actual service
SRAM card Guaranteed value ON. (Power failure
time ratio value
(MIN) backup time after
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
(Reference Value)
alarm occurrence)
690 hr 6,336 hr
0% 8 hr
Q2MEM-1MBS 0.07 years 0.72 years
Q2MEM-2MBS
100%
11,784 hr 13,872 hr
8 hr 11
1.34 years 1.58 years
MAINTENANCE AND
(3) Number of file register points according to first 5 digits of serial No.
INSPECTION
TableApp.8 File register points
CPU module model name Number of file register points

Q02CPU 32k points 12
Q02HCPU First 5 digits of serial No. are "04011" or earlier 32k points
TROUBLESHOOTING
Q06HCPU First 5 digits of serial No. are "04012" or later 64k points
Q12HCPU First 5 digits of serial No. are "02091" or earlier 32k points
Q25HCPU First 5 digits of serial No. are "02092" or later 128k points
APPENDICES
INDEX

App - 31
APPENDICES
(1) Functional comparison
TableApp.9 Additional functions and availability of the functions according to the version of GX Developer (Process CPU)

New Function
Compatibility with index modification for module
designation of dedicated instruction
Manual of the intelligent function module that can use
the dedicated instructions -
Selection of refresh item for COM instruction
( QCPU (Q Mode) / QnACPU Programming
manual (Common Instructions))
SFC program online batch change*1
File memory capacity change*1 Version 8
CC-Link remote network additional mode (Version 8.22Y or
( CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's earlier)
Manual)
07032 or later
Version 8.23Z or
Program memory check function*1
later
Read of the SFC activity step comment compatible
( QCPU (Q mode)/ QnACPU programming manual -
(SFC Manual))
Version 8.23Z or
Error detection in the redundant power supply system *1 C later
*1 -
Clock data in 1/1000 sec. units compatible
Storage of sampling trace files in standard RAM *1
Individual setting of refresh device on multiple CPU Version 8.23Z or

system later
( QCPU User's Manual (Multiple CPU System))
Selection of trailing edge instruction execution/non- Version 8.27D or
07092 or later
*1 later
execution at online change
Block assurance function of CC-Link cyclic data per
station
Version 8.32J or
Manual) 08032 or later
later
CC-Link network parameter can be set up to 8 modules.
Manual)
Compatibility with CC-Link IE controller network
Version 8.68W or
( CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference 10042 or later
later
Manual)


APPENDICES
9
EMC AND LOW

DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
Compatible function Compatible GX

10
New Function Compatible serial No.
version Developer
Read of the SFC activity step
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
comment compatible
( QCPU (Q mode)/ QnACPU
-
programming manual (SFC))
07032 of later
Clock data in 1/1000 sec. units 11
*1
compatible
MAINTENANCE AND
Storage of sampling trace files in
Version 8.23Z of later
standard RAM *1
INSPECTION
Selection of trailing edge instruction
execution/non-execution at online 07092 of later Version 8.27D of later
change *1
D 12
Extension base unit compatible
TROUBLESHOOTING
( QnPRHCPU User's Manual 09012 or later Version 8.45X or later
(Redundant System))
Setting'8' for the number of modules
in Network parameter for CC-Link
090102 or later Version 8.58L or later
( CC-Link System Master/Local
Module User's Manual)
Compatibility with CC-Link IE
controller network ( CC-Link IE
10042 or later Version 8.68W or later
APPENDICES
Controller Network Reference
Manual)

INDEX

App - 33
APPENDICES

Compatible function Compatible GX

New Function Compatible serial No.
version Developer
PC CPU module compatible
( QCPU User’s manual 09072 of later -
(Multiple CPU System))
Setting whether to use the local
Version 8.62Q or later
devices per program*1
Program memory batch transfer
status check function (SM165)-
compatible*1
B
The multiple CPU high-speed
transmission dedicated instruction- 10012 or later
compatible*2 -
( QCPU (Q Mode)/QnACPU
Programming manual (Common
Instructions))
Display of the amount of battery
consumption ( Section 11.3.1)
Bit device extension*1
Execution conditioned device test*1
Sampling trace auto start function*1
CC-Link IE group cyclic
communication function
( CC-Link IE Controller Network
Reference Manual)
Scan time measurement*1
10042 or later Version 8.68W or later
Forced ON/OFF of external I/O*1
B
Monitoring condition setting*1
Redundant power supply system
compatible*1
32-bit indexing with "ZZ" specification
( QCPU(Q Mode)/QnACPU
ProgrammingManual (Common
Instructions))
Extended data register (D) and
09042 or later*3 Version 8.70Y or later
extended link register (W)*1

APPENDICES
9
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
*2: The Q02UCPU is not compatible with this function.
VOLTAGE
*3: If the data of the extended data register (D) and extended link register (W) are retained in the standard ROM by using the
latch data backup function (Section 6.29) to the standard ROM, use the Universal model QCPU whose serial number
(first five digits) is "10042" or later. 10
For the latch data backup function to standard ROM, refer to QCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program
Fundamentals).
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
11
MAINTENANCE AND
INSPECTION
12
TROUBLESHOOTING
APPENDICES
INDEX

App - 35
APPENDICES
Appendix 3 Precautions for Battery Transportation
When transporting lithium batteries, make sure to treat them based on the transport
regulations
(1) Controlled models

The batteries for the Q Series CPU module (including memory cards) are classified as
shown in TableApp.12
TableApp.12 Models subject to transportation regulations
Classification for
Product name Model Product supply status
transportation
Lithium battery (assembled
Battery Q8BAT
battery)
Lithium battery (assembled
Q8BAT-
Battery battery)
SET Dangerous goods
+ Q8BAT connection cable
Battery Q7BAT Lithium battery
Q7BAT-
Battery Lithium battery with holder
SET
Battery Q6BAT Lithium battery
Q2MEM-
BAT
SRAM card battery Lithium coin battery
Q3MEM-
BAT
Q2MEM-
1MBS Packed with lithium coin
Q2MEM- battery (Q2MEM-BAT) Non-dangerous
2MBS goods
Q3MEM-
4MBS Packed with lithium coin
Memory card
Q3MEM- battery (Q3MEM-BAT)
8MBS
Q3MEM- Packed with lithium coin
4MBS-SET battery (Q3MEM-BAT)
Q3MEM- + Memory card protective
8MBS-SET cover
(2) Transport guidelines

Comply with IATA Dangerous Goods Regulations, IMDG code and the local transport
regulations when transporting products after unpacking or repacking, while Mitsubishi
ships products with packages to comply with the transport regulations.
Also, contact the transporters.
App - 36 Appendix 3 Precautions for Battery Transportation

APPENDICES
9
Appendix 4 Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built-in Batteries in
EU Member States
EMC AND LOW
DIRECTIVES
VOLTAGE
This section describes the precautions for disposing of waste batteries in EU member
states and exporting batteries and/or devices with built-in batteries to EU member states.
10
Appendix 4.1 Disposal precautions
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
In EU member states, there is a separate collection system for waste batteries. Dispose of
batteries properly at the local community waste collection/recycling center.
The symbol shown in Fig.App.44 is printed on the batteries and packaging of batteries and 11
devices with built-in batteries used for Mitsubishi programmable controllers.
MAINTENANCE AND
INSPECTION
12
TROUBLESHOOTING
Fig.App.44 Symbol
Note: This symbol is for EU member states only.

The symbol is specified in the new EU Battery Directive (2006/66/EC) Article 20
APPENDICES
“Information for end-users” and Annex II.
The symbol indicates that batteries need to be disposed of separately from other wastes.
INDEX
Appendix 4 Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built-in Batteries in EU Member States
Appendix 4.1 Disposal precautions
App - 37
APPENDICES
Appendix 4.2 Exportation precautions
The new EU Battery Directive (2006/66/EC) requires the follwoing when marketing or
exporting batteries and/or devices with built-in batteries to EU member states.
• To print the symbol on batteries, devices, or their packaging
• To explain the symbol in the manuals of the products
(1) Labelling
To market or export batteries and/or devices with built-in batteries, which have no
symbol, to EU member states on September 26, 2008 or later, print the symbol shown
in Fig.App.44 on the batteries, devices, or their packaging.
(2) Explaining the symbol in the manuals

To export devices incorporating Mitsubishi programmable controller to EU member
states on September 26, 2008 or later, provide the latest manuals that include the
explanation of the symbol.
If no Mitsubishi manuals or any old manuals without the explanation of the symbol
are provided, separately attach an explanatory note regarding the symbol to each
manual of the devices.
POINT
The requirements apply to batteries and/or devices with built-in batteries
manufactured before the enforcement date of the new EU Battery Directive(2006/
66/EC).
App - 38 Appendix 4 Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built-in Batteries in EU Member States
Appendix 4.2 Exportation precautions
INDEX 9
[0] to [9] External dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App-1
EMC AND LOW

5VDC internal current consumption Installation and removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
DIRECTIVES
Performance specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
VOLTAGE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3,4-7,4-11,4-15,4-20,6-1
CPU shared memory
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1,4-4,4-8,4-12,4-16,App-23,App-26
[A]
A series power supply module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39
10
[D]
A5B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39
A6B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39 Daily inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Data register [D]. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2,4-5,4-9,4-13,4-17
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
Allowable instantaneous power failure period time
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3,4-7,4-11,4-15,4-20 Debug mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Annunciator [F] . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2,4-5,4-9,4-13,4-17 Device
AnS series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-38 Annunciator [F]. . . . . . . . . . . 4-2,4-5,4-9,4-13,4-17
Counter [C]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2,4-5,4-9,4-13,4-17
AnS series power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39
Data register [D] . . . . . . . . . . 4-2,4-5,4-9,4-13,4-17
11
ATA card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1,7-2
Automatic writing to standard ROM. . . . . . . . . . . 4-37 Edge relay [V]. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2,4-5,4-9,4-13,4-17
MAINTENANCE AND
File register [R,ZR] . . . . . . . 4-2,4-6,4-10,4-14,4-18
Function input [FX] . . . . . . . 4-3,4-7,4-11,4-15,4-19
INSPECTION
[B]
Function output [FY]. . . . . . 4-3,4-7,4-11,4-15,4-19
Backup mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33 Function register [FD]. . . . . 4-3,4-7,4-11,4-15,4-19
Base unit Index register [Z] . . . . . . . . 4-3,4-6,4-10,4-14,4-18
Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39
Extension stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18,6-10
Intelligent function module device 12
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3,4-7,4-11,4-15,4-19
External dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App-10
TROUBLESHOOTING
Internal relay [M] . . . . . . . . . 4-2,4-5,4-9,4-13,4-17
Installation and removal of module . . . . . . . . 10-23 Interrupt pointer [I] . . . . . . . 4-3,4-6,4-10,4-14,4-19
Mounting dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20 Latch relay [L]. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2,4-5,4-9,4-13,4-17
Mounting orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21 Link direct device . . . . . . . . 4-3,4-7,4-11,4-15,4-19
Mounting position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20 Link register [W] . . . . . . . . . . 4-2,4-5,4-9,4-13,4-17
Parts names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Link relay [B] . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2,4-5,4-9,4-13,4-17
Redundant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39 Link special register [SW]. . 4-2,4-6,4-10,4-14,4-17
Redundant power extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39 Link special relay [SB] . . . . 4-2,4-6,4-10,4-14,4-17
Redundant power main . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39 Pointer [P] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3,4-6,4-10,4-14,4-18
Slim type main . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39 Retentive timer [ST] . . . . . . . 4-2,4-5,4-9,4-13,4-17
APPENDICES
Specification Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Special register [SD] . . . . . 4-3,4-7,4-11,4-15,4-19
Basic model QCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-38 Special relay [SM] . . . . . . . 4-3,4-7,4-11,4-15,4-19
Battery Step relay [S] . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3,4-6,4-10,4-14,4-18
Battery for QCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 Timer [T]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2,4-5,4-9,4-13,4-17
Battery for SRAM card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 DIN rail
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 Applicable DIN rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7,11-28 DIN rail mounting Adapter type . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Replacement procedure (CPU module). . . . . 11-22 DIN rail mounting screw intervals. . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Replacement procedure (SRAM card). . . . . . 11-30 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1,4-4,4-8,4-12,4-16
INDEX
Replacement reference period. . . . . . . . 11-7,11-28

Boot operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37,12-23
[E]
Edge relay [V] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2,4-5,4-9,4-13,4-17
[C]
EMC Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Calculating heat generation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Extended scan time . . . . . . . . . 4-1,4-4,4-8,4-12,4-16
Category II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16 Extension
CE mark. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 Extension base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-39
Circuit Extension cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-39
Fail-safe circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5,10-6 Number of extension stages . . . . . . . . . . 2-18,6-14
System design circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3,10-4 Setting for number of extension stages . . . . . . 6-14
Constant scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1,4-4,4-8,4-12,4-16 External Dimensions
Control method . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1,4-4,4-8,4-12,4-16 CPU module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App-1
Control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33 Extension base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App-15
Counter [C] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2,4-5,4-9,4-13,4-17 Extension cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App-21,App-22
CPU module
Index - 1
Main base unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App-10 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App-6 Link direct device . . . . . . . . . . 4-3,4-7,4-11,4-15,4-19
Tracking cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App-21 Link register [W] . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2,4-5,4-9,4-13,4-17
Link relay [B] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2,4-5,4-9,4-13,4-17
[F] Link special register [SW] . . . . 4-2,4-6,4-10,4-14,4-17
Link special relay [SB] . . . . . . 4-2,4-6,4-10,4-14,4-17
Fail-safe
Low voltage directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1,9-15
Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5,10-6
Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 [M]
Ferrite core . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13 Main base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39
File register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2,4-6,4-10,4-14,4-18 Max. number of files stored . . . 4-2,4-5,4-9,4-13,4-17
Flash card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1,7-2 Maximum number of extension stages . . . . . . . . 2-18
Function input [FX] . . . . . . . . . 4-3,4-7,4-11,4-15,4-19 Memory capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1,4-4,4-8,4-12,4-16
Function output [FY] . . . . . . . . 4-3,4-7,4-11,4-15,4-19 Memory Card
Function register [FD] . . . . . . . 4-3,4-7,4-11,4-15,4-19 Battery Installation into the Memory Card . . . . 7-12
Function version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45 Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
List of usable memory cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
[G] Loading/unloading procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Part names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
GOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-40
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
GX Developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-38
Specifications of the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Module
[H] Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
High Performance model QCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . A-38 Module change
During System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-243
[I] Redundant power supply module . . . . . . . . 12-254
I/O control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1,4-4,4-8,4-12,4-16 Multiple CPU high speed main base unit . . . . . . A-39
Index register [Z]. . . . . . . . . . . 4-3,4-6,4-10,4-14,4-18
Intelligent function module [N]
Intelligent function module device Network module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39,2-40
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3,4-7,4-11,4-15,4-19 No. of device points . . . . . . 4-2,4-5,4-6,4-9,4-13,4-17
Intelligent function module parameter . . . . . . . . 4-2 No. of device tracking words. . 4-3,4-7,4-11,4-15,4-19
Intensive insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 No. of I/O device points . . . . . . 4-2,4-5,4-9,4-13,4-17
Internal current consumption No. of I/O points . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2,4-5,4-9,4-13,4-17
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3,4-7,4-11,4-15,4-20,6-1 Noise filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Internal relay [M] . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2,4-5,4-9,4-13,4-17
Interrupt pointer [I] . . . . . . . . . 4-3,4-6,4-10,4-14,4-19 [O]
Isolation transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Online (with power on) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-243
Online module change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-243
[L] Operation mode change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Latch clear operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28,4-36
Latch range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3,4-7,4-11,4-15,4-20 [P]
Latch relay [L] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2,4-5,4-9,4-13,4-17
Part names
LED
Base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
"BAT." LED turns on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Basic model QCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
"BOOT" LED of the CPU module flickers . . . 12-17
High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU and
"ERR." LED of the CPU module turns on or flickers
Redundant CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
Memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
"MODE" LED of the CPU module does not turn on
Power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
Periodic Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
"MODE" LED of the CPU module flickers . . . 12-10
Pointer [P] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3,4-6,4-10,4-14,4-18
"POWER" LED of the power supply module turns off
Power supply module
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
A series power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39
"POWER" LED of the redundant power supply
AnS series power supply module . . . . . . . . . . A-39
module turns on red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
Connecting to the power supply module . . . . 10-41
"RUN" LED flickers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
External Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App-6
"RUN" LED of the CPU module turns off . . . 12-14
Names of Parts and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
"USER" LED turns on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Q series power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39
Index - 2
Redundant power supply module . . . . . . . . . . A-39 Operation mode change. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Slim type power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39 Separate mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33 9
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Reset Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Precautions Retentive timer [ST] . . . . . . . . . 4-2,4-5,4-9,4-13,4-17
EMC AND LOW

Design Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2 RUN/PAUSE contact . . . . . . . 4-3,4-7,4-11,4-15,4-20
DIRECTIVES
Disposal Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
VOLTAGE
Installation Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-4,10-20 [S]
Precaution on installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Screw tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Precaution on system configuration. . . . . . . . . 2-39
Separate mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33 10
Precautions for battery transportation . . . . . App-36
Serial No. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Precautions for GOT connection . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Singlar power supply system . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41,12-7
Precautions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-41
Slim type main base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-39
INSTALLATION
LOADING AND
Precautions for Use of Extension Base Units . 6-16
Slim type power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-39
Precautions for using coaxial cables . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Special register [SD] . . . . . . . 4-3,4-7,4-11,4-15,4-19
Precautions for Using the High Performance Model
Special relay [SM] . . . . . . . . . 4-3,4-7,4-11,4-15,4-19
QCPU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App-29
Specifications
Precautions when connecting the uninterruptive
Battery specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
11
power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
General specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Startup and Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . A-7
MAINTENANCE AND
Hardware specifications of the CPU module . . . 4-1
Wiring Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5,A-6,10-36
Memory card specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
INSPECTION
Process control language . . . . .4-1,4-4,4-8,4-12,4-16
Performance specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Process CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-38
Power supply module specifications . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Processing speed . . . . . . . . . . .4-1,4-4,4-8,4-12,4-16
Specification table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1,6-21
Program capacity. . . . . . . . . . . .4-1,4-4,4-8,4-12,4-16
Program language . . . . . . . . . . .4-1,4-4,4-8,4-12,4-16
Specifications of the battery for memory card . 7-11 12
SRAM card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1,7-2
Program transfer time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Standard RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1,4-4,4-8,4-12,4-16
TROUBLESHOOTING
Standard ROM. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1,4-4,4-8,4-12,4-16
[Q] Standards
Q Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-38 EMC Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Q series power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39 Low Voltage Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1,9-15
Q3B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-38 Standby system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Q3DB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-38 Step relay [S] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3,4-6,4-10,4-14,4-18
Q3RB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-38 System
Q3SB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-38 Control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Q5B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-38 Standby system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
APPENDICES
Q6B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39 System A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Q6BAT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 System B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Q6RB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39 System A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Q6WRB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39 System B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Q7BAT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 System configuration
Q7BAT-SET. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16 Applicable devices and software . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Q8BAT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 Configurations of the peripheral devices . . . . . 2-31
Q8BAT-SET. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 Outline of system configuration . . . . . . . . 2-17,2-29
QA1S6B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39 Precaution on system configuration . . . . . . . . . 2-39
INDEX
QA6ADP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39 Sequence control language

QA6ADP+A5B/A6B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1,4-4,4-8,4-12,4-16
QA6B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39 System configuration for bus connection of GOT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
[R] System configuration for single CPU system . . . 2-2
System switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Redundant base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39
Redundant CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-38
Redundant extension base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39 [T]
Redundant power extension base unit . . . . . . . . A-39 Timer [T] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2,4-5,4-9,4-13,4-17
Redundant power main base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39 Timer function . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3,4-7,4-11,4-15,4-20
Redundant power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39 Tracking cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-39
Redundant power supply system . . . . . . . 10-43,12-7 Tracking execution time. . . . . . 4-1,4-4,4-8,4-12,4-16
Redundant system Troubleshooting
Backup mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33 Troubleshooting Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Debug mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Index - 3
Troubleshooting flowchart
Flowchart for when CONTROL BUS ERR. occurs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-25
Flowchart for when it is unable to perform boot
operation from memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23
Flowchart for when output load of output module
does not turn on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
Flowchart for when output module LED is not turned
on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18
Flowchart for when program is rewritten
unintentionally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22
Flowchart for when the "BOOT" LED is flickering
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
Flowchart for when the "MODE" LED is flickering
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
Flowchart for when the "MODE" LED is not turned
on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
Flowchart for when the "POWER" LED is turned off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
Flowchart for when the "POWER" LED is turned on
red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
Flowchart for when the "RUN" LED is turned off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
Flowchart for when the ERR terminal is turned off
(opened) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Flowchart for when unable to read a program
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20
Flowchart for when unable to write a program
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21,12-26
Flowchart for when UNIT VERIFY ERR. occurs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-24
When the "BAT." LED is turned on . . . . . . . . 12-16
When the "RUN" LED is flickering. . . . . . . . . 12-15
When the "USER" LED is turned on . . . . . . . 12-16
[U]
Universal model QCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-38
[W]
Weight
Base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
CPU module . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3,4-7,4-11,4-15,4-20
Extension cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3,5-5
Wiring
Wiring of extension cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Wiring of I/O equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Wiring of I/O module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Wiring to power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Wiring of I/O module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Index - 4
Warranty
Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product.
1. Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range
If any faults or defects (hereinafter "Failure") found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the
product within the gratis warranty term, the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or
Mitsubishi Service Company.
However, if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location, expenses to send an engineer will be
solely at the customer's discretion. Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re-commissioning,
maintenance, or testing on-site that involves replacement of the failed module.
[Gratis Warranty Term]
The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated
place.
Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi, the maximum distribution period shall be six (6) months,
and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen (18) months. The gratis warranty term of
repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs.
[Gratis Warranty Range]
(1) The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state, usage methods and usage environment, etc.,
which follow the conditions and precautions, etc., given in the instruction manual, user's manual and caution
labels on the product.
(2) Even within the gratis warranty term, repairs shall be charged for in the following cases.
1. Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling, carelessness or negligence by the user. Failure
caused by the user's hardware or software design.
2. Failure caused by unapproved modifications, etc., to the product by the user.
3. When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user's device, Failure that could have been avoided if
functions or structures, judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user's device is subject to or
as necessary by industry standards, had been provided.
4. Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts (battery, backlight, fuse, etc.) designated in the
instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced.
5. Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages, and Failure caused by force
majeure such as earthquakes, lightning, wind and water damage.
6. Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from
Mitsubishi.
7. Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user.
2. Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production
(1) Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven (7) years after production of the product is
discontinued.
Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins, etc.
(2) Product supply (including repair parts) is not available after production is discontinued.
3. Overseas service
Overseas, repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi's local overseas FA Center. Note that the repair conditions at
each FA Center may differ.
4. Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability
Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any
cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi, loss in opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user by Failures
of Mitsubishi products, special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not , compensation for
accidents, and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products, replacement by the user,
maintenance of on-site equipment, start-up test run and other tasks.
5. Changes in product specifications
The specifications given in the catalogs, manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice.
6. Product application
(1) In using the Mitsubishi MELSEC programmable controller, the usage conditions shall be that the application will
not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the programmable controller device,
and that backup and fail-safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or
fault.
(2) The Mitsubishi programmable controller has been designed and manufactured for applications in general
industries, etc. Thus, applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and
other power plants operated by respective power companies, and applications in which a special quality
assurance system is required, such as for Railway companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded
from the programmable controller applications.
In addition, applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected, such as in aircraft,
medical applications, incineration and fuel devices, manned transportation, equipment for recreation and
amusement, and safety devices, shall also be excluded from the programmable controller range of
applications.
However, in certain cases, some applications may be possible, providing the user consults their local
Mitsubishi representative outlining the special requirements of the project, and providing that all parties
concerned agree to the special circumstances, solely at the users discretion.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and other countries.
Pentium is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation.
All other company names and product names used in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective companies.
SH(NA)-080483ENG-M

Q 01 Cpu

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Q 01 Cpu

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

(Always read these instructions before using this equipment.)

DANGER Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,

Q series module AnS/A series module

Do not directly touch the module's conductive parts or electronic components.

Tighten the terminal screws with the specified torque.

Install our programmable controller in a control panel for use.

Correctly connect the battery.

Do not disassemble or modify the modules.

Do not drop or give an impact to the battery mounted to the module.

Section11.3.1 11.3.2, Section11.3.2 11.3.3, Section11.3.3 11.3.4,

Japanese Manual Version SH-080472-N

C 2004 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

CHAPTER2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 - 1 to 2 - 47

CHAPTER3 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS 3 - 1 to 3 - 2

CHAPTER4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS OF THE CPU MODULE 4 - 1 to 4 - 44

CHAPTER5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE 5 - 1 to 5 - 30

CHAPTER6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE 6 - 1 to 6 - 21

CHAPTER7 MEMORY CARD AND BATTERY 7 - 1 to 7 - 18

CHAPTER8 CPU MODULE START-UP PROCEDURES 8 - 1 to 8 - 3

CHAPTER10 LOADING AND INSTALLATION 10 - 1 to 10 - 44

CHAPTER11 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 11 - 1 to 11 - 36

CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING 12 - 1 to 12 - 362

APPENDICES App- 1 to App - 38

INDEX Index- 1 to Index- 4

CHAPTER2 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION

CHAPTER3 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS

CHAPTER4 I/O NUMBER ASSIGNMENT

CHAPTER5 MEMORIES AND FILES HANDLED BY CPU MODULE

CHAPTER7 COMMUNICATION USING BUILT-IN ETHERNET PORTS OF CPU MODULE

CHAPTER8 COMMUNICATION WITH INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULE

CHAPTER10 DEVICE EXPLANATION

CHAPTER11 CPU MODULE PROCESSING TIME

CHAPTER12 PROCEDURE FOR WRITING PROGRAM TO CPU MODULE

CHAPTER2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

CHAPTER3 CONCEPT FOR MULTIPLE CPU SYSTEM

CHAPTER4 COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN CPU MODULES

CHAPTER5 PROCESSING TIME OF QCPU IN MULTIPLE CPU SYSTEM

CHAPTER6 PARAMETER ADDED FOR MULTIPLE CPU SYSTEM

CHAPTER7 PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF AnS/A SERIES MODULE

CHAPTER8 STARTING UP THE MULTIPLE CPU SYSTEM

CHAPTER2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

CHAPTER3 TRACKING CABLE

CHAPTER4 PROCEDURE FOR STARTING UP A REDUNDANT SYSTEM

CHAPTER5 REDUNDANT SYSTEM FUNCTIONS

CHAPTER6 REDUNDANT SYSTEM NETWORKS

CHAPTER7 PROGRAMMING CAUTIONS

The following manuals are also related to this product.

(1) Common to CPU modules

(2) Basic model QCPU

(4) Process CPU

(5) Redundant CPU

CPU modules requiring precautions Reference destination Chapter heading

Precautions Section title

This manual is prepared for users to understand the hardware specifica-

The manual is classified roughly into three sections as shown below.

2) Chapters 3 to 7 Describe the general specifications indicating the operating

3) Chapters 8 to 12 Describe the overall maintenance such as the installation of the

Refer to the following manual for the multiple CPU system.

Refer to the following manual for the redundant system.

Generic Term/Abbreviation Description

Precautions for first use of Q series CPU module